0-76150-BB1750C-21 Geno Installation Manual (1) Compressed

Turbogenerator Noor Energy 1 (PT1) | EG000425
Installation Manual
Installation Manual
Project name Noor Energy 1 (PT1)
Generator type SGen5-100A-2P

Copyright © Siemens AG 2020 – All Rights Resereved
Two-Pole Turbogenerator
with Directly Air-Cooled Rotor
and Indirectly Air-Cooled Stator Winding
Order no. 3000021389

Machine no. EG000425
Project ID FERT00648816
Siemens document no. DPSDES-00002932 en
US and EU Export Controls
Technology Classification: ECCN: EAR99 AL: N US-Content: No
This document is subject to national export control regulations. If US-Content is marked “Yes” then US reexport regula-
tions apply. Diversion contrary to those regulations is prohibited. In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must
be contacted.
Dieses Dokument unterliegt nationalen Exportkontrollbestimmungen. Falls US-Content mit "Yes" gekennzeichnet ist,
sind die US Reexport Bestimmungen anzuwenden. Eine Weitergabe entgegen dieser Bestimmungen ist verboten.
Im Zweifelsfall kontaktieren Sie Ihre ECC Abteilung.
Original manual
Turbogenerator | Installation Manual Prepared: Zwi 02-2020

Index: A (first issue) | 02-2020 Approved: Schü 02-2020
Turbogenerator Installation Manual
Contents
Title-Page .......................................................................................................... 4.7-2001-EG000425 0220
Table of Contents .............................................................................................. 4.7-2002-EG000425 /1...3 0220
1.0. General ................................................................................................ 4.7-2010-0001 0900
2.0 General Safety Instructions .............................................................. 4.0-0100-0101 /1...10 1115
3.0. Generator Preinstallation .................................................................. 4.7-2100-EG000425 /1...4 0220
4.0. Generator Installation

Generator Installation ........................................................................... 4.7-2500-EG000425 /1…109 0220
5.0. Measuring Charts

Generator Assembly Records – EG000425 ........................................ 9 sh. 0220
Copyright © Siemens AG 2020 – All Rights Reserved
6.0. General Handling Guidelines

Transport, Receipt and Storage ........................................................... 4.7-1001-0005 /1...6 0617
Cleaning of Machine Parts / Paint Coatings ........................................ 4.7-1002-0002 0210
Bolt Tightening Torques ....................................................................... 4.7-1003-0003 /1...4 0210
Miscellaneous Aid ................................................................................ 4.7-1004-0002 /1...4 0210
Inspection of Foundation and Setting out of Machine Axes ................ 4.7-1006-0002 /1...4 0210
Alignment of Turbine – Generator Units .............................................. 4.7-1009-0003 /1...11 0317
Insulation Resistance Measurements on Rotor an Exciter Windings .. 4.7-1010-0006 1215
Insulation Resistance Measurements on Stator Windings .................. 4.7-1011-0004 1215
Drying the Windings ............................................................................. 4.7-1012-0001 0900
Dismounting / Mounting of Rotor using Crane ..................................... 4.5-9913-0102 /1...19 0114
Attaching the Generator ....................................................................... 4.7-1014-0001 0701
Air Baffle Ring Mounting and Dismounting (with special Key) ............. 4.5-9940-0001 0913
Securing the Screw Connection at Air Baffle Ring (new Bolts) ........... 4.7-2400-0101 0614
Blower Blade Safety Lock (with Pins) .................................................. 4.7-2407-0001 0310
Adjustment of the Gaps of the Stator Core End Stops ........................ 4.5-0040-0003 0409
Description of the Alignment Procedure after First Installation............ 4.7-1016-EG000425 /1...5 0220
7.0. Manufacturing Specifications

Anchoring and Grouting of the Generator Base Frame ....................... FV 12-011 0613
Installation and Grouting of Through Anchor Bolts
in Concrete Foundations ...................................................................... FV 12-010 0409
Through Anchor Bolts Pre-stressing and
Elongation Measurement ..................................................................... FV 12-012 0409
Technical Ref. Sheet 0204 Pagel-Pre-Mixed-Grout ............................ 2 sh. 0816
Siemens AG 4.7-2002-EG000425 /1
Energy Sector 0220en
8.0. Bearings
Radial Plain Bearings – Technical Data .............................................. 4.1-3501-EG000425 0220
Generator Bearings – Installation & Operating Instr. RENK 35 ........... 4.1-5112-0001 /1...38 0602
Drawing Bearing TE* | EE* – Tightening Torques 35 .......................... DPPPG-00001223 0712
Drawing Bearing TE* – RENK 35 ........................................................ DPPPG-70190391 0919
Drawing Bearing EE* – RENK 35 ........................................................ DPPPG-70190394 0919
Drawing + Part List Oil Inlet TE* | EE* ................................................. 2-3327-421057 /1...2 1105
Drawing + Part List Hydrostatic Oil ...................................................... 2-3328-406677 /1...2 0506
9.0. Neutral Point Cubicle

Neutral Point Cubicle – Maintenance Book ......................................... 4.1-3710-EG000425 /1...40 1119
Neutral Point Cubicle – Outline Drawing & Single Line Diagram ........ DPPPG-70184084 /1...4 1219
10.0. Cooling System

Cooling Element – Installation, Operation & Maintenance Instruct. .... 4.1-4103-0003 /1...30 1017
Cooling Element – Drawing ................................................................. 1 sh. 1119
Cooling Element – Lifting Drawing ....................................................... 1 sh. 1119
Cooling System – Side Mounting Installation & Maintenance Guide... 4.1-4502-0102 /1…18 0214
Cooler Cover General Drawing ............................................................ DPPPG – 70189302 /1…2 0819
Cooler Cover ........................................................................................ DPPPG – 70189303 0819
Cooler Venting and Draining Pipes ...................................................... DPPPG – 70169056 0918
11.0. Excitation System (Brush Gear)

Static Excitation System..........................................................................4.1-9000-0003 1196
Brush Holder ...........................................................................................4.1-3379-0003 1196
Brush Complement .................................................................................4.1-3377-EG000425 0220
12.0. Rotor Grounding System

Arrangement of plug-in brush holder ................................................... 4.1-8351-0003 0411
13.0. Vibration Monitoring

Shaft Vibration – 3300 XL Proximity Transducer System .................... 4.1-8636-0005 /1...98 0617
14.0. Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................. 52 sh. 0220
15.0. Generator Checklist (2-Pole Generator) for Readiness Reviews

Checklist ............................................................................................... 10 sh. 1215
Appendix for Checklist – Insulation Resistance Test ........................... 2 sh. 0415
Siemens AG 4.7-2002-EG000425 /2
16.0. Drawings
Generator Outline Drawing ............................................................................ DPPPG – 70174817 /001
Outline Drawing Text ...................................................................................... DPPPG – 70174818
Rotor Shaft Data for Calculation .................................................................... DPPPG – 70175650
Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances ................................................................ DPPPG – 70191559
Generator Shop Final Assembly .................................................................... DPPPG – 70194303
Stator Assembly ............................................................................................. DPPPG – 70182745 /001
Assembly Instruction for Flexible Link Installation ......................................... 1-2570 – 503923
Bushing Assembly .......................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190058
Main Current Bracket ..................................................................................... DPPPG – 70073000
Neutral Point Connection ............................................................................... DPPPG – 70188684
Bearing TE* | EE* - Tightening Torques ........................................................ DPPPG – 00001223
Bearing TE* .................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190391
Bearing EE* .................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190394
Shaft Bushing Assembly ................................................................................ DPPPG – 70147168
Outer Air Seal Assembly ................................................................................ DPPPG – 70024747
Air Baffle Ring ................................................................................................ DPPPG – 70040510
Transport and Lifting Points – Enclosure ....................................................... DPPPG – 70116284
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /001
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /002
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /003

Extra Cover EE* ............................................................................................. DPPPG – 70186487
Extra Cover TE* ............................................................................................. DPPPG – 70186488
Cooler Cover General Drawing ...................................................................... DPPPG – 70189302 /001
Cooler Cover .................................................................................................. DPPPG – 70189303
Cooler Venting and Draining Pipes ................................................................ DPPPG – 70169056
Brush Carrier Complete ................................................................................. DPPPG – 00001424
Brush Complement ........................................................................................ DPPPG – 70025191
Adapter Exciter Current Cable .................................................................................. 3 – 273657
Assembly Cover Plates .................................................................................. 2-5815 – 263436
Assembly Earth Brush.................................................................................... DPPPG – 70167687
Anchoring ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70086152
Grounding Connections ................................................................................. DPPPG – 70055933
Shipping Brace Stator .................................................................................... DPPPG – 70186970
Shipping and Earthquake Precaution Stator Frame ...................................... DPPPG – 70008886
Rotor Assembly – Slide Plate......................................................................... DPPPG – 70188440
Rotor Assembly – Sliding Shoe...................................................................... DPPPG – 70188421
Rotor Assembly – Sliding Pedestal ................................................................ DPPPG – 70188420
Rotor Assembly – Block for put down Rotor Body ......................................... DPPPG – 70051058
TE* | EE* - (Turbine End | Exciter End)
Siemens AG 4.7-2002-EG000425 /3
Turbogenerator
Description
General
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator General
Installation
Important!
The information, recommendations, descriptions, illustrations, drawings, warnings, cautions, and notes
contained in these manual are based on Siemens experience and judgment with respect to generator
operation and maintenance. Illustrations and drawings furnished in the descriptions are provided for general
reference purposes only and are not designed to replace, modify, or supplement actual engineering drawing
releases associated with this unit. In all cases, users must refer to the latest engineering drawing revision prior
to planning installation, operation and maintenance activities of any nature.
This information should not be considered as all inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is
required, Siemens should be consulted.
In no event will Siemens be responsible to the user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or
otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not
limited to damage to or loss of use of equipment, plant, or power system; cost of capital; loss of profits or
revenues; cost of replacement power- additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities or claims
against the user by its customers resulting from use of the information, recommendations, descriptions,
illustrations, drawings, warnings, cautions, and notes contained herein.
The tools, devices and aids specified in the following descriptions are not part of the delivery scope and must
be appropriated by the installation contractor. All employments must be implemented by specialists.
Siemens AG 4.7-2010-0001
Turbogenerator
Description
General Safety Instructions

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Safety Instructions
Contents
1 General ......................................................................................................... 2
2 Warnings ....................................................................................................... 2
3 Proper Usage of the Generator ....................................................................... 3
4 General Organization ..................................................................................... 3
5 Personnel ...................................................................................................... 4
6 Lifting and Working Posture ........................................................................... 5
7 Modifications to Generator ............................................................................ 5
8 Spare Parts and Special Tools ......................................................................... 5
Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - All Rights Reserved
9 Environment Protection and Waste Disposal ................................................... 6

10 Safety Instructions Regarding Special Operating Phases.................................. 6
10.1 Shipment, Transport and Storage .......................................................... 6
10.2 Erection ................................................................................................ 7
10.3 Start-up ................................................................................................ 7
10.4 Operation ............................................................................................. 7
10.5 Maintenance in Operation ..................................................................... 8
10.6 Maintenance at Standstill ...................................................................... 8
10.7 Shutdown ............................................................................................. 9
11 Special Hazards .............................................................................................. 9
11.1 Electric Current ..................................................................................... 9
11.2 Electromagnetic Fields ........................................................................ 10
11.3 Heat .................................................................................................... 10
11.4 Noise .................................................................................................. 10
Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

Chapter 1: General Information Page 1 of 10
Safety Instructions
1 General
This section contains the relevant information necessary for safe operation of a
generator.
Although the generator is designed to state-of-the-art technology and complies
with the applicable safety standards, hazards which could result in personal injury
to the user or third parties and damage to the generator or other property cannot
be ruled out completely.
Please read this section carefully and make sure that you comply with the instruc-
tions in order to safeguard against personal injury and damage to the generator.
Please note that the safety information in this section is general and applies to dif-
ferent types of generators. In the individual chapters of this document, you will find
safety notes that must be obeyed absolutely, for your own safety, to protect other
people and to avoid damage to property.
Apart from the safety instructions in this section observe all indications on safety in
the supplier documentations included in this manual.
2 Warnings
The operating instructions use a range of key words and symbols to identify infor-
mation which is of particular importance. The key words Danger, Warning, Cau-
tion and Notice give you a better idea of the significance of the warning notices:
DANGER … indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING … indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION … indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE … indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
HINWEIS Additionally, the signal word NOTE is used to identify any information relevant to
ensure maximum generator efficiency.
Such kind of information can be complemented by the pictograph Information.
In order to emphasize the above mentioned warning notices, these are used to-
gether with pictographs. In this manual you will find the following hazard warning
signs, mandatory signs and prohibition signs, which in each case are followed by an
explanatory remark.

Safety Instructions
Warning signs
A black graphical symbol inside a yellow triangle with a black triangular band de-
fines a safety sign that indicates a hazard. For example:
General warning sign
Warning: Electricity
Prohibition signs
A black graphical symbol inside a red circular band with a red diagonal bar defines a
safety sign that indicates that an action shall not be taken or shall be stopped.
For example:
General prohibition sign
No access
Mandatory signs
A white graphical symbol inside a blue circle defines a safety sign that indicates that
an action shall be taken to avoid a hazard. For example:
General mandatory sign
Ear protection required
3 Proper Usage of the Generator
The function of a generator is to convert rotating mechanical energy to electrical

energy. Alternatively generators are used as synchronous condensers.
To ensure normal and trouble-free operation of the generator, it is necessary to

comply with the operating instructions as well as the inspection and maintenance
intervals specified for the generator.
Siemens AG do not accept any liability for any damage which may occur as a result
of use of the generator for any other purpose or noncompliance with the aforemen-
tioned operating instructions or inspection and maintenance intervals.
4 General Organization
The following instructions must be followed to ensure safe and reliable operation:
Based on this technical documentation shift procedures must be prepared with
additional information regarding responsibilities, work organization and work-
flows.

Safety Instructions
Any personnel working on the generator and its auxiliary systems must be famil-
iarized with the operating instructions and shift procedures and in particular with
the safety instructions and regulations before starting work. This particularly ap-
plies to personnel such as maintenance personnel who do not work on the gen-
erator on a regular basis.
In addition to the operating instructions, the general legal provisions and other
regulations for employment protection, the prevention of accidents and fire as
well as the protection of the environment must be observed. The operator is re-
sponsible for the implantation and the correct adherence of the staff. Protective
apparel and equipment must be used.
Note safety data sheet when using hazardous material.
Place signs at the entrance to the operating room of the generator according to
the local legal and employment protection requirements. Every person who en-
ters the operating room must wear personal protective equipment according to
these local requirements and the requirements stated in this documentation.
In case that equipment, protection systems or instrumentation and control com-

ponents are damaged or defect, the generator must be handled as specified
(shut down if necessary) and the supervisor must be informed. In some cases lo-
cal authorities must be informed as well. The local authorities can conduct ex-
traordinary examinations in an event of damage in some individual cases.
It must be ensured that work on oil carrying systems and piping must be con-
ducted after emptying. Switch off procedures must be strictly adhered. Special
procedures for environmental and employment protection must also be consid-
ered.
If work is done on several systems at the same time, it must be coordinated in a

way to avoid mutual endangering.
During start-up and synchronization of the generator only authorized staff with
defined task is allowed to stay within the machine room.
Only use suitable and faultless climbing equipment (e.g. ladders) for work in
larger heights. Scaffolding can be necessary and further safeguards like anti-fall
guard. Do not step on armatures, thermometers and the bearing.
The use of pipes, cables, terminal boxes and fittings as a kick or hold is inadmis-
sible. Parts get visible or invisible damages which may lead to a failure beside the
danger of injury.
The operating instructions must always be kept on hand.
NOTE
We recommend engaging the support and services of your local Siemens ser-
vice center for all planning, installation, commissioning and maintenance
work.
5 Personnel
With regard to personnel working on the generator, compliance must be ensured

with the following:
Work on the generator and its auxiliary systems is to be performed by authorized
personnel only. Activities and associated responsibilities are to be clearly defined
for the personnel.

Safety Instructions
Staff must be trained on the basis of the manufacturer technical documentation.

They must be physically and mentally suitable for the tasks and must have the
required expertise. Staff must be able to carry out maintenance measures inde-
pendently and to take decisions in the case of disturbances or deviations from
the stated operation condition independently. Depending on local regulations it
can be required that these people have a certification from special trainings.
Personnel requiring or undergoing training must only be allowed to perform

work on the generator or its auxiliary systems under the constant supervision of
an appropriately qualified member of staff.
Work on the electrical systems of the generator may only be performed by elec-
trical engineers or by suitably qualified personnel under the supervision of an
electrical engineer in compliance with the relevant electrical engineering stand-
ards.
The staff has to avoid dangers or reduce them as far as possible. This also con-
tains the self-control of completed work. In addition, it has to be checked before
work execution whether all necessary safety measures are taken.
The operator’s position during operation of the generator is the control room.
Abidance near the generator is only permitted for inspection and attendance
purposes which are required for the operation.
6 Lifting and Working Posture

When working on the generator make sure to comply with the local rules regarding
lifting and working posture. All work shall be planned in order to be executed in a
safe and healthy manor.
Lifting that can be a risk to health and safety shall be avoided. The usage of lifting
equipment should be preferred for all lifting workings at the generator. This applies
to all generator equipment such as filters, manhole covers etc. Observe the local
requirements regarding the recommended lifting weight and carrying distance.
7 Modifications to Generator
Do not carry out any modifications to the generator or perform any other work on
the generator which might impair safety. Any changes must be approved by Sie-
mens AG prior to their implementation.
8 Spare Parts and Special Tools
Spare parts and special tools must comply with the technical standards set forth by
Siemens and other suppliers. Compliance with the aforementioned standards is only
ensured if original parts and tools are used. Special tools should only be used as
intended by Siemens or the supplier.
Spare parts and special tools must be stored in a way to ensure quality and func-
tionality. Further requirements from the supplier documentations must be fulfilled
including the guarantee conditions. The spare parts and special tools should be
checked at regular intervals.
Do not remove any blocks, braces, anchors and/or cushions used during shipment
until just before erection or installation of spare parts.

Safety Instructions
9 Environment Protection and Waste Disposal
Waste products of any kind (e.g. lubricants) must be disposed of in compliance with
the applicable waste disposal regulations. An environmentally friendly disposal
(recycling e.g.) has to be striven.
For the de-installation and professional disposal of the generator experts of Sie-
mens AG have to be contacted.
10 Safety Instructions Regarding Special Operating Phases
10.1 Shipment, Transport and Storage

The following safety instructions apply during generator shipment, transport and
storage:
WARNING
Suspended load
Falling loads may cause injury to persons.
Keep safe distance. Place barriers if necessary.
Only use specified load attachment points. Only use suitable lifting equipment.
The lifting equipment must be in good condition and have a sufficient load carry-
ing capacity.
Refer to the shipping documents for information about the dimensions and
weights of generator components.
For transportation of heavy machine parts in buildings a sufficient load-capacity

of the building has to be guaranteed along the complete transport route as well
as at the operation or stock location.
Prevent generator rotor from rope-induced damage by using suitable cushions at

load attachment points. Hitch ropes to fully extracted bollards only. Insert and
lock bollards during transport.
Carefully check components for evidence of damage, moisture and corrosion on

arrival. Notify manufacturer in written and photo documentation of any damage.
If transport locks must be removed for the purpose of control of the components,
these guards must be reattached and removed just before installation of the
components.
Adhere to all measures for protection during transport described in this manual.
Take appropriate measures to protect and preserve the generator at standstill.

Observe the storage instructions in this manual.
Fill in the generator packing checklist for long time storage, if necessary. Storage
goods must be checked monthly.

Safety Instructions
10.2 Erection
The following safety instructions apply during generator erection:
CAUTION
Crushing hazard
These may cause injury to persons.
Installation, raising, transporting of heavy objects only with the help of hoists.
Before erection remove protective coating and any other protective material from
components using a suitable cleaning agent. Observe environmental regulations.
Check the generator for foreign objects. Even minimal-size metallic particles left
inside after work on the generator can lead to large-scale damage during genera-
tor operation.
If it is necessary to open parts of the system the openings must be covered. The
used covers must be sufficiently exact and stable to prevent a contamination
with foreign material.
Use only suitable lubrication and seal material for the respective purpose. They
must comply with the later operation conditions.
10.3 Start-up
The following safety instructions apply during generator start-up:
WARNING
Rotating components
Before commencing with generator start-up ensure that personnel are not ex-
posed to any hazards. The start-up sequence must be adhered.
All mechanical and hydraulic components as well as the generator protection

system must be checked with regard to function and settings.
Before start-up/ re-commissioning all components must be checked for safety

and for recognizable defects. Defective parts and systems must be repaired be-
fore start-up.
Obligatory documentation requirement: Prepare start-up record. Record all oper-

ating data after allowing sufficient time for steady-state conditions to be estab-
lished.
10.4 Operation
The following safety instructions apply during generator operation:
CAUTION
Hot surface.
Parts of the generator can be very hot and may cause serious burns.
Do not touch.

Safety Instructions
CAUTION
Operating noise of generator may damage hearing.
Wear ear plugs when staying next to the operating generator.
Any irregular events which occur during operation must be reported directly, and
the generator shut down if necessary.
In the event of loss of control voltage the generator must be shut down immedi-
ately.
Only qualified staff with a specified work order should stay near the running
generator.
Obligatory documentation requirement: Record requisite checks during genera-

tor operation.
10.5 Maintenance in Operation

The following safety instructions apply during generator maintenance in operation:
WARNING
Rotating components
Ensure compliance with the scope of work set forth in the maintenance instruc-
tions.
Do not remove any safeguard during operation.
Operating personnel must be notified before starting any maintenance work.

Appoint a suitably qualified supervisor.
Empty pockets before starting maintenance work. Deposit jewelry and other
metal objects. Record all tools used in a list and check that tools have been com-
pletely removed from generator when finishing work.
10.6 Maintenance at Standstill

The following safety instructions apply during generator maintenance at standstill:
WARNING
Danger of serious injuries and substantial material damage.
The machine must be electrically disconnected.
Identify all additional dangerous sources of energy e.g. compressed air, hydraulic
systems, water.
The machine must be secured against being switched on accidentally.
A notice must be attached in the control room that work is in progress.
Parts which are undergoing inspection or repair activities must be de-energized.

Disconnected parts must be checked for voltage, grounded and short-circuiting.
Neighboring energized parts must be isolated and covered.
It must be ensured that the generator cannot be switched on if somebody is

working on it. It has to be made sure that no one stays in an area where it could
come to injuries during start-up process.

Safety Instructions
The removal of safeguards must be avoided. It is only allowed when it is required

for the work and does not endanger the staff. Removed safeguards must be re
installed and checked just after the work task.
Switch pressurized systems off before starting to work on it. Take care of ram
pressures. Solving screw connections carefully.
Disconnect cable connections to electrical devices and ground terminals before

lifting any cover. Remove electrical devices before dismantling components.
Check the generator for foreign objects. Even minimal-size metallic particles left
inside after work on the generator can lead to large-scale damage during genera-
tor operation.
10.7 Shutdown
The following safety instructions apply during generator shutdown:
WARNING
Rotating components
These may cause severe injury to persons.
Ensure that rotor has coasted down.
Do not remove any guards until generator has come to a full standstill.
Obligatory documentation requirement: Record requisite checks during and fol-

lowing generator shutdown.
11 Special Hazards
11.1 Electric Current

Ensure compliance with the following instructions:
DANGER
Electrical hazard
Touching electrical equipment during operation can result in damage to property,
serious injury and even death.
Do not remove any safeguards or open cabinets during operation.
Work on the electrical systems of the generator may only be performed by elec-
trical engineers or by suitably qualified personnel under the supervision of an
electrical engineer in compliance with the relevant electrical engineering stand-
ards.
Local requirements regarding work on electrical installations must be strictly

adhered to.
For all work on electrical installations observe the five safety rules:
1 Disconnect from the mains
2 Secure against reconnection
3 Verify that the system is dead
4 Carry out earthing and short circuiting
5 Provide protection from adjacent live parts.

Safety Instructions
During operation very high voltages occur, which can remain in existence for
long periods of time even after switching off due to remanence or discharge of
capacitors. As long as the generator is still rotating it carries a dangerous voltage.
Do not touch the equipment before all 5 rules are fulfilled.
Regularly check the electrical equipment, grounding system and isolation levels.
Immediately repair any defects.
11.2 Electromagnetic Fields
WARNING
Electromagnetic fields are generated during the operation of the generator.
Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices. This could lead to mal-
function of such devices.
Therefore persons with active medical implants must not enter these areas.
The system operator must put appropriate measures, markings and warnings into
effect so that the personnel working there are sufficiently protected against pos-
sible injury. Also observe the local requirements.
11.3 Heat
WARNING
Hot surface
Parts of the generator can be very hot and may cause serious burns.
Do not touch.
The surface of oil lines, covers etc. become hot during operation.
The surface of anti-condensation heaters switched on automatically during

standstill becomes hot.
11.4 Noise
CAUTION
Operating noise of generator may damage hearing.
Wear ear plugs when staying next to the operating generator.
The generator may produce noise levels of approx. 90 dB(A) depending on model
and type. In the long term such noise levels may result in damage to hearing.

Turbogenerator
Description
Generator Preinstallation
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Generator Preinstallation
Installation
General
This instruction leaflet applies to the Siemens air cooled generator that is Total Enclosed Water Air Cooled
(TEWAC) and powered by a turbine.
Contents
The preinstallation instructions give directions for handling the generator from arrival to erection.
Handling
The pre-assembled generator base frame is shipped with the stator core (plate pack), the TE* /EE* bearing
housings, the TE* /EE* air baffle rings, the TE* /EE* shaft bushings and the brush carrier in place.
Because of shipping size restrictions, the generator rotor, the two main current brackets, the enclosure
and extra covers, the neutral point cubicle and the cooling unit are shipped separately for field assembly.
Receiving the Generator Base Frame

When the generator base frame with mounted parts arrives at the site, the purchaser should first check the
shipping lists and verify shipment completeness. Make this verification immediately to avoid installation
delays. Examine the equipment for shipping damage. File any damage claims with the carrier promptly.
Receiving the Generator Rotor

When the generator rotor arrives at the site, the rotor should be checked for damage in shipment. If there is
any damaging, the freight agent should be notified at once. Once this has been accomplished, the rotor
transport box is ready to be unloaded. The rotor installation will start after the generator base frame is lifted
and installed on the in-site concrete foundation.
Receiving the upper and lower Main Current Bracket

When the main current brackets arrive at the site, the parts should be checked for damage in shipment. If
there are any damaged parts, the freight agent should be notified at once. Once this has been accomplished,
the parts are ready to be unloaded.
Receiving the Cooling Unit

When the cooling unit arrives at the site, the cooler unit should be checked for damage in shipment. If there is
any damaging, the freight agent should be notified at once. Once this has been accomplished, the cooler unit
is ready to be unloaded. The cooling unit consists of the coolers and the cover. The cooling unit must install on
the enclosure. Preinstalled internal electrical wiring must be connected at site. For assembly and annex of the
cooling unit see also the manufacturer’s instructions.
The cooling unit prevents together with the enclosure a penetration of dirt, water and moisture. Therefore, it is
important to set on the cooling unit as fast as possible. Meanwhile, all openings in the enclosure are to lock
with right measures (for example with tarpaulin).
Receiving the Enclosure and extra covers

When the enclosure with the extra covers arrives at the site, the parts should be checked for damage in
shipment. If there is any damaged material, the freight agent should be notified at once. Once this has been
accomplished, the enclosure and the extra covers are ready to be unloaded.
NOTE
Use a closed lifting system to lift the enclosure. Fix the rope on the lifting lugs in that way
that the rope are not spread an angle of over 90°.
CAUTION
Separate the extra cover’s, if present and mounted, from the enclosure. When you divide
the complete enclosure (enclosure and extra cover’s), take care not to damage the rubber
seals at parting line. Do not allow enclosure parts to stand in mud or water.
Siemens AG 4.7-2100-EG000425 /1 of 4
Installation
Lifting the Generator Assembly

Use the lifting trunnions, which are located two on each side of the generator base frame, for lifting the
assembled generator base frame. These lift points are located below the generator assembly center of gravity;
they are accessible through slits provided in the protective tarpaulin. Each lift trunnion should be supported by
a cable looped onto a single crane hook for stable lifting.
WARNING
The user is responsible for selecting the correct lifting equipment and for using it both
properly and safely. Improper or unsafe equipment or its misuse in unsafe configurations
could cause a load to shift or drop. Serious injury, death, or equipment damage could
result.
Perform the following procedure to move the generator:

- Survey the proposed route from the point of relocation to the generator foundation for any obstructions
that may pose a problem in movement.
NOTE
To lift the generator, the lifting trunnions must be pulled out completely without damaging the
packaging or the components
- Revering to the drawing Method of Shipping use lifting beams.
NOTE
Do not remove any shipping bracing until just before moving the generator.
- Remove only the bracing required to unload the equipment from the shipping unit.
NOTE
It is recommended that the unit loaded with the generator not be driven on the in-site concrete
foundation.
- Make a positive check to see that the generator is securely anchored to the car before moving the car.
Loading the Generator Base Frame

The proper rigging, jacking and sliding procedures must be used to set the generator base frame on the
foundation. After moving the generator base frame alongside the foundation to approximately the correct
transverse centerline, use the following procedures as a guide to set the generator base frame on the
foundation:
- Before loading the generator base frame on the foundation, check all threaded bolt holes to facilitate
installation of jack screws and other bolts.
- Clean and de-burr, where necessary, the generator base frame and bearing plates and shims.
NOTE
Lifting, of the generator base frame shall be done at the trunnions to adjust the position of the
generator base frame on the foundation with jack screws. Provide protection to the generator
base frame to prevent, damages while rigging and moving.
- Assemble the lower main current bracket with high-voltage bushings below the generator base frame,
before placing the generator on the on-site concrete foundation.
Siemens AG 4.7-2100-EG000425 /2 of 4
Installation
- Put the anchor bolts into the holes and thread them into the bore holes of the generator base frame with
setting on the generator or mount the anchor bolts on the generator before loading the generator on the
on-site concrete foundation.
- Placing the generator on the on-site concrete foundation on the primary bearing plates.
- Remove the pre-assembled mounting parts from the generator base frame before rotor installation.
- Install the generator rotor and the bearings.
- Install the air baffle rings, shaft bushings and the brush carrier.
- Make preliminary adjustment of the generator to the turbine. Use set screws on the generator base frame
and hydraulic cylinders for making the vertical and lateral moves.
- Make the alignment of the generator to the turbine.
Final Assembly of Generator

Following alignment of the generator, the following steps should be completed:
- Install the enclosure.

- Install the upper main bracket with high-voltage bushings.
- Install the neutral point cubicle, current transformers and associated conduits and wiring in accordance
with the neutral point cubicle assembly drawing on the enclosure.
- Install the cooler unit and water supply pipes.
- Install vibrometer pick-ups, proximeters, bearing metal temperature sensor wiring and all associated
conduit and wiring in accordance with the Generator Auxiliary Wiring Diagrams.
- Install the oil supply pipes.
Storage
General
During storage, the generator requires special protection against the elements because it is not ventilated and
warmed by operation. Appropriate storage requires:
 Exclusion of Contaminants
 Prevention of moisture condensation
 Monitoring to ensure appropriate storage conditions
Exclusion of Contaminants
During storage, the generator requires the complete assembly of the outdoor housings for protection against
dirt and moisture. Shipping limitations prevent attachment of these housings before shipping; instead, special
shipping covers are used to protect the generator. The shipping covers should be replaced by the permanent
housing as soon as possible, because the covers are designed to provide effective protection for only a
normal erection interval.
The generator should be periodically inspected to ensure that insects have not entered the generator. Insects
can cause damage to windings and blockage of ventilation passages.
Siemens AG 4.7-2100-EG000425 /3 of 4
Installation
Prevention of Moisture Condensation

The generator is equipped with space heaters that can keep the temperature several degrees above ambient
under normal conditions. These space heaters must be operated continuously to protect the equipment from
moisture. Use the space heaters at all times, from initial arrival until the generator is put into operation.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove the shipping tarpaulins and to install the permanent housing and
covers before operating the space heaters. Damage to equipment could result.
Monitoring of Storage Conditions

The stator winding embedded RTDs should be connected during storage and shutdown, so that the
temperature of the generator can be monitored. Measured temperatures should be maintained at 10 degrees
above ambient temperature, and should not exceed 167°F (75°C).
Supervision of the generator during storage also includes that insulation resistance measurements are taken
periodically.
The procedure is described in the General Handling Guidelines, Insulation Resistance Measurements. If the
measurements indicate a significant reduction of insulation resistance, begin drying-out procedures. Refer to
the General Handling Guidelines, Drying the Windings.
If the bearing housings are exposed to any unusual environment that could degrade rust prevention, or if any
rusting is noticed around the bearing housings, open the bearing housings and inspect for rust.
Storage of Enclosure
Store the enclosure as follows:
- Store indoor enclosures dry and clean until needed. Close openings with suitable materials e.g. plastic
sheeting.
- Protect the enclosure base frame with rubber sealing from the elements, mud and water. Put the
enclosure on wood.
Storage of Cooler Unit

Store the Cooler unit as follows:
- Store the cooler unit dry and clean until needed into their transport box.
- Protect the cooler unit with rubber sealing/ flange openings from the elements, mud and water. Put the
enclosure on wooden beams.
Siemens AG 4.7-2100-EG000425 /4 of 4
Turbogenerator
Description
Generator Installation
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbine - Generator
Installation Description Project: Noor_Energy_1_(PT1)
Generator Installation Procedure

for 2-Pole Generators
Latest
Date Revisions Name of Reviser Name of Approver
Rev.
A 0220 First Issue Zwicker Schuelke
Siemens AG 4.7-2500-EG000425 / Page 1 of 109

Turbine - Generator
Index:
4.1 Safety precaution for assembling the generator ...................................................9
4.1.1 General ................................................................................................................9
4.1.2 Information for the person responsible for the plant ............................................9
4.1.3 The five safety rules ...........................................................................................10
4.1.4 Qualified personnel ............................................................................................10
4.1.5 Safe handling .....................................................................................................10
4.1.6 Abbreviations and figures in the document ........................................................12
4.2 Requirements for assembling the generator .......................................................13
4.2.1 General inspection of the component parts supplied .........................................13
4.2.2 Checking the load handling attachments ...........................................................14
4.2.3 Lifting and transporting the generator ................................................................14
4.2.4 Removing the anti-corrosion protection .............................................................16
4.2.5 Corrosion and moisture protection of the Interior of the generator ....................17
4.2.6 Measuring Charts and Checklist Information .....................................................17
4.3 Preparing the assembling of the generator base frame......................................18
4.3.1 General ..............................................................................................................18
4.3.2 Preparatory work on the in-site concrete foundation .........................................18

4.3.3 Placing the primary bearing plates and leveling plates ......................................18
4.3.4 Division of the casting area and installation of formwork, if necessary ..............20
4.3.5 Preparing the special foundation bolts ...............................................................21
4.3.6 Assembling the special foundation bolts ............................................................22
4.4 Assembling the lower main current bracket with high-voltage bushings.........23
4.4.1 General ..............................................................................................................23
4.4.2 Assembling the lower main current bracket: Variant 1.......................................23
4.4.3 Assembling the lower main current bracket: Variant 2.......................................24
4.5 Assembling the generator base frame without rotor ..........................................27
4.5.1 General ..............................................................................................................27
4.5.2 Placing the generator base frame on the primary bearing plates ......................27
4.5.3 Assembling the lower anchor plates ..................................................................30
4.5.4 Remove the generator transportation hood .......................................................31
4.5.5 Remove the mounted parts from the generator base frame ..............................32
4.5.6 Assembling the lower flexible links to the high-voltage bushings ......................32
4.5.7 Check the gaps of the end stops for stator core ................................................33
4.6 Assembling the rotor into the stator core ............................................................35
4.6.1 Preparing the slide plate and the sliding shoe ...................................................35
4.6.2 Remove the rotor packing after the transport ....................................................35
4.6.3 Remove the fan blades from the rotor, recommended ......................................35
4.6.4 Assembling the sliding pedestal on the TE* bearing position of the rotor ..........37
4.6.5 Assembling the EE* bearing housing with its bearing shells on the rotor ..........37
4.6.6 Lifting and aligning the rotor in the spirit level ....................................................39
4.6.7 Moving the rotor into the stator using crane.......................................................39
4.6.8 Repositioning the crane hook to the rotor shaft attachment point EE* ..............41
4.6.9 Moving the rotor into the stator using a pulling device .......................................42
4.6.10 Remove the sliding pedestal from the TE* bearing position of the rotor ............42
4.6.11 Assembling the TE* bearing housing with its bearing shells on the rotor ..........44
4.6.12 Remove the sliding shoe in direction TE* ..........................................................45
4.6.13 Assembling the intermediate frame under the TE* bearing housing..................46
4.6.14 Remove the slide plate in direction EE* .............................................................48
4.6.15 Remove the soft gasket pad from the EE* bearing ............................................50
4.6.16 Assembling the bearing covers after the rotor installation .................................51

Turbine - Generator
4.6.17 Checking the air gaps between rotor and stator core ........................................51
4.6.18 Checking the bearing insulation .........................................................................52
4.6.19 Assembling the TE* and EE* fan blades to the rotor, general information ........52
4.7 Assembling the mounted parts .............................................................................54
4.7.1 General ..............................................................................................................54
4.7.2 Assembling the TE* and EE* air baffle rings on the stator walls........................54
4.7.3 Assembling the TE* and EE*shaft bushings on the generator base frame........55
4.7.4 Assembling the outer TE* and EE* air seals on the shaft bushings ..................56
4.8 Alignment of the generator to the turbine ............................................................58
4.8.1 General ..............................................................................................................58
4.8.2 Procedure of generator alignment .....................................................................58
4.8.3 Preparations of generator alignment..................................................................59
4.8.4 Execution of the generator pre-alignment ..........................................................61
4.8.5 Assembling the intermediate shaft, optional ......................................................62
4.8.6 Execution of the generator fine alignment .........................................................62
4.9 Completion of the work for the casting of the generator ....................................64
4.9.1 Casting of special foundation bolts ....................................................................64
4.9.2 Check the generator alignment and realignment, if necessary ..........................64

4.9.3 Preparation for casting the generator base frame .............................................65
4.9.4 Casting the generator base frame and the in-site concrete foundation .............65
4.9.5 Prestressing the special foundation bolts ..........................................................66
4.9.6 Checking the generator alignment and realignment, if necessary .....................67
4.9.7 Checking the bearing insulation .........................................................................68
4.9.8 Securing the special foundation bolts ................................................................69
4.9.9 Assembling the coupling shear pins and Allen® screws ...................................69
4.10 Assembling the enclosure .....................................................................................71
4.10.1 Preparing the enclosure before assembling ......................................................71
4.10.2 Assembling the four cover guides ......................................................................73
4.10.3 Assembling the enclosure on the generator base frame ...................................73
4.10.4 Assembling the fan unit and its ducts on the brush gear system .......................75
4.10.5 Assembling the extra cover EE* to the enclosure ..............................................76
4.11 Assembling the upper main bracket with high-voltage bushings .....................78
4.11.1 General ..............................................................................................................78
4.11.2 Assembling the upper main current bracket on the enclosure ...........................78
4.11.3 Assembling the upper flexible links to the high-voltage bushings ......................78
4.11.4 Assembling the neutral point connections, general information.........................80
4.12 Assembling the neutral point cubicle ...................................................................81
4.12.1 General ..............................................................................................................81
4.12.2 Lifting and mounting the neutral point cubicle on the enclosure ........................81
4.13 Assembling the cooler unit ....................................................................................83
4.13.1 Unloading the case from the transport vehicle...................................................83
4.13.2 Removing the packing material..........................................................................83
4.13.3 Assembling the cooler unit to the enclosure ......................................................86
4.13.4 Assembling the water supply lines on the cooling elements ..............................90
4.13.5 Assembling the venting and draining pipes on the cooling elements ................91
4.13.6 Checking the leakage air filters, general information .........................................91
4.13.7 Assembling the leakage-water sensors and connecting the cabling .................91
4.13.8 Using and closing the manholes, general information .......................................92
4.14 Completion the works for the assembling of the mounted parts.......................93
4.14.1 Assembling the grounding connections .............................................................93

Turbine - Generator
4.14.2 Assembling the oil supply pipes on the TE* and EE* bearing housings ............93
4.15 Oil flushing, general information ..........................................................................95
4.15.1 General ..............................................................................................................95
4.15.2 Treatment of the bearing chambers ...................................................................96
4.15.3 Preparation of the lubricating oil system for oil flushing .....................................96
4.15.4 Flushing oil .........................................................................................................96
4.15.5 Flushing process ................................................................................................97
4.15.6 Remove the bypass pipes after oil flushing, optional .........................................98
4.15.7 Cleaning the bearings and bearing housings, optional ......................................98
4.15.8 Corrosion protection on bearings for longer standstill periods, optional ............99
4.16 Assembling the bearings, general information..................................................100
4.16.1 Assembling the bearing shells and bearing covers..........................................100
4.16.2 Assembling the rigid labyrinth seals, Type 20 and 22......................................101
4.17 Completion the works for the assembling of the bearings...............................103
4.17.1 Assembling the sensors of shafts vibration monitoring ....................................103
4.17.2 Mounting the carbon brushes in the rotor grounding system on TE* ...............104
4.17.3 Connecting the bearing potential cables ..........................................................105
4.18 Assembling the extra cover TE* and the lower cover plates ............................106
4.19 Completion the works for the assembling of the excitation system ...............107
4.19.1 General ............................................................................................................107
4.19.2 Mounting the plug-in brush holders in the brush carrier...................................107
4.19.3 Connecting the excitation cables to the brush carrier ......................................108
4.20 Final check before start up ..................................................................................109

Turbine - Generator
List of Tables:
Table 4.8-1: Maximum tightening torques for different set screw sizes .................................59
Table 4.8-2: Partial tightening torques for special foundation bolts before casting ................63
Table 4.9-1: Tightening torques for different types of foundations and anchor sizes.............67
Table 4.16-1: Tightening torques for bearing shells ...............................................................100
Table 4.16-2: Tightening torques for bearing covers .............................................................101
List of Figures:
Figure 4.2-1: Moisture indicator sealed in transport packing (left) ..........................................13

Figure 4.2-2: Transport box with control window for moisture indicator (right)........................13
Figure 4.2-3: Humidity indicator colors at various degrees of humidity ...................................13
Figure 4.3-1: Primary bearing plate prepared on the in-site concrete foundation ...................19
Figure 4.3-2: Leveling plate prepared on the in-site concrete foundation ...............................19
Figure 4.3-3: Prepared in-site concrete foundation with recess ..............................................20
Figure 4.3-4: Generator base frame with finned bottom areas (left) .......................................21
Figure 4.3-5: Generator base frame areas with flat traversal girder (right) .............................21
Figure 4.3-6: Special foundation bolt hangs provisionally in the anchor hole .........................22
Figure 4.4-1: Generator base frame positioned over the lower main current bracket .............23
Figure 4.4-2: Lower main current bracket placed on two auxiliary H-beams ..........................24
Figure 4.4-3: Generator base frame positioned over the lower main current bracket .............24
Figure 4.4-4: Use threaded rods M10*150mm to guide the lower main current bracket .........25
Figure 4.4-5: Generator is slightly lifted together with the lower main current bracket............25
Figure 4.4-6: Two auxiliary H-beams are removed .................................................................26
Figure 4.4-7: Generator lowered over the in-site concrete foundation ....................................26
Figure 4.5-1: Generator assembly by crane (left)....................................................................28
Figure 4.5-2: Generator is placed on the in-site concrete foundation (right) ...........................28
Figure 4.5-3: Primary bearing plate after placing the generator ..............................................28
Figure 4.5-4: Leveling plate after placing the generator on the primary bearing plates ..........29
Figure 4.5-5: Special foundation bolt and generator base frame ............................................29
Figure 4.5-6: Special foundation bolt installed in the generator base frame ...........................30
Figure 4.5-7: Special foundation bolts with lower anchor plate and DIN nut ...........................31
Figure 4.5-8: Example of generator transportation hood (left) ................................................31
Figure 4.5-9: Lifting lugs on the transportation hood (right) ....................................................31
Figure 4.5-10: Lower flexible links mounted on high-voltage bushings (left).............................32
Figure 4.5-11: Lower flexible links mounted complete (right) ....................................................32
Figure 4.5-12: Details for flexible link connection on the line side (left) ....................................33
Figure 4.5-13: Part list (right) ....................................................................................................33
Figure 4.5-14: Adjustment screws M42 with locking screws (left) .............................................34
Figure 4.5-15: Shipping and earthquake precaution, detail (right) ............................................34
Figure 4.6-1: Prepared slide plate with sliding shoe................................................................35
Figure 4.6-2: Unpacked rotor in the transportation frame .......................................................35
Figure 4.6-3: Depth gauge (left) ..............................................................................................36
Figure 4.6-4: Measured distance between end of fan blade and edge of fan hub (right) ........36
Figure 4.6-5: Set screw with adjusting pin behind it (left) ........................................................36
Figure 4.6-6: Fan hub with removed fan blades (right) ...........................................................36
Figure 4.6-7: Sliding pedestal mounted on the TE* bearing position of rotor ..........................37
Figure 4.6-8: Open EE* bearing housing with its lower bearing shell .....................................37
Figure 4.6-9: Rotor attached and lifted with crane ..................................................................38
Figure 4.6-10: Soft gasket pad placed on EE* bearing position ................................................38

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.6-11: Open EE* bearing housing with its bearing shells .............................................38
Figure 4.6-12: Closed EE* bearing housing mounted to the rotor bearing position ..................39
Figure 4.6-13: Lifted rotor together with EE* pedestal and sliding pedestal on TE*..................39
Figure 4.6-14: Positioned rotor in front of the stator core ..........................................................40
Figure 4.6-15: Rotor moves with sliding pedestal first into the stator core ................................40
Figure 4.6-16: Sliding shoe inserted flush behind the end of the TE* retaining ring .................40
Figure 4.6-17: Sliding shoe will be carried along from the rotor body .......................................41
Figure 4.6-18: Prepared wooden block for the later put down the rotor body ...........................41
Figure 4.6-19: Rotor lifted at the rotor shaft EE* .......................................................................42
Figure 4.6-20: Pulling rope attached on the two high-strength eyelet bolts on the coupling .....42
Figure 4.6-21: TE* bearing position with sliding pedestal, ready for disassembly ....................43
Figure 4.6-22: EE* bearing housing and intermediate frame placed down ...............................43
Figure 4.6-23: TE* bearing position without sliding pedestal ....................................................43
Figure 4.6-24: Open TE* bearing housing with its lower bearing shell......................................44
Figure 4.6-25: TE* bearing housing placed under the TE* bearing position .............................44
Figure 4.6-26: Open TE* bearing housing with its bearing shells .............................................44
Figure 4.6-27: Closed TE* bearing housing placed on four adjustable support elements ........45
Figure 4.6-28: The rotor shaft is lifted on TE* ...........................................................................45
Figure 4.6-29: The sliding shoe is removed in direction TE* .....................................................46
Figure 4.6-30: The intermediate frame is pushed under the TE* bearing housing....................46
Figure 4.6-31: TE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly ....................................47
Figure 4.6-32: TE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly complete.....................47
Figure 4.6-33: EE* bearing housing and the intermediate frame lifted by crane .......................48
Figure 4.6-34: EE* bearing housing and the intermediate frame placed on welding rod ..........48
Figure 4.6-35: EE* bearing housing lifted by crane, intermediate frame is freely .....................48
Figure 4.6-36: Intermediate frame pulled to the side and back again .......................................49
Figure 4.6-37: EE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly ....................................49
Figure 4.6-38: EE* bearing housing assembly complete ..........................................................50
Figure 4.6-40: EE* bearing position with soft gasket pad..........................................................51
Figure 4.6-42: Depth gauge (left) ..............................................................................................52
Figure 4.6-43: Measured distance between end of fan blade and edge of fan hub (right) ........52
Figure 4.6-44: Fan hub without fan blades (left)........................................................................53
Figure 4.6-45: Fan hub with fan blades secured by adjusting pins and grub screws (right) .....53
Figure 4.7-1: Lower levelling screw M16 for radial alignment of air baffle ring (left) ...............54
Figure 4.7-2: Details of the fastening screw connection (right) ...............................................54
Figure 4.7-3: Air baffle ring mounted to the EE stator wall (left)..............................................55
Figure 4.7-4: Parting line of mounted air baffle ring (right) ......................................................55
Figure 4.7-5: Lower fastening screws and taper pin of shaft bushing (left) .............................56
Figure 4.7-6: Upper fastening screws and taper pin of shaft bushing (right)...........................56
Figure 4.7-7: Outer air seal mounted ......................................................................................57
Figure 4.7-8: Spiral air hose connected to the shaft bushing (right)........................................57
Figure 4.8-1: Primary bearing plate after the alignment of the generator................................59
Figure 4.8-2: Leveling plate after the alignment of the generator............................................59
Figure 4.9-1: Special foundation bolts are already casted; the base frame not yet ................64
Figure 4.9-2: Prepared auxiliaries for the casting process (left) ..............................................65
Figure 4.9-3: Prepared casting process (right) ........................................................................65
Figure 4.9-4: Casting of generator base frame (left) ...............................................................66
Figure 4.9-5: Casting height of generator base frame (right) ..................................................66
Figure 4.9-6: Detail of generator base frame anchoring (left) .................................................67
Figure 4.9-7: Hydraulic tool for the pretension of special foundation bolts (right) ...................67
Figure 4.9-8: Bearing cover TE* with grounding point.............................................................68
Figure 4.9-9: Bearing cover EE* with insulated point ..............................................................68

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.9-10: Welding and spot welding points .......................................................................69

Figure 4.10-1: Hitch of the complete assembly, enclosure here with extra cover EE* ..............71
Figure 4.10-2: Hitch of the enclosure, here without extra cover EE*.........................................72
Figure 4.10-3: Hitch of the extra cover EE* ...............................................................................72
Figure 4.10-4: Cover guides (left) .............................................................................................73
Figure 4.10-5: Mounting position of the cover guide (right) .......................................................73
Figure 4.10-6: Enclosure lifted on the attachment points (left) ..................................................74
Figure 4.10-7: Enclosure mounted on the generator (right) ......................................................74
Figure 4.10-8: Removable cover guide fixed at the base frame with four screws (left).............74
Figure 4.10-9: Cover guide and adjustment element of enclosure (right) .................................74
Figure 4.10-10: Extra cover EE* with 2 air inlet filter and 1 air outlet sound absorber ................76
Figure 4.10-11: Extra cover EE* .................................................................................................77
Figure 4.11-1: Upper main bracket in the factory (left) ..............................................................78
Figure 4.11-2: Upper main bracket mounted on the enclosure (right).......................................78
Figure 4.11-3: Details for flexible link connection on the line side (left) ....................................79
Figure 4.11-4: Part list (right) ....................................................................................................79
Figure 4.11-5: Upper flexible links mounted with compensation part (left)................................80
Figure 4.11-6: Upper flexible links mounted complete (right) ....................................................80
Figure 4.11-7: Current transformers (left)..................................................................................80
Figure 4.11-8: Flexible links and copper bars on the neutral point connection (right) ...............80
Figure 4.12-1: Four upper lifting eyes are on the two L-bars (left) ............................................81
Figure 4.12-2: Mounting holes for the lower fixing screws are inside the cubicle (right) ...........81
Figure 4.12-3: Neutral point cubicle mounted on the enclosure (left)........................................82
Figure 4.12-4: Detail of the 100*20mm mounting frame and the 5mm gasket (right) ...............82
Figure 4.13-1: Details of transportation case ............................................................................83
Figure 4.13-2: Details of horizontal lift – 1 crane .......................................................................84
Figure 4.13-3: Details of horizontal lift – 2 cranes .....................................................................84
Figure 4.13-4: Turning the cooler unit with two cranes (left) .....................................................85
Figure 4.13-5: Put the cooler unit onto a plane surface (right) ..................................................85
Figure 4.13-6: Details of vertical lift – 2 cranes .........................................................................85
Figure 4.13-7: Details of vertical lift – 1 crane ...........................................................................86
Figure 4.13-8: Details of mounting the cooler unit (left) ............................................................87
Figure 4.13-9: Details of mounting the legs (right) ....................................................................87
Figure 4.13-10: Support legs for cooler unit (left) ........................................................................88
Figure 4.13-11: Mounting of the cooler unit (right) ......................................................................88
Figure 4.13-12: Cooler unit mounted complete ...........................................................................89
Figure 4.13-13: Details of mounted support legs with diagonal holders (cross beams) ..............90
Figure 4.13-14: Example of water supply and return pipes below the coolers ............................90
Figure 4.13-15: Example of venting and draining pipes, in the centre of the hood (left) .............91
Figure 4.13-16: Example of venting and draining pipes, on the side of the hood (right) .............91
Figure 4.13-17: Leakage water sensor housing with two sensors ..............................................92
Figure 4.13-18: Door of the manhole with filter housing for the leakage air filters ......................92
Figure 4.14-1: Details of ground connections, enclosure (left, middle) .....................................93
Figure 4.14-2: Details of ground connections, main current bracket (right) ..............................93
Figure 4.14-3: Details of ground connections, cooler unit .........................................................93
Figure 4.14-4: Oil flanges on the bearing housing EE* (left) .....................................................94
Figure 4.14-5: Oil flanges on the bearing housing TE* (right) ...................................................94
Figure 4.15-1: Open bearing housing with lower bearing shell .................................................96
Figure 4.15-2: Oil flushing without bearing ................................................................................98
Figure 4.17-1: Sensor probe with coaxial cable (1) (left).........................................................103
Figure 4.17-2: Probe sleeve (2) with housing (3) (right) ..........................................................103
Figure 4.17-3: Coaxial cable guided through the probe sleeve (left).......................................103
Figure 4.17-4: Sensor (1) mounted with liquid sealant (2) LOCTITE 242 (right) .....................103
Figure 4.17-5: Sensor probe with coaxial cable mounted (left) ...............................................103

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.17-6: Sensor (1) mounted in the probe sleeve (2) in details (right) ...........................103
Figure 4.17-7: Sleeve holder (1), locknut (2) for probe sleeve (3) with wrench flat (left).........104
Figure 4.17-8: Vibration sensor mounted in the bearing cover (right) .....................................104
Figure 4.17-9: Rotor grounding system with carbon brushes mounted...................................104
Figure 4.17-10: Wiring of the rotor grounding system ...............................................................104
Figure 4.17-11: Carbon brush of the rotor grounding system in details ....................................105
Figure 4.17-12: Potential cable of TE* bearing shell .................................................................105
Figure 4.17-13: Potential cable of EE* bearing shell .................................................................105
Figure 4.18-1: Additional cover TE* (left) ................................................................................106
Figure 4.18-2: Additional cover TE* and lower cover plates mounted (right) ..........................106
Figure 4.19-1: Plug-in brush holders .......................................................................................107
Figure 4.19-2: Slip rings with wax tape preservation only for the transport (left) ....................108
Figure 4.19-3: Brush carrier and slip rings after cleaning on site (right)..................................108
Figure 4.19-4: Brush carrier mounted and grounded (left) ......................................................108
Figure 4.19-5: Adapters for excitation cables (right) ...............................................................108

Turbine - Generator
4.1 Safety precaution for assembling the generator

4.1.1 General
This section contains the relevant information necessary for safe operation of a generator.
Although the generator is designed to state-of-the-art technology and complies with the applicable
safety standards, hazards which could result in personal injury to the user or third parties and dam-
age to the generator or other property cannot be ruled out completely.
Please read this section carefully and make sure that you comply with the instructions in order to
safeguard against personal injury and damage to the generator and its components.
Please note that the safety information in this section is general and applies to different types of
generators. Specific safety instructions are included in the operating instructions provided for the in-
dividual components and in the various appendices.
4.1.2 Information for the person responsible for the plant
Observe the local and industry-specific safety regulations.

The persons responsible for the plant must ensure the following:
- Planning and configuration work and all work carried out on and with the generator is only to be
done by qualified personnel.
- The operating manual must be available at all times during all work.
- The technical data and the specifications of the permissible assembly, connection, environmen-
tal and operating conditions must always be observed.
- The specific safety regulations as well as regulations on the use of personal protective equip-
ment must be always observed.
NOTE
Use the services and support provided by the appropriate Service Center for
planning, installation, commissioning and servicing work.
You will find safety instructions in the individual chapters of this document which must be observed
without fail for your own safety, the safety of other persons and to prevent damage to property.
Observe the following safety instructions during all activities on and with the generator and its com-
ponents.

Turbine - Generator
4.1.3 The five safety rules
For your personal safety and to prevent material damage when working on the generator, always
observe the safety instructions and the following five safety rules, according to EN 50110-1 (“Work-
ing in a voltage-free state”). Apply the five safety rules in the order stated before starting work at the
generator.
Five safety rules:
1. Isolate from electrical supply. Disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example anti-condensation
heating.
2. Secure against being switched on again.
3. Make sure that the equipment is at zero voltage.
4. Earth and short-circuit.
5. Cover or isolate nearby components that are still live.
After completing the work, apply the measures in reverse order.
4.1.4 Qualified personnel
All work on the generator and its components may only be performed by qualified personnel. Quali-
fied personnel within the meaning of this documentation are persons who meet the following re-
quirements:
- On account of their training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks and po-
tential dangers in their particular field of activity.
- They have been appointed by the relevant responsible persons to perform work on the genera-
tor and its components.
4.1.5 Safe handling
Safety in the workplace depends on the alertness, care and good sense of everyone involved with
the disassembly and reassembly of the generator. As well as complying with the itemized safety
precautions, care must always be taken when near the construction site. Always take care of your
safety.
Comply with the following to avoid accidents:
- The general safety regulations applicable in the host country.
- The-specific regulations of the operator and those for field of application.
- Special agreements that have been made with operator.
- Separate safety instructions supplied with the generator.
- Safety symbols and notices on the generator and its components.

Turbine - Generator
WARNING
Live parts
There are live parts in electrical machines.
Death, serious injury and/or property damage can result from the removal of covers, im-
proper use of the machine and its components, incorrect operation or inadequate main-
tenance.
- Always observe the "Five Safety Rules" when working on the generator.
- Only remove covers in accordance with the instructions in the Operating Manual.
WARNING
Rotating parts
There are dangerous rotating parts in electrical machines.
Death, serious injury and/or property damage can result from the removal of covers, im-
proper use of the machine and its components or inadequate maintenance.

- When working, be aware of rotating parts inside the generator and inside the exciter,
for example when turning the rotor.
- Special care is required when turning the rotor manually, for example when aligning
the shaft train.
- Protect against free shaft ends and freewheeling couplings.
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electrical machines, such as anti-condensation heaters, have hot surfaces. Do not
touch them. This could cause serious burns.
- Allow the generator to cool before starting work on and in the generator.
WARNING
Substances hazardous to health
Chemical substances required for the disassembly and reassembly of the generator
and its components may be hazardous to health.
They may cause poisoning, skin damage, irritation of the respiratory system and other
harm to health.
- Follow the instructions in the manufacturer's Operating Manual and product informa-
tion.
- Comply with the relevant safety regulations and wear the prescribed personal pro-
tective equipment.

Turbine - Generator
WARNING
Highly inflammable and combustible substances
Chemical substances required for the disassembly and reassembly of the generator
and its components may be highly inflammable.
They can cause burns, other harm to health and property damage.
- Follow the instructions in the manufacturer's Operating Manual and product informa-
tion.
- Comply with the relevant safety regulations and wear the prescribed personal pro-
tective equipment.
WARNING
Noise emissions
While working on or near the generator, noise emission levels can occur that are im-
permissible for workshops. This may cause hearing damage.

Ensure safe working within the plant by applying noise reduction measures, such as
covers, sound insulation and taking measures to protect hearing.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage mounted parts
Parts, such as temperature sensors and vibration measurement transmitters, are
mounted on the generator, and they can be torn off or destroyed if handled improperly.
This can lead to malfunctions or even total loss of the machine.
- When required, use suitable access steps or scaffolding when performing assembly
work on the generator or its components.
- Do not tread on lines or mounted parts when performing disassembly or reassembly
work. Do not use mounted parts as climbing aids.
- When working at a height of above one meter, suitable, tested scaffolding must be
used.
4.1.6 Abbreviations and figures in the document
NOTE
In this document as well as in applicable documents you will find the abbreviations TE*
for “turbine end”; and EE* for “exciter end”. Accordingly, you find AS*/ or DE* for “drive
end” and BS*/ or NDE* for “non-drive end”. Figures in this document are examples only
and may differ from the actual generator type on site.

Turbine - Generator
4.2 Requirements for assembling the generator

4.2.1 General inspection of the component parts supplied
The generator and its components must be kept in a clean and dry condition throughout the entire
period of disassembly and reassembly. The generator and its components must be protected at all
times against mechanical damage, moisture, condensation, dirt, insects, dust, etc.
Check all moisture indicators, and write down the results indicated in a report. During storage on
site, the moisture indicator of generator and components should be checked daily. Moisture indicator
on package located behind control windows (1) on TE* and EE* end. Remove moisture protection
and shipping covers a short time before moving the equipment to the installation position.
Figure 4.2-1: Moisture indicator sealed in transport packing (left)
Figure 4.2-2: Transport box with control window for moisture indicator (right)
The degree of humidity inside the sealed wrapping is indicated by humidity indicators in four stages:
Relative humidity Relative humidity Relative humidity Relative humidity

less than 30% higher than 30% higher than 40% higher than 50%
Figure 4.2-3: Humidity indicator colors at various degrees of humidity

Turbine - Generator
Please note this exception:

Sealed wrappings that are provided to protect against corrosion contain sufficient desiccant to last
right through the transport and storage period so that, in this case, openings and indicators are not
provided.
Measures to be taken in case of humidity:
If the indicator has turned red or should damage to the sealing wrapping be noticed, remove the
contents and store them in a dry, well-ventilated room. Heat the room, if necessary, with an electric
heater. If the above procedure cannot be adopted, insert bags with new or reconditioned desiccant
in the wrapping. Patch the wrapping with tape or - if possible - weld it (foil welding).
4.2.2 Checking the load handling attachments

Check the load suspension devices, such as load blocks, lifting eyes, ring bolts, roller carriages and
the lifting tackle, before lifting and transporting the generator and its components:
- Check the load suspension devices attached to the generator and its components for damage.
Replace any damaged load suspension devices.
- Before use, check whether the load suspension devices are properly attached.
- Only use approved undamaged and adequately dimensioned lifting tackle for lifting and trans-
porting the generator and its components. Check them before use.
WARNING
The generator components could fall down
If the load suspension devices and lifting tackle are damaged or not properly attached,
the generator components could fall down when lifted or transported. This could cause
death, serious injuries and property damage. Check the load suspension devices and
lifting tackle before use.
4.2.3 Lifting and transporting the generator
The persons must have the relevant qualifications for operating cranes and fork-lift trucks.
Only use approved undamaged and adequately dimensioned oil-pressure jacks for lifting the gen-
erator components. Check them before use. You will find the weights of the generator compo-
nents on their rating plates.
- When lifting, use the information on the rating plate. Be aware of the centres of gravity of the
generator components. Comply with the specified spread angle.
- When lifting, do not exceed the maximum acceleration or speed, which may be stated on the lift-
ing information plate. Lift the generator components without jerks.
Acceleration a ≤ 0.4 g; Velocity v ≤ 20 m/min

Turbine - Generator
- Lift the generator components only by the load suspension devices located on it, such as lifting
eyes. Lift the components by, for example, load blocks and ring bolts.
WARNING
Lifting or transporting the generator components
The generator components may only be lifted and transported by load suspension de-
vices in their normal upright positions.
Otherwise the generator parts could tip over, slip in the lifting devices or fall down. This
could cause death, serious injuries and property damage.
Use suitable ropes when you lift generator parts. You will find the weights of the genera-
tor components on their rating plates or in the dimensioned drawing, dimensioned draw-
ing text of the product manual.
WARNING
Position of the centre of gravity when lifting or transporting the generator com-
ponents
If the centre of gravity of a load does not lie in the middle of the attachment points, the
lifted parts may tip over or slip in the lifting devices when lifted or transported. This could
cause death, serious injuries and property damage.
- Comply with the handling instructions of the generator components during all trans-
port work.
- Be aware of the differing loads on the slings or lifting straps, and do not exceed the
loading capacity of the lifting device.
- Only lift or transport the generator components in a manner appropriate to the posi-
tion of their centre of gravity. If the centre of gravity does not lie in the middle of the
hitching points, then place the lifting hook above the centre of gravity.
WARNING
Do not stand or walk under suspended loads
The generator components could fall down if the lifting tackle or load suspension de-
vices fail. This could cause death, serious injuries and property damage. Do not stand
or walk under suspended generator parts. Before working under a suspended generator
component, stands with an appropriate loading capacity must be placed beneath them.
DANGER
Never remain under a suspended load
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the generator could fall. This
can result in death serious injury, or material damage. Never remain under the genera-
tor when it is raised.

Turbine - Generator
NOTE
Local space condition around the generator foundation
It could be through local space necessary, differ in each point of the sequence of the
Assembly steps. Check therefore whether the local site conditions allow, the Assembly
steps as in the manual can be described, carried out (E.g. sufficient crane hook height
to mount of the assemblies), see also generator outline drawing.
4.2.4 Removing the anti-corrosion protection
Machined, bright surfaces of generator parts and small components such as screws, bolt, taper pins,
couplings and shaft ends, are treated with an anti-corrosion agent. Carefully remove the anti-corro-
sion agent and immediately start the installation work.
Bright surfaces on generator parts
- Use petroleum, petroleum ether, or a similar solvent or detergent to remove the anti-corrosion
coating from the machined surface of generator parts and from small components.
NOTE
Paintwork damage
Make sure that the detergent or solvent does not come into contact with any painted
surface, as this could damage the lacquer.
- Use a suitable solvent to soften thick layers of anti-corrosion agent. Then push the
softened layers off using a piece of hardwood approximately 10x10x1cm. Do not
sand the protective coating down or scrape it off.
- Be carefully on the contact area of rotor grounding brushes, when removing anti-
corrosion protection.
CAUTION
Do not use metal tools
Do not use metal objects such as scrapers, spatulas, or plates to remove the anti-cor-
rosion protection. This could damage the surface of the motor parts.
- Lightly oil the de-preserved surfaces.

Turbine - Generator
4.2.5 Corrosion and moisture protection of the Interior of the generator
During longer mounting interruptions or shutdowns such as overhauls or repairs, SIEMENS recom-
mends the installation and use of an additional Munters dryer to reducing the moisture inside the
generator.
NOTE
Moisture concentration
Make sure that the heaters inside the generator always switched on during the instal-
lation, longer mounting interruptions and overhauls.
- Close the openings on the generator base frame and stator core.
- If possible, mount and close the generator enclosure.
CAUTION
Moisture reduces the insulation resistance of the winding and damage unpro-
tected parts inside of the generator.

Do not operate the generator with low insulation resistance. Keep the unprotected parts
inside the generator free of rust.
4.2.6 Measuring Charts and Checklist Information
To facilitate the installation of the generator and to ensure the quality of the work on site or to log,
different protocols for quality assurance have been provided. Observe the instructions in the instal-
lation manual, during the mounting process, fill out the appropriate protocols. At the end of the in-
stallation of the generator using the check list, check their work. All necessary activities must be co-
ordinated before.
All records (filled out) must return after installation as copy to the quality department of Siemens.
NOTE
During the installation the given values in the Generator Assembly Records (Measuring
Charts) in chapter 5.0 must be observed and the current values must be recorded in
"field erection”! The (Check list) in chapter 15.0 must be filled out.

Turbine - Generator
4.3 Preparing the assembling of the generator base frame

4.3.1 General
(See DWG DPPPG-70174817 – Generator Outline Drawing, DWG DPPPG-70174818 – Outline

Drawing Text, DWG DPPPG-70086152 – Anchoring Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
4.3.2 Preparatory work on the in-site concrete foundation
Inspect the in-site concrete foundation and the anchor holes for dimensional accuracy before start-
ing erection work. Remove any loose elements and loosely adhering cement grout from the founda-
tion surface. Knock off any projecting stones. Create a suitable casting channel either by cutting
such a channel in the concrete, or by leaving a corresponding channel recess when placing the con-
crete in order to assist in casting the anchor holes after the installation of special foundation bolts
and the base frame of generator. A suitably formed channel made of wood or sheet metal may also
be used as an alternative. The channel must have a form which ensures that the casting compound
exclusively fills the anchor hole, while the other area remains without casting compound.
NOTE
All concrete contaminated by oil or grease must be chiseled out to an adequate depth to
ensure adequate adhesion of the casting compound. The underside of the generator
base frame must also be free of oil and grease. A priming coat can remain.
4.3.3 Placing the primary bearing plates and leveling plates
(See DWG DPPPG-70174817 – Generator Outline Drawing, DWG DPPPG-70086152 – Anchoring

Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
The primary bearing plates 400*400*20mm and the leveling plates 150*150*20mm should be in-
stalled according to the above drawings and the positions of the threaded holes of the set screws
M42*1.5*100mm, already present in the generator base frame.
NOTE
In addition there are four threaded holes for set screws M42*1.5*100mm in the genera-
tor base frame at the positions of the four primary bearing plates which also function as
leveling plates.
The final positions of all plates should be marked out on the existing foundation according the foun-
dation plan. All plates should be placed into the casting mortar, such that their top surfaces are hori-
zontal and at a uniform level. The height position should be determined with reference either to
measuring marks, or to an existing machine (turbine), where the generator will be mounted. This po-

Turbine - Generator
sition should be set such that the centerline of generator axis is located approximately 2mm lower
than the final generator alignment, after placing the generator on the primary bearing plates. A slid-
ing sheet (greased Teflon) should be placed on every primary bearing plate, to make for an easier
alignment in transverse direction.
NOTE
The height position, of each of the primary bearing plates 400*400*20mm can be com-
pensated with regard to one another, using tree hexagon set screws M8*50mm for lev-
eling/offset at each plate, if any deviations are found.
After drying the mortar of the plates, prior to the setting up of the generator base frame,
all twelve hexagon set screws M8*50mm are to be removed!
Do not apply any load on the primary bearing plates or leveling plates unless 24 hours have passed
after placing; see the specifications as defined by the casting mortar manufacturer.
The contact surfaces of the generator base frame must be free from oil and grease for later casting.
Determine the distance between the generator base frame bottom edge and the leveling plates be-
fore setting down the generator base frame onto the primary bearing plates four 400*400*20mm.
Hexagon set screw (3x) M8*50mm only

for aligning, are to be removed afterwards
400*400*20mm
Figure 4.3-1: Primary bearing plate prepared on the in-site concrete foundation
150*150*20mm
Figure 4.3-2: Leveling plate prepared on the in-site concrete foundation

Turbine - Generator
 Primary bearing plate (1) prepared with Tef-

lon sheet placed on the in-site concrete
foundation.
2
 Leveling plate (2) placed on the in-site con-
crete foundation.
NOTE: The primary bearing plates and

1 the leveling plates must be aligned according
the DWG DPPPG-70174817 and DWG
DPPPG-70086152.
Figure 4.3-3: Prepared in-site concrete foundation with recess

4.3.4 Division of the casting area and installation of formwork, if necessary
(See FV/MP 12-011 – Manufacturing Procedure; in chapter 7.0 and DWG DPPPG-70174817 –
Generator Outline Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
The casting area should be divided into individual sections, with the direction of flow of the casting
compound being clearly defined. The dimensions of the individual casting sections should be deter-
mined depending on the pump capacity, but should not exceed 10 square metres per casting sec-
tion. Only thus the processing time specified for the casting compound can be observed. Use water-
repellent and permanently elastic foamed material, e.g., ETA-foam, to divide the various sections to
a sufficient width before placing the base frame. Ensure a tight separation between the various sec-
tions to prevent casting compound from leaking to other sections. Install permanent formwork be-
forehand if limited space is available only. This permanent formwork will need to be installed at a
distance of not less than 25mm to the base frame wall in order to be able and check the casting
level. Use splash water to visually inspect the permanent formwork for tightness if required.
In case of generator base frame with finned bottom area (1) the hollow space between the rips can-
not be filled completely, but it is important that all supporting base frame areas including the flat tra-
versal girder (2) are complete grouted.
Examples are shown on the next page.
NOTE
Generators with main current brackets on the bottom side are the exception. The foun-
dation area for the casting of this design is shown in the DWG DPPPG-70174817.

Turbine - Generator
1
2
Figure 4.3-4: Generator base frame with finned bottom areas (left)
Figure 4.3-5: Generator base frame areas with flat traversal girder (right)
4.3.5 Preparing the special foundation bolts
(See FV/MP 12-010 – Manufacturing Procedure; in chapter 7.0 and DWG DPPPG-70086152 – An-
choring Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
The special foundation bolt M42*2895mm are supplied with a protective coating (Tectyl), which must
be removed from the thread. In order to preserve the elastic properties of the special foundation
bolts and to make it possible for them to be tightened, the casting compound must not set on the
bolt shaft or penetrate into the threads of the nuts. For that purpose, wrap two layers of bituminous
jacketing (e.g. Denso Jacketing) around the special foundation bolts in following way:
- Remove the manufacturer`s Tectyl coat from the thread.

If there are relief grooves
Wrap bituminous jacketing around the relief grooves, up to the thread.
If the shaft diameter is larger than the thread diameter
Wrap bituminous jacketing around the thread (and relive grooves) on the lower shaft end up to
the future position of the nut and on the upper shaft end up to about 50mm over the final casting
height. Wrap two layers of bituminous jacketing over the entire length of the shaft including the
thread. The wrapping should be executed in such way that the jacketing will not come off or be
pulled into the thread when the nut is screwed on. (Direction of winding = sense of rotation of
nut)
- Grease the thread of special foundation bolts with MoS2 or Graphite paste (not if using hydraulic
stretching cylinder).

Turbine - Generator
4.3.6 Assembling the special foundation bolts
(See FV/MP 12-010 – Manufacturing Procedure; in chapter 7.0)
Two procedures can be used to install the special foundation bolts:

I. The prepared special foundation bolts M42*2895mm are put in the anchor holes and secure
provisionally with a flat U-steel (not scope of supply by Siemens). Later, the special foundation
bolts are inserted into the corresponding holes of the base frame just before the generator base
frame is placed on the in-site concrete foundation.
II. The prepared special foundation bolts M42*2895mm are fitted into the generator base frame,
after lifting the generator by crane. Later, the special foundation bolts are guided into the corre-
sponding anchor holes, when the generator base frame is slowly lowered on the in-site concrete
foundation.
For example here Variant I:
 Before lowering the generator base

frame on the in-site concrete foundation
hang all special foundation bolts provi-
sionally in the anchor holes; e.g. with a
U-sheet metal.
 Weight of the special foundation bolts
M42*2895mm; about 32kg.
 Support the special foundation bolts with
a threaded rod (M8*300mm), a DIN nut
M8 and flat U-sheet metal (not scope by
Siemens).
 After the installation of the generator, lift
all special foundation bolts on the eye
nut M8 in the final position.
Figure 4.3-6: Special foundation bolt hangs provisionally in the anchor hole

Turbine - Generator
4.4 Assembling the lower main current bracket with high-voltage bushings
4.4.1 General
(See DWG DPPPG-70073000 – Main Current Bracket; in chapter 16.0)
The lower main current bracket has been already mounted, aligned and pinned to the generator
base frame by the manufacturer for test purposes. For assembling use the supplied mounting mate-
rial. Check the flat gasket cellular rubber before mounting the lower main current bracket. Two vari-
ants can be used to install the lower main current bracket.
4.4.2 Assembling the lower main current bracket: Variant 1
Place the lower main current bracket (≈1.400kg) with crane in horizontal position on auxiliary sup-
ports (1) (not scope of Siemens). Secure the lower main current bracket against dropping. Prepare
four additional stands (2) (not scope of Siemens) for safety reasons beside the lower main current
bracket. Lift and position the generator with a crane shortly over the lower main current bracket.
Leave the generator hanging in the crane hook and mount four threaded rods (3) M10*150mm with
washers (not scope of Siemens) to guide the lower main current bracket. Mount the lower main cur-
rent bracket finally below the generator base frame, using screws, washers and taper pins
Ø10*80mm supplied by the manufacturer, see also Figure 4.4-1.
Transportation hood
≈3300mm
Generator base frame

3
Main bracket
Figure 4.4-1: Generator base frame positioned over the lower main current bracket

Turbine - Generator
4.4.3 Assembling the lower main current bracket: Variant 2
Place the lower main current bracket (≈1.500kg) with crane in horizontal position on two auxiliary H-
beams; e.g. IPB200 (not scope of Siemens), which lay over the opening of the in-site concrete foun-
dation. Secure the lower main current bracket against dropping. Lift and position the generator with
a crane shortly over the lower main current bracket. Leave the generator hanging in the crane hook
and mount four threaded rods M10*150mm with washers (not scope of Siemens) to guide the lower
main current bracket. Mount the lower main current bracket finally below the generator base frame,
using screws, washers and taper pins Ø10*80mm supplied by the manufacturer; see also Figure
4.4-2 till Figure 4.4-5 on Page 25.
Main bracket
H-beam
Figure 4.4-2: Lower main current bracket placed on two auxiliary H-beams
Main bracket
H-beam
Figure 4.4-3: Generator base frame positioned over the lower main current bracket

Turbine - Generator
Main bracket Threaded rods M10*150mm
H-beam
Figure 4.4-4: Use threaded rods M10*150mm to guide the lower main current bracket
Main bracket
H-beam
Figure 4.4-5: Generator is slightly lifted together with the lower main current bracket
Lift the generator slightly together with the mounted lower main current bracket and remove the two
auxiliary H-beams. After that, place the generator on the four primary bearing plates on the in-site
concrete foundation; see also Figure 4.4-6 and Figure 4.4-7 on Page 26 and chapter 4.5.2 Placing
the generator base frame on the primary bearing plates on page 27.

Turbine - Generator
Installed and se-

cured special
foundation bolts Main bracket
Figure 4.4-6: Two auxiliary H-beams are removed
Main bracket
Figure 4.4-7: Generator lowered over the in-site concrete foundation

Turbine - Generator
4.5 Assembling the generator base frame without rotor

4.5.1 General
NOTE
Till the enclosure is finally assembled; the stator core and stator winding must keep pro-
tected against moisture, dust and rain. Protect exposed parts or openings, using suitable
packaging material (e.g., plastic sheeting) to avoid contamination or the entry of foreign
material.
4.5.2 Placing the generator base frame on the primary bearing plates
(See DWG DPPPG-70174817 – Generator Outline Drawing, DWG DPPPG-70174818 – Outline

Drawing Text; in chapter 16.0)
NOTE
Use only the four movable bollards for the lifting of the generator which is allowed for
this purpose. Use the spreader beams when lifting the generator; if supplied.
NOTE
Check the required crane and working height over the generator foundation; see DWG
DPPPG-70174817.
In order to ensure proper installation, the generator should be installed on the foundation with as lit-
tle distortion as possible. To ensure this, proceed as follows:
- Four greased Teflon plates are laid on each primary bearing plate 400*400*20mm to make the
lateral generator alignment easier.
- The generator base frame should be only lowered with the corners onto the primary bearing
plates 400*400*20mm.
- The surfaces of bottom side of the generator base frame, which will later be in contact with the
casting compound, must be under all circumstances free of oil and grease.
- The generator base frame can now be lowered on the four primary bearing plates
400*400*20mm while ensuring that distortion in the longitudinal and transverse axes is low.
- Coat the threads of the set screws M42*1.5*100mm with a lubricant, e.g. graphite paste or
MoS2 and screw them in, after setting down the generator base frame, until a distance of
approx. 5mm remains between each set screw and the levelling plates 150*150*20mm; see
Figure 4.5-4 on Page 29. The four set screws above the primary bearing plates are only used
when the generator base frame is positioned laterally and axially.

Turbine - Generator
- Lift and install the special foundation bolts M42*2895mm one by one in the corresponding an-
chor holes and secure them with spherical washers /conical seats and M42 nuts; see also chap-
ter 4.3.6 Assembling the special foundation bolts on Page 22.
Figure 4.5-1: Generator assembly by crane (left)
Figure 4.5-2: Generator is placed on the in-site concrete foundation (right)
Set screw M42*1.5*100mm, here at the

corners, over the primary bearing plates
400*400*20mm
Figure 4.5-3: Primary bearing plate after placing the generator

Turbine - Generator
Set screw M42*1.5*100mm, here at the genera-

tor base frame, over the leveling plates
150*150*20mm
Figure 4.5-4: Leveling plate after placing the generator on the primary bearing plates
 After setting down the generator base

frame on the primary bearing plates, lift
the special foundation bolts one by one
on the eye nut M8 in final position and
secure the special foundation bolts with
washer and DIN nut M42.
 Weight of the special foundation bolts
M42*2895mm is about 32kg.
Figure 4.5-5: Special foundation bolt and generator base frame

Turbine - Generator
 Special foundation bolt M42*2895mm

lifted and secured at the upper end with
spherical washer /conical seat and DIN
nut M42.
After the lift of the special foundation
bolts removes the eye nut M8, the
threaded rod M8 with DIN nut M8 and
the U-sheet metal.
Figure 4.5-6: Special foundation bolt installed in the generator base frame
4.5.3 Assembling the lower anchor plates
(See DWG DPPPG-70086152 – Anchoring Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
After the assembling of the special foundation bolts, attach the lower anchor plates 280*280*30mm;
D50, along with the M42 nuts on the lower ends of the special foundation bolts. The weight of the
lower anchor plates is about 18.0kg. The nuts M42 used must support the load applied over their
entire contact surface. Any significant inclination of the nut face as against the thread can easily be
recognized by tumbling motions of the lower anchor plate occurring when the nut is screwed on.
The bituminous jacketing of the special foundation bolts must reach so far up that a roll is created
when the nuts at the bottom are screwed on, see Figure 4.5-7 on Page 31. If this is not the case, be
sure to rewrap a sufficiently large area.
The lower anchor plate must carry the load over its entire surface, so that the compressive stress
resulting from the pre-tensioned special foundation bolts can be borne by the concrete for long time
periods under normal operating conditions.
Remove projecting edges or stones, in particular, because these may lead to a reduced bearing sur-
face, which in turn might entail the destruction of the concrete and result in loss of bolt prestress.
All loose matter and any poorly adhering cement grout, as well as dust, grease and oil need to be
removed from the concrete seating surfaces for the lower anchor plates 280*280*30mm; D50.

Turbine - Generator
To obtain even seating surfaces for the lower anchor plates, a suitable mortar (such as
Pagel V14/10) may have to be applied.
If flat steel are present on the customer’s premises secure the lower anchor plates with spot welding
at the corners to the foundation. Till the generator alignment is finished, let the lower anchor plates
and nuts loose. After that, tighten the special foundation bolts according the values stated in Table
4.8-2 on Page 63.
Special Foundation Bolt

Anchor Borehole
In-site Concrete Foundation
(280*280*30mm; D50)
Figure 4.5-7: Special foundation bolts with lower anchor plate and DIN nut
4.5.4 Remove the generator transportation hood
Remove the generator transportation hood (1) from the generator base frame. Check the intactness
of the humidity indicators of the inner foil seals. Lift the transportation hood with the four lifting lugs
(2), left and right on the side; see the Figure 4.5-8 and 4.5-9.
Figure 4.5-8: Example of generator transportation hood (left)
Figure 4.5-9: Lifting lugs on the transportation hood (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.5.5 Remove the mounted parts from the generator base frame
NOTE
All mounted parts which were previously mounted to the generator base frame for
transport on site has to be removed after the transportation hood has been removed
from the generator base frame. Store all removed parts, fixing screws and taper pins for
the reassembling after the rotor installation!
4.5.6 Assembling the lower flexible links to the high-voltage bushings
(See DWG DPPPG-70190058 – Bushings Assembly, DWG 1-2570-503923 – Assembly Instruction

for Flexible Link Installation; in chapter 16.0)
The lower flexible links has been already mounted and aligned to the high-voltage bushings by the
manufacturer for test purposes. For assembling use the mounting material and the securing ele-
ments supplied by the manufacturer. The lower flexible links and compensating parts (if any) were
assigned to each individual phase and marked according to their assembly positions. If necessary,
use the inspection openings in the lower main current bracket for mounting the flexible links. Other-
wise they crawl down past the winding head and into the bottom tray of the base frame to fix the
flexible links. The screw connections of the flexible links should be tightened with 50Nm.
Figure 4.5-10: Lower flexible links mounted on high-voltage bushings (left)
Figure 4.5-11: Lower flexible links mounted complete (right)
CAUTION
Make absolutely certain that no object can fall down during work in the end-winding
cavity! It is useful to empty all pockets before beginning the works. If any part is lost in
spite of all precautions, it must be found in every case!!

Turbine - Generator
Partlist
Pos. Description Bezeichnung
2 Compensation Piece 5 Ausgleichsstück 5mm
5 Flexible Link Dehnungsband
6 Lock Washer Sicherungsblech
7 Base Plate Unterlegscheibe
8 Hexagon Bolt Sechskantschraube
9 Twinnut Zwillingsmutter
10 Conical Spring Washer Cap Spannscheibenkapsel
11 Conical Spring Washer Spannscheibe
Figure 4.5-12: Details for flexible link connection on the line side (left)
Figure 4.5-13: Part list (right)
NOTE
Retighten all screws to a nominal torque of 50 Nm twelve hours after the installation of
the flexible links! Bend the doubled lock washer only after retightening as above!
4.5.7 Check the gaps of the end stops for stator core
(See DWG DPPPG-70194303 – Generator Shop Final Assembly, DWG DPPPG-70186970 –

Shipping Brace Stator; in chapter 16.0)
NOTE
Check and adjust the gaps of the stator core’s end stops!
The gaps of the stator core's end The value of the gap width 1.5mm can be
stops have to be adjusted before in- found on the drawing of the design group
stalling the big generator enclosure. 0990 "Machine Assembly". The M42 hexagon
During the generator's transportation head screws have to be screwed into the
the screws must be screwed out of tapped hole; up to the defined gap width
the tapped hole, until the limit stop is 1.5mm has been achieved.
reached (gap width =0mm). The screws must be finally fixed in their posi-
For the case of generator's operation tion by tightening the set screws. The securing
the defined gap widths must be ad- of the set screws is done with the engineering
justed. adhesive Loctite 270.

Turbine - Generator
Screw
M42
Locking
screws
Screw
M42
Figure 4.5-14: Adjustment screws M42 with locking screws (left)
Figure 4.5-15: Shipping and earthquake precaution, detail (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.6 Assembling the rotor into the stator core

4.6.1 Preparing the slide plate and the sliding shoe
(See DWG DPPPG-70188440 – Slide Plate, DWG DPPPG-70188421 – Sliding Shoe; in chapter
16.0)
 Grease the slide plate along the cen-

tre (1) so that the two outer sides of
the slide plate remain free of grease.
2
1  Insert the greased slide plate into the
stator core (2) and align it along the
centerline of the plate pack.
 Position the sliding shoe (3) with pol-
3 yester ropes in front of the slide plate.
Lay the ropes through the stator core

to the other side on TE*.
Figure 4.6-1: Prepared slide plate with sliding shoe
4.6.2 Remove the rotor packing after the transport
 Check the humidity indicator on

sealed rotor packing.
 Open the rotor box, remove rotor
packing and check the insulation re-
sistance of rotor winding.
NOTE: It’s recommended and

some time necessary to remove the
rotor fan blades before inserting the
rotor in the stator core; see also the
next chapter.
Figure 4.6-2: Unpacked rotor in the transportation frame
4.6.3 Remove the fan blades from the rotor, recommended
(See General Handling Guidelines; in chapter 6.0 and DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Radial
Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)

Turbine - Generator
NOTICE
Before removing the fan blades, create a measurement report with the numbers of the
fan blades and their degree position in relation to the fan hub. For this purpose, meas-
ure the distance of each fan blade, between the end of the blade and the end of the fan
hub. Attention! The measurement is absolutely necessary for the reassembly of the fan
blades!
Use a depth gauge (1) to measure the distances (2) of each fan blade. Log each measured value to
the corresponding fan number.
Figure 4.6-3: Depth gauge (left)
Figure 4.6-4: Measured distance between end of fan blade and edge of fan hub (right)
Remove both M8 grub screws (3) and their adjusting pins for each fan blade from the fan hub.
Figure 4.6-5: Set screw with adjusting pin behind it (left)
Figure 4.6-6: Fan hub with removed fan blades (right)

Turbine - Generator
Turn the fan blades out slowly, one after the other, by 68° until they are in a lateral position to the
hub and thus all in line with the rotor shaft. Now it is possible to unscrew each fan blade in succes-
sion without touching the adjacent fan blade. Store the removed fan blades dry and clean for reas-
sembly.
4.6.4 Assembling the sliding pedestal on the TE* bearing position of the rotor
(See DWG DPPPG-70188420 – Sliding Pedestal, DWG DPPPG-70051058 – Block for put down
Rotor Body; in chapter 16.0)
 Attach the rotor at rotor body with

round slings to the crane and lift it
from the transportation frame.
2
 Place the rotor on two wooden blocks
(1) for put down the rotor body.

3
 Mount the sliding pedestal (2) on the
TE* bearing position of rotor.
 Mount two high-strength eyelet bolts
1 (3) into the threaded holes of coupling
for the pulling device (not scope of
supply).
Figure 4.6-7: Sliding pedestal mounted on the TE* bearing position of rotor
4.6.5 Assembling the EE* bearing housing with its bearing shells on the rotor
 Prepare the EE* bearing housing (1)

together with its mounted intermedi-
1
ate frame for assembling it on the EE*
bearing position of the rotor.
2  Remove the rigid labyrinths from the
EE* bearing housing.
 Remove the EE* bearing cover and
the upper EE* bearing shell.
 Lubricate the lower EE* bearing shell
(2) with oil.
Figure 4.6-8: Open EE* bearing housing with its lower bearing shell

Turbine - Generator

round slings (1) to the crane.
 Lift and install the rotor with the EE*
1
bearing position in the lower EE*
bearing shell in the bearing housing.
 Place a wooden block for put down
the rotor body under the rotor body on
TE* and lower the rotor with its rotor
body in there.
 Lower the crane hook for works on
the EE* bearing housing.
Figure 4.6-9: Rotor attached and lifted with crane

 Prepare a soft gasket pad (1) and lay

1 it on the EE* bearing position before
mounting the upper EE* bearing shell.
Figure 4.6-10: Soft gasket pad placed on EE* bearing position
 Install the upper EE* bearing shell (1)

together with taper pins (2) and hexa-
1
gon socket screws (3) on the lower
EE* bearing shell. In doing so, the
2 3
EE* bearing position get pressed be-
tween upper and lower EE* bearing
shells using the soft gasket pad.
Figure 4.6-11: Open EE* bearing housing with its bearing shells

Turbine - Generator
 Install the EE* bearing cover (1) on

1 the EE* bearing housing (2).
Figure 4.6-12: Closed EE* bearing housing mounted to the rotor bearing position
4.6.6 Lifting and aligning the rotor in the spirit level

round slings to the crane (1).
1
 Lift and align the rotor together with
the EE* bearing housing (2) and the
sliding pedestal (3) in spirit level.
NOTE: In order to achieve the

best result, it may be necessary to
make several attempts for lifting the
3
rotor by crane.
2
Figure 4.6-13: Lifted rotor together with EE* pedestal and sliding pedestal on TE*
4.6.7 Moving the rotor into the stator using crane

Turbine - Generator
 Position the rotor with the coupling in

front of the stator core. The central
axes of rotor and stator must align
axially.
 Prepare a pulling rope and lead it
trough the stator core and fix it on the
rotor coupling on the two high-
strength eyelet bolts. Lead the other
end of pulling rope through a pulling
device (not scope of supply).
Figure 4.6-14: Positioned rotor in front of the stator core

 Move the rotor slowly by crane into

the stator.
 Position the sliding pedestal (1)
(mounted at the rotor) laterally to the
center of the sliding plate (already
placed in the stator core).
1  Lower the rotor slowly by crane till the
sliding pedestal touches the slide
plate.
Figure 4.6-15: Rotor moves with sliding pedestal first into the stator core
 Move the rotor slowly by crane further

into the stator core till the TE* retain-
ing ring (1) past the end of the slide
1 plate (2).
 Push the sliding shoe (3) flush behind
the end of the TE* retaining ring be-
4 tween rotor body (4) and slide plate.
2 3
Figure 4.6-16: Sliding shoe inserted flush behind the end of the TE* retaining ring

Turbine - Generator

into the stator core, while the sliding
shoe (1), which is now pressed by the
rotor body, will follow.
1
NOTE: The rotor weight is still
hanging on the crane and the sliding
pedestal is touching gently the sliding
plate. The sliding shoe will be carried
along from the pressure of rotor body.
Figure 4.6-17: Sliding shoe will be carried along from the rotor body
4.6.8 Repositioning the crane hook to the rotor shaft attachment point EE*

1 into the stator core, till the round
slings (1) have reached the end on
the stator wall.
 Position a wooden block (2) for put
down the rotor body behind the centre
2 of gravity of the rotor under the rotor
body.
 Lower the rotor slowly by crane and
place the rotor body in the wooden
block for changing the crane hook po-
sition.
Figure 4.6-18: Prepared wooden block for the later put down the rotor body

Turbine - Generator
 Repositioning the crane hook from the

1 rotor body attachment to the rotor
shaft attachment EE*.
 Attach the rotor on EE* with the round
slings (1) to the crane; directly next to
the EE* bearing housing (2).
 Lift the rotor slowly by crane and de-
mount the wooden block under the ro-
2 tor body.
 Pull the rotor slowly further into the
stator using the pulling device on the
rotor coupling.
NOTE: The crane must follow

according to the speed of movement

of the rotor, which is only moved axi-
ally by the pulling device. It is not
permitted to force an axial movement
by the crane.
Figure 4.6-19: Rotor lifted at the rotor shaft EE*
4.6.9 Moving the rotor into the stator using a pulling device
 Use the pulling device with pulling

rope (1) (not scope of supply) to move
the rotor slowly further into the stator.
The crane attached on rotor shaft EE*
follows the movement of the rotor.
NOTE: A sufficient loadable an-

chor point must be used for the fixing
of the pulling device. Do not attach
1 the pulling device on the turbine rotor!
Figure 4.6-20: Pulling rope attached on the two high-strength eyelet bolts on the coupling
4.6.10 Remove the sliding pedestal from the TE* bearing position of the rotor

Turbine - Generator
 Move the rotor forward, till the final

position for the disassembly of the
sliding pedestal (1).
 Check the axial measured values be-
tween rotor and stator core for TE*
and EE* and compare the measured
values.
 Reposition the rotor axial if neces-
1 sary.
Figure 4.6-21: TE* bearing position with sliding pedestal, ready for disassembly
 Lower the rotor shaft EE* together

with the EE* bearing housing (1) and
the intermediate frame (2) carefully by
crane and place it on the generator
1 base frame.
Figure 4.6-22: EE* bearing housing and intermediate frame placed down
 Remove the sliding pedestal from the

TE* bearing position of the rotor.
NOTE: The rotor is still lying on

TE* with the rotor body on the TE*
sliding shoe on the slide plate.
Figure 4.6-23: TE* bearing position without sliding pedestal

Turbine - Generator
4.6.11 Assembling the TE* bearing housing with its bearing shells on the rotor
 Prepare the TE* pedestal (1) together

with its lower bearing shell (2) for the
1
assembling on the TE* bearing posi-
tion of the rotor.
2  Remove the rigid labyrinths from the
TE* bearing housing.
 Remove the TE* bearing cover and
the upper TE* bearing shell.
 Lubricate the lower TE* bearing shell
with oil.
Figure 4.6-24: Open TE* bearing housing with its lower bearing shell
 Position the TE* bearing housing (1)

with its lower bearing shell under TE*
bearing position.
 Lift the TE* bearing housing with its
lower bearing shell carefully by crane
to the lower TE* bearing position.
1
 Support the TE* bearing housing
from below with four adjustable sup-
port elements (not scope of supply),
shown in Figure 4.6-27 on Page 45.
Figure 4.6-25: TE* bearing housing placed under the TE* bearing position
 Install the upper TE* bearing shell (1)

together with taper pins (2) and hex-
1
agon socket screws (3) on the lower
TE* bearing shell.
2 3
 Install the TE* bearing cover together
with taper pins and hexagon socket
screws on the TE* bearing housing.
Figure 4.6-26: Open TE* bearing housing with its bearing shells

Turbine - Generator
 Position the intermediate frame (1)

3 beside the TE* bearing pedestal (2).
 Install thin rollers (e.g. welding rod Ø
5mm) under the intermediate frame.
 Attach the rotor shaft TE* with round
slings (3) directly next to the coupling
2 to the crane.
1
 Lift the rotor shaft TE together with
the TE* bearing housing (2) slowly by
4 crane and then remove the four ad-
justable support elements (4).
Figure 4.6-27: Closed TE* bearing housing placed on four adjustable support elements
4.6.12 Remove the sliding shoe in direction TE*

the TE* bearing housing slowly further
by crane, till the minimum of the up-
per air gap in the stator core is
reached.
1 CAUTION Do not touch with the

rotor body the upper coils of the stator
core!
 Pull the sliding shoe (1) in direction
2 TE* using the polyester ropes (2).
Figure 4.6-28: The rotor shaft is lifted on TE*

Turbine - Generator
 Remove the sliding shoe (1) from the

sliding plate (2) in direction TE*.
NOTE: Prepare a plastic foil in

front the slide plate to protect the sta-
tor winding from slide grease (3), in
1
3 2 front the sliding shoe.
Figure 4.6-29: The sliding shoe is removed in direction TE*

4.6.13 Assembling the intermediate frame under the TE* bearing housing
 Pull or push the intermediate frame

3 (1) sideward under the TE* bearing
housing (2). To make the installation
easier, use the previously installed
rollers (welding rod Ø 5mm).
2
1
NOTE: The rotor shaft with TE*
bearing housing is still attached to the
crane with round slings (3) and lifted.
Figure 4.6-30: The intermediate frame is pushed under the TE* bearing housing

Turbine - Generator
 Adjust the intermediate frame (1) to

the TE* bearing housing (2) and in-
sert the alignment sheets (3) in be-
tween.
 Mount the upper hexagon screws (4)
2 4 and the taper pins between the TE*
bearing housing and the intermediate
frame.
 Lower the rotor shaft TE together with
3 the TE* bearing housing slowly by
1 crane onto the intermediate frame

and tighten the upper hexagon
5 screws.

the TE* bearing housing and the in-
termediate frame slowly by crane and
remove the rollers (5) below (welding
rod Ø 5mm).
Figure 4.6-31: TE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly
 Adjust the rotor shaft together with

termediate frame (1) to the mounting
holes in the generator base frame.
 Mount the lower hexagon screws (2)
and the taper pins between the inter-
1 mediate frame and the generator
base frame.
 Lower the rotor shaft TE together with
2
tighten the lower hexagon screws.
Figure 4.6-32: TE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly complete
Finally check the TE* bearing clearances on all four sides. To do this, it is necessary to remove the
TE* bearing cover and the upper TE* bearing shell. Afterwards the disassembled parts have to be
reinstalled. NOTE: If necessary, lift the rotor shaft TE* again with the crane and adjust the lower TE*
bearing shell until the bearing gaps are within the required measured values.

Turbine - Generator
4.6.14 Remove the slide plate in direction EE*
 Attach the rotor shaft EE* with round

slings directly next to the EE* bearing
1 housing to the crane.
 Lift the rotor shaft EE together with
the EE* bearing housing (1) and the
intermediate frame (2) slowly by
crane about 7mm.
2
Figure 4.6-33: EE* bearing housing and the intermediate frame lifted by crane
 Install thin rollers (e.g. welding rod Ø

5mm) (1) below the intermediate
frame.
with the EE* bearing housing and the
intermediate frame slowly by crane
2 onto the rollers (welding rod Ø 5mm).
 Demount the upper hexagon screws
(2) and the taper pins between the
1 EE* bearing housing and intermediate
frame.
Figure 4.6-34: EE* bearing housing and the intermediate frame placed on welding rod
 Lift the rotor shaft EE* together with

the EE* bearing housing (1) slowly by
1 crane about 5mm, until the intermedi-
ate frame (2) become freely.
Figure 4.6-35: EE* bearing housing lifted by crane, intermediate frame is freely

Turbine - Generator
 Pull the intermediate frame (1) on the

previously installed rollers (welding
1 rod Ø 5mm) sideways below the EE*
bearing housing out.
 Pull the slide plate (not shown), below

the EE* bearing housing in direction
EE* out.
NOTE: If necessary, install the

adjustable support elements as secu-
rity for that moment.
 Pull the intermediate frame (1) side-

1 ways below the EE* bearing housing

back in assembly position.
Figure 4.6-36: Intermediate frame pulled to the side and back again
 Adjust the intermediate frame (1) to

1 the EE* bearing housing (2) and in-
sert the alignment sheets (3) in be-
4 tween.
 Mount the upper hexagon screws (4)
and the taper pins between the EE*
bearing housing and the intermediate
3 frame.
 Lower the rotor shaft EE together with
2
the EE* bearing housing slowly by
5
crane onto the intermediate frame
and tighten the upper hexagon
screws.
 Lift the rotor shaft EE together with
the EE* bearing housing and the in-
remove the rollers (5) below (welding
rod Ø 5mm).
Figure 4.6-37: EE* bearing housing and intermediate frame assembly

Turbine - Generator
 Adjust the rotor shaft EE together with

the EE* bearing housing and the in-
1 termediate frame (1) to the mounting
holes in the generator base frame.
 Mount the lower hexagon screws (2)
and the taper pins between the inter-
2 mediate frame and the generator
base frame.
with the EE* bearing housing and the
intermediate frame slowly by crane
and tighten the lower hexagon
screws.
Figure 4.6-38: EE* bearing housing assembly complete
4.6.15 Remove the soft gasket pad from the EE* bearing
(See Generator Assembly Records; in chapter 5.0)
 Remove the EE* bearing cover from

the EE* bearing housing.
3
 Remove the taper pins (1) and hexa-
gon socket screws (2) from the EE*
1 2
bearing shells.
 Remove the upper EE* bearing shell
(3).

Turbine - Generator
 Remove the soft gasket pad (1) and

1 check the bearing clearances (2) on
all four sides.
NOTE: If necessary, lift the rotor

shaft EE* again with the crane and
adjust the lower EE* bearing shell un-
2 til the bearing gaps are within the re-
quired measured values.
Figure 4.6-40: Soft gasket pad placed on EE* bearing position

 Install the upper EE* bearing shell (1)

together with taper pins (2) and hexa-
1
gon socket screws (3) on the lower
EE* bearing shell.
2 3
 After that, install the EE* bearing cov-
er with taper pins and hexagon socket
screws on the EE* bearing housing
and tighten the hexagon socket
screws.
4.6.16 Assembling the bearing covers after the rotor installation
For further information see also chapter 4.16 Assembling the bearings, general information on
page 100, in this installation manual.
4.6.17 Checking the air gaps between rotor and stator core
(See Generator Assembly Records; in chapter 5.0 and DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Ra-
dial Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)
The rotor has been aligned and pinned via the TE* and EE* bearing housings to the centerline of
stator core. This has been done in accordance with the technical requirements in the manufacturing
plant. This factory condition must be checked and recorded after the rotor installation on site. The

Turbine - Generator
metrological check of the air gaps is carried out by 4 measurements on 2nd tooth packs between ro-
tor body and stator core in vertical and horizontal position on TE* and on EE* respectively.
(The measuring positions in the air gap: Angular positions at 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270°.)
4.6.18 Checking the bearing insulation
After installation of the rotor and before assembling of the mounted parts, the bearing insulation
should be checked. The insulation resistance between the generator shaft/ bearing shells and the
bearing housings is to check with a 100-250volt Megger. The resistance between bearing shells and
bearing housings must be at least ≥500KΩ.
4.6.19 Assembling the TE* and EE* fan blades to the rotor, general information
Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)
NOTICE
Use the measurement report from the fan blade removal, with the numbers of the fan
blades and the measured distances of each fan blade to the end of the fan hub to turn
each fan blade again into its required degree position in relation to the fan hub.
Use a depth gauge (1) to measure the distances (2) of each fan blade. Log each measured value af-
ter the setup to the corresponding fan number.
Figure 4.6-42: Depth gauge (left)
Figure 4.6-43: Measured distance between end of fan blade and edge of fan hub (right)
Before inserting the fan blades into their corresponding threaded holes coat the threads of the
blades M60*2mm thin with non-hardening sealant Hylomar. Turn the fan blades one after the other

Turbine - Generator
into the threaded holes till the thread end. Then turn the fan blades slowly back in a sideway position
so that the blades stand in a line with the rotor shaft. In this way it is possible to turn all fan blades in
the fan hub. For the adjustment of the correct angle turn each fan blade till the previously measured
value is reached.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the individual fan blades be positioned too far out, otherwise
the blades could touch the air baffle ring; after assembly of air baffle ring. One turn of the fan blade =
2 mm more or less, inwards or outwards.
For the locking of the adjustment angle insert the two adjusting pins and the two grub screws (1).
Lock the adjusting screws with LOCTITE 243. Check the measured value after adjusting and record
it behind the previously measured value (fan blade removal) in the log file.
Figure 4.6-44: Fan hub without fan blades (left)
Figure 4.6-45: Fan hub with fan blades secured by adjusting pins and grub screws (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.7 Assembling the mounted parts

4.7.1 General
NOTE
During the installation the given values in the Generator Assembly Records; in chapter
5.0 must be observed.
4.7.2 Assembling the TE* and EE* air baffle rings on the stator walls
(See Generator Assembly Records; in chapter 5.0 and DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Ra-
dial Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)
For assembling the air baffle rings proceed as follows:

Install the stud bolts (1) in the stator walls on TE* and EE*; if necessary.
- Install the crown threaded sleeves (2) on the stud bolts on TE* and EE*; if necessary.
- Divide the air baffle rings TE* and EE* into two halves; if necessary.
- Mount the lower half of air baffle ring below the rotor shaft in front the stator wall and secure it
there. Then place the upper half of the air guide ring with screws, nuts, washers, lock washers
and taper pins on the lower half and screw it on hand-tight.
- Screw the upper and lower halves tight together and secure the bolts and nuts with the lock
washers. This is done with the air baffle ring TE* and EE*.
- Mount the air baffle ring over the crown threaded sleeve to the stator wall. Mount the lock wash-
ers (3) and then the nuts (4) on the crown threaded sleeve and tighten the air baffle ring hand
tight. This is done with the air baffle ring TE* and EE*.
1 4
5 2
Figure 4.7-1: Lower levelling screw M16 for radial alignment of air baffle ring (left)
Figure 4.7-2: Details of the fastening screw connection (right)

Turbine - Generator
- For adjusting the axial distance of the air baffle rings to the stator wall, using the crown thread-
ed sleeve (2); shown on the previous page. Adjust the axial distance according the values in the
Generator Assembly Records.
- For adjusting the radial distance of the air baffle rings to the fan blades, using the two leveling
screws (5); shown on the previous page. Adjust the radial distance according the values in the
Generator Assembly Records.
- Secure the threaded sleeve with a cotter pin (6); shown on the previous page.
- Tighten the nuts (4) and secure them with the locking washer (3); shown on the previous page.
NOTE
Use a special wrench for turning the crown threaded sleeve and nut tightening, if avail-
able. See general handling guidelines; in chapter 6.0 in this installation manual.
Parting line
Air baffle ring
Figure 4.7-3: Air baffle ring mounted to the EE stator wall (left)
Figure 4.7-4: Parting line of mounted air baffle ring (right)
4.7.3 Assembling the TE* and EE*shaft bushings on the generator base frame
(See Generator Assembly Records; in chapter 5.0 and DWG 2-4742-418497 – Shaft Bushing As-
sembly, DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)
NOTE
Demount the outer air seals (divided) from the shaft bushings; if mounted on it. Then
divide the shaft bushings TE* and EE* in two halves, by means of removing the fas-
tening screws and taper pins from the parting lines; if necessary.
For assembling the shaft bushings proceed as follows:

Turbine - Generator
- Install the individual halves (1) and (2) of the shaft bushings left and right on the generator base
frame and push them on the parting line (3) together.
- Install the upper and lower fastening screws (4) and taper pins (5) and screw the opposite
halves tight together.
- Align the shaft bushings to the rotor shaft and install the taper pins and fastening screws to the
generator base frame. Use the supplied alignment plates under the shaft bushings to compen-
sate differences in height.
- After aligning the shaft bushing with taper pins screw them tightly with fastening screws (6) and
washers to the generator base frame.
NOTE
The shaft bushings were previously assembled, aligned, screwed and pinned in the fac-
tory for test purposes on the generator base frame.
6 2 4
3
Figure 4.7-5: Lower fastening screws and taper pin of shaft bushing (left)
Figure 4.7-6: Upper fastening screws and taper pin of shaft bushing (right)
4.7.4 Assembling the outer TE* and EE* air seals on the shaft bushings
(See Generator Assembly Records; in chapter 5.0 and DWG DPPPG-70024747 – Outer Air Seal
Assembly, DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances; in chapter 16.0)
NOTE
Divide the outer TE* and EE* air seals into two halves; if necessary.
The outer air seals were previously assembled, aligned and screwed in the factory for
test purposes on the shaft bushings.

Turbine - Generator
For assembling the shaft bushings proceed as follows:

- Install the individual halves (1) and (2) of the outer air seals around the rotor shaft and push
them on the parting line together.
- Install the taper pins (3) and fastening screws (4) and screw the opposite halves tight together.
- Place the insulating plates (5) behind the outer air seals and align the outer air seals to the rotor
shaft. Mount the fastening screws (6) with the insulating parts to the outer air seals and tighten
them hand-tight to the shaft bushings.
- After aligning the outer air seals with the rotor shaft screw them tightly with the fastening screws
to the shaft bushings (7).
- Install the supplied spiral hoses (8) between shaft bushings and generator base frame. Use the
supplied hose clamps to attach the hoses to the hose connectors.
- Finally check the insulation resistance of the outer air seals with a 100-250volt Megger.
NOTE
Mounted insulation parts!
Make sure that the outer air seals on both shaft bushings TE* and EE* are electrically
insulated. Check the electrical insulation with a suitable measuring instrument e.g. 100-
250volt Megger. The resistance must be at least ≥500KΩ.
2
3
5
4 8
6
Figure 4.7-7: Outer air seal mounted
Figure 4.7-8: Spiral air hose connected to the shaft bushing (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.8 Alignment of the generator to the turbine

4.8.1 General
The alignment process ensures that the generator and turbine couplings are aligned within the re-
quired tolerances. In this case the generator coupling must be aligned radially concentric and axially
parallel to the turbine coupling with an accuracy of 0.0±0.03mm. Since the alignment is measured
on the coupling, the generator rotor must be aligned along the bending line. This means that, if the
generator and turbine couplings are the lowest point, then the other two shaft ends on both ma-
chines will rise after the alignment. If an intermediate shaft is fitted between the generator and
turbine couplings, observe the required alignment tolerances for the intermediate shaft
alignment supplied by the turbine supplier. The generator base frame must not be cast until the
generator alignment has been completed!
4.8.2 Procedure of generator alignment
(See General Handling Guidelines; in chapter 6.0 and FV/MP 12-011 – Manufacturing Procedure;
in chapter 7.0 and DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances, DWG DPPPG-
70174817 – Generator Outline Drawing; in chapter 16.0)
The lateral generator alignment should be carried out first. Four greased Teflon slide plates are pro-
vided at the four corners between the support positions and the primary bearing plates for the trans-
verse sliding of the generator. To move the generator, use hydraulic cylinders shored up at steel
sections cast into the in-site concrete foundation.
The vertical generator alignment is performed when lateral generator alignment is complete. Set
screws M42*1.5*100mm are provided in the generator base frame to allow generator movements in
vertical directions. The load applied to the set screws M42*1.5*100mm during tightening should not
exceed the maximum tightening torque; see Table 4.8-1 on Page 59. During the vertical generator
alignment, it is preferred to lift one side evenly at a time in such way that the generator is lifted in
parallel on one side and without any distortion.
The vertical generator alignment is performed when horizontal alignment is complete.
NOTE
The generator must not rest on any of the four primary bearing plates 400*400*20mm
when the generator alignment is complete. The generator is only standing on the set
screws M42*1.5*100mm at this time. The four Teflon slide plates on the primary bear-
ing plates are now loose and should be removed.
Apply foam tubes or Denso bandages to the set screws M42*1.5*100mm to insulate
them later from the casting compound and to be able to turn them back after casting of
the generator base frame; see also examples on the next page.

Turbine - Generator
Set screw M42*1.5*100mm, here at the

corners, over the primary bearing plates
Foam tube / Denso tape
removed
400*400*20mm
Figure 4.8-1: Primary bearing plate after the alignment of the generator
Set screw M42*1.5*100mm, here at the generator

base frame, over the leveling plates
Foam tube / Denso tape
150*150*20mm
Figure 4.8-2: Leveling plate after the alignment of the generator
Set screws size M24*1.5*100mm M30*1.5*100mm M42*1.5*100mm M42*1.5*100mm
Max. torque during

160 330 580 940
alignment [Nm]
Table 4.8-1: Maximum tightening torques for different set screw sizes
4.8.3 Preparations of generator alignment
Rotor Clearances, DWG DPPPG-70174817 – Generator Outline Drawing, in chapter 16.0)

Turbine - Generator
Following measurements are taken during the alignment procedure:
- Check the axial and radial bearing clearances.

- Check and align the axial position of the rotor coupling to the TE* bearing housing. If necessary,
set the axial distance, between outer coupling flange and TE* bearing housing; measured at the
sealing surface of TE* bearing housing without labyrinth and insulation ring (e.g. Teflon or hard
gasket), on the dimensions X+A+B.
Dimension A=4.1mm (thermal expansion of the generator rotor during operation).
Dimension B=770mm (generator rotor in magnetic centre, cold).
Dimension X= “axial thrust” (thermal expansion of the turbine rotor or gear shaft during operation).
NOTE: Dimension X (if so far known) must be added to dimensions A and B.
- Dimensions X+A+B = Xmm+4.1mm+770mm must be set between outer coupling flange and the
sealing flange of TE* bearing housing, before the generator pre-alignment can start. The di-
mension X “axial thrust” can be obtained from the turbine or gearbox manufacturer.
- NOTE: A measuring distance between the couplings is required for checking the axial align-
ment. When setting the coupling flange to the dimensions X+A+B, take into account the re-
quired measuring distance between the turbine and generator coupling, e.g. approx. 10mm.
NOTE: The Dimensions are then Xmm+4.1mm+770mm-10mm.
Example:
Move the generator rotor in its bearings until the dimensions Xmm+4.1mm+770mm are set. Reduce
it by 10mm (measuring distance). Then move the entire generator base frame so that the generator
coupling is positioned exactly 10mm in front of the turbine or gearbox coupling.
NOTE: Alignments with smaller measuring distances between the couplings

For a smaller measuring distance (e.g. 2 or 4mm) you only need to move the generator
rotor in the direction of the turbine or gearbox (inside the bearings) after positioning the
generator base frame.
The axial position of the generator base frame in relation to the turbine is no longer
changed by the displacement of its rotor in the bearings. The previously reduced 10mm
add up to the nominal dimension after coupling both couplings.
NOTE: Alignments with intermediate shafts

If there is an intermediate shaft between generator and turbine, it is necessary to know
or to measure the exact length of the intermediate shaft (L=Ymm).
If the dimension Xmm+4.1mm+770mm has been set at the outer coupling flange, move
the entire generator base frame so that the generator coupling is positioned exactly
Ymm in front of the turbine coupling; (L=Ymm; length of intermediate shaft).

Turbine - Generator
The generator base frame now has its final axial position, which must not be changed
during the pre-alignment of the generator to the turbine.
NOTE: If necessary, then position axial dial gauges to the generator base frame so that
axial changes to the generator base frame can be detected and corrected at any time.
NOTE
The dimensions A and B can be found in the drawing Axial and Radial Rotor Clearanc-
es; in chapter 16.0.
4.8.4 Execution of the generator pre-alignment
To measure and correct the generator pre-alignment, proceed as follows:

- Moisten the bearing positions and bearing shells with superheated steam cylinder oil or
(BAL200 Oil) for an easily movement of generator rotor; if no shaft lifting oil can be used. NOTE:
When using viscous cylinder oil or (BAL200 Oil), allow for a short time for the shafts to lower in
the bearings after rotation.
- Make the axial and radial measurements at four positions of the rotor couplings, respectively at
12h, 3h, 6h and 9h. To eliminate the coupling run-out error and the axial movement error, make
these four measurements in four different shafts positions; in 0/360°, 90°, 180° and 270°. That
means, turn the shaft system together, after the four measurements at 12h, 3h, 6h and 9h, ex-
act 90° further into the next angle and measuring position, until you got four by four measure-
ments. Use a feeler gauge and a straightedge between the couplings when performing the gen-
erator pre-alignment. Calculate the displacement values for the generator on TE* and EE* from
the individual axial measurements of the coupling pairs at the 12h, 3h, 6h and 9h position.
- Do the generator pre-alignment by shifting the complete generator base frame. Move the gen-
erator base frame during lateral coupling alignment as low-warp as possible onto the four prima-
ry plates. Use e.g. hydraulic cylinders for the lateral generator movement and the set screws
M42*1.5*100mm for the vertical generator movement. The load applied to the set screws during
tightening should not exceed the maximum tightening torque; see Table 4.8-1 on Page 59.
NOTE: Because of the lower anchor plates is it absolutely necessary to loosen the special
foundation bolts before lifting the generator.
- Make the axial and radial measurements and its alignment corrections as long as necessary,
until the measurements are within the maximum allowed tolerances and the generator is posi-
tioned in the centre axis of the turbine rotor.
- If an intermediate shaft is present, perform alignment corrections of the generator as well as
possible with a straightening beam in height and side or use an extended measuring device
from one coupling to the other.

Turbine - Generator
- A generator fine alignment can only be done after the intermediate shaft has been installed. To
carry out the generator pre-alignment, the intermediate shaft can only be fitted when the existing
angular misalignment of the couplings is small enough to allow the intermediate shaft to be fit-
ted. Attention: Otherwise coupling spigot and recess of the couplings may be deformed.
4.8.5 Assembling the intermediate shaft, optional
If no intermediate shaft is present go further with the next chapter
Assemble the intermediate shaft between the generator coupling and the turbine coupling. Install the
intermediate shaft so, that the recesses of both ends are centered and held in the next coupling
without a complete closing. Both pairs of coupling flanges need a measuring gap of 2-3mm. To pre-
vent the intermediate shaft from falling out, two auxiliary bolts or threaded rods (not supplied) with
thinner diameter are mounted into the couplings on both sides of the intermediate shaft and secured
with washers and nuts.
NOTE
Before installing the intermediate shaft, move the generator rotor in its bearings slightly
towards EE*, so that there is sufficient space between the couplings (for the recess
overhang). When moving the generator rotor in its bearings, use turbine oil or hot steam
cylinder oil /BAL-200 oil and turn the shaft slightly. Attention: Observe the alignment
instructions of the turbine manufacturer.
4.8.6 Execution of the generator fine alignment
To measure and correct the generator fine alignment, proceed as follows:

- Moisten the shaft ends and bearing shells with superheated steam cylinder oil or (BAL200 Oil)
for an easily movement of generator rotor; if no shaft lifting oil can be used. Note: When using
viscous cylinder oil or (BAL200 Oil), allow for a short time for the shafts to lower in the bearings
after rotation.
When an intermediate shaft is available:
- Make the axial measurements with intermediate shaft at four positions of both pairs of cou-
plings, respectively at 12h, 3h, 6h and 9h. To eliminate the coupling run-out error and the axial
movement error, make these four measurements in four different shafts positions; in 0/360°,
90°, 180° and 270°. That means, turn the shaft system together, after the four measurements at
12h, 3h, 6h and 9h, exact 90° further into the next angle and measuring position, until you got
four by four measurements. Use a feeler gauge or gauge-blocks for the axial measurements be-
tween both pairs of couplings. Calculate the displacement values for the generator on TE* and

Turbine - Generator
EE* from the individual axial measurements of the coupling pairs at the 12h, 3h, 6h and 9h posi-
tion.
If no intermediate shaft is available:
- Install the measuring device on the coupling, consisting of a radial measuring point and two ax-
ial measuring points.
- Make the axial and radial measurements at four positions of the couplings, respectively at 12h,
3h, 6h and 9h. Make the four by four measurements as described above and calculate the dis-
placement values.
- Do the generator fine alignment by shifting the complete generator base frame. Move the gen-
erator base frame during lateral coupling alignment as low-warp as possible onto the four prima-
ry bearing plates. Use e.g. hydraulic cylinders for the lateral generator movement and the set
screws M42*1.5*100mm for the vertical generator movement. The load applied to the set
screws during tightening should not exceed the maximum tightening torque; see Table 4.8-1 on
Page 59.
NOTE: Because of the lower anchor plates is it absolutely necessary to loosen the special
foundation bolts before lifting the generator.
- Before recording the individual alignment values for the measurements, switch off the lift oil
pumps after turning the shaft system to each measurement position at 0/360°, 90°, 180° and
270°.
- Make the axial and radial measurements and its alignment corrections as long as necessary,
until the measurements are within the tolerances.
Record the last alignment check including the axial and radial bearing clearances.
Partial tightening torques for special foundation bolts (M42*2895) in [Nm]

Numbers of set screws
(M42*1.5*100) per anchor
M30 M36 M42 M48 M52 M56 M64
0–1 20 30 40 50 60 70 90
2 100 100 200 250 280 320 470
Table 4.8-2: Partial tightening torques for special foundation bolts before casting
NOTE
The allowed tolerance is about 10%, a higher partial tightening torque is not admissible.

Turbine - Generator
4.9 Completion of the work for the casting of the generator

4.9.1 Casting of special foundation bolts
(See FV/MP 12-010 – Manufacturing Procedure; in chapter 7.0 and DWG DPPPG-70086152 – An-
choring; in chapter 16.0)
Remove any dust and sand from the foundation bolt holes. No oil or grease residue must be left.
The foundation bolt holes should be watered and be kept humid continuously for not less than 6
hours before pouring the casting material. Use suitable means, e.g., compressed air to remove any
water accumulated on the foundation bolt holes after watering in order to avoid the formation of cavi-
ties. Apply Denso bandages to the M42*1.5*100mm set screws to isolate them from the casting
compound to be inserted and then turn them back again
NOTE
Before the special foundation bolts M42*2895mm are grouted, all special foundation
bolts must be positioned in the middle of the mounting holes of the base frame. Those
still ensure a subsequent adjustment of the generator after the casting of the special
foundation bolts.
Fill the casting material (not supplied) through the prepared casting channels only into the founda-
tion bolt holes of in-site concrete foundation. Determine and have the necessary quantity of casting
ready according to the volume to be filled. The casting process must not be interrupted. No casting
material must spill. So, the filling process should be stopped in time. After casting the special foun-
dation bolts wait 24 hours.
 M42*1.5*100mm set screw (1)
 M42*2895mm special foundation bolt (2) with

2 spherical washer /conical seat and M42 DIN
3
1 nut
 Generator base frame (3)
Figure 4.9-1: Special foundation bolts are already casted; the base frame not yet
4.9.2 Check the generator alignment and realignment, if necessary

Turbine - Generator
Before casting of the generator base frame and the in-site concrete foundation (casting material not
scope of supply), a final check of the generator alignment with the turbine must be carried out.
Compare the measured values with those from the last measurement. Depending on the results ob-
tained, decide whether to realign the generator base frame before you start with grouting, or whether
minimum deviations from the ideal alignment, after grouting the generator base frame and tension-
ing the special foundation bolts, can be compensated for by laying the TE* and EE* bearing hous-
ings.
NOTE
If any realignment is required, follow the instructions given in chapter 4.8.6 Execution
of the generator fine alignment on Page 62.
4.9.3 Preparation for casting the generator base frame

Remove any dust and sand from the substrate. No oil or grease residue must be left. The casting
area of concrete foundation should be watered and be kept humid continuously for not less than 6
hours before pouring the casting material. Use suitable means, e.g., compressed air to remove any
water accumulated on the concrete foundation after watering in order to avoid the formation of cavi-
ties.
Figure 4.9-2: Prepared auxiliaries for the casting process (left)
Figure 4.9-3: Prepared casting process (right)
4.9.4 Casting the generator base frame and the in-site concrete foundation
(See FV/MP 12-011 – Manufacturing Procedure; in chapter 7.0 and DWG DPPPG-70174817 –
Generator Outline Drawing, DWG DPPPG-70086152 – Anchoring; in chapter 16.0)

Turbine - Generator
The casting height must not be less than 20mm in every case and must be in level with the upper
side of the lower generator base frame plate, according the DWG DPPPG-70174817. Every pouring
field needs to be filled without interruption in a single working day. It is absolutely necessary to ob-
serve the application life as specified by the casting material manufacturer.
Make certain that the casting material is poured in continuously and without interruption as casting
material expansion starts after 15 minutes, approximately. Any interruption in the casting process
may lead to a flow retention effect and thus to dangerous cavities in the casting layer. When you use
mixers, please bear in mind, that this may accelerate the setting process, depending on the material
used. The casting material to water proportion of mixture should be observed as specified by the
manufacturer. Do not use concrete vibrators. Always start the casting process from a narrow side in
order to prevent air inclusions. The flow of material may be enhanced when the casting material is
moved by a tamper in the filler stub, or by using sheet metal strips, chains or ropes under the plates.
Immediately check whether a sufficient casting height is achieved along the entire base frame cir-
cumference and at any inspection openings.

A separation plate is inserted vertically into the feed hopper when the casting work is completed.
Any excess material is removed and dressed after complete hardening.
Figure 4.9-4: Casting of generator base frame (left)
Figure 4.9-5: Casting height of generator base frame (right)
4.9.5 Prestressing the special foundation bolts
The concrete rim between generator base frame and casting material formwork should be kept
moist to prevent cracking. Do not strip the formwork or apply any load to the grouted material unless
at least 24 hours have passed after casting. The set screws M42*1.5*100mm needs to be turned

Turbine - Generator
back by at least one thread after the complete hardening of the casting material. After this, preload
the special foundation bolts to the corresponding value, see also Table 4.9-1.
Old concrete founda-

Anchor Thread New concrete founda- Bolt de-
tion at least 3 to 4
size pitch tion or steel foundation sign
years old
∆lO in ∆lN in
Metric mm MO in Nm MN in Nm
mm/m mm/m
M36 4 0.70 850 0.95 1100 DIN
M42 4.5 0.70 1400 0.95 1800 DIN
Table 4.9-1: Tightening torques for different types of foundations and anchor sizes
Figure 4.9-6: Detail of generator base frame anchoring (left)
Figure 4.9-7: Hydraulic tool for the pretension of special foundation bolts (right)
4.9.6 Checking the generator alignment and realignment, if necessary
After the special foundation bolts have been prestressed, check the final generator alignment to the
turbine. If necessary, realign the generator shaft.
NOTE
After the completion of the in-site concrete foundation, any required generator rea-
lignment is only possible by repositioning of the bearing housing TE* and EE*.

Turbine - Generator
4.9.7 Checking the bearing insulation
Before coupling of the generator rotor to the turbine, the bearing insulation should be checked.
NOTE
Check the bearing insulation between the bearing shells TE* and EE* to their bearing
housings. To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the grounding cable of bearing
shell TE* on the bearing cover TE*. Rotor grounding brushes are demounted or lifted!
Make sure, that all bearing shells TE* and EE*, are electrically insulated. Check the
electrical insulation with a suitable measuring instrument e.g. 100-250volt Megger. The
resistance must be at least ≥500KΩ.
2 NOTE: Before start insulation check, dis-

connect the potential cable (1) of bearing shell
3 1 TE* from the earthing point (2) on TE*.
NOTE: Rotor grounding brushes (3) (if

mounted) must be lifted, before start of the in-
sulation check!
After the measurement, install the potential ca-
ble of bearing shell TE* back to the earthing
point on TE*!
Figure 4.9-8: Bearing cover TE* with grounding point
NOTE: Install the potential cable (1) of the

bearing shell EE* on the insulated pin (2) at the
bearing cover EE*.
Figure 4.9-9: Bearing cover EE* with insulated point

Turbine - Generator
4.9.8 Securing the special foundation bolts
(See DWG DPPPG-70086152 – Anchoring; in chapter 16.0)
Secure the special foundation bolts M42*2895mm as required; see DWG DPPPG-70086152. Se-
cure the special foundation bolts after pretensioning by spot welding between the special foundation
bolts and their M42 nuts and between the lower anchor plates 280*280*30mm D50 and their M42
nuts.
For corrosion protection, apply grease, e.g. cup grease, to the projecting end of the special founda-
tion bolts including the nut’s after tightening. Molybdenum lubricating varnish is not admissible for
corrosion prevention.
Figure 4.9-10: Welding and spot welding points
4.9.9 Assembling the coupling shear pins and Allen® screws
When the final assembly and alignment control of the generator to the turbine fully described in the
installation instructions is completed, the couplings are being prepared for mounting the shear pins
and Allen®screws. Observe the guidelines for the coupling installation of turbine-generators and its
specifications (not provided by Siemens Erfurt).
Moisten the shaft ends and bearing shells with superheated steam cylinder oil or (BAL200 oil) for
light movement of the generator rotor and turn the rotor slowly to align the coupling halves with the
holes from the shear pins as close as possible and bring the couplings together. Use the lifting oil
pump, if it’s possible.
- Clean the surfaces of generator coupling flanges.

- Install the twenty-two Ø60mm shear pins.

Turbine - Generator
- Each shear pin has to be secured by a grub screw M8. The grub screw has to be secured by a
hit of a center punch.
- Furthermore the both coupling flanges have to be screwed together with twenty-two M20 Allen®
screws.
- Tighten the twenty-two M20 Allen® screws gently and pull the coupling flanges together.
- Tighten the twenty-two M20 Allen® screws on generator flange in a first round with 50% in a
second round with 100% of the rated torque. Perform a run out check on the couplings after
each round of tightening.
- Measure the axial position of generator rotor in cool conditions (Dimension
A=4.1mm+B=770mm+required "axial thrust turbine/gear" =Xmm) between the plane surface of
the rotor coupling and the sealing surface of the TE* bearing housing (without gasket).
- After that, secure the twenty-two M20 Allen® screws with a hit of a center punch or one by one,
with LOCTITE.

Turbine - Generator
4.10 Assembling the enclosure

4.10.1 Preparing the enclosure before assembling
(See DWG DPPPG-70184942 – Enclosure, DWG DPPPG-70186487 – Extra Cover EE*, DWG
DPPPG-70116284 – Transport and Lifting Points; in chapter 16.0)
After the delivery of the enclosure has been received, check the assembly condition on site. In case
of a completely assembled enclosure, the additional cover EE* and if present TE* must be removed
before the enclosure is mounted on the generator base frame.
NOTE
Do not install the enclosure in complete mounting condition on the generator base
frame! That means enclosure and extra cover EE* together. The complete assembly is
only allowed for single transports up to the generator location but not for mounting on
the generator itself.
 Use the 4 outer attachment

points (1) on the roof of the
complete enclosure.
Figure 4.10-1: Hitch of the complete assembly, enclosure here with extra cover EE*

Turbine - Generator
 Use the 4 inner attachment

points (1) (near the centre) on
1 the roof of the enclosure.
Figure 4.10-2: Hitch of the enclosure, here without extra cover EE*
 Use the four attachment points

(2) on the roof of the extra
2
cover EE*.
Figure 4.10-3: Hitch of the extra cover EE*

Turbine - Generator
4.10.2 Assembling the four cover guides
Install the four cover guides (1) at the corners of the generator base frame according to their marked
numbers (2) at the four mounting positions (3) on the generator base frame. Use all supplied screws
and washers. NOTE: The four cover guides could be preassembled in position with only two screws.
3
2
Figure 4.10-4: Cover guides (left)
Figure 4.10-5: Mounting position of the cover guide (right)
4.10.3 Assembling the enclosure on the generator base frame
(See DWG DPPPG-70184942 – Enclosure, DWG DPPPG-70116284 – Transport and Lifting Points;
in chapter 16.0)
Before assembling the enclosure, a final visual inspection should be carried out to detect any foreign
material, dirt or damage to the component parts. Check and remove every desiccant bag under-
neath stator core. Carry out a final inspection inside the generator stator base frame and fill out the
generator check list (in chapter 15.0) in Point 4.E. The supporting surfaces of the enclosure seals
should be cleaned thoroughly. Suspend the enclosure horizontally at the four attachment points and
lift it with crane over the generator stator while guiding it; see Figure 4.10-2 on Page 72. Lower the
enclosure slowly over the generator while continuously checking all sides. No component part must
be touched during lowering until the four cover guides are reached. Check additionally for dis-
connected cables and parts, (if necessary, fix them temporary).
NOTE
Check the rubber sealing of the enclosure on the bottom side, before setting the enclo-
sure on the base frame of generator.
If necessary, glue the rubber sealing at the bottom side of the enclosure; see also DWG
DPPPG-70184942. The rubber seals and PATTEX-PX are inc. the delivery.

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.10-6: Enclosure lifted on the attachment points (left)

Figure 4.10-7: Enclosure mounted on the generator (right)
The four cover guides, at the four corners, are used to align the enclosure when it is put down on the
generator. Install the enclosure onto the base frame of generator and concrete foundation.
Cover guide
Cover guide
Adjustment element
Figure 4.10-8: Removable cover guide fixed at the base frame with four screws (left)
Figure 4.10-9: Cover guide and adjustment element of enclosure (right)
CAUTION
After putting down the enclosure remove the two removable cover guides on the cool-
er side. Number the mounting position of the removable cover guides for a later dis-
mounting and mounting of enclosure!
WARNING: If you do not remove the cover guides, the cooling may deteriorate and
cause thermal problems for the generator.

Turbine - Generator
NOTE
After putting down the enclosure completely, check the correct fit of all sealing surfaces
at the base frame of generator at the casing walls.
4.10.4 Assembling the fan unit and its ducts on the brush gear system
(See Installation and Operating Instructions for Filter and Fan for Slip Ring Unit and also DWG
DPPPG-70186586 – Filter/Fan Unit for Slip Ring Unit; in chapter 10.0)
An exhaust air volume of 2000m³/h with unrestricted availability is required for the cooling of the slip
ring system of generator.
The types of air treatment applied after the entry into the air filter unit are as follows:
- Filtering and
- Conveying
The plant concept intended is as follows:
- Install the outlet air sound absorber (1) on the outside of the extra cover EE*.
- Install the two inlet air filter units (2) left and right on the outside of the extra cover EE*.
- Install the duct moulded part (3) as a transition on the inside wall of the extra cover EE*.
- Install the fan unit (4) on the top of the brush gear system.
- Install the duct moulded part (5) as a 90° bend on the fan unit (4).
- Finally connect duct moulded part (3) and duct moulded part (5) with a duct fitting with canvas
connection (6), after the installation of the extra cover EE* to the enclosure. Therefore see the
next chapter 4.10.5 Assembling the extra cover EE* to the enclosure.
All examples are shown on the next page.

Turbine - Generator
4
Brush gear system
Figure 4.10-10: Extra cover EE* with 2 air inlet filter and 1 air outlet sound absorber
4.10.5 Assembling the extra cover EE* to the enclosure
(See DWG DPPPG-70184942 – Enclosure, DWG DPPPG-70186487 – Extra Cover EE*; in chapter
16.0)
For the installation of the extra cover on EE* proceed as follow:
- Check the extra cover EE* on the inside to ensure it is clean.
- Check the rubber sealing on the connection surface for intactness. If necessary glue the corre-
sponding rubber gasket on the parting line to the connecting surface; using PATTEX PX.
- Sling the extra cover EE* in the vertical position to the four transport lugs (weld-on eye plates)
with adequate load-carrying capacity at a maximum of 90°.
- Guide the extra cover EE* with two ropes during transportation and mount it with a crane.
- Align and bolt the extra cover EE* to the enclosure, using the supplied eighteen hexagon
screws M16*60mm and their associated washers and nuts. To align the height of the additional
cover EE*, use the two adjustment elements at the lower corners.

Turbine - Generator
- Connect all electrical consumers (e.g. hood light, if available) to the related junction boxes.
- Install the gratings inside the extra cover EE* and the two noise absorber filter housings outside.
- Install the cover plates around the lube oil pipes on the enclosure after installation of the oil pip-
ing through the side of enclosure.
 Mount the extra cover EE*

with the connection points (1)
on the enclosure, using the re-
lated fixing screws.
 Adjust the height of the extra
cover EE*, if necessary with
the adjustment elements (2) at
1 the lower frame.

 Mount the gratings (3) of the

service platforms to the left
and right of the brush system,
using the related fixing
screws.
3
Figure 4.10-11: Extra cover EE*

Turbine - Generator
4.11 Assembling the upper main bracket with high-voltage bushings

4.11.1 General
The upper main current bracket has been already mounted, aligned and pinned to the generator en-
closure by the manufacturer for test purposes. For assembling use the supplied mounting material.
4.11.2 Assembling the upper main current bracket on the enclosure
(See DWG DPPPG-70073000 – Main Current Bracket; in chapter 16.0)
NOTE
Use the supplied gasket, screws, washer and taper pins for the assembly. Check the
correct fit and sealing of the upper main current bracket. Avoid damages on the high-
voltage bushings.
Lift the upper main current bracket with crane on the four lifting eyes (1) and place it carefully on the
recess of enclosure. Guide the upper main current bracket with ropes during the lifting. Check the
flat gasket (2) cellular rubber 8mm before mounting the upper current main bracket. During placing
the upper main current bracket, use the taper pins Ø10*80mm (3) for aligning. Mount the upper main
current bracket with the fastening screws M10*50mm (4) which must then be secured with LOCTITE
243. The flange connection must be air-tight, if necessary additionally sealed with TEROSTAT 33.
1
1
1 4
3
Figure 4.11-1: Upper main bracket in the factory (left)
Figure 4.11-2: Upper main bracket mounted on the enclosure (right)
4.11.3 Assembling the upper flexible links to the high-voltage bushings
(See DWG DPPPG-70190058 – Bushings Assembly, DWG 1-2570-503923 – Assembly Instruction

for Flexible Link Installation; in chapter 16.0)

Turbine - Generator
The upper flexible links has been already mounted and aligned to the high-voltage bushings by the
manufacturer for test purposes. For assembling use the mounting material and securing elements
supplied by the manufacturer. The upper flexible links and compensation parts (if any) were as-
signed to each individual phase and marked according to their assembly positions. If necessary, use
the inspection openings beside the enclosure for mounting the upper flexible links. The screw con-
nections of the flexible links should be tightened with 50Nm.
CAUTION
Make absolutely certain that no object can fall down during work in the end-winding
cavity! It is useful to empty all pockets before beginning the works. If any part is lost in
spite of all precautions, it must be found in every case!!
Partlist
Pos. Description Bezeichnung

5 Flexible Link Dehnungsband

6 Lock Washer Sicherungsblech
7 Base Plate Unterlegscheibe
8 Hexagon Bolt Sechskantschraube

9 Twinnut Zwillingsmutter
10 Conical Spring Washer Cap Spannscheibenkapsel
11 Conical Spring Washer Spannscheibe
Figure 4.11-3: Details for flexible link connection on the line side (left)
Figure 4.11-4: Part list (right)
NOTE
Retighten all screws on phase connection applying a nominal torque of 50 Nm twelve
hours after the installation of the flexible links! Bend the doubled lock washer only after
retightening as above!
REMINDER: Mount the flexible links (1) and compensation parts (2) on their phase connection,
where they were temporarily connected; e.g. with plastic straps, shown in Figure 4.11-6.
After this, thoroughly clean and remove any foreign material from the surrounding area after the in-
stallation. Then close previously opened man holes at the enclosure air tight.
Examples are shown on the next page.

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.11-5: Upper flexible links mounted with compensation part (left)
Figure 4.11-6: Upper flexible links mounted complete (right)

4.11.4 Assembling the neutral point connections, general information
(See DWG DPPPG-70188684 – Neutral Point Connection; in chapter 16.0)
Install the neutral point connections using the flexible links (3), copper bars (4), bolts, washers and
nuts supplied by the manufacturer; see Figure 4.11-8. The tightening torque of screw connections is
50Nm.
3
4
Figure 4.11-7: Current transformers (left)
Figure 4.11-8: Flexible links and copper bars on the neutral point connection (right)
NOTE
Retighten all screws on the electrical connections to 50Nm twelve hours after the instal-
lation of the flexible links! Bend the locking plates only after retightening!

Turbine - Generator
4.12 Assembling the neutral point cubicle

4.12.1 General
(See DWG DPPPG-70184084 – Neutral Point Cubicle Outline Drawing & Single Line Diagram; in
chapter 9.0)
The neutral point cubicle has been already mounted and aligned to the generator enclosure by the
manufacturer for test purposes. For the assembling use the supplied mounting material.
4.12.2 Lifting and mounting the neutral point cubicle on the enclosure
For the installation of the neutral point cubicle (~1050kg), check the 100*20mm mounting frame and
the 5mm gasket on the roof of the enclosure.
Set the neutral point cubicle together with the 5mm gasket on the mounting frame, insert and tight all
eight fixing screws M12*20mm. For the lifting of the neutral point cubicle use the four lifting eyes on
top. During lifting guide the cubicle with nylon ropes to avoid any uninspected movements. Connect
the earthing cable of the cubicle to the earthing point of the enclosure.
L-bar with lifting eyes
Hole for fixing screw
Figure 4.12-1: Four upper lifting eyes are on the two L-bars (left)
Figure 4.12-2: Mounting holes for the lower fixing screws are inside the cubicle (right)
NOTE
If the mounting frame is not welded to the enclosure, proceed as follows:
Lift the neutral point cubicle slightly by crane and fasten the mounting frame together
with the 5mm flat gasket to the bottom of the cubicle using the eight M12*20mm fixing
screws. Lift the neutral point cubicle over the upper main current bracket and place it on
the enclosure.

Turbine - Generator
Align the cubicle with its mounting frame to the center axis of the enclosure and to the
upper main bracket.
In a first step: Fasten the mounting frame to the enclosure with spot welds.
In a second step: Loosen the eight fixing screws M12*20mm and remove the cubicle
together with the 5mm flat gasket from the mounting frame. Then fully weld the mount-
ing frame to the enclosure.
After cooling down, clean the welds and the area around them. Paint the mounting
frame and welds with protective paint. Place the previously removed 5mm flat gasket on
the mounting frame and mount the neutral point cubicle on it using the M12*20mm
mounting screws.
Enclosure
Figure 4.12-3: Neutral point cubicle mounted on the enclosure (left)
Figure 4.12-4: Detail of the 100*20mm mounting frame and the 5mm gasket (right)
To connect the neutral grounding cable (1), from the neutral earthing transformer to the neutral point
connection, see DWG DPPPG-70184084. Connect the M.V. current transformers (T3.1L1-T3.3L3)
of the neutral point connection with their power supply.

Turbine - Generator
4.13 Assembling the cooler unit

4.13.1 Unloading the case from the transport vehicle
- 2 pieces steel ropes about 16m (1) with an adequate load-carrying capacity shall be used for
unloading, cooler unit weight without packing (net 17287kg).
- Sling the case at the marked slinging points of the case in accordance with Figure 4.13-1.
- Place the case onto a plane surface in order to ensure that it uniformly supported.
- Check the packaging material for damage
Figure 4.13-1: Details of transportation case
4.13.2 Removing the packing material
- Remove metallic edge protectors on the top and bottom sides

- Using a dog spike bar and a wrecking bar, force apart the joints of the side parts (2), front end
parts (3) and lid (4), and lift off the lid (4) by means of a crane.
- Unfasten the connection linking the front end part (3) to the side part (2) and to the bottom by
means of a dog spike bar and wrecking bars.
- Cautiously remove the front end part (3), side part (2) front end part (3) and side part (2) con-
secutively by means of a crane in accordance with Figure 4.13-1.
- Unfasten the tying elements on the case bottom and remove them.
- Remove the aluminium and foamed plastic sheeting.
- Remove the accessories box with the pallet bottom fastened on the case bottom.
- Check the accessories for completeness in accordance with enclosed packing list.
- Perform visual inspection of visible outside surfaces of the cooler unit.
- Fasten the cooler unit in pairs by means of one suspension bracket each, adequate load-carry-
ing capacity to the four pieces load rings VRBK-FIX-10 metric tonnes as shown in the figures on
the next page. Use closed system type load-take-ups such as hook guards or clevises.

Turbine - Generator
≈17.3 tons
VRBK-FIX 10t VRBK-FIX 10t
≈2891
VRBS-Fix 10t
Figure 4.13-2: Details of horizontal lift – 1 crane

≈8.65 tons
≈17.3 tons
≈8.65 tons
≈2490
Figure 4.13-3: Details of horizontal lift – 2 cranes
- Uniformly lift the cooler unit with 2 cranes to such an extent only that the sling chains or ropes
become tensioned.
- Undo the screwed connections between the cooler unit and the case bottom.
- Cautiously lift the cooler unit in order to avoid damage to the rubber seal on the frame opening
pointing downwards and remove the case bottom.
- Turn round the cooler unit in the suspended conditions until the cooler unit comes to be sus-
pended in the centre of gravity as shown in the figures on the next page.

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.13-4: Turning the cooler unit with two cranes (left)
Figure 4.13-5: Put the cooler unit onto a plane surface (right)
≈8.65 tonnes ≈8.65 tonnes

≈2490
Figure 4.13-6: Details of vertical lift – 2 cranes
- Place the cooler unit onto a plane surface.

- Remove the lower load-carrying attachments.
- Fasten the cooler unit in pairs on the upper load rings, each with adequate load-carrying ca-
pacity to the two pieces load rings VRBS-Fix 10 metric tonnes and two pieces load rings VRBK-
Fix 10 metric tonnes.
- Put the cooler unit onto a plane surface, as shown in Figure 4.13-6.

Turbine - Generator
NOTE:
When putting the cooler down, make sure that the heat exchanger flanges or the leak-
age water sensor housings do not touch the floor; use wooden beams!
4.13.3 Assembling the cooler unit to the enclosure
(See Cooling System; in chapter 10.0 and DWG DPPPG-70189302 – Cooler Cover General Draw-
ing, DWG DPPPG-70189303 – Cooler Cover; in chapter 16.0)
- Perform a visual inspection of the cooler unit inclusive of the cooling elements and internals.
- To ensure the required cleanliness of all air-carrying components, keep the cooler unit clean be-
fore mounting to the generator enclosure. Also check that no loose parts remain inside the
cooler hood.
- Check the foundation dimensions. Check the rubber seal in the flange area of the cooler unit for
intactness. If necessary glue the rubber on the flange connection of cooler unit.
- Demount the 2 cover plates for the 2 upper threaded rods M20*350mm (1) from the cooler unit.
- Mount two upper threaded rods M20*350mm (1) loose with rubber buffers, washers and M20
nuts in the internal brackets of cooler unit; seen in Figure 4.13-7.
- Mount two lower threaded rods M20*480mm (2) (pulling tool) loose with the weld-on parts,
washers and nuts in the elongated mounting hole of the welded-on angles at the lower ends of
the cooler unit; seen in Figure 4.13-7. The welded-on parts of the lower threaded rods (pulling
tool) should show in direction to the enclosure.
≈17.3 tons
≈2826
Figure 4.13-7: Details of vertical lift – 1 crane 2

Turbine - Generator
- Sing the cooler unit in the operating position to the two pieces load rings VRBS-Fix-10 metric
tonnes and two pieces load rings VRBK-Fix-10 metric tonnes, by means of load take-ups with 4
ropes, adequate load-carrying capacity at 35 degrees maximum. If necessary, note the different
rope length to hang the cooler unit on all sides in spirit level.
NOTICE
The cooler unit must remain suspended on the crane and secured against sagging, as
long the support legs installed, because the two upper threaded rods M20*350mm (1)
are not able to support the weight of the complete cooler unit (weight 17287kg)!
≈2826
Inner support legs
Outer support legs

Figure 4.13-8: Details of mounting the cooler unit (left)
Figure 4.13-9: Details of mounting the legs (right)
- Lift the cooler unit (weight 17287kg), by means of crane or chain hoists with adequate load ca-
pacities and mount it to the flange openings of the enclosure.

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.13-10: Support legs for cooler unit (left)
Figure 4.13-11: Mounting of the cooler unit (right)

- Align the cooler unit with the flange openings to the openings of enclosure. Try to align the
cooler unit longitudinally in spirit level to the enclosure.
- Mount the two upper threaded rods M20*350mm, from the roof of the cooler unit, into the ap-
propriate anchor plates of the enclosure. Secure the threaded rods with rubber buffer, washers
and M20 nuts.
- Tighten the M20 nuts of the two upper threaded rods M20*350mm hand-tight and pull the cooler
unit in the upper area against the mounting flange of enclosure.
- Align the two lower threaded rods M20*480mm (pulling tool) in the centre of the elongated
mounting holes of the two lower welded-on angles.
- Weld the welded-on parts of the two lower threaded rods M20*480mm to the enclosure; as
shown in DWG DPPPG-70189302 and Figure 4.13-13 on Page 90. Remove previously the paint
in the welding area and renew the paint after the welding works.
- After cooling the welding tighten the M20 nuts of the two lower threaded rods M20*480mm
hand-tight and pull the cooler unit in the lower area against the enclosure.
- Align the six support legs between the cooler unit and the in-site concrete foundation. Start with
the three inner legs (near to the generator), then with the three outer legs, as shown in Figure
4.13-9 on Page 87. Align the six support legs in height and then weld (a=8) the lower and upper
parts provisionally at some points with welding spots together after the correct height has been
set. Note that fine adjustment is still possible with the threaded spindles on the top of the six
support legs.
- Mark the position and dowel the foot plates of the leg supports to the foundation using injectable
adhesive anchors HIT-HY 200-A + HIT-V (8.8) M20. If necessary, loosen the 2 upper and the 2
lower threaded rods and remove the cooler unit again, to get enough space for drilling the fixing
holes Ø22mm, min. 240mm deep (foundation).

Turbine - Generator
- Carefully placing the six leg supports below the base frame of the cooler unit, while the cooler
unit is hang on the crane and mount the leg supports to the foundation. Note: The mounting in-
structions and tightening torques for compound anchors, using HIT-HY 200-A + HIT-V (8.8)
M20. The M20 anchor rods (1000mm) have to cut to 340mm length. The tightening torque of the
HIT-V (8.8) M20 anchor rods after drying the compound is: 150Nm.
- Tighten the two upper and lower M20 nuts of the threaded rods and press the cooling unit com-
pletely to the enclosure openings.
- If no further adjustment work is required on the heights of support legs, weld (a=8) the six sup-
port legs, between the lower and upper parts, together as shown in DWG DPPPG-70189302
and Figure 4.13-13 on Page 90.
- After the cooling unit has been bolted to the enclosure openings and the support legs have
been mounted, the cooling unit can be separated from the crane.
- Finally mount the diagonal support (cross beams) to the support legs. Screw the upper end of
cross beams to the cooler unit, using screws and nuts supplied by the manufacturer. Weld the
lower end of cross beams to the support legs (a=5), as shown in DWG DPPPG-70189302,
DWG DPPPG-70189303 and Figure 4.13-13 on Page 90.
Figure 4.13-12: Cooler unit mounted complete

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.13-13: Details of mounted support legs with diagonal holders (cross beams)
4.13.4 Assembling the water supply lines on the cooling elements
(The water supply lines, feed and discharge are not scope of supply by Siemens Erfurt)
Install the piping, feed and discharge, on the mounting flanges of the cooler elements. The cooling
elements are fixed bolted on the upper side of cooling cover and sealed with a frame and rubber
profile on the lower side for thermal expansion downwards. This has to be taken into account when
installing the piping and its pipe supports. Use the supplied mounting material, gaskets, screws and
nuts supplied by the manufacturer. After installation and filling the cooling elements with water,
check the tightness of the flange connection.
 Welding-neck flanges, preassembled or as

individual parts, together with the appropriate
hexagon-head bolts, hexagon nuts, washers
and flat gaskets are supplied as counter-
flanges for the cooling element flanges.
Figure 4.13-14: Example of water supply and return pipes below the coolers

Turbine - Generator
4.13.5 Assembling the venting and draining pipes on the cooling elements
(See DWG DPPPG-70169056 – Cooler Venting and Draining Pipe; in chapter 16.0)
Install the cooler venting and draining pipes (1) to the cooling elements using the screws, washers
and clips supplied by the manufacturer. Close the pipe connections and check the tightness of
screwed connections.
1
Figure 4.13-15: Example of venting and draining pipes, in the centre of the hood (left)
Figure 4.13-16: Example of venting and draining pipes, on the side of the hood (right)
4.13.6 Checking the leakage air filters, general information
Remove the filter housings on the doors from the manholes and check whether that the filter fleece
is clean. To make it possible to open the filter housings, demount the fixing screws of the filter hous-
ings. Also check the filter fleece for damage, and reinstall it if no defect is present.
Each filter housing, two filter fleece are used
a) Coarse filter facing the outside air

b) Fine filter facing inwards
4.13.7 Assembling the leakage-water sensors and connecting the cabling
(See DWG DPPPG-70183529 – Wiring Diagrams; in chapter 14.0)
Two pieces of sensors housings for leakage water monitoring are located below the cooler unit. In
each of sensor housing, a leakage water sensor is installed, or two. To seal off the sensor, a pack-
ing ring made is used.

Turbine - Generator
 The cooler unit has two leakage water sen-

sors housings (1), left and right on the bot-
tom of the cooler hood. In each housing are
two sensors (2) mounted.
2
 Before screwing the leakage water sensor,
check that the sensor housings are clean.
 The cabling to the sensor must be prepared
on site.
1
Figure 4.13-17: Leakage water sensor housing with two sensors

4.13.8 Using and closing the manholes, general information
The manholes are designed like a door. Opening the manholes is permissible only when the genera-
tor is out of operation. The manholes enables the user to access the externally arranged closed
cooling circuit ducts and the cooler cover for the purpose if inspections and repairs.
When stepping on the cooler cover, take care not to damage the fins of the cooler surfaces, and
make sure that no loose parts, tools, dirt etc. remain in the cover. After completing inspection or re-
pairs, properly close the manholes so that it is air-tight.
 Each door of the manholes (1) has a filter-

housing (2) with two leakage air filters.
2
1
Figure 4.13-18: Door of the manhole with filter housing for the leakage air filters

Turbine - Generator
4.14 Completion the works for the assembling of the mounted parts
4.14.1 Assembling the grounding connections
(See DWG DPPPG-70055933 – Grounding Connections; in chapter 16.0)
Install the grounding connections on the specified points between the generator base frame and the
mounted parts, (enclosure, cooler unit) using the supplied screws and washers.
Figure 4.14-1: Details of ground connections, enclosure (left, middle)
Figure 4.14-2: Details of ground connections, main current bracket (right)
Figure 4.14-3: Details of ground connections, cooler unit
4.14.2 Assembling the oil supply pipes on the TE* and EE* bearing housings
(The oil supply pipes are not scope of supply by Siemens Erfurt)
When installing the oil supply pipes at the bearing housings and oil inlet armatures use the gaskets
and screw connections supplied by the manufacturer of the oil system. It could be necessary to
mount rubber compensators between the mounting flange of bearing housing and the mounting
flange of oil supply pipes; see therefore also the information of the project. All oil pipes and connec-
tions should be cleaned thoroughly and be aligned and mounted without any torque. Connecting

Turbine - Generator
pipes for the oil supply (1) and the oil outlet (2) are mounted on the bearing housings at TE* and
EE*.
If required, the supplied welding neck flanges of the connecting pipes can be welded to the cus-
tomer's pipelines and used. Tighten all flanges and pipe screw connections according to the manu-
facturer's instructions.
NOTICE
After installation and operation with supply oil, check the tightness of the flange and
pipe screws connections. The pipes must be adapted and aligned during assembly.
The strain on the connection point must be relieved by a suitable device.
2
2
Figure 4.14-4: Oil flanges on the bearing housing EE* (left)
Figure 4.14-5: Oil flanges on the bearing housing TE* (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.15 Oil flushing, general information

4.15.1 General
The trouble-free operation of the oil circuits requires the proper and complete assembly of all com-
ponent parts provided as specified in the drawings furnished by the manufactures of the machine
components connected to the oil system. In addition, the entire oil system needs to be cleaned thor-
ough after its completion.
This cleaning action is intended to remove any residual contamination which may have entered the
pipe work during assembly. The assembly and cleaning of the oil systems for the generator and their
drive systems requires specialist knowledge and particular care. Observe the applicable rules and
regulations for occupational safety, fire protection, and environmental protection during oil flushing
and when working with oil or oil-moistened component parts.
Before starting oil flushing operations, make certain that operational fire-fighting equipment is readily
at hand. Keep access free both in the area around generator and its prime mover, and along all es-
cape and rescue. Accordingly, oil flushing should only be performed by instructed expert assembly
personnel routes.
After completing the assembly of the lubricating and lift oil pipeline systems, the circuits should be
subjected to a cleaning procedure which, as a general rule, should performed at operating tempera-
ture and by using the operating fluid. The cleaning process should cover all tanks, oil coolers, pipes,
flexible tubes, fittings, and all other component parts which belong to the system. The corresponding
filters should be installed upstream of the bearing connections and upstream of the collecting basin
in the return line. Filters should be dimensioned such that there is no major impact on the desired
high oil flow speed within the circuit. The filter elements should be replaceable in order to allow the
adaptation of the filter stages to the progress of cleaning. Corresponding auxiliary ports, adapted fit-
tings, etc. should be used to install the filters in the oil circuits. Bypass lines with a corresponding
cross-section can be used to keep the flushing process running when the filters are being cleaned. If
no bypass lines are available for switching over, the oil pumps should be turned off and protected
against unintentional energizing during filter cleaning. It is not allowed to close any stop valves in the
oil return system while the pumps are operating. Any flexible tubing or flexible connecting elements
used must be capable of withstanding the operating pressures and operating temperatures. Prior to
oil flushing, take all precautions needed to prevent any escape of leaking or projected oil. Check all
flanges and seals in the oil circuit before the pumps are switched on. The bottom parts of the outer
multi-lip sealing rings at the bearing casings should be installed to avoid any escape of projecting oil.
The maximum possible flushing oil quantity can be set for every bearing using the corresponding
bearing oil throttle valve installed in the circuit.

Turbine - Generator
4.15.2 Treatment of the bearing chambers
The generator's bearings and bearing chambers will be supplied ready for operation and in a clean
condition. Cleaning by oil flushing is not necessary. For this reason, bypass lines are laid to shunt
the bearing ports before oil flushing is started. Bearings and bearing chambers which need to be
cleaned for unforeseen reasons should be included in the oil circuit at the original connecting ports.
After the completion of the flushing process, remove any dirt accumulation from the bearing cham-
bers. This should be done carefully using rags consisting of lint free material (do not use cotton
waste). Do not mix any cleaning agent used with the oil. No residue whatsoever should remain in
the bearing casing. Bearings and bearing chambers should be subjected to a thorough visual in-
spection after cleaning.
4.15.3 Preparation of the lubricating oil system for oil flushing

If no bypass lines can be installed, make certain that the top bearing shells are removed, and provi-
sional oil drain lines are installed at the inlet openings of the bottom shells. The installation should
be carried out such that the flushing oil flow will not go between shaft and bottom shell. The connect-
ing hoses within the bearing casings are mounted but not connected to the bearing shells such that
these are included in the flushing process.
 Oil inlet openings (1) on lower bearing shell.

1 These openings have to be covered with
!
adequate measures (e.g. a cover with recon-
nection; not scope of Siemens), so that the
! 2 flushing oil flow will not go between shaft (!)
and lower shell (!). The flushing oil should
flow freely, into the inner housing. Do this
1 measures on the housing TE* and EE*.
!
NOTE: The openings are on both sides
of the bearing shells!
 Connect the hose for the hydrostatic after oil
flushing on the bearing housing (2).
Figure 4.15-1: Open bearing housing with lower bearing shell
4.15.4 Flushing oil
Operator and oil supplier are responsible for providing the oil to be used for flushing in accordance
with the oil specifications defined by the generator supplier. This should be coordinated with the tur-
bine supplier if necessary.

Turbine - Generator
The following procedures are possible:

Use the same oil grade for flushing and operation. When flushing is complete, an oil examination is
carried out to decide whether the flushing oil volume can be used as oil for operation after reproc-
essing by the oil supplier.
Use oil intended for flushing only right from the outset. The properties of this oil are tuned to this par-
ticular application purpose mainly with regard to viscosity. This oil should be removed completely af-
ter the flushing process, and be replaced by new operating oil. The properties of operating oil and
flushing oil must be matched.
4.15.5 Flushing process
The oil flow speed should be as high as possible, and the maximum temperature should be limited
to 80 °C in the oil circuit pipelines during the flushing process.
The flushing process can be carried out along the whole line system and simultaneously in the entire
bearing oil pipe work, and in all pressure-oil pipelines belonging to the hydraulic shaft lift-oil system.
If the oil flow speed drops excessively in the whole line system, parallel branches may be flushed lo-
cally one after the other by installing isolating valves.
The oil temperature should not be increased during the first few hours. The heavier particles will be
entrained by the higher oil density and by the higher oil speed brought about as coarser filters are
used. Oil temperature should be increased to a maximum of 80 °C after the installation of finer fil-
ters.
During the flushing process, the oil lines should be tapped continuously to remove the dirt particles
stuck at the inside pipe walls. The feed pumps should be switched on and off repeatedly in order to
generate a surging flow.
During flushing, the screens located both upstream of the bearings and in the return line should be
checked for dirt accumulation, and be cleaned if necessary. Filters should be cleaned more often,
and be replaced by finer filters, depending on the dirt volume and on the grain sizes found. Do not
finish the flushing process unless no dirt has been found even in the finest filters and screens during
an extended period of time.
All filters and screens should be removed and cleaned as a general rule after the completion of eve-
ry flushing process. The filters and screens removed before the flushing process should either be re-
installed or be replaced by the filters and screens belonging to the original line equipment.
Remove all bypass lines, orifice plates, blind flanges and any filters installed in addition. Connect the
ports of the shaft lifting devices to the bearing blocks, and check for leakage. Check the proper fit-
ting of the bearing ports. Finally, assemble all bearings, bearing covers, collar rings, and flanges
such that they are ready for operation.
Proceed with care when completing work on the oil system and on the bearings, and take the corre-
sponding precautions to prevent any new contamination.

Turbine - Generator
After completing work on the oil system, clear all pipes, flanges, and ports externally, and then carry
out a system pressure and leak test.
 Filter (1) in bypass lines (2) for oil flushing.

1
 The flushing oil flow direct from oil supply
line over the filter to oil return line.
2
Figure 4.15-2: Oil flushing without bearing
4.15.6 Remove the bypass pipes after oil flushing, optional
The following steps are only required, when the oil flushing was performed with bypass pipes.
After oil flushing, proceed as follows to finish the assembling of the bearing housings:
- Disassemble the bypass oil pipes;
- Disassemble the seals of the oil inlet to the bearing housings;
- Reassemble all previously dismounted oil pipes;
- Reassemble (if necessary) previously dismounted armatures to the oil supply;
- Reassemble (only if available) the oil pipes for the oil mist evacuation on the housing cover of
the bearings;
- Check the oil system for leaks;
4.15.7 Cleaning the bearings and bearing housings, optional
(See DWG DPPPG-70191559 – Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances, in chapter 16.0)
The following steps are only required, when no bypass lines have been laid around the bearing
blocks during oil flushing. See also chapter 4.16.1 Assembling the bearing shells and bearing
covers and chapter 4.16.2 Assembling the rigid labyrinth seals, Type 20 and 22.
After oil flushing, proceed as follows to finish the assembly of the bearing housings:
- Disassemble the bearing bottom shells;
- Final cleaning of bearings and bearing chambers;
- Reassemble the bearing shells;

Turbine - Generator
- Install the bearing metal temperature measuring points, and check their function;
- Connect the lift-oil tubing to the bearings, and carry out a leak test;
- Install bearing covers and rigid labyrinth seals;
- Adjust the air gap values on rigid labyrinth seals as per DWG DPPPG-70191559;
- Check the oil system for leaks;
- Reassemble the rotor grounding brushes on the TE bearing (if demounted)
4.15.8 Corrosion protection on bearings for longer standstill periods, optional
If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as follows:
- Dismantle the bearing.
- Clean the bearing.
- Paint or spray the top half and the bottom half of the shell and the shaft with Tectyl 511.
- Assemble the bearing.

- Close all connection holes with screw plugs.
- Seal the gaps between
• Shaft seal and shaft
• Shaft seal and housing
by using a self-adhesive, permanent tape.
- Spray some anti-corrosive such as Tectyl 511 or VALVOLINE into the bearing.
- Put a bag desiccant (silicate gel) inside. The desiccant absorbs the humidity and prevents the
formation of condensation water inside the bearing.
In case the standstill period is longer than ½ Year:

- Repeat the preservation procedures.
- Put a new bag of desiccant into the bearing.

Turbine - Generator
4.16 Assembling the bearings, general information

4.16.1 Assembling the bearing shells and bearing covers
(See Installation and Operating Instructions for Slide Bearings; in chapter 8.0 and DWG
DPPPG-70190391 – Bearing TE*, DWG DPPPG-70190394 – Bearing EE*, DWG DPPPG-
00001223 – Tightening Torques; in chapter 16.0)
Fitting of lower bearing shell:

- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating in the bottom half of the bearing housing and on
the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing opera-
tion (see type plate).
- Place the lower bearing shell on the working surface of shaft. Turn the lower bearing shell in the
bottom part of bearing housing, with the joint plane of both halves in true alignment.
If the lower bearing shell does not turn easily, readjust the lower bearing shell or lift the shaft correct-
ly. Lower the shaft till it sits on the lower bearing shell.
Fitting of upper bearing shell:
- Apply some lubricant on the working surfaces of shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as indi-
cated for bearing operation (see type plate).
- Check if the engraved numbers on the lower bearing shell corresponds with the engraved num-
ber on the upper bearing shell.
- Place the upper bearing shell on the shaft; both engraved numbers should be on the same side.
- Insert the two taper pins Ø16*60mm and the two M20*80mm socket screws with washers and
tighten them by using the correct torque values. See also Bearings, in chapter 8.0.
NOTICE
An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both, shaft
and bearing.
Bearing size RENK 35
Tightening torques [Nm] 170
Table 4.16-1: Tightening torques for bearing shells
Assembly the bearing cover:

- Check the true alignment of the parting joint of the lower bearing shell to the parting joint of the
bottom part of bearing housing.
- The isolated positioning pin in the bearing cover fits in the corresponding positioning pin hole in
the upper bearing shell.

Turbine - Generator
- Check if the engraved numbers on the bearing cover and the engraved numbers on the bearing
housing correspond.
- Clean the surface of the parting joint on the bearing cover and bearing housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound over the whole surface of the parting joint of the
bearing housing, (Note the manufacturer's instructions for the processing of such products and
the information under 4.7-1004-0002 “General Handling Guidelines”, in chapter 6.0).
NOTICE
Please observe the instructions for the use of sealing compound.
- Lower the bearing cover vertically on the bearing housing. The engraved numbers should be on
the same side of the bearing housing.
- Gently hit the bearing cover with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment of the spherical
seating.
- Insert the two taper pins Ø20*80mm and the six M42 socket screws and tighten them crosswise
by using the correct torque values. See also Bearings, in chapter 8.0.
Bearing size RENK 35
Tightening torques [Nm] 1150
Table 4.16-2: Tightening torques for bearing covers
NOTE
Make sure, that both bearing shells TE* and EE*, are electrically insulated. Check the
electrical insulation with a suitable measuring instrument e.g. 100-250volt Megger. The
resistance must be at least ≥500KΩ.
4.16.2 Assembling the rigid labyrinth seals, Type 20 and 22
- Check if the engraved numbers on the bottom half of the rigid labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
• The flange surface of top and bottom half of rigid labyrinth seal
• The joint plane of top and bottom half of rigid labyrinth seal
• The flange surface of bearing housing
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the joint plane of the bottom half of the rigid laby-
rinth seal, (Note the manufacturer's instructions for the processing of such products and the in-
formation under 4.7-1004-0002 General Handling Guidelines, in chapter 6.0)

Turbine - Generator
NOTICE
- Place the top half of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press lightly the bottom half of the
rigid labyrinth seals from below against it. Insert and tighten the screws of the parting joints to
the rated torque: 10Nm; see also the manufacturing description in chapter 11.0.
- Before assembling of the rigid labyrinth seal at the bearing housing place the insulation ring at
the surface of the mounting flanges. Make sure the cut edge is upwards (12h on top).
- Apply a uniform thin layer of sealing compound on both side of the insulation ring and push the
rigid labyrinth seal together with the insulation ring lightly at the bearing housing. The cut edge
of the insulation ring must be on 12h (top), (Note the manufacturer's instructions for the pro-
cessing of such products and the information under 4.7-1004-0002 General Handling Guide-
lines, in chapter 6.0).
NOTICE
- Place in parallel alignment the horizontal joint of the rigid labyrinth seal and the parting joint of
the bearing housing. Press the rigid labyrinth seal lightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the
rigid labyrinth seal in such a way that the side clearance “f” between the shaft and the rigid laby-
rinth seal at both joint planes (left/right) has the same figure.
- Insert and tighten the screws with insulation washer and insulation tubes by using the correct
toque values: 20Nm; see also the manufacturing description in chapter 8.0.
NOTE
Make sure, that all four rigid labyrinth seals, TE* and EE*, are electrically insulated.
Check the electrical insulation with a suitable measuring instrument e.g. 100-250volt
Megger. The resistance must be at least ≥500KΩ.

Turbine - Generator
4.17 Completion the works for the assembling of the bearings

4.17.1 Assembling the sensors of shafts vibration monitoring
(See also Monitoring Vibration; in chapter 13.0 and DWG DPPPG-70183529 – Wiring Diagrams;
in chapter 14.0)
3
2
1
Figure 4.17-1: Sensor probe with coaxial cable (1) (left)
Figure 4.17-2: Probe sleeve (2) with housing (3) (right)
2
1
Figure 4.17-3: Coaxial cable guided through the probe sleeve (left)
Figure 4.17-4: Sensor (1) mounted with liquid sealant (2) LOCTITE 242 (right)
1 2
Figure 4.17-5: Sensor probe with coaxial cable mounted (left)
Figure 4.17-6: Sensor (1) mounted in the probe sleeve (2) in details (right)

Turbine - Generator
1
2 3
Figure 4.17-7: Sleeve holder (1), locknut (2) for probe sleeve (3) with wrench flat (left)
Figure 4.17-8: Vibration sensor mounted in the bearing cover (right)
4.17.2 Mounting the carbon brushes in the rotor grounding system on TE*
(See DWG DPPPG-70167687 – Assembly Earth Brush; in chapter 16.0)
 Check the rotor grounding system

 Check the mounted wiring connection (1)
 Check the correct shape of brushes, to the
1
surface of shaft.
NOTE: Remove the packing material

(2) from the transportation protection. Insert
the four carbon brushes.
2
Figure 4.17-9: Rotor grounding system with carbon brushes mounted
NOTE: Wiring connection (1) must be

insulated from rigid labyrinth seal (2), but on
1
earth potential of the bearing housing (3).
Figure 4.17-10: Wiring of the rotor grounding system

Turbine - Generator
1 NOTE: Check the correct fit of carbon

brushes (1) to the direction of rotation of
shaft.
NOTE: Check the correct adjusted dis-

tance (2) between brush holder and shaft,
approx. 2–3mm!
Figure 4.17-11: Carbon brush of the rotor grounding system in details

4.17.3 Connecting the bearing potential cables
 Potential cable of the bearing shell TE* has

to be connected to the grounding point (1)
1 of TE* bearing cover.
Figure 4.17-12: Potential cable of TE* bearing shell
 Potential cable of the bearing shell EE* has

to be connected to the insulated pin (1) of
1
EE* bearing cover.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the

bearing shells by bearing currents, the po-
tential cable on EE* must be electrical inter-
rupted during the generator operation.
Figure 4.17-13: Potential cable of EE* bearing shell

Turbine - Generator
4.18 Assembling the extra cover TE* and the lower cover plates
(See DWG DPPPG-70186488 – Extra Cover TE, DWG DPPPG-70184942 – Enclosure; in chapter
16.0)
Before assembling of the extra cover TE* to the enclosure disassemble the extra cover TE* in fol-
lowing way:
- Remove the two individual halves of the shaft seal (1) from the extra cover TE*.
- Remove two front panel (2) and (3) from the steel structure.
- Remove the side covers (4) and (5) from the steel structure.
- Remove the top covers (6), (7) and (8) from the steel structure.
After that assemble the extra cover TE* as follows:

- Install the steel structure of the additional cover TE* on the generator base frame.
- Align the steel structure to the enclosure and the generator base frame and mount the fixing
screws. The steel structure was previously adapted by the manufacturer for testing purposes
and completely assembled to the enclosure and the generator base frame.
- Install the removed front, top and side covers. The side cover (4) must be adapted to the oil
supply lines before assembling.
- Adjust the two individual halves of the shaft seal (1) to the generator shaft in such a way, that
the clearance between shaft seal and generator shaft (up/down and left/right) has the same fig-
ure.
- Finally assemble the two lower front covers (9) (left and right) to the generator base frame.
6 7
2 3
8
5 1
Figure 4.18-1: Additional cover TE* (left)
Figure 4.18-2: Additional cover TE* and lower cover plates mounted (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.19 Completion the works for the assembling of the excitation system
4.19.1 General
Two slip rings have been laid out at the inductor end corresponding to the polarity.
The associated brush gear system is mounted on EE* and covered with a carrier cover. The brush
holders are fitted with plug-in brushes. When adjusting the axial setting for the brush holder, you
should take note of the rotor-axial load for normal operation specified in the drawing ’axial and radial
rotor clearances’. This is important to make optimum use of the slip ring width.
You should use brushes pre-buffed to the diameter of the slip ring when replacing brushes during
operation of the unit. This is because of the contact surfaces required to transfer the current.
For this reason, it is very important that you set up the brush holder central to the middle of the shaft
and in an extremely careful manner.
NOTE: Handle plug-in brush holders

with care during installation!
Figure 4.19-1: Plug-in brush holders
4.19.2 Mounting the plug-in brush holders in the brush carrier
(See Excitation System (Brush Gear); in chapter 10.0 and DWG DPPPG-70191097 – Axial and
Radial Rotor Clearances, DWG DPPPG-70025191 – Brush Complement; in chapter 16.0)
The most important steps in mounting the plug-in brush holders with spring mounted carbon brushes
are as follows:
- Remove all plug-in brush holders with spring mounted carbon brushes from the brush carrier.
- Clean the surfaces of the slip rings from all wax tape (1); shown in Figure 4.19-2 on page 108.
- Check and adjust the plug-in brush holders to the required distance to the slip rings.
- Check insulation of the separately insulated brush holder bar.
- Grind the surface of the spring mounted carbon brushes to the shape of slip rings.
- Assemble the cover of the brush carrier after finishing the cleaning work.

Turbine - Generator
Figure 4.19-2: Slip rings with wax tape preservation only for the transport (left)
Figure 4.19-3: Brush carrier and slip rings after cleaning on site (right)
4.19.3 Connecting the excitation cables to the brush carrier
(See DWG 3-273657 – Adapter Exciter Current Cable, DWG 2-5815-263436 – Assembly Cover
Plates; in chapter 16.0)
Remove the two cover plates below the brush carrier and laid the excitation cables through the
opening to the brush carrier. Connect the excitation cables with the supplied M20*60mm screws,
washers and nuts to both adapters (1) and (2) of the brush carrier and tighten the screw connec-
tions with 200Nm; see DWG 3-273657. Prepare the holes for the excitation cables in the plates
and reassemble the two cover plates below the brush carrier.
1 2
Figure 4.19-4: Brush carrier mounted and grounded (left)
Figure 4.19-5: Adapters for excitation cables (right)

Turbine - Generator
4.20 Final check before start up
The following items must be checked before starting up the plant:
WARNING
All foreign objects and in particular metallic objects must be removed from the generator
as otherwise they can give rise to extreme dangers. All foreign matter must be removed
from the casing.
1. Complete all necessary installation and alignment work.

2. Ensure that the windings are free of dirt and moisture. If the insulation test shows that the wind-
ings are not dry enough, then the machine must be dried.
3. Check that all electrical connections are tight. Ensure that the spacing between conductors and
grounded parts are according to specifications.
4. Ensure that the bearing lubrication system is clean and working properly.
5. Ensure that the venting ducts are free of all obstructions. Check again that all temporary covers
have been removed.
6. Ensure that nobody is in or on the generator.
7. Check the Grounding Connections.
8. Check the rotor earth fault detection.
9. Fill out the check list, in chapter 15.0.

Turbogenerator
Description
Measuring Charts
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogeneratoren Generatormontage (2-Pol)
Prüfprotokoll Deckblatt
Turbogenerators Generator assembly (2-pole)
Inspection Data Sheet Cover sheet
Auftr.-Nr.: Kennwort:
3000021389 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1) / A-902795 / EG000425
Order-No.: Code word:
Zeichn.-Nr.: Baugr.-Nr.: Typ:
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
Drawing-No.: Group-No.: Type:
Material-Nr.: F-Auftrag: ld.-Nr.:
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Material-No.: Shop order: ld.-No.:
Generator - Montageprotokolle
Generator assembly records
Kennwort:
Noor Energy 1 (PT 1) / A-902795 / EG000425
Code Word:
Auftrags-Nr.:
3000021389
Order No.:
Typ:
SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
Type:
Serial-Nr.Ständer/Generator:
31298616
Serial No. Stator/Generator:
Serial-Nr. Läufer:
31285239
Serial No. Rotor:
Erstellt von/am:
Uwe Schiebold / 17.12.2019
Created by/on:
Abschluß Werksmontage / Finalizsation of shop assembly
Abteilung:
PG PR MGN ERF MF FAS
Department:
Datum:
18.02.2020
Date:
Vorarbeiter MF:
Sven Gundlach
Supervisor MF:
Gegenzeichnung QM:
Counter Signature QM:
Schiebold Digital signiert von Schiebold Uwe
DN: cn=Schiebold Uwe, o=Siemens,
Uwe
email=uwe.schiebold@siemens.com
Datum: 2020.02.19 14:11:50 +01'00'
Copyright © Siemens AG 2019 – All Rights reserved
ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
Nach Abschluss der Inbetriebsetzung des Generators eine Kopie des kompletten Werksmontageprotokolles an Siemens
ERF QM zurücksenden.
Please send back the shop assembly record to Siemens ERF QM, after the generator has past the initial start-up.
Prüfer /
Abteilung: MF Gegenzeichnung: siehe Deckblatt /
Datum: Sven Gundlach, 18.02.2020
Department: FAS Countersignature: see cover sheet
Inspector / Date:
Siemens Gas and Power GmbH & Co.KG Blatt-Nr./ Sheet-No.: 1 von/ of 9
Prüfprotokoll Inhaltsverzeichnis
Inspection Data Sheet Table of Content
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Inhaltsverzeichnis / Table of Content
Bauteil Seite
Component page
Deckblatt / Cover sheet 1

Inhaltsverzeichnis / Table of contents 2
Generatormontage / assembly of the generator

Inhaltsverzeichnis / Table of Content 2
Information / Relevant information 3
Isolationsprüfung Anbauteile / Insulation tests mounted parts 4
radiale und axiale Ausrichtung / Radial and axial alignment 5
Wellenabdichtung Haube / shaft seal cover 6
Lager TS / Bearing TE 7
Lager ES / Bearing EE 8
radiale & axiale Ausr. Bürstenapp. / radial and axial alignment brush gear (collector) 9
Generelle Ansicht / General view

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
Prüfprotokoll Information
Turbogenerators Generator assembly 2 pole
Inspection Data Sheet Relevant information
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
1 = Ständer / Stator Sämtliche Maße sind in mm

m eingetragen und
2 = Läufer / Rotor sämtliche radiale Ausrichtwerte und Radial-
3/1 = Lager TS / Bearing TE spiele sind von TS gesehen eingetragen.
3/2 = Lager ES / Bearing EE
4a = Erregermaschine / Exciter All measures are given in mm and all recorded
5 = Kupplung / Coupling alignment values and radial clearances are seen
6 = Grundrahmen / Base frame from TE.
mit dem Generator wurde ein Probelauf durchgeführt Ja Nein

Test run performed with generator Yes No
Werksmontage Transportsicherung eingebaut

Shop erection Shipping protection mounted Unterschrift:
Sven Gundlach
Signature:
Ja Nein Datum:
2020-02-18
Yes No Date:
Aussenmontage Transportsicherung entfernt

Field erection Shipping protection removed Unterschrift:
Signature:
Ja Nein Datum:
Yes No Date:
* Die im Folgenden benannten Abweichungen haben keine Auswirkung auf die Funktion des Generators und
wurden durch den Hersteller (Siemens Erfurt) toleriert.
* The following deviations have no impact on operation and functionality of the generator and are tolerated by the manufacturer.
Abweichungen / Deviations Unterschrift / Signature

Alle Abweichungen auf den Seiten 7 und 8 sind toleriert /

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
All deviations are tolerated
Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Prüfprotokoll Isolationsprüfung Anbauteile
Inspection Data Sheet Insulation tests mounted parts
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Isolationsprüfung mit 250 V gemessen (DIN 31692-4) / insulation test with 250 V
Isolationswiderstandsmessung Soll [MΩ]1 Ist [MΩ]1 Ergebnis

Insulation Resistance Measurement Nominal Actual Result
TS / TE 2,96GΩ ok
(1) ≥ 0,5
Werksmontage ES / EE 2,96GΩ ok
Shop erection TS / TE 32MΩ ok
(2) ≥ 0,5
ES / EE 34MΩ ok
TS / TE
(1) ≥ 0,5
Außenmontage ES / EE
Field erection TS / TE
(2) ≥ 0,5
ES / EE
1
bei Raumtemperatur / at ambient temperature
Luftabstände - Stromdurchführung gegen Gehäuse Soll [mm] Ist [mm] Ergebnis

Air gap distances - bushing against casing (WFU 2.01) Nominal Actual Result
ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
blanke Leiter gegen Eisen

Werksmontage oder gegeneinander
≥ 125 125 ok
Shop erection bare conductors against iron or
against each other
* Abweichung (Seite 3) / deviation (page 3)

Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Prüfprotokoll radiale und axiale Ausrichtung
Inspection Data Sheet Radial and axial alignment
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
924 924
Kontrollmaß/Referenced dimension:
Abstand zwischen Kappe bis zum ersten
Luftschlitz Ständer, siehe Skizze
distance between retaining ring to the first gas
passage of stator core, see sketch
Maß-Nr. Lage Soll [mm] Werksmontage / shop erection Außenmontage / field erection
Measure-No. Position Nominal Ist / Actual [mm] Ergebnis / Result Ist / Actual [mm] Sign / Date
1 TS Bleche / Shims ٪ 1,5 for Information
2 ES Bleche / Shims ٪ 1,5 for Information
A 1 oben / top 4,1 Außenmontage / field erection
B 1 oben / top 770 770 ok
G 1 oben / top 65 ±5 64 ok
G 2 rechts / right 65 ±5 64 ok
G 3 unten / bottom 65 ±5 65 ok
G 4 links / left 65 ±5 64 ok
H 1 oben / top 65 ±5 64 ok
H 2 rechts / right 65 ±5 64 ok
H 3 unten / bottom 65 ±5 64 ok
H 4 links / left 65 ±5 64 ok
a 1 oben / top 2 ±0,5 2 ok
a 2 rechts / right 2 ±0,5 2,2 ok
a 3 unten / bottom 2 ±0,5 1,9 ok
a 4 links / left 2 ±0,5 2,4 ok
TS/TE ES/EE TS/TE ES/EE
b 1 oben / top 74 ±3,7 74 73,8 ok / ok
b 2 rechts / right 74 ±3,7 74,1 74 ok / ok
b 3 unten / bottom 74 ±3,7 73,8 74,1 ok / ok
b 4 links / left 74 ±3,7 73,8 73,8 ok / ok
c 1 oben / top 2 ±0,5 2,2 ok
c 2 rechts / right 2 ±0,5 2,4 ok

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
c 3 unten / bottom 2 ±0,5 2,3 ok

c 4 links / left 2 ±0,5 2,1 ok
Luftführungsring TS/ES gesichert
Ja/yes nein/no Ja/yes nein/no
Air baffle ring TE/EE secured

Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Prüfprotokoll Wellenabdichtung Haube
Inspection Data Sheet shaft seal cover
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Measure-No. Position Nominal Ist / actual [mm] Ergebnis / Result Ist / Actual [mm] Sign / Date
g 1 oben / top 0,35 - 0,65 0,35 ok
g 2 rechts / right 0,20 - 0,35 0,20 ok
g 3 unten / bottom 0,05 0,05 ok
g 4 links / left 0,20 - 0,35 0,20 ok
h 1 oben / top 0,35 - 0,65 0,35 ok
h 2 rechts / right 0,20 - 0,35 0,30 ok
h 3 unten / bottom 0,05 0,05 ok
h 4 links / left 0,20 - 0,35 0,30 ok
ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044

Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Prüfprotokoll Lager TS
Inspection Data Sheet Bearing TE
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Sichtkontrolle des Lagers nach dem Probelauf durchgeführt:

Ja / yes kein Probelauf / no test run
Visual control of the sleeve bearing after the test run performed:
1 oben / top ≤ 0,4 48 35,4
2 rechts / right ≤ 0,4 47,6 35,3
1 zu / to 2
3 unten / bottom ≤ 0,4 47,4 34,8
4 links / left ≤ 0,4 47,8 35,1
C 2 rechts / right 33,4 ±1 33,1 ok
C 4 links / left 33,4 ±1 33,3 ok
D 2 rechts / right 33,4 ±1 33,1 ok
D 4 links / left 33,4 ±1 33,3 ok
Blech1 Dichtung Blech1 Dichtung Blech1 Dichtung
sheet seal sheet seal sheet seal
d 1 oben / top 0,2-0,9 0,13 - 0,30 0,55 0,18 ok

d 2 rechts / right 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,23 0,08 ok
d 3 unten / bottom 0,00 0,00 ٪ ٪
d 4 links / left 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,25 0,1 ok
e 1 oben / top 0,56 - 0,63 0,62 ok
e 2 rechts / right 0,69 - 0,77 0,6 not ok
e 3 unten / bottom 0,00 ٪
e 4 links / left 0,69 - 0,77 0,6 not ok
f 1 oben / top 0,2-0,9 0,13 - 0,30 0,35 0,15 ok

f 2 rechts / right 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,35 0,07 ok
f 3 unten / bottom 0,00 0,00 ٪ ٪
f 4 links / left 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,15 0,07 ok
Funktionsprüfung hydrostatische Wellenanhebung (Richtwerte nach Maßbildtext 2)
Functional test hydrostatic shaft-lifting (Calculated values acc. to Outline Drawing Text 2)
Aushebedruck / Lifting pressure 13,5 MPa ٪

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
Haltedruck / Holding pressure 10,5 MPa ٪

Ist-Höhe / Actual height n.a. 0,12 for Information
1
Messing-Blech zur Umlenkung Ölfluss (wenn verbaut) / brass sheet for guiding oil flow (if applied)
2
+10% Warngrenze (abhängig von Ölsorte und Temperatur, ggf. bei Inbetriebnahme korrigieren) /
+10 % warning limit (depends on oil type and temperature, may have to be corrected at initial start-up)
Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Prüfprotokoll Lager ES
Inspection Data Sheet Bearing EE
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
Sichtkontrolle des Lagers nach dem Probelauf durchgeführt:

Ja / yes kein Probelauf / no test run
Visual control of the sleeve bearing after the test run performed:
1 oben / top ≤ 0,4 35,47 47,9
2 rechts / right ≤ 0,4 35,23 47,67
3 zu / to 4
3 unten / bottom ≤ 0,4 34,84 47,26
4 links / left ≤ 0,4 35,16 47,75
E 2 rechts / right 33,4 ±1 33,19 ok
E 4 links / left 33,4 ±1 33,2 ok
F 2 rechts / right 33,4 ±1 33,18 ok
F 4 links / left 33,4 ±1 33,2 ok
j 1 oben / top 0,2-0,9 0,13 - 0,30 0,33 0,18 ok

j 2 rechts / right 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,23 0,09 ok
j 3 unten / bottom 0,00 0,00 ٪ ٪
j 4 links / left 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,25 0,09 ok
k 1 oben / top 0,56 - 0,63 0,63 ok
k 2 rechts / right 0,69 - 0,77 0,6 not ok
k 3 unten / bottom 0,00 ٪
k 4 links / left 0,69 - 0,77 0,61 not ok
l 1 oben / top 0,2-0,9 0,13 - 0,30 0,33 0,18 ok

l 2 rechts / right 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,25 0,09 ok
l 3 unten / bottom 0,00 0,00 ٪ ٪
l 4 links / left 0,1-0,5 0,07 - 0,15 0,23 0,09 ok
Funktionsprüfung hydrostatische Wellenanhebung (Richtwerte nach Maßbildtext 2)
Functional test hydrostatic shaft-lifting (Calculated values acc. to Outline Drawing Text 2)
Aushebedruck / Lifting pressure 13,5 MPa ٪

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
Haltedruck / Holding pressure 10,5 MPa ٪

Ist-Höhe / Actual height n.a. 0,13 for Information
1
Messing-Blech zur Umlenkung Ölfluss (wenn verbaut) / brass sheet for guiding oil flow (if applied)
2
+10% Warngrenze (abhängig von Ölsorte und Temperatur, ggf. bei Inbetriebnahme korrigieren) /
+10 % warning limit (depends on oil type and temperature, may have to be corrected at initial start-up)
Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Turbogeneratoren Generatormontage 2pol
Prüfprotokoll radiale & axiale Ausr. Bürstenapp.
Turbogenerators Generator assembly 2 pole
Inspection Data Sheet radial and axial alignment brush gear (collector)
DPPPG-70194303 SFA0000 SGen5-100A-2P 118-46
P0066627100 5000630961 31298616
measure-No. position nominal Ist / actual [mm] Sign / date Ist / actual [mm] Sign / date
1J TS / TE 34 ±1 34,5 ok
1K 24 ±1 24 ok
2L 34 ±1 34,5 ok
2M ES / EE 24 ±1 24 ok
1m oben / top 5 ±1 4,9 ok
2 rechts / right
m 5 ±1 4,2 ok
3 unten / bottom
m 5 ±1 4 ok
4m links / left 5 ±1 4,2 ok
1p oben / top 2 ±0,5 2,5 ok
2 rechts / right
p 2 ±0,5 2,5 ok
3 unten / bottom
p 2 ±0,5 2,5 ok
4p links / left 2 ±0,5 2,5 ok
1 oben / top 3 ±1 3,2 ok
HGW 2 rechts / right 3 ±1 3,2 ok
Ring 3 unten / bottom 3 ±1 2,8 ok
4 links / left 3 ±1 2,8 ok
Beilageblech / shim plate ٪ 3 for Information

ERF0317B_SFA0000_3000021389_021044
Prüfer /
Inspector / Date:
Turbogenerator
Description
General Handling Guidelines

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator General Handling Guidelines
Installation Transport, Receipt and Storage
1. Transport
1.1 General
Have the goods transported to the site only by experience forwarding agents. Transportation remains
exclusively the responsibility of the forwarding agents. Erection personnel of Siemens AG may act only in an
advisory and supervisory capacity.
Exercise great care and caution when moving the equipment to and at the site. Use equipment of appropriate
design and carrying capacity.
NOTE:
Machines on anti-vibration mountings should be transported in such a way that the shock-
absorbing capacity of the mountings is not impaired.
1.2. Packing
The packing’s are designed according to the Packaging Guidelines and the Siemens Generator Packaging
Instruction FV 1000043e. The bottom of the case consists entirely of boards. The side walls and the lid consist
of plywood, sometimes partly of metal. In each of two opposite side walls there is a ventilation opening, which
is closed from the outside with a screwed ventilation plate. For transport inside Germany and other European
countries' cases are used which do not have any vent openings.
The machine parts are completely enveloped in foil wrappings whose seams are welded to make an air-tight
seal. All sharp corners and edges are padded to prevent the wrapping from ripping.
NOTE:
The sealed wrappings should not be opened en route or during handling. The customs
authorities and forwarding agents should therefore be informed in good time of the
forthcoming arrival of such consignments and arrangements be made with the customs
official to have the goods inspected on the site itself.
Fig. 1 Generator packing (examples)
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 1 of 6
Bags with an adequate quantity of desiccant are suspended inside the sealed wrapping to absorb any vapour
penetrating through the wrapping.
Fig. 2 Arrangement of the desiccant (example)
The cases are marked with instructions for safe handling and proper storage.
Handling Symbols:
The following symbols acc. to DIN ISO 7000 are used for the despatch of non-dangerous goods. It is
essential that these be observed.
Our customers also specify other symbols in addition to those shown below. Attention should be paid to
these as well.
This way up Fragile; handle with care Keep away from Sling here
moisture
Keep away from heat Centre of gravity Use no hooks Storage limits
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 2 of 6
1.3 Loading and Unloading of Heavy Parts
When loading and unloading heavy parts - particularly if they are moved by winches, presses and crowbars,
etc. - the truck should be braced underneath by props or jacks to prevent its loading surface from caving in or
canting (caused by truck suspension). Brakes of truck must be applied. Heavy parts should be secured so that
they cannot move or shift when handled. Steel ropes should be cushioned with wooden blocks to prevent
them from rubbing against the cases or biting into them.
WARNING
Suspended load. Falling loads or uncontrolled swinging load may cause injury to persons.
Keep safe distance. Place barriers if necessary.
Only use specified load attachment points. Only use suitable lifting equipment. The lifting
equipment must be in good condition and have a sufficient load carrying capacity.
When lifting heavy cases with winches, jacks and crowbars etc., place the hoisting gear
under the hoisting points.
Loading of lifting members:

During manoeuvring and transporting of heavy components, it is important that the forces acting on the wire
ropes are in line with the lifting lugs (Fig 3 and Fig. 4).
F
F α F
F
Fig. 3 Angular offset not allowable Fig. 4 Angular offset allowable up to 90°
On no account may there be any angular offset between line of force and lifting lug when shackles and hooks
are used, as this will give rise to forces which could be many times greater than the permissible load. Lifting
beams or wire rope spreaders may be used to prevent angular offset of forces. Further load lifting members
comprise load shackles or lifting eyes welded to individual components (Fig. 5 and Fig. 6).
Lifting eye for

welding
Fig. 5 Load shackle Fig. 6 Lifting eye
The load-carrying capacity for these lifting aids is to be given in tons at the lifting lug.
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 3 of 6
Lifting Devices on Heavy Components:

To facilitate proper handling and compliance with all applicable accident prevention regulations, heavy
components are fitted with lifting devices, the use of which is mandatory for transport to the site and during
inspection/assembly.
WARNING
Suspended load. Falling loads or uncontrolled swinging load may cause injury to persons.
Re-check all bolts on the lifting attachments and shackles directly before lifting the
component.
Before each transport, the weights of the components must be taken from the shipping lists, the drawings, or
the inscriptions on the components as the basis for selection of the correct lifting aids (shackles, ropes etc.) to
be used.
Care must be taken to ensure that the wire ropes do not pass directly over sharp edges. lf this cannot be
avoided, squared timber, boards or pipe halves should be used to protect the wire attachment ropes and
machined surfaces from damage (Fig. 7).
Due to the weight of these components, it is imperative that shackles and wire ropes be used correctly.
Pipe half protection edge and

rope guide
Fig. 7 Protection of sharp edges to prevent damage to and by wire ropes
2. Receipt
NOTE:
Leave the wooden cover and the rest of the packing on the machine as long as possible.
Inspection after Receipt:

Immediately after receipt of the goods, the case should be examined all round for any signs of damage. If it is
damaged, remove the lid or several boards so that the contents can be seen. If the contents are sealed, do
not damage the plastic sheeting while doing this.
When unpacking a consignment which is damaged - or presumed to be so - store the contents in a dry place
or repack them. It is important that the consignment be examined immediately to determine both the extent
and cause of the damage and also the person or persons responsible for it.
In line with rail and road forwarding practice, the carrier should be notified immediately and invited to draw up
a joint statement of damage. This is imperative for indemnification and lodging a claim with the insurance
company. It is always advisable to photograph serious damage.
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 4 of 6
3. Storage
3.1 General
Contact Siemens for information or answer to questions on preservation or storage.
Machines or machine parts packed only for overland transport are provided with desiccant for 6
months outside storage, all oversee packages for 12 months. Any period of storage exceeding 12
months is referred to as long-term storage. In such cases, more desiccant is necessary.
NOTE:
The sealed wrappings should not be opened during storage time.
Components in storage must be inspected at monthly intervals. Any damage or changes in
the colour of humidity indicators must be recorded by the responsible personnel.
Storage must not impair the function or the quality of the goods. A storage area should be selected which
offers maximum protection against moisture (floods), dirt and trespassing. Pay attention to the carrying
capacity of the floor.
NOTICE
Stacking of heavy goods may cause damages at packaging and component.
Avoid stacking heavy goods one on top of the other.
3.2 Humidity Indicator Check
Fig. 8 Humidity indicator
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 5 of 6
The degree of humidity inside the sealed wrapping is indicated by humidity indicators (Fig.9) in four stages:
Relative humidity Relative humidity Relative humidity Relative humidity

less than 30% higher than 30% higher than 40% higher than 50%
Fig. 9 Humidity indicator at various degrees of humidity
The humidity indicators are automatically reconditioned.

The cases have openings in them that enable the contents to be checked and the desiccant to be replaced.
The covers that close off these openings are marked: Open here to check desiccant. The covers on these
openings should be opened and the indicator checked as soon as the shipment arrives at its place of
destination. Repeat the checks every four weeks.
3.3 Measures to Be Taken in Case of Humidity or Damaged Sealing Wrapping
If the indicator has turned red or should damage to the sealing wrapping be noticed, remove the contents and
store them dry and protected against weather influences. If this procedure cannot be adopted, insert bags
with new or reconditioned desiccant in the wrapping. Patch the wrapping with tape or - if possible - weld it.
Siemens AG 4.7-1001-0005 / 6 of 6
Installation Cleaning of Machine Parts
Paint Coatings
Note! All machined surfaces of machine parts as well as small parts, if any, such as screws, bolts, keys,
feather-keys, set pins, etc. are provided with an anti corrosion coating in the works.
Carefully remove this anti-corrosion coating before starting erection.
Anti-Corrosion Coating on Metal Surfaces

Wash off the anti-corrosion coating on the machined surfaces of machine parts and of small parts, if any,
using kerosene or a similar agent. If Perchlorethylen is used, dry surfaces thoroughly after washing and then
apply a thin film of oil, otherwise the surfaces may rust. Soften thick anti-corrosion coatings with kerosene and
push them off with a hardwood board (approx. 10 x 10 x 1 cm).
Important! Do not use metal tools for removing the anti-corrosion coatings, such as scrapers, putty knives or
sheet-steel strips.
Anti-Corrosion Coatings on Threads

Remove anti-corrosion coatings in tapped holes of machine parts and on threads of screws, bolts, taper pins,
etc. by re-cutting the threads with the corresponding tapping tool or thread cutter. Blow out re-tapped holes
with dry compressed air.
Tools used for re-cutting must be of the same type and size as those used in the works where the machined
parts were manufactured. The dimensions of the external and internal threads are shown in the drawings.
Burrs and Pressure Marks

Inspect machine parts, fixing and locking elements, etc. for the presence of burrs and pressure marks and
remove these, if any, with a fine file.

Use an oil stone for smoothing finish-machined surfaces.
Important! Always use a spoon or flat scraper for removing burrs and pressure marks from bearing metal
surfaces (Fig. 1).
1 2
1 Flat scraper
2 Spoon scraper
Fig. 1
Special tools
Cleaning of Machine Parts Immediately before Erection is Started

When the anti-corrosion coating has been removed from unpainted metal surfaces, fixing and locking
elements wash those parts again in kerosene and dry them carefully.
Remove rust spots by speedily moving soapstone over the surface, smoothing it in such a way that elevations
at the edges of the corrosion spot are flattened.
Important! Use only non-lining rags for cleaning, preferably leather.
Blow out blind tapped holes, recesses, chambers, ducts and pipes with dry compressed air and subsequently
clean them with an industrial vacuum cleaner.
Paint Coatings
Clean damaged areas of the coating with a wire brush and emery cloth to remove any dirt and rust.
The areas to be touched up must be free from oil and grease. Apply only the supplied repair-varnish
(Pure colour-varnish and hardener)!
Siemens AG 4.7-1002-0002
Installation Bolt Tightening Torques
Tightening Bolted Joints

Correct tightening of bolted joints is a major factor if the joint is to function reliably and safely. For example,
non-uniform tightening of the bolts of a multi-bolt joint leads to uneven load distribution and buckling of the
parts.
The tightening torques given in the table in fig. 1 is only valid when the following conditions are fulfilled:
- Machine parts are of steel or cast iron.
- Strength class of steel bolts is as quoted.
- Nuts are also of steel or cast iron.
- No separate tightening torques for the bolted joints is given on the respective drawing or in the installation
description.
Maximum tightening torque in Nm
Thread Lubricated with oil ( µ = 0,18 ) Greased with Molykote ( µ = 0,1 )

size
Quality acc. to ISO 898 - 1
5.6 8.8 10.9 5.6 8.8 10.9

M8 11 24 34 8,6 18,4 25,9
M10 23 49 69 17,4 37 52
M12 40 85 119 29,9 63,7 89,6
M14 64 136 191 47,6 101,6 142,9
M16 100 212 299 73,8 157 221
M18 135 289 406 101 216 304
M20 195 416 585 144 308 433
M22 267 571 803 196 418 588
M24 336 716 1008 248 530 745
M27 508 1083 1522 371 791 1112
M30* 683 1457 2048 501 1069 1504
M36** 1199 2557 3596 876 1869 2628
M42*** 1933 4124 5800 1408 3003 4224
 * for sleeve bearing size EG...18 (RENK)

 ** for sleeve bearing size EG...22 (RENK)
 *** for sleeve bearing size EG...28, 35 (RENK)
Fig. 1
Maximum tightening torques for torque spanners
Siemens AG 4.7-1003-0004 / 1
The tightening torques required can be applied and checked by one of the methods described in Fig. 2. The
threads must be able to engage easily, therefore make sure they are not damaged, clean the thread and
seating surfaces thoroughly and lubricate them with beef dripping, grease or Molykote 1000. Other lubricants
must not be used for bolted joints. If unsuitable lubricants are used, the coefficient of friction might be too
small and the threads could be stripped.
Tightening torque
Magnitude in
N applied with checked with
m
up to 300 spanner torque spanner, but only if expressly
ring spanner stipulated
300 - 700 ring spanner torque spanner (fig. 3)
impact wrench
700 - 2500 impact-ring spanner and sledged dynamometer (fig. 5)
hammer or chain tackle block (fig.
4)
>2500 High-torque wrench (fig. 6) Torque spanner supplied (fig. 7)
(transmission gears)
Fig. 2
Tightening torque
Fig. 3
Checking the tightening torque with torque spanner
1 2 3
F
90°
a
Fig. 4
Applying and checking the tightening torque with an impact-ring spanner
Siemens AG 4.7-1003-0004 / 2
Fig. 5
Dynamometer
Fig. 6
Tightening a bolted joint with a high-torque wrench and with pump
Fig 7
High-torque wrench with torque spanner
If no torque spanners or other measuring devices are available, the torque applied or the lever arm required
for
It can be calculated roughly using the following formula:
MA = F·a
F = Tightening force in N
a = Lever arm in m
MA = Tightening torque in Nm
Fig. 8
Applying and checking the tightening torque with muscle power and not a torque spanner
The tightening force F, if applied by muscle power, is greatly dependent on the body weight G of the fitter and
the positive direction of force with respect to the surface on which the fitter is standing.
The lever arm a is the vertical distance from the point where the positive tightening force is applied to the bolt
axis.
Siemens AG 4.7-1003-0004 / 3
F  10 x G in N F  10 x G in N
G = Body weight in kg G = Body weight in kg
Fig. 9 Fig. 10
Effective muscle power vertical to the surface the fitter is Effective muscle power horizontal to the surface the fitter is
standing on standing on
If the effective tightening force is vertical to the surface the fitter is standing on (Fig. 9), a force corresponding
to the body weight can be applied for a long time. If the effective tightening force is parallel to the surface the
fitter is standing on (Fig. 10), 50% of the body weight can be applied as force.
Example 1:
The tightening torque required for a M30 bolt of strength class 6.9 is 1070 Nm.
How long must the lever arm "a" be if the effective tightening force is vertical to the surface the fitter is
standing on (Fig. 9)?
Body weight of the fitter
G = 75 kg
Tightening force
F  10 x G  10 x 75 =
F  750 N
Tightening torque
MA = F·a
Lever arm
M 1070
a A 
F 750
a  1,4 m
If several fitters are tightening the bolt, the torques applied by each individual fitter are added together.
Example 2:
Two fitters are tightening a bolt simultaneously with the help
of a spanner extension. What is the tightening torque if the
fitters are standing next to each other as shown in the sketch?
G1 = 70 kg
G2 = 85 kg
a1 = 1,8 m
a2 = 2,1 m
F1  5 · 70  350 N
F2  5 · 85  425 N
MA1  F1 · a 1  630 Nm
MA2  F2 · a 2  893 Nm
Fig. 11
Total tightening torque MA = MA1 + MA2 = 1523 Nm Sketch of example
Siemens AG 4.7-1003-0004 / 4
Installation Miscellaneous
Tectyl 506
Application
Tectyl 506 is an anti-corrosion agent used for protecting machine parts exposed to corrosion, e.g. shafts,
couplings, tools and other devices, as well as machined castings and forgings.
Anti-corrosion protection is particularly important for parts that are to be sent overseas and to tropical regions,
and for the storage of parts outdoors.
Properties
Marketed as Light-brown liquid solvent carrier

Thinner White spirit
Yield 6 to 8 m2/Iitre, depending on the nature of the surface
(shape, coarseness and porosity of the surface)
Density 0.88 kg/dm3
Drying period 1 to 2 hours, at ambient temperature agent becomes waxy and dry to the touch
Temperature constancy -40 to +100°C
Duration of Protection Up to 2 years, depending on the thickness of the film and on the wear and
exposure to which the part is subjected
Transparency The inscription on metal parts remains legible
Tectyl does not affect the hands even after long contact. They should be washed with ordinary cleansing
paste and warm water.
Application of Anti-Corrosion Agent

Clean and dry the surfaces to be protected, carefully removing fingerprints and grease. Tectyl should not be
heated, but be applied at ambient temperature.
Method of application:
 Brushing
 Spraying
 Dipping
Brushing
Apply Tectyl uniformly with a clean, soft paintbrush. It is not absolutely necessary to apply several coats.
If the surface is coarse, paint Tectyl well into the pores and furrows. Coat all bare parts properly.
Spraying
The Lichtenberg spray gun Type LM 54n is for small quantities suitable. The Valvoline spray set, which can be
connected direct to the drum, may be used for larger quantities
Siemens AG 4.7-1004-0002 / 1
Dipping
Small parts can be protected by dipping them into Tectyl.
Note! In the case of parts to be stored outdoors or shipped by sea, a thick even layer is to be applied. The
dried Tectyl coat is not immune to blows or scratches. Attention should be paid to this point when handling or
transporting parts.
Removal of Coat
Soften with paraffin for 3 minutes and wipe off with a rag. Volatile solvents (petrol, Perchlorethylen) are less
suitable for this purpose, since they evaporate too quickly. Flammability
Due attention should be paid to the flammability of thinners and solvents.
Manufacturer
Valvoline Öl-Gesellschaft mbH, Hamburg, Federal Republic of Germany
MOLYKOTE Paste G-n plus

General Remarks
Molykote Paste G-n plus is a universal erection compound. It is used for the friction reduction between metallic
surfaces subjected to high pressures and temperatures, e.g. when reaming drilled holes, drawing in retaining
bolts, and driving in wedges, and for reducing the coefficient of friction of the brake linings of vertical
hydroelectric power generators.
Molykote Paste G-n plus is not permitted for screwed connections!

The use of Molykote 1000 is recommended for screwed connections (see Molykote 1000 below and "Bolt
tightening torques").
Treating machine parts with Molykote Paste G-n plus leads to the formation of a durable surface film that
protects against wear even when they are subjected to heavy stresses: It also prevents rubbing, seizing, and
metal-to-metal contact.
In the case of force fits without drive-type fastenings, spring collar clamping elements, etc.; the
transmittable torque is reduced because of the low coefficients of friction and Molykote Paste G-n
plus must not be applied.
Molykote Paste G-n plus is used to finish friction surfaces, i.e. it should be rubbed on to form a thin lubricating
film.
Note! Do not mix Molykote Paste G-n plus with oil or grease.
Siemens AG 4.7-1004-0002 / 2
Properties
Molykote Paste G-n plus is chemically highly stable, hinders corrosion, is highly resistant to ageing and does
not resinify.
Temperature range: -25 to +200°C with unimpeded exposure to air
Directions for Use

Do not use an excessive amount of Molykote Paste G-n plus as with grease or oil lubricants, but apply it thinly
and uniformly.
Immediately before joining parts, clean metallic surfaces. Remove lubricants with Perchlorethylen or a similar
agent. Then rub a thin layer of paste vigorously into the metallic surfaces in all directions, using a leather cloth.
Remove any excess. If the nature of the stress helps the film to spread itself (e.g. bushings, toothed racks
etc.), it is sufficient to spread the paste in a thin layer.
Use Perchlorethylen or a similar agent removing carefully Molykote Paste that has been accidentally
deposited on electrically insulating areas, otherwise creepage or even flashover may occur.
Manufacturer
Dow Corning GmbH, München, Federal Republic of Germany
Hylomar SQ 32/M
Application
Hylomar SQ 32/M is a viscous, permanently plastic sealing agent based on polyester urethane. It is used to
seal covers on oil sumps, bearing housings, hydrogen-cooled generators and to seal the casings of pumps for
mineral oil products.
Properties
Hylomar SQ 32/M remains plastic within a temperature range of - 50°C to +200°C. It is non-flammable, and
after evaporation of the solvent non-poisonous and antitoxic. If large quantities are used, adopt the same
precautionary measures as for Perchlorethylen.
Hylomar SQ 32/M is resistant to all oils and lubricants, synthetic oils, all fuels for turbine, piston and rotating
piston engines, cutting and drilling oils, air and gases. Hylomar remains elastic, and the sealed surfaces can
be separated and then rejoined to form a perfect seal without applying a fresh coat of Hylomar. If stored at
room temperature, Hylomar remains fit for use indefinitely.
Directions for Use

Carefully clean the parts (surfaces) to be sealed with Perchlorethylen before applying Hylomar.
Apply Hylomar with a stiff brush; Hylomar can even be used on vertical or overhead surfaces. The quantity
used will be approximately 22 mg/cm2
Siemens AG 4.7-1004-0002 / 3
Coating both surfaces to be sealed ensures the elimination of air pockets. Wait approximately 10 minutes
between coating and assembly to allow the volatile constituents to evaporate. This period may, however, be of
unlimited duration. After preparing the seal, tighten the connecting bolts to the specified load and further
tighten after allowing a short time for tension compensation.
To clean dismantled seals, merely wipe with a non-fibrous rag soaked in Perchlorethylen. There is no need to
clean the surfaces sealed with Hylomar if measures are taken to ensure that they are not contaminated by
foreign bodies, and they can be joined together again without difficulty.
Suppliers
Deutschland Australien England
Marston Oelchemie GmbH Payen, Byrne and Blackford Pty. Ltd. Marston Lubricants Ltd.
Zülpich Eagle Farm, Queensland 4007 Liverpool
Curil T
Application
Curil T is a non hardening sealing compound resistant to high temperatures. It forms an excellent seal where
abnormally high internal pressures exist even at extreme temperatures. Curil T is specially designed for finely
machined sealing surfaces. It is especially suitable for gear units, turbines, generators, pipe threads etc.
Properties
Cure time 5 to 10 minutes approximately; unaffected by extensive curing time
Temperature range from –40°C to +250°C
Delivery state soft paste-like
Operating state tough paste-like
Directions for Use

Surfaces receiving the sealant should be cleaned from grease and dirt. Apply thin layer by brush or other
suitable means.
Manufacturer
Elring Klinger GmbH, Dettingen/Erms, Federal Republic of Germany
Siemens AG 4.7-1004-0002 / 4
Installation Inspection of foundations and setting
out of machine axes
Before beginning erection of the machine carefully check all foundation dimensions. Any inaccuracies found
can still be corrected at this stage. Refer to the final dimension drawings of the foundation and machine.
When checking the dimensions, pay particular attention to the position of the holes for the anchor bolts or rag
bolts for the soleplates or base frame and the penetrations for pipe work, ventilation ducting, electric cables,
etc. for their accuracy in relation to the machine axes.
These measurements should be taken after the machine axes have been set out.
Measuring Instruments
Precision level and tripod
Hose level
Spirit level
Internal micrometer 25 - 50 mm
Straight edges (2 and 4 m long)
Steel tape measure 15 m
Plumb bobs
Accessories
1 roll steel wire approx. 0.3 mm dia.
2 m round steel bar 20 mm dia. (U-irons)
1 m flat steel strip approx. 50 x 20 mm
1 2 3 4
Precision level and tripod Spirit level internal micrometer Hose level
Fig. 1
Measuring instruments
Cleaning and Preparing the Foundation

To avoid any accidents ring the foundation pit with ropes or other barriers.
Before commencing installation roughen the bearing faces and side faces of the recesses in the foundation
with a pneumatic hammer and chisel so that the grouting concrete poured later will bind well with the
foundation. Remove any loose material adhering to the foundation. Sweep down the surface and clean out the
holes in the foundation, burning out any wood if necessary.
Any steel reinforcement rods projecting sufficiently to cause interference with the base frame or soleplates
should be bent back.
Should it be necessary to burn them off, the prior approval of the construction company responsible for the
foundation must be obtained.
Siemens AG 4.7-1006-0002 / 1
out of machine axes
Setting out the Reference Points

The machine axes must be marked out in both the vertical and horizontal planes by geometrically-ascertained
reference points on the foundation or on the walls of the machine house in the form of grouted plates or U-
irons (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2
Reference points for the machine axes
1 Vertical clearance
2 Foundation
3 Grout
4 Reference point
5 Upper surface of soleplate
Fig. 3
Determining elevation reference points
In preparation for determining the levels of the machine axes, grout dome-head rivets or bolts in prepared
holes adjacent to the machine foundation (Fig. 3). Using the precision level (Fig. 1) measure the elevation of
the tips of the rivets or bolts referred to the datum level and record the readings.
The elevations of the machine axes and the surface of the soleplates or base frame are measured from these
elevation reference points. Use a suitable measuring instrument such as a precision level to measure the
vertical distance from the elevation reference point to the machine axes and surface of the soleplates or base
frame.
Laying out the Machine Axes

The position of the machine axes on the foundation can be established from either the geometrically
ascertained reference points or another machine which has already been installed.
When using the reference points, mark, the longitudinal and transverse axes on the U-irons or plates with V-
notches. String 0.3 mm dia. steel wire weighted at the ends between the V-notches and transfer the position of
the axis onto the foundation surface by means of plumb bobs suspended from the wires (Fig. 4 and 5).
Fig. 4 Plumb bob Fig. 5 U-iron
Plumb bob to determine the benchmark for the long axis. U-shape and tension wires to mark the longitudinal and transverse axis.
Siemens AG 4.7-1006-0002 / 2
out of machine axes
It is also possible to use struts (Fig. 6) to set up taut steel wires at the actual elevation and position of the shaft
axes of the machines over the whole length and breadth of the foundation. The alignment of the taut wires is
also based on the geometrically-ascertained bench marks on the machine house walls.
1 Spirit level
2 Straight edge
3 Transverse axis wire
4 Reference point
5 Tensioning weight
6 Plumb bob
7 Longitudinal axis wire
8 Reference point
9 Hose level
10 Foundation
11 Reference point
12 Foundation
13 Reference point
Fig. 6
Method of setting out the machine axes on the foundation
At one end, attach the wire to the strut and at the opposite end pass it over a pulley or rounded corner and
suspend a weight from it so that there is as little sag as possible. Then, at the middle point of the stator, set up
a similar taut wire at right angles to the first in the same manner. Use steel tape measures, straight edges,
plumb bobs, etc. to take vertical measurements from the wires.
Fig. 7
Foundation will be checked by
Precision level and tripod
Siemens AG 4.7-1006-0002 / 3
out of machine axes
Fig. 8
Axis wire attached to coupling of a
previously aligned driving or driven
shaft
From the centre of the aligned coupling set up a taut wire on the longitudinal axis to a fixed point (e.g. U-iron)
at the same elevation as the centre of the coupling.
Place a try square 1 (Fig. 9) horizontally against the coupling face level with the machine axis and secure it at
about 50 mm from the longitudinal axis wire. Then adjust the position of the wire at the fixed point until it is
parallel to the try square. Measure the parallel position with an inside micrometer and check it with another try
square placed at 180°. When the final position has been established, make a V-notch in the U-iron for the
wire.
Next, set up a second taut wire on the transverse axis of the machine. Attach a straight edge horizontally to
the coupling flange in order to check the alignment. Measure the distances between the wire and the ends of
the straight edge as shown in Fig. 9. The dimensions will be found in the dimension drawing.
1 Try square
2 Coupling
3 To be measured for machine transverse axis
4 U-iron
5 To be measured for machine longitudinal axis
7 Transverse axis wire
Fig. 9
Aligning the axis wires to an aligned driving or driven shaft
(Both coupling flanges with pre-and return are shown)
Checking the Foundation

Mark out the longitudinal and transverse axes of the machine on the foundation from the taut wires using
plumb bobs.
Check the dimensions and positions of the foundation, foundation penetrations and anchor bolt holes in
relation to the machine axes according to the data given in the dimension drawing and/or foundation drawing.
Note! Any deviations from the foundation drawings must be recorded. The client or relevant construction
company should be informed and to the foundation reworking where necessary.
Siemens AG 4.7-1006-0002 / 4
Installation Alignment of Turbine-Generator Units
Note
These instructions show generally applicable assembly operations. Please see also the binding drawings and
other instructions.
Introduction
The many years of experience gained in the operation of turbine-generator units for power generation have
clearly indicated the necessity to explain the most important of the multi-faceted problems involved in the
erection and maintenance of these units in a condensed form.
In the following an attempt is made to present the host of problems and all notable aspects connected with the
alignment of turbine-generator units to the reader in a simple fashion.
Last but not least, these explanations are aimed at affording those entrusted with erection and maintenance
the opportune to assess correctly any deficiencies arising and to overcome them by means of purposeful
corrective measures involving the least amount of time.
The very last remark deserves particular mention in that operators endeavour to limit turbine-generator unit
downtimes to the unavoidable minimum for obvious economic reasons.
Alignment
What parts are actually aligned? Expressed in simple terms, these are firstly the rotating shafts relative to
each other and secondly the stationary parts relative to the shafts. The necessity to align the stationary parts
exactly relative to the shafts follows from the following basic requirements:
The need for maximum operational reliability for the turbine-generator unit with regard to possible closing-up
of clearances.
One result of the desire for optimum utilization of the heat potential in steam turbines has been the
minimization of leakage steam losses at the seals between the blade stages and at the shaft seals. This basic
requirement must in any case be satisfied irrespective of the individual design (reaction or impulse system
with more or less reaction) and, in present-day practice, a designer can no longer ignore this requirement
when establishing clearances.
This results in a radial clearance in the parts in question which, on the one hand, satisfies the requirement for
maximum thermal efficiency and, on the other hand, guarantees an adequate reserve against radial closing-up
of clearances during the normal mode of operation.
With regard to the erection of steam turbines, particular importance is attributed to the last aspect, in as much
as it must be assured that the given diameter clearance is distributed concentrically relative to the shaft. This
means that stationary parts, such as the inner casing, stationary blade carrier, shaft seals etc., are aligned
concentrically relative to the shaft. Only when these basic erection requirements have been satisfied can it be
assured that the sealing elements will not rub the moving parts when the degree of thermal expansion varies,
as is known to be the case during start-up and shut-down, i.e. during transient conditions.
Equal importance is attributed to axial alignment of the stationary parts relative to the shafts. The axial
clearances specified by the designer, hot in the blading and in the shaft seals, should be adjusted during
erection and major inspections of steam turbines.
It is easy to understand that during operation varying degrees of expansion can occur in the axial direction,
firstly because the materials used have different expansion coefficients and secondly due to different material
temperatures. The effects of operation can lead to considerable reductions of the preset axial clearance.
Given that the above-mentioned alignment requirements are an important factor in the operational reliability of
a turbine, the same alignment measures as required within the blade portions and shaft seals are also to be
applied in the alignment of all centre-turned parts, for example within the bearing housings, Fig. 1.
This applies especially to the bearing housing seal rings and the parts which serve to accommodate the axial
and radial bearings.
Above we have explained the necessity of aligning the stationary parts as concentrically as possible and with
as high a measure of axial accuracy as possible, relative to the shafts. Completely different criteria apply to
the alignment of the shafts, i.e. the rotating parts, relative to each other, Fig. 1.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 1
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Alignment of Generator and Turbine Shafts Honing of Coupling after Shafts Alignment
The main points here are as follows:

It is required that the coupling used to connect the shafts assembly is free of stresses and moments. The
objective must thus be the absence of cyclic bending stress in the coupling planes when coupling shafts are
turning and the absence of radial offset of the shafts, which would cause crank-like movements.
Obviously the undesired effect first mentioned, namely that of cyclic bending stress, can lead to malfunctions
particularly in cases where shrunk-on coupling flanges have been used. lf the cyclic bending stress constantly
exceeds permissible levels, this might well cause the coupling flange to loosen. The second undesired effect
mentioned, namely, crank-like movement of the shafts, would result in additional dynamic loads on the
adjacent journal bearings. It is known that these bearings serve to take up not only the given static forces but
also, to a great extent, the dynamic forces resulting on the one hand from the inherent imbalance and on the
other from additional unbalanced masses. The ability of a bearing to take up loads is, however, limited by the
admissible figure for the load per unit area and the mechanical vibrations resulting from additional unbalanced
loads. In this context we speak of the mechanical running behavior of a turbine, or running.
All the above-mentioned criteria underline the indispensable requirement for maximum precision in the
alignment of shafts relative to each other.
Role Played by the Shaft Deflection Curve in Alignment Operations

A shaft which is supported at each end will have a certain degree of sag owing to its dead weight. The extent
of this sag is essentially determined by the weight, the diameter and the distance between the bearings
supporting the shaft. The centre line of a shaft supported in such a manner can therefore no longer be
regarded as a true straight line but will assume a more or less curved shape relative to the theoretical centre
line depending on the influences described. The actual centre line is termed the shaft deflection curve. It is a
fact that this deflection curve remains the same even when the turbine set is running, which in turn means that
allowance must be made for the shape of the deflection curves during erection of a turbine-generator unit.
Fig. 3
Deflection Curves of a Generator-Shaft
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 2
It is not difficult to comprehend that in the case of projecting shaft ends, for example, the deflection curve of
these ends will assume a shape approximating that of the deflection curve between the bearings.
Fig. 4
Deflection Curves of a Turbine-Generator Unit
This is the natural result of the weight factor. Obviously when a shaft sags stresses are produced and the
restoring forces originating from these stresses limit the shaft sag. In turbine-generator units, these natural
stresses are accepted as inevitable. Additional stresses as a result of misalignment must, however, are
avoided at all costs. To satisfy this requirement during erection and maintenance of turbine-generator units, a
coupling check must be employed to assure optimum alignment of the shafts relative to each other.
Coupling Check
With the aid of a coupling check, it is possible to align the journal bearings so that the deflection curve of a
shaft assembly is continuous. One major precondition in performing a coupling check is that the bearings
supporting the shafts to be measured should be spaced in the same way as in later operation. Without doubt,
the optimum method of achieving this is to place the shafts in their intended bearings. The true continuous
bending line can be achieved in a really straight- forward manner only if this essential precondition is satisfied.
lf auxiliary supports are used, suitable allowance must be made at all events for impairment of the deflection
curve due to changed bearing spans.

The standard coupling check covers firstly the radial position and secondly the axial position of two adjacent
coupling flanges relative to each other. Normally the measurement is taken radially on the circumference of
the adjacent coupling flanges, with the axial measurement being taken on the outermost diameter of the inner
axial surfaces of the coupling. The measurement itself is taken with the aid of dial gauges or micrometers, or
else with a measuring jig firmly mounted on the coupling flange and using a feeler gauge.
To eliminate as far as possible the influence of any axial or radial run outs present in the coupling plane, it is
imperative that the two shafts be turned in the same direction and by the same amount when the
measurement is taken. Since a measurement is normally taken in the two main planes, vertically and
horizontally, at the top and bottom as well as on the left and right-hand sides in each case, the shafts should
also be turned through 90° in each case. The observer's position for the fixing of the measuring points should
always be at the front of the turbine-generator unit to enable unambiguous definition of the terms front, rear,
left-hand, right-hand, top and bottom. Furthermore, the point at which the measuring equipment is to be
applied must be clearly defined in accordance with these criteria.
Whereas radial measurements are taken once only each time the shafts are turned through 90°, axial
measurements should be taken on at least two measuring points which lie directly opposite each other every
time the shafts are turned through 90°, thus giving a total of 8 axial measurement values with the shafts being
turned through a total of 360°.
Of course, axial measurements can also be taken at all four points of the measuring plane for each radial
measurement. The need to take measurements simultaneously at the measuring points lying opposite each
other arises from the fact that when the shaft is turned, slight axial displacements may occur which would
considerably falsify the axial measurement if it were taken at only one point. The exact axial measurement is
derived from the arithmetic mean of the measurements at the same point.
Whereas the radial coupling check establishes the radial misalignment of two shafts relative to each other, the
radial coupling check provides information on how the shaft deflection curves run relative to each other, or on
the size of the gap between the coupling flanges, Fig. 5. In this connection, please note that there is a
considerable difference between a gap between two couplings and the axial run out of one coupling.
During turbine operation, a gap remains at the same point whereas, if the coupling has axial run out, the gap
will rotate with the shaft.
The gap and axial run out would, in fact, only be visible in the theoretical uncoupled state of two shafts.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 3
The gap causes the additional cyclic bending stress, already mentioned at the beginning, in the coupling itself
as the coupled shafts rotate. Axial run out, on the other hand, exerts, on top of this, additional dynamic loads
on the adjacent journal bearings which manifest themselves as crank-like movements. These simple
considerations are among the more important reasons for the imperative need to ensure that the coupling
plane does not end up with run out after manufacture.
Fig. 5
Gap between LP Shafts
Assuming that the above requirement has been satisfied and also that the coupling flanges are circular within
the standard tolerances, the measuring result already indicates whether or not the measurement taken is
correct, This is the case if in the radial check in both planes the sums (1) of the two measurements taken at
directly opposite points are the same. Almost the same criteria apply to the axial check if measurements are
taken at four points in each case.
The dimensional tolerance should not exceed 0.03mm in total.
Fig. 6
Representation of Gap with Coordinate System
Alignment of Shafts in the Case of Initial Installation

The shape of the deflection curve, as shown in Fig. 3, demonstrates that the maximum elevations in each
case are to be found at the beginning and end of a shaft assembly.
In the case of all turbines, the base frames with permanently-attached bearing housings are leveled in
accordance with the calculated deflection curve, and secured.
Once this has been established, it is possible to achieve the most exact horizontal position possible of the
turbine- generator unit.
The chosen approach for alignment calls for the installation of a multiple-casing turbine-generator unit to be
actually started from a part in the middle of the unit. The starting point for establishing the deflection curve is
the horizontal zero point.
Actual alignment is then effected by aligning the supporting component parts of the middle section of the
turbine set horizontally, i.e. at the same height.
This assures that the associated shaft lies dead level. When this requirement has been satisfied, the shaft of
the next section of the turbine is inserted in its assigned bearings, which have already been installed. At this
point the first coupling check is performed in the plane of the shafts to be coupled.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 4
After suitable evaluation, the coupling measurement gives the adjustment required in both planes (horizontal
and vertical) at the bearings of the shaft last inserted. As a rule evaluation should be performed completely at
the outset, so that both the axial and the radial adjustments can be carried out in one operation. The following
example illustrates the manner in which such an operation is performed.
Fig. 7
Radial and Axial Check by Means of a Dial Indicators between
Coupling
If this procedure is followed, only two measurements need be taken to check each coupling plane. Whereas
the first measurement is used to determine the existing position of the shafts relative to one another, the
second measurement has to be evaluated on completion of adjustment to check that the shafts are now
correctly in position, Fig. 7.
Four-Bearing Turboset
The following schematic diagram representing two shafts in the four-bearing arrangement shows each shaft
separately supported by two bearings, with alignment of the turbine shaft having already been completed.
Turbine Generator
A B
b
Fig. 8
Alignment of a Four-Bearing Turboset
The requirement now is for the generator shaft to be adjusted in one operation in accordance with the
coupling measurement. A measuring device and a feeler gauge were used for performing the measurement in
the manner shown in the diagram (Fig. 10) below.
The Dimensions for A; B; a; b and c you will find in the DWG “Rotor Shaft Data for Calculation” into the
chapter drawings in the installation manual.
Fig. 9
Data for the rotor shaft
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 5
Fig. 10
Radial Check Using a Measuring Jig and Feeler Gauge
A system of coordinates is drawn for better representation of the individual measuring points, and the
measured values are entered, with due regard to the orientation convention mentioned earlier.
The radial check is carried out in one turn of the shafts over the entire circumference with a rotation of 360°. A
developed drawing for each plane is comparable with a natural sine curve.
This representation shows that the actual radial adjustment of the shaft to be aligned, relative to the shaft
already aligned, measures half the difference of the measured values from opposite points.
↔ ↔
∆= 20 =10
2
↕∆= 80
2
=40 ∆ = 30 ↕ ∆ = 50
Fig.11
Hypothetical Measured Values Entered in the System of
Coordinates, and Adjustments Determined There from ()
In the example taken, let the shaft dimensions be as follows: a = 3.600mm b = 3.000mm c = 500mm.
Fig.12
Sine Curve for one Plane
The measurement of the axial gap should always be based on the dimension of the smallest coupling
diameter of a turbine-generator unit.
The entries shown below were determined from the coupling check for this example.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 6
Fig. 13
Example of Shaft Measurements Taken
The result of the radial coupling check is that the generator shaft would have to be adjusted at bearing planes
A and B to raise it 0.4mm and move it 0.1mm to the left. Precise alignment in the radial direction would then
have been achieved. As has already been mentioned a number of times, however, realignment is to be
performed in one operation after evaluation of the radial and axial measured values. It thus suffices to indicate
the radial adjustment by means of directional arrows together with the degree of adjustment necessary. It is
the best to set this out as follows:
Bearing plane A B
↑ 0,40 ↑ 0,40
Radial Adjustment
← 0,10 ← 0,10
Evaluation of the axial gap values and adjustments resulting there from for the bearing housing positions are
performed as follows:
lf an imaginary fulcrum, designated X in the diagram of the shafts, is assumed to exist at the end of the
smaller coupling diameter, then according to the bent lever laws the following simple relations result:
For k the gap value determined in each case is to be substituted. This is the simple difference between the
measured values in the two planes.
The degrees of adjustment thus determined are in turn represented by means of directional arrows together
with the adjustment dimensions themselves.
The example taken, with respect to the upper gap, gives the following dimension for A:
This means that A must be raised 0.6mm and B 3.6mm. This alignment would eliminate the upper gap. The
same calculation procedures apply to the lateral gap, which according to the coupling diagram measures
0.3mm on the left-hand side. It then follows that:
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 7
To eliminate this gap, bearing A must be adjusted 0.36mm, and bearing B 2.16mm, to the left.
All the adjustments made to correct the displacement are now tabulated according to magnitude and direction
and the true degree of adjustment of the bearing plane in both directions is obtained by geometric addition.
Bearing A B
↑ 0.40 ↑ 0.40
radial adjustment
← 0.10 ← 0.10
↑ 0.60 ↑ 3.60
axial adjustment
← 0.36 ← 2.16
↑ 1.00 ↑ 4.00
total adjustment Fig. 14
← 0.46 ← 2.26 Table for Shaft Measurement Example
The result shows that, in the example taken, bearing A when viewed from the front must be raised 1.0mm and
moved 0.46mm to the left. Bearing B must be raised 4.0mm and moved 2.26mm to the left.
When this has been carried out, another coupling check must be performed to confirm the accuracy of the first
measurement and adjustments. In the radial direction the two shafts will then be aligned absolutely
concentrically relative to each other, and no gap will be present.
The sums of the opposite values in the coordinate system (horizontal and vertical) must be just about the
same both for axial and radial measurement if there is no axial run out in either of the coupling halves.
Realignment of the Shafts on the Occasion of Major Overhauls

Major overhauls are performed on the turbine-generator unit at intervals of varying lengths which are
determined in the majority of cases by local conditions or else by the views of the insurers. In addition to
general inspection, cleaning and repair of the individual parts, the entire turbine-generator unit is realigned.
This is because experience has shown that during operation factors arise which have a more or less serious
and permanent adverse effect on the alignment. These factors can be attributed either to changes in the
foundation or else to changes in the bearings themselves.
There is still some doubt as to the origins of these factors. In recent years extensive level measurements have
been taken at foundations which have no doubt led to certain conclusions. However, it is still impossible to
make a general conclusive statement as to origins of shaft displacements.
It is advisable to start a major inspection with a coupling check along the entire shaft assembly. This normally
shows at what point major displacements have occurs. When establishing the realignment measures to be
taken, it is often necessary to proceed from the fact that both shafts will have to be adjusted.
The sketch below illustrates such a displacement in what is known as a Four-Bearing Turboset.
In the coupling example shown above Fig 8-13, bearings B, and A have shifted into a lower position.
Adjustment in this case should therefore be limited to only these two bearings. This is verified if there is an
upper axial gap at the coupling adjacent to bearings A, and B. When calculating the degree of adjustment, no
attention should initially be paid to radial displacement in the coupling planes being considered.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 8
Fig. 15
Sketch of the Displacement in a Four-Bearing
Turboset
The overall gap, in Fig 15 can then be divided into two individual gaps d and e, which are derived from the
proportions of the shaft dimensions and the bearing spans, i.e. in the example in question the individual gaps
d and e are in the same ratio as the distances a1 and a respectively.
This relation explains the direct dependence of the semi- gap magnitude on the distances of the bearings from
the coupling plane. The following relations are now obtained for the magnitudes of the adjustments at B, and
A:
As already stated, the sum of the semi-gap is equal to the overall gap:
The amounts y1 and y are first determined, these being the amounts by which the coupling flanges would
have to be adjusted to eliminate the existing gap. To determine the degree of adjustment, the following
applies:
Referred to bearing plane B1, the degree of adjustment at this point is:
To eliminate the gap contribution in question, the following applies:
Accordingly the degree of adjustment for A must be:
With this assumption, bearings A1 and B naturally continue to be fixed fulcrums. In the example in question,
rising of bearings B1 and A would lower the opposite couplings. This would produce a gap in the lower part of
these couplings. The radial position of these couplings could well change such that, due to the lowering, the
coupling flanges adjacent to bearings A1 and B may take up eccentric positions relative to the mating coupling
flanges.
Radial checks, with corresponding adjustments should only be made if preceding adjustments have had the
effect of eliminating large gaps. This demonstrates that a series of checks and adjustments are necessary
during major overhauls to obtain satisfactory alignment values.
From what has been said, it can be seen that it is absolutely necessary in the case of multi-shaft assemblies
to gain a general idea of the effects the adjustments will have on the positions of adjacent couplings before
such adjustments are actually made. In practice, when carrying out realignment one will simply have to find
compromises that will lead to a near- optimum state of alignment.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 9
It goes without saying that the same amount of care has to be devoted to radial alignment of the shafts relative
to each other as to the elimination, described above, of any gaps which have occurred.
Fig. 16
Check Performed at Couplings
As the description of matters in the case of initial installations already shows, the correction measures
undertaken should lead to simultaneous elimination of axial gaps, i.e. only one operation should be required
for the final adjustment of the bearings during a major inspection.
It is not possible to cover every conceivable case of shaft displacement in this description. The intention is
rather just to explain how any misalignment can be detected and then eliminated in the shortest possible time
and with the least amount of effort.
The account of the method of calculation illustrates among other things that, given enough thought, it is
possible to perform realignments with just a few operations even during major inspections, and that it is not
necessary to use the time- consuming trial-and-error method when aligning couplings. As a general rule, it
should be pointed out that radial adjustments, when made in the same direction and by equal amounts, do not
have any effect on the axial gap at the coupling, but that adjustment of the gap, on the other hand, may very
well also alter the radial position of the couplings.
This is always the case if, to eliminate a gap, a bearing plane is taken as the fulcrum.
On no account should these aspects be ignored when realignments are being carried out.
Centering of the Shafts Relative to Each Other

Even if it has been ascertained by means of the coupling checks employed on the turbine-generator units that,
with the aid of the aligned journal bearings, the deflection curve of the shaft line is the proper one, this
measure alone does not guarantee smooth mechanical running behavior. It must also be ensured that the
coupled shafts are perfectly centered relative to each other. In the majority of cases this is assured by the
centering device provided, which is located with a projection and a recess respectively at the faces of the
coupling halves. The highest requirements with regard to quality are to be set for this centering device, i.e. the
greatest tolerance in the centricity relative to the shaft axes should not exceed 0.01mm.
If, for example, the radial displacement of two shafts relative to each other is 0.04mm, this measurement may
still be admissible with reference to the coupling check. If, however, both shafts are coupled with this degree
of displacement, a run out of 0.08mm is produced which is not acceptable under any circumstances.
With turbines of older designs, in particular HP turbines, spacers were frequently fitted to compensate for axial
displacement encountered during erection. In these cases the centering devices are fitted at the spacers and
coupling flanges. It is easy to understand that what are known as double centering devices can be particularly
critical points with regard to inaccuracies.
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 10
Furthermore there are cases where mechanically produced centering devices are dispensed with and where
coupling fittings bolts are used as the means of centering. These versions are, however, seldom seen. In
these cases, of course, greater importance is attached to the bolting of the coupling. The requirement with
respect to quality for the manufacture of the centering devices does not only extend to the centering
clearance. Only the smallest possible clearance will ensure firstly that coupling is effected absolutely within the
minimum tolerance and without run out and secondly, in the event of load surges or short-circuit moments
(changes in torque) during turbine operation, that the radial position of the shafts relative to each other will be
preserved and the mechanical running behavior remain the same.
Whenever practicable, the centering devices should be inspected to see that they have been correctly
manufactured before alignment of the shafts is started.
Where the projection and recess have been turned in the coupling flanges direct, the centering clearance is to
be checked by simple measurement. A check should also be carried out with the shafts mated. This is done
by placing the shafts to be coupled in their bearings and drawing the couplings together axially without
excessive force. While one of the two shafts is then slowly raised the clearance in the centering device can be
measured by means of a dial gauge.
The maximum tolerance is to be taken as 0.02mm. If this is exceeded the centering devices must be re-
machined.
When coupling spacers are used, the procedure is as follows: Once the spacers are fitted, the couplings are
again drawn together axially without excessive force. The actual clearance can be measured with the aid of a
dial gauge mounted on one of the coupling flanges if the spacer is then moved upwards and downwards.
Proper centricity of a centering ledge relative to the shaft axis can be checked when a single shaft has been
placed in the bearing. The centering ledges can then be measured with the aid of a dial gauge as the shaft is
turned through 360°. The aforementioned tolerance of 0.02mm should not be exceeded.
Fig. 17 Fig. 18
Checking the Centering Fit before Installation Coupling with Spacer
Siemens AG 4.7-1009-0003 / 11
Turbogenerator Insulation Resistance Measurements
Installation on Rotor and Exciter Windings
During manufacture, transport and installation of the

generator, the insulation of the rotor winding may
have been exposed to moisture which would reduce
the insulation resistance of the winding. The insulation
resistance should therefore be measured prior to
initial startup, after prolonged shutdowns and after
work on the windings. During installation it should be
measured on a weekly basis. If required, the
generator should be dried until a sufficient insulation
resistance is obtained.
R40° = R meas. x K
1 Required Insulation Resistance of Rotor
Winding
The insulation resistance should amount to 1 meg-
ohm at 40 °C (104 °F).
At winding temperatures other than 40 °C, a correc-
tion can be made using the curve shown in fig. 1.
2 Measurement of Insulation Resistance

Prior to each measurement, the generator must be

de-excited and any static charges removed by
grounding the winding.
The insulation resistance should be measured bet- Winding temperature in °C
ween one slip-ring being in contact to the rotor
winding and the slip-ring being in contact to the
generator shaft, using a megger with a maximum Fig. 1: Correction curve for insulation resistance
measured (Rmeas) to a temperature of 40 °C
voltage of 250 V. This voltage will present no danger
to any of the devices in the excitation circuit. The
duration of the test should be at least two minutes.
The measuring brush for ground monitoring should
not be in contact with the slip-ring when measuring.
Siemens AG 4.7-1010-0006
Turbogenerator Insulation Resistance Measurements
Installation on Stator Winding
During manufacture, transport and installation of the If the insulation resistance measured is lower than
generator, the insulation of the stator winding may the specified minimum value, the neutral
have been exposed to moisture which would reduce connections must be separated and the insulation
the insulation resistance of the windings. The resistances of the individual winding phases
insulation resistance should therefore be measured measured. During the test, the other two phases
prior to initial startup, after prolonged shutdowns and which are not involved should be grounded. If the
after work on the windings. During installation it insulation resistances of the individual phases are
should be measured on a weekly basis. If required, likewise lower than the required limit value, drying
the generator should be dried until a sufficient of the windings will be indispensable. Great
insulation resistance is obtained. differences in the insulation resistance values are
indicative of local contaminations, e.g. insulators in
bus duct or terminal-bushings. If practicable,
1 Required Insulation Resistance of Stator additional connections should be separated. If this
Winding measure does not result in an improvement, it is
recommended to obtain the services of a specialist
from the manufacturer's works.
Insulation resistance R in megohm
2 Measurement of Insulation Resistance

Prior to each measurement, the generator must be
de-excited and any static charges removed by
grounding the windings. The windings should also
be grounded after each measurement for the

duration of the recharging period.
The insulation resistance of the stator is measured
between the winding copper and the stator core.
The measurement should be made with a megger
giving a scale reading of not less than
1000 megohm. The megger voltage should be not
less than 1000 V, but may amount to up to 5000 V.
The insulation resistance should be reached after
one minute.
Temperature t in °C
Fig. 1: Diagram for correction of insulation resistance

measured to a temperature of 40 °C
The insulation resistance measured is dependent on

the temperature. To permit a proper assessment, a
correction to an agreed reference temperature (for-
merly 75 °C,167 °F) must be made.
An insulation resistance of 1 megohm per each kilo-
volt of rated voltage at 75 °C (167 °F) is normally
attainable without any difficulties.
New international standards specify an insulation re-
sistance of not less than 1 megohm per each kilovolt
of rated generator voltage at 40 °C (104 °F).
A correction of the insulation resistance measured at
the winding temperature prevailing during the mea- Fig. 2: Test circuit of Insulation Resistant Measurement
surement to the above reference temperature can be
made using the diagram in fig. 1.
Siemens AG 4.7-1011-0004
Installation Drying the Windings
Siemens AG 4.7-1012-0001
Rotor Removal and Installation
Using Crane
Contents
1 Preliminary Remarks .................................................................................. 2
2 Rotor Removal ........................................................................................... 5
2.1 Preparatory Work ............................................................................... 5
2.2 Disengaging the Rotor on the Turbine End ........................................... 6
2.3 Inserting the Sliding Plate .................................................................. 7
2.4 Removing the Intermediate Frame on Turbine End ............................... 7
2.5 Removing the TE Bearing Cover and the Top Bearing Shell .................... 9
2.6 Removing the TE Lower Bearing Pedestal Section and the Lower Bearing
Shell ............................................................................................... 11
2.7 Assembling the Sliding Pedestal on the Turbine End ........................... 12
2.8 Preparations on Exciter End for Pulling out the Rotor .......................... 12
2.9 Travelling out the Rotor .................................................................... 14
2.10 Placing the Rotor Exciter End on the Set-down Trough ........................ 16
2.11 Suspending the Rotor Horizontally .................................................... 17
2.12 Putting down the Rotor onto the Final Position .................................. 18
3 Rotor Installation ..................................................................................... 19
Turbogenerator | Installation Manual 4.5-9913-0102 | 0114 en

Page 1 of 19
Rotor Removal and Installation Using Crane
1 Preliminary Remarks
This description explains how to remove the rotor from a two-pole generator. De-
pending on the actual design, certain details might be different from those included
in this description. Because of this, it is necessary to contact the manufacturer in
order to obtain further information. The generator views in figs. 1 and 2 show an
example of a generator with laterally arranged cooling units, exciter machine and
outbound lines on top.
Fig. 1: Two-pole generator,

exploded view
TE EE
Turbine end Exciter end
1 Cooler 6 Air baffle ring 11 Bearing pedestal, cover

2 Cover 7 Rotor 12 Bearing pedestal, base
3 End wall segment 8 Inner stator with core 13 Intermediate frame
4 Upper air guide 9 Base frame 14 Labyrinth ring
5 Outbound lines 10 Exciter set 15 Shaft bushing

Page 2 of 19
Fig. 2: Two-pole generator,

longitudinal section
TE EE
1 Cover 7 Bearing pedestal, base

2 Stator 8 Exciter set
3 Rotor 9 Turbine coupling
4 End wall segment 10 Intermediate frame
5 Shaft bushing 11 Base frame
6 Bearing pedestal, cover
Fig. 3: View on TE
1 Cover
2 End wall segment
4 Rotor
5 Bearing pedestal, base
6 Intermediate frame
7 Base frame
Safety precautions  Only skilled personnel are authorized to perform any disassembly or assem-
bly work on the generator. The accident prevention regulations applicable on
the construction site must be complied with.
 The valid safety regulations must be observed when working on platforms.
 Lifting equipment and hitching gear must be of a size and strength adequate for
the required loads. Round slings must be used as hitching gears.
 Suitable measures must be used to secure the rotor against unintended move-
ments during every step, as well as after the rotor is in its resting position after
having been removed.
 Removed parts must be safely stored outside marked walkways. They must be
stored in such a way that it is impossible for the parts to unintentionally change
position or topple over.
 Do not store any tools or component parts in the area of base frame and genera-
tor windings.
 Suitable aids or materials (e.g., foil) must be used to protect uncovered openings
from soiling and to prevent foreign particles from entering them.

Page 3 of 19
 Openings must be adequately marked and blocked in line with operator protec-
tion requirements.
Equipment required The following items are included in the standard scope of supply from Siemens (see
Special Tools):
• 1 Sliding plate
• 2 Sliding shoes
• 1 Sliding pedestal
• 2 Set-down troughs
• 2 Rubber plates
• 1 Adapter plate (optionally)
• Sliding grease
The generator operator has to provide:

• Gantry crane and hitching gears (sling equipment for jacking the rotor)
• Chain or rope hoists
• Securing devices
• Foil
• Wire reels
• Water level
• Height-leveling supports
NOTE
The standard scope of supply for the generator may not include all the tools
and equipment mentioned in this description. The agreed scope of supply
must be checked. If necessary, various parts, tools, and equipment may have
to be ordered separately.
Special tools Fig. 4 shows a section of the special tools used for removing rotors. The brackets (1)
that can be seen in the background are mounted on the base of the sliding pedestal
(2) with hexagonal bolts (also see fig. 14, page 12). The sliding pedestal is placed
near or next to the bearing area (dependent on the clamp diameter on the on the
sliding pedestal) facing the center of the generator. The copper shim is inserted in
between, in order to protect the bearing area.
Fig. 4: Some of the special tools

for removing the rotor
1 Sliding pedestal, U-brackets 5 Sliding plate

2 Sliding pedestal, base
3 Sliding shoe
4 Copper shim

Page 4 of 19
2 Rotor Removal
Overview The rotor removal process is divided into the following steps:
1. Preparatory work, especially the disassembly of peripheral devices
2. Disengaging the rotor on the turbine end
3. Inserting the sliding plate
4. Removing the intermediate frame on the turbine end
5. Removing the TE bearing cover and the top bearing shell
6. Removing the lower bearing pedestal section and the lower bearing shell on
the turbine end
7. Assembling the sliding pedestal on the turbine end
8. Preparations on exciter end for pulling out the rotor
9. Travelling out the rotor
10. Placing the exciter end of the rotor on a set-down trough and suitable under-
lays
11. Suspending the rotor horizontally
12. Putting down the rotor onto both set-down troughs in the final position
2.1 Preparatory Work

Preparation The transportation safety devices and safety tools delivered with the generator
must be prepared when starting work.
Depending on the actual generator design, the cooling elements and the sound-
absorbing hood may have to be removed as part of the dismantling procedure.
Loosen all cable couplers before lifting off the sound-absorbing hood without fail.
NOTICE
 During all crane work, make sure that the hitching gears are not placed on the
rotor retaining rings, on the bearing points, or in the area of the sealing surfaces.
Work steps The remaining work steps must be carried out in the following order:
1. Align the rotor coupling vertically (transport position marking 0 or 12 on the
coupling must face upwards).
2. Remove the exciter or the static excitation device (slip ring housing, con-
necting cables, plug-in brush holder, and brush yoke).
3. Remove the TE and EE front wall segments.
4. Remove the labyrinth rings and the upper TE and EE shaft bushings.
5. Remove all bearing pedestal connections (oil flanges, cables, shaft vibration
pickups, etc.).
6. Mark and remove the TE and EE air baffle rings.
7. Remove all tightness rings, vibration detectors and temperature sensors at

the TE or EE bearing pedestals.

Page 5 of 19
NOTICE
 If any oil leaks from the bearings during the work being carried out, use ade-
quate means to capture it.
 After opening, the bearings must be immediately protected from mechanical
damage with suitable measures (e.g., covering).
Fig. 5: After preparatory works

have finished
TE EE
1 TE coupling half
2 TE fan blades
3 EE fan blades
2.2 Disengaging the Rotor on the Turbine End

The rotor must be disengaged on the turbine end.
Coupling Jack apart the TE coupling half from the coupling recess with the help of the origi-
nal clamping bolts. While jacking apart the half couplings, observe the maximum
axial clearance values as specified in the dimensional drawing on "Axial and radial
rotor clearances".
NOTICE
 Only jack apart until the coupling overhang is located at a maximum distance of
10 mm outside the coupling face. A bigger distance between the half couplings
will impede rotor later lifting in the area of cap / toothed end packets.
Fan blades It might be necessary to remove the fan blades on both rotor ends as preparation
for the following step. The fan blades must be removed if the fan’s diameter is
greater than the inner diameter of the rotor retaining ring or if there is a danger that
the fan blades will interfere with the housing.
NOTICE
 The fan blade ends should be bandaged using soft protective material to protect
the threads before they are placed down.

Page 6 of 19
2.3 Inserting the Sliding Plate

Work steps 1. Clean the sliding plate, apply a thin film of sliding grease to the inner side, and
wrap it in sheeting.
2. Slide in the plate, covered in foil, through the generator gap between the rotor
and stator, above the EE bearing (fig. 6).
3. Place the plate centrally underneath the rotor by guiding it manually on both
sides. The sliding plate’s required final position is shown in fig. 4, right side,
and in fig. 6.
4. After this, the foil between the rotor and the sliding plate must be removed.
Fig. 6: Inserting the sliding

plate
TE EE
1 Sliding plate, inserting position

2 Sliding plate, final position
NOTICE
Risk of damaging the rotor and stator.
 Insert the sliding plate very carefully.
2.4 Removing the Intermediate Frame on Turbine End

Work steps 1. Release the TE bearing’s intermediate frame from the base frame. To do this,
remove the bearing pedestal bolts and alignment pins from the base frame.
2. Attach the hitching gear to the rotor shaft near the bearing (not to the sus-
pension eyelets!).
3. Lift the bearing a few millimeters with the intermediate frame and shaft still
attached to it (fig. 7, I).
WARNING
Danger of injury from heavy loads falling.
 The rotor must NOT be suspended from the suspension eyelets on the bearing
cover. These are only for lifting up the bearing pedestal or bearing.
4. Place thin rolls (welding wires) underneath the intermediate frame. These rolls
are used as aids for transportation. Alternatively, a lubricated sliding pad may
be used.

Page 7 of 19
5. Once these aids have been positioned, lower the bearing together with the
intermediate frame.
6. Release now the intermediate frame from the bottom part of the TE bearing
pedestal. Remove the screws and dowel pins.
7. Lift the rotor with the crane until the intermediate frame can move freely.
8. Pull out the intermediate frame from the side and store it safely (fig. 7, II).
Fig. 7: Removing the

intermediate frame – 1 Hitching gear attached to the rotor
view on TE 2 Bearing pedestal
3 Intermediate frame in installation
position
4 Base frame
I Lifting the rotor and bearing pedestal

II Pulling out the intermediate frame
9. Insert the sliding shoe between the centrally aligned sliding plate and the
rotor, flush with the edge of the retaining ring (fig. 8).
Fig. 8: Removing the

TE intermediate frame
1 Bearing pedestal I Lifting the rotor and bearing pedestal

2 TE intermediate frame to pull out the intermediate frame
3 Hitching gear attached to the rotor
4 Rotor retaining ring
5 Sliding shoe
6 Sliding plate
10. Once the sliding shoe has been positioned, lower the rotor until it is bearing
on the sliding shoe.
11. Finally, the TE bearing is supported with the help of height-adjustable ele-
ments (fig. 9).

Page 8 of 19
Fig. 9: View on TE,

Lowering the rotor
1 Supports adjustable in height

2 Intermediate frame in parking posi-
tion
III Lowering the rotor until it is resting

on the sliding pad and bearing is
resting on bearing supports
Fig. 10: Turbine end with

bearing resting on bearing
supports
1 Supports adjustable in height

2 Intermediate frame in parking posi-
tion
2.5 Removing the TE Bearing Cover and the Top Bearing Shell
Work steps 1. Disassemble completely the TE bearing cover’s threaded connection.
2. Attach the hitching gear to the bearing cover’s eyelets and carefully lift off the
bearing cover (fig. 11, I).
3. Place the bearing cover in its resting position with the crane or, alternatively, a
hydraulic jack. Put it down safely on a suitable soft support pad (wood, rub-
ber, or similar). Remove the slinging ropes.

Page 9 of 19
NOTICE
 If a hydraulic jack is used instead of a crane, the jack must be placed underneath
the coupling or between the bearing pedestal and the coupling. Insert suitable
material for shaft protection between shaft and jack (e.g., copper or aluminum
sheets).
4. Unscrew the bearing shell’s screw couplings. After this, remove at first the
measuring cable for the bearing insulation monitoring system and then the
top bearing shell (fig. 11, II).
5. Pack up the bearing shell and store it safely.
Fig. 11: Removing the TE 1 Hitching gear attached to bearing

bearing cover and the top suspension eyelets
bearing shell – View on TE 2 Bearing suspension eyelets
4 Top bearing shell
5 Bearing pedestal, base, with lower
bearing shell
I Removing the bearing cover

II Removing the top bearing shell
Fig. 12: Removing the TE

bearing cover and the top
bearing shell
1 Bearing pedestal, base I Removing the bearing cover

2 Bearing pedestal, cover II Removing the top bearing shell
3 Bearing suspension eyelets
4 Hitching gear attached to bearing
suspension eyelets

Page 10 of 19
2.6 Removing the TE Lower Bearing Pedestal Section and the Lower Bearing
Shell
Work steps 1. Attach the hitching gears in the immediate vicinity of the bearing pedestal. If
there is sufficient space, attach the gears on the side facing the fan hub
(fig. 13).
Fig. 13: Removing the TE lower

bearing pedestal section and
the lower bearing shell
1 Bearing pedestal, base I Lifting the TE rotor shaft

2 Eye bolts fixed on the bearing pedes- II Removing the TE lower bearing ped-
tal base estal section and the lower bearing
3 Hitching gear attached to rotor shell
4 Fan hub
2. Remove the high-pressure hose and the oil line for the jacking oil (if any) that
are located underneath the bearing shell. Remove the grounding cable.
3. Lift the shaft on the turbine end by 0.1 to 0.3 mm.
4. Once the shaft is lifted, swivel out the lower bearing shell.
5. After this, attach two eye bolts to the bottom of the TE bearing pedestal, di-
agonally opposite to each other.
6. Lower the rotor until it rests on the sliding shoe.
7. Attach the hitching gears to the eyelets. After this, remove the height-
adjustable supports.
8. Lower the bearing pedestal base section, remove it sideways and store it safe-
ly.

Page 11 of 19
2.7 Assembling the Sliding Pedestal on the Turbine End

Work steps 1. Assemble the sliding pedestal on the TE bearing point (fig. 14) (or next to it).
NOTICE
 In order to ensure that the bearing is protected, the assembly process must be
carried out only while using the copper shims included in the scope of supply.
 It is necessary to assemble the sliding pedestal perpendicularly to the rotor axis.
Use a water level to check the horizontal alignment.
2. Lower the rotor until it rests on the sliding shoe.
3. Remove the hitching gears and crane on turbine end.
Fig. 14: Sliding pedestal

assembled on turbine end
bearing point
1 Sliding pedestal I Removal direction

2 U-brackets
3 Copper shims
2.8 Preparations on Exciter End for Pulling out the Rotor

Equipment required • Bearing transportation securing device
• Rope hoist or chain hoist
• Adapter plate (optionally)
Normally, the rotor will be travelled out by pulling it from the exciter end. Alterna-
tively, if there is not sufficient space for pulling, the rotor can be moved in direction
to exciter end applying hydraulic jacks or equivalent tools on the turbine end.
The following steps describe the preparations on exciter end for the pulling proce-
dure.
To pull out the rotor, a rope sling is attached either to the EE bearing pedestal or,
alternatively, to an adapter plate.
Work steps 1. If the rope sling will be attached to the EE bearing pedestal, lock at first the
bearing using the transportation securing device (fig. 15).
If the rope sling will be attached to an adapter plate, mount this at first to the
rotor exciter end (fig. 16).

Page 12 of 19
Fig. 15: Bearing transportation

securing
1 Top bearing shell 5 Axial retaining ring(divided)

2 Rotor 6 Anti-rotation locks (shim between the
3 Lower bearing shell shaft and the upper bearing shell in
4 Separating joint both bearings)
Fig. 16: Adapter plate,

schematic diagram and
mounted on exciter end
1 Rotor exciter end

2 Adapter plate with eyelet
Fig. 17: Rotor resting on the

sliding shoe, with exciter end
suspended from the crane and
adapter plate mounted
1 Sliding pedestal on TE 5 EE bearing pedestal, cover

2 Sliding shoe 6 EE bearing pedestal, base
3 Sliding plate 7 EE intermediate frame
4 Gantry crane with hitching gears 8 Base frame
attached to EE 9 Adapter plate

Page 13 of 19
2. Attach now the rope sling to the EE bearing pedestal (fig. 18) or to the adapter
plate (fig. 19).
NOTICE
 No attachment points other than the points specified for attaching the axial pull
mechanism must be used. In particular, no forces must be exerted on the slip
rings while removing the rotor. This also applies to the fan blades if they have
been left on the rotor due to there being enough space available.
3. As the pull mechanism use a rope hoist or a chain hoist, which is attached to
an appropriate and sufficiently stable anchor point.
4. Before starting to pull out the rotor, remove the bolts and pins which fix the EE
intermediate frame onto the base frame.
5. Attach the crane to the rotor’s exciter end, next to the bearing point, using
suitable hitching gears (round slings). If the space available allows, attach the
hitching gear between bearing and fan.
6. The rotor must be carefully lifted until the EE bearing is no longer bearing a
load.
2.9 Travelling out the Rotor

Requirements for moving the Preparing steps that have already been carried out:
rotor
 The EE bearing was fixed using the transportation securing device, in order to
transmit the axial tensile force onto the rotor.
 The EE intermediate frame was loosened from the base frame.
 The rotor was lifted until the EE bearing was no longer bearing a load.
 On the turbine end, the rotor is still bearing against the sliding shoe.
 The rope hoist (or chain hoist) is connected to the bearing (EE bearing pedestal
or adapter plate) and a fixed point by a rope sling (or chain).
Pulling force The force required to pull out the rotor is equal to the frictional force that must be
overcome.
• The frictional force can be approximated with FR = µ × FN.

• Normal force FN = FG = m × g
• m: shaft mass, can be gathered from the dimensional drawing text
• g: gravitational acceleration (g = 9,81 m/s2)
• µ: coefficient of static friction for steel–teflon + sliding grease (µ ≈ 0.1)
If this value for µ is used for the calculation, the result obtained is approximately the
maximum force that the attachment point of the chain or wire rope used to pull
out the rotor must hold. A suitable anchor point must be selected according to this
information. Since the sliding plate is lubricated, the coefficient of friction will de-
crease significantly as soon as the rotor is moving.
NOTICE
 It is absolutely necessary to ensure that the applied tensile forces act solely in an
axial direction. Avoid any oblique or a skew pulling. Do not use the crane to carry
out any axial pulling movements!
 The rotor and stator components must not come into contact with each other
while the rotor is being removed.

Page 14 of 19
Work steps 1. Start to pull out the rotor from the stator by exerting an axial pull while con-
tinuously guiding the crane (figs. 18 and 19).
Fig. 18: Alternative 1 – Rope is

attached to the bearing-
pedestal base
1 Sliding pedestal 5 EE intermediate frame

2 Sliding shoe 6 Rope hoist
3 Sliding plate
4 EE bearing pedestal, base I Pulling direction
Fig. 19: Alternative 2 – Rope is

attached to the adapter plate
1 Sliding pedestal 4 Adapter plate

2 Sliding shoe 5 Rope hoist
3 Sliding plate I Pulling direction
2. Continue to pull out the rotor until the sliding pedestal comes into contact
with the sliding plate (fig. 20, 1).
Fig. 20: Other stages in the

rotor removal process
1 Sliding pedestal comes into contact 2 Removing the sliding shoe

with the sliding plate

Page 15 of 19
3. When continuing the process, the sliding shoe will reach the leading edge of
the sliding plate on the exciter end. Remove the sliding shoe (fig. 20, 2).
2.10 Placing the Rotor Exciter End on the Set-down Trough

Work steps 1. Continue to move out the rotor until its attachment position (geometrical
center of the rotor) is located outside the stator and the attachment area is
freely accessible (see fig. 22).
2. Place a set-down trough (fig. 21) near the EE retaining ring, centrally under
the rotor body (not under the retaining ring). The height difference in relation
to the hall floor must be compensated for with stable pad elements (height-
levelling supports). The support trough and pad elements must be placed in
such a way that the required hitching-gear rope spread for the following crane
work can be achieved.
Fig. 21: Set-down trough,

schematic diagram
3. As soon as the position described above has been reached, place the rotor
body down on the trough (fig. 22). Put the rotor down in such a way that a
safe resting position is maintained that completely prevents any subsequent
sliding or settling movements from occurring after the crane is removed.
Fig. 22: Placing the rotor 1 Geometrical center of the rotor I Pulling direction
exciter end on the set-down 2 Attachment area
trough 3 Set-down trough
4 Pad elements
4. Remove the aids used for axially pulling the rotor.

Page 16 of 19
2.11 Suspending the Rotor Horizontally
NOTICE
If the rotor is not suspended horizontally, this reduces the clearance in the air
gap required when the rotor is pulled out. This creates a risk of the rotor
contacting the stator.
Due to the large mass of the rotor, this contact will most probably result in heavy
damage.
 Suspend the rotor horizontally and balance it with great care.
 Position the crane exactly vertically above the center of the rotor.
Any sudden braking or accelerating movements by the crane can cause

uncontrollable rotor movements, which in turn can lead to damage to the
stator and/or rotor.
 It is absolutely essential to ensure that the rotor is pulled out as evenly as possi-
ble.
Fig. 23: Rotor suspended 1 Rubber pad 4 Set-down trough

horizontally 2 Geometrical center of the rotor 5 Pad elements
3 Rope spreading min. 600 mm 6 Alternative support elements
Fig. 24: Suspending the rotor,

detailed views
Supporting the EE bearing pedestal Sufficient rope spreading

by alternative support elements

Page 17 of 19
Work steps 1. Support the EE bearing pedestal by alternative support elements.
2. Place the hitching gears for the crane approximately in the geometrical center
of the rotor. The attachment points must be separated by a minimum of
600 mm.
Sling the rotor in such a way that it is hanging in a horizontal position after
being lifted (please observe the bearing weight). Use a water level in order to
ensure that a perfectly horizontal position is achieved.
Monitor the rotor’s position by observing, from both bearing points, how the
rotor lifts off during the crane lifting operation.
3. Lift both ends off their supports at the same time.
4. In order to be able to perform necessary corrections, put the rotor down again
in the same position. The correction is made by moving the slings by a few
centimeters. Repeat this procedure until the rotor is in a perfectly horizontal
position.
5. As long as the rotor is still in the proximity of the stator, carefully guide the
rotor ends by hand. This way, small displacements can be corrected.
6. Remove set-down trough, pad elements and alternative supports.
2.12 Putting down the Rotor onto the Final Position

Work steps 1. Remove the rotor completely.
2. Once removed, put the rotor safely down on the two set-down troughs or in a
shipping crate.
NOTICE
 Do not support the rotor on the retaining rings, the slip rings or the fan blades (if
these were left on the rotor). These components must neither be used for sup-
port nor securing purposes.
Fig. 25: Rotor put onto its final 1 Set-down trough

position 2 Pad elements
3. Once all work is done, inspect visually all gaps and openings.
Moreover, ensure once again that all removed parts are safely stored.
4. If it becomes necessary to disassemble the EE bearing, the procedure to be

followed is the same as that for disassembling the bearing on the turbine side.

Page 18 of 19
3 Rotor Installation
Preparation Before the rotor installation make sure that

 all installation equipment (see page 4) is prepared,
 the rotor has been placed on two set-down troughs,
 the sliding pedestal is mounted on the rotor’s turbine end,
 the sliding plate, greased on the inner side, is placed inside the stator core.
Work steps In order to install the rotor, follow the steps described in chapter 2 for rotor removal
in changed order:
1. Assemble adapter plate on turbine end (optionally).
2. Suspend rotor horizontally (hitching gears in central position).
3. Insert rotor turbine end with sliding pedestal into stator core,
put down sliding pedestal on greased sliding plate and
place rotor exciter end on set-down trough and support elements.
4. Attach rope sling to sliding pedestal or adapter plate, the other end to a rope
hoist.
5. Displace hitching gears from rotor center to exciter end, remove set-down
trough and support elements.
6. Pull in rotor into the stator applying the rope hoist. While doing this, place
sliding shoe between rotor and sliding plate, behind TE rotor cap.
7. When rotor has reached final position, displace hitching gears from exciter
end to turbine end.
8. Remove sliding pedestal.
9. Assemble lower bearing pedestal section and lower bearing shell on turbine
end.
10. Assemble TE bearing cover and top bearing shell.
11. Assemble TE intermediate frame.
12. Remove sliding shoe pulling it from exciter end with small ropes attached
beforehand. If necessary, lift rotor.
13. Remove sliding plate, remove adapter plate.
14. Engage rotor on turbine end.
15. Align rotor coupling vertically, then do finishing work as described in chapter
2.1 Preparatory Work (page 5), but in reverse order.

Page 19 of 19
Installation Attaching the Generator
Notice:
Support and lift the generator parts only at the bollards of base frame.
Only use the appropriated lifting equipment (lifting beams / round slings).
The lifting equipment must be in good condition and have a sufficient load carrying capacity.
Only use qualified and experienced staff for attaching loads or instructing crane operators.
2
1 Round sling (short)

2 Lifting beam
3 Round sling (long)
4 Bollard at base frame
Fig. 1 Attaching the generator
Siemens AG 4.7-1014-0001
Turbogenerator Air Baffle Ring Mounting and
Special Tools Dismounting
Application of the Special Wrench
The delivered special wrench is required for For mounting or dismounting of the air baffle ring
mounting, dismounting, and axial adjusting of the air only one wrench [item (8)] is required to tighten or
baffle ring. loosen the hexagon nuts [item (2)].
It consists of two wrenches [items (6) and (8)] and Before axial adjusting or dismounting of the air
four parallel pins [item (7)]. It is required for axial baffle ring the cotter pins have to be removed.
adjusting by turning the screw collars [item (3)]. After axial adjusting or mounting of the air baffle
ring new cotter pins have to be inserted. One set
of new cotter pins is included.
1 Washer
2 Hexagon nut
3 Screw collar
4 Stud bolt
5 Cotter pin bore hole
6 Wrench
7 Pin
8 Wrench
Fig. 1: Special wrench
Siemens AG 4.5-9940-0001
Installation Securing the Screw Connections at
Air Baffle Ring (new Bolts)
Notice:
Screwed connections at air baffle ring (see Fig. 1) are not secured with delivery. Align
the radial clearance according to shop assembly record at site. Therefore open the nut
(item 170). Align the axial clearance according to shop assembly record at site.
Therefore adjust castellated screw collar (item 160). After alignment look the castellated
screw collars with new splint (item 130). Tighten nut (item 170) and lock it up with tab
washer (item 140) after alignment.
Fig. 1
Siemens AG 4.7-2400-0101
Installation Blower Blade Safety Lock (with pins)
Attention:
The fan blades are secured with two hexagon socket set screws (1) and two (previously
installed) steel pins (2). The two hexagon socket set screws (1) are locked with Loctite
243 (cement).
For disassembly of the fan blades, remove the two hexagon socket set screws (1) and
the two steel pins (2).
For assembly of the fan blades, screw the fan blades first all the way in and after that
slowly back into position “K”.
To adjust every single fan blade, check the position “K” and tighten the two hexagon
socket set screws (1) carefully, together with the two steel pins (2), till the fan blade is
firmly. The tightening torques of both hexagon socket set screws (1) are 10Nm. Apply
Loctite 243 on the hexagon socket set screws (1).
Check and record the position “K” from all fan blades, before dismantling and after the
reassembling of the fan blades.
Fig. 1
Siemens AG 4.7-2407-0002
Turbogenerator Adjustment of the Gaps of the
Storage and Commissioning Preparation Stator Core End Stops
The gaps of the stator core's end stops The M42 hexagon head screws have to be screwed
have to be adjusted before installing the into the tapped hole, up to the defined gap width (X)
covering hood. During the generator's has been achieved.
transportation the screws must be screwed The screws must be finally fixed in their position by
out of the tapped hole, until the limit stop is tightening the set screws. The securing of the set
reached (gap width = 0 mm). screws is done with the engineering adhesive
For the case of generator's operation the Loctite 270
defined gap widths must be adjusted. The
value of the gap width (X) can be found on
the drawing of the design group 0990
"Machine Assembly".
Separating Wall
End Plate
Lock Plate
Hexagon Socket X Stator Core

Set Screw
X
Clamp Ring
Hexagon Head Screw

M 42
Siemens AG 4.5-0040-0003
Installation Description of the Alignment Procedure
after First Installation
The check whether an alignment correction is required on the generator during the first installation should be
made after foundation grouting and anchor bolts tightening, but before peripheral components such as pipes
and cables are mounted.
The following steps must be performed after foundation grouting whenever an alignment correction of the
generator rotor to the turbine rotor is necessary:
1.0 Preparation for Alignment
1.1 Registration and Recording of Actual Conditions
- Check all foundation bolts to the corresponding torque

(See Installation Manual)
Anchor Thread Old concrete foundation New concrete foundation

Bolt design
size pitch (at least 3 to 4 years) or steel foundation
∆lO in ∆lN in
mm MO in Nm MN in Nm
mm/m mm/m
M36 4 0.70 850 0.95 1000 DIN

M42 4.5 0.70 1400 0.95 1800 DIN
M48 5 0.70 2000 0.95 2700 DIN

M52 5 0.70 2600 0.95 3500 DIN
Table 1-1: Tightening torques for different types of foundation and different anchor sizes
- Check both the radial and the axial coupling alignment
The expansion or contraction to be expected because of temperature changes must be taken into account for
radial alignment whenever the generator is coupled to a driven machine which has an operating temperature
that differs considerably from the installation temperature.
The rotor must allow free rotation without touching neither stator, or brush carrier, or similar parts. Pour clean
machinery oil into the oil distribution grooves in the bottom part bearing shells. Switch the oil pressure relief to
ON, if any, and rotate the rotor for one turn.
CAUTION
Coupling alignment must be performed without oil pressure relief.
If possible, rotate the rotor manually; otherwise use either a crane, or a hydraulic jack. To avoid measuring
errors during alignment, rotate at the opposite shaft end if possible. When using a crane, sling two ropes with
several turns around the shaft such that the rotor is turned in the direction of rotation when the ropes are
pulled. Hang one loop each on an auxiliary bolt covered with copper or pressboard to the left and to the right
of the coupling, and hang the other loops on the crane hook.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rope to unwind up to the end. Do not use this procedure when the oil
pressure relief is switched ON.
Ropes must be dimensioned at least to such a value that they could lift half the rotor weight.
If there is a good oil film on the shaft, the rotor may also be turned using a hydraulic jack applied to an
auxiliary bolt of the coupling.
- Check all air gaps on the sealing labyrinths and air guide baffle rings of generator
Siemens AG 4.7-1016-EG000425 /1 of 5
1.2 Calculation of the Modifications Required and Further Action

Calculate the resulting positional changes of the bearing housings in accordance with the indications given on
the Alignment of Turbine - Generator, in the Manual, Part 1.
A decision on how to proceed further should be taken on the basis of a comparison between the values
calculated and the maximum permissible air-gap deviations of the rotor to the stator core. If the calculated
positional changes exceed the tolerances of the stator air gap, a decision should be taken on whether to
modify the foundation, or relocate turbine and generator rotor.
NOTE
Air gaps according to the drawing on “Axial and radial rotor clearances” Drawing no.:
DPPPG-70191559. All measurements seen from TE*.
Figure 2-1: Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances
Figure 2-2: Axial Clearances
Figure 2-3: Radial Clearances
Siemens AG 4.7-1016-EG000425 /2 of 5
If it is possible to correct the coupling alignment within the permissible tolerances, proceed as follows:
- Disassemble and mark positions of outer air seal rings, rigid labyrinths and plug in brush holders.
- Compare the required positional changes on the bearing housings with the air gaps of the TE / EE air
baffle rings; loosen or disassemble the rings, if necessary.
NOTE
The air guide baffle rings can be re-adjusted correspondingly after loosening the screwed
connections and setting the adjusting screws.
For installation and alignment:
For adjustment the air gap (1) setup the complete

air guide ring (2).
First, open the 6 nuts (3) M30*2.0. Second, adjust
the air guide ring with the two adjustment screws (4)
on the bottom of front wall. Set the air gap around, in
vertical and horizontal position on equal values.
1
Final, tighten and lock the 6 nuts (3) M30*2.0 with
2 the lock washers.
3 3
Figure 2-4: Air Baffle Ring mounted Figure 2-5: Detail Fixing Screw
CAUTION
Take appropriate precautions to prevent overturning and falling when disassembling all
screwed connections.
- Disassemble the bearing housing foot bolts and remove the taper pins.
- Disassemble oil inlet and drain flanges.
CAUTION
Make certain that you have removed the oil filling in the bearing housing beforehand.
Siemens AG 4.7-1016-EG000425 /3 of 5
- Disassemble all vibration pick-ups.

- Install dial indicators to detect vertical and horizontal shaft movements during alignment correction.
- Disassemble the bearing covers and the upper bearing shells.
- Install a soft gasket pad to the bearing position of shaft and install the upper bearing shells. Install the
bearing covers
CAUTION
Do not turn the rotor using the soft gasket pad in the bearing!
- Support an appropriate oil pressure jack in a central position under the shaft.
2.0 Rotor Alignment
Alignment work should be carried out separately for every bearing housing and then checked by radial and
axial distance measurements on the coupling.
Before starting the lifting process proper, re-adjust all dial indicators once again, and check the required
freedom of motion of the rotor including the bearing housings.
The lifting process must be checked continuously on the lifting device's oil pressure gauge, and on the dial
indicators.
Maximum TE and EE lift should be smaller than the existing air gaps of the air baffle rings and of the exciter, if
present. Check for the indications on “axial and radial rotor float”.
Reliefs lift of between 0.5 - 1.5 mm is recommended to replace shims for height correction.
CAUTION
When replacing the shims, make certain that uniform modifications are made at all points
of support. Ensure cleanliness when installing the shims.
Remove any foreign materials and dirt particles on a wide area before.
The lateral movement can be achieved using an appropriate and stable reinforcing rod in the bearing housing
taper pin holes.
If any thrust block is available by the sides of the bearing housings, you can also use jacking screws, oil
pressure jacks, or pressing screws.
CAUTION
Before applying any levers, use protective shims made of aluminum, copper or similar
materials to protect the threads in the bearing housing mounting holes.
After correction, the hydraulic jack must be lowered slowly.

Subsequently, fasten all holding-down bolts of the bearing housings, remove the shims or bearing safety
devices, and perform repeated radial and axial measurements on the coupling.
CAUTION
Make certain that clean turbine oil is fed to the bearing when turning the rotor. This oil
can be poured onto the bearings continuously while turning. The oil drain should be
mounted before, or appropriate measures should be taken to catch the oil that will be
running off.
Depending on the results obtained by the check measurement on the coupling, the entire process should be
repeated starting with item 1.2 and until the required alignment quality is achieved.
After completing work on the rotor, re-align the brush carrier or the exciter stator housing according to the
positional change of the EE bearing housing.
Siemens AG 4.7-1016-EG000425 /4 of 5
This requires the following work steps:
- Remove all taper pins and fastening bolts from the stator housing.
- Check the air gaps for freedom of motion
- Install the lifting screws in the base frame of stator housing.
- Lift the stator housing while continuously checking the readout on the dial indicators installed beforehand.
- Place compensating shims under the stator foot to correct the height.
The lateral movement can be achieved using an appropriate and stable reinforcing rod in the stator foot bolt
holes.
If thrust blocks are available by the sides of the exciter, you can also use jacking screws, oil pressure jacks, or
pressing screws.
CAUTION
Before applying any levers, use protective shims made of aluminum, copper or similar
materials to protect the threads in the foot mounting holes.
After correction, lower the stator housing slowly.

Subsequently, fasten all holding-down bolts of the stator foot, and measure the air gaps at 4 measuring points
on the laminated core, or on the seal faces toward the housing. As a reference, you can use the initial values
as determined by dimensional data recording under section 1.1 on the seal faces toward the housing before
rotor alignment.
NOTE
Make certain that the alignment quality of air gap is ensured as per drawing “Axial and
radial rotor clearances” drawing no.: DPPPG-70191559.
After completing all alignment corrections, finish-ream all taper pin holes without offset, and install all
labyrinths, air baffle rings, and screwed connections in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
All modifications to the original positions of rotor and exciter stator should be recorded and included in the life-
cycle dossier.
Siemens AG 4.7-1016-EG000425 /5 of 5
Turbogenerator
Description
Manufacturing Procedures
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Unterlagenart / Document type Nr./No.:
FV/MP 12-011
Fertigungsvorschrift Datum/Date:2013-08-07
Revision: 3
Manufacturing Procedure Herausgeber/Issued by:
E F PR GN EN ERF GD 1
Titel/Title
Verankern und Vergießen des Generatorgrundrahmens
Anchoring and Grouting of the Generator Base Frame
Prozessfähigkeit: vorläufig endgültig X
Seite: 1 von 14 Anlagen:
Handhabung: offen / open
Inhalt Contents
1 Allgemeines 1 General 3
1.1 Änderungsmitteilung 1.1 Technical Modification Report 3
1.2 Zweck 1.2 Purpose 3
1.3 Geltungsbereich 1.3 Scope of Validity 3
1.4 Abkürzungen und Begriffe 1.4 Abbreviations and Terms 3
2 Verantwortung und Zuständigkeiten 2 Responsibilities and Competences 4
3 Prozessbeschreibung 3 Process Description 4
3.1 Informationen zum Generator 3.1 Generator Information 4
3.1.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1.1 Drawings 4
3.1.2 Ausrichthilfen 3.1.2 Alignments Aids 4
3.2 Vorbereitung der Generatoraufstellung 3.2 Preparation for Generator Installation 4
3.2.1 Vorbereitung des Betonfundamentes 3.2.1 Preparation of the Concrete Foundation 4
3.2.2 Legen der Erstauflage- und Ausrichtplatten 3.2.2 Laying of Primary Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates 5
3.2.3 Aufteilung und Einschalung der Gießflächen 3.2.3 Subdivision and Shuttering of Grouting Segments 5
3.3 Generator ausrichten und aufstellen 3.3 Generator Alignment and Installation 7
3.3.1 Generator auf dem Fundament absetzen 3.3.1 Placement of Generator on Foundation 7
Freigegeben/Released by: Senske E F PR GN EN ERFF

Geprüft/Reviewed by: Bauer E F PR GN EN ERF GD1
Mitgeprüft/Reviewed by: Antonik E F PR GN ERF OM2
Mitgeprüft/Reviewed by: Parbs E F PR GN EN ERF GD1
Erstellt/Prepared by: Tiedemann E F PR GN EN ERF GD1 Gez. Tiedemann 2013-08-07
Name/Name Org.-Einheit/ Unterschrift/ Datum/Date
Org.Unit Signature
Verteiler: EN ERF, ERF OM2
Siemens AG Energy
 Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, sowie nicht ausdrücklich
zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patentierung oder GM-Eintragung vorbehal-
QUM
Fossil Power Generation E F PR
 ten. System
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be
Generatorenwerk Erfurt held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model are reserved.
Nr./No: FV/MP 12-011
Datum/Date: 2013-08-07
Revision: 3
Seite/Page: 2 von/of 14
3.3.2 Generatorausrichtung 3.3.2 Generator Alignment 8
3.3.3 Montage der Fundamentanker 3.3.3 Anchor Bolt Mounting 9
3.4 Vergießen der Fundamentanker 3.4 Grouting of Anchor Bolts 9
3.5 Untergießen des Grundrahmens 3.5 Base Frame Grouting 9
3.5.1 Vorbereitungen 3.5.1 Preparatory Operations 9
3.5.2 Ausrichtkontrolle 3.5.2 Alignment Check 10
3.5.3 Vorbereitung des Gießfelduntergrundes 3.5.3 Preparation of Ground under Grouting Area 10
3.5.4 Vergussmaterial 3.5.4 Grouting Compound 10
3.5.5 Vergießvorgang 3.5.5 Grouting Process 10
3.5.6 Abschlussarbeiten und Ausrichtprotokoll 3.5.6 Concluding Operations and Alignment Report 11
4 Mitgeltende Unterlagen 4 Other Applicable Documents 12
Anlage A Appendix A 13
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
1 Allgemeines 1 General
Verantwortlich für Inhalt und Änderungsdienst dieser The Design Department of the Siemens AG Generator
FV ist die Abteilung Konstruktion des Siemens AG – Plant Erfurt is responsible for the content and revision
Generatorenwerk Erfurt. service of this manufacturing procedure.
1.1 Änderungsmitteilung 1.1 Technical Modification Report
Revision Datum Änderungsinhalt Revision Date Alteration contents
1 2001-06-28 Erste Ausgabe 1 2001-06-28 First Edition
2 2009-04-16 Zweisprachige Ausgabe 2 2009-04-16 Bilingual Edition
3 2013-08-07 Kapitel 3.2.3 überarbeitet 3 2013-08-07 Chapter 3.2.3 changed
1.2 Zweck 1.2 Purpose

Die Fertigungsvorschrift beschreibt die notwendigen The Manufacturing Procedure describes the necessary
Arbeitsabläufe und Maßnahmen zum Einbau und Ver- work sequences and measures for the anchoring and
guss von Generatorgrundrahmen auf Beton- grouting of generator base frames on concrete founda-
fundamenten entsprechend den technischen Anforde- tions according to the technical requirements.
rungen.
1.3 Geltungsbereich 1.3 Scope of Validity

Siemens AG Siemens AG
Energy Sector Energy Sector
Power Generation Power Generation
Generatorenwerk Erfurt Generator Plant Erfurt
1.4 Abkürzungen und Begriffe 1.4 Abbreviations and Terms
BG Baugruppe DG Design Group
FV Fertigungsvorschrift MP Manufacturing Procedure
2 Verantwortung und Zuständigkeiten 2 Responsibility and Competences

Für die Einhaltung dieser Fertigungsvorschrift ist das The field assembly personnel are responsible for the
Montagepersonal im Kraftwerk zuständig. observance of this manufacturing procedure.
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
3 Prozessbeschreibung 3 Process Description

3.1 Informationen zum Generator 3.1 Generator Information
3.1.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1.1 Drawings
- Generatormaßbild - Generator Dimension Drawing
- Generatormaßbildtext - Generator Dimension Drawing Text
- Verankerungszeichnung - Anchoring Drawing
3.1.2 Ausrichthilfen 3.1.2 Alignment Aids

Für die Baustellenmontage werden folgende Ausricht- For the field erection, the following alignment aids will be
hilfen bereitgestellt: provided:
 Am Grundrahmen sind Auflageplatten ange-  Supporting plates, welded to the base frame. In or-
schweißt. Außerdem werden Erstauflageplatten der to facilitate horizontal generator alignment with-
und Gleitplatten (Teflonplatten) geliefert, um das out a crane, primary bearing plates and Teflon plates
horizontale Ausrichten des Generators ohne Kran- will be provided as well.
hilfe zu erleichtern.  Leveling screws, located directly beside the anchor
 Zur vertikalen Ausrichtung des Generators dienen bolts, will be provided for the vertical alignment of
Ausrichtschrauben, die sich in unmittelbarer Nähe the generator.
der Ankerschrauben befinden.  The alignment of the generator, as measured at the
 Der Ist-Zustand der Generatorausrichtung auf dem manufacturer’s testing station, will be specified in the
Werksprüffeld ist im Werksmontageprotokoll fest- Manufacturer’s Installation Report.
gehalten.
3.2 Vorbereitung der Generatoraufstellung 3.2 Preparation for Generator Installation

3.2.1 Vorbereitung des Betonfundaments 3.2.1 Preparation of the Concrete Foundation
Vor dem Beginn der Montagearbeiten wird das Fun- Check the dimensional accuracy of the foundation be-
dament auf seine Maßhaltigkeit überprüft. fore starting any installation work.
Zur Sicherung ausreichender Vergussmaterialhaftung Caution: In order to ensure sufficient adherence of the
muss durch Öl oder Fett verunreinigter Beton genü- grouting compound, be sure to chisel off soiled concrete
gend tief abgestemmt werden. Die Grundrahmenun- properly. The underside of the base frame needs to be
terseite muss ebenfalls öl- und fettfrei sein. Eine Farb- free from oil and grease as well. Any priming coat may
grundierung kann erhalten bleiben. remain as it is.
3.2.2 Legen der Erstauflage- und Ausrichtplatten 3.2.2 Laying of Primary Bearing and Leveling Plates
Siehe Anlage 1! Refer to attachment 1!
Die vier Erstauflageplatten werden unterhalb der an Using grouting compound, align the four primary bearing
den Eckpunkten des Grundrahmens angeschweißten plates horizontally and at equal heights under the plates
Platten höhengleich und waagerecht mit Vergussmate- welded onto the corners of the base frame (Attachment
rial ausgerichtet (Anlage 1, Abb. 1). 1, Fig. 1).
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
Dazu wird die Position der Erstauflageplatten auf dem For this purpose, mark the position of the primary bear-
Fundament angezeichnet (siehe Verankerungszeich- ing plates on the foundation (see anchoring drawing).
nung). Alle Erstauflageplatten werden nun in Ver- Then set all the primary bearing plates into the grouting
gussmörtel (z.B. Pagel V14/10 – Lieferumfang Sie- compound (e.g. Pagel V14/10 – supplied by Siemens).
mens) gelegt. Dabei müssen die oberen (geschlichte- Make sure the upper (smooth) surfaces are horizontal
ten) Flächen waagerecht auf einheitlicher Höhe liegen. and at the same height.
Die Höhenposition wird nach vom Montagepersonal The relevant height is to be determined both on the ba-
anzubringenden Messmarken oder einer vorhandenen sis of a measuring mark to be made by the personnel
Maschine, an die der Generator angebaut wird, und performing the installation or an existing machine to
dem, aus der Verankerungszeichnung ersichtlichen which the generator is to be attached, and the dimen-
Maß bestimmt. Die Platten dürfen frühestens nach sion specified in the anchoring drawing. Do not subject
24 Stunden Abbindezeit belastet werden (vergleiche the plates to any load until after a 24-hour setting period
Spezifikation des Vergussmaterial-Herstellers). (cf. grouting compound manufacturer's specification).
Dann sind die übrigen Auflageflächen für die Ausricht- As a next step, mark the other seating surfaces for the
platten der Einstellschrauben des Grundrahmens auf leveling plates of the base frame leveling screws on the
dem Fundament anzuzeichnen und die Ausrichtplatten foundation and set the leveling plates into the grouting
in Vergussmörtel entsprechend Verankerungszeich- compound, as shown in anchoring drawing (Attachment
nung zu legen (Anlage 1, Abb. 2). Die Ausrichtplatten 1, Fig. 2). Generally, the leveling plates must not be sub-
dürfen im Allgemeinen frühestens nach 24 Stunden jected to any load until 24 hours later, at the earliest (cf.
belastet werden (vergleiche Spezifikation des Ver- grouting compound manufacturer's specification).
gussmaterial-Herstellers). Be sure to keep a minimum distance of 20 mm (grouting
Im gesamten Vergussbereich muss der Abstand zwi- height) between the upper concrete surface and the bot-
schen Betonoberfläche und Grundrahmen-unterkante tom edge of the base frame over the entire grouting ar-
größer als 20 mm (Vergusshöhe) sein. Falls erforder- ea. Chisel off the concrete, if necessary.
lich, ist der Beton abzuarbeiten.
3.2.3 Aufteilung und Einschalung der Gießflä- 3.2.3 Subdivision and Shuttering of Grouting
chen Segments
Die zu untergießende Fläche wird so in einzelne Ab- Subdivide the area to be grouted in individual segments,
schnitte unterteilt, dass die Fließrichtung des Ver- so that the direction of flow of the grouting compound is
gussmaterials eindeutig bestimmt ist. Die Größe der clearly determined. The dimensions of the individual
Einzelvergussfelder muss abhängig von der Pumpen- grouting segments should be determined dependent on
leistung festgelegt werden. Nur so kann die Verarbei- the pump capacity. Only thus the processing time speci-
tungszeit des Vergussmaterials eingehalten werden. fied for the grouting compound can be observed. So,
Die einzelnen Abschnitte werden dazu vor dem Auf- before putting the base frame in place, mark off the vari-
setzen des Grundrahmens mit wasserabweisendem ous segments wide enough, using water-repellent, per-
dauerelastischem Schaumstoff (z.B. Etafoam) ausrei- manently elastic foamed plastic, such as Etafoam. Be
chend breit eingeteilt. Die Abtrennung der einzelnen sure to keep the individual segments so tightly separat-
Felder wird so dicht gestaltet, dass kein Vergussmate- ed from each other that no grouting compound can leak
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
rial in andere Felder austreten kann. Der Schaumstoff into other segments. The foamed plastic is to be provid-
ist bauseits beizustellen. ed by the building contractor.
Bei beengten Platzverhältnissen wird vorab eine verlo- If space is restricted, permanent shuttering needs to be
rene Schalung angebracht. Zur Kontrolle des Ver- installed beforehand. Mount such formwork at a mini-
gussniveaus ist diese verlorene Schalung in einem mum distance of 25 mm from the base frame wall, so
Abstand von mindestens 25 mm zur Grundrahmen- that the grouting height can be checked. If necessary,
wand zu montieren. Die Dichtheit der verlorenen Scha- visually check the tightness of the permanent formwork,
lung wird ggf. durch Schwallwasser optisch geprüft. using flash water.
Das Vergießen hat vollflächig zu erfolgen (Blockfun- The grouting has to be done all-over (foundation block;
dament). no wall footing).
Bei Grundrahmen mit gerippter Bodenfläche können In case of base frame with finned bottom area the hollow
die Hohlräume zwischen den Rippen nicht restlos spaces between the rips cannot be filled completely, but
ausgefüllt werden; wichtig ist aber, dass alle tragenden it is important that all supporting base frame areas in-
Grundrahmenflächen, auch die diversen breiten Quer- cluding the flat traversal girder are complete grouted.
träger, komplett untergossen werden. Generators with current lead on the bottom side are the
Eine Ausnahme bilden Generatoren mit Ausleitung exception. The bare foundation area of this design is
nach unten. Der bei dieser Ausführung nicht zu ver- shown in the Dimensional Drawing and in the anchoring
gießende Bereich ist dem Maßbild sowie der Veranke- drawing.
rungszeichnung zu entnehmen.
Abb. 1: Auszugießende Flächen bei den unterschiedlichen Fig. 1: Areas of the Different Base Frame Types to Be
Grundrahmentypen Grouted
3.3 Generator ausrichten und aufstellen 3.3 Generator Alignment and Installation
3.3.1 Generator auf dem Fundament absetzen 3.3.1 Placement of Generator on Foundation
Ein verzugsarmes Absetzen auf dem Fundament ist Placement on the foundation with as little distortion as
Vorbedingung für eine gute Montage. Dies soll mit fol- possible is indispensable for proper installation. This can
genden Maßnahmen erreicht werden: be achieved by the following measures:
 Beim Absetzen des Grundrahmens auf die Aufla-  Make sure that the leveling screws do not yet rest on
geplatten dürfen die Ausrichtschrauben noch nicht the leveling plates when the base frame is being
auf den Ausrichtplatten aufsetzen.
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
 Der Generator wird nur auf die vier vorbereiteten placed on the primary bearing plates.
Stellen, Auflageplatten A1 bis A4 (dies sind die an  Deposit the generator only on four specially prepared
der Unterseite des Grundrahmens angeschweißten areas, i.e., supporting plates A1 to A4. (These are
schlichtgefrästen Platten – Abb. 2), abgesetzt. the finish-milled plates welded to the base frame un-
 Auf jede Erstauflageplatte (Fundament) wird zur derside – Fig. 2).
Erleichterung des Ausrichtens eine mit Gleitmittel  To facilitate the alignment, place a greased Teflon
gefettete Teflon-Gleitplatte gelegt (Anl., Abb. 1). plate on each primary bearing plate (Att. 1, Fig. 1).
Abb. 2: Kennzeichnung der Auflageplatten am Grundrah- Fig. 2: Marking of Supporting Plates on Base Frame (Plan
men (Draufsicht) View)
 Die Auflageplatten sind im Werk höhengleich zur  In the manufacturer’s plant, the supporting plates are
Achsmitte gefertigt und angeschweißt worden. Das welded on and prepared in such a way that they are
Ist-Maß von Achsmitte bis Oberkante der Erstauf- of equal height in relation to the centre of the axis.
lageplatten wird in das Montageprotokoll eingetra- The actual distance measured between the centre of
gen. the axis and the upper edge of the primary bearing
plates is to be recorded in the Installation Report.
Das Gewinde der Ausrichtschrauben wird mit Gleitmit- Apply an antiseize to the thread of the leveling screws.
tel eingestrichen; anschließend werden die Aus- Then put these screws in place and turn them until they
richtschrauben so weit eingedreht, dass diese etwa protrude about 5 mm from the base frame lower edge.
5 mm von der Grundrahmenunterseite hervorstehen. The generator can now be deposited on the prepared
Der Generator kann jetzt verzugsarm auf den vorberei- supporting plates in an almost distortion-free manner.
teten Erstauflageplatten abgesetzt werden.
3.3.2 Generatorausrichtung 3.3.2 Generator Alignment

Ziel des Ausrichtvorganges ist es, die Generator- und Through the alignment process, the generator and tur-
Turbinenkupplung innerhalb der geforderten Toleran- bine couplings are to be aligned to each other within the
zen zueinander auszurichten. required tolerances.
Das Vergießen des Generators darf erst erfolgen, The generator must not be grouted until this is the case!
wenn dies realisiert ist! During the alignment process, the generator block
Beim Ausrichten muss der Generator sowohl horizon- needs to be moved horizontally and vertically with as
tal als auch vertikal möglichst verzugsarm bewegt little distortion as possible. This can be achieved through
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
werden, was durch folgende Maßnahmen erleichtert the following measures:

werden soll:
1. Zuerst ist die horizontale Ausrichtung vorzuneh- 1. First of all, the horizontal alignment is to be carried
men. Für Bewegungen in horizontaler Richtung out. For horizontal movements, greased Teflon
sind an den vier Auflagestellen zwischen Grund- plates are to be used on the four seating surfaces
rahmen und den Erstauflageplatten mit Gleitmittel between the base frame and the primary bearing
versehene Teflon-Gleitplatten vorgesehen. Der plates. The generator is to be moved during this by
Generator ist dabei mittels Hydraulikzylindern zu means of hydraulic cylinders which support on steel
bewegen, die sich an im Fundament eingegosse- profiles grouted in the foundation.
nen Stahlprofilen abstützen.
2. Nach Abschluss der horizontalen Ausrichtung er- 2. After conclusion of horizontal alignment, the vertical
folgt die vertikale Ausrichtung. Für Bewegungen in alignment is to be carried out. The so-called leveling
vertikaler Richtung sind die sogenannten Aus- screws are provided for vertical movements. Unload
richtschrauben vorgesehen. Diese Schrauben sind the leveling screws during tightening so, that the
beim Anziehen gewichtsmäßig so zu entlasten, maximum tightening torque (Table 1) will not be ex-
dass das maximale Anzugsmoment (Tab. 1) nicht ceeded. Keep an eye on it that the leveling screws
überschritten wird. Ferner ist darauf zu achten, die are turned with the same, not too steep angle of rota-
Ausrichtschrauben mit dem gleichen, nicht zu gro- tion to prevent them from being overloaded and to
ßen Drehwinkel zu drehen, damit der Generator ensure that the generator is lifted in a parallel fash-
parallel angehoben und nicht verzogen wird. ion, without any distortion.
Nach Abschluss des Ausrichtens darf der Generator When the alignment operation is completed, the genera-
auf keiner der vier Erstauflageflächen mehr aufliegen. tor must no longer rest on any of the four primary bear-
Die nunmehr losen Teflon-Gleitplatten der Erstauflage- ing plates. Remove the now loose Teflon plates from the
flächen werden entfernt. Der Generator ruht jetzt aus- primary bearing plates. Properly aligned, the generator
gerichtet ausschließlich auf den Ausrichtschrauben. only rests on the leveling screws now.
Schrauben- M M M M M M M M
Screw Size
größe 24x1,5 30x1,5 36x1,5 42x1,5 24x1,5 30x1,5 36x1,5 42x1,5
Max. An- 160 330 580 940 Max. Tight-
160 Nm 330 Nm 580 Nm 940 Nm
zugsmoment Nm Nm Nm Nm ening Torque
Tab. 1: Ausrichtschrauben – Anzugsmoment Tab. 1: Leveling Screws - Tightening Torque
Die Ausrichtschrauben werden nun mit Denso-Binden Then apply Denso jacketing to insulate the leveling
gegen das einzubringende Vergussmaterial isoliert, screws in order to be able to turn these back after grout-
um sie nach dem Verguss zurückdrehen zu können. ing.
3.3.3 Montage der Fundamentanker 3.3.3 Anchor Bolt Mounting

Die Montage der Ankerschrauben ist gemäß den An- The anchor bolts are to be mounted as described in
gaben in FV 12-010 bzw. 12-024 auszuführen. MP 12-010 or 12-024 respectively.
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
3.4 Vergießen der Fundamentanker 3.4 Grouting of Anchor Bolts

Vor dem Vergießen des Grundrahmens muss der Ver- Be sure to grout the anchor bolts, as described in
guss der Fundamentanker nach FV 12-010 bzw. 12- MP 12-010 or 12-024 respectively, before grouting the
024 erfolgen. generator base frame.
3.5 Untergießen des Grundrahmens 3.5 Base Frame Grouting

3.5.1 Vorbereitungen 3.5.1 Preparatory Operations
Durch die Unterteilung der zu untergießenden Flächen As a consequence of subdividing the generator areas to
des Generators in kleine mittlere und große Felder, be grouted into small, medium-size and large segments,
sind unterschiedliche Bauhilfsmaßnahmen für den kor- a number of auxiliary construction operations are re-
rekten Verguss des Vergussmaterials erforderlich. quired to ensure that the grouting compound is correctly
Der ausgerichtete Grundrahmen muss zum Untergie- poured.
ßen eingeschalt werden. Unter Umständen sind verlo- For the purpose of grouting, the aligned base frame has
rene Schalungen vorzusehen. to be shuttered. Permanent formwork may have to be
Die Verschalungen werden nach den örtlichen Gege- used, if necessary.
benheiten aus geeigneten Materialien angefertigt und Taking into account the local situation, the shuttering
ausreichend befestigt. Die Schalbretter werden mit should be made of appropriate material and should be
einem Mittel eingestrichen, welches das Haften des sufficiently fastened. Apply an appropriate agent over
Vergussmittels am Holz verhindert. the shuttering boards to prevent the grouting compound
Damit das flüssige Vergussmaterial nicht entweichen from adhering to the wood.
kann, dichtet man die Verschalung mit Styropor gut To ensure that the liquid grouting compound cannot es-
ab. Grundsätzlich ist vor dem Vergießen die Dichtig- cape, properly seal the formwork with polystyrene. Do
keit der gesamten Verschalung zu überprüfen. not forget to check the entire formwork for tightness be-
Das aufzufüllende Volumen je Gießfeld und die daraus fore grouting.
resultierende Menge des benötigten Vergussmaterials For each grouting segment, calculate the volume to be
werden anhand der Angaben des Vergussmittelhers- filled in and the resultant amount of grouting compound
tellers berechnet. required, using the data supplied by the manufacturer.
3.5.2 Ausrichtkontrolle 3.5.2 Alignment Check

Vor dem Untergießen des Grundrahmens wird eine Carry out an alignment check before starting to grout the
Ausrichtkontrolle vorgenommen. Die Messwerte wer- base frame. Compare the values measured with those
den mit dem Montageprotokoll bzw. mit den Baustel- of the Installation Report or the construction site records.
lenaufschreibungen verglichen. Depending on the results obtained, decide whether to
Je nach Ergebnis ist ggf. über nachträgliches Richten realign the base frame. If any realignment is required,
des Grundrahmens zu entscheiden. Beim Nachrichten follow the instructions given in Item 3.2.
ist Punkt 3.2 zu beachten.
3.5.3 Vorbereitung des Gießfelduntergrundes 3.5.3 Preparation of Ground under Grouting Area
Der Untergrund wird von Staub und Sand befreit. Öl- Clear the ground of dust and sand. Be sure to remove
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
und Fettrückstände dürfen nicht vorhanden sein. Das any oil and grease residue. Water the foundation at least
Fundament ist mindestens 6 Stunden vor Aufbringung 6 hours before applying the grouting compound and
des Vergussmaterials zu wässern und ständig feucht keep the foundation constantly wet (see also the instruc-
zu halten (siehe auch Vorschriften des Vergussmate- tions issued by the grouting compound manufacturer).
rialherstellers). Before starting the grouting process, use appropriate
Aufstehendes Wasser auf dem vorgewässerten Fun- means, such as compressed air, to remove any water
dament wird vor dem Verguss durch geeignete Mittel, accumulated on the watered foundation. This is required
z.B. Druckluft entfernt, um die Bildung von Hohlräu- in order to prevent cavities from forming.
men zu verhindern.
3.5.4 Vergussmaterial 3.5.4 Grouting Compound

Das Vergussmaterial muss in Zusammensetzung und As far as its composition and characteristics are con-
Eigenschaften den vereinbarten bzw. übergebenen cerned, the grouting compound must meet the instruc-
Vorschriften und Spezifikationen entsprechen (nicht tions and specifications agreed or furnished (non-
schrumpfend, z.B. Pagel V1/50, siehe Angaben in FV shrinking, e.g. Pagel V1/50, see specification in MP 12-
12-010 bzw. 12-024). Die Vorschriften des Verguss- 010 or 12-024 resp.). This provision does not render
materialherstellers werden durch diese Richtlinie nicht void any of the instructions issued by the manufacturer
aufgehoben. of the grouting compound.
3.5.5 Vergießvorgang 3.5.5 Grouting Process

 Die Verwendung einer Mischpumpe für den Ver-  As experience shows, it’s advisable to use a mixer
gießvorgang hat sich in der Praxis bewährt. pump.
 Jedes Gießfeld wird ohne Unterbrechung in einem  Fill up each grouting segment in one operation, with-
Arbeitsgang vergossen. out any interruption.
 Die Verarbeitungszeit muss je nach Spezifikation  Be sure to adhere to the processing time specified
des Vergussmittelherstellers unbedingt eingehalten by the grouting compound manufacturer. Fill in the
werden. Es ist auf eine kontinuierliche Einfüllung grouting material continuously, without any interrup-
des Vergussmaterials ohne Unterbrechung zu ach- tions, because the filled-in material starts to expand
ten, da nach ca. 15 min die Quellung des eingefüll- after approximately 15 minutes. Interrupting the filling
ten Materials beginnt. Die Unterbrechung des Ein- operation may entail a compound back-up and thus
füllvorgangs kann zu einem Fließstau des Materials create dangerous cavities in the grout.
und damit zu gefährlichen Hohlräumen im Unter-
guss führen.
 Werden Mischer eingesetzt, so muss beachtet  If mixers are used, take into consideration that an
werden, dass es je nach verwendetem Material zu accelerated setting may occur, depending on the
einem schnelleren Abbindevorgang kommen kann. material used.
 Das Mischverhältnis Vergussmaterial/Wasser muss  Be sure to observe the grouting compound/water
den Herstellerspezifikationen entsprechen. mixing ratio specified by the manufacturer.
 Betonrüttler dürfen nicht eingesetzt werden.  Do not use any concrete vibrators.
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
 Das Untergießen erfolgt grundsätzlich von einer  To avoid any air entrainment, always start the filling
schmalen Seite, damit keine Lufteinschlüsse ent- operation from the narrow side. The flow of the
stehen. Durch die Bewegung des Vergussmaterials grouting compound can be improved by agitating the
im Einfüllstutzen mittels Stampfer und unter den compound in the filler stub with the help of a tamper.
Platten mittels Blechstreifen, Ketten oder Seilen, Using sheet-metal strips, chains or ropes, the same
kann das Fließen des Materials gefördert werden. effect can be achieved under the plates.
 Die ausreichende Vergusshöhe wird am gesamten  Check the correct filling height along the entire
Umfang des Grundrahmens und an etwaigen Kont- length of the base frame and at existing inspection
rollöffnungen überprüft. holes.
 Nach Abschluss der Vergussarbeiten wird ein  When the grouting operations are finished, vertically
Schottblech senkrecht in den Einfülltrichter ge- insert a metal retaining plate into the filler stub. Re-
steckt. Die Oberstände werden nach dem Aushär- move any projecting compound after it has fully set.
ten entfernt.
3.5.6 Abschlussarbeiten und Ausrichtprotokoll 3.5.6 Concluding Operations and Alignment Re-
port
Der Randbeton zwischen Grundrahmen und Verscha- To prevent the concrete along the edge between the
lung des Vergussmaterials ist gegen Rissbildung base frame and the grouting formwork from cracking,
feucht zu halten. keep it wet.
Das Ausschalen und Belasten des Vergusses darf frü- The grouting compound may not be subjected to any
hestens 24 Stunden nach Einbringung erfolgen. loads and the formwork may not be removed until
Nach dem Aushärten des Vergussmaterials werden die 24 hours after the grouting operation.
Ausrichtschrauben entfernt. Remove the leveling screws as soon as the grouting
Anschließend werden die Ankerschrauben mit dem compound has fully set.
entsprechenden Wert vorgespannt (Richtlinie: FV 12- Then, pre stress the anchor bolts to the proper value.
012 bzw. 12-025). (See Manufacturing Procedure MP 12-012 or 12-025
Nach Aufbringung der Ankervorspannung erfolgt die resp.).
abschließende Ausrichtkontrolle der Anlage. Die Aus- After pre stressing the anchor bolts, perform a final
richtwerte sind zu protokollieren. alignment check of the installation. Record the align-
Sollte sich bei der Überprüfung der Generatorausrich- ment values obtained.
tung herausstellen, dass an der Ausrichtung noch Should such generator alignment check reveal that fur-
Veränderungen vorzunehmen sind, so muss dies ther alignment modifications are required, carry them
durch Entfernen oder Einfügen von Beilagen unter den out by removing shims from the generator pillow blocks
Generatorlagerböcken erfolgen. or inserting them under the pillow blocks.
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
4 Mitgeltende Unterlagen 4 Other Applicable Documents
FV 12-010 Einbau und Verguss von Durchgangs- MP 12-010 Installation and Grouting of Trough-
ankern in Betonfundamenten Anchor Bolts in Concrete Foundations
FV 12-012 Vorspannung von Durchgangs-ankern MP 12-012 Trough-Anchor Bolts Prestressing and

und Messen der Schraubenlängung Bolt Elongation Measurement
FV 12-024 Einbau und Verguss von Blockankern MP 12-024 Installation and Grouting of Non-
in Betonfundamenten Through Anchor Bolts in Concrete
Foundations
FV 12-025 Vorspannung von Blockankern und MP 12-025 Non-Trough Anchor Bolts Prestressing
Messen der Schraubenlängung and Elongation Measurement
Siemens AG Energy
QUM
 ten. System
Revision: 3
Anlage A: Abbildungen
Appendix A: Figures
Siehe Baugruppe 5949
am Grundrahmen
Grundrahmen- angeschweißte
unterkante Auflageplatte
Gleitplatte/Teflon
Erstauflageplatte
Schalung
bauseits,
wenn nötig
Verguß-
material Fundament
Abb. 1: Erstauflageplatte mit Gleitfolie (Anordnung und Lage der Erstauflageplatten und Ausrichtplatten siehe Genera-
tormaßbild und BG 5949)
See Design Group 5949
Supporting Plate
Bottom Edge Welded onto
of Base Frame Base Frame
Teflon Plate
Primary Bearing Plate
Formwork to Be Provided
by Building Contractor
If Required
Grouting
Compound Foundation
Fig. 1: Primary Bearing Plate with Teflon Plate (for Layout and Position of Primary bearing Plates and Leveling plates,
see Generator Dimension Drawing and DG 5949)
Siemens AG Energy  Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, sowie nicht ausdrücklich
QUM
Fossil Power Generation E F PR  ten. System
Revision: 3
Ausrichtschraube
Siehe Baugruppe 5949
Doppel-T-Träger
des Grundrahmens
Ausrichtplatte
Vergußmaterial
~10
Fundament
Abb. 2: Ausrichtschraube und Ausrichtplatte
Fig. 2: Leveling Screw and Leveling Plate
Siemens AG Energy  Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, sowie nicht ausdrücklich
QUM
Fossil Power Generation E F PR  ten. System
FV/MP 12-010
Fertigungsvorschrift Datum/Date: 2009-04-10
Revision: 2
E F PR GN ERF EN 1
Titel/Title
Einbau und Verguss von Durchgangsankern in Betonfundamenten

Installation and Grouting of Through-Anchor Bolts in Concrete Foundations
Anlagen/Appendices:
Handhabung/Handling: offen / open
Inhalt Contents
2 Verantwortung und Zuständigkeiten 2 Responsibilities and Competences 2
3.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1 Drawings 3
3.2 Hinweise 3.2 Comments 3
3.3 Vorbereitung des Betonfundaments 3.3 Preparation of the Concrete Foundation 3
3.4 Vorbehandlung der Ankerschrauben 3.4 Preparatory Treatment of Anchor Bolts 3
3.5 Einbau der Ankerschrauben 3.5 Installation of Anchor Bolts 4
3.6 Montage der Ankerplatten 3.6 Mounting of Anchor Plates 5
3.7 Füllen der Ankerlöcher 3.7 Filling of Anchor Holes 6
Anlage A Appendix A 8
Freigegeben/Released by: Senske E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Senske

Geprüft/Reviewed by: Zorn E F PR GN ERF QM gez. Zorn
Geprüft/Reviewed by: Zeughardt E F PR GN ERF OM gez. Zeughardt
Geprüft/Reviewed by: Schröter E F PR GN ERF SPR gez. Schröter
Mitgeprüft/Reviewed by: Spindler E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Spindler
Erstellt/Prepared by: Willuhn E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Willuhn
Name/Name Org.-Einheit/Org.Unit Unterschrift/Signature Datum/Date
Verteiler: E F PR GN ERF EN;E F PR GN ERF OM; E F PR GN ERF QM;E F PR GN ERF SPR

Weitere sowie Vervielfältigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts sind verboten, soweit nicht
SIEMENS AG · Energy ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle rechte für den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmustereintrag
Fossil Power Generation vorbehalten.
Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to others without
Generatorenwerk Erfurt express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or design patent are reserved.
Fertigungsvorschrift / Manufacturing Procedure
Einbau und Verguss von Durchgangsankern in Betonfundamenten Datum/Date: 2009-04-10
Installation and Grouting of Trough-Anchor Bolts in Concrete Foundations Revision: 2
Verantwortlich für Inhalt und Änderungsdienst dieser Siemens Corporation – Erfurt Generator Works – TD
FV ist Siemens AG – Generatorenwerk Erfurt, Department is responsible for the content and revision
Abteilung TEK. service of this MP.

Die Fertigungsvorschrift beschreibt die notwendigen The Manufacturing Procedure describes the necessary
Arbeitsabläufe und Maßnahmen zum Einbau und work sequences and measures for the installation and
Verguss von Durchgangsankern in Betonfundamenten grouting of through-anchor bolts in concrete
entsprechend den technischen Anforderungen. foundations acc. to the technical requirements.

Siemens AG Energy Sector Siemens AG Energy Sector
Elektrische Generatoren Electrical Generators
1.4 Abkürzungen und Begriffe 1.4 Abbreviations
TEK Technische Konstruktion TD Technical Design
EK Einkauf PD Purchasing Department
AZ Auftragszentrum AC Assignment Centre
QM Qualitätsmanagement QM Quality Management

Für die Einhaltung dieser Fertigungsvorschrift ist das The field assembly personnel is responsible for the
Montagepersonal im Kraftwerk zuständig. observance of this manufacturing specification.
Diese Unterlage unterliegt den Handhabungsvorgaben wie auf der Titelseite angegeben.
Siemens AG · Energy Fossil Power Generation
This document is subject to the handling restrictions set forth on the title page.

3.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1 Drawings
- Generatormaßbild (BG 0110) - Generator Dimension Drawing (DG 0110)
- Generatormaßbild Text (BG 0111) - Text of Generator Dimension Drawing (DG 0111)
- Verankerung (BG 5949) - Anchorage (DG 5949)
3.2 Hinweise 3.2 Remarks

Das Montageverbrauchsmaterial zum Einbau der Siemens will provide sufficient expendable material for
Anker wird durch Siemens in ausreichender Menge the installation of anchors. Not included, however, will
bereitgestellt. Dabei ist das Material zum Verguss der be the material required for anchor holes and base
Ankerschraubenlöcher und des Grundrahmens nicht frame grouting.
eingeschlossen.
Die Ankerschraubenvorspannung wird in der For the anchor bolt prestressing procedure, refer to
Fertigungsvorschrift FV 12-012 beschrieben. Manufacturing Procedure MP 12-012.
3.3 Vorbereitung des Betonfundamentes 3.3 Preparation of the Concrete

Foundation
Vor Beginn der Montagearbeiten müssen Fundament Be sure to check the foundation and anchor holes for
und Ankerlöcher auf Einhaltung der Maße geprüft dimensional accuracy before starting the installation
werden. process.
Als Hilfe zum Ausgießen der Ankerschraubenlöcher To facilitate the grouting of anchor holes once the
nach der Ankerschraubenmontage ist ein geeigneter anchor bolts are mounted, create an appropriate
Gießkanal zu schaffen. Dieser muss so beschaffen grouting channel. This channel should be made in
sein, dass die Vergussmasse nur die Ankerlöcher füllt such a way that the grouting compound will exclusively
und der übrige Bereich unvergossen bleibt. fill up the anchor holes, with the other area left unfilled.
3.4 Vorbehandlung der Ankerschrauben 3.4 Preparatory Treatment of Anchor Bolts

Die Ankerschrauben sind werksseitig konserviert. Der The anchor bolts are supplied with a protective film on
Anstrich der Gewinde ist zu entfernen. them, which needs to be removed from the thread.
Um die Federeigenschaften der Schraube zu In order to preserve the elastic properties of the bolts
gewährleisten und die Möglichkeit des späteren and to make it possible for them to be tightened, the
Nachziehens zu erhalten, darf die Vergussmasse nicht grouting compound must not set on the bolt shaft or
am Schraubenschaft abbinden oder ins Muttergewinde penetrate into the thread of the nuts. For that purpose,
eindringen. Dazu sind die Ankerschrauben zweifach wrap two layers of bituminous jacketing (e.g. Denso
mit Bitumenbinde, z.B. Densobinde, in folgender Jacketing) around the anchor bolts in the following
Weise zu umwickeln: way:
1. wenn Freistiche vorhandenen sind 1. if there are relief grooves
Freistiche bis auf Gewindedurchmesser wrap bituminous jacketing around the relief
umwickeln, grooves, up to the thread,
2. wenn der Schaftdurchmesser größer als der 2. if the shaft diameter is larger than the thread
Gewindedurchmesser ist diameter
Gewinde (und Freistiche) am unteren Ende bis Wrap bituminous jacketing around the thread (and
zur künftigen Position der Mutter und am oberen relief grooves) on the lower shaft end up to the
Ende bis ca. 50 mm über der endgültigen future position of the nut and on the upper shaft
Vergusshöhe beidseitig bis auf end up to about 50 mm over the final grouting
Schaftdurchmesser umwickeln, height,
Schaft einschließlich Gewinde über die gesamte Wrap two layers of bituminous jacketing over the
Länge zweifach umwickeln (unteres Ende: entire length of the shaft including the thread (from
künftige Position der Mutter, oberes Ende: the future position of the nut on the lower shaft end
ca. 50 mm über endgültiger Vergusshöhe). up to about 50 mm over the final grouting height on
Die Wicklung ist so auszuführen, dass sich die the upper shaft end).
Binde beim Aufdrehen der Mutter nicht abhebt The wrapping should be executed in such a way
oder in das Gewinde hineinzieht. that the jacketing will not come off or be pulled into
the thread when the nut is screwed on.
Die Gewinde, die für das spätere Spannen der Apply a thick layer of an antiseizing compound, such
Ankerschrauben verwendet werden, sind mit as graphite paste or MoS2, to the threads used for the
Gleitmittel (z.B. Graphitpaste oder MoS2) dick following anchor bolts stressing. If lifting cylinders are
einzustreichen. Bei Verwendung von Hubzylindern used for stressing, antiseizing agent is not to be
zum Spannen der Ankerschrauben sind keine applied.
Gleitmittel einzusetzen.
3.5 Einbau der Ankerschrauben 3.5 Installation of Anchor Bolts

Die Montage der Ankerschrauben erfolgt nach dem The anchor bolts are assembled after setting down the
Aufsetzen des Grundrahmens auf das Fundament. base frame onto the foundation. Anchor bolts screwed
Ankerschrauben zur Verschraubung an der to the base frame outside are assembled from below.
Grundrahmenaußenseite sind von unten zu montieren. To do that, insert them from below through the
Dazu werden sie von unten durch das Fundament concrete foundation and the base frame, mount
hindurch in den Grundrahmen eingeführt und nach spherical washers and nuts and hang them up to the
Aufsetzen von Kugelausgleichsscheiben und Muttern base frame.
eingehängt. Ankerschrauben zur Verschraubung an Anchor bolts screwed to the base frame inside can
der Grundrahmeninnenseite können mit aufgesetzten also be hung up from above after providing spherical
Kugelausgleichsscheiben und Muttern alternativ auch washers and nuts. Afterwards complete them with nuts
von oben eingehangen werden. Anschließend werden and anchor plates on the lower ends (Fig. 1).
an den unteren Enden Muttern und Ankerscheiben
aufgesetzt (Abb. 1).
3.6 Montage der Ankerplatten 3.6 Mounting of Anchor Plates

Die verwendeten Ankerschraubenmuttern müssen auf The nuts used must support the load applied over their
dem gesamten Umfang tragen. Große entire contact surface. Any significant skewness of the
Schiefstellungen der Mutternstirnseite zum Gewinde nut face as against the thread can easily be
sind bereits beim Andrehen an Taumelbewegungen recognized by tumbling motions of the anchor plate
der Ankerplatte zu erkennen. Solche Muttern sind occurring when the nut is screwed on.
nachzubessern. The bituminous jacketing of the anchor bolts must
Die Umwicklung der Ankerschrauben mit reach so far up that a roll is created when the nuts at
Bitumenbinde muss soweit reichen, dass beim the bottom are screwed on (Fig. 2). If this is not the
Andrehen der unteren Muttern ein Wulst case, be sure to rewrap a sufficiently large area.
aufgeschoben wird (Abb. 2). Ist dies nicht der Fall, The anchor plate must carry the load over its entire
muss ein genügender Bereich nachgewickelt werden. surface, so that the compressive stress resulting from
Die Ankerplatte muss vollflächig tragend sein, damit the pretensioned bolts can be borne by the concrete
die durch die Schraubenvorspannung entstehende for long time periods under normal operating
Druckspannung vom Beton auch langfristig unter conditions.
Betriebsbedingungen ertragen wird. Remove projecting edges or stones, in particular,
Insbesondere vorspringende Kanten oder Steine sind because these may lead to a reduced bearing surface,
zu entfernen, da diese zu einem geringeren which in turn might entail the destruction of the
Flächentraganteil führen, was die Zerstörung des concrete and result in loss of bolt prestress.
Betons und den Verlust der Schraubenvorspannung
bewirken kann.
Die Betonauflageflächen der Ankerplatten müssen von All loose matter and any poorly adhering cement grout,
losen Bestandteilen und ggf. von gering haftenden as well as dust, grease and oil need to be removed
Zementschlämmen befreit sowie staub-, fett- und ölfrei from the concrete seating surfaces for the anchor
sein. plates.
Gegebenenfalls müssen die Auflageflächen der To obtain even seating surfaces for the anchor plates,
Ankerplatten mit einem geeigneten Mörtel (z.B. a suitable mortar (such as Pagel V14/10) may have to
Pagel V14/10) ausgeglichen werden. be applied.
Ankerschraube bei Kugelausgleichscheibe Anchor Bolt If Screwed to Base Spherical Washer
Verschraubung an den Frame Interior Alignment Screw
Ausrichtschraube
Grundrahmeninnenseiten
Doppel-T-Träger
I-Beam of Base Frame
des Grundrahmens
Ankerschraube bei Anchor Bolt If Screwed to Base

Verschraubung an den Frame Exterior
Grundrahmenaußenseiten
Vergußmaterial Grouting Compound
Fundament Foundation
Bitumenbinde Bituminous Jacketing
Ankerplatte Anchor Plate
Abb. 1: Mit Ankerschrauben verschraubter Doppel-T-Träger Fig. 1: Double-T-Beam of Base Frame Fixed by Anchor
des Grundrahmens Bolts
Ankerschraube Anchor Bolt

Ankerbohrloch Anchor Hole
Flachstahl bauseits
vorhanden Barrect at Site (see
(siehe Maßbild) Dimensional Drawing)
Ankerplatte Anchor Plate
Bitumenbinde mit Bituminous Jacketing with

heraufgeschobenem Rolled-up Bulge
Wulst
Abb. 2: Unterer Teil der eingebauten Ankerschraube Fig. 2: Lower Portion of the Installed Anchor Bolt (upper
(oberer Teil analog) portion analogously)
Die Ankerschrauben sind unter Beachtung der Anzahl Torque the anchor bolts to the values listed in Table 1,
der jeweils zugehörigen Ausrichtschrauben mit den in paying attention to the corresponding alignment
Tabelle 1 angegebenen Werten anzuziehen. screws.
Anzahl
Number of
der M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
Alignment
Ausricht- 30 36 42 48 52 56 64 30 36 42 48 52 56 64
Screws
schrauben
20 30 40 50 60 70 90 20 30 40 50 60 70 90
1 1
Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
100 100 200 250 280 320 470 100 100 200 250 280 320 470
2 2
Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
Tab. 1: Teilanzugsmomente für Ankerschrauben Tab. 1: Partial Tightening Torques for Anchor Bolts
(Sechskantmutter) (Hexagon Nuts)
Die Toleranzen liegen dabei bei 10%. Höhere The effective tolerance is 10 %. Higher tightening
Anzugsmomente sind unzulässig, da dadurch die torqueses are not allowed, as they may adversely
Ausrichtung beeinträchtigt werden kann. affect the alignment.
3.7 Füllen der Ankerlöcher 3.7 Filling of Anchor Holes

Nach der Montage der Ankerplatten sind die Once the anchor plates are mounted, the anchor holes
Ankerlöcher mit fließfähigem Vergussmaterial (z.B. need to be filled with a pourable grouting compound
Pagel V1/50 oder gleichwertiges, siehe Tab. 2) zu (e.g. Pagel V 1/50 or equivalent; see Table 2; the
füllen (Vergussmaterial wird nicht durch Siemens grouting compound will not be supplied by Siemens).
geliefert).
Typ Pagel V1/50 Type Pagel V1/50
Körnung in mm 0-5 Particle size in mm 0-5
Vergusshöhe ca. in mm 20 -100 Grouting height (approx.) in mm 20 -100
Enddruckfestigkeit in N/mm2 104 Final compressive strength in N/mm2 104
Endbiegezugfestigkeit in N/mm2 11,9 Final bending strength in N/mm2 11,9
Quellmaß in Vol.% +1,0 Swell ratio in % by Vol. +1,0

3 3
Verbrauch in kg/m 2000 Consumption in kg/m 2000
Tab. 2: Eigenschaften des zu verwendenden Vergussmaterials Tab. 2: Characteristics of the Grouting Material to Be Used
Als Hilfe zum Ausgießen der Ankerschraubenlöcher To facilitate the grouting of anchor holes once the
wird ein geeigneter Gießkanal in Form eines in Beton anchor bolts are mounted, cut an appropriate grouting
geschnittenen oder beim Betonguss eingelassenen channel into the concrete or leave such a channel
Kanals geschaffen. Alternativ kann auch ein geeignet when pouring in the concrete. Alternatively, use a
geformter Kanal aus Holz oder Blech verwendet suitably shaped channel made of wood or sheet metal.
werden. Der Kanal muss so beschaffen sein, dass die The channel must be made in such a way that the
Vergussmasse ausschließlich das Ankerloch füllt, der grouting compound will exclusively fill up the anchor
übrige Bereich jedoch unvergossen bleibt. holes; the other area must not be covered by the
grout.
Sind die Gießkanäle in Beton eingelassen, so ist zur If the concrete possesses grouting channels, a plastic
Fließverbesserung die Einlage einer Folie zu sheet should be placed inside the channel for
empfehlen bzw. bestehen die Kanäle aus Rillen im improved fluidity. If the channels are grooves cut into
Beton, so sind diese vorzuwässern. the concrete, they need to be watered prior to the
grouting process.
Das benötigte Vergussmaterial ist entsprechend dem Based on the volume required, mix a sufficient amount
einzubringenden Volumen in ausreichender Menge zu of the relevant grouting compound. Once started, do
mischen. Der Füllvorgang muss so gestaltet werden, not interrupt the grouting operation and be sure to
dass keine Unterbrechungen entstehen und das prevent any grouting compound from spilling over. As
Vergussmaterial nicht überläuft. Die Verwendung einer experience shows, it‘s advisable to use a mixer pump.
Mischpumpe hat sich hierbei bewährt. In order to ensure that the compound will properly set
Um ein Abbinden des Materials in den Ankerlöchern in the anchor hole, do not begin filling in concrete
zu gewährleisten, darf der Unterguss des under the base frame until 24 hours later, at the
Grundrahmens frühestens nach 24 h erfolgen. earliest.

FV 12-012 Vorspannung von Durchgangs-ankern MP 12-012 Trough-Anchor Bolts Prestressing and
und Messen der Schraubenlängung Bolt Elongation Measurement
Anlage A: Abbildungen
Appendix A: Figures
Ankerschraube bei Kugelausgleichscheibe

Verschraubung an den
Ausrichtschraube
Grundrahmeninnenseiten
Doppel-T-Träger
des Grundrahmens
Ankerschraube bei
Verschraubung an den
Grundrahmenaußenseiten
Vergußmaterial
Fundament
Bitumenbinde
Ankerplatte
Abb. 1: Mit Ankerschrauben verschraubter Doppel-T-Träger des Generatorgrundrahmens
Anchor Bolt If Screwed to Base Spherical Washer

Frame Interior Alignment Screw
I-Beam of Base Frame
Anchor Bolt If Screwed to Base

Frame Exterior
Grouting Compound
Foundation
Bituminous Jacketing
Anchor Plate
Fig. 1: Double-T-Beam of Generator Base Frame fixed by Anchor Bolts
Ankerschraube
Ankerbohrloch
Fundament
Flachstahl bauseits
vorhanden
(siehe Maßbild)
Ankerplatte
Bitumenbinde mit
heraufgeschobenem
Wulst
Abb. 2: Unterer Teil der eingebauten Ankerschraube (oberer Teil analog)
Anchor Bolt
Anchor Hole
Foundation
Barrect at Site (see

Dimensional Drawing)
Anchor Plate
Bituminous Jacketing with

Rolled-up Bulge
Fig. 2: Lower Part of the Installed Anchor Bolt (upper Part analogously)
FV/MP 12-012
Fertigungsvorschrift Datum/Date: 2009-04-18
Revision: 2
E F PR GN ERF EN 1
Titel/Title
Vorspannung von Durchgangsankern und Messen der Schraubenlängung

Through-Anchor Bolts Prestressing and Bolt Elongation Measurement
Anlagen/Appendices:
Handhabung/Handling: offen / open
Inhalt Contents
2 Verantwortlichkeiten /Zuständigkeiten 2 Responsibilities and Competences 3
3.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1 Drawings 3
3.2 Einbaubedingungen 3.2 Installation Conditions 3
3.3 Vorspannung der Ankerschrauben 3.3 Bolt Prestressing 3
3.4 Anzugsverfahren 3.4 Tightening Methods 4
3.4.1 Bestimmung der Schraubenlängung 3.4.1 Determination of Bolt Elongation 4
3.4.2 Anzugsverfahren für Ankerschrauben 3.4.2 Anchor Bolt Tightening Methods 5
Freigegeben/Released by: Senske E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Senske

Geprüft/Reviewed by: Zorn E F PR GN ERF QM gez. Zorn
Geprüft/Reviewed by: Zeughardt E F PR GN ERF OM gez. Zeughardt
Geprüft/Reviewed by: Schröter E F PR GN ERF SPR gez. Schröter
Mitgeprüft/Reviewed by: Spindler E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Spindler
Erstellt/Prepared by: Willuhn E F PR GN ERF EN gez. Willuhn
Name/Name Org.-Einheit/Org.Unit Unterschrift/Signature Datum/Date
Verteiler: E F PR GN ERF EN;E F PR GN ERF OM; E F PR GN ERF QM;E F PR GN ERF SPR

SIEMENS AG · Energy Weitere sowie Vervielfältigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts sind verboten, soweit nicht
ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle rechte für den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmustereintrag vorbehalten.
Fossil Power Generation Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to others without express
authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design
Generatorenwerk Erfurt patent are reserved.
Vorspannung von Durchgangsankern und Messen der Schraubenlängung Datum/Date: 2009-04-18
Through-Anchor Bolts Prestressing and Bolt Elongation Measurement Revision: 2
Verantwortlich für Inhalt und Änderungsdienst dieser Siemens Corporation – Erfurt Generator Works – TD
FV ist Siemens AG – Generatorenwerk Erfurt, Abtei- Department is responsible for the content and revision
lung TEK. service of this MP.

Die Fertigungsvorschrift beschreibt die notwendigen This manufacturing procedure describes the tests and
Prüfungen und Messungen beim Einbau und Vor- measurements required for installing and prestressing
spannen von Durchgangsankern in Betonfundamen- through-anchors in concrete foundations. It covers
ten. Sie ist für Durchgangsanker, also Anker- trough-anchors for concrete foundations – in other
schrauben, deren Klemmlänge von der Tischplatten- words, anchor bolts – whose clamping length is de-
höhe des Fundaments bestimmt wird, anzuwenden. termined by the tabletop height of the foundation.

Siemens AG Energy Sector Siemens AG Energy Sector
Electrical Generators Electrical Generators
1.4 Abkürzungen und Begriffe 1.4 Abbreviations and Terms
TEK Technische Konstruktion TD Technical Design
BG Baugruppe DG Design Group
AZ Auftragszentrum AC Assignment Centre
QM Qualitätsmanagement QM Quality Management

Für die Einhaltung dieser Fertigungsvorschrift ist das The field assembly personnel is responsible for the
Montagepersonal im Kraftwerk zuständig. observance of this manufacturing procedure.
3.1 Zeichnungsunterlagen 3.1 Drawings

- Generatormaßbild (BG 0110) - Generator Dimension Drawing (DG 0110)
- Generatormaßbild Text (BG 0111) - Text of Generator Dimension Drawing (DG 0111)
- Verankerung (BG 5949) - Anchorage (DG 5949)
3.2 Einbaubedingungen 3.2 Installation Conditions

Die Ankerschrauben sind unter Berücksichtigung der When installing the anchor bolts, also observe Manu-
Fertigungsvorschriften FV 12-010 und FV 12-011 ein- facturing Procedures MP 12-010 and MP 12-011.
zubauen.
3.3 Vorspannung der Ankerschrauben 3.3 Bolt Prestressing

Um trotz Langzeitschwinden und Spannungskriechen In order to preserve a long-term residual prestress of
des Betons langfristig eine Restvorspannung von about two thirds of the tensile yield strength of the bolt
ca. 2/3 der Streckgrenze des Schraubenwerkstoffes zu material despite long-term shrinkage and incremental
erhalten, müssen Ankerschrauben auf neu abgegos- stress reduction in the concrete, anchor bolts used on
senen Fundamenten auf 90…100% der Streckgrenze freshly poured foundations need to be prestressed to
vorgespannt werden (Schraubenwerkstoff CK35: 0,2 = 90 … 100 % of the yield point (for bolt material CK35:
280 N/mm ).2
0,2 = 280 N/mm2).
Bei Altanlagen bzw. Montage neuer Generatoren auf When it comes to existing facilities or the installation of
alten Fundamenten (Alter mindestens 3…4 Jahre) soll new generators on old foundations (3 years and older),
die Vorspannung nur 65…75 % der Streckgrenze be- the prestress should be only amount to 65 … 75 % of
tragen. the yield point.
Ankergröße
Neues Beton- Existing Concrete New Concrete Type
Mutternart
Gewinde-
Steigung
Lead of
Thread
Altes Betonfundament Bolt
bzw. Stahlfun- Foundation Foundation of
(mind. 3 – 4 Jahre) Size
dament (3 Years and Older) or Steel Base Nut
IA MA IN MN IA MA IN MN

mm mm
mm/m Nm mm/m Nm mm/m Nm mm/m Nm
M 36 4 0.70 850 0.95 1.000 DIN M 36 4 0.70 850 0.95 1.000 DIN
M 42 4.5 0.70 1.400 0.95 1.800 DIN M 42 4.5 0.70 1.400 0.95 1.800 DIN
M 48 5 0.70 2.000 0.95 2.700 DIN M 48 5 0.70 2.000 0.95 2.700 DIN
M 52 5 0.70 2.600 0.95 3.500 DIN M 52 5 0.70 2.600 0.95 3.500 DIN
Tab. 1: Bezogene Schraubenlängung I und zugehöriges Tab. 1: Specific Bolt Elongation I and Corresponding
Anzugsmoment M (geschmiert mit Graphit oder Tightening Torque M (Antiseize: Graphite or
MoS2) für Durchgangsanker aus CK 35 MoS2) for Through-Anchors Made of CK 35
3.4 Anzugsverfahren 3.4 Tightening Methods

Die Ankerschrauben dürfen bei zementgebundenem If a cement-bound grouting compound (such as Pagel
Vergussmaterial (z.B. Pagel V1/50) frühestens 24 h V 1/50) is employed, the anchor bolts must not be ten-
nach dem Vergießen der Maschine gespannt werden. sioned until 24 hours after the machine has been
Sind im Sonderfall Epoxidharz-Vergussmaterialien grouted. Should epoxy based grouting material be
zum Einsatz gekommen, sind die Vorschriften des used in specific cases, the manufacturer’s instructions
Herstellers zu beachten. have to be followed.
Um möglichst alle Setzvorgänge in den Auflageflächen In order to rule out, as much as possible, any setting
und im Gewinde auszuschließen, sind zwei Spannvor- processes in seating surfaces and on the thread, two
gänge erforderlich. stressing operations are required.
Zum Anziehen der Ankerschrauben ist die Verwen- The use of a lifting cylinder has favorable effects on
dung eines Hubzylinders vorteilhaft. the anchor bolt tightening.
3.4.1 Bestimmung der Schraubenlängung 3.4.1 Determination of Bolt Elongation

Das Anziehen der Ankerschrauben kann an beiden The anchor bolts can be tightened either only on one
oder an nur einem Schraubenende erfolgen. end or on both ends.
Um die Schraubenlängung zu bestimmen, wird vor To determine the bolt elongation, measure the dis-
und nach dem Anziehen der Schraube der jeweilige tance between the bolt end and the seating plate (up-
Abstand zwischen Schraubenende und Auflageplatte per portion) or between the bolt end and the anchor
(oberer Schraubenteil) bzw. Ankerplatte (unterer plate respectively (lower portion) before and after
Schraubenteil) bestimmt (Abb. 1) und dann die Diffe- tightening the bolt (Fig. 1) and calculate the difference
renz dieser Werte gebildet. Dies geschieht jeweils für between these measurements. Be sure to do this both
den oberen und den unteren Schraubenteil (Gleichun- for the upper and lower bolt portions (Equations 1 and
gen 1 und 2). Um die tatsächliche Schraubenlängung 2). In order to obtain the actual bolt elongation, add the
zu ermitteln, werden die Längenänderungen des obe- longitudinal deformation of the upper and lower por-
ren und unteren Teiles summiert (Gleichung 3). tions (Equation 3).
Gleichung 1: lo = Io2 - lo1 Equation 1: lo = Io2 - lo1

Gleichung 2: lu = Iu2 - lu1 Equation 2: lu = Iu2 - lu1
Gleichung 3: l = lo + lu Equation 3: l = lo + lu
Kugelausgleichscheibe Spherical Washer
Doppel-T-Träger I-Beam
Grouting Compound
Vergußmaterial
Bitumenbinde Bituminous Jacketing
Ankerschraube mit
Muttern und Anchor Bolt with
Nuts and Seating Plates
Auflageblechen
Abb. 1: Bestimmung der Schraubenlängung Fig. 1: Determination of Bolt Elongation
Wenn die Ankerschrauben nur an einem Ende ange- For anchor bolts to be tightened only on one end, the
zogen werden, ist zur Bestimmung der Schraubenlän- applicable equation is to be used only.
gung nur die jeweils zutreffende Gleichung allein her-
anzuziehen.
3.4.2 Anzugsverfahren für Ankerschrauben 3.4.2 Anchor Bolt Tightening Methods

● Mit Hilfe von Tabelle 1 wird der Sollwert der ● Determine the desired bolt elongation value, us-
Schraubenlängung bestimmt. ing Table 1.
● Mit den Gleichungen 4 und 5 kann dann der er- ● Employ Equations 4 and 5 to calculate the nec-
forderliche Drehwinkel errechnet werden. essary angle of rotation.
● Die Messung der Schraubenlängung erfolgt wie in ● Refer to section 3.4.1 for a description of how to
3.4.1 erläutert. measure the bolt elongation.
1. Schritt: Die Ankerschrauben sind mit der vollen Step 1: Tighten the anchor bolts with full elongation.
Längung anzuziehen. I ist grob nachzu- Check l through coarse measurement.
messen.
2. Schritt: Die Schrauben werden gelöst und dann mit Step 2: Loosen the bolts and then retighten them to
ca. 10% des angegebenen Moments wie- 10% of the specific torque. (Estimate this torque
der angezogen. (Abschätzung über Hebel- on the basis of the force arm and the strength of
arm und Armkraft, Armkraft kann als your arm. The strength of your arm can be
ca. 350 N angenommen werden.) assumed as approximately 350 N.)
3. Schritt: Die überstehenden Gewindelängen sind Step 3: Measure and record the lengths of the bolts
oben gegen die Auflagefläche (lo1) und projecting from the anchor plate at the bot-
ggf. unten gegen die Ankerplatte (lu1) zu tom (lu1) and the seating surface at the top
messen und zu protokollieren. Auf keinen (lo1). Be sure not to use the nut as measur-
Fall darf die Mutter als Messfläche benutzt ing surface.
werden.
4. Schritt: Die Schraube ist auf die vorgeschriebene Step 4: Prestress the bolt to the prescribed bolt
Schraubenlängung vorzuspannen (Klemm- elongation (clamping length multiplied by
länge mal zutreffende Verlängerung je Meter) relevant elongation per meters). Use the
Der erforderliche Drehwinkel wird über die lead of thread (Tab. 1) to determine the re-
Gewindesteigung (Tab. 1) bestimmt. quired angle of rotation.
Gleichung 4: ISoll = I x Klemmlänge Equation 4: Ides = I x Clamping length

Gleichung 5: Drehwinkel Soll = 360º x ISoll / Gewindesteigung Equation 5: Desired rotational angle = 360º x Ides / Lead of thread
Ides = Idesired
5. Schritt: Die überstehenden Gewindelängen oben Step 5: Measure and record again the thread pro-
und unten werden erneut gemessen und jecting at the top and at the bottom.
protokolliert.
Die Schraubenlängungen sind mit einer Toleranz von Allow a 10% tolerance when setting the bolt elonga-
10% einzustellen. Wird die Längung um mehr als tion. If the elongation is exceeded by more than 10%,
10% überschritten, kann bereits eine bleibende Ver- a lasting deformation may have already occurred, so
formung eingetreten sein, so dass die Schraube nicht that the bolt cannot be loosened. If the required elon-
zurückgedreht werden darf. Falls die vorgeschriebene gation has not been reached yet, remedial action must
Längung noch nicht erreicht wurde, muss nachgebes- be taken.
sert werden.
Wird das angegebene Vorspannmoment für die erfor- If the prestressing torque for the required bolt elonga-
derliche Schraubenlängung wesentlich unter-schritten, tion is considerably lower than specified, construction
so sind Bau- oder Montagefehler zu vermuten, die die and installation errors can be assumed, resulting in a
Steifigkeit im Spannbereich der Ankerschraube we- marked reduction in the clamping area stiffness of the
sentlich vermindert haben. Dies kann zum Beispiel bei anchor bolt. This may be the case, for example, if the
ungenügendem Maschinenverguss der Fall sein. machine has been insufficiently grouted.
Zur Überprüfung für DIN Muttern-Ankerschrauben- To check the prestress of DIN nut anchor bolts, per-
Vorspannungen ist nach dem vorschriftsmäßigen An- form at least one hammer blow test (using a striking-
zug der Schraube mindestens eine Hammer- face wrench or a sledge hammer) after proper bolt
schlagprobe (Schlagschlüssel, Hammer) durchzufüh- tightening.
ren.
Abschließend sind alle Muttern und Ankerplatten ge- Then secure all the nuts and anchor plates acc. to the
mäß den Angaben der BG 5949 (Verankerung) zu si- information of DG 5949 (Anchoring). After securing the
chern. Die überstehenden Enden der Ankerschrauben anchor bolts, spread anti-corrosive grease over the
werden nach dem Sichern samt Muttern mit Fett als projecting end of the bolts, including the nuts. Sliding
Korrosionsschutz eingestrichen. Gleitmolybdän ist als molybdenum must not be used as a corrosion protec-
Korrosionsschutz nicht zulässig. tion agent.
FV 12-011 Verankern und Vergießen des MP 12-011 Anchoring and Grouting of the
Generatorgrundrahmens Generator Base Frame
FV 12-010 Einbau und Verguss von Durch- MP 12-010 Installation and Grouting of
gangsankern in Betonfundamen- Through-Anchor Bolts in Concrete
ten Foundation
PAGEL-PRE-MIXED-GROUT ®
P R O P E RT I E S F I L E D S O F A P P L I C AT I O N
V14/10
• non shrink high viscocity mortar, cement based • placing under machine base plates, bridge
bearings, fixator levelling units and
• controlled and even expansion with a rigid bond pre-fabricated parts V14/40
between concrete foundation and machine base plate
• repair on wall and floor treads, concrete outbreaks
• high early and final strength
• filling of pre-fabricated part-joints V14/80
• has a plastic consistency and its density provides
resistance to freeze / thaw-cycles, impervious to
water and resistant to oil and chemicals
• is free of chloride and contains no alumina cement
or other additives which may cause corrosion
• easy to pour, need only be mixed with water
• is ready for use with a working time of
approx. 45 minutes at 20 °C, can be pumped and
placed very easily
• company is certified according
DIN EN ISO 9001:2008
• V14 consists of the following products:
V14/10 (0–1 mm)
placing height 10–30 mm
V14/40 (0–4 mm)
placing height 10–70 mm
V14/80 (0–8 mm)
placing height 50–100 mm Assigning to expositioncategory according to:
DIN 1045-2 / EN 206-1
• Pagel’s Factory Production Control (FPC) complies PAGEL – PRE-MIXED-GROUT
with the DafStb Directive on the "Manufacture and XO XC XD XS XF XA XM
use of cementitious concrete and grout" 0 1234 123 123 1234 123 123
V14/10 • •••• ••• ••• •••• •• •
V14/40 • •••• ••• ••• •••• •• •
V14/80 • •••• ••• ••• •••• •• •
Moisture class based on concrete corrosion from

alkali silicic acid reactions
moisture
WO WF WA WS
class
dry wet wet wet
• external • external supply
supply of of alkalis
alkalis • subject to high levels
of dynamic stress
V14 • • • •
The aggregates in PAGEL’s products comply with the requirements of alkali
sensitivity class E1 from non-hazardous sources specified under DIN EN 12620.
SPECIAL AND SEWER CONCRETE READY-FOR-USE CHANNEL CONCRETE INDUSTRIAL CONSTRUCTION

GROUTS RESINS
ANCHOR GROUT REHABILITATION REPAIRING MORTAR MORTAR PROTECTION FLOOR PRODUCTS
PAGEL®-PRE-MIXED-GROUT
T E C H N I C A L D ATA
V14/10
TYPE V14/10 V14/40 V14/80
V14/40 grain size mm 0–1 0–4 0–8
grouting height mm 10–30 10–70 50–100
quantity of water max. % 10–12 10–12 9–10
V14/80 consumption (dry-mortar) app. kg/m3 2000 2000 2100
density of freshly mixed mortar app. kg/dm3 2.20 2.25 2.30
processing time at +20 °C min. app. 45 app. 45 app. 45
expansion 24 h Vol.% + 0.5 + 0.5 + 0.5
compressive strength* 24 h N/mm2 욷 45 욷 45 욷 40
7d N/mm2 욷 70 욷 70 욷 60
28 d N/mm2 욷 75 욷 75 욷 70
90 d N/mm2 욷 85 욷 85 욷 80
bending strength 24 h N/mm2 욷5 욷5 –
7d N/mm2 욷8 욷8 –
28 d N/mm2 욷9 욷9 –
90 d N/mm2 욷 11 욷 11 –
e-modul 7d N/mm2 25.000 25.000 25.000
28 d N/mm2 30.000 30.000 30.000
All test data are guide values, proofed in our German manufacturing plants, - values from other manufacturing plants may vary.
* DIN EN 196-1-compliant compressive strength testing; DIN EN 12390-3-compliant compressive strength testing
supplied in: 25-kg-bag, euro-pallet 1,000 kg PAGEL-GROUT

storage: 12 months. Cool, dry, free from frost. cement: DIN EN 197-1 compliant
Unopened in its original packaging. aggregates: EN 12620 compliant
hazard class: no dangerous substance follow additives: EN 450, AbZ, EN13263 compliant
safety data sheet. (quick ash, microsilica etc.)
giscode: ZP1 additional substances: DIN EN 934-4 compliant
PROCESSING
SUBSTANCE: Clean thoroughly. Remove loose and APPLICATION: Place carefully in one continous pour.
adhesion-restricting parts and cement sludge by using For repair work use V14/10 as a primer in form of
high-pressure water jets, or other equipment, down to a slurry. Brush the slurry into the concrete surface and
the load-bearing grain structure. Approximately apply the mortar before the surface dries out.
6 hours before grouting pre-wet to saturation.
Processing time: approx. 30 min. (at 30 °C)
FORMWORK: Must be of rigid construction with sand approx. 45 min. (at 20 °C)
or dry mortar being placed around the concrete base approx. 90 min. (at 5 °C)
carefully to prevent leakage.
NOTE: Open surfaces are to be protected against
MIXING: The grout is ready-to-use it only has to be wind, draughts and premature water evaporation e.g.
mixed with water. Pour water into the forced mixer with plastic foil or 01 PAGEL-SURFACE
except for a residual quantity, add dry mortar and mix PROTECTION. The edge of the grouting should
for approx. 3 minutes; add rest of the water and mix not be wider than approx.
for a further 2 minutes. With other types of mixer allow 50 mm. In case of frost, please contact us; lower
longer mixing periods if required. The grouting process temperatures delay the development of strength and
should proceed directly. do reduce flow ability, higher temperatures accelerate
the same.
The information provided in this leaflet, is supplied by our consulting

service and is the end result of exhaustive research work and exten-
sive experience. They are, however, without liability on our part, in
particular with regard to third parties proprietary rights, and do not
relieve the user of the responsibility for verifying that the products
and processes are suitable for the intended application. The data
presented was derived from tests under normal climate conditions
according to DIN 50014 and mean average values and analysis. De- SPEZIAL - BETON GMBH & CO.KG
viations are possible when delivery takes place. Given that recom-
mendations may differ from those shown in this leaflet written con- WOLFSBANKRING 9 · 45355 ESSEN · GERMANY
firmation should be sought. It is the responsibility of the purchaser
to ensure they have the latest leaflet issue and that its contents are TEL. ѿ49 201 68504 - 0 · FAX ѿ49 201 68504 - 31
current. Our customer service staff will be glad to provide assistan- INTERNET WWW.PAGEL.COM · E-MAIL INFO@PAGEL.COM
ce at any time. We appreciate the interest you have shown in our
Technical Ref. Sheet 0204 GB products. This technical data sheet supercedes previously issued
QS-Formblatt 08/16 Rev. 19 information. Please find the latest leaflet issues at www.pagel.com.
Turbogenerator
Description
Bearings
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Generator Bearings
Components and Purchased Parts Technical Data
Manufacturer: RENK Temperature measurement: journal parts (radial)
Bearing designation: TE / EE: EGXTQ 35-400 Bearing insulation: insulated spherical seals
Shaft seals: TE Bearing material: THERM 89
1 x Rigid labyrinth seal type 22 NOTE:

35-425
(protective system IP 55) You will find more detailed
information in the Dimensional
1 x Rigid labyrinth seal type 20 Drawing Text.
35-450
(protective system IP 44)
EE
1 x Rigid labyrinth seal type 20

35-450
1 x Rigid labyrinth seal type 20
35-425
Siemens AG 4.1-3501-EG000425
Turbogenerator Generator Bearings
Components and Purchased Parts Renk: Slide Bearings Type EG with
external oil supply
Manufacturer: RENK AG
Laatzener Str. 21
D-30539 Hannover
Documentation title: Slide Bearings Type EG Size 35

Instructions for Installation and Maintenance
No. of pages: 36
Documentation title: Instructions for Installation and Maintenance - Hydrostatic Jacking

Device
No. of pages: 2
Siemens AG 4.1-5112-0001 /1…39

Instructions
For Installation and Maintenance
Slide Bearings TYPE EG
Size 35
RH - EGZEI - E – 6.02
Installation and Maintenance
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Werk Hannover
Weltausstellungsallee 21
D - 30539 Hannover
Telephone: (0511) 8601-0
Telefax: (0511) 8601-266
e-mail: gleitlager.hannover@renk-ag.com
http:\\www.renk.de
All rights reserved. Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK Aktiengesellschaft Hannover
prohibited.
2 RH-ERZEI-E Version: 3 Juni, 2002 © RENK AG Werk Hannover

EG
Contents
Bearing Coding...............................................................................................................................................5
General Drawing Slide Bearing EG, ER with External Oil Supply ..................................................................7
General Drawing Rigid Labyrinth Seal ...........................................................................................................9
1 Considerations for Use ...........................................................................................................................11
2 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................................12
3 Preparatory Works ..................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Tools and equipment ........................................................................................................................13
3.2 Use of lifting equipment ....................................................................................................................13
3.3 Dismantling of the bearing................................................................................................................15
3.3.1 Dismantling of the Rigid labyrinth seal (type 20 and 22) ...........................................................15
3.3.2 Dismantling of the housing ........................................................................................................16
3.4 Cleaning of the bearing ....................................................................................................................16
3.5 Check-up ..........................................................................................................................................17
4 Assembly of the Bearing.........................................................................................................................17
4.1 Assembly of the bottom half of the bearing on foundations .............................................................17
4.2 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell.................................................................................................18
4.3 Fitting in the top half of the shell.......................................................................................................19
4.4 Assembly of the top half of the housing ...........................................................................................20
4.5 Alignment of the bearing ..................................................................................................................21
5 Assembly of rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20, 22) .....................................................................................22
6 Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment............................................................................23
6.1 Assembly of the oil supply equipment ..............................................................................................23
6.2 Temperature measurement .............................................................................................................24
7 Bearing Insulation ...................................................................................................................................25
71 Bearings with insulated spherical seatings .......................................................................................25
8 Operation..................................................................................................................................................26
8.1 Fill up lubrication oil ..........................................................................................................................26
8.2 Trial run ............................................................................................................................................27
9 Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................................................................................28
9.1 Maintenance Schedule .....................................................................................................................28
9.2 Oil Change .......................................................................................................................................29
9.3 Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing .............................................................................................30
9.4 Starting Operation after Inspection...................................................................................................31
10 Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods ............................................................................33
11 Transport Protection ...............................................................................................................................34
12 Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................35
© RENK AG Werk Hannover RH-EGZEI-E Version: 3 Juni, 2002 3

Bearing Coding
4 RH-EGZEI-E Version: 3 Juni, 2002 © RENK AG Werk Hannover

EG

Type Housing Heat Dissipation Shape of Bore and Type of Thrust part Size - Diameter
Lubrication
E R - finned pedestal N - natural cooling C - plain cylindrical bore Q - without thrust part 35 300£D£450
bearing without oil ring (non locating bearing )
(size 35 - 45) Z - lubrication by oil circulation with 45 375£D£560
G - smooth pedestal external oil cooling L - plain cylindrical bore with B - plain sliding surfaces
bearing loose oil rings (locating bearing) 56 475£D£710
X - lubrication by oil circulation with
external oil cooling for high Y - two-lobe bore (lemon shape) K - taper land faces for both
oil throughput 71 600£D£900
without oil ring senses of rotation
(locating bearing) 90 750£D£1000
U - circulating pump and natural
cooling A - elastically supported circular
112 950£D£1250
tilting pads (locating bearing)
T - circulating pump and water
cooling (finned cooler in E - taper land faces for
oil sump ) one sense of rotation
(locating bearing)
W - water cooling (finned cooler in
oil sump )
Example for bearing coding:

E G Z L A 35-355 Type E slide bearing with smooth foot-mounted housing, lubrication by
oil circulation with external oil cooling, plain cylindrical bore with loose
oil ring, locating bearing with elastically supported circular tilting pads, size 35, diameter 355.
Shaft seals Type 20 - rigid labyrinth seal (IP 44)
Type 22 - rigid labyrinth seal (IP 55)

EG
General Drawing
Slide Bearing type EG
Size 35

1 Oil filling hole
2
3
4 Positioning pin
5 Housing - top half
6 Shell - top half
7 Positioning pin hole
8 Housing - bottom half
9
10 Spherical surface
11 Cooling water in-or outlet (Type E.T..)
12 Cooling water out-or inlet (Type E.T..)
13 Cooler (Type E.T..)
14 Hexagon head plug (Oil drain plug)
15 Foot plate (Type ER...)
16 Foot plate holes
17 Dowel pin hole
18 Connection hole for oil sump temperature measurement
19 Oil outlet pipe with special pipe nut and lead seal
20 Oil sight glass
21 Screw plug
22 Connection hole for journal bearing temperature measurement
23 Oil inlet connection hole
24 Screw plug
25 Connection hole for thrust part supply (optional)
26 Engraved number
27 Shell - bottom part
28 Engraved number
29
30 Engraved number
31
32 Tapped hole (shell - top and bottom halves)
33 Engraved number
34 Screw (split line of the housing)
35 Eye bolt
36 Connection hole for thrust part temperature measurement (optional)
EG
General drawing
Rigid Labyrinth Seal

59 Rigid labyrinth seal - top half
60 Scew
61 Screw (split line)
63 Rigid labyrinth seal - bottom part
64 Engraved number
65 Engraved number
66 Taper sleeves
EG
1 Considerations for Use
The instructions for installation and maintenance are addressed to qualified technical personnel
(fitters, mechanic installers, mechanical engineers).
Read these instructions carefully before starting assembly.
Slide bearings of type EG are almost universally used in the engineering industry. Therefore it is not
possible to provide detailed information on all possible types and range of applications for these
bearing types. For instance, the position of the connection points for supply and monitoring
equipment is determined by the place of application ( in the following called " installation " ). Please
keep ready the guidelines with the technical documentation before starting installation and
maintenance of the slide bearings.
Additional technical documentation with detailed information is supplied in case of special design
bearings. Please contact RENK Export or Domestic Department for supplementary information on
bearings. Please indicate the bearing coding and the full reference number, too.
Following indications should be observed when reading these instructions.
Safety instructions are marked as follows:
Danger!
Warning of dangers for personnel.
Example: Warning of injury
Attention!
Warning of damage for the bearing or installation.
Useful recommendations and additional information are framed.
E...Q This is how chapters, instructions or recommendations are marked when referring to a single type
or size of a bearing.
Example: Slide bearing type E without thrust pads ( non-locating bearing )
- Instruction follows.
· Beginning of an enumeration.
( ) This is how the different parts of a bearing as described in the general drawings( numbers )
are marked in the text.
- Use the enclosed check-list before starting assembly or operation. Copies available on request.
- The check list provides the experienced mecanical fitters for RENK bearings with the necessary
instructions for installation and operation.

2 Safety Instructions
Danger!
The installation and maintenance of the slide bearings should be carried out by:
· persons nominated by the safety representative
· persons correspondingly trained and instructed
· persons with knowledge on appropriate standards, regulations and accident
prevention rules
· persons with knowledge on first-aid measures and local rescue centers.
Warning of injury!
Before starting work on the bearing:
- Switch off the installation.
- Make sure the installation is not in operation.
Never lift or transport machines, etc.by the bearing eye bolts. These are only intended
for assembly and dismantling of the bearing !
Warning of injury!
Do not grab such heavy bearing parts as the housing during assembly or dismantling
works. This could result in bruising or injury to hands !
Attention!
All parts of a slide bearing consisting of top and bottom part such as the housing, shells, shaft seals
are marked by engraved numbers. Fit together only the parts with the same number.
Attention!
In case · the admissible bearing temperature exceeds 15 K
· inadmissible vibrations occur
· unusual noises or odours are noticed
· monitoring equipment triggers alarm
shut down the installation and inform the maintenance personnel in charge.
Attention!
Do not operate the bearing below the transition speed values indicated in the bearing calculation,
thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions, which could lead to damage of the bearing.
Attention!
Please observe our leaflet Technical Information No. 85 which refers to various sealing compounds
for extended technical applications.

EG
3 Preparatory Works
3.1 Tools and equipment
- Following tools and equipment are necessary:

· Allan key set
· Wrenching key set
· Open-jawed spanner set
· Feeler gauges ( up 0,05 mm )
· Caliper gauge
· Emery paper, plain scraper
· Oil rubber
· Lifting equipment
· Permanent sealing compound
· Clean cloth
· Oil with the viscosity indicated (see bearing type plate)
· Detergents
· Liquid screw locking compound ( e.g. LOCTITE 242 )
· Liquid sealing compound and Teflon-tape
3.2 Use of lifting equipment
Warning of injury!
Before transport or lifting check if the eye bolts are tight ! Insecure eye bolts could
result in bearing becoming loose.
Before moving the bearing by the eye bolts make sure that the split line screws are
tightened, otherwise the bottom half of the bearing could become detached.
Make sure that the eye bolts are not exposed to bending stress, otherwise the bolts
could break.
Follow exactly the instructions for the use of lifting equipment.

- Use lifting equipment for assembly or transport of the bearing items:

- Following steps are to be observed before using the lifting equipment:
Whole bearing unit

- Check if the screws are tight (34):
Bearing size 35
Torque value [Nm] 1150

μtot = 0,1 (lightly oiled)
- Check if the eye bolts (35) are tight.

- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (35).
Top half of the housing

- Check if the eye bolts (35) are tight.
- Connect the lifting devices to the eye bolts (35).
Bottom half of the housing

- Screw two eye bolts (35) with suitable threads tight into the cross-placed opposite tapped holes.
Bearing size 35
Tapped hole M 30
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (35).
Shells
- Screw two eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads tight into the tapped holes (32):
Bearing size 35
Tapped hole M 16
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts or to the screw hooks.

EG
3.3 Dismantling of the bearing
Attention
Make sure that the work place and the parts to be assembled are clean. Contamination and
damages to the bearing, especially of the working surfaces, have a negative influence on the
operating quality and could lead to premature fatigue.
3.3.1 Dismantling of the Rigid labyrinth seal (type 20 and 22)
Illustration 1: Dismantling of the rigid labyrinth seal
- Loosen all screws (60) of the top half (59).

- Take out the screws (61).
- After removing the screws (61) pull out in upward direction the taper sleeves (66) from the split
line bores. You can separate both halves of the rigid labyrinth seal only after removing the taper
sleeves (66). The taper sleeves (66) are provided with M 10 threads in which you can screw
counter nuts or any other suitable pulling tool.
- Screw an eye bolt M12 or a screw hook into the threaded hole on the top half (59).
- Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts or to the screw hooks.
- Remove the screws (60) of the top half (59).
- Take away the top half carefully,in axial direction, from the housing.
- Loosen the screws of the bottom half (63).
- Screw two eye bolts M12 or screw hooks into the threaded holes of the bottom half (63).
- Further on proceed as in the case of the top half.
- Remove the gasket from the flange surface.
- Damaged gaskets must be renewed.

3.3.2 Dismantling of the housing
- Unscrew the screws (34) or the nutz respectively and lift the top half of the housing (5).
- Take out both top (6) and bottom (27) halves of the shell from the bottom half (8) of the housing.
Attention!
Do not damage the thrust and radial working surfaces!
Attention!
In the case of insulated housings (white plastic insulating foil) avoid any jamming of the top half of
the shell when you lift it up
Jamming could lead to damage of the insulating foil in the bottom half of the housing.
- Remove the taper pins (30) by using suitable tools and unscrew both screws (31).
- Separate top and bottom half of the shell (6), (27) without using any tools or other devices.
3.4 Cleaning of the bearing
Attention!
Use only non-aggressive detergents, such as for instance:
· VALVOLINE 150.
· Alcaline cleaning compounds (pH-value 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or fibrous cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to
excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly, to remove all residues of preservation :

· inside the top half of the housing (5)
· inside the bottom half of the housing (8)
· all plain parts of the top and bottom half of the housing (5), (8)
· top half of the shell (6)
· bottom half of the shell (27)
· sealing surfaces of the seal carrier

EG
3.5 Check-up
- Please check if there is any visible damage. Check the split line and the working surfaces in
particular.
Insulated - Check the insulating layer of the spherical seatings (10).

Bearings
- If necessary, change the damaged parts.
Attention!
The insulating layer of the spherical surface can be repaired ones with special tools and insulating
material.
4 Assembly of the Bearing
Attention!
Remove all impurities or other objects such as screws, nuts, etc. from inside the bearing.If left
inside they could lead to damage to the bearing. Cover up the opened bearing during breaks.
Attention!
Carry out all assembly operations without making use of force.
Attention!
Use a liquid screw locking compound (e.g. LOCTITE 242) for all housing, split line and flange
screws.
4.1 Assembly of the bottom half of the bearing on foundations
Attention!
Make sure that all bearings installed on a shaft line are opened. To open them untighten the screws
or the nuts of the split line of the housing.
Attention!
Do not let the lifting device touch the working surfaces of the shaft.
- Lift the shaft high enough to get sufficient room for assembly. Make sure the shaft does not
move.
- Adjust the bottom half of the housing on the foundation on site. (see also the Technical
Documentation for the Installation).
Insulated
bearings Chapter 7.1 provides information on the assembly of pedestal insulation of the bearings.

- Make sure that the bottom half of the housing (8) lies on the foot plate (15). This is the only way
to avoid deflexion of the bearing.
15
Illustration 2: Foot plates of EG bearing
- Twist suitable foot screws loose into the holes (16) (about 4 turns) to fix the bottom half of the
bearing safely into its place. For bearings with high thrust or radial loads use 8.8 quality screws..
Bearing size 35
Bore for foot screws (16) [mm] 55
Suitable foot screw thread M 42
4.2 Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant to the spherical seating (10) in the bottom half of the housing (8) and on
the working surfaces of the shaft.Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing
operation
( see type plate ).
- Place the bottom half of the shell (27) on the working surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half
of the shell (27) into the bottom half of the housing (8) with the split line surfaces of both halves
in true alignment.
If the shell does not turn in easily, readjust the bottom half of the housing.
- Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the shell (27).

EG
4.3 Fitting in the top half of the shell
- Apply some lubricant on the working surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
indicated for bearing operation (see type plate).
- Check if the engraved number (28) on the bottom half of the shell corresponds with the
engraved number (30) on the top half of the shell.
- Place the top half of the shell (6) on the shaft; both engraved numbers (28),(30) should be on
one side.
Attention!
An incorrectly placed shell could jam the shaft thus leading to the damage of both shaft and
bearing.
insulated In the case of bearings arranged for insulation monitoring, connect the black cable for insulation
bearings
monitoring to the shell.
According to the bearing type, there are two possibilities of connection.
1. The black cable is provided with a cable connector.
- Plug the cable with the cable connector into the counterpart available on the top of the shell.
- Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing.
- Tighten the cable gland oil-tight.
2. The black cable is provided with an eyelet.
- Fasten the cable with the eyelet to the split line of the shell, by using one of the shell joint bolts.
- Lead the cable through the cable gland in the bottom half of the housing and out of the bearing.
- Tighten the cable gland oil-tight.
- Assemble both halves of the shell by carefully inserting the taper pins.
- Tighten up the screw (31) by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque [Nm]
170
- Check the split line of the shell by using a feeler gauge. The split line gap should be less than
0,05 mm. If the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top (6) and bottom (27) halves of the
shell. Rework the split line surfaces of the top (6) and bottom (27) half of the shell with an oil
rubber.

4.4 Assembly of the top half of the housing
- Check the true alignment of the split lines of the shell (6), (27) and bottom (8) half of the
housing.
E..Y.
The positioning pin (4) in the top half of the housing fits in the corresponding positioning pin hole (7)
in the shell.
- Check if the engraved numbers (26) and (33) on the top and bottom halves of the housing
correspond.
- Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves of the housing (5) (8).
- Apply Curil°T over the whole surface of the split line of the bottom half (8) of the housing.
- Lower the top half of the housing (5) vertically on the bottom half of the housing (8). The
engraved numbers should be on the same side of the bearing.Lower the top half of the housing
(5) till the split line of the housing is not visible any more.
- Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (8) with a nylon hammer, thus ensuring the alignment of
the spherical seating.
- Insert the four screws (34). Tighten them crosswise by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque value [Nm]

1150
insulated Insulation monitoring

bearings
In the case of electric insulated bearings provided with insulation monitoring, the cable coming out
of the housing must be connected in a professional manner.
According to the type supplied, please follow the assembly instructions given below.
a) The cable is very short and provided with a further cable connector at the end of it.
This cable is ready for connection to the housing.
The bottom half of the housing is provided with the counterpart.
- Plug the cable connector into the counterpart.
Attention!
This connection bypasses the electrical insulation of the bearing.
In the case of electric machines, make sure at least one bearing is electrically insulated.
To check the electrical insulation, interrupt the connection cable - housing. Check the electrical
resistance with a suitable measuring instrument. Make sure that both bearings and the coupling are
electrically insulated.
b) The cable has a free end. In this case the customer has to make the connection.
Attention!
If only one bearing is insulated, the end of the cable must not be earthed.
Any further connection depends on the customer’s requirements related to the insulation monitoring
and can not therefore be described here.

EG
4.5 Alignment of the bearing
Attention !
If both a non-locating and a locating bearing are to be mounted on a shaft line, both bearings must
be adjusted in turn. Start with adjustment of the locating bearing.
- Measure the distances (a,b,c,d) between shaft and lateral bores of the housing on both sides of
the bearing.
The measured values a and c must not differ by more than 0,4 mm on each side.
d
5
c a
8
b
Illustration 3: Alignment of the bearing
In case of large clearances and disadvantageous tolerances the measured values b and d can
differ by more than 0,4 mm on one side. If so the values b and d must be compared separately for
both sides of the bearing. However, even in such a case the deviation of the measured value b on
each side must not exceed 0,4 mm. The same is valid for value d.
- To do so always loose the screws of the split line of both bearings.
- Use lining plates for the height adjustment of the bottom half of the housing (8).
- After every measurement tighten up the split line screws again.
After adjustment of both bearings,

- tighten up the plate screws or the nuts respectively with the necessary torque.
The necessary torque values are depending on
· the used plate screws
· the material of the housing and the anchoring in the foundation
(see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Check the alignment.
- Drill both holes for the positioning pin holes (17) and insert the positioning pins.

5 Assembly of rigid labyrinth seal (Type 20, 22)
- Check if the engraved numbers (64) and (65) on the bottom half (63) and top half (59) of the
rigid labyrinth seal correspond.
- Clean
· the flange surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
· the split line surfaces of the top half (59) and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
· the flange surfaces of the housing.
- Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid
labyrinth seal.
- Before assembling the rigid labyrinth seal place a new gasket into the flange surface of the
housing. Make sure the nut edge is upwards.
- Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the shaft and press slightly the bottom half
(63) of the rigid labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid labyrinth seal
completely into the housing.
- Tighten the screws (61) with the taper sleeves (66) to the rated torque: 10 Nm
- Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid labyrinth seal and the split line of the housing.
Press the rigid labyrinth seal slightly from below against the shaft. Adjust the rigid labyrinth seal
in such a way that the clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal at both split
lines has the same figure.
5 59
f f
8 63
Illustration 4: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal
- Tighten the screws (60) by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque [Nm] 40

EG
6 Instructions for Assembly of Peripheral Equipment
6.1 Assembly of the oil supply equipment
The oil supply equipment together with the pressure, temperature and flow measuring instruments
are usually provided by the user. The oil quantity and viscosity necessary fo the operation of the
bearing are indicated in the bearing calculations. This manual contains only indications on the
connection points with the bearing. The connection bores for the oil inlets are on both lateral sides
of the bearing, bolted with screw plugs. Remove only those plugs where pipes will be connected.
Connection conditions
Pipelines Flow speed Indications
Inlet Precision steel pipe about 1,5 m/s Place the throttle valve in the inlet
DIN 2391 pipeline directly in front of the bearing
Steel pipe DIN 2448
Outlet Steel pipe DIN 2448 max. 0,15 m/s · 15° inclination
· if 15° inclination is not possible

enlarge correspondingly the cross
sections of the pipeline directly
behind the bearing.
Too low inclination or / and too small

cross-section lead to oil back pressure
in the bearing.
Leakage or overflowing are the
consequences.
- Before starting assembly pickle all pipes which · have been welded
· have been bent hot
· are contamined and rusty inside.
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the pickle. Wear rubber gloves,
rubber apron, rubber boots and safety glasses.

Rinsing of the oil circuit

- Rinse the whole oil circuit to remove all impurities. The bearing must not be connected to the oil
circuit during rinsing operations. The rinsing should be done before connecting the oil supply to
the bearing or the bearing should be disconnected from the oil circuit. If this is not possible,
dismantle the top half of the housing and remove the shells.
To avoid damage to the fittings:
- Remove all measuring terminal and switching fittings.
- Close all connections (see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation).
- Fill up the oil supply installation with lubricant. Use the type with the viscosity indicated on the
bearing type plate.
- Start operating the oil supply installation.Collect the first charge of high contamined oil
separately. Continue rinsing till the lubricant contains no impurities any more.
- Drain off the oil supply installation completely. Clean the oil tank and the filters.
Warning of environmental pollution!

Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricant. The manufacturer could provide
information on waste oil disposal.
- Assemble all fittings.
Oil inlet
- Connect the inlet pipe at the connection hole (23) for the oil inlet. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid
sealing compound.
Depending on the bearing size, the connection hole has the following threads:
Bearing size 35
Connection hole / G 3/4"

Oil inlet (23)
If the bearing calculation specifies a separate supply source for the thrust parts:
- connect the inlet pipes at the connection hole of the thrust part supply (25) on the lateral side of
the bearing. Seal with Teflon tape or liquid sealing compound.
Oil outlet
E.Z.., - Screw the oil outlet (19) tight into the housing. Connect the oil outlet pipe to the flange.
E.X..
6.2 Temperature measurement
- Fix suitable feeler gauges:

· into one of the connection holes (22) for temperature measurements of the journal parts
· into one of the connection holes (18) for temperature measurements of the oil sump
· into one of the connection holes (optional) (36) for temperature measurement
of the thrust parts.
Proceed as follows:
- Take out the screw plugs (24) from the connection holes.
- Place the thermo sensor into the bore by using Teflon tape or sealing compound.
- Connect the thermo sensor at the temperature monitoring equipment of the installation (see the
Technical Documentation of the Installation for connecting and adjustement).

EG
7 Bearing Insulation
71 Bearings with insulated spherical seatings
These bearings are delivered insulated. The electrical insulation is guaranteed by:
· plastic coating of the spherical seatings (10)
· shaft seals out of non-conducting materials
· insulated positioning pin (4)
· insulated screwed connections for thermometers.
It is not necessary to insulate the pipelines.
- Mark the insulated bearing with the delivered plate " Insulated shells".Mount the plate at a visible
place by using two grooved drive studs.

8 Operation
8.1 Fill up lubrication oil
Attention!
Make sure that no impurities get into the bearing.
- Tighten all screw plugs (24) in the connection holes (14), (18), (21), (22), (23), (25), (36) with the
necessary torque values:
Screw plug threads G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 G2 G 2 1/2
Torque [Nm] for plugs 30 40 60 110 160 230 320 500

with moulded on plastic
seal

with elastic seal
- Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and outlet, and for the thrust parts (if existing). The
necessary torque values depend on the screw connections used.
In case thermo sensor or/and oil sump thermometer are used:

- Check if they are tight (according the manufacturer's instructions).
E.Z.. - Fill up the oil supply installation with lubricant. Use a lubricant with the viscosity indicated for the
E.X.. bearing operation.
- Start operating the oil supply installation in order to fill the bearing with lubricant.
Attention!
· Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damages to the bearing.
· Too much lubricant leads to leakages. In the case of bearings with lubrication by loose oil
ring too much lubricant could brake the oil rings considerably, thus leading to damages to
the bearing.

EG
8.2 Trial run
- Before the trial run, check the following:

· the way the oil supply system works (see also the Technical Documentation of the
Installation).The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values indicated
in the EDP-calculations.
· if the temperature monitoring equipment works
Attention!
Not enough lubricant leads to
· temperature rises and thus damage of the bearing.
Too much lubricant leads to
· leakages.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run (5-10 operating hours).
Pay special attention to:
· the way the oil supply installation works( necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant temperature,
lubricant pressure before entering the bearing)
· bearing temperature
· sliding noises of the shaft seals
· tightness
· occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value by more than 15 K (see Bearing
calculation) stop the installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing.

9 Maintenance and Inspection
9.1 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance work Deadline
Exterior cleaning of the bearing every 100-1000 hours
Oil change Bearing in reversing operation every 5000 operating hours.

Bearing in continous operation every 8.000 operating hours
(please observe also the indications for the use of the
lubricating oil).
Bearing inspection During prevention maintenance work for the installation.

Immediately if:
· the bearing temperature exceeds 15 K over the indicated

value (see the EDP-calculations)
· unusual operating noises occur
· unusual changes of the lubricating oil become visible
· increased oil level in the case of bearing type E.W.... or

E.T...

EG
9.2 Oil Change
Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide
information on waste oil disposal.
- Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended operation.

- Take all necesarry measures to collect the whole quantity of the lubricating oil.
- Let off the lubricating oil in still warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be scavenged.
- Unscrew the hexagon head plug (14). Let off the lubricating oil and collect it.
Attention!
In case the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed, eliminate the causes. If
necessary, carry out an inspection.
- Tighten the hexagon head plug (14) by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque [Nm] 110
- Remove the screw plugs (21) from the oil filling hole (1).
Attention!
Attention!
· Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damages to the bearing.
· Too much lubricant leads to leakages. In the case of bearings with lubrication by loose oil
ring too much lubricant could brake the oil rings considerably, thus leading to damages to
the bearing.
- Tighten the screw plug (21) into the oil filling hole (1) by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque [Nm] 110

9.3 Cleaning and Checking of the Bearing
Attention!
Use only non-aggressive detergents such as for instance
· VALVOLINE 150
· Alcaline cleaning compounds (pH-value 6 to 9, short reaction time).
Warning of injury!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the detergents.
Attention!
Never use cleaning wool or cloth. Residues of such materials left in the bearing could lead to
excessive temperatures.
- Clean the following parts thoroughly:

· top half of the housing (5)
· bottom half of the housing (8)
· top half of the shell (6)
· bottom half of the shell (27)
· sealing surfaces of the seal carrier
- Carry out a visual check of the wear condition of all bearing parts. The following graph provides
information on the parts that must be replaced in case of wear.The right evaluation of the wear
condition, especially of the working surfaces of the shell, implies a lot of experience. If in doubt,
replace the worn part with new ones.
Bearing part Wear condition Maintenance proceedings
Shell Scoring Bearing temperature before inspection:

· not increased - no new shells
· increased - new shells
White metal lining damaged New shell
Bow wave ridges New shells
Shaft seal Baffles broken or damaged New shaft seal
Loose oil ring Geometrical form ( roundness, New loose oil ring
flatness ) visibly changed
insulated
bearings - Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (10) of the top half (5) and bottom half (8) of
the housing. In case of damage contact the RENK-sales agency in charge.

EG
9.4 Starting Operation after Inspection
- Fit the thermo sensors for temperature measurement of the journal part in the connection holes
(22).
- Retighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (14), (18), (19), (22), (32) by using the
following torque values:
Screw plug threads G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 G2 G 2 1/2

with moulded on plastic
seal

with elastic seal
- Retighten the connection holes for oil inlet and outlet and the bores for the thrust part oil
supply.The torque depends on the threaded joints used.
- Retighten the foot bolts to the rated torque. The torque depends on:
· the foot bolts used
· the material the housing and the foundation are made of (see also
the Technical Documentation of the Installation ).
- Carry out a visual check of the assembled bearing.
E.Z.. - Fill up the oil supply system with lubricant. Use the same type of lubricant as indicated on the
E.X.. type plate.
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant.
- Check
· the way the oil supply system works ( see also the Technical Documentation of the Installation ).
The lubricant quantity at the bearing oil inlet must correspond to the values indicated in the EDP-
calculations.
· if the temperature monitoring equipment works.
Attention!

- Tighten the screw plug into the oil filling hole (1) by using the following torque values:
Bearing size 35
Torque [Nm] 110
- Check if the temperature monitoring equipment works.
The bearing is ready for operation.
- Supervise the bearing during the trial run (5-10 operating hours).
Pay special attention to:
· the way the oil supply installation works( necessary lubricant quantity, lubricant temperature,
lubricant pressure before entering the bearing)
· tightness
· occurrence of inadmissible vibrations.
Attention!
If the bearing temperature exceeds the calculated value of 15 K (see the EDP-bearing calculations)
stop the installation immediately. Carry out an inspection of the bearing and find out the causes.

EG
10 Corrosion Protection for Longer Standstill Periods
If you want to protect the bearing mounted on an installation against corrosion proceed as follows:
- Dismantle the bearing (see Chapter 3.3).
- Clean the bearing (see Chapter 9.3).
- Paint or spray the top half (6), and the bottom half (27) of the shell and the shaft with Tectyl 511.
- Assemble the bearing (see Chapter 4).
- Close all connection holes with screw plugs.
- Seal the gaps between · shaft seal and housing
· shaft seal and shaft
by using a self-adhesive, permanent tape.
- Spray some anti-corrosive such as Tectyl 511 or VALVOLINE into the bearing.
- Put a bag of dessicant ( silicate gel ) inside. The dessicant absorbs the humidity and prevents
the formation of condensation water inside the bearing.
In case the standstill period is longer than 1/2 year:

- Repeat the preservation procedures.
- Put a new bag of dessicant into the bearing.
In case the standstill period lasts more years:

- Dismantle the shells.
- Preserve and store the bearing parts.

11 Transport Protection
In case of a machine equipped with slide bearing type EG:

- Carry out the corrosion protection as described in Chapter 10 and apply enough lubricant on the
working surfaces of the bearing.
- Pull the rotor against the sub-frame by using timbers placed across the shaft and press firmly
into the bearing.
Illustration 5: Transport protection

EG
12 Glossary
Rigid labyrinth seal The rigid labyrinth seal (type 20, 22) is used with slide bearings type E with high oil
throughput.It corresponds to the protective system IP44, IP55 and is made of an
aluminium alloy.
The rigid labyrinth seal is built of two halves, flanged at the housing.The labyrinths that
wipe out the lubricant are arranged into two groups.The first two labyrinths , installed
inside keep back most of the lubricant. Five further labyrinths protect the bearing from
outside.They prevent the lubricant overflow and the ingress of impurities.The overflow
lubricant is collected into a chamber between the both groups of labyrinths.Through the
return bores the lubricant flows back into the bearing.
Spherical seating The spherical seating is a special feature enabling the alignment of the shell in the
housing.The shell is seated on two spherical seatings. The advantages of the spherical
seating are:
· easy at assembly
· good heat transfer from the shell to the housing
· suitable for such applications with high thrust or journal loads.

Instructions for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance
Hydrostatic Jacking Device
Safety Instructions
Attention!
Do not operate the bearing without hydrostatic jacking device below the transition speed indicated
in the EDP-calculation during shaft start-ups or run-downs as well as during turn speed operation
for maintenance works. Following this advice, you prevent inadmissible operation condition causing damage
to the bearing.
Start-Up After Standstill

- Start operation of the hydrostatic jacking device and check its function (see also the Technical
Documentation of the Hydrostatic Jacking Device).
Oil Change
Risk of pollution!
Please observe the instructions for the use of the lubricant. Check with the supplier for information on waste
oil disposal.
- Stop the bearing and ensure the machine against starting-up.

- Turn out the oil supply system / the hydrostatic jacking device.
- Collect the lubricant in suitable containers.
Let off the lubricant in still warm condition. Impurities and residues will thus be scavanged.
Proceed as follows:
- Let off and collect the lubricant of the oil supply system.
- Open the oil drain plugs. Let off the oil and collect it.
Attention!
In case the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly changed, investigate and eliminate the
causes. If necessary, carry out inspection works.
- Close the drain plugs and ensure them against unintended draining of the oil.
- Fill up the oil supply system with lubricating oil. Use a lubricant with the viscosity indicated in the EDP-
calculations.
- Start operating the oil supply system in order to fill up the bearing with lubricant.
- Start operating the hydrostatic jacking device.
Ó RENK AG Werk Hannover Stand: 03.1995 1

Disassembly
- Shut down the oil supply system / hydrostatic
jacking device. Ensure the machine against
unintended operation.
C
- Please consult the Technical Documentation of the
Oil Supply System /Hydrostatic Jacking Device for B
information on maintenance and inspection.
Carry out all necessary maintenance and
inspection works.
- Loosen the hydrostatic hose (A) by removing the A
pipe joint (C) from the adapter (B) on the inside of
the bottom half of the bearing housing.
- Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and
bottom half of the shell do not touch each other
any more. Use suitabale lifting gear. Protect the
shaft against unintended movement.
- Turn out the bottom half of the shell from the
housing and remove it.
Assembly
- Fix the hydrostatic hose (A) by screwing the pipe joint (C) into the adapter (B) on the inside of the bottom
half of the housing.
- Retighten the flange screws of the oil inlet, oil outlet, oil drain plugs and of the hydrostatic jacking device.
- Start operating the hydrostatic jacking device and check its funtion (see also the Technical Documentation
of the Hydrostatic Jacking Device).
Starting Operation After Inspection
Attention!
Not enough lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to damage to the bearing.
Too much lubricant leads to leakages.
- Pay special attention to:

· the way the oil supply system and the hydrostatic jacking device work (necessary lubricant
quantity, lubricant temperature, lubricant pressure before entering the bearing)
· tightness
· occurence of inadmissible vibrations.
RENK AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Werk Hannover
Weltausstellungsallee 21 D - 30539 Hannover

Telephone: (0511) 8601-0 Telefax: (0511) 8601-266 email: gleitlager.hannover@renk-
ag.com
Copy or reproduction without prior permission of RENK AG Werk Hannover prohibited.
Ó RENK AG Werk Hannover Stand: 03.1995 2

Intern AL: N ECL: N U.S.-CONTENT: N ECCN: EAR99
Zeichnungsnummer/DRAWING NUMBER: Index:
SIEMENS DPPPG-70190393 / 001 A
AG Datum/DATE: Name/NAME: Alternativer Identifizierer/ALTERNATIVE
IDENTIFIER:
Energy Sector geprueft/CHECKED 2019-09-03 Türkis 22-SFA5500-70190393
IDENTIFIER:
IDENTIFIER:
IDENTIFIER:
Stück Benennung Pos. Zeichn.-Nr. Halbzeug / Werkstoff / DIN-Nr.
QTY Part name No. Draw-No. Semifinished product / material / DIN-No.
1 Block 1 1FC 11681:3
block
1 Adapter 2 4FC 11682:0
adapter
1 Anschweißflansch 3 AFS 108 STRE komplett, mit Rundring und
welded flange 60,3 M Schrauben
complete, with O-ring seal and
screws
1 Rohr 4 Rohr 60,3x3,6
pipe pipe 60,3x3,6
2 Vorschweißflansch 5 ANSI 2“ 150LBS- Ein Flansch als Gegenflansch
welding neck flange B16.5 One flange as companion flange
1 Drossel 6 2FC 11535-E:0
throttle valve
1 Durchflussmesser 7 TZ1-040 K150-258
flowmeter ○
B (205 in / to 258)
1 Manometer mit Glyzerin gefüllt, 8 GMM 63-2,5
Doppelskala G1/4unten / below
manometer filled with glycerin, bar/psi
double scale
1 Manometerdirektanschluss 9 SMD20G1/4 /
manometer connection MAVMD1/4MA3
2 Messkupplung 10 SMK20G1/4PC /
measuring coupling EMA3/1/4ED
1 Verschlussschraube 11 VSTI11/2ED
screw plug
screw plug
screw plug
2 Rundring 14 28x2 60 SHORE, Gummi, ölfest
O-ring seal 60 SHORE, rubber, oil-resistant
5 Zylinderschraube 18 DIN912-M12x140 8.8, galv. verz.
cap screw 8.8, zinc-plated
5 Federring 19 DIN7980-12 galv. verz.
spring washer zinc-plated
screw plug
22
23
Stückliste zur Zeichnung / Benennung / TITLE: Ölzulauf Größe 35

PART LIST TO THE DRAW NO.:
2FC 11680 oil inlet size 35
Auftraggeber / CUSTOMER: Stückliste / PART LIST: Datei/FILE:11680_3-EDELSTAHL-ANSI.DOC
4FC 11680:3 4-3327-421057 / 002 B

Auftrags-Nr. / ORDER NUMBER:
Edelstahl-ANSI
Bearbeiter / NAME: J. Beyer Datum / DATE: Blattzahl / PAGE NO.:
Firma / FIRM-NAME: Fluid Control 30.11.2005 1/1
Engineering
Turbogenerator
Description
Neutral Point Cubicle

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Neutral Point Cubicle
Components and Purchased Parts CASAGRANDE: Operating and
Maintenance Instruction
Manufacturer: CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI S.p.A.
Documentation title: Neutral Point Cubicle

Maintenance Book
Neutral Point Cubicle Outline Drawing & Single Line Diagram
Bolts and Nuts tightening
No. of pages: 43 inc. drawings


SIEMENS AG
Noor Energy 1
NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE
MAINTENANCE BOOK
Document n° 19.075.SIE.200
With reference to:

- Order n. E09-3010523162
Page
Title sheet 1
Index 1
Maintenance book 2
0 28/11/2019 First Issue Gelio A. Tommasi L. Brunelli M.

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION WRITTEN CHECKED APPROVED
19075-200-OMM-0.doc Page 1
ISOP 17.08 REV.01
CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI SPA
1.1 MANUALS
1.1.1 CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI

1.1.1.1 Medium Voltage switchboard LINE and/or NEUTRAL panels, protection degree up
to IP55 “CE-LS” series - english language
19075-200-OMM-0.doc Page 2
ISOP 17.08 REV.01
1.1 MANUALS
19075-200-OMM-0.doc Page 3
ISOP 17.08 REV.01
Medium Voltage switchboard
LINE and/or NEUTRAL panels, protection
degree up to IP55
“CE-LS” series
Instruction for the installation, start up and

maintenance
2 28/09/2016 General uppdating Brunelli M. Casagrande C. Casagrande R.
Rev. Date Description Issued Inspected Approved
CE-LS-IUM-en Rev.02 28/09/2016 Pag. 1 di 32

CE-LS-IUM-en-Rev02.doc ISOP 17.08
INDEX page
Figures index.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES & WARNINGS ........................................................................................ 4
1.1 Safety notations........................................................................................................................................ 4
2 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Compliance with standards ...................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.3 Normal service conditions ....................................................................................................................... 7
2.4 Construction characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.1 General properties ................................................................................................................................. 7
2.4.2 Particulars.............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4.3 MV cubicle Entrance/Exit ................................................................................................................... 11
3 RECEIPT, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE ................................................................................... 15
3.1 Receipt ................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 Lifting .................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Warehouse storage ................................................................................................................................. 17
4 INSTALLATION......................................................................................................................................... 18
4.1 Positioning ............................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1.1 Laying........................................................................................................................................... 18
4.1.2 Foundations .................................................................................................................................. 18
4.2 Electrical connections ............................................................................................................................ 19
4.2.1 Connection of the main circuits.................................................................................................... 19
4.2.2 Auxiliary and secondary circuits connection................................................................................ 19
4.2.3 Grounding connections................................................................................................................. 19
5 STARTING UP ............................................................................................................................................ 22
5.1 Preliminary operations ........................................................................................................................... 22
5.1.1 Mechanical functioning verification............................................................................................. 22
5.1.2 Electrical functioning verification ................................................................................................ 22
5.2 Starting up operations ............................................................................................................................ 23
6 MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1 Inspection frequency.............................................................................................................................. 24
6.2 Maintenance operations ......................................................................................................................... 24
6.3 Maintenance recording........................................................................................................................... 24
6.4 Resumption of operations ...................................................................................................................... 24
6.5 End of life of product ............................................................................................................................. 25
7 INTERNAL FAULT: CAUSES, PREVENTION and SAFETY ................................................................. 26
7.1 Measures taken in cubicle construction ................................................................................................. 26
7.2 Locations, fault causes and example of measures decreasing the probability of internal
fault or reducing the risk .................................................................................................................................. 26
8 SPECIAL TOOLS (if present) ..................................................................................................................... 28
8.1 Short Circuit Bar .................................................................................................................................... 28
8.2 Flexible earthing device ......................................................................................................................... 28
9 EXAMPLE OF COSTRUCTIVE SOLUTIONS.......................................................................................... 29
10 ANNEX........................................................................................................................................................ 31

Figures index
Figure 1: example with outdoor roof, base support, LV internal cubicle ---------------------------------------------------- 7
Figure 2: example with indoor roof, LV external cubicle ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Figure 3: LV cubicle, some internal view (on the left with ballast resistors) ------------------------------------------------ 9
Figure 4: LV cubicle installed on the external side of the panel --------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 5: LV cubicle for heaters terminals on the external side of the panel----------------------------------------------- 9
Figure 6: LV cubicle internal to the panel structure----------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 7: insulation plate installed in the cubicle---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Figure 8: flexible joints connection and coupling flange------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 9: fixed connection with elliptical holes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Figure 10: MV cubicle prepared for cable entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 11: coupling flange detail -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Figure 12: Line side cubicles realised for ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Figure 13: Line side cubicle realised for bus bar exit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Figure 14: Neutral point treatment solutions. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14
Figure 15: lifting by truck---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15
Figure 16: lifting using hoisting equipment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16
Figure 17: lifting by crane from bottom (EXAMPLE) and lifting tool detail -------------------------------------------------16
Figure 18: example grounding pad--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20
Figure 19: example equipment grounding -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21
Figure 20: front (on the left) and rear (on the right) view-----------------------------------------------------------------------29
Figure 21: example of internal arrangements-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------30

1 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES & WARNINGS
This manual aims to provide all the necessary information in order to correctly carry out the
following operations:
 Handling
 Installation
 Operation
 Maintenance
Equipment operation depends on proper handling, installation, and maintenance.

Neglecting fundamental requirements may lead to injury of personnel, failure of the equipment
and property damage.
Safety as described in this instruction book involves two conditions:

• Personal injury.
• Product or property damage
1.1 Safety notations
Safety notations alert personnel to possible death, injury or property damage situations.
The safety notations appear before the step in which the condition applies.
The one safety notice and three hazard levels notations are:
DANGER
“Danger” indicates a hazardous situation that has a high probability of death, severe injury, and
substantial property damage.
WARNING
“Warning” indicates a hazardous situation that has some probability of severe injury and
substantial property damage.
CAUTION
“Caution” indicates a hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate injury and/or
property damage.
NOTE: “NOTICE” indicates a statement of company policy as it relates to the safety of personnel
or protection of property.
Personnel installing, operating, or maintaining this equipment must have through knowledge of all
applicable local, regional, industry, government, and OSHA safety procedures as well as
commonly accepted safe working practices. Personnel working in or around this equipment must
also exhibit common sense and good judgment regarding the potential hazards for themselves
and other personnel in the area. These instructions are intended for use by fully qualified
personnel and are not a substitute for adequate training, experience and supervision.

In the event of any queries or regarding operations not described here below, consult our office.
CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI S.P.A. declines any responsibility in the event of
failure to comply with these instructions or in the event of operations not indicated in the manual.
For any clarification, further information or spares, contact our office at the following address,
always citing the registration number of the device concerned.
CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI S.p.A.

Via Rossini, 24
37060 - CASTEL D'AZZANO (VR)
tel. +39 045 8546511
fax. +39 045 8520214
e.mail info@casagrande.vr.it
NOTE: Please refer to the relative instruction booklets for devices not produced by us mounted
on this switchboard.

2 DESCRIPTION
The "CE-CSLIP55" series has been designed for use in power plants, in production plants and
transformer stations, up to 17.5kV, for neutral grounding of alternators and transformers and for
the line connection of alternators.
The structure design of this kind of cubicle, if an high protection degree is requested, can be
particularly suitable for outdoor installation.
The cubicles are used for the protection of alternators against earth faults (neutral point treatment) and/or for
supplying energy to the grid (line side cubicle).
For different machinery powers and network electrical lay out, many solutions are available for
neutral earthing:
 grounding resistor with stainless steel sheet "grids" elements
 neutral grounding transformer with on the secondary side a ballast resistor
 stator earth fault detection by means of CT or VT
 Center star isolated from the earth
In the line side & neutral side cubicle CT’s and VT’s could be installed for measuring or protection.
They are normally built without internal separation between the components, also if some
segregation can be realised on request.
See the relative drawings “General Arrangement” and “Electrical drawing” for more details.
2.1 Compliance with standards
The " CE-CSLIP55" series complies with the principal Italian and International standards and to the
following in particular:
 CEI 17-6 Italian standard pamphlet 2058
 IEC 298 International standard
 IEC 62271-200 International standard
 DPR 547/55 italian law
For the compliance to others standards (ANSI, IEEE, etc.) contact our technical office.
The acceptance tests are performed in our test premises.
2.2 Electrical characteristics
Rated voltage kV Up to17.5
Insulation level:
impulse withstand voltage kV Up to 95
test voltage 50 Hz 1 min. kV Up to 38
Rated current A 500÷7000
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Short circuit withstand capacity kA Up to 50

2.3 Normal service conditions
Maximum temperature °C(°F) +45 (+113)
Minimum temperature °C(°F) -15 (+5)
Optimal range temperature °C(°F) +40  -5 (+104 ÷ +23)
Height m(ft)  1000 ( 3280)
Maximum relative humidity % 95
For other conditions please contact our office.
2.4 Construction characteristics
2.4.1 General properties

1 The switchboards of the type in subject can be built with a degree of protection up to IP55 for
metal enclosure and IPXX for the internal part of the cubicle.
The structure is built with much attention to those particular requirements in order to guarantee
an high protection against external environmental factors (rain, etc). See figure 1 and 2 for
details and examples.
(76.77÷98.42[in])
(7.78[in]) (39.37[in])
(7.78[in]) (7.78[in])
(39.37÷157[in]) (55.1[in])
Figure 1: example with outdoor roof, base support, LV internal cubicle

2 The external surfaces are covered with removable panels, bolted to the structure with or
without handles, made in such a way to prevent ingress of water.
3 The roof could be made, essentially, in two ways, according to the final position of the panel: if
outdoor (see figure 1), it has a little slope, a larger projection all around and could be
removable for transport to site; when it is for indoor use (see figure 2), it is plane and normally
fixed.
4 The lay-out of this series is completely modular, thanks to a load bearing structure made with
galvanized steel profile, which length could be increased with 25mm(1[in]) step to step, bolted
together and covered with welded steel sheets; on request the structure could be entirety
welded.
This allows to obtain a big range of dimensions, in order to be adapted to many type of generators
and situations, the internal layout is studied for every cubicle in detail for the equipment to be
mounted.
The figure 1 and 2 shown some of the constructive possibility, with internal/external Low Voltage
cubicle, plane/slope roof, cable/bars Line exit, etc. Some of these particulars will be described
later.
(7.78[in])
Figure 2: example with indoor roof, LV external cubicle

5 The individual structures are made of die-bended sheet steel elements of no less than 2
mm thickness. They are normally painted following Casagrande’s standard for outdoor
panels or, on request, following customer’s specification; the standard procedure is:
a) Blasting of the surfaces
b) Cleaning (1 or 2 steps)
c) Coating (electrostatic painting) min 70µm(2.76x10¯³[in])
On request, it is possible to paint the panels following customer’s specification; see project
documentation for details.

6 The metal nuts and bolts are galvanized and passivated with minimum film thickness of 12
microns.
7 Particular attention has been given to the objective of ensuring the greatest possible safety to
the operators, thanks to the use of lockable doors or removable panels, built in the way
already described.
2.4.2 Particulars
1 The terminal blocks of the internal components (CT, VT, NGR, Heaters) are accessible in total
safety, even with the bars under voltage thanks to their position, in a metal box installed inside
the cubicle or on the outside of the cubicle (see figure 3 and 4).
Figure 3: LV cubicle, some internal view (on the left with ballast resistors)
Figure 4: LV cubicle installed on the external side of the panel
Figure 5: LV cubicle for heaters terminals on the external side of the panel

On request, the terminals of the internal equipment could be mounted in more boxes, as shown in
the figure 5 for the terminals of the heaters.
The LV cubicle can also be mounted inside the MV cubicle, separated from the MV
equipment with an aluminium sheet that create a separated box; see figure 6).
Figure 6: LV cubicle internal

to the panel structure
2 Eventual low voltage

accessories (internal lighting
fixtures, thermostat, terminal
boards, etc.) are metallically
partitioned from the medium
voltage circuits and are
accessible in maximum
protection against the risk of
fire.
3 The use of epoxy resin MV
insulators and other
insulating material of self
extinguish type, give a big
guarantee against fire dangers. The rubber coated cable is exclusively of anti-fire propagating
type (CEI 20-22). On request, LV cable for VT connection could be of type for short circuit
proof 1,8/3kV.
4 The voltage insulation level is guaranteed by using the required distance between the phases
and the earth and by using insulation material (GPO3, which up to 10kV/mm) in places where
the distance is not sufficient (see figure 7).
Figure 7: insulation plate installed in the cubicle

2.4.3 MV cubicle Entrance/Exit

1 The MV cubicle Entrance is normally realised with bus bars contained in a coupling flange built
following customer's various standards. If required, the connection between generator terminals
and cubicle bars is realised by flexible joints (see figure 8), in order to avoid vibrations during
generator operation and to allow an easy connection on site; on the counter part connection
holes of elliptical forms are provided (see figure 9).
Figure 8: flexible joints connection and coupling flange
Figure 9: fixed connection with elliptical holes
MV Entrance can be realised also by cables; in this case they pass through an opening in the rear
or bottom side of the cubicle, with holes and cable glands for cable entry, requested. The exit
plate can be done in non magnetic material or insulating (see figure 10 as example).
In some application, the entering is done using a frame to weld on the generator and then bolted to
the cubicle structure (see figure 11).

Figure 10: MV cubicle prepared for cable entry
Figure 11: coupling flange detail

2 MV cubicle Exit: also the exit of LINE side

cubicle, could be made from the bottom, top or
the front side by cables (figure 12), or by bus
duct (figure 13). In any case, are provided
drilled gland plates to close the output in
compliance with the selected cables.
Figure 12: Line side cubicles realised for

cables exit
3 MV Neutral point: the earthing of the neutral of

the generator, could be made in a lot of ways,
depending of the customer’s configuration;
there could be a NGT with a NGR at the
secondary, or with a MV NGR; see project
document for details.
The number and type of CT’s depend on the generator configuration, such as the decision to put
line side compartment and neutral side compartment in the same cubicle or to split them (see in
figure 14 for the two solutions for neutral treatment); see the relative drawings for details.

Figure 13: Line side cubicle realised for bus bar exit
Figure 14: Neutral point treatment solutions.

3 RECEIPT, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
3.1 Receipt
On receipt check the conditions of the cubicle, check that the packing is not damaged and check if
the name plate details correspond with those specified in the order confirmation.
Check that the LINE / NEUTRAL side cubicles are supplied with all the accessories specified in
the order confirmation.
Contact our offices in the event of queries.
3.2 Lifting
This kind of cubicles could be lifted in 3 ways:

 by means of a lift truck (if it is mounted on wooden pallets – see figure 15)
 from above using suitable hoisting equipment, the lifting hooks of which are to be attached
only to the eyebolts on the cubicle (figure 16); if foreseen remove the particular tools for lifting
on site, replacing them with the bolts and plastic washer supplied with the panel.
 from bottom using suitable hoisting equipment, the hooks of which are to be attached only to
the lateral lift ring on the switchboard.
A particular crane must be used, able to lift the panel through no°4 chain, one for each lift ring,
that must be quite vertical from the bottom of the panel to the crane connection: see figure 15
and 16 for more detail. The lateral lift ring (figure 17), usually, arrive on site bolted in their
position or are placed in a box inside the panel.
Figure 15: lifting by truck
SUGGESTION:
1) To lift the cubicles, in order to avoid to ruin the steel surface and roof of the cubicles, is better to
use polyester lifting cord, instead of steel chain.
2) When the panels arrive on site closed in a wood case for marine transport, the case is normally
foreseen for lift by the same type of crane just described; take the case from the bottom,
positioning the chain in the predisposed places.
CAUTION
We advise against, making the compartments slide on rollers as it could cause damage to bases of
the same

(39.37[in])
(31.49[in]) (31.49[in])
(62.99[in])
(2.95[in])
(76.77÷98.42[in])
(88.58[in])
(86.61[in])
Figure 16: lifting using hoisting equipment
Figure 17: lifting by crane from bottom (EXAMPLE) and lifting tool detail
(15.75÷23.62[in])

3.3 Warehouse storage
If they are not to be installed

immediately, store the
compartments in an area that is
protected against the elements, in
atmospheric conditions which are
not excessively damp, and which
are non-corrosive.
Particularly against
condensation, if necessary,
heat the room or connect the
cubicle heaters.
It is advisable not to remove the
plastic covering for the dispatch of
loose compartments.
If required, the panel can be
packed with marine packaging, to
avoid environmental problems
during storage and transportation.
The accessories, like bus duct, connection flange, basements etc. are packed separately in
a smaller case.

4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Positioning
4.1.1 Laying
 The floor on which the board is to be positioned must be levelled to guarantee the best
possible assembly. If the floor is not well levelled serious operational problems may occur.
 After the positioning of the board, it should be secured, and if necessary, fixed together with
the adjacent cubicles.
 After the correct positioning, connect the panel to the generator/bus duct (IF PRESENT):
1. remove lateral or front panels of the cubicle in order to permit internal operation
2. put supplied gasket on the connection flange
3. bolt the flange with generator/bus duct
4. connect the bus bar to generator lead or bus duct using supplied bolts; normally the
flexible joints are not supplied.
 The premises must guarantee adequate air circulation, it is also preferable that the room has
windows and is not completely closed.
 It is necessary to make sure that the door openings are not obstructed.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IN THE COUPLING POINT USE THE SUPPLIED GASKET AND/OR RAIN PREVENT SYSTEM: INSTALL
IT VERY CAREFULLY IN ORDER TO GUARANTEE THE DECLARED PROTECTION DEGREE.
4.1.2 Foundations
This kind of cubicles are carefully constructed on metal base frame.
For the drilling of the floor slab for the fixture of the power cables and auxiliary cables, refer to the
foundation drawing that is normally sent with the switchboard documentation.
The floor to which the board is to be fixed must have a plane maximum tolerance of 0,3%, both in
a longitudinal and vertical direction.
There are two systems for panel fixing to the floor:
1. Using expansion anchor bolts for heavy loads.
2. Using chemical anchor bolts: drill the hole, insert the chemical glue and then insert and fix
the threaded bar.
For both the cases, the anchors are usually supplied with the panel.
In the event of the use of expansion rods, it is necessary to align the rods so that they correspond
to the foundation drawings, levelling them so as to obtain a plane tolerance of a maximum of 0,3%
and then block them with rapid cement. The flooring is then to be completed in such a way that
there is projection of 1-2 mm in relation to the floor plane.
In the event of fastening without base rods, the line side & neutral side cubicles, after the
preparation of the floor for the expansion blocks, should be fixed starting from the center.
Sometimes, these cubicles are provided with a support base frame, with or without anti vibration
feet, made of galvanized iron steel; prepare this foundation before to put on the panel and drill it on
the base (see relative drawings for details).
NOTE: If the floor is not well levelled serious operational problems may occur.

4.2 Electrical connections
DANGER
Before making primary source connections, verify that the primary cables are de-energized
and the equipment is properly grounded
4.2.1 Connection of the main circuits

For the connection of the bus bar it is necessary to check that the connection surfaces are lean
and that you are applying the bolt driving torque in conformity with the regulations.
The contact surfaces must be carefully cleaned with a dry cloth and lubricated with a layer
vaseline. Should the silver plated surfaces be blackened as the result of the presence of sulphur
dioxide in the atmosphere, clean using alcohol or other similar solvent.
The above instructions are also valid for the external circuit connections.
Should the connection be made by cable, it is also necessary to check the MV cable shielded
earthing in accordance with the switchboard composition wiring diagram.
The application of anomalous mechanical stress to the terminals is to be avoided.
It is also necessary to make sure that the connection operation has not changed the electrical
distances prescribed by the IEC 71 regulations.
It is also advisable to make sure that there is no loss of isolation and control fluids.
Select the cable section according to the operating voltage and the estimated maximum short
circuit voltage of the installation, bearing in mind the dimensions of attachment points supplied in
the board.
The connection contact surfaces must be free of burs deformations caused by drilling or any
knocks received.
No pressure must be applied to the connection points.
4.2.2 Auxiliary and secondary circuits connection
The connection removed by the manufacturer for transportation reasons must be reintegrated in
accordance with the numbering and diagrams.
Connections with the external circuits must be undertaken carefully and in accordance with the
relative installation diagrams.
In particular the secondary current transformer circuits (CT) shall not show any open circuit
condition, while the secondary voltage transformer circuits (VT) shall not be short circuited, the
cable polarity is however to be maintained.
4.2.3 Grounding connections

The grounding bars separated for transportation purposes are to be reconnected and the main
grounding bar must be connected to the grounding system of the installation.
The device supports must be grounded in the area indicated by the manufacturer making sure all
the joints are well tightened and that electric continuity exists.
Grounding connection must also be assured for the devices in which this connection is required for
the function (i.e. CT, VT, resistors, disconnecting switch, etc.).
The same attention must be given in the resumption and setting up of grounding connections of
the auxiliary circuits.
The switch board includes, in the internal side, a copper Earthing bus bar (dimensioned for the
thermal stresses due to the short circuit current), for panel ground connection; on request is
possible the installation of specific grounding pad (normally 150x100x10mm(5.9x3.9x0.4[in])), for
ground connection of cables shields.
The earthing bars can be:

 rigidly connected to the panel basement and on the
left or right side of the basement, are foreseen two
grounding pads normally
50x50x20mm(1.9x1.9x0.7[in]) with a M12 hole, for
the grounding connection of the panel itself (see
photo here on right);
OR
 exit directly from the cubicle in order to give a
contact point to the customer earth system (see
figure 18 for example).
OR
 be only internal, with holes and bolts for fixing earth cables arriving from the site.
Figure 18: example grounding pad
Structure: all structural members are solidly fastened together by special screws ensuring a
good contact between the connected parts.
Doors: are connected to the frame by a 25mm2 (0.04[in²]) cross section copper braid.
Components:all main components such as CT, VT, etc., are positively earthed (see figure
19)
CAUTION
Ground the panel by means of conductors of dimensions in accordance with the current
regulations and using the ground circuit of the cubicle provided.

Figure 19: example equipment grounding

5 STARTING UP
5.1 Preliminary operations
All precautions should be taken to guarantee the safety of the personnel and the equipment, and in
accordance with the warning plates.
Before putting into operation it is necessary to check everything that has been mounted on the
premises, for example:
 check the correct tightening of the nuts and bolts
 check the correct connection of the medium and low voltage cables
 check the correct tightening of the screws of the terminal boards
 for each component (switches, fuses, protection relays, etc.) carry out the operations as indicated
in the relative instruction booklets
 inspect any sectioning contacts.
5.1.1 Mechanical functioning verification

Before putting into operation, it is advisable to repeat the checks indicated in the present instructions:
 Check the mechanical function and the interlocks.
 Check the mechanical function of the isolator switch and the relative interlocks (if required).
5.1.2 Electrical functioning verification
DANGER
Do not exceed the listed voltages for the voltage class of the equipment under test.
Disconnect the shunt connected coils such as potential transformers. Do not test sensors or
relays with high voltage. Disconnect all sensors and relays before applying voltage.
Insulation resistance test:

Perform measuring by means of Megger, between phases and to earth on both main and auxiliary
circuits to check the insulation resistance (Megger voltage: 2500V for main circuits and 500V for
secondary circuits).
The minimum values of resistance to earth may be the following: a few tens of MOhm for the main
circuits and a few MOhm for the secondary circuits.
Power frequency insulation test:

The repetition of this test is neither necessary nor recommended except in case of modifications on
the circuits. Should it be repeated than a voltage which is not exceeding 75% of the test voltage of the
new equipment shall be used, excluding the components that have allowable test levels lower than
those of the cubicle.
Operation test:
Perform tests on the secondary circuits to check the correct remote controlled operation of the
operating mechanism, indications, protections and of all other circuits connected to components
outside the cubicle.
Check the correct operation of the ventilators and heaters.

5.2 Starting up operations
After having completed the mechanical and electrical tests described in the previous paragraphs
make sure that all the protections removed during the installation of the switchboard are replaced.
WARNING
Before taking in operation of the cubicle, remember to place all the duplicates of the keys
necessary to operate the key interlocks in a place that is inaccessible to the operational
personnel.

6 MAINTENANCE
DANGER
There are hazards of electrical shocks and/or burns whenever working in or around
electrical equipment. Turn off power ahead of the switchgear before performing any
inspection or maintenance operations. Check incoming line terminals to verify that the
equipment is de-energized and grounded. Check out-going terminals to ensure that no
back-feed condition exists.
6.1 Inspection frequency
In order to avoid the risk of decline to dangerous levels of insulation, it is advisable to make a first
inspection after about 6 months from the starting up.
In order to establish the inspection frequency, it is necessary to take into consideration not only the
cubicle, but also the settings relating to the individual components.
6.2 Maintenance operations
Hereafter follows a list of the principal maintenance operations to be undertaken on the

switchboard and on the components:
 remove any dust and dirt, preferably using a vacuum cleaner;
 remove dust from the isolating parts using clean and dry cloths;
 carry out the maintenance operations on each component, in conditions of complete safety,
as indicated in the relative instructions;
 visually inspect the isolating single locks and the bar joints;
 remove dust from the air inlet/outlet vents with a dry brush;
 inspect the sectioning contacts, removing any traces of blackening on the silver polished
surfaces for currents of 1,000 A, using alcohol and once again protect the surfaces with a
thin layer of grease for electrical contacts (type: MOLIDAL EL5);
 check the function of the locks and interlocks;
 check the function of the space heaters and the calibration of the thermostats, ensuring that
these have been in operation for at least four hours;
 check the insulation resistance.
6.3 Maintenance recording
The results of the verifications and of any measure shall be nicely recorded on a register that can
be use to define the frequency of the inspections. The same register could be important to attract
the attention on some part of the plant asking for a more precise vigilance.
The measures taken with the Megger can offer a precise situation about an eventual reduction of
insulation.
6.4 Resumption of operations
After the maintenance operations replace all the mechanical and electrical protective elements and
carry out all the operations necessary to start up the cubicle.

6.5 End of life of product
This products are manufactured to meet or exceed the standards of compliance for quality and
environmental management systems in accordance with ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. All of these
items can be supplied with a certificate of quality.
Methods of disposal
Disposal can be carried out in a manner of ways depending upon material of product. Below is the
recommended method of disposal for various raw materials.
The duty of Casagrande Elettrocostruzioni is to facilitate subsequent recycling or disposal at the end
of product life. During disposal of the product, it is always necessary to act in accordance with local
legal requirements in force.
Raw material Recommended method of disposal
Metal material (Fe, Cu, Al, Ag, Zn, W, ect.) Separation and recycling
Thermoplasts Recycling or disposal

Separation of metal and disposal of
Epoxy resin
remains
Rubber Disposal
Oil (transformer oil) Draining and recycling or proper disposal

Discharging from equipment and recycling
SF6 gas
or proper disposal
Packing material Recycling or disposal

7 INTERNAL FAULT: CAUSES, PREVENTION and SAFETY
Failure within the enclosure of metal-enclosed cubicle or switchgear as those object of this
manual, due either to a defect or an exceptional service condition or bad operation, may
initiate an internal arc.
The cubicle supplied is built following the prescription of the main electrical applicable
standard (see chapter “Compliance with standards“), and include many design and
constructive detail to avoid more possible this event.
So, there is little probability of such an event occurring, but it cannot be completely
disregarded, especially after many years of functioning, often with little preventive
maintenance done on it.
Below are listed the most important constructive points considered together with some
location, arc fault causes and counter measures to use on site and during switchboard life in
order to decrease the probability of internal arcs.
7.1 Measures taken in cubicle construction
The most important are the following.

 The structure of the cubicle is builded with such material and thickness to reduce more
possible at the mechanical and thermal stress during an overpressure explosion due to
an internal arc fault;
 The cubicle is built considering adequate dimensions and internal air volume;
 High protection degree in order to avoid moisture and dust entering in the cubicle;
 The distance between phases and phases to earth are normally bigger than foreseen by
the applicable standard;
 Where applicable, are foreseen interlocks between switches and mechanical
components;
 Choosing of qualified and high efficiency components and equipments;
 Pressure relief device are installed on the top or the rear side of the panels (see
drawings for more details), in order to allow the exit of internal over pressure due to an
arc with relative gaseous and vaporous hot substance.
 Anti ferro resonance resistor realised on the Voltage transformer circuit in order to avoid
this electrical influences.
7.2 Locations, fault causes and example of measures decreasing the probability of
internal fault or reducing the risk
See table in next page, derived from IEC 62271-200, in which are shown the safety
measures to take care during installation, start up and maintenance of the cubicle.
In conclusion, important for people safety and cubicle good life and efficiency are the
following points:
 Correct installation on site before start-up (see relative chapter in the manual);
 Regular and well done maintenance (see relative chapter in the manual);
 not stay near the pressure relief device during cubicle functioning in front;
 access and operating on the cubicle only to skilled people.

Locations where
internal faults are Possibles causes of internal faults Example of measures
more likely to occur
Avoid of crossed cable connections.

Faulty installation
Checking of workmanship on site.
Cable boxes Checking of workmanship and/or dielectric test
Connection points on site (see manual in chapter "STARTING UP"
Failure of solid or liquid insulation
point " Electrical functioning verification").
Regular checking of liquid levels (if applicable)
Disconnectors;
Instructions to personnel about the In-service /
Switches; Bad operation
Out-service operation sequence.
Earthing switches
Regular programmed maintenance.

Circuit breakers Insufficient maintenance Instructions to personnel.
See manual in chapter "MAINTENANCE"
Use of corrosion inhibiting coating and/or
grease.
Corrosion Check of connections during normal
Bolted connections maintenance (see manual in chapter
and contacts "MAINTENANCE")
Checking of workmanship during installation on
Faulty assembly
site, use skilled people.
Limitation of access and operation on the

cubicle to skilled people. Use and respect of
the locks and interlocks foreseen.
Error by personnel Instruction to personnel.
Check internally the cubicle before energies,
attention to don't forget tools or what else
inside.
Regular programmed inspection of the

Ageing under electric stress
equipments status.
Al locations
Measures to ensure that the specified service
conditions are achieved.
If the cubicle is not installed immediately, store
them in an area that is protected against the
Pollution, moisture, dust inlet, vermin,
elements, in atmospheric conditions which are
etc.
not excessively damp, which are non corrosive
and without chemical agents.
Particularly against condensation, if necessary,
heat the room or feed the heaters installed.

8 SPECIAL TOOLS (if present)
On request, the cubicle is supplied with some tools to use for commissioning and/or maintenance
or only for access to the cubicle. See the list below which show the most common; for more detail
refer to the specific project documentation.
8.1 Short Circuit Bar
This tool is normally use during commissioning or

start – up in order to realise the Short Circuit Test.
In fact, to perform this test (carried out to plot the
short circuit saturation curve – excitation current
versus line current or to function test some
transformer and generator main and back up
protection functions), a short circuit must be laid
between the generator stator and the generator
circuit breaker / step-up transformer.
In order to realise easily this Short Circuit point,
we supply bars in copper of correct section to
install directly on line exit connection points.
The bar will be able to withstand the short circuit current for 1 sec and the rated current for ~1/2÷1
hour.
IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE BARS AFTER TEST AND BEFORE CONNECT THE LINE EXIT CABLES /
BUS DUCT.
8.2 Flexible earthing device
This tool is supplied on request, and must be used before

entering in the cubicle to ensure earth of the system for
people safety.
The tool is composed by ball stud
installed on phase and earth bar
+ flexible cable and handle stick
to fix the earth cable on the balls.
See product instruction for more
detail.
IMPORTANT: THE SYSTEM
SHOULD BE ALREADY DE-
ENERGISED AND EARTHED
BEFORE HANDLING THIS TOOL: IT
IS AN ADDITIONAL MEASURE TO
PREVENT PEOPLE SAFETY.
ONLY SKILLED AND INFORMED PEOPLE SHOULD DO THIS

OPERATION.
FOR MORE, REFER TO SAFETY RULES PRESENT IN THE PLANT / SITE.

9 EXAMPLE OF COSTRUCTIVE SOLUTIONS
Figure 20: front (on the left) and rear (on the right) view

Figure 21: example of internal arrangements

10 ANNEX

Information schedule SCH019 rev.03 del 15/01/2014

BOLTS AND NUTS TIGHTENING
With reference to the position 5.1 of the Technical Instruction IT P 10, this schedule give an indication to
the operators about the recommended bolts and nuts tightening values during the switchboards assembly.
1) COLD GALVANISED STEEL BOLTS TIGHTENING – BASE TABLE
The values showns in the Table 1 (Base Table) are valid for Cold Galvanised steel bolts and nuts,
depending on the resistance category, for the coupling of steel components.
Table 1
Nominal Bolt Tightening torque MA (Nm) 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm

section Standard UNI EN 20898/1
NORMALE ALTA RESISTENZA
4.6 5.6 6.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 0,9 1,3 2,4 2,9 4,1 5
M5 1,9 2,5 4,9 5,8 8,2 9,8
M6 3,2 4,3 8,4 10 14,2 16,8
M8 8 10,7 20,3 24,4 34,6 40,7
M10 15,8 21,4 40,7 48,9 68,2 82,5
M12 27,5 36,6 71,3 84,6 119,2 142,7
M14 43,8 59,1 113,1 134,5 188,5 224,2
M16 67,2 89,7 173,2 203,8 290,5 346,5
M18 92,7 123,3 239,5 280,3 397,5 479,1
M20 130,4 174,3 336,3 397,5 560,6 672,7
2) COPPER BARS WITH COLD GALVANISED STEEL BOLTS TIGHTENING

The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of Copper bars, with Cold galvanised steel bolts, must
be reduced of 15% with reference to the Resistance category 8,8: see Table 2.
Table 2
Nominal Tightening torque
Bolt MA (Nm) 1 Kgm =
section
9.81 Nm
M4 2,4
M5 4,9
M6 8,4
M8 20,6
M10 41,3
M12 71,4
M14 113,5
M16 172,0
M18 236,6
M20 335,5
Page 1/4
3) COPPER BARS WITH STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS TIGHTENING

The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of Copper bars, with Stainless steel bolts, must be
reduced of 25% with reference to the Table 1 Resistance category 8,8; the same values must be applied
for the threated connection elements used in the cubicle assembling and for the MV support insulator
fixing: see Table 3.
Table 3
Nominal Bolt Tightening torque MA (Nm) 1

section Kgm = 9.81 Nm
M4 2,1
M5 4,3
M6 7,4
M8 18,1
M10 36,2
M12 62,6
M14 99,5
M16 150,8
M18 207,4
M20 294,2
4) ALUMINIUM BARS WITH STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS TIGHTENING

The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of Aluminium bars, with Stainless steel bolts, must be
reduced of 45% with reference to the Table 1 Resistance category 8,8: see Table 4.
Furthermore, for this last kind of bars, these value must be considered together with plate washer of big
diameter (type UNI 6593), or with plastic washer (type DIN 2093), which allow a more uniform
distribution of the connection pressure; the bolts are self locked type.
Table 4
Nominal Bolt Tightening torque MA (Nm) 1

section Kgm = 9.81 Nm
M4 1,6
M5 3,1
M6 5,4
M8 13,2
M10 26,4
M12 45,7
M14 72,6
M16 110,1
M18 151,4
M20 214,7
Page 2/4
5) ALUMINIUM BARS WITH COLD GALVANISED STEEL BOLTS TIGHTENING

The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of Aluminium bars, with Cold galvanised steel bolts
8.8, must be reduced of 35% with reference to the Table 1 Resistance category 8,8: see Table 5.
Furthermore, for this last kind of bars, these value must be considered together with plate washer of big
diameter (type UNI 6593), or with plastic washer (type DIN 2093), which allow a more uniform
distribution of the connection pressure.
Table 5
Nominal
Bolt
Tightening torque MA
section (Nm) 1 Kgm = 9.81 Nm
M6 6,5
M8 15,9
M10 31,8
M12 55
M14 87,4
M16 132,5
M18 182,2
M20 258,4
6) COPPER BARS WITH STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND KALEI TYPE NUTS TIGHTENING
The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of Copper bars, with stainless steel bolts and KALEI
type nuts: see Table 6.
Table 6
Nominal Bolt Tightening torque MA (Nm) 1 Kgm =

section 9.81 Nm
M8 19,1
M10 21,8
M12 55,3
7) STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND COPPER BLOCKS TIGHTENING

The tightening torque for the fixing and connection of stainless steel bolts and copper blocks based on
MORSA – eni drawing: see Table 7.
Table 7
Nominal Bolt Tightening torque MA (Nm) 1 Kgm =

section 9.81 Nm
M8 20,3
Page 3/4
Tightening torque tolerance ± 10%
(Table are derived from the technical characteristic of the bolts and nuts used, considering the attrition
coefficient of the material coupled)
15/01/2014 Quality Assurance
Page 4/4
Casagrande Elettrocostruzioni SpA

Via Rossini, 24
37060 Castel d’Azzano Verona – Italy
Tel. ++39/045 8546511
Fax ++39/045 8520214
E-mail: info@casagrande.vr.it
Web site: www.casagrande.vr.it
P. IVA e C.F. IT 00663680239

ISOP 07.20 REV.01-EN-DE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A EXTERNAL FRONT VIEW EXTERNAL LEFT A

VIEW FROM TE SIDE VIEW COLOUR OF SWITCHBOARD
COLORE CARPENTERIA / COLOR DE L'ARMOIRE
2925 2384 SMOOTH
INSIDE LISCIO/LISSE
RAL 9011
2825 2000 INTERNO/INTERIEUR PEELED
BUCCIATO/PELÉ
DIESE ZEICHNUNG IST EIGENSCHAFT VON CASAGRANDE ELETTR. S.p.A. UND OHNE ERMÄCHTIGUNG KANN NICHT ZU DRITTEM PERSON REPRODUZIERT WERDEN / FREIGEGEBEN WERDEN
715 1285
SMOOTH
N.A
OUTSIDE LISCIO/LISSE
ESTERNO/EXTERIEUR PEELED
BUCCIATO/PELÉ
N° 2 EXPANSION FLAP
SPACING (IEC or ANSI standard)
DISTANZE (norme IEC o ANSI) / ESPACEMENT (norme IEC ou ANSI)
B B
3
FRONT PHASE-PHASE (P-P):
> 220mm (IEC)
FASE-FASE (F-F):
2
1569
1500
PHASE-EARTH (P-E):
> 220mm (IEC)
FASE-TERRA (F-T):
FASE-TERRE (F-T):
TIGHTENING MOMENTS
1 (Nm)
COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO / COUPLE DE SERRAGE
1 Gasket
Al Bars (Inox) Al Bars (8.8) Cu Bars (Inox) Cu Bars (8.8) Steel (8.8) Insulator
C Size Al Sbarre (inox) Al Sbarre (8.8) Cu Sbarre (inox) Cu Sbarre (8.8) Lamiere (8.8) Isolatori C
Al Barre (inox) Al Barre (8.8) Cu Barre (inox) Cu Barre (8.8) Acier (8.8) Isolateur
M6 5,4 6,5 7,4 8,4 10,0 9,8
M8 13,2 15,9 18,1 20,6 24,4 19,6
20
21
M10 26,4 31,8 36,2 41,3 48,9 29,4
M12 45,7 55 62,6 71,4 84,6 39,2
3666
600 600 ~ 300

M14 72,6 87,4 99,5 113,5 134,5 N.A.
697,5 1412,5 1412,5 697,5 1050 1285 1700 M16 110,1 132,5 150,8 172,0 203,8 68,7
2110 2110 2985 M20 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 117,7
4220 4750 BOARD CHARACTERISTICS

CARATTERISTICHE DEL QUADRO / CARACTERISTIQUES GENERAL D'ARMOIRE
INSULATION LEVELS
D LIVELLI DI ISOLAMENTO 24/50/125kV D
NIVEAUX DE L'ISOLEMENT
2097
SERVICE VOLTAGE
TENSIONE DI SERVIZIO 18kV
TENSION DE SERVICE
RATED FREQUENCY
FREQUENZA NOMINALE 50Hz
FREQUENCE NOMINAL
GENERATOR COVER GENERATOR COVER
RATED CURRENT
CORRENTE NOMINALE 8694A
COURANT NOMINAL
RATED THERMAL SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT/TIME
CORRENTE TERMICA DI CORTO CIRCUITO/TEMPO 125kA/1s
E COURANT NOMINAL DE COURT CIRCUIT/DUREE E
RATED MOMENTARY PEAK CURRENT
GENERATOR AXIS GENERATOR AXIS CORRENTE MOMENTANEA DI PICCO 313kA
COURANT MOMENTANE' DE CRETE
PROTECTION DEGREE OUTSIDE/INSIDE (M.V.)
EXTERNAL REAR VIEW GRADO DI PROTEZIONE ESTERNO/INTERNO (M.T.) IP54 / IP00
VIEW FROM EE EXTERNAL AXONOMETRIC VIEW DEGRE DE LA PROTECTION EXTERIEUR/INTERIEUR (M.T.)
PROTECTION DEGREE OUTSIDE/INSIDE (L.V.)
LIFTING SYSTEM GRADO DI PROTEZIONE ESTERNO/INTERNO (B.T.) IP54 / IP20
DEGRE DE LA PROTECTION EXTERIEUR/INTERIEUR (B.T.)
SITE CONDITION OF INSTALLATION
CONDIZIONI INSTALLAZIONE INDOOR
CONDITIONS D'INSTALLATION
F SEISMIC LEVEL F
LIVELLO SISMICO 0,4g
NIVEAU SISMIQUE
APPROXIMATIVE SWITCHBOARD WEIGHT
PESO APPROSSIMATIVO DEL QUADRO 1050kg
C POIDS APPROXIMATIF DE L'ARMOIRE
NEUTRAL AND LINE CUBICLE APPROXIMATE BASEMENT WEIGHT
**MKA10GD010 N.A.
PESO APPROSSIMATIVO DEL BASAMENTO
POIDS APPROXIMATIF DU SOCLE
TOLERANCE
E1 ISOP 15.02 TOLLERANZE/TOLÉRANCE
G G
Toll. ang. ±30'

THIS DRAWING IS PROPERTY OF CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI S.p.A. AND WITHOUT AUTORISATION CAN'T BE REPRODUCED / RELEASED TO THIRD PARTES
DIMENSION <50mm 50÷200mm 200÷500mm 500÷1500mm 1500÷4500mm >4500mm

E DIMENSIONI
<2" 2"÷7 78" 7 78"÷19 58" 19 58"÷59 16
1 1
" 59 16 "÷177 18" >177 1/8"
Dimension
B General Tollerance
±0,5mm ±1mm ±2mm ±3mm ±5mm BY PROJECT
Tolleranze generali A PROGETTO
Général Tollerance ±0,019" ±0,039" ±0,079" ±0,118" ±0,197"
a progetto
ECCN: EAR99 AL: NO ECL: NO US-CONTENT: NO
H H
B 02.12.2019 DISARÓ M. DAL CORSO E. AS BUILT

BOLTED PANEL A A 16.07.2019 DISARÓ M. DAL CORSO E. FOR APPROVAL
INDEX DATUM NAME GEPRUEFT
DATE NAME CHECKED AENDERUNGSBESCHREIBUNG/DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
L.V. BOX ENTST.AUS/ORIG.OF GRUND/REASON
**MKA10GE010 **= +10 FOR UNIT 001
GENERATOR COVER N° 2 EXPANSION FLAPS **= +20 FOR UNIT 002
**= +30 FOR UNIT 003 Noor Energy 1 (PT1, PT2, PT3) - EG000425-EG000435-EG000436
FRONT SGen5-100A-2P 118-46 M07
BOLTED PANEL
DATUM NAME MAssSTAB UAS
CONSTRUCTION / ASSEMBLY WITH RIVETS SYSTEM DATE NAME SCALE
SPECIFICATIONS KUN 351.00 DOC. KEY
VENTILATION GRID GEZEICH. BENENNUNG/TITLE INHALTSKENNZEICHEN
PROFILE 100x20mm DRAWN 16.07.2019 C.E. CODE
WITH REMOVABLE FILTER
CARBON STEEL (NOT PAINTED) BEARB. NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE
I TO WELD ON GENERATOR G Ref. Description Material COORD.
I
GEPRUEFT OUTLINE DRAWING & S.L.D.
CHECKED
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754 **MKA10GD010
A INTERNAL STRUCTURE
THICKNESS 4m m
ABTLG.
DEPT. FORM. Z-SY. SPRA. ZEICHNUNGS-NUMMER/DRAWING NUMBER / KENNWERT/VALUE INDEX
GENERATOR AXIS
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754
A1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT PLATES
THICKNESS 4m m Siemens AG 33 DPPPG-70184084 B 00
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754 Power Generation PG
B EXTERNAL PANELS
THICKNESS 4m m S474 G1 S472 G2 GES.GEW. MF
IN KG
TOTAL WT.
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754
C ROOF
THICKNESS 4m m ISO128
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754

E EXTERNAL COVERING
L THICKNESS 4m m L
ALUMINUM TYPE 5754
E1 COVERING STIFFENERS B 02.12.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.
THICKNESS 4m m AS BUILT
A FOR APPROVAL 16.07.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.
PROFILE 100x20, CARBON STEEL
G BASE FRAME Item Modifications Description Date Drawing by Check by
(UNPAINTED) TO WELD ON GENERATOR
Änder. Beschreibung der Änderungen Datum Ausgeführt von Überprüft von
- External bolts ZINC PLATED CARBON STEEL

CUSTOMER
KUNDE SIEMENS AG
I
RT FI
STAINLESS STEEL AISI304 (A2) / CASAGRANDE
E
FILE NAME: 19075-001-CUTE-B.dft
- External rivets
D
ZINC PLATED CARBON STEEL ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI I Net
M
QU
S.p.A.
TE
LI
A
TY S Y S
- Bus bars bolts coupling STAINLESS STEEL AISI304 (A2) Via G. Rossini, 24 - 37060 CASTEL D'AZZANO VERONA - ITALY
UNI EN ISO 9001 CERTIFICATO 9115.CASL
M DETAIL A M
Drawing Nr.
- Bolts for the internal apparatous and supports ZINC PLATED CARBON STEEL PROJECT
PROJEKT Noor Energy 1 (PT1, PT2, PT3) Zeichnung Nr. 19.075.SIE.001
CUBICLE EARTHING CONNECTION - Internal structure (ref "A") stiffeners GALVANIZED CARBON STEEL TH. 3m m EG000425-EG000435-EG000436 Customer reference
DPPPG-70184084
OBJECT Kunden-Referenz
COPPER BAR 80x10 SILVER PLATED OBJEKT NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE Job Sheet
ON BOTH SIDE WITH M12 - Equipment support plates (ref "A1") stiffeners GALVANIZED CARBON STEEL TH. 3m m Projekt 19/075 Blatt 1
TITLE
TITEL OUTLINE DRAWING & S.L.D. Scale/Format
Maßstab/Format 1:20(A1) Follow
2
Fortsetzung
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EXTERNAL TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

2384 1700 2000 1050
GENERATOR COVER 2000 75 600 100 1150 75
A A
1285 715 GENERATOR COVER
697,5
697,5
N.10 O18mm
FOR PANEL FIXING
ON THE GENERATOR
SEE DETAIL B
75
B B
352,5
812,5
825
-U2
-T3.1L1
-T3.2L1
-T3.3L1
1060
600
600
C -V2
C
-T3.1L2
-T3.2L2
-T3.3L2
2825
4220
GENERATOR AXIS
4220
2825
2675
1025
2120
2825
FRONT FRONT
GENERATOR AXIS
600
600
-W2
-T3.1L3
-T3.2L3
1060
-T3.3L3
D D
825
812,5
352,5
75
697,5
697,5
CTs OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE
E E
1700 422,5 422,5

2985 1050 112,5 845 192,5
4750 2985
4750
WELDING FLANGE DETAIL

FIXING SYSTEM: N.10 BOLTS M12x20mm WITH WASHERS
F 4750 F
2000 1050
100 1800 100
GENERATOR COVER 762,5 845 192,5
550 100 1150
112,5 N.10 HOLES M12

FOR PANEL FIXING
ON THE GENERATOR
697,5
G G
75
100
252,5
800
-U2
H H
-V2
4220
2825
2625
2120
1025
2675
2825
GENERATOR AXIS
FRONT
25 -W2
I I
800
252,5
DETAIL B WELDING DETAIL

100
75
L L
a3 50(150)
100
a3 50(150) B AS BUILT 02.12.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.
697,5
INTERNAL
STRUCTURE A FOR APPROVAL 16.07.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.
20
Item Modifications Description Date Drawing by Check by
HOLES Ø18 Änder. Beschreibung der Änderungen Datum Ausgeführt von Überprüft von
PROFILE 100x20mm NOT PAINTED

WITH HOLES M12, TO
GENERATOR
COVER
CUSTOMER
KUNDE SIEMENS AG
20
75 600 100 1150 75 PROFILE 100x20mm

1
WELD ON THE GENERATOR I

RT FI
CASAGRANDE
E
CARBON STEEL (NOT PAINTED)
D
TO WELD ON GENERATOR
ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI I Net
M
QU
PROFILE 100x20mm S.p.A.
TE
LI
A
TY S Y S
NOT PAINTED, TO WELD Via G. Rossini, 24 - 37060 CASTEL D'AZZANO VERONA - ITALY
ON THE GENERATOR UNI EN ISO 9001 CERTIFICATO 9115.CASL
M 25 Drawing Nr.
M
GENERATOR COVER
75
GASKET THICK. 5mm
PRESSED TO ~ 1mm
PROJECT
EG000425-EG000435-EG000436 Customer reference
OBJECT Kunden-Referenz DPPPG-70184084
OBJEKT NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE Job Sheet
Projekt 19/075 Blatt 2
TITLE
3
Fortsetzung
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
BUS BARS
ON NEUTRAL SIDE
(IN SIEMENS' SUPPLY) INTERNAL REAR VIEW INTERNAL RIGHT SIDE VIEW
VIEW FROM EE
A A
2384
M.V. CABLE 2925
TO -T8 2000
2825
1285 715 M.V. CABLE
TO -T8
L.V. CABLES
WRAP 2 TURNS
-X8
BUS BARS
543
-T47.1 ON NEUTRAL SIDE
CTs OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE (IN SIEMENS' SUPPLY)
B -T47.2 B
OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE
-T8
-T3.1L3 -T3.1L2 -T3.1L1
1569
1500
-T3.2L3
-T3.3L3
-T3.2L2
-T3.3L2
-T3.2L1
-T3.3L1
FRONT
-T3.1L1,2,3
662
-T3.2L1,2,3
EARTH BAR
957
COPPER 80x10mm TO INTERNAL -T3.3L1,2,3

EARTH BAR -R8 EARTH BAR
COPPER 80x10mm
1 Gasket
316
-W2 -V2 -U2
C C
21
20
600 600 1700 1285 1050
697,5 1412,5 1412,5 2985
3075
2110 2110 4750
4220
2413
2097
GENERATOR COVER
D D
GENERATOR COVER
GENERATOR AXIS GENERATOR AXIS

E E
F F
G G
H H
I I
L L
B AS BUILT 02.12.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.


CUSTOMER
KUNDE SIEMENS AG
I
RT FI
CASAGRANDE
E
D
ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI I Net
M
QU
S.p.A.
TE
LI
A
TY S Y S
Via G. Rossini, 24 - 37060 CASTEL D'AZZANO VERONA - ITALY
M Drawing Nr.
M
PROJECT
TITLE
4
Fortsetzung
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LABELS LIST EQUIPMENT LIST

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
A A
SGen5-100A-2P 118-46 M07 POS. Q.TY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL DIMENSION BOTTOM WRITTEN FIXING REF. DESCRIPTION SUPPLIER Q.TY
NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE **MKA10GD010 271,05MVA
18kV ±5%
8694A
50Hz 1 1 STAINLESS STEEL 150x140 STAINLESS STEEL BLACK SCREWS OR RIVETS M.V. CURRENT TRANSFORMER (OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE)
-T3.1L1 Ratio 10000/1A
-T3.1L2 Burden S1-S2: 30VA cl.0,2Fs10 --- 3

-T3.1L3 Uins 24/50/125kV; Frq 50Hz; Ith 125kA/1sec; Idyn 313kA peak
18kV 50Hz 125kA/1sec 313kA peak 18kV 50Hz 125kA/1sec 313kA peak
U2,V2,W2 SG U1,V1,W1 CASAGRANDE ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI S.p.A. I E
SERIAL NUMBER: ---
~ 37060 CASTEL D'AZZANO VERONA - ITALY C

VIA ROSSINI 24 - TEL. +39 045/8546511 62271-200 M.V. CURRENT TRANSFORMER (OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE)
-T3.2L1 Ratio 10000/1A
-T3.2L2 Burden S1-S2: 10VA cl.5P40 --- 3
B -T3.2L3 Uins 24/50/125kV; Frq 50Hz; Ith 125kA/1sec; Idyn 313kA peak B
SERIAL NUMBER 19.075.*** SERIAL NUMBER: ---
P2 -T3.3L1,2,3
10000/1A
10VA cl.5P40 SERVICE VOLTAGE 18kV
M.V. CURRENT TRANSFORMER TYPE (OUT OF CASAGRANDE' SCOPE)
P1 3 -T3.3L1 Ratio 10000/1A
P2 -T3.2L1,2,3 RATED VOLTAGE 24kV -T3.3L2 Burden S1-S2: 10VA cl.5P40 --- 3
-T3.3L3 Uins 24/50/125kV; Frq 50Hz; Ith 125kA/1sec; Idyn 313kA peak
10000/1A
10VA cl.5P40
SERIAL NUMBER: ---
WITHSTAND VOLTAGE AT 50Hz/1min 50kV
P1 3
P2 -T3.1L1,2,3 IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE 125kV
NEUTRAL EARTHING TRANSFORMER
10000/1A RATIO 18000:sqr(3)/500V; Ptrans 104kVA/10sec.; 10A/10sec
30VA cl.0,2Fs10 RATED CURRENT 8694A -T8 OCREV 1
Uins 24/50/125kV; Frq 50Hz; Usat 18000:sqr(3)Vx1,4
P1 3 SERIAL NUMBER: 70892
RATED SHORT-TIME CURRENT/DURATION 125kA/1sec
C C
RATED FREQUENCY 50Hz
NEUTRAL EARTHING RESISTOR
R 2,4ohm ±10%; Userv 500V; Ig 208A/10sec. (No continuous current) 1
DC AUX CIRCUIT RATED VOLTAGE / -R8 MICROELETTRICA
Uins 0,72/3kV; Frq 50Hz
SCIENTIFICA
1 SERIAL NUMBER: 5131/19/0003
AC AUX CIRCUIT RATED VOLTAGE /
DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP54 L.V. CURRENT TRANSFORMER TYPE AOC55

Ratio 400/5A
-T47.1 Burden S1-S2: 15VA cl.1Fs5 FTM 1
CONSTRUCTION YEAR **** Uins 0,72/3kV; Frq 50Hz; Ith: 100xIn/1sec; Idyn: 250xIn peak
1 -X8 SERIAL NUMBER: 19325889
TYPE DESIGNATION CE-LS
LSC CATEGORY LSC1 L.V. CURRENT TRANSFORMER TYPE AOC55

D Ratio 400/5A D
-T8 -T47.2 Burden S1-S2: 15VA cl.1Fs5 FTM 1
18000:sqr(3)/500V IAC DESIGNATION / Uins 0,72/3kV; Frq 50Hz; Ith: 100xIn/1sec; Idyn: 250xIn peak
104kVA/10sec SERIAL NUMBER: 19325890
10A/10sec
1 uSAT:>1,4xUn INTERNAL ARC /
TERMINAL BOARDS TYPE ST 4 -

-X0 TERMINAL BOARDS TYPE ST 6 PHOENIX 5
P1 -X7N TERMINAL BOARDS TYPE STME6 32
-T47.1
400/5A
(200/5A used)
15VA cl.1Fs5 P2 1
wrap 2 turns
P1 NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE SCREWS
-T47.2 2 1 STAINLESS STEEL 200x80 STAINLESS STEEL BLACK **MKA10GE010 L.V. BOX 600x750x300mm TYPE EKO 607530 (MADE OF STAINLESS STEEL AISI304)
**MKA10GD010 OR RIVETS IRINOX 1
400/5A
(200/5A used)
E 15VA cl.1Fs5 P2 1
3 1
L.V. BOX
STAINLESS STEEL 150x40 STAINLESS STEEL BLACK
SCREWS E
wrap 2 turns **MKA10GE010 OR RIVETS
1
-R8
2,4ohm
208A/10sec
- FILTER FOR NATURAL VENTILATION 195x370x23mm TYPE VKPM 19537023/10S VEFIM 16
(No continuous current)
500V
10 1 **MKA10GE010-X0 PVC 35x8 WHITE BLACK STICKER
NOTE:
FOR THE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM SEE DRAWING N° DPPPG-70183529 11 1 **MKA10GE010-X7N PVC 35x8 WHITE BLACK STICKER
F F
9 SCREWS
ALUMINUM 140x120 YELLOW BLACK
120
OR RIVETS
L.V. BOXES DETAIL
18000V
40
SCREWS
9 STAINLESS STEEL 140x40 STAINLESS STEEL BLACK
OR RIVETS
**MKA10GE010 140
G G
600x750x300mm
SCALE 1:5
** = +10 FOR PT1 *** = 001 FOR PT1 **** = 2019 FOR PT1
600 ** = +20 FOR PT2 *** = 002 FOR PT2 **** = 2020 FOR PT2, PT3
** = +30 FOR PT3 *** = 003 FOR PT3
H H
-X0
I I
750
-X7N
L L
B AS BUILT 02.12.19 Disarò M. Dal Corso E.


> 50
CUSTOMER
KUNDE SIEMENS AG
REMOVABLE CABLE
I
GLAND PLATE CASAGRANDE RT FI
E
D
(UNDRILLED) ELETTROCOSTRUZIONI I Net
M
QU
S.p.A.
TE
LI
A
TY S Y S
Via G. Rossini, 24 - 37060 CASTEL D'AZZANO VERONA - ITALY
M Drawing Nr.
M
PROJECT
TITLE
/
Fortsetzung
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Turbogenerator
Description
Cooling System
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Cooling Elements
Turbogenerator Sterling: Water-Cooled Air-Cooled
Components and Purchased Parts Elements
Manufacturer: Sterling Thermal Technology Limited
Documentation Title: Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions for

Water-Cooled Air-Cooled Elements or Packages
No. of pages: 31 incl. Drawing

Siemens AG 4.1-4103-0003 /1 of 32
Doc No. IOM001
Operation and Maintenance Instructions Rev: 06
CACW Elements Date: Oct 2017
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions
For
CACW Elements
Doc No. IOM001
Contents
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................................... 3

1.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Pictograms Used in this Manual .................................................................................. 3
1.3 Documentation ............................................................................................................. 3
1.4 Important Notes ............................................................................................................ 4
2. DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 5
2.1 Product Information ..................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Product Use .................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Product Conformity ...................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Guarantee ..................................................................................................................... 6
3. SAFETY, STORAGE, INSPECTION AND HANDLING ............................ 7

3.1 Preservation and Shipping of Equipment.................................................................... 7
3.2 Receipt of Goods .......................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Loose Items .................................................................................................................. 7
3.4 Storage.......................................................................................................................... 7
3.5 Handling ........................................................................................................................ 8
3.6 Safety ............................................................................................................................ 8
4. INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... 10
4.1 Siting ........................................................................................................................... 10
4.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................. 10
4.3 Installation .................................................................................................................. 11
4.4 Tightening of Bolts ..................................................................................................... 11
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................... 12
5.1 Inspection Before Use ................................................................................................ 12
5.2 Filling and Venting...................................................................................................... 12
5.3 Re-tightening of Bolts ................................................................................................ 13
5.4 Testing and Commissioning ...................................................................................... 13
5.5 Inspection During Operation ...................................................................................... 14
5.6 Shut Down .................................................................................................................. 14
5.7 Gaskets ....................................................................................................................... 14
5.8 Standby Service.......................................................................................................... 15
Page 1
Doc No. IOM001
6. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 15
6.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 15
6.2 Maintenance Frequency ............................................................................................. 16
6.3 Inspection - Equipment .............................................................................................. 16
6.3 Inspection – Equipment Continued ........................................................................... 16
6.4 Inspection - Ducting / Gas Side.................................................................................. 16
6.5 Inspection – Pipework / Fluid Side ............................................................................ 17
6.6 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger – Liquid Side .............................................................. 17
6.7 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger – Air Side.................................................................... 17
6.8 Dissassembly of the Heat Exchanger ........................................................................ 17
6.9 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger............................................................................... 18
6.10 Straightening Fins ...................................................................................................... 18
6.11 Gasket Leaks .............................................................................................................. 18
6.12 Tube Leaks.................................................................................................................. 18
6.13 Corrosion .................................................................................................................... 18
6.14 Header Removal ......................................................................................................... 19
6.15 Header Reassembly.................................................................................................... 20
6.16 Pressure Test.............................................................................................................. 23
6.17 Vent and Drain Connections ...................................................................................... 24
7. FAULT FINDING ..................................................................................... 25
8. SPARES .................................................................................................. 26
8.1 Ordering Spare Parts.................................................................................................. 26
8.2 Recommended Spares ............................................................................................... 26
9. CUSTOMER SERVICE ........................................................................... 27

9.1 How to Contact Us ...................................................................................................... 27
9.2 Complaints Procedure................................................................................................ 27
10. OPTIONAL EXTRAS .............................................................................. 27

10.1 Leak Detection Package ............................................................................................. 27
10.2 Pressure Relief Package ............................................................................................ 27
Page 2
Doc No. IOM001
1. General Information
1.1 Overview
This manual supplies information and instructions for the correct and safe installation, use and
maintenance of the CACW Elements Heat Exchanger. It must be carefully read in conjunction
with the General Arrangement Drawing(s) for the equipment and fully understood prior to the
installation of the equipment. If questions still exist after reading this manual, you must contact
the manufacturer / supplier / contractor for more information.
Many accidents occur due to incorrect or inappropriate use of equipment, therefore the
instructions in this manual must always be fully understood and correctly carried out.
The equipment must not be put into use until all unclear issues have been
resolved
1.2 Pictograms Used in this Manual
Reference to important, useful or supplementary information regarding the use

of the equipment
Warning of a dangerous situation which could cause personal injury or damage

to the equipment
1.3 Documentation
The following documents will be sent to the originator of the order by STT:-
 General Arrangement Drawing(s), Certificate of Conformity, Certificate of Test, plus

Data Dossier if specified in the order.
 Other documentation as requested in the order to STT
 Invoice
The following will be delivered with the cooler:-
 These Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions

 Delivery note
The following documentation will be provided at no charge if it is requested at the time of order:-
 Pressure Equipment Directive Statement

 Instrument manufacturers documentation (where applicable)
Page 3
Doc No. IOM001
1.4 Important Notes
The following important notes must be taken into account when using the
equipment:-
 Do not pass air across the element unless the heat exchange medium is
circulating
 The warranty will be made void if the equipment is not maintained as detailed in
this manual.
 The equipment must be earthed if it is used in explosive areas.
 The ingress protection (IP) rating of the element will not be maintained unless
appropriate seals are installed as detailed in this manual.
 This manual must be read in conjunction with the drawing(s) for the equipment
 Read the label on the element and ensure that the equipment is suitable for the
required use before installation.
 Element fins are fragile and can be easily damaged; they must be handled with
care. If damage does occur to fins, the heat exchange properties of the element
may be affected.
 Damaged fins can be straightened with the use of a proprietary fin comb.
Page 4
Doc No. IOM001
2. Description
2.1 Product Information
Product: Heat Exchanger element with removable covers
Type: See information plate on heat exchanger, technical specification and

General Arrangement Drawings
Typical Assembly:
2.2 Product Use
CACW Elements heat exchangers are primarily used to exchange heat between a liquid and a
gas; the liquid flowing through the tubes and the gas passing across the finned surface. A
typical example is a motor or generator cooler where they are used to remove the excess heat
created by the motor or generator; in this instance, the hot air created flows over the finned
tubes and the heat contained within it is passed to the cooling water running through the tubes.
Although supplied “stand-alone” the CACW Elements heat exchangers are often built into
purpose made heat exchange enclosures.
The properties of the fluid flowing through the tubes may create erosion,
corrosion or internal fouling of the tubes necessitating a regular planned
cleaning strategy. A filter / strainer installed in the system pipework will greatly
lessen the chance of damage due to erosion.
Page 5
Doc No. IOM001
2.3 Product Conformity
The equipment conforms to the following:-
 EU Directives
 Machinery Directive
 Pressure Equipment Directive
 Hazardous Areas Usage
 CE Marking (if specified)

 IEC Specifications (if specified)
2.4 Guarantee
Sterling TT guarantees all products supplied by them to be sound and suitable for the given
specification for a period of 12 months after being put into operation or 12 months from delivery
(whichever is the sooner) unless covered by a separate agreement.
The guarantee will be voided if the equipment is not stored, handled, used and
maintained in accordance with the information given within this manual; if it is
utilised with an incorrect medium (i.e. not the design / specified medium); or
any adaptions / changes are made.
Page 6
Doc No. IOM001
3. Safety, Storage, Inspection and Handling

3.1 Preservation and Shipping of Equipment
Sterling TT drain all water cooler heat exchangers prior to despatch. However,
under normal circumstances some residual water may remain in the tubeside
areas due to the circuit configuration. Full drying can be executed where
requested as part of the contract requirements. If not specified additional steps
need to be taken where equipment is being packed for extended storage
and/or shipped through a range of climatic conditions. These steps may include
drying and/or evacuating followed by pressurisation with a dry gas. Please
refer to STT for advice on these long term preservation requirements.
Where silica gel is used to protect against moisture ingress it must not be
placed above or in direct contact with the finned area of the equipment.
Following any operation of the equipment (e.g. string tests) the water passages
must be drained before onward shipment. The extent to which further drying is
necessary will be dependent of time scales and shipping methods employed.
3.2 Receipt of Goods
On receipt of the equipment, inspect and check that the goods are undamaged.
It is important that any damage is noted on the delivery note which you will be
asked to sign. If any further damage or omissions are subsequently noticed
then you should advise STT immediately.
3.3 Loose Items
Some components, such as leak detectors, will be packaged separately. This

is generally for safety and to prevent damage. Any such items will be identified
on the delivery note. Please ensure they are present and undamaged. If
problems are found note them on the delivery note at the time of signing it.
3.4 Storage
 Where possible keep the equipment in the packing case in which it

was delivered until it is to be installed.
 Do not climb on heat exchangers.
 Keep all connection pipes, drains etc. covered and/or plugged to
protect them from the ingress of insects, vermin or foreign bodies.
 Coolers designed for an ‘indoor application’ must not be left outdoors
as they may not have the sealing, paint system, or general corrosion
resistance for such conditions.
 Finned surfaces must always be protected from the ingress of foreign
bodies.
 Relaxation of gaskets may occur during storage. The bolts/nuts of the
water box should be re-torqued to the final assembly figure when the
element is installed, starting at the centre and working towards the
corners (ref to para 4.4 & 6.15). This may also be required if the cooler
has been subjected to vibration or large temperature deviations during
transport to site. (See installation).
Page 7
Doc No. IOM001
 If the cooler elements have been stored for more than 1 year before
putting into service, they must be hydrostatically tested to the pressure
shown on the cooler nameplate and special attention should be given
to the gasketed joints. If a leakage is observed, then it is
recommended that the header bolts / nuts are re-torqued as indicated
above. (See “Tightening of Bolts” for details para 4.4 & 6.15).
 If the cooler element has been filled for thermal or other testing at any
stage, it must be fully drained and the connections covered and
plugged before being put into storage.
 If the cooler element has been subjected to occasional use or left
drained for extended periods the headers must be re-torqued as
above.
 The cooler element must be stored at a temperature above freezing
point and protected from mechanical contact. Where the possibility of
being below zero exists, it must be examined to ensure it is emptied of
water to the extent that only a few droplets may remain.
 The fins must be protected such that there is no risk of damage or
fouling to them.
3.5 Handling
The General Arrangement drawing(s) supplied before delivery contain

important information regarding the safe handling of the equipment, including:-
 Dry weight
 Position of lifting points
 Angle of chains to be used (if relevant)
 Size and thread of eyebolts (if required)
Personnel involved in handling the equipment must be suitably authorised,

trained and qualified and have access to and review the supplied General
Arrangement drawing(s) before handling. Lifted or handling must not be carried
out at temperatures below -29°C
3.6 Safety
Paint Finish
The equipment is painted to customer specification. Please refer to the paint

specification and obtain the correct material safety data sheets for the paint
prior to carrying out touching up or paint removal procedures especially in the
case of two pack epoxy paints.
Design Parameters
Do not operate the unit beyond the design conditions given on the identification
technical specification. If these parameters are exceeded, the equipment must
not be used without prior consultation with the manufacturer. Usage of the
equipment in a non-design situation will invalidate the warranty. In addition,
Sterling TT WILL NOT be held responsible for any material damage or
personal injury resulting from such use; this risk is solely the responsibility of
the equipment owner / user.
Page 8
Doc No. IOM001
Safety of Personnel
Physical injuries can be caused to personnel by the incorrect handling,

operating or maintenance of the equipment.
 Always use suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) for the task
being carried out. Safety glasses, gloves, boots and protective clothing
should be used as a minimum.
 Burns can be caused by touching the heat exchanger when it is in use.
 The element fins are sharp and can cut.
 The accidental release of a medium under pressure (especially steam
and medium or high temperature hot water) presents a risk of burns,
scalds and other injuries.
 Even after switching off the installation, the heat exchanger may remain
hot. A cool down period of at least 30 minutes should be allowed.
 Maintenance must only be carried out when the equipment is shut down.
Damage to the Equipment
Damage can be caused to the equipment by the following:-
 External forces
 Atmospheric and Chemical Corrosion
 Erosion
 Fatigue
 Steam or thermal shock
 Too high a pressure or temperature
 Impact load
 Freezing
 Incorrect transport / storage / lifting or handling
All of the above parameters must be taken into account when handling,
operating and maintaining the equipment.
Working at Height Regulations
If the heat exchanger is located above ground level, due attention must be paid
to the Working at Height Regulations when handling, operating or maintaining
the equipment.
Danger of Freezing
The heat exchanger must be drained down when not in use; the pipe contents
may freeze when exposed to low ambient conditions, leading to burst pipes
and deformation of the element
Legionnaires Disease
If the heat exchanger is used in a situation where stagnant water can form i.e.
with a drain pan and / or condensate removal system or for dehumidification
purposes, a Legionella Risk Assessment must be carried out. Appropriate
steps must be taken as dictated by legislation local to the installation; e.g the
Health and Safety Executive document HSE L8 “The control of legionella
bacteria water systems” and The CIBSE publication TM13:2013 “Minimising
the Risk of Legionnaires Disease” in the UK.
Page 9
Doc No. IOM001
Pressure System Safety Regulations
If the heat exchanger is used with a pressurised medium, the

recommendations given within the Pressure Systems Regulations 2000 must
be followed.
4. Installation
4.1 Siting
 Unless specifically designed otherwise, coolers must be fitted flat and

level
 Gaskets (supplied by others) must be fitted between the cooler and the
enclosure which ensures the specified ingress protection (IP) level for the
system is met.
 The gasket must be compliant enough to seal between the mating faces.
 All pipework attached to the heat exchanger must be supported so that
no load is applied via the connections either statically or dynamically (as
a result of thermal expansion or vibration).
 Flexible connections / couplings must be fitted wherever vibration
transfer may occur to or from pipework.
 It is recommended that pressure and temperature access fittings are
installed for the purpose of commissioning and checking the system
operating parameters
 If regular venting of the system is difficult or inconvenient then STT
recommend that automatic air release valves are fitted to the cooler and
other high points in the system.
 The torque on header bolts must be in accordance with Appendix 1 (note
that the return end header may be under a bolted cover box)
 Access must be provided for maintenance, withdrawal and cleaning of
the element.
4.2 Preparation
 It is expected that recirculating water supplies will be treated with one or

more of the following as appropriate to the actual site conditions:-
1. Corrosion inhibitors
2. PH regulators
3. Anti-freeze agent
 The user is responsible for ensuring that the circulated fluid is compatible
with the materials offered on the contract data sheet.
 All loose fittings supplied must be attached prior to installation.
 The installation must only be carried out by suitably qualified personnel.
 Remove all packaging and cover caps etc. prior to installation.
Page 10
Doc No. IOM001
4.3 Installation
 The instructions for transport and hoisting must be followed when placing
or moving the equipment,
 The weights given on the General Arrangement Drawing(s) are for
guidance purposes only.
 All pipes and flanges must not be mounted under stress to the equipment
 Pipes must be able to expand. Flexible connections, anchors and
expansion joints should be fitted to the pipes to suit the actual
installation.
 Bolt : nut connections must be clean and lightly oiled
 The correct gasket for the application must be installed
 Do not install the equipment at temperature below -29°C
4.4 Tightening of Bolts
The bolts for the removable covers must be tightened with a torque wrench in
the manner shown below. Standard bolting tensile is Steel grade 8.8 and
stainless steel grade 80. The figures given below are based on those materials.
Header Style Gasket Material Bolt Size Initial 2nd pass Final
Torque Torque
Grid & Cover 1.5 mm Klingersil C4106 M12 or ½” 45 60 80
Grid & Cover 1.5mm Klingersil C4106 M16 or 5/8” 50 80 100
Praxair Style 1.5mm Novus 34 M16 or 5/8” 50 80 100
Formed 3mm EPDM M12 or ½” 25 35 40
Fabricated 3mm EPDM M12 or ½” 25 35 40
Oil Coolers 3mm Nitrile M12 or ½” 25 35 40
Klingersil C4106 is a non-asbestos material consisting of premium quality cork and with a nitrile
binder and aramid fibre reinforcement, Compressibility ASTM F36A 20%-30%, Recovery 50%
Novus 34 is a blend of aramid / inorganic fibres and special additives, with a high quality nitrile
rubber binder, Compressibility ASTN F36 9%, Recovery ASTM F36 55%.
EPDM has 70-80 Shore hardness
NB. In a small number of instances grade A2-70 or grade A4-70 may be used for M12
bolting of headers. In these instances, a final torque value of 75Nm should be used for
Grid and Cover construction using C4106 Klingersil or Novus 34 gaskets.
Page 11
Doc No. IOM001
5. Operation
The installation must be inspected, operated, maintained and repaired only by

authorised and suitably trained personnel.
5.1 Inspection Before Use
The unit has been tested by Sterling TT in accordance with the test pressures
stamped on the type plate attached to the equipment.
 The element fins must be undamaged and straight to ensure the design
heat exchange takes place. If problems are found, use a fin comb to
remedy them.
 Burrs must be removed from element connections.
 The element must be flushed to remove all swarf and other foreign
bodies that may be present.
 The correct gasket for the application must be installed.
 The correct seals for the application must be used.
 The connected systems (fluid and gas) circuits much be checked to
ensure they are complete, suitable for the application and correctly
installed.
 The connected systems (fluid and gas) must be operating at the correct
temperature and pressure.
5.2 Filling and Venting
When first filling the heat exchanger with water ensure that:-
 the pumps are turned off

 the vent plug is open
 the drain plug is closed
 the flow and return valves are cracked open to allow slow filling.
(opening a pressurized supply when the block is full of air could
displace inter-pass gaskets)
 Turn on the pumps and allow water to circulate for 5-10 minutes
 Either stop pump or close supply valve and release the air vent plug to
release any air bubbles in the headers. (This may need to be repeated
on new installations until all trapped air escapes)
If a cold medium is present in the heat exchanger but is not circulating whilst a
hot medium is flowing through the heat exchanger, the cold medium may start
boiling and the heat exchanger will be damaged.
Page 12
Doc No. IOM001
5.3 Re-tightening of Bolts
The bolts on the gasket and the connecting flanges must be re-tightened to the
correct torque after the heat exchanger has cooled down for the first time (ref
to para 4.4 & 6.15).
5.4 Testing and Commissioning
Fluid Flow
It is important to set the water flow rate accurately as it is crucial to

performance to attain the optimal tube velocity. It is also important to avoid the
onset of destructive cavitation by ensuring that excessive velocities are
avoided. If in doubt contact STT for advice on maxima and minima for your
installation
STT recommends the installation of commissioning valves in the pipework

circuit to allow flows to be trimmed as necessary.
Fluid Temperature
Water temperature can generally be measured reliably with a probe inserted at

a self-seal test point (Binder or similar) or using fixed pocketed RTD’s.
Facilities for this are not supplied by STT unless specifically requested.
STT do not fit tappings for air temperature measurement unless specifically
requested. Where probes are inserted for the purpose of commissioning it is
important to ensure that they are positioned in the fully mixed airflow.
Vibration
STT heat exchangers are generally resistant to vibrations up to 20mm/sec and

every effort is made to avoid key frequencies at 50 Hz and 60 Hz. However it is
impossible to design a completely rigid cooler and still permit efficient heat
transfer.
If when commissioning, it is found that a particular forcing frequency is

affecting the cooler, it is important that you contact STT for advice on how to
deal with it.
Note that Coolers for machines with Diesel drives, particularly common bed
plate mounted are particularly affected. A special execution is available for
these cases.
Performance
When commissioning a cooler, it is important to compare the estimated duty on the

machine circuit with the extracted heat. A balance within 10% would indicate a
reasonable set of results.
Page 13
Doc No. IOM001
5.5 Inspection During Operation
Inspect the element itself and all connections for leakage during the first hour
of operation and at regular intervals thereafter.
5.6 Shut Down
To shut down for maintenance purposes:-
 Display appropriate warning notices.

 Ensure heat input has stopped
 Close element flow isolating valve.
 Allow water in element to cool to ambient temperature.
 Close element return double regulating valve.
Drain the element if it is to be shut down for a lengthy period of time to prevent
frost protection unless the fluid medium contains an anti-freeze solution.
Flush the element with clean filtered water if it is anticipated that corrosive
residues may be present. Chlorination may be appropriate if bio-fouling is a
risk.
Drain the element if it is to be shut down for over 48 hours to prevent corrosion.
5.7 Gaskets
If an element has been:-
 in long term storage

 has remained unused for 12 months from manufacture
 has been outside recommended storage temperatures
It is advisable to re-torque the header bolts (see block reassembling for details)
prior to being pressurised in service. All polymer gaskets are susceptible to
long term creep when under stress.
Page 14
Doc No. IOM001
5.8 Standby Service
Where coolers are on standby for long periods, it is essential that certain
actions are taken to ensure that they will perform correctly when called on.
Unless frost is anticipated, keep filled with water, even if the supply is isolated.
Note that in the case of seawater, the system must be protected from the
potential for marine growths. This may dictate alternative standby
arrangements.
6 monthly - Check for relaxation of gaskets and tighten as necessary

- Vent coolers to ensure no trapped air
- Follow actions as laid out in the Maintenance section.
6. Maintenance
6.1 General

Maintenance and cleaning must be carried out when the equipment is shut
down and is at ambient temperature.
Physical injuries can be caused to personnel by the incorrect handling,

operating or maintenance of the equipment.
 Always use suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) for the task
being carried out. Safety glasses, gloves, boots and protective clothing
should be used as a minimum.
 Burns can be caused by touching the heat exchanger when it is in use.
 The elements fins are sharp and can cut.
 The accidental release of a medium under pressure (especially steam
and medium or high temperature hot water) presents a risk of burns,
scalds and other injuries.
 Even after switching off the installation, the heat exchanger may remain
hot. The metal temperature should be checked before maintenance
activities commence.

Page 15
Doc No. IOM001
6.2 Maintenance Frequency
It is recommended that the equipment is maintained at least once every 8000

hours of operation or 12 months, whichever is the shorter period. This
frequency may need to be varied due to specific site conditions e.g. exposure
to salt water.
6.3 Inspection - Equipment
The following must be inspected at the maintenance frequency given above to

ensure the correct operation of the equipment:-
 Ensure fin surfaces are not damaged, dirty or blocked

 Ensure that there is no evidence of leakage from header gaskets
 Ensure there is no fluid leakage from the equipment / pipework
connections
 The primary and secondary medium temperate and pressure are within
the correct limits
6.3 Inspection – Equipment Continued
 Ensure condensate drains away adequately if applicable

 Check for fouling of the heat exchanger (this will give a drop in
capacity).
 Ensure there are no strange noises or vibration at the equipment.
 Check the general condition of the equipment and repair any damage
found
 Check for corrosion and carry out remedial work as necessary
 Ensure all safety devices function correctly
 Check the torque of all bolts and re-tighten accordingly
 Check that there is no evidence of leakage from the vent / drain fittings
 Check the leakage detector pipe where fitted to see that it is clear
 With the flow stopped, open the vent plug to release trapped air.
6.4 Inspection - Ducting / Gas Side

 that all external fasteners are tight

 that the ducting remains free from corrosion
 that there are no new resonances or vibration which might indicate
component failure
Page 16
Doc No. IOM001
6.5 Inspection – Pipework / Fluid Side

 Remove water supply pipe and through the connection flange,

examine visible surfaces for corrosion, erosion, scaling.
 If anodes are fitted, remove and check that they are in good condition,
replace as required.
6.6 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger – Liquid Side
A heat exchanger with straight tubes can be cleaned internally with a special
brush available directly from Sterling TT. The covers must be disassembled.
See “Header Removal”. After cleaning, the tubes must be thoroughly rinsed
with a clean medium.
6.7 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger – Air Side
Protect adjacent equipment or remove element to an area where that

equipment will not be adversely affected by cleaning operations. Blow the fins
clean using compressed air in the opposite direction to the normal airflow. Take
care that the fins do not deform. If further cleaning is deemed necessary, STT
recommend the use of a proprietary foaming coil cleaner (see internet for your
local vendor) and washed off with a low pressure hose using town water.
Finned surfaces must be dried using warm air before putting back into service.
Under no circumstances may a pressure washer or steam cleaner be

used as this is liable to drive the fouling into the centre of the matrix and / or
deform the fins with permanent adverse effect.
6.8 Dissassembly of the Heat Exchanger
Isolate the hot medium first, then once the heat exchanger has cooled to the
temperature of the cold medium, isolate the cold medium. Wait until the heat
exchanger is cool before progressing any further.
 Isolate the hot and cold media on to and off the heat exchanger
 Drain the liquid medium with the heat exchanger vent open
 Note the location of parts to be disassembled.
 Remove the liquid media flow and return connections and disassemble
the cover. The covers must be supported due to their weight.
During the disassembly process, it is possible that residual medium will seep
from the heat exchanger. Use a drip tray or similar to catch any drips or
leakage.
Page 17
Doc No. IOM001
6.9 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger
 Always use new gaskets – never re-used old ones

 Make sure gasket faces are clean and undamaged
 Apply the gaskets
 Assemble the cover taking note of any markings made during the
disassembly process and ensuring the bolts are tightened to the correct
torque.
6.10 Straightening Fins
Bent fins can be straightened by careful use of long nosed pliers and a fin
comb. Whilst sometimes unsightly, repaired fins do not adversely affect
performance.
Fouled fins need to be cleaned, which in most cases require removal of the
equipment from the ducting. In the first instance the fin leading and trailing
edges should be cleaned with a soft bristle brush, and compressed air.
6.11 Gasket Leaks
Gasket leaks may be sealed by re-torquing in line with the data in Appendix 1
If this fails to seal, then the cooler must be stripped and new gaskets fitted.
It is important to identify the type of gasket used and to replace with an
equivalent. (Contact STT for gasket availability or advice on alternatives)
6.12 Tube Leaks
Tube to tube plate leaks at commissioning are rare, but if found can usually be
sealed by reprocessing (expanding or welding). In service leaks can be sealed
by use of a taper plug (contact STT for details). Leaks can usually indicate the
end of the coolers useful life, although in the case of double tube coolers, it
may be possible to run in a fault condition until a service replacement is
available.
6.13 Corrosion
Ducting
Corrosion on the surface of ducting should be stopped as soon as seen by

application of a proprietary conversion paint followed by touching up with the
original paint system.
Tubes
Corrosion/erosion is most often found in the ‘vena-contracta’ area at the tube

entrance. This is often the result of excessive velocity which should be
corrected by controlling the water flow rates within the range specified on the
STT data sheet. If found early enough it may be possible to extend the life of
the tubes by installation of proprietary nylon sleeves.
Page 18
Doc No. IOM001
If it is impossible to sufficiently control water velocities, then consideration

should be given to replacing the heat exchanger with one employing velocity
tolerant materials such as titanium.
Fins
Corrosion on fins is detrimental to the efficiency of the heat exchanger. If

serious corrosion is encountered, the cause of such must be established and
advised to STT before replacing the cooler.
Tube Plates
Surface corrosion of ferrous tubeplates can be repaired by shot blasting locally

and treating with Zinga or a suitable epoxy paint. Corrosion in excess of 3mm
depth will require replacement of the cooler matrix.
Corrosion of non-ferrous tubeplates is usually indicative of excessive velocity,

poor water quality or anodic corrosion due to the component being the least
noble metal in system
Fixings
Fixings supplied may be plated or coated to resist corrosion. It is not

recommended to overcoat these with paint systems as such application may
inhibit the maintenance of the equipment and in particular the correct torqueing
of pressure bolts.
Tubes, Tubeplates and protective coatings can all be damage by particulates in

the water. Whenever coolers are used with non-recirculated water (ie River
water, Seawater, etc.) the filtration level should allow no particles larger than
250 microns.
6.14 Header Removal
Formed and fabricated headers:-
 Remove header to tubeplate fasteners leaving two at the top

loosely fastened.
 Support weight of header
 Gently prise header away from tubeplate
 Remove last two bolts and remove.
Grid and cover:-
 Remove two bolts from the bottom run of bolts and replace with two temporary studs
 Remove the rest of the fasteners
 Gently prise the cover plate away from the tubeplate and remove
 Note position and handing of grid for replacement.
 Remove grid
All:-
 Remove all traces of gasket from both the tubeplate and header faces with care to
prevent damage to the faces. A metal scraper can be used for this purpose if used with
care.
Page 19
Doc No. IOM001
 Note: On grid and cover plate header constructions the gasketed joints between
tubeplate and grid, as well as between grid and cover plate will require careful removal.
 Inspect the surfaces to be gasketed paying particular attention to surface scratches,
dents, and misalignments in machining or local undulations.
 If the gasket sealing surfaces are painted or otherwise coated, it is important that the
coating is flat, continuous and without cracks or flakes.
 If the surfaces are damaged then STT should be consulted to recommend a suitable
method of repair.
6.15 Header Reassembly
Formed and fabricated headers:-
 Lay a clean piece of paper larger than the grid on a flat surface and place the grid on it.
 Coat the gasket sealing surface with gasket dressing (Spraytack) by Industrial
Adhesives Ltd or equivalent.
 Apply a new gasket to the tacky surface
 Ensure that the gasket is firmly held at the pass baffle positions
Note some coolers with formed headers are fitted with self adhesive strip gaskets
 Apply 1 row of strip gasket just touching the inside of the border holes and overlapping
the strips slightly at the corners.
 The U-profile gasket should form a continuous flat upper face by butting sides. Do not
try to mitre or take it round bends.
 The U-channel gasket improves the reliability of the seal in circumstances where centre
baffle seals have been displaced due to sudden opening of water valves when the
cooler is empty. If you would like to retro fit your cooler with this type of gaskets, please
contact STT technical department for advice.
Grid and cover:-
 Fit two temporary studs in the tubeplate to support the grid during assembly.
 Fit two temporary studs coincident with the location tabs on the gasket to support
gaskets during assembly. (if no tabs use spraytack as formed headers)
 Fit new gasket to tubeplate, ensuring correct orientation.
 Assemble the grid to the tubeplate, second new gasket and the coverplate to the grid in
accordance with the drawing ensuring that any grid baffles are correctly orientated.
Page 20
Doc No. IOM001
All:-
 Lubricate all bolts/studs threads prior to fitting. This will ease assembly and allow
validation of the torque measurements.
 Mild steel fasteners - lubricate with a few drops of light oil. i.e. 3 in 1 type.
 Stainless fasteners- lubricate with copper slip. i.e. Rocol antisieze J 166.
Page 21
Doc No. IOM001
Formed or Fabricated Header box
Assembly torque
40 Nm (M12)
Connection end tubeplate
Water box gasket ~ EPDM may be

punched or strip gasket
Water box ~ Carbon Steel Rilsan
coated
Water connections
Grid & Coverplate Header Box
Assembly torque
80 Nm (M12)
(75Nm for Gr 70 fixings)
Connection end tubeplate
Water box gasket ~ Klinger C4106
Water box grid ~ Carbon Steel or Non ferrous

Water box cover plate.
Connections
Refer to section 4.4 for full tightening and torque details
Page 22
Doc No. IOM001
 Assemble all bolts (or studs and nuts), nipping up to a light pressure.
 Tighten progressively to initial torque (section 4.4) in a symmetrical pattern
starting at the centre and working toward each end as Figure 1
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
46 43 42 39 38 35 34 31 5 4 1 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26
+ +
47 27
+ +
49 29
+ +
50 30
+ +
48 28
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
45 44 41 40 37 36 33 32 6 3 2 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25
Figure 1
 Re tighten to 2nd pass torque using the same symmetrical pattern.

 Re tighten to final torque using the same symmetrical pattern.
 Finally, re tighten at same torque starting with a bolt on the centre line and
working around clockwise.
6.16 Pressure Test
 Fit blanking plates to the connection flanges

 Fill with water
 Slowly increase pressure
 Check for leaks
 Pressure test to the pressure on the rating plate or as advised by STT for
a period of 30 minutes.
After 24 hours EPDM gaskets should be re-torqued to allow for settling.
Follow commissioning guide for return to service.
Page 23
Doc No. IOM001
6.17 Vent and Drain Connections
Rilsan coated Formed and fabricated headers
Subject to the application, two main differing types of vent and drain connection may be fitted:-
1. A non-ferrous boss silver soldered into the steel header. The boss is fitted with a ¼”
BSP parallel plug with an o-ring seal under the head. Boss size and thread may vary
subject to contract requirements.
2. Welded in stub pipe with an external thread, fitted with a non-ferrous ring nut which
can employ several different fittings depending on application. Normally it is not
necessary to undo the ring nut as venting/draining can be carried out on the fitting.
See below.
Other attachments
It is not permissible to direct couple pipe work to the stub unless the fitting seals with a sealing
washer on the end.
Page 24
Doc No. IOM001
Grid and cover headers
The grid will have ¼” BSP threaded ports fitted with a parallel plug having an o-ring seal under
the head. The plug is cross drilled so that venting can be safely carried out without completely
removing the plug.
7. Fault Finding
Fault Possible Cause Remedy
Heat exchanger has There is air in the fluid side Vent and top up as necessary
insufficient capacity Operating conditions are Adjust the operating
different to design conditions to the specified
design
The heat exchanger is Clean the heat exchanger
fouled
The heat exchanger has Check and remedy any
been piped incorrectly problems found
Gasket pass partition has Reposition or replace gasket.
been displaced
The fins are damaged or Clean and re-align the fins
dirty
Heat exchanger is Gasket faces dirty or Check and clean gasket faces.
leaking damaged If found to be damaged
contact STT
Defective gasket Replace gasket
Bolts incorrectly tightened Check and re-tighten to the
recommended torque
Defective tube When a tube is defective it can
be blocked as an emergency
measure using plugs on the
inlet and outlet sides. This
may only be done after
consulting and obtaining
permission from STT
External forces / stresses The installation must be stress
and vibration free. Check
cause and remedy any fault
found.
Defective tube to tube plate Contact STT to replace a tube
connection or repair the heat exchanger.
Page 25
Doc No. IOM001
8. Spares
8.1 Ordering Spare Parts
Spare parts can be ordered directly from STT. The following information is
required as a minimum:-
Project / order number

Description / model of product (see GA)
Description of part (see GA)
Equipment Serial Number (See Cooler Nameplate)
8.2 Recommended Spares
Please contact our Spares Department for an up to date spares listing:

t: +44 (0)1296 487171
f: +44 (0)1296 436805
mail@sterlingtt.com
Page 26
Doc No. IOM001
9. Customer Service
9.1 How to Contact Us
Full contact details are given on the rear cover of this document
9.2 Complaints Procedure
In the event of any malfunction, complaints or dissatisfaction with this

equipment, please contact the STT Service Department using the contact
details on the rear of this document
10. Optional Extras

10.1 Leak Detection Package
Float Type
Periodically open leakage detector sump and ensure that it is clean, test operation of alarm by
manually lifting float. Inspect leak detector pipes to ensure they are not clogged.
Ultrasonic type
These are self-checking and have an indicator to show system health.
10.2 Pressure Relief Package
A pressure relief valve may be supplied to protect the equipment form over pressure. This will
be set at an agreed value for the equipment – normally the design pressure. The discharge port
must be kept free from any obstruction or foreign matter. If discharging during normal operation
check system for overpressure and / or valve for failure with a view to replacement.
Page 27
Doc No. IOM001
Sterling Thermal Technology Limited

Brunel Road
Rabans Lane
Aylesbury
Buckinghamshire
HP19 8TD
United Kingdom
t: +44 (0)1296 487171

f: +44 (0)1296 436805
mail@sterlingtt.com
www.sterlingtt.com
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rev 1
REVISION
REV. REASON FOR CHANGE ECN DRAWN DATE CHK'D DATE APP'D DATE
G HEADERS WERE RAL 9005 NOW RAL 7035 06971 CDM 19-11-19 EAL 19-11-19 EAL 19-11-19
4 OFF M16 BOTH SIDE

A LIFTING POINTS A
420
2 x RUD LIFTER M20 PER ELEMENT
G1/2" 20 506 2088 506 20 FOR VERTICAL LIFTING.
320 DRAIN 15 195 195 15
87 BOTH LIFTING POINTS MUST
VALVE 127 BE USED WHEN LIFTING
50
55
40
15
ELEMENTS SEE LIFTING ARRG'T
ON SHEET 2
60.5 G1/2"
B ENGLISH B
790
VENT
WATER VALVE NAMEPLATE
OUT
300
FINS AND
17 x 120 = 2040
2000 BETWEEN
SIDE CASINGS
AIR FLOW
TUBES
OMMITED Fy
500 ±5
2080
2180
FOR CLARITY
WATER My
IN
C C
300
790
40.5 Mz
PRESURE RELIEF Fz Fx
VALVES SET AT Mx
10 BARG WITH G1/2"
FEMALE OUTLET
55
40
15
50
D 3574 ±5 D
VIEW OF INSTALLED ARRANGEMENT 38 HOLES 14
2 X G1/2"
BOSS PLUGGED 3595
ANY INSTRUMENTS ALLOWABLE PIPEWORK LOADS
117 20
50
WILL HAVE TO BE MAX FORCE (N) MAX MOMENT (Nm)
REMOVED PRIOR DN Fx Fy Fz Fres Mx My Mz Mres E
E
TO WITHDRAWAL
150 4005 5028 5028 8161 2133 3038 1620 4050
320
420
EG000425 / 435 / 436 (NOOR ENERGY 1 PT1, PT2 AND PT3) DPPPG-70184416
FLANGE ASME
B16.5 WELD NECK US and EU Export Controls
50
6 in CLASS 150 158 Technology Classification:
BOLT HOLES ECCN: EAR99 AL: N US-Content: NO
OFF CENTRE 316 ±5 3100 BETWEEN TUBEPLATES . WITHDRAWL DRN
This document is subject to national export control regulations. If US-Conteinst marked "Yes",
REMOVAL SPACE then US reexport regulations apply. Diversion contrary to those regulations pirso hibited.
F (3470 MIN) In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted.
F
ITEM PART No. STT REF DESCRIPTION MATERIAL QTY.

1 P077318 03 ELEMENT GA 1
2 058-012 058-012 FLANGE ASME B16.5 WELD NECK 6 in CLASS 150 CARBON STEEL ASTM A105N 2
3 067-017 FLANGE GASKET ASME B16.21 FLAT RING 6 in CLASS 150 NOVUS 30 (SUPRA) 2
4 122-041 122-041 WASHER PLAIN [FORM C] BS 4320 M20 CARBON STEEL GRADE 8 GALVANISED 32
5 293-007 293-007 CLEANING BRUSH AND ROD SET 0.625 in 4M MAX 1
6 115-031 115-031 NUT HEXAGON FULL BS 3692 M20 CARBON STEEL GRADE 8 GALVANISED 16
G NOTES: 7 098-093 098-093 BOLT HEXAGON HEAD M20 x 90 CARBON STEEL GRADE 8.8 GALVANISED 16 G
1) THERMAL MECHANICAL AND TECHNICAL DETAILS GENERALLY TO QUOTE 20387 REV 2 8 SPARE PARTS
2) FOR ALLOWABLE PIPEWORK LOADS ON COOLER CONNECTIONS SEE TABLE
3) MASS PER ELEMENT (DRY) - SEE TITLE BLOCK 9 P077317 24 HEADER GASKET RETURN RUBBER EPDM (70 SHORE) 1
4) APPROX. VOLUME PER ELEMENT - 270 LITRES 10 P077416 23 HEADER GASKET CONNECTION RUBBER EPDM (70 SHORE) 1
5) NAMEPLATE - ENGLISH
6) DESIGN TEMPERATURE - 94 C TITLE
7) DESIGN PRESSURE - 10 bar g, TEST PRESSURE - 15 bar g 01 CUSTOMER GA

MATERIAL STT REF. No.
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED ALL SYMBOLS ETC. TO
BS.8888 BS.1553 BS.1646 BS.3939 ANSI/AWS A2.4
MATERIALS & FINISH ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (mm) MACHINE WHERE MARKED FINISH:- WEIGHT Kg
TUBES: COPPER,(ANNEALED), NATURAL
H FINS: ALUMINIUM, 0.2mm Thk, NATURAL
IF IN DOUBT ASK
TOLERANCES TO BE AS SPECIFIED BELOW UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
DO NOT SCALE
SEE NOTES 1237 H
HEADERS: MILD STEEL EN10025 S275, POWDER COATED RAL 7035 SEMI-GLOSS MACHINING FABRICATION PLATE AND STRUCTURAL WORK JOB No. SCALEúúúúúúú
SHT SIZEúúúúúúú
TUBEPLATES: NAVAL BRASS ASTM B171 C46500 / EN 1653 CW719R, NATURAL BREAK ALL SHARP UP TO 100mm ± 0.25mm
CORNERS AND 100-300mm ± 0.4 mm
SIZES UP TO
300mm
300-
1000mm
1000-
2000mm
2000-
4000mm
4000-
8000mm
8000-
12000mm
07093-1P 1:20 A2
SIDE CASINGS AND INTERMEDIATES: GALVANISED STEEL SHEET BS EN 10346, NATURAL
EDGES 0.40mm MAX LINEAR ± 2mm
300-1000mm ± 0.8 mm ± 1mm ± 1.5mm ± 3mm ± 4mm ± 5mm
BRUNEL ROAD . RABANS LANE . DRAWING No. SHT OF SHTS. REV.
FASTENERS: STAINLESS STEEL ANGLES ± 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
P077350 G
AYLESBURY . BUCKS . ENGLAND . HP19 8TD
THIS DESIGN OR DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF STERLING THERMAL TECHNOLOGY Ltd.
AND MUST NOT BE COPIED LOANED OR GIVEN WITHOUT THEIR CONSENT. IT MUST BE RETURNED ON REQUEST
Tel +44(0)1296-487171 Fax +44(0)1296-436805
EMAIL: MAIL@STERLINGTT.COM
WWW.STERLINGTT.COM
1 OF 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rev 1
REVISION
REV. REASON FOR CHANGE ECN DRAWN DATE CHK'D DATE APP'D DATE
G HEADERS WERE RAL 9005 NOW RAL 7035 06971 CDM 19-11-19 EAL 19-11-19 EAL 19-11-19
A A
60°
MAX
1166
490 1200 490
B B
C C
4582
D D
E E
F F
LIFTING DIAGRAM
DRY ASSEMBLY WEIGHT - SEE TITLE BLOCK
G G
TITLE
01 CUSTOMER GA
MATERIAL STT REF. No.
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED ALL SYMBOLS ETC. TO
BS.8888 BS.1553 BS.1646 BS.3939 ANSI/AWS A2.4
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES (mm) MACHINE WHERE MARKED FINISH:- WEIGHT Kg
H
IF IN DOUBT ASK
TOLERANCES TO BE AS SPECIFIED BELOW UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
DO NOT SCALE
SEE NOTES 1237 H
MACHINING FABRICATION PLATE AND STRUCTURAL WORK JOB No. SCALEúúúúúúú
SHT SIZEúúúúúúú
BREAK ALL SHARP UP TO 100mm ± 0.25mm
CORNERS AND
EDGES 0.40mm MAX
100-300mm ± 0.4 mm
SIZES
LINEAR
UP TO
300mm
± 1mm
300-
1000mm
1000-
2000mm
± 2mm
2000-
4000mm
± 3mm
4000-
8000mm
8000-
12000mm
07093-1P 1:20 A2
300-1000mm ± 0.8 mm ± 1.5mm ± 4mm ± 5mm
ANGLES ± 1 BRUNEL ROAD . RABANS LANE . DRAWING No. SHT OF SHTS. REV.
2 3 4 6 8 10
P077350 G
AYLESBURY . BUCKS . ENGLAND . HP19 8TD
THIS DESIGN OR DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF STERLING THERMAL TECHNOLOGY Ltd.
AND MUST NOT BE COPIED LOANED OR GIVEN WITHOUT THEIR CONSENT. IT MUST BE RETURNED ON REQUEST
Tel +44(0)1296-487171 Fax +44(0)1296-436805
EMAIL: MAIL@STERLINGTT.COM
WWW.STERLINGTT.COM
2 OF 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cooling System – Side Mounting
Installation and Maintenance Guide
Contents
1 Preliminary Remarks ...................................................................................... 2
2 General Safety Instructions ............................................................................ 3
3 Description of the Cooling System.................................................................. 3
3.1 General Information .............................................................................. 4
3.2 Design .................................................................................................. 4
3.3 Enclosure .............................................................................................. 4
4 Transport and Storage .................................................................................... 5
5 Assembly Instructions .................................................................................... 5
5.1 Unloading the Cooling System from the Transport Truck ........................ 5
5.2 Remove the Packaging .......................................................................... 6

5.3 Mounting the Cooling System ............................................................... 8
5.4 Mounting the Heat Exchangers ........................................................... 10
6 Commissioning the Cooling System ............................................................. 13
7 Regular Inspections and Control List............................................................. 13
8 Decommissioning the Cooling System .......................................................... 14
9 Maintenance and Cleaning .......................................................................... 14
9.1 Cleaning the Air-Side of the Heat Exchangers ...................................... 15
9.2 Risk of Damaging the Cooling Pipes of the Heat Exchangers................. 15
9.3 Cleaning the Water Chambers ............................................................. 16
9.4 Cleaning the Cooler Hood ................................................................... 16
10 Reworking, Repairing and Testing the Heat Exchangers ................................ 16
10.1 Water Pressure Test ............................................................................. 16
10.2 Dye Penetration Test after Weld Repairs ............................................... 18
10.3 Leaks in the Weld Seams of the Water Chambers ................................. 18
10.4 Leaks in Pipes in the Joints of the Chamber Floors ............................... 18

Chapter 4: Components and Purchased Parts Page 1 of 18
Cooling system – Side mounting
1 Preliminary Remarks
This Installation and Maintenance Guide describes the structure and installation of
the cooler hood on the generator, and provides instructions for inspecting and
maintaining the air/water heat exchangers.
NOTE
In some cases, the structure of the hood and heat exchangers described in this
manual may differ from the versions actually supplied.
Fig. 1: Cooling system – Front

side, water inlet side (still
without supports mounted;
they are located at the bottom
when mounted)
Fig. 2: Cooling system – Front

side, deflection chamber side
(at the top when mounted)

2 General Safety Instructions
 Secure all loose and movable parts.
 Avoid impacts and suddenly changing stresses on the hood.
 Wear appropriate protective clothing, and hearing protection to prevent hearing

impairment.
 Do not wear any jewelry or loose clothing.
 Adequately ground all connected electric circuits to prevent electric shocks.
 Do not drastically change the operating conditions.
3 Description of the Cooling System
Fig. 3: Cooling system, view of

the deflection chamber side
(top)
1 Inspection hatch with leakage air 6 Cover of the centering bolt

filter
2 Cooler hood 7 Piping for venting
3 Lifting shackle
4 Heat exchanger Warm air
5 Centering bolt Cold air
Fig. 4: Cooling system, view of

the water inlet side (bottom)
1 Heat exchanger 4 Support

2 Water connector 5 Measuring transducer enclosure with
3 Base frame leakage water sensor

3.1 General Information

The generator is equipped with a cooler hood to facilitate totally enclosed water-to-
air cooling (TEWAC), which dissipates the operating heat from the interior of the
generator.
The cooling system is mounted on the side of the sound attenuation cover of the
generator. The cooling system consists of the heat exchangers, the cooler hood
with a welded-on base frame, and the supports. Any pre-installed electric wiring
must be connected to the customer's corresponding terminal boxes. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Together the cooling system and the sound attenuation cover keep out dirt, sand,
water and moisture. After the generator has been assembled, it is therefore im-
portant to attach the cooling system to the sound attenuation cover of the genera-
tor as quickly as possible. Once the cooling system has been received and unpacked
on site, any apertures should be temporarily sealed with foil to keep out dirt, sand,
water and moisture.
3.2 Design
Cooler hood The cooler cover consists of a welded profile frame structure with slide-in frames.
Heat exchangers are mounted in it, either singly side-by-side, or in pairs one behind
the other.
Heat exchanger Liquid coolant flowing through these heat exchangers absorbs the heat energy from
the circulating air. The maximum working and test pressures are marked on the
rating plates of the individual heat exchangers. The heat exchangers stand upright
in slide-in frames in the cooler hood.
The heat exchangers can be lifted up out of the cooling system for maintenance and
cleaning purposes. Follow the manufacturer's detailed instructions when maintain-
ing, cleaning, disassembling and reassembling the individual heat exchangers.
3.3 Enclosure
The enclosure of the cooling system is designed to ensure effective distribution of
the cooling air to the heat exchangers and to minimize pressure losses. The interior
lining is sound insulated and designed to match the local conditions of the particu-
lar customer.
Protection against condensation A splash strip is mounted in the transition area between the cooler floor plate and
water and leakage water the generator to prevent condensation water or uncontrolled water from a leaking
pipe penetrating into the interior of the generator. Two measuring transducer en-
closures, each with a least one leakage water sensor to monitor leaks, are located
on the floor of the cooler hood (Fig. 5). The cabling and function of these warning
electrodes must be tested after completion of installation.

Fig. 5: Measuring transducer

enclosure with a leakage water
sensor mounted under the
floor of the cooler hood
1 Floor of the cooler hood 4 Threaded drain plug

2 Measuring transducer enclosure 5 Water connection chamber
3 Screwed-in leakage water sensor
4 Transport and Storage
Transport The cooling system is delivered packed in a transport crate (Fig. 6).
Eyebolts are provided on the top of the cooler hood for transporting and mounting
the cooling system after the packaging has been removed.
WARNING
Danger of crushing! Risk of damaging the cooling system and generator!
The eyebolts are only designed for suspending the cooling system, not for
lifting heavy loads.
 Use the eyebolts only for transporting and mounting the cooling system.
Storage Check the moisture indicators on the packaging every month while the cooling
system is in storage in its unopened packaging. No other action has to be taken as
long as the indicators remain blue. If the indicators turn pink, the silica gel desiccant
in the packaging must be renewed, that is it must be dried separately or replaced.
5 Assembly Instructions
5.1 Unloading the Cooling System from the Transport Truck
WARNING
Danger of injury from falling objects.
 Do not stand or walk under suspended loads during the transport work.
Work steps 1. Use two steel ropes with an adequate loading capacity.
2. Hitch the transport crate at the marked hitching points (Fig. 6).
3. Lift the crate off the transport truck and lower it onto a flat surface so that it is
evenly supported.
4. Check that the packaging and moisture indicators are undamaged.

5.2 Remove the Packaging

Work steps 1. Remove the metal edge protection profiles from the top and bottom of the
packaging.
2. Use a nail puller and crowbar to force apart the sides (3), ends (4) and roof (2)
of the packaging. Remove the roof of the crate with a crane.
3. Use a nail puller and crowbar to force apart one side wall from one end wall
and the floor.
4. Carefully remove the side wall, the end wall, the second side wall and the
second end wall one after the other with a crane.
5. Remove the tie-downs from the floor of the crate, as well as the aluminum
and foam foils.
Fig. 6: Unloading from the

transport truck
1 Steel ropes 3 Side wall

2 Cover 4 End wall
6. Remove the pallet holding the accessory cartons from the floor of the crate.
7. Check the accessory parts against the enclosed packing list for completeness.
8. Inspect the visible outer surfaces of the cooler hood.
9. Hitch each of two load bars or adequate spread angles (for long ropes) to two
of the 4 eyebolts provided (Fig. 8). Closed-system load suspension devices,
such as hook locks or shackles, must be used.
10. Lift the cooling system evenly with 2 cranes until the hitching chains or ropes
are taut. The maximum spread angle is 90°.

Fig. 7: Transportation sketch –

Hitching the cooler hood
1 Cooler hood 4 Rubber seal on the open end of the

2 Hitching gear hood
3 Lifting lugs A The maximum spread angle of the
steel ropes is 90°
11. Undo the screws connections holding the cooling system to the floor of the
crate, and lift the cooling system carefully. Do not damage the rubber seal
running around the open end of the hood, which faces downwards.
12. Remove the floor of the crate.

13. Turn the suspended cooling system into a vertical position with the water
connection side facing down (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8: Turning the cooling sys- 1 Crane hitching gear 1 5 Water inlet side (downwards)
tem into a vertical position 2 Crane hitching gear 2 6 Water connection flanges
3 Deflection chamber side (upwards) 7 Rubber seal on the open end of the
4 Lifting lugs hood
14. Place the lower edge of the cooling system on a flat surface, and remove the
lower load suspension devices. Slowly turn the cooling system into an upright
position by traversing the crane.

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the heat exchangers and cooler hood!
 Place the cooling system, with the water connection side facing down, on a
wooden frame or similar construction. It must not rest on the projecting water
connection flanges of the heat exchangers.
15. Inspect the cooling system, including the heat exchangers and internal parts.
Remove all desiccant bags.
5.3 Mounting the Cooling System

Prerequisites  The sound attenuation cover of the generator must be clean and dry.
 All transport covers have been removed from the sound attenuation cover.
 All blind covers have been mounted on the sound attenuation cover (manholes).
 The cooler hood must be clean and dry.
 The rubber seal in the flange area of the hood must be undamaged.
CAUTION
Dirt hazard!
If the cooler hood is dirty, the required standard of cleanliness of all the air-carrying
components is no longer ensured.
 Keep the cooler hood clean, and clean it thoroughly before mounting it on the
generator.
 Do not leave any loose parts, such as nuts and bolts, in the cooler hood.
 Do not perform any work that creates dirt or chips, such as grinding and welding,
near the open hood.
Work steps 1. With the cooling system in its working orientation (vertical position), attach
the ropes to the 4 eyebolts provided on the deflection chamber side with a
maximum spread angle of 90°. Use four-strand load suspension devices with
an adequate loading capacity. (Fig. 9).
2. Lift the cooling system with the crane so that it is alongside the generator
sound attenuation cover and, with it suspended horizontally, align it in the
longitudinal direction with the flange of the sound attenuation cover.
3. Pass the M20 centering bolt through the flange of the cooling system and into
the generator sound attenuation cover to attach the cooling system to the
generator sound attenuation cover. Use the washers and damping elements
provided.
CAUTION
Risk of damaging the cooler hood!
 The cooler hood remains suspended by the crane throughout the mounting pro-
cedure until all the supports have been mounted, aligned and secured below the
cooler hood.
 The centering bolt serves only to align the cooler hood, it does not bear the
weight of the hood!
4. After the cooler hood has been aligned with the sound attenuation cover, bolt
the supports to the base frame with the bolts provided. Secure the supports by
welding the top and bottom parts. Bolt the feet of the supports to the founda-
tion with the anchor pins provided (Fig. 9).

Fig. 9: Supporting the cooling

system in a vertical position
and mounting the supports
1 Four-strand hitching gear 4 Base frame

2 Centering bolt 5 Support
3 Water connection flanges 6 Anchor pegs
5. Pull the cooling system to the sound attenuation cover of the generator with
the aid of the threaded bolts on the lower transverse girders of the supporting
frame. Secure the threaded bolts with lock nuts. The crane must not release
the load until this has been done.
6. Check the seal around the flange connection between the cooling system and
the generator sound attenuation cover for leaks.
7. Connect the supply and return pipes to the water connection side of the heat
exchangers (see general drawing of the cooler hood for the actual layout - al-
so see p. 11). Welding neck flanges, as counterflanges for the heat exchanger
flanges, are premounted or supplied loose, together with corresponding hex-
agonal nuts, bolts and gaskets. Install shut-off valves in the supply and return
pipes.
CAUTION
 Check the direction of flow in the supply and return pipes to the flanges of the
heat exchangers.
 Lay the pipes stress and torque-free, so that no forces are transmitted to the
connectors. Use compensators. Install connecting pieces, for pressure and tem-
perature tests during commissioning.
8. Mount the pipes for venting the heat exchangers with appropriate holding
clamps. (Fig. 10).

Fig. 10: Pipes for venting the

heat exchangers
1 Vent valve 4 Measuring transducer enclosure with

2 Ventilation pipes leakage water sensor
3 Holding clamps 5 Inspection hatch with leakage air
filter
9. Mount or check the filter mats in the mounting frames of the leakage air fil-
ters.
10. Clean the leakage water sensor enclosures, and make the electrical connec-
tions.
11. Safely ground all mounted components. Connect the intended grounding
points between the cooler hood and generator cover.
CAUTION
 If necessary climb into the inside of the hood through the inspection hatches:
Before doing so, empty all pockets, remove watches and jewellery.
 Do not leave any loose parts, such as nuts and bolts, in the cooler hood.
5.4 Mounting the Heat Exchangers

The cooling system is usually delivered with the heat exchangers already mounted,
however in exceptional cases they have to be mounted on site.
Before mounting Trained personnel should perform the necessary water pressure tests on the heat
exchangers, before the units are installed in the hood, and connected and commis-
sioned (see page 16).
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting the heat exchangers, ensure without fail
that there is sufficient clearance above the cooling system, follow the manu-
facturer's technical documentation, and use the spare parts it recommends.

Measures during installation • All pipes and flange connections must be laid stress and torque-free to the heat
exchangers, and seals fitted that are appropriate for the water quality, pressure
and temperature.
• The cooling water should be neutral and free from contamination. Prepare with
anti-corrosion agents, pH regulator and/or antifreeze according to the on-site
conditions.
• A suitable filter can be fitted on the cooling water inlet during the first commis-
sioning to prevent blockages in the cooling pipes. Check or clean the filter, and
remove after connecting the water unit.
• If necessary, vent and subject the cooling system to overpressure so that all heat
exchangers can work optimally under all operating conditions.
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting the heat exchangers and pipes, observe the
following without fail:
The heat exchangers are bolted tightly to the hood enclosure only by the top sur-
face of the cooler hood, and sealed with a rubber-frame gasket. The bottom side of
the cooling unit is not bolted to the hood, but sealed to the flange of the hood by a
rubber profile (e.g. an O-ring). A pressure frame holds the rubber profile in place.
This arrangement allows the heat exchangers to expand downwards and contract in
response to changes in temperature (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11: Bolting the heat 1 Water chamber

exchangers 2 Projecting tube sheet
3 Flat gasket
4 Enclosure
5 Bolt-on strip
6 Cooling tube
7 Clamping frame
8 Round cord seal
9 Water inlet/water outlet flange

NOTE
Lifting devices, such as transport lifting bracket or eyebolts, can be mounted
to suspend the individual heat exchangers during mounting and dismounting
operations. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Example: transport lifting Transport lifting brackets are only attached for the purpose of mounting and dis-
brackets mounting heat exchangers, so that they can be lifted by a crane. There are 12 mm
boreholes in the bottom flanges of the brackets so that they can be bolted to the
heat exchanger.
Fig. 12: Transport lifting

brackets
1 Borehole d = 12 mm (2 ×)
Fig. 13: Transport lifting

bracket – attached (left),
detached (right)
1 ISO 4017 M10 × 20 hexagonal bolt 3 The transport lifting bracket is un-
to attach the transport lifting bolted, and used for inserting the
bracket next cooler.
2 The 14 mm borehole for bolting the The bolted joint underneath the
cooler to the enclosure is hidden by cooler attaching it to the enclosure
the by the transport lifting bracket is tightened.
4 Borehole for M12 hexagonal bolt
for bolting the cooler to the enclo-
sure
Work steps 1. There are 14 mm boreholes in the projecting tube sheet of the heat exchanger
for bolting the heat exchanger to the enclosure. Bolt the transport lifting
brackets temporarily to it with M10 hexagonal bolts.
2. After inserting the heat exchanger, unbolt the brackets, and use them to insert
the next heat exchanger.
3. Bolt the projecting tube sheet of the inserted heat exchanger to the enclosure
with M12 hexagonal bolts.

6 Commissioning the Cooling System
Before commissioning • Before commissioning the cooling system after a lengthy period of storage (over
3 months), retighten the bolted joints of the chambers of the individual units.
Observe the sequence of work and torques specified by the corresponding manu-
facturers. Check all seals, and replace if they are more than two years old.
• Check that the cooler hood has been properly mounted with a seal on the gener-
ator to prevent the uncontrolled escape of cooling air.
• Check that all additional units, such as leakage water warning electrodes and
thermometers, have been connected correctly.
• Fill the cooling system pipes with clean coolant, and vent the heat exchangers at
the highest point above the vent lines. Open the supply valves little by little to
avoid water hammer. The flow rate of the coolant should be regulated solely by
the return valves, whereas the supply valves remain fully open. Close the venting
valves when there is a smooth flow of water in the vent lines and they do not
contain any air.
Checks and measures after the • Check the pressure and, if necessary, the flow rate to the heat exchangers.
first commissioning
• Check all connections and the heat exchangers for water leaks.
• Check the system for vibrations and unusual noises.
• Check the floor of the cooler hood under the heat exchangers for condensation.
If necessary, open the drain plugs to drain the measuring transducer enclosures.
NOTE
If corrosive coolants (e.g. water) are used, continuous operation of at least 2
months is required to build up a passive protective coating on the metal sur-
faces.
7 Regular Inspections and Control List
Regular inspections and checks have to be made to ensure trouble-free operation of

the cooling system. The times for inspections and checks are to be taken from the
Maintenance and Inspection sections of this manual.
Inspection In general, the following checks are recommended:

• Visual inspection of the general condition of the system
• Check for dirt and damage on the outside surfaces
• Check the surfaces of the cooling fins for blockages and damage
• Check the pipes for blockages and damage
• Check for water leaks in all areas
• Check the water pressure or, if necessary, the flow rate
• Check and clean the leakage air filters, if necessary Replace the filter mats
• Check for vibrations and unusual noises
• Check water-carrying parts for corrosion
• Check the function of the safety devices, such as the leakage water warning
electrodes

8 Decommissioning the Cooling System
Work steps 1. Shut down the generator.
CAUTION
Danger of burns if the heat exchangers have not yet cooled down.
 After the generator has been shut down, the cooling water pumps should con-
tinue to run for some time to dissipate the residual heat.
CAUTION
 When necessary, climb into the inside of the hood through the inspection hatch-
es: before doing so empty all pockets and take off watches and jewelry.
 Ensure that no loose parts, such as nuts and bolts, are left in the cooler hood.
2. Shut down cooling water pump.
3. Depressurize the system: First shut the return valves, and then the supply
valves.
4. Disconnect the power supply to the leakage water warning electrodes.
5. Drain and vent the heat exchangers through the corresponding pipes.
9 Maintenance and Cleaning

NOTE
When maintaining and cleaning the heat exchangers, follow the manufactur-
er's technical documentation and use the recommended spare parts without
fail. The following sections contain only general instructions.
CAUTION
Risk of damaging the heat exchangers.
 Have the cleaning work done by an expert.
The heat exchangers have to be cleaned to maintain a good heat transfer and avoid
corrosion. It is recommended to remove the heat exchangers for cleaning from the
slide-in frames of the cooler hood. When refitting, ensure that there is a correct seal
between heat exchangers and enclosures (see also the pipe fitting instructions in
the section 5.4 Mounting the Heat Exchangers, page 10 sqq.).
Follow the documentation of the manufacturer of the heat exchangers without fail.
Fig. 14: Dismounting the heat

exchangers

9.1 Cleaning the Air-Side of the Heat Exchangers

The external hot surfaces of the heat exchangers, whether mounted or dismounted,
are preferably vacuum cleaned. When dismounted, they can also be cleaned with
dry compressed air. When blowing out, ensure that the cooling air is blown out in
the opposite direction to the normal air flow.
If the external hot surfaces are cleaned with water and a pH-neutral cleanser, sub-
sequently blow out the heat exchangers with compressed air, and dry with hot air.
CAUTION
The compressed air can damage the cooling fins.
 Use the compressed air carefully.
9.2 Risk of Damaging the Cooling Pipes of the Heat Exchangers

Work steps before cleaning the 1. Drain the heat exchangers and remove all operating materials.
cooling pipes
2. Dismount the heat exchangers from the hood.
3. Dismount the water chambers by undoing the screwed connections.
4. If there are tapped holes in the water chamber flange for screwing in forcing-
off screws, use these screws to carefully force off the chamber.
Cleaning the cooling pipes Loosely adhering dirt is cleaned off the internal pipes by means of oil-free com-
pressed air. Clean out firmly adhering dirt with a high-pressure water jet (maximum
temperature: 90°C). The spray must be directed in the opposite direction to the flow
of the coolant. Only use pH-neutral cleanser (pH 6.0 to 7.5) for cleaning. As a rule
all, all washing up liquids lie within this range. A round nylon brush of the appropri-
ate diameter can also be used for cleaning, here again use it against the direction of
flow of the coolant.
CAUTION
Danger of damaging or removing the passive protective coatings from the
surfaces of the heat exchangers during the cleaning process.
 A method that does not damage the protective coating is preferred for mechani-
cally cleaning the internal pipes of the heat exchangers.
 Do not clean heat exchangers by poking mechanically or with a wire brush, and
do not bore out blocked pipes.
If the usual mechanical methods are unsuccessful, chemical cleaning of the cooling
pipes can be considered.
CAUTION
With chemical cleaning, there is a risk of burning the cooling pipes.
 The cleaning process should only be carried out under the supervision of a chem-
ist, who specifies the concentration of the cleansing solution and the duration of
application according to the degree of contamination and the pipe material.
 Alkaline and acidic cleansers must not be used.
 Ensure that all chemical residues are thoroughly flushed out with water after the
cleaning process.
Work steps after cleaning the 1. When re-assembling the water chambers, ensure that the guide plates and
cooling pipes diverter plates are correctly oriented in their correct places.

2. Fit the water chambers with new seals, and tighten the screwed connections
with the specified torques. The screwed connections are tightened alternately,
diagonally from the inside to the outside to ensure that the seals settle evenly.
3. After re-assembling the heat exchangers, ensure that seals used are fully func-
tional. Make a water-pressure test to check the tightness of the heat exchang-
ers (see page. 16).
9.3 Cleaning the Water Chambers

Clean the water chambers with water, commercial, pH-neutral cleanser and a nylon
brush. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION
Risk of damaging or removing the corrosion protection in the water chambers.
This may lead to pitting and irreparable damage to the water chambers.
 If the corrosion protection becomes detached it has to be renewed.
9.4 Cleaning the Cooler Hood

Vacuum clean the insides of the cooler hood and the sound attenuation cover of the
generator (in as far as they are accessible) and wipe down with a damp cloth. Add
commercial pH-neutral cleanser to the wiping water. Finally, thoroughly dry the
damp surfaces.
10 Reworking, Repairing and Testing the Heat Exchangers
If leaks occur in the heat exchangers, the procedures for testing and repairing the
components should always be agreed with the responsible department of Siemens
AG. Leaks in the area of the chambers, seals and shell can usually be localized from
the outside. A leak should be repaired by skilled personnel according to its type and
position.
If a leak cannot be found from the outside, it has to be localized by a leak test of the
heat exchanger. Depending on the type of heat exchanger and the suspected posi-
tion of the leak, test for leaks either from the outside (shell side) or the inside
(chamber space). The leak test localizes the defective pipe or the position of the
leak. If the heat exchanger has been dismounted, test for leaks with the medium
suitable for the particular operating material of the shell or chamber space. The
pipes and water chambers are tested for leaks from the inside by, for example,
water pressure tests, and from the outside after, for example, weld repairs by the
dye penetration test. The most frequent leaks are in the weld seams of the water
chambers and leaks in the pipes in the joints of the chamber floors.
10.1 Water Pressure Test

The water pressure test on the heat exchanger ensures that there are no leaks in the
expansion and connection elements, seals, welded chambers or fitted pipes.
Equipment The following equipment is required to perform a water pressure test:
• A hand water pump with adequate capacity for the specific test pressure
• A calibrated manometer
• Connecting hoses or elements

CAUTION
Risk of damaging the heat exchanger.
 Allow the water pressure test to be performed only by trained personnel.
Work steps 1. Connect the pump to the inlet flange of the heat exchanger, and mount the
manometer on the outlet flange.
2. Mount all other parts as shown in Fig. 15.
3. Fill the heat exchanger with water, and vent it through the air cocks on the
water chambers.
4. Close the air cocks and gradually increase the water pressure to the specified
test pressure.
5. Monitor the test pressure for at least 2 hours.
6. All parts of the heat exchanger - such as chambers, pipes, seals, welded seams
- are tested during the pressure test. During the pressure test there should be
no measurable pressure fall on the manometer.
Fig. 15: Connecting the heat 1 Heat exchanger 8 Non-return / cut-off valve
exchanger for the water 2 Water outlet flange 9 Hose
pressure test 3 Gasket 10 Hose union
4 Blind flange 11 manual pump
5 Pressure gauge 12 Reservoir
6 Water inlet flange 13 Pump handle
7 Connecting flange

10.2 Dye Penetration Test after Weld Repairs
CAUTION
 Always have the dye penetration test performed by an expert.
The dye penetration test can test surfaces and weld seams for the smallest cracks
and openings in the surface. It serves to prove that there are no leaks after weld
repairs to the cooling system. The smallest faults are made visible by a colored pen-
etration agent and a developer with high color contrast to the penetration agent.
10.3 Leaks in the Weld Seams of the Water Chambers
CAUTION
 Allow necessary tests of weld seams and weld repairs to be performed only by
trained, authorized personnel.
Work steps 1. During the pressure test, mark possible leaks in weld seams with chalk or
paint.
2. Reduce the pressure and drain the heat exchanger. If necessary, blow the heat
exchanger dry with compressed air to remove all traces of moisture.
3. Use a dye penetration test to find whether there is a leak at the affected spot.
4. Regrind the defective spot and weld the crack.
5. Then perform another dye penetration test to check the weld seam.
6. Remount the heat exchanger, and perform another pressure test.
10.4 Leaks in Pipes in the Joints of the Chamber Floors
CAUTION
 Allow the repairs to be performed only by trained personnel.
Work steps 1. During the pressure test, mark pipe leaks with chalk or paint.
2. Reduce the pressure and drain the heat exchanger. If necessary, blow the heat
exchanger dry with compressed air to remove all traces of moisture.
3. Remove the affected water chambers.
4. If the damaged spot is not obvious, search for the leak in the tube sheet with a
light. If necessary, test the pipes individually.
5. Check the bore of the pipe at the joint, and widen the joint.
6. If the affected pipe still leaks after another pressure test, seal both ends of the
pipe with conical copper plugs, and braze the pipe and plug together. A suita-
ble two-component adhesive can also be used.
NOTE
Alternatively, the defective pipe can be replaced by a new one. Whether this
exchange is made depends on whether a replacement is available, and the
time frame involved. In this case contact Siemens AG.

Turbogenerator Cooler for Excitation System
Components and Purchased Parts RGS: Ventilation unit Documentation
Manufacturer: RGS Technischer Service GmbH
Documentation title: Documentation Noor Energy1 (CT)

Description of plant
Assembly instructions (exploded drawing)
Operating and maintenance instructions
Control measures
Certificate of Compliance / protocols
Spare and wear part list; List of consuming devices; Shipping bill
Data sheet fan
Wiring diagram
Drawings
No. of pages: 26 inc. drawings

R0s
DOCUMENTATION
Object Noor I (PTl)
Item Filter and fan for slip ring unit
Order No. RGS 9026771 t9-4101340
Order No. SIEMENS A- 902795
Plant constructor RGS Technischer Service GmbH

Camburger Straße 4
D- 99091 Erfurt, Germany
Telephone: +49 3611 75057-0
Telefax: + 49 3611 7 5057 -7 5
GebT-Erfurt@rgs.de
Purchaser SIEMENS AG Energy Sector

Werner-von-Siemens Straße 1
D- 99086 Ertun
Gebäudetechnik in einer neuen Dimension
RGS Technischer Service GmbH .www.rgs.de
INGOLSTADT BERLIN ERFURT HEIDELBERG ESSEN MAGDEBURG

RGS
INDEX
1 Description of plant
2 Assembly instructions (exploded drawing)
3. Operating and maintenance instructions
)
4. Control measures
5. Certificate of Compliance / protocols
6. Spare and wear parts list

List of consuming devices
Shipping bitl
7 Data sheet fan
) 8 Wiring diagram
9. Drawings
RGS Technischer Service GmbH 'wwwrgs.de

Description of Plant
The task of the plant is to dissipate the heat arising in brush gear.
The plant is designed for an air flow of 2000 cubic meters per hour (0.55 m3/s).
The cooling air is exhausted via the sound absorber with filter mats (item 1.6) and goes via
the interior of the covering hood directly to the brush gear.
The fan (item 1 . I ) needed for the pressure rise is located on adapter plate (item 1 .1) directly
beyond the brush gear.
The cooling air flows through a duct bend (item 1.2), an elastic duct piece for the
compensation of the dilatation (item 1.3) and another conduit part (item 1.4) to the outgoing
air sound absorber (item 1.5) on EE and from there it is blown into the open air.
The plant is supplied by 400V/50 Hz. The plant is switched on and off via the switch with
indicator light in the cabinet door. The indicator light shows the operation.
With switch position "Manual" the fan starts immediately. With switch position "Remote" a
potential-free remote control contact is requested to switch on.
The differential pressure switch are set to 300 Pa.
RGS Technischer Service GmbH .wwwrgs,de

item 1.3
item 1.2
t item 1.?
\, rteh 2.2
t item 2.1*
\,
it.m 1.5
uS ad EU ErNd Cülmb
TEhmlogy Cl6sif€lion
ECCN: EIRS AL N Us{ontentr N0

Tils d@umml is subi€d h ßlionat o4od ,yes',
ontd Elutaüoß. ll uscmbnl is ro*ed
lhen US r*rtsd Egubhs eprly. DreMn dillrary h üb$ Egutdim is pEhibrhd.
ln Bd ol doubl, [xpod ComplE.e Drpffisnl Ml b6 mnbcird

Di@6 Dolwnl udoiE{l ilrh€lon Erpoilontolbssümungon Falts us.Cmtlnl mil aoi.
g€ioüohhml irl, 6id d€ t/s Rmrpdl Sftimhgen aümndon. Eh€ woiloDeh snbls
dbw &slimmungen hl ßrbolon. lm trfsibbbf konbkliorcn SD lhs ECC Abhi ung.
09.05.2015 P.1,,/iltnänn
B
09.05.2016 t. Apel
Filter/Fan LJnit for Stip Rinq Unit

ässEmbly draring
item 2.'l* are to be proiected with suitable screws protertion, ohEz.rhdutddoh.uii'rrfrdDdtuFe'ro@d

SIEMENS ENER6Y
for example, with L0tTlTE 241
Werner-von-Sienens-SlraßE I
sestTtpil0n nlttr rFf
län wlln adeDler Dtale ---- I item number desrriotion norm
D-99086 Erfurt
1.t outr moutoeo parr ds a tu Deno ll 2.1 26 screws M8x25 lS0 t+011 - MB x 25
't.L
ourl ltTllno wlln tanvas tonneslton
outr moutoeo pdfr a5 a rfdnst|on
ll z.z l*0 screws M8x35 150 t017 - M8 x 15
Gebä!dsl€clnlk in oinor neuen Oimenslqn
R65 TechnischerSsrvice CnbH
IP,-ik,r.lii
dlrtlpt äir snlrnd ähsorhprf 2.3 122 nord-l A
Al "wä
1.6 2.1 56 self-lo DtN 985 - M8
Canburger sträße 4 . 99091 €.lun
aontrnl rährnal --__l I 2.s 2 reels sealino stralo gen. Tolerance rlass DIN lS0 2768-m
Te(efon +49 3 61 77 tO U?-0 , Fax 7 SO 5?-75
e|türl@rg3.di. ww.rgs.d€
z.dnunosu|ffir, crtung numb.r
DPPP6-?0117615- 002
Operating and Maintenance lnstructions, Care and Maintenance
The care and maintenance cover all the measures required to prevent sudden breakdowns.
The user of the ventilation plants is provided here with a coherent overview of the necessary
care and maintenance measures, inspections and examinations.
lnadequate or improper care and maintenance may lead to serious damage
and breakdowns.
All the technical conditions and personnel required for the care and maintenance therefore have to
be provided, and the performance of all the essential measures must be checked.
care and maintenance work may only be performed by trained skilled personnel
We recommend that all the work, inspections and examinations, including visual checks
and observations, be recorded in a "maintenance manual"
provided by the operating company.
The care and maintenance work on the components, modules and devices typically
found in ventilation plants is summarized in the following tabular overview.
The tables are only applicable in conjunction with the manufacturer's documentation
and the detailed information therein.
The filter change is done via the protective grating of the air inlet filter unit.
Filters can be changed while the system is in operation.
While doing so, take care to ensure that no loose parts are allowed to fall into the intake duct
The filters must be changed quickly and by qualified skilled personnel.
Ear protection must be worn!
Warning!
Ensure that phases are not accidentally transposed at the electrical connections
during maintenance work on the electrical power supply system.
Control Measures
The installation locations in the ventilation centers must be kept in order

and thoroughly cleaned.

RO
Work and control measures after

to be carried out operati ng hours
ä ä o
(,
ä(! .l
o
o
c
o $t
L
(! o o
o o
o
o o o o
I
p 3 E N
l=l
c)
l,l lö
Components, modules and devices

(in general) X X
lnspect inside and outside for dirt, check
corrosion protection;
if necessary clean and renew the corrosion
protection, lightly grease bare parts,
lubricate bearing points
Flexible ducts x X
Check joints for leaks and material for
brittleness.
Caution! No surface treatment.
Air filter
' Check differential pressure X
(check range according to operating
conditions)
For individual filter type (see spart parts list)

obeserve the care instructions.
RGS Technischer Service GmbH 'www.rgs.de

R0s
Certificate of Compliance
acc. to EN 102041 2.1
Certificate of Compliance-No. : 2019 / 12
Order No 902677/ t9-4101340
Code word Noor I (PTl)
Component Brush gear ventilation
Spezification machinery directive (200 6 I 42 /ßG)

VDMA 24167, VBG 5, VBG 5 DA, VDI3805o DIN 1946
We certify herewith, that the components are supplied in accordance to the relevant
regulations and specifi cations.
G. Scholz
l% L"
Qualitymanagement Date:2079-11-27 Location:Erfurt Countersignature:

Turbogeneratoren Baugruppen
Prüfprotokoll Vorbereitung und Farbgebung
Turbogenerators
Desgin groups
Test Record
Preparation and
Noor 1 (PT1) r.: A- 902795 r Blatt-Nr von
Code word Order-No. T/G-No. Sheet-No.: 1of1
Material -Nr.: Bau gr.-Nr. ld.-Nr.:
Material-No. ld.-No-:
Zeichn.
Drawing-No.: lndex: Position: Tvp
O berf | äch e nvorbereitu n g Norm-Reinheitsgrad SA 2 1t2 Rauheitswerte: FUz ca. / Rz approx.

Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Roughness:
sAl sA2 S,AZuz SA3 Ra ca. Sonstige Angaben / other informations
X
Gesamt Temperatur Luftfeuchte
Bauteil/ Baugruppe 1.GB - 60 pm 2.GB-80pm 3. GB 1.DB- 60pm TFD Temperatur Humidity
Part / Design group Datum Datum Datum Datum 200 pm c" %
Date TFD um Date TFD um Date TFD pm Date TFD um
Kühler/ Cooting unit 06.1 1 .2019 61 13.11.2019 84 18.11.2019 62 207
Hersteller Farbe/ lnternational Farbwerke GmbH

Supplier
KV 12-015 Pkt.: 3.3.6
Bezeichnung Lacksystem/ lntercure 200 lntercure 420 lnterthane 990
title paint system
Chargennummer/
Charge No.
Farbton/ RAL 7035 rotbraun silber grau RAL 7035
tone red brown silver grey liqht grev
Erläuteru I TFD= Trockenfilmdicke/ film shift // GB= Gru llDB= final
Abteilung: Prüfdatum: 2019-11-22 Prüfer: Gegenzeichung:

Department: Date of Counter signature:
RO
PROTOCOL Ventilation unit A-902795

to the check for com before annroval
Delivery date: 2019 -1 1 -29
Components acc. to Parts list present / complete
1.1 1 pc. Fan with Adapter plate, 740x490x722 present and complete
1.2 I pc. Duct moulded part as a 90o bend, present and complete
350x600
1.3 1 pc. Duct fitting with canvas connection, present and complete
350x600
1.4 1 pc. Duct moulded part as a transition, present and complete

350x600/900x700
1.5 1 pc. Outlet air sound absorber, present and complete

900x700x500
1.6 2 pc. Air inlet filter unit, 520x770x200 present and complete
1.7 I pc. Control cabinet present and complete
2. 1 pc. Package with assembly and present and complete

sealing material
3. I pc. Package with cabel and accessories present and complete
RGS Technischer Service GmbH . www.rgs.de

List of Spare and Wearing Parts SIEMENS
Noor 1 (PT1)
Spare part Type / description / size Quantity
For the first year
* Dust filters
filter mat M5, 755x505 4
For four years incl. first year
" Dust filters filter mat M5, 755x505 16
supplier RGS Technischer Service GmbH

Camburger Straße 4
D- 99091 Erfurt
GebT-Erfurt@rqs.de

List of Gonsuming Devices SIEMENS
Noor 1 (PTl)
Item Gonsuming device Quantity data
1 Terminal box 1 Supply voltage: 400V ll50Hz

Power consumption 1,9 kW

Best ( lBpos (4) Materialk (10) Belüftungsein heit Siemens-Auft rags-Nr. : A-902795
E03-3010524696
zollrelevante Daten
Artikelbeschreibung
LERK
ME Mengep MTART Werkstoff Nettogew DR USR ALNR
Materialp ECCN ULA URE PRA EL GEFS GEFK UNST SDBL UNMBL
sKz (1 Posnr (4 (r0) l2l (1 3) (4) MKTXTD (40) MKTXTE (40) Abmessung (20) Norm (20) (10) Zeichnungsnr. (15) (1 ) (1) (8) (8) (3) (3) (1) (1) srwN (11 ) r (1) L (3) N (4) (r) (1)
(18)
I 1.1 ST 1 Ventilator m it Adapterblech fan with adapter plate 740x490x722 Stahl vezinkt DPPPG-701 1 76 45-002.1 N N N N DE 09 841 45935
1.2 ST 1 Bogen 90' duct moulded part as a 90' bend 350x600 Stahl verzinkt DPPPG-701 17645-OO2.2 N N N N DE 09 7210490A
1.3 ST 1 Seoeltuchstutzen duct fittinq with canvas connection 350x600 Stahl verzinkt DPPPG-701 17645-002.3 N N
N N DE 16 7210490n
1.4 ST 1 Kanalteil als Übergang duct moulded part as a transilion 350x600i900x700 Stahl verzinkt DPPPG-70117645-002.4 N N N DE
N 16 72104900
ST 1 Fortluftschalldämofer outlet air sound absorber 900x700x500 Stahl vezinkt DPPPG-701 17645-002.5 N N N N DF 16 73089051
1.6 ST Zuluftfiltereinheil air inlet filter unit 52Ox770x2OO Siahl vezinkt DPPPG-701 1 7645-002.6 N N N N DE 16 72104900
1.7 ST I Schaltschrank control cabinet 380x380x21 0 Stahl vezinkt N N N N DE 16
2 ST 1 Karton mit Montaoe- rrnd packaqe with assemblv and sealino DPPPG-70117645-002
2.1 ST 26 Schrauben M8 x 25 screws M8 x 25 M8x25 ISO Stahl verzinkl N N DF
N N 16 73181491
2.2 ST 40 Schrauben M8 x 35 screws M8 x 35 MBr35 rso Stahl vezinkt N N N N DE 16 73181491
23 ST 122 Nordlock Scheibe 1 3,5x8.7x25 nord-lock washer 1 3.5x8.7x2.5 613.5x8.7x2.5 DIN Stahl verzinkt N N N N DE 16 731
2.4 ST 56 selbstsichernde Mutter M8 self lockino nut M8 M8 DIN Stahl verzinkt N N N N DE 16 731 81 650
?5 ST Rolle Dichtband reel sealino stralo N N N N DE 16 391 91 01 2
J ST 1 Karton mit Kabeln und Zubehör oackaoe with cabel and accessories
3.1 m 2xB Kabel 2x1 mit Schutzschlauch und N N N N DE 16
Druckdose and differential pressure switch
3' ST 30 Schellen AD 15,8 clamp AD 15.8 N N N N DE
'i;ii systemair
KT 60-35-4 Dodmnttype: Productcard

Dodmntdäte: 2019{$21
GeneEled by: S)6temir Online Catalogre
Item no. 93098
Version: 50 Hz; 400V 3-
Description
o Swing-out
. Speed-conlrollable
o lntegral thermal contacts
o Can be installed in any position
. Mäintenance-free and reliable
The KT models have impellers with forward-curved blades and external rolor motors.
The motor and impeller are mounted on the access cover lo facilitate easy
maintenance. The casing is manufactured from galvanised sheet sleel. To protect the
motor from overheating the fans have inlegral thermal contacls with external leads
for connection to a motor protection device. The fans can be installed in any position
and are easy lo connect using lhe DS flexible connections. The KT fans have a pre-
wired, integral terminal box.
Technical parameters
Nomlnal data
Voltage 400 v
Frequency 50 Hz
Phase 3
lnput power (P1) 2462 \r,/
Currenl 4,O'l A
Max. airflow 4903 n'lh

Fan impeller speed 1 181 r. f,r. in
Weight 37,2 kg
Temperature data
Max. lemperature of transported air 64.5 {a
Max. temperature of transported air when voltage-controlled 64,5 'C
Sound data
Sound pressure level at 3 m (20m'Sabin) 60,1 dBrAi
Protection I Classification
lnsulation class F
Enclosure class, motor I P54
Name: KT 60-35-4 | Item no.: 93O98 | Version: 5O Hz; 4OOV 3- r/s

Document type: Product card I Document date: 2019-05-21 | Generated by: Online catalogue
ErP ready ErP 201 I
Eco design
Trade name Systemäir
P.roduct name KT 60-35-4
ErP compliance 201A
Unit category NRVU
Drive External MSD or VSD
Unit type UVU
Heat recoveryrype None
Temperature ratio (UVU) Not applicable
qv nom 1717 m'/h
P nom 721 W
) Ps nom 627 Pa
Fan efticiency 41,5 %
External Leakäge 0,61 %
Sound power level LWA 63 dB(A)
Performance
Diagrams
700
\.
L
(tt \
(I' i\
a 300
o-
\ \\ \
J 20a
I
I
t \ \ \
100
\ \\ \ \
'1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Q [m3/h]
F
^a
4r
4 v
-4 '4v
# - t
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000

Q [m"/h]
Nam€: KT 60-t5-4 I ltem no.: 93098 | Version: 50 H4 40Oy 3d 2ls

Document type: Product cärd I Document date: t019-05.-21 | G€nerated byi Onlln€ qätalogu€
Max efficiency
Hydra0lic data
Working air flow 't.716 n"lh

^
a Working stalic pressure 627 Pa
a Power 721 VJ
Speed 1424 r.p.n

Current 1,56 A
SFP 1,51 kw/{nr"/s)
Voltage 400 v
Sound power level 63 125 250 500 lk 2k 4k 8k Tot

lnlet dB(A) 67 74 64 66 73 71 70 65 73
Outlet dB(A) 66 73 69 74 79 76 75 68 83
Surrounding dB{A j 53 65 53 52 59 56 53 49 67
., Dimensions
E
D 8.0
TL o dt
s10.0
Name: KT 60-35-4 | Item no.: 93098 | Version: 50 Hz; 40OV 3- 3ls

Document type: Product card I Document date: 2019-05-21 | cenerated by: Onlin€ catalogue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I I
RGS Technischer Service GmbH
Camburger Strasse 4
99091 Erfurt
Tel. 0361 l7_50570
Fax. 0361 I 7505775
Projekt : Noor PT
System : Slipring exhaust air
Wiring color Cabinet spezifikation

Main circuit
-Phase black -cabinet make Rittal
-size 600x600x21Oxmm
-Protective Earth conductor : green - yellow -color RAL 7035
Controlcircuit -door stop right hand
-24V lSOHz : blue -cable inlet bottom
-external voltage oran9e

Power rating
-installed load 1,9 kW

-power supply 400V / 50Hz
Datum RGS
01 .08.2019
Technischer Service GmbH Slipring Exhaust air Noor PT 1
Bearb. Kronacher Camburger Strasse 4 system sheel
99091 Erturt
change clatE Name gepr.: Kreutzburg Siemens Energy Sector Erfurt 3
order-no- off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I
-2r1
24V g*
8-:
-252
3 1
-2F1
-2Ql
I ( ( q I (
>t
114
2 4 2 4 -2Q1 11
1.13 -2K1
14
2 4 6
-2Sl -2K2
1
a 5
P1
-2t<2
A2
t-- PE
EI
-x1 -x3 2.4
T 2.4 3Js I
-x1
l
'o---o'o--o 3 5W1 2.4 5 -ls
I
ta -l-g
7 x 1,5 mm'
E€ä
bo-ro M
8C,
F
c
Einspeisung o
I SOHz E
400v I 4,1 t2,5kW
Fuse max 16A
KT 60-35-4
Datum RGS
01 .08.2019
Bearb. Kronacher Camburger Strasse 4 svstem shee-l
99091 Erfurt
change date Name gepr Kreutzburg Siemens Energy Sector Erfurt J
order-no- off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
21
-2K1
24
-x2 -x3 -x3 -x3
fault fault fault motor

lilter monitoring 1
filter monitoring 2
Y -OZ2x1 mm2 Y -OZ2x1
-3B t -382
filter monitoring 1
filter monitoring 2
Datum RGS
01 .08.2019
Bearb. Kronacher Camburger Strasse 4 Prcjekt svslem sheet
99091 Erturt
change de@ Name gepr.: Kreutzburg Siemens Energy Sector Erfurt 3
order-no. off
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H A-A H
A
350
500
421
G G
717
1776
control cabinet
1540
5
633
F F
1185
200
1685
1685
E E
A
D D
pattern of drilling
brush assembly
pattern of drilling 3x232=696

pattern of drilling exhaust air 232 US and EU Export Controls
incoming air 18 660 18 Technology Classification:
3x308=924
ECCN: EAR99 AL: N US-Content: NO
308 This document is subject to national export control regulations. If US-Content is marked "Yes",
4x200=800 then US reexport regulations apply. Diversion contrary to those regulations is prohibited.
C 200 In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted. C
Dieses Dokument unterliegt nationalen Exportkontrollbestimmungen. Falls US-Content mit "Yes"
43
31 gekennzeichnet ist, sind die US Reexport Bestimmungen anzuwenden. Eine Weitergabe entgegen
242
dieser Bestimmungen ist verboten. Im Zweifelsfall kontaktieren Sie Ihre ECC Abteilung.
31
183
223
3x242=726
3x183=549
2x223=446
Rev.2 26.07.19 Wittmann Kronacher Kanallüfter ersetzt, alle Kanalteilte angepasst, item 1.8 entfällt
685
509
360
2
n10 n1
Rev. 1 13.09.16 Wittmann Kronacher Zusätzlicher Kanalteil "item 1.8"
Index Datum Gezeichent Geprüft Änderungsbeschreibung
date drawn checked description of change
Gezeichnet / drawn Datum / date Name / name

09.05.2016 P. Wittmann
Bearbeitet / constructor Datum / date Name / name
B Geprüft / checked Datum / date Name / name

C. Apel
B
760
43
09.05.2016
885
M8 Bezeichnung:
Filter/Fan Unit for Slip Ring Unit
general layout drawing
Diese Zeichnung darf ohne unser Einverständnis weder kopiert

Auftraggeber: noch dritten Personen zugänglich gemacht werden.
SIEMENS ENERGY Alle Angaben sind ohne Gewähr und eigenverantwortlich zu prüfen!
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 1 This drawing may not copied or third parties are made available,
without our consent.
D-99086 Erfurt All data are without guarantee and to check independently!
Maßstab / scale Index
2
Format / format
A A1 A
Zeichnungsnummer / drawing number
gen. Tolerance class DIN ISO 2768-m DPPPG-70117645-001

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
item 1.4
item 1.3
G item 1.2 G
item 1.7
item 2.1
item 2.2
F F
item 1.1
item 2.1* item 1.5
item 1.6
E E
item 2.2
D item 1.6
D

Technology Classification:
This document is subject to national export control regulations. If US-Content is marked "Yes",
then US reexport regulations apply. Diversion contrary to those regulations is prohibited.
C In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted. C
gekennzeichnet ist, sind die US Reexport Bestimmungen anzuwenden. Eine Weitergabe entgegen
item 2.1*
item 2.1
item 2.3 Rev.1 13.09.16 Wittmann Kronacher Zusätzlicher Kanalteil "item 1.8"
item 2.3 date drawn checked description of change

item 2.4
B Geprüft / checked Datum / date Name / name

C. Apel
B
09.05.2016
Bezeichnung:
assembly drawing

Auftraggeber:
item 2.1* are to be protected with suitable screws protection, SIEMENS ENERGY noch dritten Personen zugänglich gemacht werden.
Alle Angaben sind ohne Gewähr und eigenverantwortlich zu prüfen!
for example, with LOCTITE 243 Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 1 This drawing may not copied or third parties are made available,
sescription D-99086 Erfurt
item number All data are without guarantee and to check independently!
1.1 fan with adapter plate 1 item number description norm Maßstab / scale Index
1.2 duct moulded part as a 90° bend 1 2.1 26 screws M8x25 ISO 4017 - M8 x 25
1.3 duct fitting with canvas connestion 1 2.2 40 screws M8x35 ISO 4017 - M8 x 35 Format / format
A 1.4 duct moulded part as a transition 1 A1 A

1.5 outlet air sound absorbert 1 2.3 122 nord-lock washer DIN 125 - A 8,4
1.6 air intel filter unit 2 2.4 56 self-locking nut M8 DIN 985 - M8 Zeichnungsnummer / drawing number
1.7 control cabinet 1 2.5 2 reels sealing stralp gen. Tolerance class DIN ISO 2768-m DPPPG-70117645-002
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3x232=696
348
116 n
10
F 10x F
223
2x223=446
598
490
348
E E
740
D D
717
722
In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted.
C Dieses Dokument unterliegt nationalen Exportkontrollbestimmungen. Falls US-Content mit "Yes" C
5
740 490
620 Index Datum Gezeichent Geprüft Änderungsbeschreibung
310
09.05.2016 P.Wittmann
Geprüft / checked Datum / date Name / name
09.05.2016 C. Apel
B B
Genehmigt / approved Datum / date Name / name
0
n1
185
4x
Bezeichnung:
348
fan KT 60-35-4 with adapter plate (item 1.1)

370
weight: ca. 44kg.

598
A 2 A
Format / format
A2
gen. Tolerance class DIN ISO 2768-m DPPPG-70117645-002.1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
370
F 0 F
185 n1
4x
310
E E
348
620
598
D D
224 21 US and EU Export Controls

C 2x319=638 In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted. C
6x
n1 319 Dieses Dokument unterliegt nationalen Exportkontrollbestimmungen. Falls US-Content mit "Yes"
0 gekennzeichnet ist, sind die US Reexport Bestimmungen anzuwenden. Eine Weitergabe entgegen
31 Rev.2 26.07.19 Wittmann Kronacher Kanallüfter ersetzt, alle Kanalteilte angepasst, item 1.8 entfällt

380

420
B B
598 09.05.2016 C.Apel
Bezeichnung:
duct moulded part as a 90° bend (item 1.2)
210
230
230
weight: ca. 8,5kg.

40
50 2
A Format / format
A
224
A2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
2x319=638 120
319 10 (assymbly stress100)
n
E 6x E
210
380
D D
420
598

31


B B
09.05.2016 C.Apel
Bezeichnung:
duct fitting with canvas connestion (item 1.3)
weight: ca. 3kg.

A 2 A
Format / format
A2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
2x319=638 3x308=924
319 462
107,5
n
10
12x
363
210
380
E E
3x242=726
420
685
45
598
31 885
n1
0
6x
31
197,5
D D
473


B B
09.05.2016 C.Apel
Bezeichnung:
duct moulded part as a transition (item 1.4)
weight: ca. 13kg.

A 2 A
Format / format
A2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
500 3x308=924
n1
2
F F
3x242=726
E E
685
200 200 200
D D
31
95 95
885


B B
09.05.2016 C.Apel
Bezeichnung:
outlet air sound absorbert (item 1.5)
weight: ca. 40kg.

A 2 A
Format / format
A2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4x200=800
14x 400
F 200 n1 F
0
filter mat
274,5
755x505
E E
3x183=549
509
D D
760 31

In case of doubt, Export Compliance Department must be contacted.
C Dieses Dokument unterliegt nationalen Exportkontrollbestimmungen. Falls US-Content mit "Yes" C
Rev.1 13.09.16 Wittmann Kronacher Zusätzlicher Kanalteil "item 1.8"

09.05.2016 P.Wittmann
05.08.2019 C.Apel
B B
Genehmigt / approved Datum / date Name / name
Bezeichnung:
air intel filter unit (item 1.6)
weight: ca. 20kg.

A 2 A
Format / format
A2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Turbogenerator
Description
Excitation System
Brush Gear
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Static Excitation System
Components and Purchased Parts
The excitation current fort he rotor winding is The wear of each individual carbon brush can
obtained from a stationary excitation equipment. be checked during operation by inserting a dip
Slip ring and carbon brushes are used to transmit stick into the bore the telescopic plunger. Easy
the excitation current to the rotating generator brush replacement requiring no interruption of
rotor. For enabling a replacement of worn carbon service permits a full utilization down to the
brushes during operation at full speed and with live wearing limit of each individual carbon brush.
equipment, the brush gear comprises plug-in brush
holders. Simple and rapid withdrawal of the plug-in
brush holders enables the number of carbon
The plug-in brush holders are inserted in brush brushes in operation to be matched to the
holder boxes which are attached to brush spindles. respective excitation current for maintaining a
The brush holder is designed for a square brush favorable current density.
32x32 mm and 64 mm long with cable and cable
lug. The brush holder essentially comprises the
holder body with brush guide, a telescopic plunger
with thrust pin and retaining arm with spring. For
brush replacement, the retaining arm should be
actuated to clamp the brush in the brush guide
through a plastic plug and the brush holder
released from the box. The brush holder can now
be withdrawn and is no longer alive, permitting a
replacement of the carbon brush outside the
machine. The brush holder is of unsymmetrical

shape rendering impossible any wrong insertion.
Any accidental contact between the brush holder
and the rotating slip-ring is precluded by a stop.
Siemens AG 4.1-9000-0003
Turbogenerator Brush Holder
Description
1 Handle
2 Pressure spring
3 Clamping pin
4 Telescope spring sleeve
5 Pressure spring
6 Pressure pin
7 Brush guide
8 Carbon brush
(Contact surfaces are tinned)
Siemens AG 4.1-3379-0003
Turbogenerator Exciter Current Transmission
Description Brush Complement
Fig. 2: Schematic arrangement of brushes on slip rings
NOTICE
Wrong brush arrangement may result
in machine damage!
Pay attention to the axial rotor dis-
placement with the arrangement of
the plug-in brush mounts. The carbon
brushes must seat on the slip rings at
all thrust and expansion conditions.
The abrasion of the slip rings should
Fig. 1: Schematic arrangement of brushes on slip rings be as equally spaced as possible.
Siemens AG 4.1-3377-EG000425
Turbogenerator
Description
Rotor Grounding System

Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Rotor Grounding System
Description
Grounding brushes are fitted to the bearing or labyrinth ring to remove the static charges of the shaft train.
When grounding brushes ar fitted, the direction of rotation of the rotor must be observed. In anti-clockwise
operation, brushes are to be mounted as showen in fig. 1; for clockwise operation, see fig. 2.
Fig. 1: Plug-in brush holder with grounding brushes in Fig. 2: Plug-in brush holder with grounding brushes
anti-clockwise operation in clockwise operation
1 Handle lever (moveable) 1 Handle lever (moveable)

2 Finger plate 2 Finger plate
3 Two–layer grounding brush (design A) 3 Two–layer grounding brush (design A)
4 Two–layer grounding brush (design A) 4 Two–layer grounding brush (design A)
5 Rotor surface 5 Rotor surface
6 Plug-in brush holder 6 Plug-in brush holder
The brush holders are arranged with 90° displacement. This arrangement ensures, that at least one brush will
make contact with the rotating shaft train.
Fig. 3: Arrangement of plug-in brush holder with a 90° displacement
Siemens AG 4.1-8351-0003
Turbogenerator
Description
Monitoring Vibration
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Turbogenerator Shaft Vibration Monitoring
Components and Purchased Parts Bently Nevada: Proximity Transducer
System 3300 XL
Manufacturer: Bently Nevada Corporation
Documentation title: Proximity Transducer System 3300 XL

Installation Manual
Certificates of Compliance
No. of pages: 97
Siemens AG 4.1-8636-0005 /1 of 98
Installation Manual
Bently Nevada™ Asset Condition Monitoring
3300 XL 8mm & 3300 5mm Proximity

Transducer System
Part Number 141078-01

Rev. K (11/07)
3300 XL 8mm & 3300 5mm Proximity Transducer System Installation Manual
Copyright 1999. Bently Nevada LLC.

All rights reserved.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
The following are trademarks of General Electric Company in the United States and other
countries:
Bently Nevada, Proximitor, Keyphasor, TipLoc, CableLoc, FluidLoc
The following are trademarks of the legal entities cited:
Teflon is a trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
Contact Information
The following contact information is provided for those times when you cannot contact
your local representative:
Mailing Address 1631 Bently Parkway South

Minden, Nevada USA 89423
USA
Telephone 1.775.782.3611
1.800.227.5514
Fax 1.775.215.2873
Internet www.ge-energy.com/bently
ii
Additional Information
Notice:
This manual does not contain all the information required to operate and maintain
the product. Refer to the following manuals for other required information.
Installing the Transducer

Best Practices Document - Proximity Probes and Related Accessories: The Installation
and Application of Eddy Current Proximity Transducers.
Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery Information
Systems.
Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.
Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity Probes for Overspeed Protection
Applications.
“Glitch”: Definition of and Methods for Correction, Including Shaft Burnishing to Remove
Electrical Runout.
Transducer Installation Accessories
31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Manual (Part Number 124200-01).
31000/32000 Proximity Probe Housing Data Sheet (Part Number 141610-01)
Housings for Proximitor Sensors and Interface Modules Data Sheet (Part Number
141599-01)
3300 XL Monitor and Transducer Verification Kits Data Sheet (Part Number 141196-01)
Electrical and Mechanical Runout
API 670, Fourth Edition, Sections 6.1.1 (Location and Orientation – Radial Shaft Vibration
Probes) and 6.1.2 (Location and Orientation – Axial Position Probes. Available from the
American Petroleum Institute, Publications and Distribution, 1220 L Street NW,
Washington DC, 20005, USA.
Reference (133055-01)
Bently Nevada Glossary.
iii
Product Disposal Statement

Customers and third parties, who are not member states of the European Union, who are
in control of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its use, are solely
responsible for the proper disposal of the product. No person, firm, corporation,
association or agency that is in control of product shall dispose of it in a manner that is
in violation of any applicable federal, state, local or international law. Bently Nevada LLC
is not responsible for the disposal of the product at the end of its life or at the end of its
use.
Symbols
Procedures in this manual use the following symbols:
Connect Disconnect Observe Record

Value
European CE mark for the Bently Nevada 3300 XL

Transducer System
In this Document
is a list of the 3300 XL Transducer Assemblies that have the CE mark, applicable
standards used for certification, and installation instructions required for compliance.
Proximity Transducer Systems

are electronic devices typically used in industrial applications. The 3300 XL Transducer
System has been certified using the same Technical Construction File (TCF) and
Declaration of Conformity as the 3300 8mm Transducer System because they are similar
in design and application. The 3300 XL Proximity Transducer System consists of a
Proximitor® Sensor, Proximity Probe, and Extension Cable.
TCF through TUV Rheinland of North America

A Technical Construction File has been prepared through TUV Rheinland of North
America (TUV Rheinland File Number: P9472350.07). The Certificate of Compliance is for
Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive). The applicable Generic Norms are: EN50081-2 and
EN50082-2.
Installation Instructions
These instructions are an addition to the Installation Instructions in Section 2.
Proximity Probes
All probe cases must have a solid connection to earth ground.
iv
Compliant Systems and Component Part Numbers
# Model Model Numbers
1 3300 XL 8mm and 330180, 330101*, 330102*, 330103*, 330104*, 330105*, 330106*, 330140,
3300 5mm 330141, 330145, 330171, 330172, 330173, 330174, 330191, 330192, 330193,
330194, 330195, 330196, 330197, 330198, 330255, 330130, and 330190**
Includes all options and all approval versions of the base model numbers listed
*--Pre XL probes and cables may be used as part of a CE XL system.
**--any proximity probe, or extension cable that works correctly with the listed module.
Testing and Test Levels

Criteria
Title Test Levels
(See Note 6)
EN 55011
Emission Class A N/A
Emissions
EN 61000-4-2 4 kV; 8 kV
A
ESD See Note 1
ENV 50140 (EN61000-4-3) 10 V/m
A
Radiated RFI See Note 2
ENV 50204 10 V/m
A
Radiated RFI See Note 3
EN 61000-4-4 2 kV
B
EFT See Note 4
ENV 50142 (EN61000-4-5) 0.5 kV
A
Surge See Note 4
ENV 50141 (EN 61000-4-6) 10 V
B
Conducted RFI See Note 5
EN 61000-4-8
30 A/m, 50 Hz A
Magnetic Fields
Notes for the table “Testing and Test Levels”

1. Discharge method: Contact; Air
2. 80-1000 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation
3. 900 MHz dwell with 100% 200 Hz square wave modulation
4. Lines tested: I/O
5. 150 kHz-80 MHz sweep with 80% 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulation
6. For the purposes of the 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm System CE certification, the
following criteria are defined as follows:
v
x Criteria A: Transducer system will output less than one third of a 3mil p-p
meter scale (less than 1 mil p-p) and will return to steady state after test
completion.
x Criteria B: Transducer system may react in any manner during test, but
must self recover after test completion.
x Criteria C: N/A
vi
Contents
1. System Description .....................................................................................1

1.1 Transducer Systems...........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Proximitor® Sensor ............................................................................................................................................2
1.3 Proximity Probe and Extension Cable........................................................................................................2
1.4 Connectors..............................................................................................................................................................2
1.5 Extended Temperature Range Applications...........................................................................................3
1.6 Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System .................................................................................4
1.7 Customer Service.................................................................................................................................................4
2. Installation ...................................................................................................5
2.1 Installing the Probe .............................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Mounting the Proximitor® Sensor...............................................................................................................8
2.3 Interchangeable Mounting Feet................................................................................................................10
2.4 Mounting the Proximitor® Sensor with DIN Mount Part ...............................................................10
2.5 Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail .........................................................................12
2.6 Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block ............................................................................12
2.7 Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring....................................................................................13
3. Maintenance and Troubleshooting........................................................17
3.1 Scale Factor Verification ...............................................................................................................................19
3.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................22
3.3 Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc............................................................................24
3.4 Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc.............................................................................................................................25
3.5 Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc...........................................................................................................25
3.6 Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc ............................................................................................28
3.7 Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR ............................................................................................................................... 29
4. System Specifications...............................................................................31
4.1 Electrical................................................................................................................................................................31
4.2 Mechanical...........................................................................................................................................................39
4.3 Environmental Limits ......................................................................................................................................42
4.3.1 Probe Temperature Range .....................................................................................................................42
4.3.2 Extension Cable Temperature Range................................................................................................43
4.3.3 Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range............................................................................................43
4.4 Patents...................................................................................................................................................................44
5. System Ordering Information .................................................................45
5.1 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes................................................................................................................45
5.2 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric................................................................................................46
5.3 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes....................................................................................................47
5.4 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case.................................................................................48
5.5 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes ...................................48
5.6 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric....................49
5.7 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Reverse Mount Probes .......................50
5.8 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case.....51
5.9 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes......................................................................................................................51
5.10 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric.................................................................................................52
vii
5.11 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 53
5.12 3300 XL Extension Cable ......................................................................................................................... 54
5.13 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Extension Cable............................................. 55
5.14 Mounting Brackets ..................................................................................................................................... 55
5.14.1 Aluminum Probe Clamp Bracket.................................................................................................... 55
5.14.2 Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket........................................................................ 56
5.14.3 Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket............................................................................ 56
5.15 Accessories .................................................................................................................................................... 56
6. System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings ........................................61
7. Micrometer Specifications and Ordering Information ......................81
7.1 Mechanical .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
7.2 Ordering Information...................................................................................................................................... 82
7.2.1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer.............................................................................................................. 82
7.2.2 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer ...................................................................................................................... 82
7.2.3 Accessories .................................................................................................................................................... 83
7.3 Dimensional Drawings................................................................................................................................... 84
viii
Section 1 - System Description
1. System Description
1.1 Transducer Systems
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
x a 3300 XL 8 mm probe
x a 3300 XL extension cable1
x a 3300 XL Proximitor® Sensor2
The 3300 XL 8 mm system represents our most advanced performance in an
eddy current proximity transducer system. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm system is
also 100% compliant with the American Petroleum Institute’s (API) 670 Standard
(4th Edition) for such transducers. All 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer Systems
achieve this level of performance while allowing complete interchangeability of
probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the need for individual
component matching or bench calibration.
Each component of the 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System is backward
compatible and interchangeable4 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 and 8 mm
transducer system components5. This includes the 3300 5 mm probe, which is
used when an 8 mm probe is too large for the available mounting space4, 5, and 6.
The 3300 5mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
x a 3300 5 mm probe 5, 6, 7
x a 3300 XL extension cable1
x a 3300 XL Proximitor® Sensor2
Like the 3300 XL 8mm, the 3300 5mm system also provides an accurate, stable
signal output over a wide temperature range while allowing complete
interchangeability of probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor without the
need for individual component matching or bench calibration.
Both systems provide an output voltage directly proportional to the distance
between the probe tip and the observed conductive surface. They are capable of
both static (position) and dynamic (vibration) measurements, and are primarily
used for vibration and position measurement applications on fluid-film bearing
machines, as well as Keyphasor® measurement and speed measurement
applications3.
1
1.2 Proximitor® Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over
previous designs. Its physical packaging permits high-density DIN-rail
installation. It can also be mounted in a traditional panel mount configuration,
where it shares an identical “footprint” to older 4-hole mounted 3300 Proximitor
Sensor. The mounting base for either option provides electrical isolation,
eliminating the need for separate isolator plates. The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
is highly immune to radio frequency interference, allowing installation in
fiberglass housings without adverse effects from nearby radio frequency signals.
Improved RFI/EMI immunity allows the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor to achieve
European CE mark approvals without requiring special shielded conduit or
metallic housings, resulting in lower installation costs and complexity.
The 3300 XL’s SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and
facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type
clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
1.3 Proximity Probe and Extension Cable

The 3300 XL probe and XL extension cable also reflect improvements over
previous designs. A patented TipLoc™ molding method provides a more robust
bond between the probe tip and the probe body. The probe’s cable is more
securely attached as well, incorporating a patented CableLoc™ design that
provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull strength where the probe cable attaches to the probe
tip.
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and XL Extension Cables can also be ordered with an
optional FluidLoc® cable option. This option prevents oil and other liquids from
leaking out of the machine through the cable’s interior.
1.4 Connectors
The 3300 XL 8mm and 3300 5mm probe, extension cable, and Proximitor Sensor
have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated ClickLoc connectors. These connectors
require only finger-tight torque (connectors will "click"), and the specially
engineered locking mechanism prevents the connectors from loosening. They do
not require any special tools for installation or removal.
3300 XL 8 mm Probes and Extension Cables can also be ordered with connector
protectors already installed. Connector protectors can also be supplied separately
for installation in the field (such as when the cable must be run through restrictive
conduit). Connector protectors are recommended for all installations and provide
increased environmental protection8.
2
Section 1 - System Description
1.5 Extended Temperature Range Applications
An Extended Temperature Range (ETR) Probe and Extension Cable are available
for applications where either the probe lead or extension cable may exceed the
177 qC (350 qF) temperature specification. The Extended Temperature Range
Probe has an extended temperature rating for up to 260 qC (500 qF) for the probe
lead and connector. The probe tip must remain below 177 qC (350 qF). The
Extended Temperature Range Extension Cable is also rated for up to 260 qC (500
qF). Both the ETR probe and cable are compatible with standard temperature
probes and cables. For example, you can utilize an ETR probe with the 330130
extension cable. The ETR system uses the standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor.
When using any ETR component as part of your system, the accuracy is limited to
the accuracy of the ETR system.
Notes:
1. 1-metre systems do not use an extension cable.
2. Proximitor® Sensors are supplied by default from the factory calibrated to AISI 4140 steel.
Calibration to other target materials is available upon request.
3. Consult Bently Nevada Applications Note Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity
Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications when considering this transducer system for
tachometer or overspeed measurements.
4. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and physically interchangeable with non-XL
3300 5 and 8 mm components. Although the packaging of the 3300 XL Proximitor® Sensor
differs from its predecessor, it is designed to fit in the same 4-hole mounting pattern when
used with the 4-hole mounting base, and will fit within the same mounting space
specifications (when minimum permissible cable bend radius is observed).
5. When XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 and 8 mm system components are mixed, system
performance is limited to the specifications for the non-XL 3300 5 and 8 mm Transducer
System.
6. A 5 mm probe uses smaller physical packaging while providing the same linear range as a
3300 XL 8 mm probe (ref 141194-01); however, it does not permit reduced side view
clearances or tip-to-tip spacing requirements compared to an XL 8 mm probe. It is used
when physical (not electrical) constraints preclude the use of an 8 mm probe, such as
mounting between thrust bearing pads or other constrained spaces. When narrow side view
probes are required, use the 3300 XL NSv™ probe and extension cable with the 3300 XL NSv
Proximitor® Sensor (refer to Specifications and Ordering Information p/n 147385-01).
7. XL 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of the probe coil in the molded PPS plastic
probe tip. This results in a more rugged probe than the 3300 5 mm probe. The larger
diameter of the probe body also provides a stronger, more robust case. Bently Nevada£, LLC
recommends the use of XL 8 mm probes when possible to provide optimal robustness against
physical abuse.
8. Silicone tape is also provided with each 3300 XL extension cable and can be used instead of
connector protectors. Silicone tape is not recommended in applications where the probe-to-
extension cable connection will be exposed to turbine oil.
3
1.6 Receiving, Inspecting, and Handling the System
The probe, extension cable and Proximitor Sensor are shipped as separate units
and must be interconnected at the installation site by the user. Carefully remove
all equipment from the shipping containers and inspect the equipment for
shipping damage. If shipping damage is apparent, file a claim with the carrier
and submit a copy to the nearest Bently Nevada LLC office. Include part numbers
and serial numbers on all correspondence. If no damage is apparent and the
equipment is not going to be used immediately, return the equipment to the
shipping containers and reseal until ready for use.
Store the equipment in an environment free from potentially damaging conditions
such as high temperature or a corrosive atmosphere. See on page 42 for
environmental specifications.
1.7 Customer Service

We maintain numerous Sales and Service offices worldwide. To locate the office
nearest you, visit our website http://www.bently.com. Here, you can also find
specifications on all standard product offerings.
Support for products and services should be directed to one of these
departments:
For product quotations, product applications, product ordering, scheduling on-
site services, and questions regarding existing orders, please contact your nearby
Bently Nevada, LLC Sales sales and service office.
For general product pricing, delivery, or other ordering information, contact your
local BN office or contact Customer Service Department, Minden, Nevada, USA
Phone: 1-775-215-1011 Fax: 1-775-215-2873.
For technical questions or problems regarding our products, contact our
Technical Support Staff at:
techsupport@bently.com
or at the following locations:
Technical Support (North America)
Phone: 1-775-782-1818 Fax: 1-775-215-2890
Technical Support (UK)

Phone: (44) 1925 818504 Fax: (44) 1925 817819
4
Section 2 - Installation
2. Installation
This section contains a checklist of items that you must consider when you install
a 3300 XL Transducer system.
2.1 Installing the Probe

The following figures show the probe sizes and the minimum values for probe
separation, side clearance and target configuration. Refer to Table 4-6 on page
41 for proper torque and the dimensions of the thread.
Callout Description XL 8 mm probe 5 mm probe
Probe tip 8 mm 5 mm
M10x1, 3/8-24, or
Thread types M8x1 or 1/4-28
unthreaded
Wrench Flats 8 mm or 5/16 in 7 mm or 7/32 in
17 mm or 9/16 in 13 mm or 7/16
Lock nut
Hex Hex
Figure 2-1: Probe Dimensions
5
2
1. 76.2 mm (3.00 in) minimum (See Note 1 below)
2. 15.2 mm (0.60 in) minimum
Figure 2-2: 5mm and XL 8mm Probe Target Sizes
3 3
1. 6.4 mm (0.25 in) minimum

2. 17.8 mm (0.70 in) minimum
3. 8.9 mm (0.35 in) minimum
Figure 2-3: 5mm and XL 8mm Probe Mounting Dimensions
6
2
1 2
1. 50.8 mm (2.00 in) minimum (See Note 2 below)

2. 16.0 mm (0.63 in) minimum
3. 40.6 mm (1.60 in) minimum
Figure 2-4: 5mm and XL 8mm Probe-to-Probe Separation Due To Cross Talk
NOTES
1. At or below 76.2 mm (3.00 in), scale factor
will increase as the target size is reduced
per performance specification 159484. See
the application advisory below.
2. At or below 50.8 mm (2.00 in), cross talk will
produce a small vibration signal per
performance specifications 159484, due to
cross talk.
7
Application Advisory
Mounting dimensions and target size affect the scale

factor of proximity transducer systems. The minimum
recommended dimensions above were chosen to
minimize error yet retain flexibility for different
mounting situations.
Adjust the distance between the probe tip and the shaft using one of the methods
shown in Figure 2-5. The electrical method for setting the probe gap is preferred.
1 2
-9 V -24 V ±1
3
5
4 6
8
7 / #&'+075 #
1.27 mm
(50 mil)
9 10
1. Voltmeter
2. Power supply
3. Voltage at center of the linear range (typically –9 V)
4. Space
5. OUT
6. COM
7. VT
8. 10 k, 1% resistor
9. Mechanical method
10. Electrical method
Figure 2-5: Methods for Setting the Probe Gap
2.2 Mounting the Proximitor® Sensor

Mount the Proximitor Sensor in a location that is compatible with its
environmental specifications (see Environmental Limits on page 42).
8
Consider the local electrical codes and the presence of hazardous or
explosive gas at the installation site. (Refer to the document
Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.)
70.9
/#&'+075#
28.7 31.8
(2.79)
(1.13) (1.25)
88.6
(3.49)
1. 35mm Din Rail
Figure 2-6: DIN Rail Mount Dimensions
/#&'+075#
50.8 61.0 63.2

(2.00) (2.40) (2.49)
50.8 1 80.3
(2.00) (3.16)
1. 4.0 mm (0.158 in) for M3.5 or #6 screw
Figure 2-7: Panel Mount Dimensions
9
2.3 Interchangeable Mounting Feet
The mounting feet for the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor are
interchangeable. If you purchase a Proximitor Sensor with one
mounting option (either the DIN mount option or the panel mount
option) you can change the mounting hardware simply by replacing
the mounting foot that is currently on the Proximitor Sensor with the
other type of mounting foot.
1. DIN Mount Part (part number 138493-01)

2. 3300 XL Proximitor® Sensor
3. Panel Mount Part (part number 138492-01)
Figure 2-8: Mounting Foot Options
2.4 Mounting the Proximitor® Sensor with DIN Mount

Part
To mount the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor with a DIN Mount Part on a DIN rail:
1. Install the Proximitor Sensor into the DIN Mount Part (if not already installed)
as shown in Figure 2-9.
10
Figure 2-9: Installing the DIN Rail Mounting Foot

2. Examine the under side of the DIN Mounting Foot. This part has a spring-
loaded clip on one side and two protrusions that will catch the edge of the DIN
rail on the other side. You must install the side with the two protrusions so
that the edge of the DIN rail fits into the gap as shown in Figure 2-10.
1. Spring-loaded clip
2. DIN rail
3. Edge of DIN rail must fit into this gap
Figure 2-10: Inserting the Mounting Foot Onto the DIN Rail
3. Push down on the Proximitor Sensor as shown in Figure 2-11 until the unit
“snaps” into place. The unit is now installed.
11
Figure 2-11: Snapping the Sensor Onto the DIN Rail
2.5 Removing the Proximitor Sensor from the DIN Rail

Use a regular screwdriver to remove the Proximitor Sensor from the
DIN rail by using a regular screwdriver to unclip the unit from the rail.
Insert a regular screwdriver into the rear of the spring-loaded clip (see
Figure 2-12). Push the top of the screwdriver towards the Proximitor
Sensor to pry the spring-loaded clip back so that you can remove the
Proximitor Sensor from the DIN rail.
Figure 2-12: Retracting the Spring-Loaded Clip
2.6 Termination of Field Wiring in the Terminal Block

1. Strip the insulation from the field wiring you will install into the terminal block.
The recommended strip length is 10 mm (0.4 in.).
2. You must twist the conductor strands together before installing the field wire
into the terminal block (see Figure 2-13). We highly recommended that you tin
the conductor strands as well.
12
Figure 2-13: Proper Preparation of Wire Strands

3. The terminal block can accommodate field wiring conductor sizes of 0.2 – 1.5
mm2 (16 – 24 AWG).
4. Use a small regular screwdriver to push down the orange lever that
corresponds to the position in the terminal block where you will install the field
wire and insert the field wire (see Figure 2-14).
1. Small screwdriver
2. Field wiring
Figure 2-14: Inserting Field Wiring Into Proximitor

To remove the field wire push down on the orange lever and pull on the field wire
to remove it from the terminal block. If the field wiring uses a stranded wire and a
strand break off inside the terminal block, turn the Proximitor Sensor upside down
while pushing down the orange lever and remove the strand from the terminal
block.
2.7 Routing the Extension Cable and Field Wiring

Route the extension cable using the following guidelines.
x Verify that the sum of the extension cable and probe lead lengths equal
the Proximitor Sensor system length. (For example, a 9-metre Proximitor
Sensor will work with an 8-metre extension cable and a 1-metre probe.)
13
x Use the system color identification to verify component compatibility for
all system components. For the 3300 XL 8 mm system and 3300 5 mm
probe, components will be marked with a blue color code.
x Use mounting clips or similar devices to secure the extension cable to
supporting surfaces.
x Identify the probe and both ends of the extension cable by inserting labels
under the clear Teflon® sleeves and applying heat to shrink the tubing.
x Join the coax connectors between the Proximitor Sensor, extension cable
and probe lead. Tighten connectors to finger tight.
x Use either a connector protector or self-fusing silicone tape to insulate the
connection between the probe lead and the extension cable. Do not use
self-fusing silicone tape to insulate a connection at locations that may
expose the silicone tape to turbine oil.
x If the probe is in a part of the machine that is under pressure or vacuum,

use appropriate cable seals and terminal boxes to seal the hole where the
extension cable exits the machine.
Use Figure 2-15and Figure 2-16 to connect the field wiring between the
Proximitor Sensor and the monitoring instruments. (Refer to the documents
Guidelines for Grounding (Earthing) Bently Nevada Rotating Machinery Information
System and Installation of Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas.)
1
Vt
2 COM
OUT
3 6 7 8
4 5
1. Transducer power
2. Common (ground)
3. Input signal
4. Monitor terminal strip
5. Cable shield
6. Proximitor sensor
7. Connector protector
8. Probe
Figure 2-15: Installation With No Barriers or With 3300/3500 Internal Barriers
14
1
Vt
2 COM
OUT
3 7 8 9
4 5 6 5
1. Transducer power
2. Common (ground)
3. Input signal
4. Monitor terminal strip
5. Cable shield
6. External barrier
8. Connector protector
9. Probe
Figure 2-16: Installation With External Barriers
15
Section 3 - Maintenance and Troubleshooting
3. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

This section shows how to verify that the system is operating properly and
identify parts of the system that are not working properly.
When properly installed and verified the 3300 XL Transducer System (probe, cable
and Proximitor Sensor) does not need calibration or verification at regular
intervals. If the monitor OK light (green) indicates a NOT OK condition (i.e., the light
is not illuminated), then
x a fault has occurred in the field wiring/transducer system/power source,

x the probe is too close to target,
x the probe is detecting other material than the target,
x the target material is not AISI 4140, or
x the probe is too far from the target.
We recommend the following practices to ensure continued satisfactory
operation of your 3300 XL system. Verify operation using the scale factor
verification method on the following page, if you
x replace any of the system components (probe, cable or Proximitor Sensor),
x remove and reinstall or move and remount any of the components,
x determine that any of the components are damaged, or
x overhaul the machine being monitored.
Please note that a sudden change in the output of the transducer system or other
output that is not consistent with the associated machinery’s trended data is, in
most instances, not a transducer problem but a machinery problem. You can
verify the transducer system under these conditions at your discretion.
Under harsh operating conditions some users prefer to verify all transducers at a
regular interval. As noted above, the 3300 XL Transducer System does not require
this. Users who wish to verify the system on a regular interval should use an
interval consistent with their own practices and procedures, which may or may
not be based upon ISO 10012-1 “Quality Assurance Requirements for Measuring
Equipment” (section 4.11).
For target materials other than AISI 4140 steel and for other special applications,
contact your local sales office.
17
NOTE
Hazardous location areas must be free
of hazardous materials before any
maintenance or troubleshooting can be
performed.
The scale factor verification requires the following instruments and equipment:
x Digital multimeter
x Spindle micrometer
x 10 k fixed resistor
x Power supply (-24 Vdc r 1 V)
The scale factor verification uses the test setup shown in Figure 3-1.
1 2
4 Vdc
-24 Vdc
5 Vin Com
6 3
+ -
7 8
1. Multimeter
2. Power supply
3. 10 k resistor
4. OUT
5. COM
6. VT
8. Probe, target, and spindle micrometer
Figure 3-1: Scale Factor Verification Test Setup
18
3.1 Scale Factor Verification
1. Compensate for mechanical backlash and adjust the spindle
micrometer for electrical zero.
1. 0.46 mm (18 mils)

2. 0.50 mm (20 mils)
Figure 3-2: Adjusting Spindle Micrometer for Electrical Zero

2. Adjust the gap to electrical zero by moving the probe.
1. Multimeter
2. –3.00 Vdc ± 0.1 Vdc
Figure 3-3: Adjusting Gap for Electrical Zero
19
3. Compensate for mechanical backlash in the micrometer and adjust to
the start of the linear range.
1. 0.50 mm (20 mils)

2. 0.20 mm (8 mils)
3. 0.25 mm (10 mils)
Figure 3-4: Compensating for Mechanical Backlash

4. Record voltages in Table 3-1 and calculate Incremental Scale Factors
(ISFs) and Average Scale Factor (ASF) using the equations given below.
2
3
1. Multimeter
2. Vdcn reading
3. Increments: 0.25 mm (10 mils)
Figure 3-5: Adjusting Spindle Micrometer for Recording Voltages

20
Table 3-1: Table for Recording Measurement Voltages

Record
Adjust Micrometer to… Calculate Scale Factor
Voltages
N ISFn Vdiffn
mmn miln Vdcn (Incremental (Difference
Scale Factor) Voltage)
1 0.25 10 >> >>
2 0.50 20 >> >> >>
3 0.75 30 >> >> >>
4 1.00 40 >> >> >>
5 1.25 50 >> >> >>
6 1.50 60 >> >> >>
7 1.75 70 >> >> >>
8 2.00 80 >> >> >>
9 2.25 90 >> >> >>
ASF (Average
Scale Factor)
>> = Enter values into these cells
>>
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n Vdc 0.25 mm Vdc 2.25 mm

ISFn (V/mm) = ASF(V/mm) =
0.25 2
Vdc n - 1 Vdc n Vdc 10 mil Vdc 90 mil
ISFn (mV/mil) ASF(mV/mil) =
0.01 0.08
Vdiff n = Vdc n (mm n x 7.87) Vdiffn = Vdcn + (miln • 0.2)
5. Use the following formula to determine maximum Deviation from

Straight Line (DSL):
Vdif (max) Vdif (min)
DSL(mm) = = ______ mm
15.74
Vdif (max) Vdif (min)
DSL(mil) = = ______ mil
0.4
21
If the ISF or DSL of the system is out of tolerance, contact Bently Nevada LLC for
further information on possible calibration problems.
The preceding pages indicate scale factor verification using a TK-3. This is
suitable for rough verification. For API 670 system verification a more precise
micrometer and target must be used. There are two different 3300 XL
Micrometer Kits that you can use to verify the calibration of Bently Nevada
transducer systems or to check the scale factor of specific shafts. Both
micrometer kits will work with Bently Nevada eddy current transducers ranging in
size from the 3300 XL NSv™ Transducer System up to the 3300 XL 11 mm
Transducer Systems. Both micrometer kits also have options for either a metric
or English micrometer.
The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer (part number 330185) is a highly accurate
verification device. You should use this device when performing acceptance
testing on our transducer systems. All of our transducer systems have a specified
linear range and average scale factor (ASF). The transducer systems also have a
maximum deviation from straight line (DSL) and ISF tolerances for ambient and
extended temperatures. The 3300 XL Precision Micrometer comes with a high
precision 4140 steel target to make precise measurements and verify whether
the transducer system is working properly and within published specifications.
The 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer (part number 330186) is used to check the scale
factor of the transducer system directly on your shaft. You can compare the
scale factor of your transducer system with that of a 4140 steel target supplied by
Bently Nevada LLC to check whether errors in the measurement are due to
runout, target material or a problem in the transducer system.
3.2 Troubleshooting
This section shows how to interpret a fault indication and isolate faults in an
installed transducer system. Before beginning this procedure, be sure that you
have installed the system correctly and properly secured all connectors in the
correct locations.
When a malfunction occurs, locate the appropriate fault, check the probable
causes for the fault indication and follow the given procedures to isolate and
correct the fault. Use a digital voltmeter to measure voltage. If you find faulty
transducers, contact your local sales and service office for assistance.
The troubleshooting procedures use measured voltages as shown in Figure 3-6,
Table 3-2, and Table 3-3:
22
1 2
/#&'+ 075#
3
1. VPS
2. VXDCR
3. VSIG
Figure 3-6: Troubleshooting Voltages
Table 3-2. Symbols for Measured Voltages

Voltage measured
Symbol Meaning
between...
Signal voltage from the
VSIG OUT and COM
transducer
VPS Power supply voltage Power Source and Common
VXDCR Supply voltage at transducer -VT and COM
NOTE
VSIG, VPS, and VXDCR are all negative
voltage values.
Table 3-3: Definitions

Symbol Definition Example
A>B "A" value is more positive than "B" -21 > -23
A<B "A" value is more negative than "B" -12 < -5
A=B "A" same value (or very close) to "B" -24.1 = -24.0
23
3.3 Fault Type 1: VXDCR > -17.5 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc
Possible causes:
x Faulty power source
x Faulty field wiring
x Faulty Proximitor Sensor
/#&' +075#
1. VPS
Figure 3-7: Fault Type 1 Measurement 1
Measure VPS: Is VPS > -23 Vdc or VPS < -26 Vdc?
Yes: Faulty power supply.
No: Go to next step.
/#&'+0 75#
1. VXDCR
24
Measure VXDCR: Is VXDCR > -23 Vdc or VXDCR < -26 Vdc?
Yes: Faulty Field wiring.
No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor.
3.4 Fault Type 2: VSIG = O Vdc

Possible causes:
x Incorrect power source voltage
x Short circuit in field wiring
x Short circuit at Proximitor Sensor terminal connection
Does fault condition type 1 exist?
Yes: Use the procedure for fault type 1
No: Go to the next step
/#&'+075#
1. VSIG
Figure 3-9: Fault Type 2 Measurement
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = 0 Vdc?

No: Incorrect power source voltage or short in field wiring or short at
Proximitor Sensor terminal connection.
Yes: Faulty Proximitor® Sensor.
3.5 Fault Type 3: -1 Vdc < VSIG < 0 Vdc

Possible causes:
x Probe is incorrectly gapped (too close to target)
25
x Probe is detecting other material than target (counter bore or machine
case)
x Short or open circuit in a connector (dirty or wet) or loose connectors
x Short or open circuit in the probe
x Short or open circuit in extension cable
Is the probe gapped correctly? Are counter bore dimensions correct? (See
Installing the Probe on page 5.)
No: Regap the probe or check counter bore. Retest system.
Yes Go to the next step.
1
2
/#&'+075#
4 5
1. Step 1
2. Step 2
3. Original probe extension cable
4. VSIG
5. Known good probe with correct length cable (open gap with probe held away from conductive material
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG < VXDCR + 1 Vdc?

No: Faulty Proximitor Sensor
Yes: Go to next step
26

Inspect for clean connection: Is the connection dirty, rusty, or a poor connection?
Yes: Clean the connector using isopropyl alcohol or electronic terminal cleaner,
reassemble and retest the system.
No: Go to the next step.
1
1. RTOTAL
Figure 3-12: Fault type 3 Measurement 3
Measure resistance RTOTAL: Is RTOTAL within specifications?

1 m system: Go to the next step.
5 m system: 8.75 r 0.70 :
9 m System: 9.87 r 0.90 :
Yes: Retest original system
27
1
1. RPROBE
Measure resistance, RPROBE: Is RPROBE within specifications (see Table 4-1: Probe
Nominal DC Resistance (RPROBE) on page 31).
No: Faulty probe
Yes: Go to next step
2
1. RJACKET
2. RCORE

Measure the resistance, RJACKET and RCORE: Is the resistance within specifications
(see “Table 4-2: Extension Cable Nominal DC Resistance” on 32).
No: Faulty extension cable
Yes: Retest the original system
3.6 Fault Type 4: VXDCR <VSIG < VXDCR + 2.5 Vdc

Possible causes:
28
x Probe is incorrectly gapped (too far from target)
/#&'+075#
1. VSIG
Measure VSIG: Is –1.2 < VSIG < -0.3 Vdc?

No: Faulty Proximitor sensor
Yes: Reconnect the system. Regap the probe. Retest the system.
3.7 Fault Type 5: VSIG = VXDCR

Possible causes:
x Faulty field wiring (between Out and VT)
29
/#&'+075#
1. VSIG
Measure VSIG: Is VSIG = VXDCR?

Yes: Faulty Proximitor Sensor
No: Faulty field wiring (short between Out and VT)
Bently Nevada LLC performs failure analysis on all returned transducers that are
in warranty. We use the information gained during analysis of failed products to
improve our current and future products. If you encounter a part that has failed,
return the part with a brief description of the product application and symptoms
observed to Bently Nevada headquarters in Minden, Nevada for analysis:
Bently Nevada LLC
Attn: Product Repair Department
1631 Bently Parkway South
Minden, Nevada 89423 USA
30
Section 4 - System Specifications
4. System Specifications
Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications are for a 3300 XL 8/5 mm
Proximitor Sensor, extension cable and XL 8 mm or 3300 5 mm probe between
+18 qC and +27 qC (+64 qF to +80 qF), with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 k load,
an AISI 4140 steel target, and a probe gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils). Performance
characteristics are applicable for systems that consist solely of 3300 XL 8 mm or
3300 5 mm components. The system accuracy and interchangeability
specifications do not apply when using a transducer system calibrated to any
target other than a Bently Nevada AISI 4140 steel target.
4.1 Electrical
Proximitor Sensor Input
Accepts one non-contacting 3300-series 5
mm, or 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probe and XL
Extension Cable.
Power
Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc without barriers
at 12 mA maximum consumption, -23 Vdc to -
26 Vdc with barriers. Operation at a more
positive voltage than -23.5 Vdc can result in
reduced linear range.
Supply Sensitivity
Less than 2 mV change in output voltage per
volt change in input voltage.
Output resistance
50 :
Table 4-1: Probe Nominal DC Resistance (RPROBE)

Resistance from the Center Conductor
Probe Length
to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE)
(Meters)
(ohms)
0.5 7.45 r 0.50
1.0 7.59 r 0.50
1.5 7.73 r 0.50
31
Resistance from the Center Conductor
Probe Length
to the Outer Conductor (RPROBE)
(Meters)
(ohms)
2.0 7.88 r 0.50
5.0 8.73 r 0.70
9.0 9.87 r 0.90
Table 4-2: Extension Cable Nominal DC Resistance

Length of Extension Resistance from Center Resistance from Outer
Cable Conductor to Center Conductor to Outer
(Meters) Conductor (RCORE) Conductor (RJACKET)
(ohms) (ohms)
3.0 0.66 r 0.10 0.20 r 0.04
3.5 0.77 r 0.12 0.23 r 0.05
4.0 0.88 r 0.13 0.26 r 0.05
4.5 0.99 r 0.15 0.30 r 0.06
7.0 1.54 r 0.23 0.46 r 0.09
7.5 1.65 r 0.25 0.49 r 0.10
8.0 1.76 r 0.26 0.53 r 0.11
8.5 1.87 r 0.28 0.56 r 0.11
Extension cable capacitance

69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical
Field wiring
0.2 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 24 AWG). Recommend
using three-conductor shielded triad cable.
Maximum length of 305 metres (1,000 feet)
between the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor and
the monitor. See the frequency and phase
response graphs in Figure 6-11 through
Figure 6-14 for signal roll off at high
frequencies when using longer field wiring
lengths.
Linear Range
2 mm (80 mils). Linear range begins at
approximately 0.25 mm (10 mils) from target
32
and is from 0.25 to 2.3 mm (10 to 90 mils)
(approximately –1 to –17 Vdc).
Recommended Gap Setting
1.27 mm (50 mils)
Incremental Scale Factor (ISF)

XL 8 mm standard 5- or
1-metre system
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ±5% including
interchangeability error when measured in
increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80
mil linear range from 0 to +45 °C (+32 °F to
+113 °F).
XL 8 mm standard
9-metre system
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ±6.5% including
+113 °F).
3300 5 mm standard 1-,
5- and 9-metre systems
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ±6.5% typical,
including interchangeability error when
measured in increments of 0.25 mm (10 mils)
over the linear range.
Extended Temperature
Range (ETR) 5 and 9
metre systems
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ±6.5% including
+113 °F).
33
Deviation from best fit
straight line (DSL)
XL 8 mm standard 1 or
5metre system
Less than ±0.025mm (±1 mil) with
components at 0 °C to +45 °C (+32 °F to +113
°F).
XL 8 mm standard
9metre system:
Less than ±0.038mm (±1.5 mil) with
°F).
3300 5 mm standard 1,
5 and 9metre systems
components at 18 qC to 27 qC (64 qF to 80
qF)
Range 5 and 9metre
systems
°F).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5
mm standard 1- and
5-metre system
performance over
extended temperatures
Over a probe temperature range of –35 °C to
+120 °C (-31 °F to +248 °F) with the
Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
between 0 °C to +45 °C (+32 °F to +113 °F), the
ISF remains within ±10% of 7.87 V/mm (200
mV/mil) and the DSL remains within ±0.076
mm (±3 mils).
Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
temperature range of –35 °C to +65 °C (-31 °F
to +149 °F) with the probe between 0 °C to
+45 °C (+32 °F to +113 °F), the ISF remains
34
within ±10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and
the DSL remains within ±0.076 mm (±3 mils).
XL 8 mm and 3300 5
mm standard 9metre
system performance
over extended
temperatures
Over a probe temperature range of –35 °C to
+120 °C (-31 °F to +248 °F) with the
Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
between 0 °C to +45°C (+32 °F to +113 °F), the
mm (±6 mils).
Over a Proximitor Sensor and extension cable
temperature range of –35 °C to +65 °C (-31 °F
to +149 °F) with the probe between 0 °C to
+45 °C (+32 °F to +113 °F), the ISF remains
within ±18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and
the DSL remains within ±0.152 mm (±6 mils).
Range system
performance over
extended temperatures
Over a probe and extension cable
temperature range of –35 °C to + 260 °C (-31
°F to +500 °F) with the Proximitor Sensor
between 0 °C to +45 °C (+32 °F to +113 °F), the
mm (±6 mils).
Frequency Response
0 to 10 kHz: +0, -3 dB, with up to 305 metres
(1000 feet) of field wiring.
Minimum Target Size
15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat target)
35
Shaft Diameter
Measurements on shaft diameters smaller
than 50 mm (2 in) usually require close
spacing of radial vibration or axial position
transducers with the potential for their
electromagnetic emitted fields to interact with
one another (cross-talk), resulting in
erroneous readings. Take care to maintain
minimum separation of transducer tips,
generally at least 40 mm (1.6 in) for axial
position measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in) for
radial vibration measurements. Radial
vibration or position measurements on shaft
diameters smaller than 76.2 mm (3 in) will
generally change the scale factor.
Minimum
50.8 mm (2 in)
Recommended
minimum
76.2 mm (3 in)
Effects of 60 Hz Magnetic
Fields Up to 300 Gauss
See Table 4-3
Table 4-3: Output Voltages in mil pp/gauss

5-metre XL 9-metre XL
Gap Proximitor Proximitor Probe Ext. Cable
Sensor Sensor
10 mil 0.0119 0.0247 0.0004 0.0004
50 mil 0.0131 0.0323 0.0014 0.0014
90 mil 0.0133 0.0348 0.0045 0.0045
Electrical Classification
Complies with the European CE mark.
36
Hazardous Area Approvals
NOTE
Multiple approvals for hazardous areas
certified by Canadian Standards Association
(CSA/NRTL/C) in North America and by
Baseefa (2001) in Europe.
North America
Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or Class 1
Division 1; Groups A, B, C, and D, when
installed with intrinsically safe zener barriers
per drawing 141092 or when installed with
galvanic isolators.
Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D when
installed without barriers per drawing 140979.
T5 @ Ta = -35 qC to +85 qC.
T4 @ Ta = -51 qC to +100 qC.
Europe
II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4/T5. EC certificate number
BAS99ATEX1101, when installed per drawing
141092.
II 3 G EEx nAII T4/T5. EC certificate number
BAS99ATEX3100U,when installed per drawing
140979.
T5 @ Ta = -35 qC to +85 qC.
T4 @ Ta = -51 qC to +100 qC.
IEC Ex
3300 XL Proximitor
Sensor, ia
IECEx BAS04.0055X
Ex ia IIC T4 / T5 (-51ºC Ta +100ºC / -35ºC
Ta +85ºC)
37
Terminal Block
Connections
Ui= -28V Ci = 0
Ii= 140mA Li =10μH
Pi= 0.84W
Coaxial
Connection
Ui = -28V Ci= 5.7nF
Ii = 140mA Li = 0.85mH
Pi = 0.84W
Load Parameters
The capacitance and either the inductance or
the inductance to resistance (L/R) ratio of the
load connected to the probe coaxial terminal,
must not exceed the following values in Table
4-4
Table 4-4: Proximitor Sensor Load Parameters
Capacitance Inductance L/R Ratio
Group
μF mH H/
IIC 0.077 0.99 35
IIB 0.644 7.41 142
IIA 2.144 15.6 295
Installation of the XL Proximitor Sensor must

minimize the risk of impact or friction with
other metallic surfaces.
3300 XL Proximitor
Sensor, nA
IECEx BAS04.0057X
AEx nA II T4 / T5 (-51ºC Ta +100ºC / -35ºC
Ta +85ºC)
The terminals must be provided with a level of
protection of at least IP54.
Ui = -28V
38
3300 XL 8mm and
3300 5 mm Eddy
Current Probes, ia
IECEx BAS04.0056
AEx ia IIC Temperature Classification per
Table 4-5.
Ui = -28V Ci = 1.5nF
Ii = 140mA Li = 200μH
Pi =0.84W
3300 XL 8mm and
3300 5mm Eddy
Current Probes, nA
IECEx BAS04.0058X
Ex nA II Temperature Classification per Table
4-5.
Must be supplied from a voltage limited
source.
EEx nA for Zone 2, Group IIC, EC certificate
number BAS99ATEX3100U.
Table 4-5: Aex ia IIC Temperature Classification

Temperature Ambient Temperature
Classification (Probe Only)
T1 -51ºC to +232ºC
T2 -51ºC to +177ºC
T3 -51ºC to +120ºC
T4 -51ºC to +80ºC
T5 -51ºC to +40ºC
4.2 Mechanical
Probe Tip Material
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).
39
Probe Case Material
Forward Mount and
Smooth Case Probes
AISI 304 stainless steel (SST)
Reverse Mount Probes
AISI 303 SST
Probe Cable Specifications
XL 8 mm standard cable
75 : triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP)
insulated probe cable in the following total
probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
3300 5 mm standard
cable
75 : coaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP)
insulated probe cable in the following total
probe lengths: 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
Range cable
75 : triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated

probe cable in the following total probe
lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
Extension Cable Material
75 : triaxial, fluoroethylene propylene (FEP)

insulated.
Range (ETR) Extension
Cable Material
75 : triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) insulated.

Proximitor Sensor Material
A380 aluminum
System Length
5 or 9 metres including extension cable, or 1
metre.
40
Standard Probe and
Extension Cable Armor
(optional)
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with FEP outer
jacket.
Range Probe and Extension
Cable Armor (optional)
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with PFA outer
jacket.
XL 8 mm and ETR Tensile
Strength (maximum rated)
330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 270 N
(60 lbf) at probe lead to extension cable
connectors.
3300 5 mm Tensile
Strength (maximum rated)
220 N (50 lbf) probe case to probe lead. 220 N
(50 lbf) probe lead to extension cable
connectors.
Connector material
Gold-plated brass and gold-plated beryllium
copper.
Table 4-6: Probe Case Torque Specifications

Probe case torque: Maximum Rated Recommended
Standard forward-mounted XL 8 mm probes 33.9 Nxm 11.2 Nxm

(3/8-24, M10x1) (300 inxlbf) (100 inxlbf)
Standard forward-mounted 3300 probes 7.3 Nxm 5.1 Nxm
(1/4-28, M8x1) (65 inxlbf) (45 inxlbf)
Standard forward-mount XL 8 mm probes - 22.6 Nxm 7.5 Nxm

first three threads (3/8-24, M10x1) (200 inxlbf) (66 inxlbf)
22.6 Nxm 7.5 Nxm
Reverse mount probes
(200 inxlbf) (66 inxlbf)
41
Connector-to-connector
torque
See Table 4-7 for recommended torque.
Table 4-7: Recommended Connector-to-Connector Torque
Connector Type Tightening Instructions
Two 3300 XL gold "click" type connectors Finger tight
One non-XL stainless steel connector
Finger tight plus 1/8 turn using pliers
and one 3300 XL connector
Maximum torque
0.565 Nxm (5 inxlbf)

Minimum Bend Radius
25.4 mm (1.0 in)
Total System Mass (typical)
0.7 kg (1.5 lbm)
Probe
323 g (11.4 oz)
Extension Cable
34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft)
Armored Extension cable
103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft)
Proximitor Sensor
246 g (8.7 oz)
4.3 Environmental Limits

4.3.1 Probe Temperature Range
Operating and Storage Temperature
Standard probe
-51 °C to +177 °C (-60 °F to +351 °F)
42
Range
Probe tip
-51 °C to +177 °C (-60 °F to +351 °F)
Probe cable and
connector
-51 °C to +260 °C (-60 °F to +500 °F)
NOTE
Exposing the probe to temperatures
below –34 qC (-30 qF) may cause
premature failure of the pressure seal.
4.3.2 Extension Cable Temperature Range

Operating and Storage Temperature
Standard cable
-51 °C to +177 °C (-60 °F to +351 °F)
Range cable
-51 °C to +260 °C (-60 °F to +500 °F)
4.3.3 Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range

Operating Temperature
-35 °C to +85 °C (-31 °F to +185 °F)
Storage Temperature
-51 °C to +100 °C (-60 °F to +212 °F)
Relative Humidity
Less than a 3% change in Average Scale
Factor (ASF) when tested in 93% humidity in
accordance with IEC standard 68-2-3 for up
to 56 days.
43
Probe Pressure
3300 XL 8 mm and 3300 5 mm probes are
designed to seal differential pressure between
the probe tip and case. The probe sealing
material consists of a Fluorocarbon O-ring.
Probes are not pressure tested prior to
shipment. Contact our custom design
department if you require a test of the
pressure seal for your application.
Application Advisory
It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure that

all liquids and gases are contained and safely controlled
should leakage occur from a proximity probe. In addition,
solutions with high or low pH values may erode the tip
assembly of the probe causing media leakage into
surrounding areas. Bently Nevada£, LLC will not be held
responsible for any damages resulting from leaking 3300 XL 8
mm or 3300 5 mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 XL 8
mm or 3300 5 mm proximity probes will not be replaced
under the service plan due to probe leakage.
4.4 Patents
Components or procedures described in one or more of the following patents
apply to this product: 5,016,343; 5,126,664; 5,351,388; and 5,685,884.
44
Section 5 - System Ordering Information
5. System Ordering Information

5.1 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes
3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor3
330101-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor3

A: Unthreaded Length Option

Order in increments of 0.1 in
Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in
Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in
NOTE
Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8
inches less than the case length.
.
B: Overall Case Length Option
Maximum case length: 9.6 in
Minimum case length: 0.8 in
C: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option

01 Miniature coaxial ClickLocTM connector with connector protector,
standard cable
02 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector, standard cable
11 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector with connector protector,
FluidLoc® cable
45
12 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector, FluidLoc cable
E: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
05 Multiple Approvals
5.2 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric

3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor3
3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor3


Order in increments of 10 mm.
Maximum unthreaded length: 230 mm
Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm
Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
NOTE
Unthreaded length must be at least 20
mm less than the case length.

Maximum length: 250 mm
Minimum length: 20 mm
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
01 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector with connector protector, standard
cable
46
11 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector with connector protector, FluidLoc
cable
00 Not required
5.3 3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes

3/8-24 UNF Threads3
330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX
M10 x 1 Threads3
330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
D: Connector Option
02 Miniature ClickLoc coaxial connector
12 Miniature ClickLoc coaxial connector, FluidLoc cable
NOTE
The FluidLoc cable options –10 and –12 are not
necessary on the vast majority of 330105 and
330106 installations due to the presence of the
probe sleeve. Consider carefully the application
before ordering the FluidLoc cable options

00 Not required
47
5.4 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case
3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2
330140-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2

A: Overall Case Length Option

Maximum length: 9.6 in
Minimum length: 0.8 in
B: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
C: Connector and Cable-Type Option
cable
11 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc connector with connector protector, FluidLoc
cable
D: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
5.5 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range (ETR)

Proximity Probes
3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, without armor
3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with armor


48
NOTE

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1
00 Not required

Proximity Probes, Metric
3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without armor
3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor


49
NOTE

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
00 Not required

Reverse Mount Probes
3/8-24 UNF Threads
330195-02-12-CXX-DXX
M10 x 1 Threads
330196-05-30-CXX-DXX

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
00 Not required
50
Proximity Probes, Smooth Case
3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor2
330197-AXX-BXX-CXX
3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor2

330198-AXX-BXX-CXX
A: Overall Case Length Option

Maximum length: 9.6 in
Minimum length: 0.8 in
B: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
C: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
5.9 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes

3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, without armor
3300 5 mm Probe, 1/4-28 UNF thread, with armor


51
NOTE

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)1
cable
00 Not required
5.10 3300 5 mm Proximity Probes, Metric

3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, without armor
3300 5 mm Probe, M8 x 1 thread, with armor


Length configuration:
52
NOTE

05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) 1
cable
00 Not required
5.11 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

330180-AXX-BXX
A: Total Length and Mounting Option

10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) system length, panel mount
11 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) system length, DIN mount
12 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) system length, panel mount
51 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) system length, DIN mount
52 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, panel mount
91 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, DIN mount
92 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system length, no mounting hardware
B: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
53
05 Multiple approvals
5.12 3300 XL Extension Cable

330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX
NOTE
Make sure that the extension cable
length and the probe length, when
added together, equal the Proximitor
Sensor total length.
Option Descriptions
A: Cable Length Option
035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet)
075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet)
080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet)
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option
00 Standard cable
01 Armored cable
02 Standard cable with connector protectors
03 Armored cable with connector protectors
10 FluidLoc cable
11 Armored FluidLoc cable
12 FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
13 Armored FluidLoc cable with connector protectors
00 Not required
54
5.13 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR)

Extension Cable
330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
NOTE
Make sure that the extension cable
length and the probe length, when
added together, equal the Proximitor
Sensor total length.
A: Cable Length Option

035 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
040 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
045 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
070 7.0 metres (22.9 feet)
075 7.5 metres (24.6 feet)
080 8.0 metres (26.2 feet)
085 8.5 metres (27.9 feet)
B: Cable Option
00 Standard cable
01 Armored cable
00 Not required
5.14 Mounting Brackets

5.14.1 Aluminum Probe Clamp Bracket
The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded mounting bracket designed for
use with the smooth case probes (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198). After
gapping the probe, tighten the clamp bracket by tightening the screws. The
mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
Order Number 137491-AXX
A: Mounting Screw Option

01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws
55
02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws
5.14.2 Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket

The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is the standard mounting
bracket for most 3300 and 3300 XL probe installations. The -01 and -02 options
are supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options
are supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have
pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
A: Thread Size
01 3/8-24
02 1/4-28
03 M8 x 1
04 M10 x 1
5.14.3 Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket

We recommend the phenolic threaded mounting bracket if your installation
requires additional electric isolation from the mounting location (as in some
generator and electrical motor bearing locations). The -01 and –02 options are
supplied with two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -03 and -04 options are
supplied with two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws have pre-
drilled holes for safety wire.
A: Thread Size
01 3/8-24
02 1/4-28
03 M8 x 1
04 M10 x 1
5.15 Accessories
141078-01
Manual
175751
3300XL Multi-Purpose Stainless Steel Housing.

12”x12”x6”
176467
3300XL Multi-Purpose Stainless Steel Housing.

12”x8”x6”
56
02120015
Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor,

twisted, shielded cable with drain wire. Specify length
in feet.
138492-01
Replacement panel-mount mounting pad.
138493-01
Replacement DIN-mount mounting pad.
148722-01
3300 XL Test Plug. The 3300 XL Test Plug is contains

three small test pins attached to three color-coded
wires 1 metre in length, each terminated in a banana
plug. The three-pin adapter plugs into the test pin
holes on 3300 XL-style Proximitor Sensors. It is used to
check the performance of the Proximitor Sensor from
the test pin holes in the terminal strip without requiring
the removal of the field wiring.
04310310
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor Panel-mount Screw.

Package includes one 6-32 UNC thread forming
mounting screw. (Supplied standard with 3300 XL
Multi-Purpose housings when panel mount transducer
option is ordered).
03200006
Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1 metre (10 yard) roll of

silicone tape to protect connectors. It is easy to install
and provides excellent electrical isolation and
protection from the environment. It is not
recommended for use inside the casing of the
machine.
40113-02
Standard Connector Protector Kit. Connector

Protector Kit for 3300 XL 8 mm probes and extension
cables, including connector protectors and installation
tools.
40113-03
5 mm/NSv Connector Protector Kit. Connector

Protector Kit for 3300 5 mm probes, including
connector protectors and installation tools.
136536-01
Connector Protector Adapter. Allows connector

protector installation tools manufactured prior to 1998
to be used with 75 : ClickLoc connectors.
57
40180-02
Standard Connector Protectors. Package contains 10

pairs of connector protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm probes
and 3300 XL extension cables.
40180-03
5 mm/NSv Connector Protectors. Package contains

10 pairs of connector protectors for 3300 5 mm probes.
03839410
Standard Connector Protector - Male. Male

connector protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL
extension cable and attach to the female connector
protector on the probe, providing environmental
protection of connectors.
03839420
Standard Connector Protector - Female. Female

connector protectors are installed onto the 3300 XL
probe lead and attach to the male connector protector
on the 3300 XL extension cable, providing
environmental protection of connectors. Also placed
on the 3300 XL extension cable to slide over the
connection to the Proximitor® Sensor and protect it
from the environment.
03800001
5mm/NSv Connector Protector - Female. Placed onto

3300 5 mm probe leads; attaches to the male
connector protector on the extension cable to provide
environmental protection of connectors.
04301007
3/8-24 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single

probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in
order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire.
04301008
M10 x 1 Probe Lock Nut with safety wire holes. Single

probe lock nut with two holes drilled through the nut in
order to secure the lock nut in place with safety wire.
330153-01
3300 XL Connector Kit. Used on 3300 XL 8 mm probes

and 3300 XL extension cables. Contains one pair of
male and female ClickLoc connectors, two color-coded
sleeves, two pieces of slit FEP tubing, and one strip of
silicone tape.
58
330153-04
3300 5 mm Connector Kit. Used on 3300 5 mm

probes. Contains one male ClickLoc connector, one
color-coded sleeve, one piece of slit FEP tubing, and
one strip of silicone tape.
330153-09
3300 XL ETR Connector Kit. Used on ETR 3300 XL 8

mm probes and 3300 ETR XL extension cables.
Contains one pair of male and female ClickLoc
connectors, two color-coded sleeves, two pieces of
high temperature slit FEP tubing, and one strip of
silicone tape.
163356
Connector Crimp Tool Kit. Includes one set of

multiconnector inserts and connector installation
instructions. Compatible only with 330153 connector
kits or with probes shipped in 2003 or later with
ClickLoc connectors uninstalled. Supplied with carrying
case.
Notes:
1. 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre Proximitor Sensor only.
2. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for 330140, 330141, 330197, and 330198.
3. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly stocked probes. Currently, stocked probes consist
of the following part numbers:
330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-02-05, 330101-00-08-10-02-00,
330101-00-08-10-02-05, 330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-10-02-05,
330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-10-02-05, 330101-00-20-05-02-00,
330101-00-20-10-02-00, 330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-10-02-00,
330101-00-30-10-02-05, 330101-00-40-05-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-00,
330101-00-40-10-02-05, 330101-00-60-10-02-00, 330101-00-60-10-02-05,
330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-10-02-05, 330103-00-03-10-02-05,
330103-00-04-10-02-00, 330103-00-04-50-02-00, 330103-00-05-10-02-00,
330103-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00,
330105-02-12-05-02-00, 330105-02-12-05-02-05, 330105-02-12-10-02-00,
330105-02-12-10-02-05, 330106-05-30-05-02-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05,
330106-05-30-10-02-00 and 330106-05-30-10-02-05.
59
Section 6 - System Graphs and Dimensional Drawings
6. System Graphs and Dimensional

Drawings
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 °C (77 °F) 5m @ 45 °C (113 °F) 5m @ 0 °C (32 °F)
Figure 6-1: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m or 1m System over API 670 Testing Range
61
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 °C (77 °F) 9m @ 45 °C (113 °F) 9m @ 0 °C (32 °F)
Figure 6-2: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m System over API 670 Testing Range
62
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
1m P ro be @ 25 °C (77 °F) 1m P ro be @ -35 °C (-31°F)
1m P ro be @ 120 °C (248 °F)
Figure 6-3: Typical 3300 XL 8mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
63
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6
4
7.87V/mm (200mV/mil)
DSL ERROR (MILS)
Referenced to
-2
-4
-6
10%
Referenced to 7.87 V/mm
5%
ISF ERROR
(200mV/mil)
0%
-5%
-10%
-24
-22
-20
-18
OUTPUT (VOLTS)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
GAP (m ils)
1M Probe @ 25 °C (77 °F) 1M Probe @ -35 °C (-31 °F)

1M Probe @ 120 °C (248 °F)
Figure 6-4: Typical 3300 5mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range
64
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
mV/mil) 2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 °C (77 °F) Tc=-34 °C (-30 °F) Tc=-51°C (-60 °F)
Figure 6-5: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m Proximitor Sensor with 4m Extension Cable @ Tc
(Probe is at 25 qC)
65
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

Referenced to
4 0.10
200(mV/mil)
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
Referenced to
ISF Error (%)
200(mV/mil)
-5
-10
-15
-20
-18
-16
-14
Output (Volts)
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
25 °C (77 °F) 65 °C (149 °F) 85 °C (185 °F) 100 °C (212 °F)
Figure 6-6: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m Proximitor Sensor with 4m Extension Cable @ Th
(Probe is at 25qC)
66
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 °C (+77 °F) Tc=-34 °C (-30 °F) Tc=-51°C (-60 °F)
Figure 6-7: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m Proximitor Sensor with 8m Extension Cable @ Tc
(Probe is at 25 qC)
67
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th=+65 °C (+149 °F)
Th=+85 °C (+185 °F) Th=+100 °C (+212 °F)
Figure 6-8: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m Proximitor Sensor with 8m Extension Cable @ Th
(Probe is at 25 qC)
68
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th =+260 °C (+500 °F)
Figure 6-9: Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4m Extended
Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1
foot of cable are at +25 qC)
69
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th=+260 °C (+500 °F)
Figure 6-10: Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8m Extended
Temperature Range Extension Cable @ Th (Proximitor Sensor and probe tip with 1
foot of cable are at +25 qC)
70
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths
without Barriers (5 m System)
1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' wiring 2000' wiring

5000' wiring 12,000' wiring
Figure 6-11: Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m or 1m System with

varying lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No
Barriers (5 m System)
0
-10
Phase Angle (degrees)
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' wiring 2000' wiring
5000' wiring 12,000' wiring
Figure 6-12: Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m or 1m System with varying
lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
71
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths without
1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' field wiring 2000' field wiring

5000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
Figure 6-13 Frequency Response, typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m System with varying
lengths of field wiring attached, no barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No

0.00
-10.00
Phase Angle (degrees)
-20.00
-30.00
-40.00
-50.00
-60.00
-70.00
-80.00
-90.00
-100.00
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' field wiring 2000' field wiring

5000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
Figure 6-14: Phase Response, typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m System with varying lengths
of field wiring attached, no barriers
72
4
2
1 3
5
2.5 (0.10) 6
7
8
9
10
1. 8.0 (0.31) diameter probe tip

2. 14.3 (9/16) for 3/8-24 threads2; 17.0 (0.67) for M10 threads2
3. Case thread
4. 8 (5/15) wrench flats, 4 each
5. 75 cable
3.7 (0.15) maximum outside diameter
3.9 (0.16) maximum diameter for FluidLoc cable
7.6 (0.30) outside diameter for armor
9.0 (0.35) maximum diameter for armor ferrule
6. Miniature male coaxial connector, 7.23 (0.285) maximum outside diameter “D”
7. Unthreaded length “A”
8. Case length “B”
9. 6.0 (0.236) maximum
10. Total length3 “C”, +30%, -0%
Figure 6-15: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Standard Mount
73
330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor 7
330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor 6
330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor 7
330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor 6
4
2
1 3
5
3.2 (0.13) 6
7
8
9
10

2. 11.1 (7/16) for 3/8-24 threads2; 13.0 (0.51) for M10 threads2
3. Case thread
4. 5.6 (7.32) wrench flats for 1/4-28 threads, 7.0 (0,28) for M8 threads, 4 each
5. 75 cable
2.8 (0.11) maximum outside diameter
7.6 (0.30) outside diameter for armor
9.0 (0.35) maximum diameter for armor ferrule
6. Miniature male coaxial connector, 7.23 (0.285) maximum outside diameter
“D”
8. Case length “B”
9. 6.0 (0.236) maximum
10. Total length8 “C”, +30%, -0%
Figure 6-16: 3300 5mm Proximity Probes
74
330171, 1/4-28 UNF-2A, without armor 7
330172 , 1/4-28 UNF-2A, with armor 6
330173, M8X1 thread, without armor 7
330174, M8X1 thread, with armor 6
1 36.3 3
Max. 51.1 (2.01) Max.
(1.43)
1. 12 (0.47) diameter maximum

2. Connector protector (fluorosilicone material)
3. 12 (0.47) diameter maximum
Figure 6-17: Installed Connector Protectors
2
3
1
4
2 (0.08)
5 (0.2) 5
6
7
8
9

2. 7/16 or M10 hexagonal
3. Case thread
4. 75 cable, 3.7 (0.15) outside diameter
5. Miniature male coaxial connector, 7.23 (0.285) maximum outside diameter “D”
7. Case length “B” 30 (1.2)
8. 6.0 (0.236) maximum
9. Total length3 “C”, +30%, -0%
Figure 6-18: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount 4, 7
75
330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads
330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads
2 4
1 3
5
2.54 (0.100)
6 7
8
9

2. 9.6 (0.38) maximum diameter
3. 7.9 (0.31) wrench flats, 4 each
4. 75 cable, 3.68 (0.145) maximum diameter
5. 3.9 (0.16) maximum diameter for FluidLoc cable
6. 8.0 (0.315) outsided diameter for armor
7. 9.0 (0.35) maximim diameter for armor ferrule
8. Miniature male coaxial connector, 7.23 (0.285) maximum outside diameter
9. Case length “A”
10. 349.25 (13.720) maximum
11. 6.0 (0.236) maximum
12. Cable length3
Figure 6-19: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case
76
330140 and 330197, without armor 7
330141 and 330198, with armor 6
2
4
83.8 83.8
1 (3.30) (3.30)
5
3
83.8 83.8
(3.30) (3.30) 7
6 8
9
2. Miniature male coaxial connector
3. FEP or PFA coated armor6, armor length 300 (11.8) less than cable length
4. 75 cable, 3.68 (0.145) maximum outside diameter
(0.16) maximum diameter for FluidLoc cable
(0.30) outside diameter for armor
(0.35) maximum diameter for armor ferrule
6. Stainless steel ferrules, 8.4 (0.33) diameter
7. FEP or PFA insulated triaxial cable
8. Miniature female coaxial connector
9. Cable length +20%, -0%
Figure 6-20: 330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP armor and insulation) 330190,
3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA armor and insulation)
63.5 (2.50)
50.8 50.8
(2.00) (2.00)
81.3 61.2
(3.20) (2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
1. Mounting option “A”, options –50 or -90
Figure 6-21: Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
77
70.8 (2.79)
31.7
(1.25)
3
1. Mounting option “A”, options –51 or –91

2. 35mm DIN rail (not included)
3. 89.4 (3.52) [Additional 3.05 (0.120) require to remove DIN rail
Figure 6-22: DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
50
(1.95)
86
25.4 (3.4)
(1.00)
50.8
(2.00)
50.8
(2.00)
79.4
(3.125)
61.4
(2.42)
63.5
(2.50)
81
(3.2)
50.8
(2.00) 50.8
81.3 (2.00)
(3.20)
61.2
(2.41)
5.1
(0.20)
1. Mounting option “A”, options –50 or -90
Figure 6-23: Physical mounting characteristics showing interchangeability of 3300

and 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors when 4-hole mounting option is used8
78
Notes:
x All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise
noted.
x Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with 17 mm or 9/16 inch lock nut.
x Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance
of +20%, -0%.
x Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector
options.
x Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options.
x Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes,
PFA outer jacket for ETR probes.
x FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard
probes, PFA jacket on non-armored portion for ETR probes.
x Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor® Sensors (screws
provided when purchasing Bently Nevada housings).
79
Section 7 - Housing Specifications and Ordering Information
7. Micrometer Specifications and

Ordering Information
7.1 Mechanical
Target Buttons
AISI 4140 Alloy Steel, 30.5 mm (1.20 in) diameter flat
target. Contact your local sales office for details on
special target materials.
Casing Material
3300 XL Precision
Micrometer:
Fiberglass and Plastic.
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer
ABS Plastic.
Micrometer specifications:
Table 7-1: 3300 XL Precision Micrometer:
Part number Resolution Accuracy Range
330185-01 0.000020 in r 0.000015 in 0-1 in
330185-02 0.0005 mm r 0.0004 mm 0-25 mm
Table 7-2: 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

Part number Resolution Accuracy Range
330186-01 0.001 in r0.0001 in 0-1 in
300186-02 0.01 mm r0.003 mm 0-25 mm
Size
3300 XL Precision
Micrometer (case
dimensions)
Height
226 mm (8.9 in)
Width
274 mm (10.8 in)
81
Length
356 mm (14.0 in)
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

(case dimensions)
Height
152 mm (6.0 in)
Width
246 mm (9.7 in)
Length
356 mm (14.0 in)
Total System Mass

3300 XL Precision
Micrometer:
6.8 kg (15.0 lbm)
3300 XL Shaft Micrometer:
2.8 kg (6.2 lbm)
7.2 Ordering Information

7.2.1 3300 XL Precision Micrometer
330185-AXX
A: Scale Units
01 Micrometer in English units (0-1 in)
02 Micrometer in metric units (0-25 mm)
7.2.2 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer

330186- AXX
Option Descriptions
A: Scale Units
01 Micrometer in English units (0-1 in)
02 Micrometer in metric units (0-25 mm)
82
Section 7 - Housing Specifications and Ordering Information
NOTE
The 3300 shaft micrometer and
precision micrometer come with probe
mounting adapters for 1/4 inch, 3/8
inch, 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, M8, M10, M14
and M16 probe thread sizes.
7.2.3 Accessories
Table 7-3: Accessory Part Numbers and Descriptions
Part Number Description
138751-01 3300 XL Precision Micrometer Instruction Sheet
140273-01 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer Instruction Sheet
27505-01 Target button: A replacement 4140 target button that comes
standard with the 3300 XL shaft micrometer. There can be a
variation of up to 5% in the average scale factor (ASF) between
each target button.
136534-01 High Precision target button: A replacement 4140 target
button that comes standard with the 3300 XL precision
micrometer. There can be a variation of up to 0.6% in the
Average Scale Factor (ASF) between each target button.
02200218 Shaft Micrometer Strap: A replacement strap for the 3300 XL
Shaft Micrometer.
49478-01 Probe mounting adapter, suitable for M5 threads.
49478-02 Probe mounting adapter, 1/4 inch threads.
49478-03 Probe mounting adapter, M8 threads.
83
7.3 Dimensional Drawings
Note: Dimensions for figures are in millimetres (inches)
280 (11) Typical

89 (3.5)
3 22
2 23
00
1 24
28
46
64
82
00
0 1 2
0 0
0 9 8
24 1
23 2
22 3
89 (3.5) 165 (6.5)
203 (8.0) 152 (6.0)
1. Collets to fit both metric and English 5mm, 8mm, and 14mm probes
2. Removable AISI 4140 target
Figure 7-1: 3300 XL Precision Micrometer
160.0 (6.30) max.

24
23
22
21
4
3
2
1
150.9 (5.94) min.

2 3
0 1
59.2
(2.33)
105.4
(4.15)
i.
Figure 7-2 - 3300 XL Shaft Micrometer
84
Certificate: 1109248 (LR 26744-222) Master Contract: 150368
Project: 2602032 Date Issued: February 15, 2013

Issued to: Bently Nevada Inc
1631 Bently Pky S
Minden, NV 89423
USA
Attention: Byron Hunt
The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA
Mark shown with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for
Canada and US or with adjacent indicator 'US' for
US only or without either indicator for Canada only.
Eshwar Kashyap
Issued by: Eshwar Kashyap
PRODUCTS
CLASS 2258 04 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Intrinsically Safe, Entity - For
Hazardous Locations
Class I, Zone 0; Ex ia IIC T1…T5 Ga:

Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III:
• 3300XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensor, Models 330180-xx-xx, 330780-xx-xx, 330980-xx-xx, 330850-xx-
xx, 330878-xx-xx, 144181-xx and 18745-xx-xx (suffixes denote cable length and certification body), housed in
Certified proximitor housing, P/N 330181-xx-xx (suffixes denote transducer type, conduit fittings, gland plate
thickness and terminal block), connected with, 190, 300, 3000, 3300 and 7200 Series probes. Intrinsically safe
when connected to Certified barriers per installation Dwg 141092. Temperature Codes T5, Ta= -35°C to 85°C
or T4, Ta= -51°C to 100°C for Proximitor Sensor, and T1, Ta= -51°C to 232°C; T2, Ta= -51°C to 177°C; T3,
Ta= -51°C to 120°C; T4, Ta= -51°C to 80°C; T5, Ta= -51°C to 40°C for the probes.
Note: The 3300 XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensors maybe optionally supplied without the above referenced
proximitor housing for Ex ia IIC or Class I, Groups A, B, C and D installation where its suitability as
determined by the local Inspection Authority.
DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 1

CLASS 2258 84 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Intrinsically Safe Entity - For Hazardous
Locations - CERTIFIED TO U.S. STANDARDS
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III:

• 3300 XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensor, Models 330180-xx-xx, 330780-xx-xx, 330980-xx-xx, 330850-xx-
thickness and terminal block), connected with 190, 300, 3000, 3300 and 7200 Series probes. Intrinsically safe
when connected to Certified barriers per installation Dwg 141092. Temperature Codes T5, Ta= -35°C to 85°C
or T4, Ta= -51°C to 100°C for Proximitor Sensor, and T1, Ta= -51°C to 232°C; T2, Ta= -51°C to 177°C; T3,
Ta= -51°C to 120°C; T4, Ta= -51°C to 80°C; T5, Ta= -51°C to 40°C for the probes.
Note: The 3300 XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensors maybe optionally supplied without the above referenced
proximitor housing for Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC or Class I, Groups A, B, C and D installation where its
suitability as determined by the local Inspection Authority.
CLASS 2258 03 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Systems -
For Hazardous Locations
Class I, Zone 2; Ex nA IIC T1…T5 Gc:

Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D:
• 3300XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensor, Models 330180-xx-xx, 330780-xx-xx, 330980-xx-xx, 330850-xx-
thickness and terminal block), connected with, 190, 300, 3000, 3300 and 7200 Series probes. Non-Incendive
circuit when connected per installation Dwg. 140979. Temperature Codes T5, Ta= -35°C to 85°C or T4, Ta=
-51°C to 100°C for Proximitor Sensor, and T1, Ta= -51°C to 232°C; T2, Ta= -51°C to 177°C; T3, Ta= -51°C to
120°C; T4, Ta= -51°C to 80°C; T5, Ta= -51°C to 40°C for the probes.
CLASS 2258 83 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Systems -
For Hazardous Locations - CERTIFIED TO U.S. STANDARDS
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D:

• 3300 XL & 7200 Series Proximitor Sensor, Models 330180-xx-xx, 330780-xx-xx, 330980-xx-xx, 330850-xx-
DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 2

thickness and terminal block), connected with 190, 300, 3000, 3300 and 7200 Series probes. Non-Incendive
circuit when connected per installation Dwg 140979. Temperature Codes T5, Ta= -35°C to 85°C or T4, Ta=
-51°C to 100°C for Proximitor Sensor, and T1, Ta= -51°C to 232°C; T2, Ta= -51°C to 177°C; T3, Ta= -51°C to
120°C; T4, Ta= -51°C to 80°C; T5, Ta= -51°C to 40°C for the probes.
APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
C22.2 No 0 - M1991 General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code Part

II.
CSA Std. C22.2 No 25-1966 Enclosures for Use in Class II, Groups E, F and G
Hazardous Locations
C22.2 No 142 - M1987 Process Control Equipment.
C22.2 No 157 - M1992 Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Equipment for
Use in Hazardous Locations.
C22.2 No 213 - M1987 Non-Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I,
Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:11 Explosive Atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-11:11 Explosive Atmospheres – Part 11: Equipment
protection by intrinsic safety "i"
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-15:12 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- Part 15: Construction, test and marking of type of
protection “n” electrical apparatus
UL 913, 7Th Ed. Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus
for use in Class I, II, III, Division 1, Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
UL Std. No 916 - 4th Ed. Energy Management Equipment
ANSI/ISA-12.12.01-2010 Non-incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class
I and II, Division 2 and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 3

Supplement to Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: 1109248 Master Contract: 150368
The products listed, including the latest revision described below, are
eligible to be marked in accordance with the referenced Certificate.
Product Certification History
Project Date Description
2602032 Feb 15, 2013 Acceptance of test data from CSA custom test report 150368-2418692 for use
of alternate labels.
2545092 Oct 4, 2012 Update to include the latest standards as well as several revised drawings.
2117662 Feb 5, 2009 Update to include Proximitor Sensor Model 144181-xx, added similar 3300
Series probes 137383 and 147038-01, and minor report and drawing revisions.
2068039 Sep 23, 2008 Update to add sensor probe 137383 & update revised drawings
1878232 Mar 29, 2007 Update to Report to Separately List Non-Incendive Circuits Under Class No.
2258 03/83
1834427 Jan 24, 2007 Update to Cover Alt. Encapsulant
1676429 Jun 10, 2005 Update to Report to Include P/N's
1673624 May 16, 2005 Update to Report to Cover Minor Drawings Revisions
1552612 May 11, 2004 Update to Report 1109248 to cover minor dwg revision- Haz Loc.
1479877 Sep 24, 2003 Report update to replace schematic dwgs with dwg. 165341.
1437644 May 6, 2003 Update to Report 150368 - 1109248 to Cover Alternative Probes per dwg
142491/L - for Installation in Hazardous Locations, Legacy File 26744
DQD 507 Rev. 2012-05-22 Page: 1

Certificate: 70123413 Master Contract: 150368 (026744_C_000)
Project: 70123413 Date Issued: 2017-03-02
Issued to: Bently Nevada Inc

1631 Bently Pky S
Minden, Nevada 89423
USA
Attention: Tonya Woods
The products listed below are eligible to bear the CSA Mark shown
with adjacent indicators 'C' and 'US' for Canada and US or with adjacent
indicator 'US' for US only or without either indicator for Canada only.
Behzad Nejad
Issued by:
Behzad Nejad, P.Eng.
PRODUCTS
CLASS - C225804 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT-Intrinsically Safe, Entity - For Hazardous Locations
CLASS - C225884 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Intrinsically Safe, Entity-- For Hazardous Locations
- Certified to US Standards
Ex ia IIC T5…T1 Ga
Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T5…T1 Ga
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D; T5…T1
Class II, Groups E, F and G; Class III
- Proximity Probe/ Eddy Current Probe series 3000, 3300/3300XL, 7200:
Temperature Code Entity Parameters

T1 @ Ta = -55°C to +232°C Ui = -28V
T2 @ Ta = -55°C to +177°C Ii = 140mA
T3 @ Ta = -55°C to +120°C Pi = 0.91W
T4 @ Ta = -55°C to +80°C Ci = 1.5nF
T5 @ Ta = -55°C to +40°C Li = 610µH
“Intrinsically safe when connected per installation Dwg 141092”
DQD 507 Rev. 2016-02-18 Page 1

Specific Conditions of Use:
i. The exposed plastic surface of the Probes with 50mm diameter, under certain extreme circumstances, may
generate, an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge. Therefore this version of the equipment shall
not be installed in a location where the external conditions are conducive to the build-up of electrostatic
charge on the plastic surface. In addition, the equipment shall only be cleaned with a damp cloth. This is
particularly important if the equipment is installed in a Zone 0 location.
ii. The end user is to ensure appropriate earthing upon installation.
CLASS 2258 02 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations

CLASS 2258 82 - PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT - For Hazardous Locations - Certified to US Standards
Ex nA IIC T5…T1 Gc
Class I, Zone 2, AEx nA IIC T5…T1 Gc
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D; T5…T1
- Proximity Probe/ Eddy Current Probe series 3000, 3300/3300XL, 7200:

- Temperature Code Rating
T1 @ Ta = -55°C to +232°C Ui = -28V
T2 @ Ta = -55°C to +177°C Ii = 140mA
T3 @ Ta = -55°C to +120°C
T4 @ Ta = -55°C to +80°C
T5 @ Ta = -55°C to +40°C
“Non-Incendive circuit when connected per installation Dwg 140979”

Specific Conditions of Use:
i. This product is not resistant to light as required by clause 7.3 of IEC 60079-0:2011, therefore, it shall only
be installed in a location where it is not exposed to direct sunlight or any other source of ultra-violet (UV)
light.
ii. The connector shall not be disconnected while the circuit is live unless the area is known to be non-
hazardous.
iii. The end user is to ensure appropriate earthing upon installation.
DQD 507 Rev. 2016-02-18 Page 2

APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
C22.2 No. 0 - M91 General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code Part II.
C22.2 No 142 - M1987 Process Control Equipment.
Non-Incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous

C22.2 No 213 - 16
Locations.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:11 Explosive Atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-11:14 Explosive Atmospheres – Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety "i"
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 15: Construction, test
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-15:16
and marking of type of protection “n” electrical apparatus
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for use in Class I, II, III,
UL 913, 7Th Ed.
Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
UL Std. No 916 - 4th Ed. Energy Management Equipment
Non-incendive Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division 2 and
ANSI/ISA-12.12.01-2015
Class III, Divisions 1 and 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres - Part 0: General
ANSI/UL 60079-0:13
Requirements
Electrical apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres - Part 11: Intrinsic Safety
ANSI/UL 60079-11:13
“i”
Electrical apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres - Part 15: Type of
ANSI/UL 60079-15:12
Protection “n”
MARKINGS
- CSA Monogram with C-US indicator;

- Submittor Identification;
- Certificate reference;
- Model Number;
- Serial Number, Date Code or Month and Year of Manufacture;
- Name or Mark of the certificate issuer, year and certificate number (CSA 17.70123413);
- Hazardous Location Designation;
- Electrical Ratings;
- Ambient temperature range;
- Reference to installation drawing 141092 & 140979.
DQD 507 Rev. 2016-02-18 Page 3

Supplement to Certificate of Compliance
Certificate: 70123413 Master Contract: 150368 (026744_C_000)
The products listed, including the latest revision described below,

are eligible to be marked in accordance with the referenced Certificate.
Product Certification History

Project Date Description
70123413 2017-03-02 Full assessment for the Proximity Probe/ Eddy Current Probe series 3000,
3300/3300XL, 7200 for CSA-c-us for the markings: Class I, Zone 0, A/Ex ia
IIC T5…T1 Ga, Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, & Class II Division
1, Group E, F and G & Group III, Class I, Zone 2, A/Ex nA IIC T5…T1 Gc
and Class I, Div 2 Group A, B, C, D.
DQD 507 Rev. 2016-02-18 Page 1

Turbogenerator
Description
Wiring Diagrams
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AUXILIARY WIRING DIAGRAMS GENERATOR

ENERGY SECTOR
GN ERF (Erfurt plant)
PROJECT Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3)
ORDER NUMBER EG000425 / 435-436
PURCHASER SIEMENS AG - PG SU
FINAL CUSTOMER/USER Shanghai Electric Power

Generation Engineering Co.
DATE OF ISSUE
2019, May 06
Revision A 2019, May 06

Revision B 2019, Jul. 12
Revision C 2019, Sep. 12
Revision D 2020, Feb. 04
USE PREFIX:
10 FOR NOOR ENERGY 1 PT 1
20 FOR NOOR ENERGY 1 PT 2 NUMBER OF PAGES 52
30 FOR NOOR ENERGY 1 PT 3
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) COVER SHEET =
Drawn Rabe +
Appr. Möbius Page 1
REVISION Date Name NORM Replacement
ECCN: EAR99for AL: N Replaced
ECL: N by US-Content: N
ENERGY SECTOR EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INFORMATION ABOUT CHANGES
no. sh. index Date Name Description of changes

1 a 06.05.2019 Rabe first release for customer
2 b 12.07.2019 Rabe terminals changed to push-in; MTB adapted; size of JB current transformer adapted; first workshop release
3 c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Transmitter added; MTB adapted; hood ventilation adapted
4 d 04.02.2020 Konar Change in position of DE side junction boxes; hood ventilation contact changed from NO-NO to NO-NC; revision as-built
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) INFORMATION ABOUT CHANGES =
Drawn Rabe +
REVISION Date Name NORM Replacement for Replaced by
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE Page description Index and Date of Revision Date of issue Edited by
1 COVER SHEET Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
2 INFORMATION ABOUT CHANGES Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
+INSTRUMENTLIST 5 GENERATOR INSTRUMENT LIST TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+INSTRUMENTLIST 6 GENERATOR INSTRUMENT LIST LEAKAGE, VIBRATION, HEATERS, SSC 06.05.2019
+LIST 7 CONSUMER LIST Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
+CABLING 8 AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOXES OVERVIEW SCHEMATICAL DRAWING Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
+CABLING 9 CABLING STATOR SLOT THERMOMETER LOCATION DIAGRAM 06.05.2019
+CABLING 10 CABLING BEARING THERMOMETER LOCATION DIAGRAM 06.05.2019
+CABLING 11 CABLING AIR THERMOMETER LOCATION DIAGRAM 06.05.2019
+CABLING 12 CABLING LEAKAGE WATER DETECTION LOCATION DIAGRAM 06.05.2019
+CABLING 13 CABLING RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION LOCATION DIAGRAM Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
+CABLING 14 CABLING ANTICONDENSATION HEATER LOCATION DIAGRAM Revision B 12.07.2019 06.05.2019 Rabe
+CABLING 15 CABLING HOOD LIGHT LOCATION DIAGRAM 06.05.2019
+MKA10GA010 16 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING MOUNTING PLATE Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Konar
+MKA10GA010 17 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING STATOR WINDING TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 18 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING STATOR WINDING TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 19 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING BEARING TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 20 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING COLD AIR TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 21 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING COLD AIR TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 22 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING WARM AIR TEMPERATURE Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 23 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING LEAKAGE WATER DETECTION Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 24 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING LEAKAGE WATER DETECTION Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 25 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING SPARE TERMINALS Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA010 26 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GA010-X1 06.05.2019
+MKD10GA010 31 JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MOUNTING PLATE DRIVE END 06.05.2019
+MKD10GA010 32 JUNCTION BOX RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION DRIVE END 06.05.2019
+MKD20GA010 33 JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MOUNTING PLATE NON DRIVE END 06.05.2019
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) TABLE OF CONTENTS =
Drawn Rabe +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE Page description Index and Date of Revision Date of issue Edited by
+MKD20GA010 34 JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION NON DRIVE END 06.05.2019
+MKA10GE030 35 JUNCTION BOX VOLTAGE MOUNTING PLATE Revision B 12.07.2019 06.05.2019 Rabe
+MKA10GE030 36 JUNCTION BOX VOLTAGE 06.05.2019
+MKA10GE030 37 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE030-X0 06.05.2019
+MKA10GP010 38 JUNCTION BOX HOOD LIGHT MOUNTING PLATE Revision B 12.07.2019 06.05.2019 Rabe
+MKA10GP010 39 JUNCTION BOX HOOD LIGHT 06.05.2019
+MKA10GP010 40 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GP010-X0 06.05.2019
+MKA10GA121 41 JUNCTION BOX HOOD VENTILATION Revision D 04.02.2020 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GA121 42 JUNCTION BOX HOOD VENTILATION Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GE010 43 MTB NEUTRAL SIDE CURRENT TRANSFORMER Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GE010 44 MTB NEUTRAL SIDE GROUNDING TRANSFORMER Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GE010 45 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE010-X0 06.05.2019
+MKA10GE010 46 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE010-X7N 06.05.2019
+MKA10GE020 47 JUNCTION BOX LINE SIDE CUBICLE CURRENT TRANSFORMER MOUNTING PLATE Revision B 12.07.2019 06.05.2019 Rabe
+MKA10GE020 48 MTB LINE SIDE CURRENT TRANSFORMER Revision C 12.09.2019 06.05.2019 Vollmar
+MKA10GE020 49 Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE020-X7L 06.05.2019
+MKD10GA020 50 JUNCTION BOX ROTOR EARTHING MOUNTING PLATE Revision B 12.07.2019 06.05.2019 Rabe
+MKD10GA020 51 JUNCTION BOX ROTOR EARTHING 06.05.2019
+MKD10GA020 52 Terminal diagram : =+MKD10GA020-X0 06.05.2019
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) TABLE OF CONTENTS =
Drawn Rabe +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KKS DESCRIPTION TYPE MANUFACTURER
=MKA10CT010-B1 STATOR SLOT THERMOMETER 1 4-123317 TMG

=MKA10CT013-B1 STATOR SLOT THERMOMETER 10 SPARE 4-123317 TMG
=MKD10CT010-B1 BEARING METAL THERMOM. DE WQ 0232-PVDF TMG

=MKD20CT010-B1 BEARING METAL THERMOM. NDE WQ 0232-PVDF TMG
=MKA10CT050-B1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER DE WQ 0233 TMG

=MKA10CT051-B1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER DE WQ 0233 TMG
=MKA10CT055-B1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER NDE WQ 0233 TMG
=MKA10CT056-B1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER NDE WQ 0233 TMG
=MKA10CT060-B1 WARM AIR THERMOMETER WQ 0233 TMG
=MKA10CT010-A1 TRANSMITTER STATOR SLOT THERMOMETER 1/2 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS

=MKA10CT032-A1 TRANSMITTER STATOR SLOT THERMOM. 9/WARM AIR THERMOM. 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS
=MKD20CT010-A1 TRANSMITTER BEARING MEATAL THERMOM. 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS
=MKA10CT050-A1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER NDE 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS
=MKA10CT051-A1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER NDE/DE 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS
=MKA10CT056-A1 COLD AIR THERMOMETER DE 6331V105-UK PR ELECTRONICS
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) GENERATOR =

Drawn Rabe + INSTRUMENTLIST
INSTRUMENT LIST
ENERGY SECTOR TEMPERATURE EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KKS DESCRIPTION TYPE MANUFACTURER
=MKA10CL210-B1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 1 SITRANS LVL100 (7ML5745-1BA42-1BA0) SIEMENS

=MKA10CL215-B1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 2 SITRANS LVL100 (7ML5745-1BA42-1BA0) SIEMENS
=MKA10CL220-B1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 1 SITRANS LVL100 (7ML5745-1BA42-1BA0) SIEMENS
=MKA10CL225-B1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 2 SITRANS LVL100 (7ML5745-1BA42-1BA0) SIEMENS
=MKD10CY011-B1 REL. SHAFT VIBRATION SENSOR DE-X 330106-05-30-05-02-00 BENTLY NEVADA

=MKD10CY011-A1 PROXIMITOR 9m, 200mV/mil 330180-91-00 BENTLY NEVADA
=MKD10CY012-B1 REL. SHAFT VIBRATION SENSOR DE-Y 330106-05-30-05-02-00 BENTLY NEVADA
=MKD20CY011-B1 REL. SHAFT VIBRATION SENSOR NDE-X 330106-05-30-05-02-00 BENTLY NEVADA
=MKD20CY012-B1 REL. SHAFT VIBRATION SENSOR NDE-Y 330106-05-30-05-02-00 BENTLY NEVADA
=MKA10AH110-R1 HEATER DE ERCH III/38 Schniewindt

=MKA10AH110-R2 HEATER NDE ERCH III/38 Schniewindt
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) GENERATOR =

Drawn Rabe + INSTRUMENTLIST
INSTRUMENT LIST LEAKAGE,
ENERGY SECTOR VIBRATION, HEATERS, SSC EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Consumer List
Rated Rated 400V 230V 24V
no. KKS Description Power Voltage 50Hz 50Hz DC Start Operation Standstill Notes
1 =MKA10AH110-R1 GENERATOR HEATER DE 1600 W 400V 50Hz 1600 W 1600 W 1600 W
2 =MKA10AH110-R2 GENERATOR HEATER NDE 1600 W 400V 50Hz 1600 W 1600 W 1600 W
3 =MKA10CL210-225 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 1W 24V DC 1W 1W 1W 1W
4 =MKA10CL220-115 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 1W 24V DC 1W 1W 1W 1W
5 =MKA11GP001-002 EXCITER HOOD LIGHT 92 W 230V 50Hz 92 W 92 W 92 W 92 W
6 -2M1 HOOD VENTILATION 2800 W 230V 50Hz 2800 W 2800 W 2800 W

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30 TOTAL ELECTRICAL CONSUMPTION [W] 6000 W 92 W 2W 6094 W 2894 W 3294 W
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) CONSUMER LIST =
Drawn Rabe + LIST
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TOP VIEW - SCHEMATICAL DRAWING
+MKA10GA010
DE NDE JUNCTION BOX MEASURING
+MKD10GA010
JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MEASUREMENT DE
+MKD20GA010
+MKD10GA020 +MKA10GP010 JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MEASUREMENT NDE
+MKA10GE030
JUNCTION BOX VOLTAGE
+MKA10GD010 +MKD20GA010
+MKA10GE030 +MKD10GA020
JUNCTION BOX ROTOR EARTHING
+MKA10GA121
+MKA10GP010
JUNCTION BOX HOOD LIGHT
+MKA10GA121
JUNCTION BOX HOOD VENTILATION
+MKA10GD010
NEUTRAL SIDE CUBICLE
+MKA10GE010
NSC SECONDARY JUNCTION BOX
+MKA10GE020
LSC JB CURRENT TRANSFORMER
+MKA10GA010 (NOT SHOWN, LOOSE SUPPLY)
+MKA10GE010
+MKD10GA010
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOXES =
Drawn Rabe + CABLING
OVERVIEW
ENERGY SECTOR SCHEMATICAL DRAWING EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TOP VIEW - SCHEMATICAL DRAWING REMARKS FOR ASSEMBLY AT FACTORY
Check all devices after mounting
DE NDE
+MKA10GA010
=MKA10CT010 +MKA10GA010 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING
REMARKS FOR ASSEMBLY AT SITE

NONE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) CABLING =

STATOR SLOT THERMOMETER
ENERGY SECTOR LOCATION DIAGRAM EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DE NDE
RTD WITH PLUG CONNECTOR
=MKD10CT010
=MKD20CT010
+MKA10GA010
+MKA10GA010 JUNCTION BOX MEASURING

NONE

BEARING THERMOMETER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DE NDE WITH ANGLE BRACKET
IN THREATED HOLE G 1/2"
=MKA10CT060
+MKA10GA010
=MKA10CT051 =MKA10CT056
=MKA10CT050 =MKA10CT055

NONE

AIR THERMOMETER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

COOLER
DE NDE
=MKA10CL215 =MKA10CL225
=MKA10CL210 =MKA10CL220
Leakage water detector SITRANS LVL100

in leakage water collector of cooler
HAN3A
+MKA10GA010

CONNECT PLUG CONNECTORS TO
LEAKAGE WATER ELECTRODES

LEAKAGE WATER DETECTION
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DE NDE
PROBE HOUSING
PROXIMITORS ARRANGED IN JUNCTION BOX
+MKD20GA010
=MKD20CY012
=MKD10CY012
Y Y
+MKD10GA010
X X JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MEASUREMENT DE
+MKD20GA010
JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION MEASUREMENT NDE
=MKD10CY011
=MKD20CY011
+MKD10GA010

NONE
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) CABLING =

RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DE NDE
WITH ANGLE BRACKET

+MKA10GE030
+MKA10GE030
=MKA10AH110-R1 =MKA10AH110-R2

NONE
b 12.07.2019 Rabe Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) CABLING =

ANTICONDENSATION HEATER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DE NDE
+MKA10GP010
JUNCTION BOX HOOD LIGHT
+MKA10GP010 +MKA10GE030
=MKA11GS001 HAN 10 A PLUG

+MKA10GE030
=MKA11GP001
=40MKA11GP002
=MKA11GS002

HOOD LIGHT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
STANDARD CASING
K20-40/40
DEGREE OF PROTECTION
IP66
FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER TAPPED HOLES IN REAR WALL

(SIEMENS)
FLANGE PLATES AT
400
TOP AND BOTTOM
(CUSTOMER)
M20 M20 M20 M20 M20
7 x SK5 MOUNTING RAIL
SHIELD RAIL TS 35 (EN60715)
M25 M25 M20 M20 M20 ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM
340
SCALE 1:2(A3)
M20 M20 M20 M25 M20
COLOUR: RAL 7035
1,2,3,4
-X1 5,6,7,8
1-40 PTTB-4
=MKD20CT010
=MKA10CT010
=MKA10CT030
=MKA10CT021
=MKA10CT012
=MKA10CT032
=MKA10CT050
=MKA10CT051
=MKA10CT056
240
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
-A1
400
-X2 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
-X3 5,6,7,8
1-16 PTTB-45,6,7,8 1-32 PTTB-4
-X5
1-15 PT 2,5
100 PE PT 2,5-PE
400
d 04.02.2020 Konar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX MEASURING =
Drawn Rabe + MKA10GA010
MOUNTING PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=MKA10CT010-B1 =MKA10CT020-B1 =MKA10CT030-B1 =MKA10CT011-B1 =MKA10CT021-B1 =MKA10CT031-B1
SLOT 2-U SLOT 42-V SLOT 22-W SLOT 32-U SLOT 12-V SLOT 52-W
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100
-MKA4001 -MKA4002 -MKA4003 -MKA4004 -MKA4005 -MKA4006

TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON
4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE
+MKA10GA010
4-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
-20 - 200°C
-20 - 200°C
-20 - 200°C
=MKA10CT010-A1
=MKA10CT030-A1
=MKA10CT021-A1
=MKA10CT020-A1
=MKA10CT011-A1
=MKA10CT031-A1
41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54 41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54 41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54
PR ELECTRONICS PR ELECTRONICS PR ELECTRONICS
6331V105-UK 6331V105-UK 6331V105-UK
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA

-11 +13 -21 +23 -11 +13 -21 +23 -11 +13 -21 +23
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK
0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
-X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
+CJJ20
-CJJ4001 1 4 3 2 -CJJ4002 1 4 3 2 -CJJ4003 1 4 3 2
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX MEASURING =
STATOR WINDING TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=MKA10CT012-B1 =MKA10CT022-B1 =MKA10CT032-B1 =MKA10CT013-B1 =MKA10CT023-B1 =MKA10CT033-B1

SPARE SPARE SPARE
SLOT 33-U SLOT 13-V SLOT 53-W SLOT 3-U SLOT 43-V SLOT 23-W
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100
-MKA4007 -MKA4008 -MKA4009 -MKA4010 -MKA4011 -MKA4012

TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON TEFLON
4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE 4x0.22 BU RD GY YE
+MKA10GA010 22.1 22.1 22.1 22.1

WA1 WA2 WA3 WA4
4-20mA
4-20mA
-20 - 200°C
-20 - 200°C
=MKA10CT012-A1
=MKA10CT032-A1
=MKA10CT022-A1
=MKA10CT060-A1
41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54 41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54
PR ELECTRONICS PR ELECTRONICS
6331V105-UK 6331V105-UK
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA

-11 +13 -21 +23 -11 +13 -21 +23
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK
0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
-X1 13 14 15 16 17 18 -X3 21 22 -X1 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
+CJJ20
-CJJ4004 1 4 3 2 -CJJ4005 1 4 3 2
STATOR WINDING TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEARING METAL TEMP. DE BEARING METAL TEMP. NDE

DOUBLE ELEMENT DOUBLE ELEMENT
=MKD10CT010-B1 =MKD20CT010-B1
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-MKA4013 -MKA4014
340-C-PUR 340-C-PUR
4x2x0,5 WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD 4x2x0,5 WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD
+MKA10GA010
4-20mA
-20 - 200°C
=MKD20CT010-A1
=MKD10CT010-A1
41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54
PR ELECTRONICS
6331V105-UK
PT100 PT100
4..20mA 4..20mA
-11 +13 -21 +23
BK BK BK BK
0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
-X2 3 4 5 6 SHIELD 1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 SHIELD
+CJJ20
-CJJ4006 1 4 3 2 DE ... DRIVE END

NDE ... NON DRIVE END
SHIELD
BEARING TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COLD AIR TEMP. DE

DOUBLE ELEMENT
=MKA10CT050-B1 =MKA10CT051-B1
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-MKA4017 -MKA4018
340-C-PUR 340-C-PUR
+MKA10GA010 21.4 21.4 21.5 21.5

CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4
4-20mA
4-20mA
-20 - 200°C
-20 - 200°C
=MKA10CT051-A1
=MKA10CT056-A1
=MKA10CT055-A1
=MKA10CT056-A2
41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54 41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54
PR ELECTRONICS PR ELECTRONICS
6331V105-UK 6331V105-UK
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA 4..20mA

-11 +13 -21 +23 -11 +13 -21 +23
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK
0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
-X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHIELD 9 10 11 12 SHIELD
+CJJ20
-CJJ4008 1 4 3 2 5 8 7 6 DE ... DRIVE END

SHIELD
COLD AIR TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COLD AIR TEMP. NDE

DOUBLE ELEMENT
=MKA10CT055-B1 =MKA10CT056-B1
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 Pt100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-MKA4019 -MKA4020
340-C-PUR 340-C-PUR
+MKA10GA010
4-20mA
-20 - 200°C
=MKA10CT050-A1
=MKA10CT050-A2
41 43 42 44 51 53 52 54
CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4
PR ELECTRONICS 20.1 20.1 20.1 20.1
6331V105-UK
PT100 PT100
4..20mA 4..20mA
-11 +13 -21 +23
BK BK BK BK
0,75 0,75 0,75 0,75
-X3 13 14 15 16 SHIELD 17 18 19 20 SHIELD
+CJJ20
-CJJ4009 1 4 3 2 DE ... DRIVE END

SHIELD
COLD AIR TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WARM AIR TEMPERATURE

DOUBLE ELEMENT
=MKA10CT060-B1
Pt100 Pt100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-MKA4021
340-C-PUR
4x2x0,5 WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD
+MKA10GA010
WA1 WA2 WA3 WA4

18.4 18.4 18.4 18.5
23 24 25 26 SHIELD
+CJJ20
DE ... DRIVE END

WARM AIR TEMPERATURE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 2
=MKA10CL210-B1 =MKA10CL215-B1
ALARM TRIP
24V DC 24V DC
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-MKA4022 -MKA4023
MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500
4Gx0,75 1 2 3 GNYE 4Gx0,75 1 2 3 GNYE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-X1 -X2
HAN 3A HAN 3A
+MKA10GA010
-X5 1 2 3 PE 4 5 6 PE
- OUT + - OUT +
+CJJ20
-CJJ4011 1 3 2 5 7 6
SHIELD
DE ... DRIVE END

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 1 LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 2
=MKA10CL220-B1 =MKA10CL225-B1
ALARM TRIP
24V DC 24V DC
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-MKA4024 -MKA4025
MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500
4Gx0,75 1 2 3 GNYE 4Gx0,75 1 2 3 GNYE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-X3 -X4
HAN 3A HAN 3A
+MKA10GA010
-X5 7 8 9 PE 10 11 12 PE
- OUT + - OUT +
+CJJ20
-CJJ4012 1 3 2 5 7 6
SHIELD
DE ... DRIVE END

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-X1 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 -X2 13 14 15 16 -X3 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 -X5 13 14 15
SPARE TERMINALS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CJJ4004
CJJ4003
CJJ4002
CJJ4001
=+MKA10GA010-X1
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
0,75 mm²
link
item designation destination A destination B page / track
SLOT 2-U 1 1 =MKA10CT010-A1 -11 SW 17 0
= 4 2 =MKA10CT010-A1 +13 SW 17 1
=MKA10CT020-A1 3 3 =MKA10CT010-A1 -21 SW 17 1
= 2 4 =MKA10CT010-A1 +23 SW 17 1
SLOT 22-W 1 5 =MKA10CT030-A1 -11 SW 17 3
= 4 6 =MKA10CT030-A1 +13 SW 17 3
=MKA10CT011-A1 3 7 =MKA10CT030-A1 -21 SW 17 4
= 2 8 =MKA10CT030-A1 +23 SW 17 4
SLOT 12-V 1 9 =MKA10CT021-A1 -11 SW 17 6
= 4 10 =MKA10CT021-A1 +13 SW 17 6
=MKA10CT031-A1 3 11 =MKA10CT021-A1 -21 SW 17 7
= 2 12 =MKA10CT021-A1 +23 SW 17 7
SLOT 33-U 1 13 =MKA10CT012-A1 -11 18 0
= 4 14 =MKA10CT012-A1 +13 18 1
=MKA10CT022-A1 3 15 =MKA10CT012-A1 -21 18 1
= 2 16 =MKA10CT012-A1 +23 18 1
SEPARATION PLATE
SEPARATION WITH TS-K
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GA010-X1 =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CJJ4005
MKA4010
MKA4011
MKA4012
=+MKA10GA010-X1
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
TEFLON
TEFLON
TEFLON
link
SLOT 53-W 1 17 =MKA10CT032-A1 -11 18 3
= 4 18 =MKA10CT032-A1 +13 18 3
SLOT 3-U 19 =MKA10CT013-B1 BU 18 5
SLOT 43-V 23 =MKA10CT023-B1 BU 18 6
SLOT 3-U 20 =MKA10CT013-B1 RD 18 5
SLOT 43-V 24 =MKA10CT023-B1 RD 18 6
SLOT 3-U 21 =MKA10CT013-B1 GY 18 5
SLOT 43-V 25 =MKA10CT023-B1 GY 18 7
SLOT 3-U 22 =MKA10CT013-B1 YE 18 6
SLOT 43-V 26 =MKA10CT023-B1 YE 18 7
SLOT 23-W 27 =MKA10CT033-B1 BU 18 8
= 28 =MKA10CT033-B1 RD 18 8
= 29 =MKA10CT033-B1 GY 18 8
= 30 =MKA10CT033-B1 YE 18 8
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SEPARATION PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CJJ4006
MKA4013
MKA4014
=+MKA10GA010-X2
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
340-C-PUR
340-C-PUR
0,75 mm²
link
BEARING METAL TEMP. DE 1 1 =MKD20CT010-A1 -11 SW 19 3
= 4 2 =MKD20CT010-A1 +13 SW 19 4
= 3 =MKD10CT010-B1 5 GY 19 2
= 4 =MKD10CT010-B1 6 PK 19 2
= 5 =MKD10CT010-B1 7 BU 19 2
= 6 =MKD10CT010-B1 8 RD 19 2
=MKD10CT010-A1 3 7 =MKD20CT010-A1 -21 SW 19 4
= 2 8 =MKD20CT010-A1 +23 SW 19 4
= 9 =MKD20CT010-B1 5 GY 19 5
= 10 =MKD20CT010-B1 6 PK 19 5
= 11 =MKD20CT010-B1 7 BU 19 6
= 12 =MKD20CT010-B1 8 RD 19 6
13
14
15
16
SEPARATION PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CJJ4005
CJJ4009
CJJ4008
MKA4020
=+MKA10GA010-X3
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
340-C-PUR
0,75 mm²
link
1 1 =MKA10CT051-A1 -11 SW 20 1
4 2 =MKA10CT051-A1 +13 SW 20 1
=MKA10CT055-A1 3 3 =MKA10CT051-A1 -21 SW 20 2
= 2 4 =MKA10CT051-A1 +23 SW 20 2
= 5 =MKA10CT050-B1 5 20 3
= 6 =MKA10CT050-B1 6 20 3
= 7 =MKA10CT050-B1 7 20 3
= 8 =MKA10CT050-B1 8 20 3
= 5 9 =MKA10CT056-A1 -11 SW 20 5
= 8 10 =MKA10CT056-A1 +13 SW 20 5
=MKA10CT056-A2 7 11 =MKA10CT056-A1 -21 SW 20 6
= 6 12 =MKA10CT056-A1 +23 SW 20 6
COLD AIR TEMP. NDE 1 13 =MKA10CT050-A1 -11 SW 21 1
= 4 14 =MKA10CT050-A1 +13 SW 21 1
=MKA10CT050-A2 3 15 =MKA10CT050-A1 -21 SW 21 2
= 2 16 =MKA10CT050-A1 +23 SW 21 2
= 17 =MKA10CT056-B1 5 GY 21 5
= 18 =MKA10CT056-B1 6 PK 21 5
= 19 =MKA10CT056-B1 7 BU 21 6
= 20 =MKA10CT056-B1 8 RD 21 6
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
=MKA10CT060-A1 3 21 =MKA10CT032-A1 -21 18 4
= 2 22 =MKA10CT032-A1 +23 18 4
SEPARATION PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CJJ4012
CJJ4011
=+MKA10GA010-X5
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
link
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 1 1 1
= 3 2
= 2 3
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 2 5 4
= 7 5
= 6 6
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 1 1 7
= 3 8
= 2 9
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 2 5 10
= 7 11
= 6 12
13
14
15
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 1 PE
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR DE 2 PE
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 1 PE
LEAKAGE WATER SENSOR NDE 2 PE
SEPARATION PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
STANDARD CASING K12-30/20
DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP65
TAPPED HOLES
MOUNTING RAIL TS 35 (EN60715)
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
VIEW ON RIGHT HAND SIDE FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER BOTTOM SIDE FOR CUSTOMER CONNECTION DRILLED AT SITE
COLOUR: RAL 7035
100
=MKD10CY011
=MKD10CY012
-A1
-A1
100
120 300
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX VIBRATION =

Drawn Rabe + MKD10GA010
MOUNTING PLATE
ENERGY SECTOR DRIVE END EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEARING DE
REL. SHAFT VIBRATION DE-X REL. SHAFT VIBRATION DE-Y
=MKD10CY011-B1 =MKD10CY012-B1
E E
-MKD4001 -MKD4002
9m 9m SENSOR
3x 3x BENTLY NEVADA 330106-05-30-05-02-00
+MKD10GA010
=MKD10CY011-A1 =MKD10CY012-A1
PROXIMITOR 3300XL PROXIMITOR 3300XL
VT COM OUT VT COM OUT
PROXIMITOR 9m, 200μm pp

BENTLY NEVADA 330180-91-00
+CJJ20
-CJJ4013 1 3 4 CJJ4014 1 3 4
DE ... DRIVE END

Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX =

ENERGY SECTOR DRIVE END EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
TAPPED HOLES
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
BOTTOM SIDE FOR CUSTOMER CONNECTION DRILLED AT SITE

VIEW ON RIGHT HAND SIDE FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER
COLOUR: RAL 7035
100
=MKD20CY011
=MKD20CY012
-A1
-A1
100
120 300
MOUNTING PLATE
ENERGY SECTOR NON DRIVE END EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BEARING NDE
REL. SHAFT VIBRATION NDE-X REL. SHAFT VIBRATION NDE-Y
=MKD20CY011-B1 =MKD20CY012-B1
E E
-MKD4006 -MKD4007
9m 9m SENSOR
3x 3x BENTLY NEVADA 330106-05-30-05-02-00
+MKD20GA010
=MKD20CY011-A1 =MKD20CY012-A1
PROXIMITOR 3300XL PROXIMITOR 3300XL
VT COM OUT VT COM OUT
PROXIMITOR 9m, 200μm pp

BENTLY NEVADA 330180-91-00
+CJJ20
-CJJ4016 1 3 4 -CJJ4017 1 3 4
DE ... DRIVE END


ENERGY SECTOR NON DRIVE END EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
TAPPED HOLES
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
VIEW ON RIGHT HAND SIDE FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER BOTTOM SIDE FOR CUSTOMER CONNECTION DRILLED AT SITE
COLOUR: RAL 7035
100
-X0
1-13 PT 6
PE PT 6-PE
100
120 300
b 12.07.2019 Rabe Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX VOLTAGE =
Drawn Rabe + MKA10GE030
MOUNTING PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GENERATOR HEATER DE GENERATOR HEATER NDE TO EXCITER HOOD LIGHT
=MKA10AH110-R1 =MKA10AH110-R2
3*400V 3*400V
1600W 1600W
L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE
EHLL / +MKA10GP010/39.1
EHLN / +MKA10GP010/39.1
EHLPE / +MKA10GP010/39.1
-MKA10AH001 -MKA10AH002 -MKA10AH004

MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500
5x1,5 1 2 3 4 GNYE 5x1,5 1 2 3 4 GNYE 3x0,75 1 2 GNYE
HAN 10A
+MKA10GE030
-X0 1 3 5 7 PE 2 4 6 8 PE 9 10 PE 11 12 13
CLIENT MCC -BJC1022 -BJC1207

N2XH-J N2XH-J
5x BN BK GY BU GNYE 3x4 BN BU GNYE
-X0 37 38 39 40 PE -X0 PE
400V / 50Hz 230V / 50Hz
DE ... DRIVE END

Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX VOLTAGE =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
BJC1207
BJC1022
MKA10AH001
MKA10AH002
=+MKA10GE030-X0
no. cable
no. cable
MEGAFLEX 500
MEGAFLEX 500
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
N2XH-J
N2XH-J
link
GENERATOR HEATER DE BN -X0 37 1 =MKA10AH110-R1 L1 1 36 1
GENERATOR HEATER NDE 2 =MKA10AH110-R2 L1 1 36 4
GENERATOR HEATER DE BK -X0 38 3 =MKA10AH110-R1 L2 2 36 1
GENERATOR HEATER DE GY -X0 39 5 =MKA10AH110-R1 L3 3 36 1
GENERATOR HEATER DE BU -X0 40 7 =MKA10AH110-R1 N 4 36 2
GENERATOR HEATER NDE 8 =MKA10AH110-R2 N 4 36 4
TO EXCITER HOOD LIGHT BN -X0 9 36 6
= BU -X0 10 36 6
= 11
= 12
= 13
GENERATOR HEATER DE GNYE -X0 PE PE =MKA10AH110-R1 PE GNYE 36 2
GENERATOR HEATER NDE PE =MKA10AH110-R2 PE GNYE 36 5
TO EXCITER HOOD LIGHT GNYE -X0 PE PE 36 7
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE030-X0 =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
TAPPED HOLES
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
COLOUR RAL 7035
VIEW ON RIGHT HAND SIDE FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER VIEW ON LEFT HAND SIDE
100
-X0
1-12 PT 2,5
PE PT 2,5-PE
100
120 200 120
b 12.07.2019 Rabe Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX =
Drawn Rabe + MKA10GP010
HOOD LIGHT
ENERGY SECTOR MOUNTING PLATE EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COVER HOOD LIGHT
+MKA10GE030/36.7 / EHLN
+MKA10GE030/36.7 / EHLPE
+MKA10GE030/36.7 / EHLL
+MKA10GP010
-X0 1 2 4 PE 6 5 3 PE 7 9 8 10 11 12
-MKA10HL001 -MKA10HL002 -MKA10HL003 -MKA10HL004

MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500 MEGAFLEX 500
4x0,75 1 2 3 GNYE 4x0,75 1 2 3 GNYE 3x0,75 1 2 3x1,5 1 2
1 3 1 3 x1 x1
-S01 PE -S02 PE -E100 -E101
2 2 x2 x2
=MKA11GS001 =MKA11GS002 =MKA11GP001 =MPB11GP002

230V AC 230V AC
46W 46W
SWITCH SWITCH LIGHT LIGHT

LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX =

HOOD LIGHT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
MKA10HL004
MKA10HL003
MKA10HL002
MKA10HL001
MKA10AH004
=+MKA10GP010-X0
no. cable
no. cable
MEGAFLEX 500
MEGAFLEX 500
MEGAFLEX 500
MEGAFLEX 500
MEGAFLEX 500
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
link
SWITCH LEFT SIDE 1 =MKA11GS001-S01 2 1 1 36 6
= 2 =MKA11GS001-S01 1 2
SWITCH RIGHT SIDE 3 =MKA11GS002-S02 3 3
SWITCH LEFT SIDE 3 =MKA11GS001-S01 3 4
SWITCH RIGHT SIDE 2 =MKA11GS002-S02 1 5
= 1 =MKA11GS002-S02 2 6
LIGHT 1 =MKA11GP001-E100 x1 7
= 1 =MPB11GP002-E101 x1 8
= 2 =MKA11GP001-E100 x2 9 2 36 6
= 2 =MPB11GP002-E101 x2 10
= 11
= 12
SWITCH LEFT SIDE GNYE =MKA11GS001 PE PE GNYE 36 7
SWITCH RIGHT SIDE GNYE =MKA11GS002 PE PE
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GP010-X0 =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400V 50Hz
-X0 1 2 3 PE
-2T1
4 2
-2F1
2A
1 3 5 1 3 5 3 1
-2Q1 -2Q2
24V
I> I> I> I> I> I>

1.14 1 2
2 4 6 2 4 6
-2Q1 -2S1
1.13 3 4
11
1 3 5 -2K1
-2K2 14
2 4 6
T1 A1 A1 x1
-2K1 -2K2 -2H1
T2 A2 A2 x2
-W1
-X1 4 5 6 PE 7 8 -X3 1 2
Y-JZ
7x1,5 1 2
U V W PE
M
-M2 3~
400V / 4,11A / 2,5 kW Ĭ
5 6
3 4
1 2 /41.1
SLC
MKC05EE010
d 04.02.2020 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX HOOD VENTILATION =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
21
-2K1
/41.7 24
/41.5
-X2 1 2 -X3 3 4 -X2 3 4 -X3 5 6 7 8
-W2 -W3
Y-OZ Y-OZ
2x1 1 2 2x1 1 2
3 2 3 2
-3B1 P -3B2 P
/42 1 /42 1
DIFF. PRESSURE SWITCH FAILURE DIFF. PRESSURE SWITCH FAILURE FAILURE

FILTER 1 FILTER 1 FILTER 2 FILTER 2 MOTOR
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX HOOD VENTILATION =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MEDIUM VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT

+MKA10GD010
NEUTRAL SIDE
CT CORES ARE EARTHED
ON SECONDARY SIDE
BY EARTHING SCREWS
AT CT HOUSING
-T3.1L1 -T3.2L1 -T3.3L1

S1-S2: 10000/1A; 0.2 FS10; 30VA S1-S2: 10000/1A; 5P40; 10VA S1-S2: 10000/1A; 5P40; 10VA
U2
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
GENERATOR
-T3.1L2 -T3.2L2 -T3.3L2
44.3 / NGT V2
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
-T3.1L3 -T3.2L3 -T3.3L3
W2
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
+MKA10GE010
-X7N 4 1 5 2 6 3 10 7 11 8 12 9 16 13 17 14 18 15
* * *
PE PE PE
+CJN10 +CHA10
-CJN3803
N2XH-J
5x4 GNYE BN BK GY BU
PE
-X7 11 13 15 12
MEASURING PROTECTION PROTECTION
* REMOVE LINKS DURING ERECTION OR COMMISSIONING
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) MTB NEUTRAL SIDE =
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+MKA10GD010 NGT / 43.0
NEUTRAL SIDE
1
-X8
2
-T8
1.1 2.1
18/¥3: 0,5kV
103,9kVA
10A 10s
Usat: >1,4xUn
RX1
-R8
2,41ƻ RX2
207,9A
10s
1.2 2.2
-T47.1 -T47.2
400/5A; 1FS5; 15VA 400/5A; 1FS5; 15VA
P1 P2 P1 P2
200/5A used 200/5A used
PE PE wrap 2 turns wrap 2 turns
S1 S2 S1 S2
BK BK BK BK
4 4 4 4
+MKA10GE010
-X7N 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 -X0 1 2 3 4 5
* *
+CHA10
-CHA3807 -CHA3807 -CHA3805

N2XH-J N2XH-J N2XH-J
5x4 BN BU 5x4 BN BU 5x2,5 BK GY BU BN
-X15 1 3 -X15 5 6 7 8
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) MTB NEUTRAL SIDE =
GROUNDING TRANSFORMER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CHA3805
=+MKA10GE010-X0
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
N2XH-J
link
BK -X15 5 1 +MKA10GD010-R8 RX2 44;44 7;5
GY -X15 6 2
BU -X15 7 3 +MKA10GD010-R8 RX1 44 7
BN -X15 8 4
5
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE010-X0 =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
CHA3807
CJN3803
=+MKA10GE010-X7N
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
N2XH-J
N2XH-J
4 mm²
link
MEASURING 1 S2 SW 43 1
= 2 +MKA10GD010-T3.1L2 S2 SW 43 1
= BU -X7 12 3 +MKA10GD010-T3.1L3 S2 SW 43 2
= BN -X7 11 4 S1 SW 43 1
= BK -X7 13 5 +MKA10GD010-T3.1L2 S1 SW 43 1
= GY -X7 15 6 +MKA10GD010-T3.1L3 S1 SW 43 2
CLIENT UNIT 7 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L1 S2 SW 43 3
= 8 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L2 S2 SW 43 4
= 9 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L3 S2 SW 43 4
PROTECTION 10 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L1 S1 SW 43 3
CLIENT UNIT 11 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L2 S1 SW 43 3
= 12 +MKA10GD010-T3.2L3 S1 SW 43 4
PROTECTION 13 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L1 S2 SW 43 5
= 14 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L2 S2 SW 43 6
= 15 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L3 S2 SW 43 6
= 16 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L1 S1 SW 43 5
= 17 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L2 S1 SW 43 6
= 18 +MKA10GD010-T3.3L3 S1 SW 43 6
BN -X15 1 19 +MKA10GD010-T47.1 S1 SW 44 3
BU -X15 3 20 +MKA10GD010-T47.1 S2 SW 44 3
BN -X15 21 +MKA10GD010-T47.2 S1 SW 44 4
BU -X15 22 +MKA10GD010-T47.2 S2 SW 44 4
23
24
25
26
27
28
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =
=+MKA10GE010-X7N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
TAPPED HOLES
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
COLOR RAL 7035
150
-X7L
1-22 URTK/SP
150
120 300
b 12.07.2019 Rabe Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX LINE SIDE =
Drawn Rabe
CUBICLE CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DPPPG-70187605 + MKA10GE020
ENERGY SECTOR MOUNTING PLATE EG000425 DPPPG-70183529 Pg. 52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LINE SIDE
CT CORES ARE EARTHED
ON SECONDARY SIDE
BY EARTHING SCREWS
AT CT HOUSING
-T2.3L1 -T2.2L1 -T2.1L1

S1-S2: 10000/1A; 0.2 FS10; 10VA S1-S2: 10000/1A; 0.2 FS10; 10VA S1-S2: 10000/1A; 0.2 FS10; 30VA
U1 U1
P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1
S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
GENERATOR -T2.3L2 -T2.2L2 -T2.1L2
V1 V1
P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1
S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1
-T2.3L3 -T2.2L3 -T2.1L3
W1 W1
P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1
S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1
**
+MKA10GE020
-X7L 1 4 2 5 3 6 7 10 8 11 9 12 13 16 14 17 15 18 19 20 21 22
* * *
PE PE PE
+CJN10
N2XH-J
GNYE BU BN BK GY 5x4 GNYE BU BN BK GY GNYE BU BN BK GY
PE PE PE N2XH-J
5x4
-X7 26 23 24 25 -X7 11 1 3 5 -X7 22 12 14 16
MEASURING MEASURING MEASURING

** WIRING NOT SCOPE OF SUPPLY SIEMENS ERF AND WILL BE DONE AT SITE
c 12.09.2019 Vollmar Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) MTB LINE SIDE =
Drawn Rabe
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DPPPG-70187605 + MKA10GE020
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
=+MKA10GE020-X7L
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
link
MEASURING -X7 26 1 -T2.3L1 S2 48 0
= 2 -T2.3L2 S2 48 1
= 3 -T2.3L3 S2 48 2
= -X7 23 4 -T2.3L1 S1 48 1
= -X7 24 5 -T2.3L2 S1 48 1
= -X7 25 6 -T2.3L3 S1 48 2
= -X7 11 7 -T2.2L1 S2 48 3
= 8 -T2.2L2 S2 48 3
= 9 -T2.2L3 S2 48 4
= -X7 1 10 -T2.2L1 S1 48 3
= -X7 3 11 -T2.2L2 S1 48 4
= -X7 5 12 -T2.2L3 S1 48 4
= -X7 22 13 -T2.1L1 S2 48 5
= 14 -T2.1L2 S2 48 6
= 15 -T2.1L3 S2 48 6
= -X7 12 16 -T2.1L1 S1 48 5
= -X7 14 17 -T2.1L2 S1 48 6
= -X7 16 18 -T2.1L3 S1 48 7
= 19
= 20
= 21
= 22
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKA10GE020-X7L =
Drawn Rabe DPPPG-70187605 + MKA10GE020
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANUFACTURER HÄWA
TAPPED HOLES
SCALE 1:2 (A3)
COLOUR: RAL 7035
-X0
1-2 PT 16 N
150
PE PT 16 N-PE
80 150
b 12.07.2019 Rabe Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX ROTOR EARTHING =
MOUNTING PLATE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ROTOR EARTHING BRUSHES

DE
GNYE GNYE
4 4
+MKD10GA020
-X0 1 2 PE3 PE4
DE ... DRIVE END

Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) JUNCTION BOX ROTOR EARTHING =
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal diagram
Lev.
Lev.
Terminal strip
=+MKD10GA020-X0
no. cable
no. cable
type cable
type cable
terminal
terminal
terminal
number
4 mm²
link
1 GNGE 51 2
2 GNGE 51 3
PE3
PE4
SEPARATION PLATE
Date 06.05.2019 Noor Energy 1 (PT 1-3) Terminal diagram : =+MKD10GA020-X0 =
Turbogenerator
Description
Generator Checklist
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Siemens AG Issue: 11
Power and Gas Division Date: 2015-12-03
Large Gas Turbines, Generators
Generator Plant Erfurt
Generator Checklist (2-Pole Generator) for Readiness Reviews

This checklist shall be completed by the responsible representatives at site for each generator as the installation
progresses
Note: This checklist is required for every site readiness review.
It is a standardized review checklist. Some of the collected issues may not apply to several projects and
can be cancelled. If there are any corrections or adding’s mail it to your Siemens contact person.
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
STEP PROCEDURE DOCUMENT STATUS
CHECKED
OKAY
1. Receipt of Generator Components and
Generator
A. Verify that the following components are stored Gen. Outline Drawing
in a clean and dry area: Supplement Drawing
1. Generator itself
2. Generator cover
3. Cooler cover and cooler elements
4. Oil Piping
5. Hydrostatic system and hoses
6. Anchoring and other loose shipped parts
7. Main lead bracket with current transformers,

and voltage converters, neutral point
connections and neutral grounding
transformer
8. Neutral Point and Line Side Cubicle and
there base frames
9. Generator rotor (if separate shipment).
B. All components of the generator, including the
slip rings or the exciter, are a Visual inspection
for damage and corrosion. Possible damage
caused by rust, water intrusion, or wrong
transport must be documented through photos
of the affected components. After checking, all
protective covers and fittings are refitted.
1. Check of the delivery status of the stator end
windings, the stand plate package, its
fastening and sealing, as well as the
generator frame.
2. Check of the delivery status of the carbon
brushes, holder and slip-rings.
1
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
3. Check of the delivery status of the rotor
externally as far as possible.
4. Verify that the covers over the oil supply and
drain pipe flanges on each bearing pedestal
completely seal the pipes to which they are
attached. The covers should be sealed such
that no dirt or debris can enter the pipe.
5. Before turning the rotor is to verify whether
the packing in the bearing have been
removed. Remove dirt and grease the
bearings. After the inspection, close
disassembled covers and open oil flanges.
C. Verify that there is a minimum insulation General Handling
resistance of 1 mega ohm per 1 kV rated Guidelines
voltage (at 40 degrees C) on each stator 4.7-1011-0004
winding phase when measured with a for
example 1kV-5kV megger for 1 minute. Megger
readings should be taken on a weekly basis.
Record results on the protocol 4.7-2800-0001 /1
in the end of this checklist. The polarization
index is not necessary because the Micalastic
insulation is not sensitive to moisture.
D. Verify that there is a minimum insulation General Handling
resistance of 1 mega ohm (at 40 degrees C) on Guidelines
the rotor windings when measured with a 250- 4.7-1010-0006
volt megger for 2 minutes. Megger readings
should be taken on a weekly basis. Record
results on the protocol 4.7-2800-0001 /2 in the
end of this checklist.
E. Verify that the minimum resistance from the Generator Assembly
rotor body/shaft to ground is ≥ 500 KΩ with a Records
100 - 250V megger.
F. Verify that the generator and exciter space Generator Outline
heaters are energized. Refer to the Generator Drawing
Outline Supplement for heater wiring and Wiring Diagram
location of junction box.
G. Verify the number and size of coupling bolts Generator Outline
holes on the generator and turbine couplings. Drawing
H. Ensure that yellow temporary shipping covers Gen. Outline Drawing

and shipping restraints have been removed. Shipping Brace Spec.
This includes the following; rotor shipping brace, Design Drawing
stator shipping brace and transportation Shipping Gen.
securing device. Refer to the Shipping Cover
Assembly and the Field Final Assembly
drawings for details.
1. Rotor shipping precaution in the bearings (if
rotor is mounted in the generator)
2. Internal stator shipping brace and bolting
hardware.
3. Verify that returnable shipping components
have been re-packaged for return to the
Siemens Erfurt factory.
2
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
2. Receipt of Auxiliary Equipment
Verify by visual inspection that the auxiliary Shipping List
equipment is complete, clean and undamaged.
3. Generator Installation on Foundation and
Alignment
3.1. Generator Foundation Verification
A. Verify that the following generator foundation Generator Outline
items meet the Siemens Generator Outline Drawing
drawing requirements: Anchoring Drawing
Manufacture
Specifications for
Anchoring
1. Anchor bolt location for the generator and
the acoustic outer enclosure.
2. Axial and transverse anchor embedment (if
applicable).
3. Generator foundation size.
4. Cover foundation size.
B. Before setting generator on foundation insure
that the bottom of generator and plates are
clean, grease and burr free.
C. Check that the entire concrete between the
generator base frame and cover foundation is
properly sealed with a special. (if separate
Cover anchor)
3.2. After Generator Installation on Foundation
Perform preliminary alignment of generator to
the turbine and recording the results.
3.3. Generator to Turbine Coupling Alignment
A. Prior to mating the generator coupling to the Generator Assembly
turbine coupling verify that the minimum Records
resistance from the rotor body/shaft to ground is
≥ 500 KΩ with a 100 - 250V megger.
B. Verify that at least 90% of the base frame is Anchoring Drawing
completely grouted with non shrinking grout, Manufacture
leveling screws are turned back and the found.- Specifications for
anchor bolts has been installed and torqued. Anchoring
C. Ensure that the coupling halves mating faces

and bolt holes are clean and free of burrs and
dents. Clean as necessary.
D. Verify the coupling alignment readings for
parallelism and concentricity. Record the
measurements.
E. Ensure that alignment requirements are Outline Drawing Text
observed and the offset and bending of rotor
body are considered
F. Verify coupling bolts are properly torqued or
tensioned per the coupling assembly drawing.
Record the measurements of torque/tension.
3
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
4. Installation of Mechanical and Electrical
Equipment
A. Inspect the sealing from to the cooler cover to Cooler Drawing
the generator cover. Inspect the bolting and
sealing of the cooler elements.
B. Inspect outer generator cover sealing to the Cover Drawings
generator base frame at all of the following
locations below. All of the below should be
verified via the halogen light test.
1. Between generator cover and base frame
2. Between generator cover and foundation.
3. Between generator cover and extra covers
on Turbine End and Exciter End.
4. Between generator cover and wall panel
(cool air / hot air) on generator base frame
5. Between generator cover and all shaft
bushings on TE and EE.
6. Between generator cover and all pipe
penetrations on TE and EE.
7. At all access panels and doors on generator
cover and cooler cover.
8. Between generator cover and turbine
enclosure.
9. Between generator cover and starting
package.
C. Review all connection points for the cooler Cooler Drawing
piping, liquid detector vent and drain, and cooler
vents to ensure that they have been assembled
correctly and that there are no obstructions in
the lines.
D. Inspect the top of the generator and cooler area
for cleanliness.
E. Verify the cleanliness of the area inside the
generator enclosure and cooler cover. The
entire area should be swept and vacuumed.
F. Verify installation of the external generator Generator Outline
junction boxes mounted on the generator base Drawing
frame or generator enclosure.
G. Verify installation of the intermediate shaft cover
or coupling cover support.
H. Verify all air filters are installed and properly Generator Outline
Drawing
sealed to the support framework in all applicable
Cover Drawings
locations. Brush Gear Drawing
1. Inlet filters on slip rings and silencers.
2. Make up duct filter on TEWAC cooler.
I. Verify that the main and neutral lead assemblies Assembly Instruction
have been properly installed per drawing. Verify for Flex Link
4
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
that the contact check between the leads on the Installation
assembly and the leads extending from the Bushings Assembly
generator has been performed. Make sure that
all bolts have been properly lubricated and
installed, all lock washers are locked and the
flexible links are mounted stress-free.
1. All flexible connections stress free installed.
2. Main lead bolting lubricated and torqued.
3. Main lead assembly and contact check.
4. Neutral lead bolting lubricated and torqued.
5. Neutral lead assembly contact check.

J. Verify that the neutral grounding resistor and Cubicle Outline
transformers have been properly connected. Drawing
Verify that the contact check between the leads Single line diagram
on the assembly and the leads extending from
the generator has been performed. Make sure
that all bolts have been properly lubricated and
installed, all lock washers are locked and the
flexible links are mounted stress-free.
1. Verify that the resistance across the bank of
resistors is 0.48 ohms.
2. Verify that the H1 side of the grounding
transformer is connected to the neutral
shorting bar on the neutral leads.
3. Verify that the H2 side of the grounding
transformer is connected to ground.
4. Verify that the X1 side of the grounding
transformer is connected to one end of the
resistor bank.
5. Verify that the X4 side of the grounding
transformer is connected to the opposite
one end of the resistor bank from that of the
lead that is connected to the X1 side of the
grounding transformer.
6. Verify that the resistor bank is grounded.
K. Verify that all power consuming devices and

measuring points are connected according to
the connection diagram.
L. Verify that the slip rings assembly has taken Generator Outline
place in accordance with the assembly drawing. Drawing
1. Verify that the brush gear have been properly

assembled and installed. The spring locking
mechanism should fully engage insuring firm
seating of the brush in the holder.
2. Verify that where the slip rings leads pass
through the generator frame that they have
been properly sealed.
5
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
M. Verify that generator base frame and generator Generator Outline
cover are grounded to the plant ground grid. Drawing
Grounding Drawing
N. Check the transmission ratio and polarity of Cubicle Outline
electricity and power transformer (if provided) Drawing
on the basis of the current run plans. Single line diagram
1. Line Out Cubicle

2. Neutral Point Cubicle
3. Mai lead bracket with Cubicle
O. Verify wiring from the data acquisition system Generator Outline
has been connected and labeled properly the Drawing
main junction boxes of the generator. Outline Drawing Text
Continuity checks should be performed on all Wiring Diagram
wiring. Refer to the Generator Outline drawing
text.
P. Verify the correct arrangement of the rotor Rotor Grounding
grounding brushes (earth brushes). Heed the Brush Drawing
direction of rotation.
5. Installation of Auxiliary Equipment
5.1. Neutral Cubicle
For each component carry out the operations as
indicated in the relative instruction booklets.
A. Visually inspect the cubicle for damage.
B. Check the correct tightening of the nuts and
bolts.
C. Check the correct connection of the medium
and low voltage cables.
D. Check the correct tightening of the screws of the
terminal boards.
E. Check the separation points of the contacts.
F. Check the mechanical operation of circuit
breaker and the corresponding latches (as
needed).
G. Insulation resistance test:
Perform measuring by means of Megger,
between phases and to earth on both main and
auxiliary circuits to check the insulation
resistance
(Megger voltage: 2500 V for main circuits and
500 V for secondary circuits).
The minimum values of resistance to earth may
be a few tens of M Ohm for the main circuits
and a few mega ohms for the secondary
circuits.
H. Operation test:
Perform tests on the secondary circuits to check
the correct remote controlled working of the
operating mechanism, indications, protection
6
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
and of all other circuits connected to
components outside the switchboard.
Check the correct working of the heaters, if av.
5.2. Lineside Cubicle
For each component carry out the operations as
indicated in the relative instruction booklets.
A. Visually inspect the cubicle for damage.
B. Check the correct tightening of the nuts and
bolts.
C. Check the correct connection of the medium
and low voltage cables.
D. Check the correct tightening of the screws of the
terminal boards.
E. Check the separation points of the contacts.
F. Check the mechanical operation of circuit
breaker and the corresponding latches (as
needed).
G. Insulation resistance test:
Perform measuring by means of Megger,
between phases and to earth on both main and
auxiliary circuits to check the insulation
resistance (Megger voltage: 2500 V for main
circuits and 500 V for secondary circuits).
The minimum values of resistance to earth may
be a few tens of M Ohm for the main circuits
and a few mega Ohm for the secondary circuits.
H. Operation test:
Perform tests on the secondary circuits to check
the correct remote controlled working of the
operating mechanism, indications, and
protections and of all other circuits connected to
components outside the switchboard.
Check the correct working of the heaters, if av.
5.3. Hydrostatic System
A. Visually inspect all components for evidence of
damage and corrosion.
B. Verify the motors were lubricated and checked.
C. Verify that the tank is cleaned.
D. Verify that the pipelines are cleaned and
correctly fitted.
E. Verify that the pipelines and components are
correctly connected in line with installation
drawings or circuit diagram.
F. Verify that the motors and pumps are correctly
assembled and aligned and the motors are
correctly connected.
G. Verify that the skid is sufficiently fasted.
7
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
5.4. Air- or Water Cooler Unit (TEWAC) Cooler Drawings
A. Visually inspect all components for evidence of

damage and corrosion.
B. Verify the completeness of the Cooler Unit
1. Cover and cooler sections
2. Cleaning Brush
3. Leakage Water Sensors
4. Sound insulation duly glued in.
5. Mounting hardware
C. Verify correct erection of cooler cover on the
generator cover.
1. Sealing to the generator cover
2. Fixing the cooler cover with pulling anchors
3. Support to foundation
D. Verify that the water connections are checked.

Water inlet flange and water outlet flange are
not confused.
E. Cooler deaerated. Exhaust and drain valves
closed.
6. Completion of Mechanical and Electrical
Testing
A. Measure the insulation resistance of the bearing Generator Assembly
seat insulation with a 100 - 250V megger. The Records
minimum resistance should be ≥ 500 KΩ.
B. Measure the resistance of the stator windings
with a Kelvin Bridge, DLRO or suitable
equipment that can measure to an accuracy of
10 micro ohms. Correct the resistance reading
to 20 degrees using the following formula:
(Ts  234.5)
Rs  Rt *
(Tt  234.5)
Rs = Winding resistance, corrected to specified

temperature, Ts
Ts = Specified temperature, C (20 degrees C)
Rt = Test value of winding resistance
Tt = Temperature of winding when resistance
was measured, C
234.5 = Characteristic constant for pure copper
A variation of 1.5% is permitted between the
measurements for any one phase and the
average reading.
Design resistance values at 20 degrees C
borrow from the Shop Assembly Record.
8
REFER TO CHECK IF
INITIAL/DATE
CHECKED
OKAY
C. Measure the resistance of the rotor winding with
a Kelvin Bridge, DLRO or suitable equipment
that can measure to an accuracy of 10 micro
ohms. The design resistances at 20 degrees C
borrow from the Shop Assembly Record.
Correct the resistance reading to 20 degrees C
using the formula given above.
D. Verify that there is a minimum insulation General Handling
resistance of 1 mega ohm per 1 kV rated Guidelines
voltage (at 40 degrees C) on each stator 4.7-1011-0004
winding phase when measured with a for
example 1kV-5kV megger for 1 minute. Megger
readings should be taken on a weekly basis.
Record results on the protocol 4.7-2800-0001 /1
in the end of this checklist.
E. Verify that there is a minimum insulation General Handling
resistance of 1 mega ohm (at 40 degrees C) on Guidelines
the rotor windings when measured with a 250- 4.7-1010-0006
volt megger for 2 minutes. Megger readings
should be taken on a weekly basis. Record
results on the protocol 4.7-2800-0001 /2 in the
end of this checklist.
F. Verify after assembly and alignment all values Generator Assembly

according shop assembly records and fill out Records
specified columns with the values at field
assembly.
Please send back a copy of this checklist

and completed Generator assembly records
to the manufacturer Siemens Erfurt
Notes:
9
Notes:
10
Turbogenerator Anhang zur Checkliste
Appendix Generator Check List
Turbogeneratoren Generator Ständerwicklung

Prüfprotokoll Isolationsmessung
Turbogenerators Generator stator winding
Test Record Insulation resistance test
Kennwort: Auftr.-Nr.: Prot.-Nr.:4.7-2800-0001 Blatt-Nr.: 1
Code word: Order-No.: Record-No.: Sheet-No.:
Material-Nr.:  Baugr.-Nr.:  Id.-Nr.:
Material-No.: Group-No.: Id.-No.:
Zeichn.-Nr.:  Index:  Position:  Typ: SGen5/6-100A-2P
Drawing-No.: Index: Position: Type:
Abteilung: Prüfdatum: Prüfer: Gegenzeichnung:
Department: Date of Insp.: Inspector: Countersignature:
Die Messspannung sollte zwischen 1000 V DC, und 5000 V DC liegen, keines Fall darüber.
The megger voltage should be not less than 1000 V DC, but may amount to up to 5000 V DC.
Hinweis: Nach erfolgter Messung muss die Wicklung entladen und geerdet werden.
Note: The winding must be discharged after the measurements have been completed.
Isolationswiderstandsmessung der Ständerwicklung / Insulation Resistance Measurement on Stator Winding
Nut Temperatur / Slot temperature _______ °C/F Messspannung / Applied Voltage _______ kV
Gesamte
Messzeit Phase U Phase V Phase W U-V U-W V-W
Wicklung
Testing
Isolations- Isolations- Isolations- Isolations- Isolations- Isolations- Isolations-
Time
widerstand widerstand widerstand widerstand widerstand widerstand widerstand
M M M M M (60 sec) M (60 sec) M (60 sec)
30 sec.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 – Alle Rechte vorbehalten
1 min
10 min
PI
Messinstrument / Measuring Instrument
Messung der kompletten Wicklung (wenn Sternpunkt geschlossen)

Measurement of Total Winding (if neutral point connections are closed)
korrigiert auf 40 °C/104 F: R1 ,40 = M
corrected to 40 °C/104 F: R10,40 = M
Messung Phase U
Measurement Phase U
Messung Phase V
Measurement Phase V
Messung Phase W
Measurement Phase W
PI korrigiert auf / corrected to 40 °C: Phase U Phase V Phase W

Bemerkung
Comments:
Zeitpunkt des Tests Test durchgeführt von

Time of Test: Tested by:
Datum des Tests Geprüft von
Date of Test: Witnessed by:
Siemens AG 4.7-2800-0001 / 1
Energy Sector 0415de
Turbogenerator Anhang zur Checkliste
Appendix Generator Check List
Turbogeneratoren Generator Läuferwicklung

Prüfprotokoll Isolationsmessung
Turbogenerators Generator rotor winding
Test Record Insulation resistance test
Kennwort: Auftr.-Nr.: Prot.-Nr.: 4.7-2800-0001 Blatt-Nr.: 2
Code word: Order-No.: Record-No.: Sheet-No.:
Material-Nr.:  Baugr.-Nr.:  Id.-Nr.:
Material-No.: Group-No.: Id.-No.:
Zeichn.-Nr.:  Index:  Position:  Typ: SGen5/6-100A-2P
Drawing-No.: Index: Position: Type:
Abteilung: Prüfdatum: Prüfer: Gegenzeichnung:
Department: Date of Insp.: Inspector: Countersignature:
Die Isolation der Läuferwicklung wird über die Schleifringe der Welle mit 250V Gleichspannung gemessen.
The insulation resistance of the rotor winding is measured from the slip ring to the shaft preferably with 250 V DC.
Hinweis: Nach erfolgter Messung muss die Wicklung entladen und geerdet werden.
Note: The winding must be discharged after the measurements have been completed.
Isolationsmessung der Läuferwicklung Läufer Temperatur

Insulation Resistance Measurement on Rotor Winding Rotor temperature ______________ [°C/F]
Messspannung
Applied voltage ______________ [V]
Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 – Alle Rechte vorbehalten
Messinstrument
Measuring instrument ______________
Bemerkung
Comments:
Isolationswiderstand
Insulation resistance 2 min: ___________________ M
korrigiert auf
corrected to 40 °C/104 F : ___________________ M
Vor / nach jeder Messung sollten jegliche statischen Aufladungen der Wicklungen entladen werden.
Prior to / after each measurement any static charges should be removed by grounding the windings
Bemerkung
Comments:
Zeitpunkt des Tests Test durchgeführt von

Time of Test: Tested by:
Datum des Tests Geprüft von
Date of Test: Witnessed by:
Siemens AG 4.7-2800-0001 / 2
Energy Sector 0415de
Turbogenerator
Description
Drawings
and
Part Lists
Siemens AG
Energy Sector
Drawing List

Outline Drawing Text ...................................................................................... DPPPG – 70174818
Rotor Shaft Data for Calculation .................................................................... DPPPG – 70175650
Axial and Radial Rotor Clearances ................................................................ DPPPG – 70191559
Generator Shop Final Assembly .................................................................... DPPPG – 70194303
Assembly Instruction for Flexible Link Installation ......................................... 1-2570 – 503923
Bushing Assembly .......................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190058
Main Current Bracket ..................................................................................... DPPPG – 70073000
Neutral Point Connection ............................................................................... DPPPG – 70188684

Bearing TE* | EE* - Tightening Torques ........................................................ DPPPG – 00001223
Bearing TE* .................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190391
Bearing EE* .................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70190394
Shaft Bushing Assembly ................................................................................ DPPPG – 70147168
Outer Air Seal Assembly ................................................................................ DPPPG – 70024747
Air Baffle Ring ................................................................................................ DPPPG – 70040510
Transport and Lifting Points – Enclosure ....................................................... DPPPG – 70116284
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /001
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /002
Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /003
Extra Cover EE* ............................................................................................. DPPPG – 70186487
Extra Cover TE* ............................................................................................. DPPPG – 70186488
Cooler Cover .................................................................................................. DPPPG – 70189303
Cooler Venting and Draining Pipes ................................................................ DPPPG – 70169056
Brush Carrier Complete ................................................................................. DPPPG – 00001424
Brush Complement ........................................................................................ DPPPG – 70025191
Adapter Exciter Current Cable .................................................................................. 3 – 273657
Assembly Cover Plates .................................................................................. 2-5815 – 263436
Assembly Earth Brush.................................................................................... DPPPG – 70167687
Anchoring ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70086152
Grounding Connections ................................................................................. DPPPG – 70055933
Shipping Brace Stator .................................................................................... DPPPG – 70186970
Shipping and Earthquake Precaution Stator Frame ...................................... DPPPG – 70008886
Rotor Assembly – Slide Plate......................................................................... DPPPG – 70188440
Rotor Assembly – Sliding Shoe...................................................................... DPPPG – 70188421
Rotor Assembly – Sliding Pedestal ................................................................ DPPPG – 70188420
Rotor Assembly – Block for put down Rotor Body ......................................... DPPPG – 70051058
TE*| EE* - (Turbine End / Exciter End)
Siemens AG 4.0-0010-EG000425
Maßbildtext Kennwort/CODE:
OUTLINE DRAWING TEXT Noor Energy 1 (PT)

Zeichnungsnummer/DRAWING NUMBER: No.:
DPPPG-70174818 EG000425
22 - GNS0111T - 70174818
Contractor Document No.:
Index Datum bearbeitet geprüft Änderungsbeschreibung

Date constr. checked Description of Revision
A 2019-01-18 Müller Bauer FIRST RELEASE
B 2019-07-31 Türkis Bauer Rated data, color, foundation thickness, anchoring, bearing
data, cooler data, number of cold air thermometers, rated
power of hood light/ ventilation, axial displacement TE,
generator monitoring
C 2019-09-12 Türkis Bauer Added transmitter, mechanical data, weights, foundation
loads
D 2019-12-09 Türkis Bauer Cooler details
Hierzu gehört Maßbild DPPPG – 70174817

TO THIS BELONGS OUTLINE DRAWING 22 – GNS0110T – 70174817
Form Z.- Zeichnungs-Nummer / DRAWING NUMBER Index 1

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF
Als Betriebsgeheimnis anvertraut. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. MF

CONFIDED AS WORKSHOP SECRET. ALL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED. Spr. Kz.
Inhaltsverzeichnis TABLE OF CONTENTS Seite/
Page
Technische Daten TECHNICAL DATA
Nenndaten RATED DATA 3
Bauform TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION 3
Verladebedingung SHIPMENT INDICATION 3
Gewichte WEIGHTS 4
Erregung EXCITATION 4
Mechanische Daten MECHANICAL DATA 4
Textteil TEXT PART

Allgemeines GENERAL INFORMATION 5
Verankerung ANCHORING 6
Lagerangaben BEARING DETAILS 6
Klemmenkasten TERMINAL BOX 8
Erdung GROUNDING 9
Kühler COOLER 10
Wellenverlagerung SHAFT DISPLACEMENT 11
Fundamentbelastung FOUNDATION LOADING 12
Generatorüberwachung GENERATOR MONITORING 13
Bestimmung der Taupunkttemperatur DETERMINATION OF DEWPOINT 15
TEMPERATURE

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

REV.
Nenndaten RATINGS Wert Einheiten
VALUE DIM.
Generator Typ: SGEN5–100A–2P118–46
Nenndaten RATED DATA

Scheinleistung SN APPARENT POWER 271,1 MVA
cos M P.F. 0,76
Drehzahl SPEED 3000 min-1
R.P.M.
Zulässige Überdrehzahl PERMISSIBLE OVERSPEED FOR 3300 min-1
im Störfall (+10%) FAULT CONDITIOM (+10%)
Drehrichtung, DIRECTION OF ROTATION, gegen Uhrzeigersinn
bei Sicht von Turbine auf Gen. VIEW FROM TURBINE TO GEN. counterclockwise
Spannung VOLTAGE 18,00 ± 5% kV
Strom CURRENT 8694 A
Frequenz FREQUENCY 50 Hz
Thermische Zeitkonstante THERMAL TIME CONSTANT STATOR 17,14 Min
Ständer
Thermische Zeitkonstante Läufer THERMAL TIME CONSTANT ROTOR 7,23 Min
Kapazität Ständerwicklung pro CAPACITY STATOR WINDING 0,537 μF
Phase gegen Erde AGAINST EARTH PER PHASE
Kapazität Läuferwicklung gegen CAPACITY ROTOR WINDING 0,474 μF
Erde AGAINST EARTH
Kühlluftmenge RATE OF COOLING AIR 64 m3/s
Kühllufttemperatur COOLING AIR TEMPERATURE 45 °C
Kaltwassertemperatur COOLING WATER TEMPERATURE 40 °C
Abzuführende Verluste (Kühler) HEAT LOSSES (COOLER) 2740 kW
Max. Umgebungstemperatur MAX. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE max. 50 °C
Bauform TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION

Bauform (DIN IEC 34 T.7) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION IM 7215
Schutzart (DIN IEC 34 T.5) DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP 54
Kühlart (DIN IEC 34 T.6) METHODS OF COOLING IC8A1W7(TEWAC)
Schalldruckpegel (ISO 3744) SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL (ISO 3744) 85 dB(A)
Aufstellungsart TYPE OF INSTALLATION indoor
Farbe COLOR RAL 7035
C3 highacc. to EN
ISO 12944
Verladebedingung SHIPMENT INDICATION

Min. zulässige MIN. ALLOWED TRANSPORT -20 °C
Transporttemperatur TEMPERATURE

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

REV.
Nenndaten RATINGS Wert Einheiten
VALUE DIM.
Gewicht WEIGHTS
Induktor komplett (mit Err.anker) ROTOR COMPL. (WITH ECX.ROTOR) 57.800 kg
Ständer-Aktivteil STATOR ACTIV PART 159.000 kg
Grundrahmen BASE FRAME 49.200 kg
Lager, Zwischenrahmen BEARING/INTERMEDIATE FRAME 4.400 kg
Abdeckhaube (Schallschutz) COVER (SOUND ATTENUATION) 21.700 kg
Bürstenapparat BRUSH GEAR 550 kg
Konsole für Ausleitungen SUPPORT FOR BUSHINGS 3.500 kg
Sternpunktkasten NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE 1.050 kg
Zubehör angebaut, Verankerung ACCESSORIES MOUNTED; 1.000 kg
ANCHORING
Gesamtgewicht Generator TOTAL WEIGHT GENERATOR 298.200 kg
Max. Transportgewicht für MAX.SHIPMENT WEIGHT FOR 213.150 kg
getrennten Versand SEPARATELY SHIPMENT
(ohne Verpackung) (WITHOUT PACKING MATERIAL)
Weitere Komponenten ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS

Generator GENERATOR
Kühlerelemente, Kühlerhaube COOLING ELEMENTS, COVER 17.300 kg
Generator + Komponenten GENERATOR + COMPONENTS 315.500 kg
Gesamtgewicht TOTAL WEIGHT
Weiteres Zubehör beigestellt ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES

SUPPLIED
Läufereinbau ROTOR ASSEMBLY 450 kg
Gesamtgewicht Lieferumfang TOTAL WEIGHT SCOPE OF SUPPLY 315.950 kg
Erregung EXCITATION
Stationäre Stromrichteranlage STATIONARY EXCITATION
(Schleifringe und Kohlebürsten) (EQUIPMENT, SLIP RINGS AND
CARBON BRUSHES)
Mechanische Daten MECHANICAL DATA

Trägheitsmoment (m*r2) MOMENT OF INERTIA (M*R2) 9080,5 kgm2
(Läufer komplett) (ROTOR COMPLETE)
Losbrechmoment mit BREAK AWAY TORQUE 340 Nm
Druckölentlastung WITH PRESSURE OIL
Losbrechmoment ohne BREAK AWAY TORQUE 28,4 kNm
Druckölentlastung WITHOUT PRESSURE OIL
* vorläufige Werte / PRELIMINARY VALUES

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Allgemeines GENERAL INFORMATION
1 Ausleitungen LINE SIDE TERMINALS
2 Sternpunkt mit NEUTRAL POINT TERMINALS
aufgebauten Stromwandlern WITH MOUNTED CT´S AND
und Sternpunktverbindung NEUTRAL POINT CONNECTION
Die Bezeichnung der Phasen- THE LINE TERMINALS ARE
klemmen erfolgt durch U1, V1, DESIGNATED U1, V1, W1; THE
W1; die der entsprechenden CORRESPONDING NEUTRAL
Sternpunktklemmen durch U2, TERMINALS DESIGNATED
V2, W2. U2, V2, W2.
Die Klemmenspannung erreicht THE VOLTAGE REACHES ITS
ihr positives Maximum in der POSITIVE MAXIMUM VALUE AT THE
Reihenfolge U1, V1, W1. TERMINALS IN THE ORDER OF
Angeschlossene Kabel oder U1, V1, W1.
Schienen müssen zuentlastet CONNECTING CABLES OR BARS
sein MUST BE STRAIN-RELIEVED
3 Generatorflansch TS GENERATOR FLANGE TE 0-0200-2751-00
(angeschmiedet) (FORGED-ON SHAFT COLLAR) D208
0-02479-96630-
01_B_003
4 Maß zur Kompensation der DIMENSION FOR COMPENSATION

Generatorwellendehnung im OF SHAFT EXPANSION BY 4,1 mm
Betriebszustand Seite 10) GENERATOR IN OPERATION STATE
5 Maß für das Ausfahren des DIMENSION FOR REMOVAL OF
Läufers. THE ROTOR.
Ausbauvorrichtung: ASSEMBLY DEVICE:
1x Rutschblech 1X SLIDING PLATE
2x Gleitbock 2X SLIDING PEDESTAL
1x Gleitschuhe 2X SLIDE SHOES
(liefert Siemens) (SUPPLIED BY SIEMENS)
6 Abdeckhaube. MAIN COVER.
Vor dem Abheben ist das BEFORE LIFTING THE COVER
Erdungskabel zu lösen. RELEASE THE GROUND CABLE.
7 Erforderliche Kranhakenhöhe HEIGHT OF THE CRANE HOOK
zum Abheben der Haube. WHEN LIFTING THE COVER
8 Leistungsschild RATING PLATE
9 Firmenschild COMPANY NAME PLATE
10 Zwischenrahmen unter den INTERMEDIATE FRAME UNDER
Lagerböcken. THE BEARINGS.
11 Das Maß „H“ ist SIEMENS ANNOUNCE DIMENSION “H” TO
Generatorwerk bekannt zu SIEMENS GENERATOR 2655 mm
geben FACTORY
12 Verschiebbare MOVABLE BOLLARDS FOR
Anhängepoller für COMPLETE TRANSPORTATION 4 Stck/pcs
Komplettransport
13 Bürstenapparat BRUSH GEAR

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Verankerung ANCHORING
15 Grundrahmenbefestigung mit BASE FRAME FIXING,
Zubehör liefert SIEMENS ACCESSORIES AND ASSEMBLY
Generatorwerk, ebenso die PROCEDURE SUPPLIED BY
Montagevorschrift SIEMENS GENERATOR FACTORY.
Zuganker ANCHOR BOLTS 16 x M42
Erstauflageplatten PRIMARY BEARING PLATES 4
Ausrichtschrauben LEVELING SCREWS 24 x M42
Ausrichtplatten LEVELING PLATES 20
16 Kühlerhaubenbefestigung mit COOLER COCER FIXING AND
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED BY
Zubehör liefert SIEMENS SIEMENS GENERATOR FACTORY
Lagerangaben BEARING DETAILS

Achtung! ATTENTION !
Innerhalb der Lagergehäuse WITHIN THE BEARING HOUSING
entsteht durch die Rotation OIL MIST RESULTS FROM THE
der Welle Ölnebel. Der ROTATION OF THE ROTOR. THE
Ölnebel ist durch geeignete OIL MIST IS TO BE SUCKED OFF
Maßnahmen des Anlagen- FROM THE BEARING HOUSING
betreibers aus dem Lager- BY SUITABLE MEASURES OF
gehäuse abzusaugen. Der THE PLANT OPERATOR. THE
empfohlene Unterdruck im RECOMMENDED NEGATIVE
Lagergehäuse beträgt PRESSURE IN THE BEARING
100 Pa. HOUSING AMOUNTS TO 100 Pa
Ölsorte OIL GRADE ISO VG46
Nichtschäumendes Mineralöl NON-FROTHING MINERAL OIL
(Lager werden ohne (THE BEARINGS ARE SUPPLIED
Ölfüllung geliefert). WITHOUT OIL).
Ölreinheitsklasse (ISO 4406) OIL PURITY CLASS ISO 4406) 17 / 15 / 12
Ölinhalt beider Lager TOTAL OIL VOLUME OF THE l
ca.30
insgesamt: Befüllung TWO BEARINGS: litres
Erforderliche Umlaufölmenge REQUIRED CIRCULATION OIL l/min
für beide Lager insgesamt VOLUME FOR BOTH BEARINGS 260 litres/min
mindestens: Durchfluss AT LEAST:
Öleintrittstemperatur: OIL INLET TEMPERATURE: 50 °C
Öldruck am Ölzulauf OIL PRESSURE AT OIL INLET
Min.: MIN.: 0,8 bar
Nom.: NOM.: 1,5
Max.: MAX.: 2,0
Lagerverluste je Lager BEARING LOSSES PER BEARING 111 kW
20 TS Lager, Durchmesser: TE BEARING, DIAMETER: 400 mm
Länge der Auflagefläche: AREA OF SUPPORT LENGTH: 263,2 mm
(Umlaufschmierung ohne (CIRCULATION OILING WITHOUT
Schmierring) LUBRICATION RING)
21 ES Lager, Durchmesser: EE BEARING, DIAMETER: 400 mm
Länge der Auflagefläche: AREA OF SUPPORT LENGTH: 263,2 mm
(Umlaufschmierung ohne (CIRCULATION OILING WITHOUT
Schmierring) LUBRICATION RING).

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

22 Lagerisolierung; BEARING INSULATION;
TS und ES durch isolierte TE AND EE BY INSULATED SHELLS.
Lagerschalen. BEARING SHELL POTENTIAL IS
Das Potential der Lagerschalen TAKEN OUTWARD BY CABLE.
ist über Kabel nach außen INSULATION OF TE BEARING IS
geführt. BYPASSED. INSULATION OF EE-
Die Isolierung des TS-Lagers ist BEARING SHOULD NOT BE
überbrückt. BYPASSED.
Die Isolation des ES-Lagers darf
nicht überbrückt werden.
23 Ölzulauf mit Flansch; OIL INLET WITH FLANGE;
ANSI 2“ B16.5
Material: Edelstahl MATERIAL: STAINLESS STEEL
(ohne Gegenflansche) (WITHOUT COUNTERFLANGES) class 150lbs
24 Ölabfluß mit Flansch OIL OUTLET WITH FLANGE ANSI 5“ B16.5
Material: Edelstahl MATERIAL: STAINLESS STEEL
class 150lbs
(ohne Gegenflansche) (WITHOUT COUNTERFLANGES)
Ölabflußrohre mit Gefälle OIL DRAIN PIPES INSTALLED WITH 5 %
verlegen von mindestens: A SLOPE OF AT LEAST :
25 Druckölanschluß: Gewinde JACKING OIL CONNECTION: THREAD G 1/2"
Auslegungsdruck für DESIGN PRESSURE FOR
20,0 MPa
Hydrostatikanlage JACKING OIL SYSTEM
Anhebedruck: LIFTING PRESSURE: 13,5 MPa
Haltedruck: HOLDING PRESSURE: 10,5 MPa
Erforderliche Ölmenge je REQUIRED OIL VOLUME PER
l/min
Lager zum Anheben BEARING 5,0
(50°C OIL TEMPERATURE). litres/min
(bei 50°C Öltemperatur).
Minimale Starttemperatur MIN. START-UP TEMPERATURE 18 °C
min. zulässige Turndrehzahl MINIMUM TURNING SPEED: min-1
<1 or >50
(mit Druckölentlastung) (WITH JACKING OIL) R.P.M.
Kleinste zulässige Drehzahl SMALLEST SPEED WHILE THE | 70 min-1
beim Hochfahren aus dem START UP FROM THE COLD STATE . R.P.M.
kalten Zustand. (Ausschalt- (POINT OF SWITCHING OFF THE
punkt der Hydrostatik) JACKING OIL)
Kleinste zulässige Drehzahl SMALLEST SPEED WITHOUT | 200 min-1
ohne Hydrostatik im warmen JACKING OIL IN WARM STATE . R.P.M.
Zustand (Einschaltpunkt der (POINT OF SWITCHING ON THE
Hydrostatik) JACKING OIL)
26 Maximales axiales MAX. AXIAL BEARING CLEARANCE:
± 33 mm
Lagerspiel:
27 Lagerthermometer BEARING THERMOMETER 1 (TS / TE) 2*PT100
1 (ES / EE)
28 Relative Schwingungs- RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION
Bently Nevada
BN3300 XL
messung: MEASUREMENT :
2 Gewindebohrungen um 90° TWO TAPPED HOLES DISPLACED
BY 90° ON THE BEARING COVER TE ¾-14NPT
versetzt im Lagerdeckel TS
AND EE
und ES

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Klemmenkästen TERMINAL BOXES
30 Klemmenkasten TERMINAL BOX + MKA10GA010
9
Anschluss für CONNECTION SLOT +3 (Reserve/SPARE) 1*Pt100
Nutenthermometer THERMOMETER
+9x Transmitter
2 (TS / TE)
Anschluss für CONNECTION 2 (ES / EE) 2*Pt100
Kaltluftthermometer FOR COLD AIR THERMOMETER 2*Pt100
+6x Transmitter
Anschluss für CONNECTION FOR WARM AIR 1
2*Pt100
Warmluftthermometer THERMOMETER +1x Transmitter
1 (TS / TE)
Anschluss für CONNECTION FOR BEARING 1 (ES / EE) 2*PT100
Lagerthermometer THERMOMETER
+2x Transmitter
Leckwasserüberwachung LEAKAGE WATER CONTROLING 2 x 2 (TS/ES) Stck/pcs
31 Klemmenkasten TERMINAL BOX + MKA10GE030
Anschluss für CONNECTION FOR 3x400 V / AC
Stillstandheizung ANTICONDENSATION HEATING 50 Hz
2x1,6 kW
32 Klemmenkasten TERMINAL BOX + MKD10GA020
Rotor-Erdung ROTOR EARTHING
33 Sternpunktkasten NEUTRAL POINT CUBICLE + MKA10GD010
34 Hilfsklemmenkasten LOW VOLTAGE BOX NPC + MKA10GE010
Schwingungsmessung TS VIBRATION MEASURING TE
Relative Wellenschwing.TS RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION TE 2 (TS / TE)
Schwingungsmessung ES VIBRATION MEASURING EE
Relative Wellenschwing.ES RELATIVE SHAFT VIBRATION EE 2 (ES / EE)
37 Klemmenkasten TERMINAL BOX + MKA10GP010
Anschluss für Zusatz- CONNECTION FOR EXCITER HOOD 230 V / AC
haubenbeleuchtung LIGHT
92 W
Belüftung Erregerhaube VENTILATION EXCITER COVER FAN 400 V / AC
Lüftermotor MOTOR
2,8 kW

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Erdung GROUNDING
40 Erdungsbürsten GROUND BRUSHES 4 Stck/pcs
2 Doppelbürstenhalter 90° 2 DOUBLE BRUSH HOLDERS 90°
versetzt DISPLACED
41 Erdungsanschlüsse GROUND CONNECTIONS
Grundrahmen M12 TS+ES BASE FRAME M12 (TE+EE) 2 Stck/pcs
42 Erdungsanschlüsse GROUND CONNECTIONS
Ausleitungskonsole M12 SUPPORT FOR BUSHING M12 2 Stck/pcs

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Kühlanlage Generator COOLING PLANT GENERATOR
50 Kühlerhaube mit Kühlele- COOLERCOVER WITH COOLER- 4x50 %
menten: seitlich aufgebaut ELEMENTS: SIDE MOUNTED
2 Kühlelemente in Betrieb, 2 COOLER ELEMENTS IN
2 Elemente sind abzusperren OPERATION; 2 ELEMENTS
SHUT-DOWN
zulässige Generatorleistung ADMISS. GENERATOR OUTPUT
bei Ausfall eines Kühler- BY FAILURE OF ONE COOLER 100 %
elementes (Klasse B): ELEMENT (CLASS B)
Druckverlust wasserseitig: PRESSURE DROP WATER-SIDE 0,25 bar
Wasserinhalt pro Element WATER QUANTITY PER ELEMENT 270 l D
max. Wassereintrittstemp. MAX. WATER INLET TEMP. 40 °C
min. Wassereintrittstemp. MIN. WATER INLET TEMP. 15 °C
max. Wasseraustrittstemp. MAX. WATER OUTLET TEMP. max.47 °C
Erforderliche Wassermenge: REQUIRED WATER FLOW 328 m³/h
Betriebsdruck: OPERATING PRESSURE - bar
Auslegungsdruck: DESIGN PRESSURE 10 bar
Prüfdruck: TESTING PRESSURE 15 bar
Verschmutzungfaktor FOULING FACTOR - m2*K/W
Anteil Glykol CONCENTRATE GLYCOL - %
Kühlerwerkstoffe COOLER MATERIALS
Rohre: TUBES CuNi 90/10
Rippen: FINS Al
Rohrböden: TUBE PLATES Naval brass D
Coated carbon
Wasserkammern: WATERBOXES D
steel
51 Kühlerentlüftung COOLER VENTS 4*COCK + G1/2
(Hahn mit Gewinde) (COCK WITH SCREW)
52 Kühlerentleerung COOLER DRAIN 4*COCK + G1/2
(Hahn mit Gewinde) (COCK WITH SCREW)
53 Kühlwasseranschlußflansche COOLING WATER CONNECTION ANSI 6‘‘
mit Gegenflansch FLANGE WITH COUNTERFLANGE B16.5 150 lbs
Carbon steel
54 Leckwassersensoren LEAKAGE WATER SENSORS 2 TS/TE
(mit Auswertegerät) (WITH ANALYZE EQUIPMENT) 2 ES/EE
55 Sicherheitsventil Einstelldruck SAFETY VALVE SETPOINT 10 bar
56 Erfordl.Kranhakenhöhe zum HEIGHT OF THE CRANE HOOK
Ausbau der Kühlelemente FOR DISASSEMBLY THE
COOLER ELEMENTS

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Wellenverlagerung / SHAFT DISPLACEMENT
Drehrichtung: gegen Uhrzeigersinn (Sicht auf TS)

DIRECTION OF ROTATION: CCW (VIEW ON TE)
V* = Umgebungstemperatur: 20 °C / 30°C/ 40 °C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
ISO VG 46 Umgebungstemperatur
mm AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
X Y
Hydrodynamischer Betriebszustand
HYDRODYNAMIC OPERATION 0,132 0,692
CONDITION
0,178 20°C
Thermisches Wachsen Läufer
0,151
- 30°C
THERMAL EXPANSION ROTOR
0,124 40°C
0,236 20°C
Thermisches Wachsen Lager
- 0,20 30°C
THERMAL EXPANSION BEARING
0,164 40°C
Thermisches Wachsen Zwischenrahmen 0,091 20°C
THERMAL EXPANSION INTERMEDIATE - 0,063 30°C
FRAME 0,034 40°C
0,698 20°C
Gesamthöhenwachstum
0,132 0,607 30°C
TOTAL DISPLACEMENT
0,516 40°C
Für die Berechnung der Wellenverlagerung wird davon ausgegangen, dass die Welle im kalten Zustand in der
Unterseite der Lagerschale liegt.
FOR THE CALCULATION OF THE TOTAL SHAFT DISPLACMENT IT IS ASSUMED THAT IN THE COLD
CONDITION THE SHAFTS LIE IN THE BOTTOM OF THE BEARINGS. SPECIFIED FOR 30°C
Axialdehnung TS ǻ Z: AXIAL DISPLACEMENT TE ǻ Z: 4,1 mm

Achtung! ATTENTION!
Maß ist ohne Turbinendehnung. DIMENSION WITHOUT TURBINE
Zum Ausgleich der Wärmedehnung der EXPANSION.
Turbinen- u. Generatorwellen im TO OFFSET THE THERMAL EXPANSION OF
Nennlastbetrieb ist die Generatorwelle bei der THE TURBINE- AND GENERATOR- SHAFTS
Montage um diesen Betrag zuzüglich IN RATED OPERATING CONDITION, THE
Turbinenschub außerhalb der magnetischen GENERATOR SHAFT HAS TO BE PULLED
Mitte des Generators in Richtung Turbine zu WITH THIS VALUE AND ADDITIONAL
stellen. TURBINE SHAFT EXPANSION OUT OF THE
MAGNETIC CENTRE INTO TURBINE
DIRECTION.

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Fundamentbelastung/FOUNDATION LOADING
E1-6
TS/TE C D ES/EE
A: 1065 kN
B: 1065 kN
Durch das Generatorgewicht FORCE EXERTED BY GENERATOR
C: 398 kN
ausgeübte Kräfte im Punkt: WEIGHT IN POINTS:
D: 398 kN
Summe: 2926 kN
Maximale Kraft errechnet aus
MAXIMUM FORCE CALCULATED
dem maximalen Stoßmoment
FROM MAX. SUDDEN TORQUE Fdyn = ±1636 kN
(2-poliger (2 PHASE SHORT CIRCUIT)
Klemmenkurzschluß)
Gesamt-Fundamentlast TOTAL-FOUNDATION LOAD
A/B: 1065±1636 kN
in A und B: ON A AND B:
Durch den Kühler ausgeübte BY THE COOLER INSERT FORCES
E1-6: 28,3 kN
Kräfte im Punkt (je Fußpunkt): IN POINT (PER BASE POINT):
Die Kräfte treten unabhängig FORCES OCCUR ALTERNATELY
von der Drehrichtung wechse- INDEPENDENT OF DIRECTION OF
lseitig auf (in A und B). ROTATION (ON A & B).
Berechnung und Ausführung CALCULATION AND CONSTRUCTION
des Fundamentes wird von OF FOUNDATION IS PROVIDED BY
der Bauabteilung ausgeführt. CIVIL ENGINEERING COMPANY.
Eine Schwingungsübertragung
von Nachbaraggregaten muß TRANSFER OF VIBRATIONS FROM
SURROUNDING EQUIPMENT HAS TO
durch entsprechende BE AVOIDED BY APPROPRIATE
Fundamentgestaltung FOUNDATION LAYOUT.
vermieden werden.
Die Fundamenteigenfrequenz NATURAL FREQUENCIES OF
nach Montage des FOUNDATION AFTER ERECTION OF
Maschinensatzes muß THE TURBOSET MUST DIFFER AT
mindestens ± 20 % von der LEAST ± 20 % FROM FREQUENCIES
Nenndrehzahl abweichen. AT RATED SPEED.

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Betriebs- und Einstellwerte Generatorüberwachung/
OPERATING AND SETTING VALUES – GENERATOR MONITORING
Maximaler Einstellwert
Kriterium KKS MAXIMUM SETTING VALUE Einheit
PARAMETER Betrieb Meldung Schutz UNIT
OPERATING ALARM PROTECTION
Lastpunkt
LOAD POINT N N(n-1) N N
Scheinleistung 271,1 MVA
APPARENT POWER
PHASE/SLOT U MKA10CT010
V MKA10CT020
Nuttemperatur W MKA10CT030
Ständer U MKA10CT011
Simplex – Pt100 V MKA10CT021
STATOR SLOT W MKA10CT031 111 111 124 129 °C
TEMPERATURE U MKA10CT012
SIMPLEX – PT100 V MKA10CT022
W MKA10CT032
SPARE U MKA10CT013
SPARE V MKA10CT023
SPARE W MKA10CT033
Warmlufttemperatur
WARM AIR TEMPER.
Doppel – Pt100
MKA10CT060 81 81 °C
DOUBLE – PT100
Kaltlufttemperatur TS MKA10CT050
Doppel - Pt100 TE MKA10CT051
45 45 50 55 °C
COLD AIR
ES MKA10CT055
TEMPERATURE
DOUBLE – PT100 EE MKA10CT056
Lagermetalltempe-
ratur TS
MKD10CT010
Doppel Pt100 TE
78* 83* 88* °C
BEARING METAL ES
MKD20CT010
TEMPERATURE EE
DOUBLE PT100
Leckwasserüber- TS MKA10CL210 X
wachung TE MKA10CL215 X
LEAKAGE WATER ES MKA10CL220 X
DETECTION EE MKA10CL225 X
X MKA10CY011
Relative Wellen- TS
schwingung ** Y TE MKA10CY012
RELATIVE SHAFT X
90 165 240
ES MKA20CY011
VIBRATION **
Y EE MKA20CY012

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Die Betriebs- und Einstellwerte beziehen sich auf Maximalleistung des Generators bei entsprechender
Kaltlufttemperatur.
THE OPERATING AND SETTING VALUES REFER TO MAXIMUM OUTPUT AT CORRESPONDING
COOLING AIR TEMPERATURE.
* Die angegebenen Temperaturen sind Rechenwerte und werden nach der Inbetriebnahme korrigiert.
* THE STATED TEMPERATURES ARE CALCULATED VALUES AND WILL BE CORRECTED AFTER
INITIAL START-UP.
** s p-p nach ISO 7919-2 / ACCORDING TO ISO 7919–2
*** v eff nach ISO 10816-2 / ACCORDING TO ISO 10816–2

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

Bestimmung der Taupunkttemperatur / Determination of Dewpoint Temperature
Beispiel: Relative Luftfeuchte der Umgebungsluft = 50 % und Raumtemperatur = +20 °C ergeben eine
Taupunkttemperatur (TP) = +9 °C. Dies entspricht einer absoluten Luftfeuchte von 8,6 g/m3.
Example: Relative humidity of ambient air = 50 % and room temperature = +20 °C result in a dew-
point temperature (DT) of +9°C, corresponding to an absolute humidity of 8,6 g/m3.

Intern SIEMENS Sys.
Blatt
SHEET
44 70 Von
E F PR GN ERF
DPPPG – 70174818 D 15
22 – GNS0111T – 70174818 OF

1
MATERIAL: P0066627100 REVISION: A EFFECTIVE: 2019-11-13 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: SHOP FINAL ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: MKSFA0000-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-SFA0000-70194303 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 314.950,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: X SER. INH.: X
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
TYP DOCUMENT ID PAR VER ALTERNATIVE ID ST DESCRIPTION
DWG DPPPG-70194303 000 A 22-SFA0000-70194303 RL SHOP FINAL ASSEMBLY
CLASSIFICATION:
Classification Data Exists
MATERIAL RV Level DESCRIPTION DOCUMENT STD/GRAPHIC VAR CAL. WEIGHT WU SR SI BT SC X-STATUS BUOM
ITEM T A P C W s U S I N M c REK MATERIAL TITLE ID BASIC MATERIAL TLV NO RAW MATERIAL SPEC. SURFACE TREAT. EUOM
QUANTITY UOM REFERENCE POINT SIZE/DIM DESCRIPTION SIZE/DIM 1 (STD. BOM NO./VAR) SIZE/DIM 2 (SIZE/DIM STD. BOM)
REL. BOM MM NO. SIZE/DIM 3 SIZE/DIM 4 SIZE/DIM 5 (HEAD TYPE) SIZE/DIM 6 (FITTING TYPE)
TYPE DOCUMENT ID PART VR ALTERNATIVE ID ST DIR DESCRIPTION
1 DWG DPPPG-70191559 000 A 22-GNS0440T-70191559 RL AXIAL AND RADIAL ROTOR CLEARANCES

0005 D X .0
1.000 EA MKGNS0440T-000
P0066627100
P0066627600 A 1 STATOR ASSEMBLY 22-STA0000-70182745 206930.000 KG X X Z 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSTA0000-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSTA0000-000 TYPE TLRI118/46
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70182745 000 A 22-STA0000-70182745 RL STA0000 STATOR ASSEMBLY 2P
P0066627700 A 1 COMPLETE ROTOR 22-RTA0000-70186897 57799.000 KG X X 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKRTA0000-000 MM
1.000 EA MKRTA0000-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70186897 000 A 22-RTA0000-70186897 RL COMPLETE ROTOR
P0069816700 A 1 BALANCING INFORMATION 22-SFA7310-70191890 5.380 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA7310-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA7310-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70191890 000 A 22-SFA7310-70191890 RL OVERSPEED RELEASE
P0068688800 A 1 ROTOR ASSEMBLY O.Z. 432.000 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA4900-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA4900-000
P0066627100
NO DOCUMENT ASSIGNED
P0066627800 A 1 SLEEVE BEARING DPPPG-00001223 2600.000 KG Z 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5500-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5500-000 BEARING TYPE EGXTQ35-400
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-00001223 000 C RL BEARING COMPLETE SIZE 35
DWG DPPPG-70190391 000 A 22-SFA5500-70190391 RL SLEEVE BEARING TE
DWG DPPPG-70190393 000 A 22-SFA5500-70190393 RL SLEEVE BEARING TE BOM
DWG DPPPG-70190394 000 A 22-SFA5500-70190394 RL SLEEVE BEARING EE
DWG DPPPG-70190395 000 A 22-SFA5500-70190395 RL SLEEVE BEARING EE BOM
2
1 NO DOCUMENT ASSIGNED
0060 T X .0 ITEM TEXT :
1.000 EA keine Transportsicherung, da Läufer
P0066627100 getrennt versendet wird
P0028028300 A 1 INTERMEDIATE FRAME 22-SFA6200-70073006 698.000 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6200-000 MM
2.000 EA MKSFA6200-000 BEARING TYPE LAGERTYP35
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70073006 000 A 22-SFA6200-70073006 RL BRACKET
P0056378700 A 1 SHAFT BUSHING ASSEMBLY 22-SFA6600-70147168 910.000 KG Z 40 EA

0080 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6600-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6600-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70147168 000 A 22-SFA6600-70147168 RL SFA6600 SHAFT BUSHING ASSEMBLY 2P
P0017446600 C 1 BLOWER SHROUD MACHINING 22-SFA0400-70040510 137.000 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA0400-000 MM
2.000 EA MKSFA0400-000 ITEM / VERSION GEBLÄSEDURCHMESSER1210
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70040510 000 B 22-SFA0400-70040510 RL SFA0400 Luftfuehrungsring FZ
INTERNAL COMMENT:
Internal comment Exists In Language D
Internal comment Exists In Language E
P0066627900 A 1 COVER 22-SFA5600-70184942 21709.000 KG 40 EA

0110 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5600-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5600-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70116284 000 B 22-70116284 RL SFA5600 TRANSPORT AND LIFTING POINTS 2P
DWG DPPPG-70184942 000 B 22-SFA5600-70184942 RL SFA5600 ENCLOSURE 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1 DWG DPPPG-70184416 000 A 22-SFA5701-70184416 OB SFA5701 COOLING ELEMENTS 2P

0120 D X .0
1.000 EA MKSFA5701-000
P0066627100
P0066628000 A 1 COOLER COVER 22-SFA5702-70189302 17287.000 KG 40 EA

0130 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5702-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5702-000 -/-
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70189302 000 A 22-SFA5702-70189302 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER GENERAL DRAWING
3
P0066628100 A 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 22-SFA6500-70190058 3100.000 KG Z 40 EA

0140 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6500-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6500-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70190058 000 A 22-SFA6500-70190058 RL SFA6500 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 2P
P0026577600 F 1 BRUSH CARRIER COMPLETE 1-BCC0000-00001424 540.000 KG 40 EA

0150 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0000-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0000-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-00001424 000 C RL BRUSH CARRIER COMPLETE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0066628300 A 1 INSTRUMENTATION+WIRING ASSEMBLY 22-SFA5400-70183529 83.000 KG 40 EA

0160 L X X X X X 0.0 MKINS0000-000 MM
1.000 EA MKINS0000-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70183529 000 C 22-SFA5400-70183529 RL SFA5400 AUXILIARY WIRING DOCUMENTS 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0066628400 B 1 MEASURING NAME PLATE LIST - 0.000 KG 40 EA

0170 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6900-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6900-000
P0066627100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0002066900 D 1 GROUNDING BRUSH 22-SFA4500-70167687 6.000 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA4500-000
1.000 EA MKSFA4500-000 DIAMETER D=425MM BEARING=35
P0066627100 CCW
DWG DPPPG-70167687 000 A 22-70167687 RL ASSEMBLY EARTH BRUSH
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069296600 A 1 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS 22-SFA7210-70055933 22.100 KG 40 EA

0190 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA7210-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA7210-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70055933 000 A 22-SFA7210-70055933 RL SFA7210 ERDUNGSANSCHLUESSE
4
P0066628500 A 1 GENERATOR LABELS 22-SFA5150-70182456 5.480 KG 40 EA

0200 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5150-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5150-000
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70070826 000 A 22-70070826 RL SFA5150 MOUNTING THE TRANSPORTATION SIGN
DWG DPPPG-70116686 000 C 22-70116686 RL SFA5150 PLATES BEARING
DWG DPPPG-70119040 000 B 22-70119040 RL SFA5150 PLATES EXCITER SYSTEM
DWG DPPPG-70154630 000 A 22-70154630 RL SFA5150 SP PLATES EXTRA COVER TE
DWG DPPPG-70175708 000 A 22-70175708 RL SFA5150 PLATES COOLER COVER
DWG DPPPG-70182456 000 A 22-SFA5150-70182456 RL SFA5150 GENERATOR LABLES 2P
PE450551 B 1 SHAFT GUARD ASSEMBLY 18.000 KG 40 EA

0210 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA4400-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA4400-000
P0066627100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0045928100 A 1 EE FILTER UNIT+BLOWER 22-SFA6810-70117646 220.000 KG 40 EA

0220 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6810-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6810-000 0/
P0066627100
DWG DPPPG-70117646 000 A 22-SFA6810-70117646 RL SFA6810 EE FILTER UNIT+BLOWER 2P
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: RGS RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 4415677 DATED 22.04.2016
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: POS:1.10 TILL 1.100 SUPPLIER GRAPHIC REQUIRED: X
1 DWG DPPPG-70117645 000 C 22-SFA6800-70117645 RL SFA6800 EE FILTER UNIT+BLOWER ASSEMBLY 2

0230 D X .0
1.000 EA MKSFA6800-000
P0066627100
P0066628700 A 1 TERMINAL BOX ASSEMBLY 0 0.000 KG 40 EA

0240 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6000-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6000-000 0/
P0066627100
1
DESCRIPTION: STATOR ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: MKSTA0000-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE: Z
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-STA0000-70182745 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 206.930,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: X SER. INH.: X
B.TRACK: SIZE/DIM. DESC.: TYPE SIZE/DIM 1: TLRI118/46
SIZE/DIM 2:
STD. BOM NO./VARIANT: 0 SIZE/DIM STD. BOM: FITTING TYPE:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70182745 000 A 22-STA0000-70182745 RL STA0000 STATOR ASSEMBLY 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
1 DWG DPPPG-70007217 000 B 2-70007217 RL Staenderkennzeichnung

0005 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0066627600
P0066628800 A 1 GVPI 22-STW0000-70187539 159000.000 KG X X 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSTW0700-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSTW0700-000
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70187539 000 C 22-STW0000-70187539 RL STW0000 WOUND STATOR CORE ASSEMBLY 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0067208300 A 1 BASE FRAME WELDING+MACHINING 22-STA1100-70182744 42030.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSTA1100-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSTA1100-000 TYPE TLRI118/46-30
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70182744 000 A 22-STA1100-70182744 RL STA1100 BASE FRAME WELDING/MACHINING 2P
P00537962 1 STRIP STEEL 1.000 KG 40 KG

0025 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00005305-000 DC04 DIN EN 10131 MM
0.393 KG WIDTH / THICKNESS 10 1
P0066627600
NO.OF PCS:1 SIZE 1:5000.000 UOM:MM SIZE 2:10.000 UOM:MM SIZE 3:1.000 UOM:MM
CLASSIFICATION:
ITEM TEXT :
CUT AS REQUIRED!
Nach Bedarf zuschneiden!
2
P0049696900 A 1 AIR BAFFLE AT THE TOP 1720.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSTA1001-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSTA1001-000 TYPE TLRI118/46-30
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE412418 1 PLATE 3-412418 51.000 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2+N+Z15 EN 10029/EN 10164 MM
8.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 60X310X700
P0066627600
DWG 3-412418 000 B RL PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE451406 1 PLATE 4-451406 12.000 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2+N+Z15 EN 10029/EN 10164 MM
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE245826 1 PLATE 4-245826 0.012 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 DC01-A DIN 1541 MM
16.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 0,5*35*80
P0066627600
DWG 4-245826 000 A RL PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE245827 1 PLATE 4-245826 0.023 KG 40 EA

16.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 1*35*80
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE245828 1 PLATE 4-245826 0.047 KG 40 EA

P0066627600
3
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE245829 1 PLATE 4-245826 0.120 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2 DIN EN 10029 MM
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104463 1 SCREW PLUG DIN910 0.067 KG 40 EA

0210 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00070967-000 24CRMO5 MM
3.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) G1/2A
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104814 1 ADHESIVE 0.010 KG X E 40 EA

0220 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
1.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 10ML
P0066627600
SPE DPQD-00007328 000 A PE104814 KLEBER LOCTITE 243 RL
REQUIRED PART MANUFACTURER: HENKEL AG REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: LOCTITE 243
BASIC DATA TEXT:

This is a 10ml bottle.
Troy Skiles
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0056185700 A 1 HAUBENFUEHRUNG 22-70145617 24.000 KG 40 EA

0230 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100462-000 MM
4.000 EA
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70145617 000 A 22-70145617 RL STA0000 COVER GUIDE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0023129600 1 PROFILE RUBBER 22-70059782-A 0.500 KG Z 40 M

0240 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00049119-000 SILIKON M
36.000 M TYPE PROFILNUMMER403E363
P0066627600
4
DWG DPPPG-70059782 000 A 22-70059782 RL STA0000 PROFILE SP 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
ARMATURENDATEN:
Auxilairy Data Exists
P00211981 1 DICHTPROFIL 22-70047109-A 0.500 KG Z 40 M

0250 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00049119-000 EPDM MM
42.000 M BREADTH / HEIGHT / WALLTHICKNESS 35 50
P0066627600 3
DWG DPPPG-70047109 000 A 22-70047109 RL STA0000 SP SEAL PROFILE
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Hohlprofil geeignet fuer Aufnahme in Halte-
schiene SAP- Nr. 109772
Lieferant: Schauenburg Intertec GmbH
minimale Lieferlosgröße 15m
RECEPTACLE FOR HOLLOW PROFILE IN
HOLDING RAIL SAP-Nr. 109772
SUPPLIER: Schauenburg Intertec GmbH
PE104451 1 HEXAGON CAP SCREW ISO4017 0.320 KG 40 EA

0260 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
4.000 EA THREAD/LENGTH M20 120
P0066627600
SPE TLV609501 DE B TLV 6095 01 RL Material according to Standard; Screws m
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104470 1 HEXAGON NUT 0.064 KG 40 EA

0270 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
4.000 EA THREAD M20
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0280 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 PATTEX-PX MM
1.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 650G-DOSE
P0066627600
SPE DPQD-00007322 000 A PE104421 KLEBER PATTEX-PX RL
SPE DPQD-00008591 000 A PE104421 PATTEX KRAFTKLEBER CL RL
5
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0055365300 1 SPACER BOLT 4-70012330 0.330 KG 40 EA

0290 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00062997-000 S355JR ZN5//CN//T0 MM
12.000 EA
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70012330 000 C 4-70012330 RL SPACER BOLT
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE103035 1 COTTER PIN ISO1234 0.007 KG 83 EA

0300 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002491-000 ST ZN5/CN/T0 MM
24.000 EA NOMINAL DIMENSION / LENGTH (HEIGHT) 5 45
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
12x zusätzlich für Feinausrichtung
12x FOR FINAL ALIGNMENT ON POWER PLANT
ALTERNATE/SUPERCEDURE DATA :
Alternate/Supercedure Data Exists
PE106935 1 WASHER 31 0.026 KG X 40 EA

0310 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST DIN 432 A2B MM
12.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 31
P0066627600

0320 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
1.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 50GFL.
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
6
P00661808 1 RUBBER GASKET 0.500 KG 40 M

0330 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ02016973-000 SILIKON MM
13.000 M WIDTH / THICKNESS 25 50
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0055365200 1 THREADED SLEEVE 4-70012341 0.300 KG 40 EA

0340 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023585-000 S355JR ZN5//CN//T0 MM
12.000 EA
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70012341 000 C 4-70012341 RL Differenzhülse
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008700400 1 HEXAGON NUT ISO8675 0.160 KG 40 EA

0350 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 04 A2B MM
12.000 EA THREAD M30*2
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0015622800 C 1 SPECIAL WRENCH 22-70036652 0.700 KG 40 EA

0360 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002466-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0066627600
DWG DPPPG-70036652 000 B 22-70036652 RL SPECIAL TOOL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
für Montage Luftführungsring
FOR ASSEMBLY AIR BAFFLE RING
PE427597 1 COVER 4-427597 3.500 KG 40 EA

0370 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 S235JRG2 EN 10029 MM
4.000 EA
P0066627600
DWG 4-427597 000 A RL COVER
INTERNAL COMMENT:
7

0380 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN8//CN//T0 MM
P0066627600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE106081 1 SILICONE RUBBER 0.338 KG 40 EA

0390 L X X X X 0.0 E43 MM
4.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM)
P0066627600
SPE DPQD-00008032 000 A PE106081 SILIKONKAUTSCHUK-ELAS RL
SPE DPQD-00009127 000 A PE106081 SILIKONKAUTSCHUK E RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE113252 1 RUBBERPLATE 0.008 KG 40 DM2

0400 L X X X X X 0.0 ZELLASTIK KUN 565.01 MM
24.000 DM2 SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 5*850*1300
P0066627600
ITEM TEXT :
4 Streifen je Poller auf 5x10x770
zuschneiden
1
DESCRIPTION: BUSHING ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: MKSFA6500-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE: Z
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-SFA6500-70190058 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 3.100,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70190058 000 A 22-SFA6500-70190058 RL SFA6500 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
0001 T X 0.0 ITEM TEXT :
1.000 EA Ständerwicklung Metallteile
P0066628100 BGR STW0150
STATOR WINDING METAL PARTS
DGR STW0150
P0028052300 E 1 SUPPORT FOR BUSHINGS 22-SFA6300-70073000 2100.000 KG 40 EA

0002 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6300-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6300-000
P0066628100
DWG DPPPG-70073000 000 B 22-SFA6300-70073000 RL KONSOLE FUER AUSLEITUNG
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE259097 A 1 BUSHINGS COMPLETE 22-0506-114540 732.000 KG Z 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6410-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6410-000
P0066628100
DWG A0152A7611 000 C 22-0506-114540 RL BUSHING
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0032309000 A 1 CONNECTING PIECE 3-418239 27.400 KG 40 EA

0011 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 413 245,5
P0066628100 625
DWG 3-418239 000 B RL CONNECTING PIECE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2

0012 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 413 245,5
P0066628100 625
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0013 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 413 245,5
P0066628100 625
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0014 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 355 255,5
P0066628100 575
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0015 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 337 235,5
P0066628100 540
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0016 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003079-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 355 255,5
P0066628100 575
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0032308100 1 CONNECTION PIECE 22-70085605 11.300 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00002807-000 CU-PHC-R250 DIN EN 13601 MM
2.000 EA THICKNESS T=20
P0066628100
DWG DPPPG-70085605 000 A 22-70085605 RL SFA6500 SP CONNECTING PIECE 2P
3
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104811 1 DENSE-MASS 0.410 KG X 40 EA

0024 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101600-000 SILIKONKAUTSCHUK MM
2.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION KARTUSCHE310ML;TRANSPARENT
P0066628100
REQUIRED PART MANUFACTURER: HENKEL AG REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: TEROSON SI 33
PE105048 1 ADHESIVE 0.100 KG X 40 BT

0025 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
1.000 BT
P0066628100
PE112407 1 HEXAGON HEAD SCREW ISO4017 0.072 KG 40 EA

0026 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
STD D-EST-00000311 DE D DIN EN ISO 3506-1 RL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF CORROSION-RESIS
STD D-EST-00028037 EN C ISO 3506-1 RL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF CORROSION-RESIS
STD D-EST-00028279 EN E ISO 4017 RL FASTENERS - HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS - PRODUC
STD D-EST-00046621 DE G DIN EN ISO 4017 RL FASTENERS - HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS - PRODUC
BASIC DATA TEXT:

ISO4017-M12X70-A2-70 = Standard Part Designation
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE118123 1 DISC 0.005 KG Z 40 EA

0027 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 A2 DIN 432 MM
P0066628100
P0050109700 A 1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS - 115.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6510-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA6510-000
P0066628100
4
P0032308200 1 SUPPORT PLATE 22-70085601 9.400 KG 40 EA

0031 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100063-000 EPGM203 KUN 562.01 MM
P0066628100
DWG DPPPG-70085601 000 A 22-70085601 RL SFA6500 SP PLATE 2P

P0066628100

P0066628100

P0066628100

P0066628100

P0066628100
PE251730 1 ANGLE 4-251730 2.075 KG 40 EA

0041 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00073785-000 X5CRNI18-10 DIN EN 10056 MM
6.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) L=76
P0066628100
DWG 4-251730 000 C RL ANGLE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Länge bei Montage anpassen.
LENGTH ADAPTED AT MANUFACTORING.
5
PE267705 1 SPACER BLOCK 4-267705 0.610 KG 40 EA

0042 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00013363-000 EPGX KUN 562.01 MM
P0066628100
DWG 4-267705 000 - RL SPACER PAD
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Bei Montage anpassen.
ADAPTED AT MANUFACTORING.
PE261508 1 SPACER PAD 4-261508 0.760 KG 40 EA

0043 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00013363-000 EPGX KUN 562.01 MM
2.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 A=100 B=76
P0066628100 C=50
DWG 4-261508 000 - RL SPACER PAD
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Bei Montage anpassen.
ADAPTED AT MANUFACTORING.

0048 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
BASIC DATA TEXT:

INTERNAL COMMENT:

0049 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
6


0050 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
BASIC DATA TEXT:

INTERNAL COMMENT:

0051 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
BASIC DATA TEXT:

INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104491 1 CLAMPING DISC 12 0.012 KG Z 40 EA

0053 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00060150-000 FST DIN 6796 A2B MM
P0066628100
PE111024 1 CLAMPING DISC CAP EMT167-005 0.050 KG 40 EA

0054 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101436-000 X7CRNIMOBNB16-16 EMT 167-005 MM
140.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) D36/13,5*8
P0066628100
DWG A0147A4597 000 - EMT167-005 RL SPANNSCHEIBEN-KAPSEL
PE112371 1 TWIN NUT EMT159-011 0.180 KG 40 EA

0055 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101575-000 X5CRNI18-10 EMT 159-011 MM
82.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M12/65*25*14
P0066628100
7
DWG A0100A8858 000 A EMT159-011 RL ZWILLINGSMUTTER M12X
PE231451 1 LOCK WASHER KUN607.06 0.014 KG X 40 EA

0056 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002381-000 X5CRNI18-10 EN10259 MM
94.000 EA THREAD / DISTANCE BETWEEN HOLE CENTERS 12 40
P0066628100
STD D-IST-00030238 DE E KUN 607.06 RL LOCK WASHERS; FOR 2 BOLTS
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE437960 1 SPACER PLATE EMT164-225 0.050 KG Z 40 EA

0057 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 X5CRNI18-10 DIN 59382 MM
120.000 EA
P0066628100
DWG A0100A9322 000 C EMT164-225 RL SPACER PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE295746 1 SPACER PLATE 4-295746 0.050 KG Z 40 EA

0058 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00069439-000 X6CRNITI18-10 DIN EN 10259 MM
P0066628100
DWG 4-295746 000 - RL UNTERLEGEBLECH
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0059 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
BASIC DATA TEXT:

INTERNAL COMMENT:
8
PE295291 A 1 SHEET 4-295291 0.010 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 X6CRNITI18-10 DIN EN 10259 MM
5.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 0,5*38*80
P0066628100
DWG 4-295291 000 - RL PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE261538 1 SHEET 4-261511 0.800 KG 40 EA

0062 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00047971-000 CU-PHC-R250 DIN EN 13601 MM
6.000 EA
P0066628100
DWG 4-261511 000 - RL SHEET
PE261527 1 SHEET 4-261511 1.600 KG 40 EA

0063 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00047971-000 SE-CUF25 DIN 46433 MM
6.000 EA
P0066628100
DWG 4-261511 000 - RL SHEET
PE261528 1 SHEET 4-261511 2.400 KG 40 EA

0064 L X X X X 0.0 SE-CUF25 DIN 46433 MM
6.000 EA
P0066628100
DWG 4-261511 000 - RL SHEET
PE113235 1 TWIN NUT 4-113235 0.115 KG X 40 EA

0065 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101575-000 X5CRNI18-10 4-113235 MM
P0066628100
DWG 4-113235 000 B RL Zwillingsmutter
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0066 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
PE104473 1 washer 16 ST*A2B 0.009 KG X 40 EA

0067 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ISO 7090 A2B MM
P0066628100
9
ITEM TEXT :
Ggf. für Wandleranhebung.
FOR LIFTING TRANSFORMER IF NECESSARY.
PE105707 1 GREASE 1.000 KG X D 40 KG

0071 L X X X 0.0 KONTAKTFETT_LIQUI-MOLY_330_ DIN 51825 MM
0.500 KG ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GEBINDE:500G
P0066628100
SPE DPQD-00007581 000 A PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI-MOL RL
SPE DPQD-00009138 000 A SDB PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI RL
SPE DPQD-00009139 000 A BA PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI- RL
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Purchase from Liqui-moly or equivalent. The below Product details are
below are from basic material KONTAKTFETT_LIQUI-MOLY_330:
Colour: Yellow brown
Base: Synthetic oil
NLGI class: 1 DIN 51818
density at +20° degrees Celsius: 1.0 g/cm3
Tumbling resistance to 60.000 double piston strokes : : max. + 30 1/10
mm DIN ISO 2136
Flow pressure at - 35° degrees Celsius: 450 hPa DIN 51805
Temperature field of application: - 40° degrees Celsius to+150° degrees
Celsius
specific electrical resistance: 3.5*10^8 Ohm*cm
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Kontaktstellen vor Versand Generator
eingerieben.
CONTACT SURFACES GREASED BEFORE
SHIPPING GENERATOR.
1 DWG 1-2570-503923 000 - RL MONTAGEANLEITUNG

0073 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0066628100
1 DWG DPPPG-70022311 000 B 3-70022311 RL TORQUE FOR SCREW CONNECTIONS

0074 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0066628100
PE127536 1 HOSEBEND U (ersetzt SAP 124059) 3-127536-A 1.600 KG 40 EA

0081 L X X X X 0.0 SILIKON 4MM 11-110 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DA=62;DI=54
P0066628100
DWG 3-127536 000 A RL TYGON TUBING
10
SPE TLV11-110 DE - RL +
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0066628100
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0066628100
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0066628100
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0066628100
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0066628100
11
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE119809 1 HOSE CLAMP & 0.017 KG 40 EA

0091 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101366-000 MM
30.000 EA
P0066628100
PE117736 1 SILICONE RUBBER STRIP 47118-0004 0.200 KG Z 40 M

0093 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ02018127-000 SILIKON MM
15.000 M
P0066628100
DWG A0158A6675 000 - 47118-0004 RL SILICONE TAPE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE261514 1 LOCK WASHER KUN607.06 0.050 KG Z 40 EA

0101 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00059324-000 X5CRNI18-10 MM
P0066628100
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0102 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628100
PE106974 1 DISC 0.021 KG Z 40 EA

0103 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST DIN 9021 A2B MM
P0066628100
PE104773 1 VARNISH * 1.000 KG X 40 KG

0104 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00033082-000 ALKYDHARZLACK 11-602 MM
0.300 KG ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ZIEGELROT(CA.RAL3009)
P0066628100
SPE DPQD-00007407 000 A PE104773 LACK ÜBERZUGSLACK 240 RL
SPE DPQD-00008118 000 A PE104773 LACK ÜBERZUGSLACH 240 RL
12
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Zum Lackieren Pos.31-36; 42; 43
PAINT IT.31-36; 42; 43
P0068799300 A 1 NEUTRAL CONNECTION 22-0511-70188684 162.000 KG 40 EA

0120 L X X X X X 0.0 MK0511-000 MM
1.000 EA MK0511-000
P0066628100
DWG DPPPG-70188684 000 A 22-0511-70188684 RL 0511 NEUTRAL CONNECTION 2P
1
MATERIAL: P0028052300 REVISION: E EFFECTIVE: 2019-05-24 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: SUPPORT FOR BUSHINGS TITLE ID: MKSFA6300-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70073000 000 B 22-SFA6300-70073000 RL KONSOLE FUER AUSLEITUNG
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0028042800 B 1 MAIN BRACKET 22-70073081 660.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100167-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0028052300
DWG DPPPG-70073081 000 D 22-70073081 RL AUSLEITUNGSKONSOLE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0027904100 D 1 MAIN BRACKET 22-70028719 1400.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100167-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0028052300
DWG DPPPG-70028719 000 D 22-70028719 RL AUSLEITUNGSKONSOLE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0007648200 1 STUD BOLT 3-SFA6300-70012834 1.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002170-000 C35E DIN EN 10278-46 A2B MM
24.000 EA THREAD M16
P0028052300
DWG DPPPG-70012834 000 A 3-SFA6300-70012834 RL Schraubenbolzen M16
ITEM TEXT :
Je nach Montagewinkel, kann der Bolzen
auch umgedreht werden.
According to mounting brackets, the bolt
can be turned.
PE106474 1 hexagon nut M16 8*A2B DIN934 0.030 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
P0028052300
2
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ISO 7090 A2B MM
P0028052300
P0055758800 1 SPRING WASHER BN_208012 0.010 KG X 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000157-000 FEDERSTAHL GEOMET MM
24.000 EA TYPE 16 VSK
P0028052300
PE110995 1 HEX.SOCKET SET SCREW & ISO4026 0.053 KG Z 40 EA

0070 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023655-000 ST A2B MM
20.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M20*30-OSPAE
P0028052300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE115376 1 HEXAGON CAP SCREW 0.036 KG 40 EA

0080 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ISO 4017 MM
P0028052300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE120822 1 WASHER 0.050 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST DIN 9021 A2B MM
10.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 10,5
P0028052300
PE103191 1 TAPER PIN ISO8737 0.060 KG X 40 EA

0100 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000962-000 ST A2B MM
4.000 EA DIAMETER / LENGTH (HEIGHT) 10 80
P0028052300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
3
PE106488 1 WASHER / 10,5 ST-A3C 0.003 KG X 40 EA

0110 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ISO 7090 MM
P0028052300
P0049083200 1 HEXAGON HEAD SCREW ISO4017 0.127 KG 40 EA

0120 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
P0028052300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE113849 1 washer 0.041 KG 40 EA

0130 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 A2 ISO 7093-1 MM
27.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) A16
P0028052300
PE104411 1 RUBBERPLATE 0.058 KG 40 DM2

0140 L X X X X 0.0 PERBUNAN-N. KUN 565.01 MM
40.500 DM2 SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 4*1000*I.R.
P0028052300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Zuschnitt: Laengen anpassen
3000x90 (2x) 920x90 (2x)
PE113009 1 RUBBER PROFILE 0.110 KG 40 DM

0150 L X X X X 0.0 MOOSGUMMI KUN 565.02 MM
706.000 DM SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 101-022(5*50)
P0028052300
ITEM TEXT :
Zuschnitt: Laengen anpassen
925x60 (2x) 2000x60 (2x)

0160 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 PATTEX-PX MM
P0028052300
4

INTERNAL COMMENT:

0170 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
P0028052300
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Troy Skiles
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0027987700 A 1 PROTECTIVE PLATE 22-70072854 113.000 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002197-000 S235JR MM
1.000 EA
P0028052300
DWG DPPPG-70072854 000 A 22-70072854 RL SCHUTZPLATTE
1
DESCRIPTION: NEUTRAL CONNECTION TITLE ID: MK0511-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-0511-70188684 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 162,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70188684 000 A 22-0511-70188684 RL 0511 NEUTRAL CONNECTION 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
P0031581400 1 RAIL 22-70083154 12.800 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00055361-000 CU-HCP-R250 DIN 46433 MM
4.000 EA THICKNESS / WIDTH / LENGTH 15 200
P0068799300 450
DWG DPPPG-70083154 000 A 22-70083154 RL 0511 SP BUS BAR
P0031581500 1 RAIL 22-70083155 8.500 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00055361-000 CU-HCP-R250 DIN 46433 MM
8.000 EA THICKNESS / WIDTH / LENGTH 15 200
P0068799300 295
DWG DPPPG-70083155 000 A 22-70083155 RL 0511 BUS BAR
P0007556900 1 SHEET 3-70012463 1.300 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00047971-000 SE-CU DIN 46433 MM
8.000 EA A=DIM1 10
P0068799300
DWG DPPPG-70012463 000 A PAGEFORMAT-0511-DIRNRLAST8 RL 0511 PLATE 2P
40.000 EA Dehnungsband (BGR SFA6510)
P0068799300 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR (DGR SFA6510)
PE112371 1 TWIN NUT EMT159-011 0.180 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101575-000 X5CRNI18-10 EMT 159-011 MM
P0068799300
DWG A0100A8858 000 A EMT159-011 RL ZWILLINGSMUTTER M12X
PE111024 1 CLAMPING DISC CAP EMT167-005 0.050 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101436-000 X7CRNIMOBNB16-16 EMT 167-005 MM
104.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) D36/13,5*8
P0068799300
DWG A0147A4597 000 - EMT167-005 RL SPANNSCHEIBEN-KAPSEL
PE104491 1 CLAMPING DISC 12 0.012 KG Z 40 EA

0080 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00060150-000 FST DIN 6796 A2B MM
P0068799300
2
PE437960 1 SPACER PLATE EMT164-225 0.050 KG Z 40 EA

0090 L X X X X 0.0 X5CRNI18-10 DIN 59382 MM
104.000 EA
P0068799300
DWG A0100A9322 000 C EMT164-225 RL SPACER PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0100 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002381-000 X5CRNI18-10 EN10259 MM
P0068799300
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0110 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0068799300

0120 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0068799300
BASIC DATA TEXT:

INTERNAL COMMENT:
3
PE117584 1 WASHER A12 0.006 KG 40 EA

0130 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 A2-70 ISO 7090 MM
P0068799300
3.000 EA Durchführung (BGR SFA6410)
P0068799300
3.000 EA Stromwandler beigestellt
P0068799300 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
PE105707 1 GREASE 1.000 KG X D 40 KG

0220 L X 0.0 KONTAKTFETT_LIQUI-MOLY_330_ DIN 51825 MM
0.100 KG ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GEBINDE:500G
P0068799300
SPE DPQD-00007581 000 A PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI-MOL RL
SPE DPQD-00009138 000 A SDB PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI RL
SPE DPQD-00009139 000 A BA PE105707 KONTAKTFETT LIQUI- RL
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Purchase from Liqui-moly or equivalent. The below Product details are
below are from basic material KONTAKTFETT_LIQUI-MOLY_330:
Colour: Yellow brown
Base: Synthetic oil
NLGI class: 1 DIN 51818
density at +20° degrees Celsius: 1.0 g/cm3
Tumbling resistance to 60.000 double piston strokes : : max. + 30 1/10
mm DIN ISO 2136
Flow pressure at - 35° degrees Celsius: 450 hPa DIN 51805
Temperature field of application: - 40° degrees Celsius to+150° degrees
Celsius
specific electrical resistance: 3.5*10^8 Ohm*cm
INTERNAL COMMENT:
IDENTIFIER:
IDENTIFIER:
IDENTIFIER:
IDENTIFIER:
1
DESCRIPTION: SHAFT BUSHING ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: MKSFA6600-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE: Z
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-SFA6600-70147168 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 910,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70147168 000 A 22-SFA6600-70147168 RL SFA6600 SHAFT BUSHING ASSEMBLY 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
P0056377500 A 1 SHAFT BUSHING 22-SFA6700-70147160 420.000 KG Z 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA6700-000 MM
2.000 EA MKSFA6700-000
P0056378700
DWG DPPPG-70147160 000 A 22-SFA6700-70147160 RL SFA6700 SHAFT BUSHING SD
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0012416300 C 1 OUTER AIR SEAL ASSEMBLY 1-SFA0300-70024747 20.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA0300-000 MM
2.000 EA MKSFA0300-000 TYPE (WELLEØ525)
P0056378700
DWG DPPPG-70024747 000 B 1-SFA0300-70024747 RL SFA0300 OUTER AIR SEAL ASSEMBLY 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0050636800 1 HEXAGON SCREW ISO4017 0.036 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 8.8 609501 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
P0056378700
SPE DPTLV-00000841 DE A TLV1400 RL Electroplated coatings of zinc and zinc
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0050675500 1 WIDE WASHER ISO7093-1 0.020 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ02022450-000 8.8 1400 ISO 7093-1 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
24.000 EA THREAD / LENGTH / PROPERTY CLASS M10 2
P0056378700 200HV
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
P0056378700
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0064939400 1 WASHER 0.028 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00054907-000 ST-300HV ISO 7090 ZN5//AN//T0 MM
8.000 EA NOMINAL SIZE/MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 24 300HV
P0056378700
PE103191 1 TAPER PIN ISO8737 0.060 KG X 40 EA

0070 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10000962-000 ST A2B MM
4.000 EA DIAMETER / LENGTH (HEIGHT) 10 80
P0056378700
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0050643000 1 HEXAGON NUT ISO4032 0.012 KG 40 EA

0080 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 ~8 609301 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
4.000 EA THREAD M10
P0056378700
SPE TLV609301 DE A TLV 6093 01 RL Material according to Standard; Nuts mad
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0050666600 1 WASHER ISO7089 0.005 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00054907-000 8.8 1400 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
4.000 EA DIAMETER M10 ISO7089-10-200HV
P0056378700
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE111407 1 HOSE FITTING, STRAIGHT 0.150 KG F 40 EA

0100 L X X X X 0.0 ARTKL.-NR 24200660 MM
4.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) NW40,M45*2,GERADESELBSTDICH
P0056378700
BASIC DATA TEXT:

3
nach Angebot von "Hyma" Erfurt

Tel.EF/77826-0; Fax EF/7782633
PE111408 1 ELBOW 0.200 KG F 40 EA

0110 L X X X X 0.0 ARTKL.-NR 24200661 MM
4.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) NW40,M45*2,90°M.KONTERM.
P0056378700
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Tel.EF/77826-0; Fax EF/7782633
PE114611 1 AIR SEAL HOSE 2.000 KG F 40 M

0120 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101442-000 PVC ISOLIERT ARTKL.-NR 25600001 MM
2.500 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 40MMDURCHMESSER
P0056378700
CLASSIFICATION:
ITEM TEXT :
Länge bei Montage anpassen

0130 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
P0056378700
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Troy Skiles
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE111406 1 HOSE CLAMP 0.100 KG F 40 EA

0140 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00055700-000 ARTKL.-NR 24100292 MM
8.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) ND50,VERSTÄRKTEAUSFÜHRUNG
P0056378700
BASIC DATA TEXT:

4
Tel.EF/77826-0; Fax EF/7782633
PE262193 1 INSULATING RING 3-262193 0.800 KG Z 40 EA

0160 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00029459-000 EPGC203 KUN 562.01 MM
2.000 EA
P0056378700
DWG 3-262193 000 B RL INSULATING RING
PE120057 1 insolating bushing 0.030 KG X 40 EA

0170 L X X X & R M2 1.0 PA6.6 MM
24.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) BESTELL.NR.:5061.00
P0056378700
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
MATERIAL: P0012416300 REVISION: C EFFECTIVE: 2013-07-30 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: OUTER AIR SEAL ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: MKSFA0300-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK: SIZE/DIM. DESC.: TYPE SIZE/DIM 1: (WELLEØ525)
SIZE/DIM 2:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70024747 000 B 1-SFA0300-70024747 RL SFA0300 OUTER AIR SEAL ASSEMBLY 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0012416700 A 1 OUTER AIR SEAL 2-SFA0310-70024746 24.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA0310-000 ENAC-ALSI10MG(A) MM
1.000 EA MKSFA0310-000 TYPE D525,4(WELLED525E8)
P0012416300
DWG DPPPG-70024746 000 B 2-SFA0310-70024746 RL SFA0310 OUTER AIR SEAL 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0017645200 1 FITTING BOLT 0.070 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001592-000 8.8 609501 DIN 609 MM
2.000 EA THREAD / PITCH / LENGTH M10 60
P0012416300 1,5
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ISO 7090 MM
P0012416300
PE105142 1 HEXAGON NUT / M10 0.012 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
2.000 EA THREAD M10
P0012416300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2
PE106425 1 HEXAGON SCREW ISO4017 0.011 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
P0012416300
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
P0012416300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
MATERIAL: P0017446600 REVISION: C EFFECTIVE: 2016-06-27 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: BLOWER SHROUD MACHINING TITLE ID: MKSFA0400-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK: SIZE/DIM. DESC.: ITEM / VERSION SIZE/DIM 1: GEBLÄSEDURCHMESSER1210
SIZE/DIM 2:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1.000 EA Luftführungsring zweiteilig, Ober- und
P0017446600 Unterteil bestellt mit BGR
Luftführungsring BZ
TWO-PIECE RING, UPPER- AND LOWER PART
ORDERED
AT ASSEMBLY AIR BAFFLE RING CD
P0017446500 B 1 AIR BAFFLE RING 22-SFA0410-70040509 160.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00037602-000 ENAC-ALSI10MG(A) 984301 MM
1.000 EA ITEM / VERSION GEBLÄSEØ1210
P0017446600
DWG DPPPG-70040509 000 A 22-SFA0410-70040509 RL SFA0410 Luftfuehrungsring BZ
SPE TLV984301 DE B TLV 9843 01 RL EN AC-Al Si10Mg(a);(G-ALSI10MG); Annular
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: ENCLOSURE, WELDING ASSEMBLY TITLE ID: ZZ00100039-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0024346800 A 1 NOISE PROTECTION LINING 2-4759-222513 1000.000 KG 40 EA

0005 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00054454-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
P0068400200 1 SIDE WALL COOLER 22-70184943 1455.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100762-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70184943 000 B 22-70184943 RL SFA5600 SP SIDE WALL COOLER 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068399900 1 SIDE WALL 22-70184944 2440.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00058433-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70184944 000 A 22-70184944 RL SFA5600 SP SIDE WALL 2P
P0068400100 1 ROOF SHEETING 22-70184945 2879.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004926-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70184945 000 A 22-70184945 RL SFA5600 SP ROOF PLATE 2P
P0049314400 A 1 FRONT WALL COMPLETE 22-70127595 1377.000 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10005123-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70127595 000 A 22-70127595 RL SFA5600 FRONT WALL COMPLETE 2P
2
P0049313500 A 1 FRONT WALL COMPLETE 22-70127594 1360.000 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10005123-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70127594 000 A 22-70127594 RL SFA5600 FRONT WALL COMPLETE 2P
PE434975 A 1 SEAL WALL 3 2-434975 376.000 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 2-434975 000 B RL DICHTWAND 3
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE434973 A 1 SEAL WALL 2 2-434973 214.000 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
4.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 2-434973 000 B RL DICHTWAND 2
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068400300 A 1 SEALING WALL 22-70186484 378.000 KG 40 EA

0080 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00012878-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70186484 000 A 22-70186484 RL SFA5600 SEAL WALL 2P
PE115591 1 HOLLOW PROFILE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0090 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
129.654 KG BREADTH / HEIGHT / WALLTHICKNESS 100 100
P0068409000 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0100 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
3
CLASSIFICATION:
P00368373 1 HOLLOW PROFILE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0110 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 6,3
CLASSIFICATION:

0120 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0130 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0140 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0150 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
4
CLASSIFICATION:

0160 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0170 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068409000 6,3
CLASSIFICATION:
PE412288 1 PLATE 0.500 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2 MM
P0068409000
PE104678 1 PIPE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0190 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001937-000 ST35.8/III DIN EN 10220 MM
121.812 KG SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 323,9*7,1
P0068409000
CLASSIFICATION:
PE110251 1 FLAT 1.000 KG 40 KG

0200 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00019313-000 S235JRG2 DIN 1017 MM
478.065 KG SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 100*6
P0068409000
5
CLASSIFICATION:
P0044937600 A 1 AIR DUCT 22-70115887 6.500 KG 40 EA

0210 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00037626-000 MM
2.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70115887 000 A 22-70115887 RL SFA5600 AIR DUCT 2P
PE208386 1 LUG 0.120 KG 40 EA

0220 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001548-000 UST37-2 SN 66101 MM
P0068409000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE112954 1 PIPE 0.300 KG 40 KG

0230 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001937-000 ST35.8-I DIN EN 10220 MM
0.322 KG SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 33,7*4
P0068409000
CLASSIFICATION:
7.000 EA PE117358
P0068409000 Blindverschluß-NE-Ms M20x1,5
Anbringung bei Endmontage Siemens
MOUNTING AT FINAL ASSEMBLY BY SIEMENS
PE285009 A 1 support trunnion complete (cooler) 4.770 KG 40 EA

0250 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
2.000 EA
P0068409000
PE443657 A 1 CONSOLE 3-443657 10.000 KG 40 EA

0260 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00031588-000 MM
8.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 3-443657 000 A RL SUPPORT
6
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE128742 1 machine mounting pad 0.500 KG Z 40 EA

0270 L X X X X 0.0 MM
8.000 EA TYPE / DIAMETER INT.VERMERK Ø208
P0068409000
RPT DPPIC-2013-0000002 000 A 22-2013-0000002 RL
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: GMT-GUMMI-METALL-TECHNIK GMBH RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 110006
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE412079 1 L-PROFILE 4-412079 2.500 KG 40 EA

0280 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032892-000 S235JRG2 EN 10056-1 MM
P0068409000
DWG 4-412079 000 A RL L-PROFIL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P00528233 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0290 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00047971-000 S235JR+Z15 EN 10029 MM
12.434 KG THICKNESS / WIDTH / LENGTH 20 4000
P0068409000 8000
CLASSIFICATION:
P0018871700 1 LIFTING EYE O.Z. 0.010 KG 40 EA

0300 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001899-000 MM
6.000 EA TYPE / NOMINAL SIZE RINGBOCK 16T
P0068409000
SPE DPSTP-70000115 000 A RL RING TRESTLE WELDABLE VRBS
STD D-IST-00030525 DE O KUN 693.20 RL Load attachment rigging - Load ring and
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: TUL TEC GESELLSCHAFT FUER RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: RINGBOCK SCHWEIßB. VRBS-FIX 16
REQUIRED PART MANUFACTURER: RUD ART:NR:7999301
PE117820 1 GROUND TERMINAL, TOTAL 4-117820 0.500 KG 40 EA

0310 L X X X X 0.0 X6CRNITI18-10 MM
12.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 4-117820 000 B RL ERDUNGSKLEMME, KPL.
7
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008216200 E 1 COVER 2-418496 120.000 KG Z 40 EA

0500 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 MM
2.000 EA VOLUME 770X2000
P0068409000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008216100 B 1 COVER 2-445071 120.000 KG 40 EA

0510 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 MM
1.000 EA VOLUME 770X2000
P0068409000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008100000 C 1 COVER 3-278825 12.000 KG Z 40 EA

0520 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 MM
4.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 3-278825 000 C RL COVER
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0036451000 B 1 TUBE WALL ENTRANCE 3-443220 3.000 KG 40 EA

0530 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00052119-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG 3-443220 000 B RL TUBE WALL ENTRANCE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068413300 A 1 COVER 22-70186413 9.300 KG 40 EA

0540 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001027-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70186413 000 A 22-70186413 RL SFA5600 COVER 2P
8
P0068413500 A 1 COVER 22-70186415 9.300 KG 40 EA

0550 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001027-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
P0068401500 A 1 ADDITIONAL COVER 22-70186487 3369.000 KG 40 EA

0600 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004927-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70186487 000 A 22-70186487 RL SFA5600 EXTRA COVER EE 2P
P0068401800 A 1 ADDITIONAL COVER 22-70186488 476.000 KG 40 EA

0610 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004927-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068409000
DWG DPPPG-70186488 000 A 22-70186488 RL SFA5600 EXTRA COVER TE 2P

0700 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 DIN 929 MM
3.000 EA THREAD M12
P0068409000
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0710 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
P0068409000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE107440 1 WASHER / 12 ISO7090 0.006 KG X 40 EA

0720 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ZN5//CN//T0 MM
P0068409000
PE120384 1 SEALING COMPOUND - 0.400 KG X X 40 EA

0900 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100938-000 MM
41.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TEROSON_MS935_290ML
P0068409000
SPE DPQD-00007286 000 A PE120384 DICHTMASSE TEROSTAT-M RL
SPE DPQD-00007728 000 A PE120384 TEROSTAT - MS 935 WEI RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
9
ITEM TEXT :
Zum Abdichten abgesetzter Schweisznaehte
im Inneren.
FOR SEALING INTERRUPTED WELDS INSIDE.
Verwendung nach Bedarf
USE IF NECESSARY
1.000 EA PE106528 LOCTITE_243
P0068409000 Verwendung nach Bedarf
USE IF NECESSARY
1.000 EA PE104421 PATTEX-PX
USE IF NECESSARY
7.500 M P00597594
P0068409000 Gummi-Sylomer G35/50 breit
21.000 M PE117583
P0068409000 Gummi-Sylomer L25/50 breit
18.000 M PE117583
Anbringung bei Kundenaufstellung
ATTACHMENT FOR CUSTOMER INSTALLATION
1
DESCRIPTION: COVER TITLE ID: MKSFA5600-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068409000 A 1 ENCLOSURE, WELDING ASSEMBLY 22-SFA5600-70184942 21709.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100039-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0066627900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P00495116 1 GASKET ZELLKAUTSCHUK 0.032 KG 40 M

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ02016973-000 CR 30 NEOPRENE MM
P0066627900 EINSEITIG_SELBSTKLEBEND
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: C+L INDUSTRIETECHNIK GMBH
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet als Dichtung aller Deckel
USED AS SEAL OF ALL COVER
PE121847 1 Rubber profile 20 x 20 self-adhesive & 0.300 KG X 40 M

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZELLKAUTSCHUK / EPDM MM
14.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 20*20
P0066627900
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet in Pos.40 und Pos.50 der
Abdeckhaube
USED IN IT.40 AND IT.50 FROM THE
ENCLOSURE
2
PE111351 1 SPONGE RUBBER, SELF-ADHESSIVE 0.100 KG 40 M

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 EPDM MM
P0066627900
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet in Pos.530 der Abdeckhaube und
Pos.30 der Zusatzhaube TS
USED IN IT.530 FROM THE ENCLOSURE AND
IT.30 FROM THE EXTRA COVER TE
PE132233 1 RUBBERProfile 0.010 KG 40 M

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
4.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) BEST-NR.101124,SCHWARZ
P0066627900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet in Pos.530 der Abdeckhaube und
Pos.30 der Zusatzhaube TS
USED IN IT.530 FROM THE ENCLOSURE AND
IT.30 FROM THE EXTRA COVER TE

INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet in Pos.540 und Pos.550 der Abd
Abdeckhaube
USED IN IT.54 AND IT.550 FROM THE
ENCLOSURE
PE126987 1 SPONGE RUBBER, SELF-ADHESSIVE & 0.100 KG 40 M

0070 L X X X X 0.0 EPDM MM
P0066627900
3
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet in Pos.200 der der Zusatzhaube
TS
USED IN IT.200 FROM THE EXTRA COVER TE
P0068404700 1 SHAFT SEAL RING 22-70186405 4.200 KG 40 EA

0080 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101543-000 EPGM203 MM
1.000 EA
P0066627900
DWG DPPPG-70186405 000 A 22-70186405 RL SFA5600 SP SHAFT SEAL RING 2P
PE117358 1 BLIND COVER 0.050 KG 40 EA

0240 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ02052513-000 MESSING VERNICKELT EN 50 262 MM
7.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M20X1,5MITO-RING
P0066627900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet als Pos.240 der Abdeckhaube
USED AS IT.240 FROM THE ENCLOSURE

0910 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
P0066627900
SPE DPQD-00007583 000 A PE106528 LOCTITE 243 RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
USE IF NECESSARY

P0066627900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
4

USE IF NECESSARY
P00597594 1 GASKET 0.265 KG X 40 M

0930 L X X X X 0.0 MM
7.500 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DICKE:35;BREITE:50(GELB)
P0066627900
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: BUBLITZ & PROFE
ITEM TEXT :
USED AS IT.930 OF THE ENCLOSURE
PE117583 1 GASKET 0.500 KG X 40 M

0940 L X X X X 0.0 MM
21.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DICKE:25;BREITE:50(GRÜN)
P0066627900
ITEM TEXT :
USED AS IT.940 FROM THE ENCLOSURE

INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet als Pos.960 der Zusatzhaube ES
USED AS IT.960 FROM THE ADDITIONAL COVER
EE
PE117583 1 GASKET 0.500 KG X 40 M

0950 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
24.500 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DICKE:25;BREITE:50(GRÜN)
P0066627900
ITEM TEXT :
Verwendet als Pos.950 der Abdeckhaube un
und Zusatzhaube ES
USED AS IT.950 OF THE ENCLOSURE AND
5
ADDITIONAL COVER EE
1
DESCRIPTION: ADDITIONAL COVER TITLE ID: ZZ10004927-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-70186487 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 3.369,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70186487 000 A 22-70186487 RL SFA5600 EXTRA COVER EE 2P
CLASSIFICATION:

0005 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00054454-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG 2-4759-222513 000 F RL SCHALLAUSKLEIDUNG
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0044928200 1 SIDE WALL 22-70116069 312.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00058433-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
2.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG DPPPG-70116069 000 A 22-70116069 RL SFA5600 SP SIDE WALL 2P
P0044928400 1 FRONT WALL PLATE 22-70116068 898.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004913-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG DPPPG-70116068 000 B 22-70116068 RL SFA5600 SP FRONT WALL PLATE 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0044928500 1 ROOF SHEETING 22-70116070 309.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004926-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG DPPPG-70116070 000 A 22-70116070 RL SFA5600 SP ROOF PLATE 2P

0040 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068401500 5
2
CLASSIFICATION:

0050 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068401500 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0060 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068401500 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0070 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068401500 5
CLASSIFICATION:

0080 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0068401500 5
CLASSIFICATION:
3
P0068401900 1 HOLLOW PROFILE 22-70186489 15.500 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000752-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
2.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG DPPPG-70186489 000 A 22-70186489 RL SFA5600 HOLLOW PROFILE 2P
PE412079 1 L-PROFILE 4-412079 2.500 KG 40 EA

0100 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032892-000 S235JRG2 EN 10056-1 MM
P0068401500
DWG 4-412079 000 A RL L-PROFIL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE412288 1 PLATE 0.500 KG 40 EA

0110 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2 MM
P0068401500
PE110251 1 FLAT 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0068401500
CLASSIFICATION:
PE119498 1 PROFILE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0130 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032892-000 S235JR+N EN 10056-1 MM
7.035 KG LENGTH / WIDTH (BREADTH) / THICKNESS 100 50
P0068401500 6
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE119498 1 PROFILE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0140 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032892-000 S235JR+N EN 10056-1 MM
10.275 KG LENGTH / WIDTH (BREADTH) / THICKNESS 100 50
P0068401500 6
4
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P00563075 1 PLATE EN10029 120.000 KG X 40 KG

0150 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR+N+Z15 904408 EN10025 MM
2.649 KG THICKNESS 15 NO ENG. NO MFG. ONLY LOGISTICS
P0068401500
CLASSIFICATION:
PE207396 1 LUG 0.800 KG 40 EA

0160 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001548-000 S235JRG2 SN 66101 MM
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE208386 1 LUG 0.120 KG 40 EA

0170 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001548-000 UST37-2 SN 66101 MM
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE436251 A 1 CONSOLE 3-436251 9.200 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00031588-000 MM
4.000 EA
P0068401500
DWG 3-436251 000 D RL SUPPORT
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE128742 1 machine mounting pad 0.500 KG Z 40 EA

0190 L X X X X 0.0 MM
4.000 EA TYPE / DIAMETER INT.VERMERK Ø208
P0068401500
RPT DPPIC-2013-0000002 000 A 22-2013-0000002 RL
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: GMT-GUMMI-METALL-TECHNIK GMBH RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 110006
INTERNAL COMMENT:
5

2.000 EA
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0054282900 1 STEEL DOOR 73.000 KG 40 EA

0300 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101458-000 MM
1.000 EA DESIGNATION (ABBREVIATION) ST-R-X-940X1940/21/Z01
P0068401500
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: TROX GMBH RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: ST-R-X-940X1940/21/Z01
P0054283100 1 STEEL DOOR 73.000 KG 40 EA

0310 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101458-000 MM
1.000 EA DESIGNATION (ABBREVIATION) ST-L-X-940X1940/21/Z01
P0068401500
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: TROX GMBH RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: ST-L-X-940X1940/21/Z01
P0045066800 B 1 COVER 2-70017230 109.000 KG 40 EA

0500 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 S235JR MM
1.000 EA
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068406500 A 1 GRATING 22-70104123 13.100 KG 40 EA

0510 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023704-000 MM
4.000 EA THICKNESS / WIDTH / LENGTH T=30 L1=546
P0068401500 L2=1122
P0063948300 1 CLAMP DOPPELHALTEKLAMMER 0.100 KG 40 EA

0520 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000981-000 MM
4.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 DOPPELKLEMME_FUER_-GITTERROSTE MASCHENWEITE_30/30
P0068401500
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: GITTERROSTEDIREKT RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: ARTNR.: ZU3030DKB
6
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: DOPPELKLEMME FÜR MASCHE 30/30
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068402000 1 PLATE 22-70186878 25.900 KG 40 EA

0530 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR EN 10025 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401500

0700 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0068401500

0710 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0068401500
PE103345 1 HEXAGON CAP SCREW 0.005 KG 40 EA

0730 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002283-000 8.8 609501 ISO 4017 J3A MM
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE126174 1 WASHER WITH GASKET 0.002 KG 40 EA

0740 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 A2 MM
8.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DIXDA:6,2X16
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
7

0900 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100938-000 MM
P0068401500
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Zum Abdichten abgesetzter Schweisznaehte
im Inneren.
FOR SEALING INTERRUPTED WELDS INSIDE.
USE IF NECESSARY
0910 T .0 ITEM TEXT :
1.000 EA PE106528 LOCTITE_243
USE IF NECESSARY
1.000 EA PE104421 PATTEX-PX
USE IF NECESSARY
6.500 M PE117583
Anbringung bei Kundenaufstellung
ATTACHMENT FOR CUSTOMER INSTALLATION
12.000 M P00522430
P0068401500 ZELLKAUTSCHUK - CR 30 NEOPRENE
1
DESCRIPTION: ADDITIONAL COVER TITLE ID: ZZ10004927-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-70186488 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 476,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70186488 000 A 22-70186488 RL SFA5600 EXTRA COVER TE 2P
CLASSIFICATION:
P0026900200 A 1 SOUND PROTECTION 3-281546 40.000 KG 40 EA

0005 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00054484-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG 3-281546 000 - RL SOUND PROTECTION
P0068403600 A 1 RACK 22-70186490 225.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000513-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG DPPPG-70186490 000 A 22-70186490 RL SFA5600 FRAME 2P
P0068403800 A 1 COVER 22-70186500 23.300 KG Z 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
P0068404100 A 1 TUBE WALL ENTRANCE 22-70186502 2.500 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00052119-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG DPPPG-70186502 000 A 22-70186502 RL SFA4700 TUBE WALL ENTRANCE 2P
P0052344700 C 1 COVER 22-70134992 18.100 KG Z 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00011872-000 MM
2.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG DPPPG-70134992 000 B 22-70134992 RL SFA5600 COVER 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068404600 A 1 FRONT WALL 22-70186496 138.000 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002618-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG DPPPG-70186496 000 A 22-70186496 RL SFA5600 FRONT WALL 2P
2
1.000 EA Wellendichtring P0068404700.
P0068401800 Kein Lieferumfang Stahlbau!
SEAL SHAFT RING P0068404700.
NO SCOPE OF DELIVERY STEEL CONSTRUCTION!
P0068404800 1 L-PROFILE 22-70186567 15.000 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032892-000 S235JR DIN EN 10056-1 MM
1.000 EA
P0068401800
DWG DPPPG-70186567 000 A 22-70186567 RL SFA5600 SP L-PROFIL 2P
PE104472 1 WASHER ISO7090 0.002 KG X 40 EA

36.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 8 200HV
P0068401800
PE130323 1 HEXAGON SCREW M8*25 0.025 KG 40 EA

0110 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002283-000 8.8 St-verzinkt; ISO 4017 MM
P0068401800
PE107440 1 WASHER / 12 ISO7090 0.006 KG X 40 EA

P0068401800

0130 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
P0068401800
INTERNAL COMMENT:
7.800 M PE126987
P0068401800 GUMMI Moosgummi Selbstklebend
Anbringung bei Aufstellung der
kompletten Abdeckhaube auf der
Kundenbaustelle
MOUNTING BY ASSEMBLY THE COMPLETE
ENCLOSURE AT COUSTOMER CONSTRUCTION SITE
3
1.000 EA PE106528 LOCTITE_243
USE IF NECESSARY
1
DESCRIPTION: COOLER COVER TITLE ID: MKSFA5702-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
STD. BOM NO./VARIANT: -/- SIZE/DIM STD. BOM: FITTING TYPE:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70189302 000 A 22-SFA5702-70189302 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER GENERAL DRAWING
CLASSIFICATION:
P0068617900 A 1 AIR COOLER 22-SFA5711-70184415 5000.000 KG 40 EA

0005 L X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5711-000 TLV13-044 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5711-000 LENGTH/WIDTH/HEIGHT/WEIGHT 3100 2280
P0066628000 286 1250
DWG DPPPG-70184415 000 B 22-SFA5711-70184415 RL SFA5711 COOLING ELEMENTS OD 2P
SPE TLV13-044 000 C RL Cooling elements
SPE TLV13-047 000 C RL Painting of turbogenerators
SPE TLV14-905 000 E RL General requirements of the customer doc
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: STERLING THERMAL TECHNOLOGY LT RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 20387 REV 1
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: DATED 11.06.2019 SUPPLIER GRAPHIC REQUIRED: X
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069143400 A 1 COOLER COVER 22-70189303 12175.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00032127-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0066628000
DWG DPPPG-70144668 000 B 22-70144668 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER TOLERANCES
DWG DPPPG-70189303 000 A 22-70189303 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069147100 A 1 COOLER VENTING DEVICE 22-SFA5720-70169056 21.600 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKSFA5720-000 MM
1.000 EA MKSFA5720-000
P0066628000
DWG DPPPG-70169056 000 A 22-SFA5720-70169056 RL SFA5720 COOLER VENTING AND DRAINING PIPE
PE124111 1 WASHER 0.015 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 X5CRNI18-10 ISO 7093 (DIN 9021) MM
P0066628000
2
P0020860200 1 TOOTHED LOCK WASHER 0.001 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00074445-000 EDELSTAHL DIN 6797 MM
304.000 EA TYPE A13
P0066628000

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 A2-70 MM
P0066628000

P0066628000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE120385 1 GASKET 0.381 KG X 40 M

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
33.500 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) DICKE:25;BREITE:50(GELB)
P0066628000
4.000 EA Rahmen Pos.420 aus Stahlbau
P0066628000 Sealingframe IT.420 from steel work
PE130240 1 GASKET 0.000 KG 40 M

0090 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00012697-000 EPDM MM
4.850 M DIAMETER 15
P0066628000
NO.OF PCS:4 SIZE 1:4.850 UOM:M SIZE 2:0.000 UOM:M SIZE 3:0.000 UOM:M
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Beschreibung:
endlos Dicht-Gummi-schnur mit 15mm Durchmesser, rel. weich, schwarz,
geschlossenporig
für Abdichtung des Spaltes zw. Kühlelement und Genohaube auf Seite des
Dichtrahmens; Wärmebedingte Längenausdenhung des Elementes bleibt
3
möglich
Technische Daten des Lieferanten:

Moosgummi in APTK (EPDM)
Elastomer:
Äthylen-Propylen-Terpolymerre (APTK / EPDM)
(keine Verschnittqualität)
Besondere Eigenheiten:
kontinuierlich extrudiert und vulkanisiert
keine Klebeverbindungen (Endlosmaterial)
100% geschlossenzellig,
rundrum geschlossene Außenhaut,
an schnittstellen praktisch keine Wasseraufnahme
Farbe:
schwarz
Dichte:
ca. 0,6-0,7 g/cm³
Härte:
ca. 20 Shore-A
Maßtolleranzen:
entsprechend DIN 7715 Teil 3 Klasse E3
Beständigkeiten:
Temperatur: min. -35°C; max. +110°C
Ozon,Witterung,Licht: sehr gut bis ausgezeichnet
Öle und Fette:
pflanzlich: sehr gut
tierische: bedingt
mineralische: mäßig
Säuren, Basen, Ketone, Alkohol: ausgezeichnet
Lack: indifferent auf besondere Anforderungen
Beschreibung:
endlos Dicht-Gummi-schnur mit 15mm Durchmesser, rel. weich, schwarz,
geschlossenporig
für Abdichtung des Spaltes zw. Kühlelement und Genohaube auf Seite des
Dichtrahmens; Wärmebedingte Längenausdenhung des Elementes bleibt
möglich
Technische Daten des Lieferanten:

Moosgummi in APTK (EPDM)
Elastomer:
Äthylen-Propylen-Terpolymerre (APTK / EPDM)
(keine Verschnittqualität)
Besondere Eigenheiten:
kontinuierlich extrudiert und vulkanisiert
keine Klebeverbindungen (Endlosmaterial)
100% geschlossenzellig,
rundrum geschlossene Außenhaut,
an schnittstellen praktisch keine Wasseraufnahme
Farbe:
schwarz
Dichte:
4
ca. 0,6-0,7 g/cm³

Härte:
ca. 20 Shore-A
Maßtolleranzen:
entsprechend DIN 7715 Teil 3 Klasse E3
Beständigkeiten:
Temperatur: min. -35°C; max. +110°C
Ozon,Witterung,Licht: sehr gut bis ausgezeichnet
Öle und Fette:
pflanzlich: sehr gut
tierische: bedingt
mineralische: mäßig
Säuren, Basen, Ketone, Alkohol: ausgezeichnet
Lack: indifferent auf besondere Anforderungen
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0100 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ02016973-000 CR 30 NEOPRENE MM
NO.OF PCS:4 SIZE 1:4.850 UOM:M SIZE 2:0.000 UOM:M SIZE 3:0.000 UOM:M
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0066722200 A 1 ANCHORAGE - 80.000 KG 40 EA

0150 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00070314-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0066628000
P0060739000 C 1 TRANSPORTATION LOCK - 1.000 KG 40 EA

0200 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002941-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0066628000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: COOLER COVER TITLE ID: ZZ00032127-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 22-70189303 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 12.175,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70144668 000 B 22-70144668 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER TOLERANCES
DWG DPPPG-70189303 000 A 22-70189303 RL SFA5702 COOLER COVER
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0005 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00054454-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG 2-4759-222513 000 F RL SCHALLAUSKLEIDUNG
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069143600 A 1 BOTTOM 22-70189304 2850.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007783-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189304 000 A 22-70189304 RL SFA5702 BOTTOM

0020 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 6,3
CLASSIFICATION:
P0069215300 A 1 GUIDE 22-70189313 126.100 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000408-000 MM
8.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189313 000 A 22-70189313 RL SFA5702 GUIDE
P0069144900 A 1 HOLDER, COMPLETE 22-70189314 18.400 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000643-000 MM
4.000 EA
P0069143400
2
DWG DPPPG-70189314 000 A 22-70189314 RL SFA5702 HOLDER COMPLETE
P0069145100 A 1 BACK WALL 22-70189315 2142.000 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00053979-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189315 000 A 22-70189315 RL SFA5702 BACK WALL
P0069145500 A 1 ROOF 22-70189318 2070.000 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10005191-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189318 000 A 22-70189318 RL SFA5702 ROOF

0075 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000752-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
2.000 EA LENGTH 3092
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70183868 000 A 22-70183868 RL SFA5702 HOLLOW SECTION
PE104319 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0080 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2 EN 10029 MM
323.888 KG SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 8*2000*4000
P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:
P0069145900 1 PLATE 22-70189320 178.000 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189320 000 A 22-70189320 RL SFA5702 SHEET METAL
PE110251 1 FLAT 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:
3

0110 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000753-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 4
CLASSIFICATION:
PE105898 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400 3000
CLASSIFICATION:
PE105898 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400 3000
CLASSIFICATION:
P0069146000 1 PLATE 22-70189321 43.400 KG 40 EA

0140 L X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400
P0069146100 1 PLATE 22-70189322 43.200 KG 40 EA

0145 L X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400
PE105898 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400 3000
4
CLASSIFICATION:
PE105898 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400 3000
CLASSIFICATION:
PE105898 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400 3000
CLASSIFICATION:
P0069146200 1 PLATE 22-70189323 27.500 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400

0190 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 4
CLASSIFICATION:

0200 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 4
5
CLASSIFICATION:

0210 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 4
CLASSIFICATION:

0220 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000754-000 S235JR EN 10210-2 MM
P0069143400 4
CLASSIFICATION:
PE104316 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:
PE104316 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:
6
PE104316 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:
PE104316 1 PLATE 1.000 KG 40 KG

P0069143400
CLASSIFICATION:

0270 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000752-000 S235JR DIN EN 10210-2 MM
4.000 EA LENGTH 913
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189324 000 A 22-70189324 RL SFA5702 HOLLOW SECTION
P0067646500 1 PLATE 22-70183892 0.200 KG 40 EA

0275 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007303-000 S235JR MM
4.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70183892 000 A 22-70183892 RL SFA5702 PLATE

2.000 EA
P0069143400
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0013951700 A 1 DOOR 20.000 KG 40 EA

0290 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003002-000 MM
1.000 EA TYPE WSS07.630.0055.010R
P0069143400
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: HORCH STAHLBAU RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 912621
7
REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: ZEICHNUNGSNUMMER: 102599-A
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0016354900 A 1 DOOR 20.000 KG 40 EA

0300 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003002-000 MM
1.000 EA TYPE WSS07.631.0055.010L
P0069143400
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: HORCH STAHLBAU RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 912621
REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: ZEICHNUNGSNUMMER: 102599-A
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0310 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001899-000 MM
4.000 EA TYPE / NOMINAL SIZE RINGBOCK 10,0T
P0069143400
SPE DPSTP-00000007 000 A RL RING TRESTLE WELDABLE VRBS-FIX
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: TUL TEC GESELLSCHAFT FUER RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: RINGBOCK SCHWEIßB. VRBS-FIX 10
REQUIRED PART MANUFACTURER: RUD ART:NR:7999021

0315 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001899-000 MM
2.000 EA TYPE / NOMINAL SIZE RINGBOCK-KANTE 10T
P0069143400
SPE DPSTP-00000008 000 A RL RING TRESTLE WELDABLE VRBK-FIX
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: TUL TEC GESELLSCHAFT FUER RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: RINGBOCK-KANTE VRBK-FIX-10T
REQUIRED PART MANUFACTURER: RUD ART.NR:7902256
P0020773900 1 SUPPORT BAR - 0.050 KG 40 EA

0320 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002929-000 MM
4.000 EA HEIGHT / LENGTH 14 80
P0069143400
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: STAUFF RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: TRAGSCHIENE 2 TS 14-1W3
P0020242800 1 SUPPORT BAR - 0.200 KG 40 EA

0330 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002929-000 MM
7.000 EA HEIGHT / LENGTH 14 200
P0069143400
8
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: STAUFF RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: TRAGSCHIENE 2 TS 14-1W3
P0069146400 A 1 FOOT 22-70189325 90.600 KG 40 EA

0350 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00020911-000 MM
3.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189325 000 A 22-70189325 RL SFA5702 BRACKET
P0069146500 A 1 FOOT 22-70189326 151.000 KG 40 EA

0355 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00020911-000 MM
3.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189326 000 A 22-70189326 RL SFA5702 BRACKET
P0050591500 A 1 HOLDER, COMPLETE 22-70130946 11.000 KG 40 EA

0360 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000643-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70130946 000 A 22-70130946 RL SFA5702 HOLDER
P0050593300 1 THREADED PIECE 22-70128327 0.900 KG 40 EA

0365 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023665-000 S235JR MM
2.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70128327 000 A 22-70128327 RL SFA5702 THREADED PIECE
P0069146700 A 1 HOLDER 22-70189328 12.600 KG 40 EA

0370 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000638-000 MM
6.000 EA
P0069143400
P0069146900 A 1 HOLDER 22-70189330 13.500 KG 40 EA

0380 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000638-000 MM
4.000 EA
P0069143400
40.000 EA Spannscheibe aus Pos 370 und 380
P0069143400 SPRING WASHER FROM POS 370 AND 380
40.000 EA Sechskantschrauben aus Pos 370 und 380
P0069143400 HEXAGON SCREWS FROM POS 370 AND 380
9

0410 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100938-000 MM
P0069143400
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069147000 1 FRAME 22-70189300 25.000 KG 40 EA

0420 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001778-000 S235JR MM
4.000 EA
P0069143400
DWG DPPPG-70189300 000 A 22-70189300 RL SFA5702 SEALING FRAME
1
DESCRIPTION: COOLER VENTING DEVICE TITLE ID: MKSFA5720-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70169056 000 A 22-SFA5720-70169056 RL SFA5720 COOLER VENTING AND DRAINING PIPE
CLASSIFICATION:
P00192751 1 PIPE 1.000 KG 40 KG

0010 R X X X X 0.0 1.4401 EDELSTAHL DIN EN 10088 MM
10.104 KG TYPE / OUTER DIAMETER / WALLTHICKNESS DIN10217-7 18
P0069147100 1,0
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: SEPPELFRICKE/TECTITE RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 4670503 (DN15 18X1,0)
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: XPRESS EDELSTAHLROHR
PE123372 1 ELBOW SIEHEINT.VERMERK 0.050 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00073785-000 TECTITE MM
P0069147100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0026899700 1 BEND O.Z. 0.200 KG 40 EA

0025 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007815-000 MM
2.000 EA TYPE / DIAMETER TS040,BOGEN45°I/A 18
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: SEPPELFRICKE RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: MODELL-NR.:TS04018

RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: TS040, BOGEN 45° I/A
P0018307600 1 DOUBLE NIPPLE 0.400 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10005363-000 EDELSTAHL MM
4.000 EA TYPE R1/2
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: ESSKA RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: DN1212KES000

RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: DOPPELNIPPELVA-R1/2-R1/2
2
P0012349200 1 UNION 0.200 KG 40 EA

4.000 EA TYPE RP1/2
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: SEPPELFRICKE RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 21110044 (EF330 15X1/2)
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: VERSCHRAUBUNG FLACHDICHTEND
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0019816500 1 TRANSITION PIECE O.Z. 0.200 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00068870-000 MM
8.000 EA TYPE / DIAMETER TS243G/ÜBERGANGSNIPPEL 18X1/2"
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: SEPPELFRICKE RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: MODELL-NR.:TS243G1812

RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: TS 243 G, ÜBERGANGSNIPPEL I/AG
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0020768300 1 BLOCK CLAMP - 0.200 KG X 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101079-000 SMG 218/18 PA GD-AS M W5 MM
20.000 EA DIAMETER 2XØ18
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: STAUFF RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: SMG 218/18 PA GD-AS M W5
P0012349400 1 BALL VALVE 0.800 KG 40 EA

4.000 EA
P0069147100
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: Göttgens GmbH RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: TYP 820 RP1/2
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE123375 1 DISASSEMBLY TOOL SIEHEINT.VERMERK 0.050 KG 40 EA

0080 L X X X X X 0.0 TECTITE MM
P0069147100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
3
PE123376 1 TOOL SIEHEINT.VERMERK 0.050 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X X 0.0 TECTITE MM
1.000 EA
P0069147100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1.000 EA Gewinde abdichten mit P00018914
P0069147100 (Gewindedichtschnur)
Seal the thread with P00018914
1
MATERIAL: P0026577600 REVISION: F EFFECTIVE: 2020-01-08 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: BRUSH CARRIER COMPLETE TITLE ID: MKBCC0000-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 1-BCC0000-00001424 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 540,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-00001424 000 C RL BRUSH CARRIER COMPLETE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1.000 EA Aenderungen / CHANGES
P0026577600 Index F:
- Pos.500/510 hinzugefügt / IT.500/510
ADDED
P0011262900 C 1 BRUSH HOLDER O.Z. 75.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0100-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0100-000
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE251855 D 1 brush carrier assessories 1-BCC0300-251855 115.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0300-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0300-000
P0026577600
DWG 1-5820-251855 000 D 1-BCC0300-251855 RL BRUSH CARRIER EQUIPMENT (DIVIDED)
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE286154 B 1 BRUSH OD 0.010 KG D 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0400-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0400-000
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2
PE260608 B 1 BRUSH HOLDER BOLT 18.400 KG Z 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0200-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0200-000
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0060205500 C 1 BRUSH GEAR COVER 22-70159791 280.000 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0500-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0500-000
P0026577600
DWG DPPPG-70159791 000 A 22-70159791 RL COVER BRUSH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1.000 EA Von Pos. 40
P0026577600 Bürstenbolzen innen
1.000 EA von Pos. 40
P0026577600 Bürstenbolzen außen
PE263436 C 1 assembly cover plates 2-BCC0600-263436 6.000 KG Z 40 EA

0080 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0600-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0600-000
P0026577600
DWG 2-5815-263436 000 E 2-BCC0600-263436 RL ASSEMBLY COVER PLATES
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE403125 E 1 ADAPTER CABLE CURRENT EXCITER 3-273657 15.000 KG Z 40 EA

0085 L X X X X X 0.0 MKBCC0001-000 MM
1.000 EA MKBCC0001-000
P0026577600
DWG 3-273657 000 D 3-BCC0001-273657 RL ADAPTER
INTERNAL COMMENT:
3
PE262042 A 1 PLATE WITH RING HALF 4-BCC0000-262042 7.300 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
1.000 EA
P0026577600
DWG 4-262042 000 B 4-BCC0000-262042 RL PLATE WITH RING HALF
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0100 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
1.000 EA
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0110 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
1.000 EA
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0120 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
1.000 EA
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE225769 1 THREADED ROD 4-225769 1.200 KG 40 EA

0130 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023648-000 ST37-2 EN 17100 MM
2.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M20X465
P0026577600
DWG 4-225769 000 A RL THREADED ROD
P0016307300 1 PIPE 0.900 KG 40 EA

0140 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001937-000 ST35.8-I DIN 2448 MM
4.000 EA LENGTH/ID/OD 166 25
P0026577600 48,3
4
PE103885 1 WASHER 21 0.011 KG X 40 EA

P0026577600

0170 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
4.000 EA THREAD M20
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE228716 1 STROMSCHIENE 4-228716 8.300 KG 40 EA

0180 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100801-000 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) D680*8
P0026577600
DWG 4-228716 000 B 4-BCC0000-228716 RL BUS BAR 1, BRUSH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE228717 1 STROMSCHIENE 4-BCC0000-228717 8.300 KG 40 EA

0190 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100801-000 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) D680*8
P0026577600
DWG 4-228717 000 B 4-BCC0000-228717 RL BUS BAR 2, BRUSH ASSEMBLY
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE110227 1 HEXAGON CAP SCREW & ISO4017 0.240 KG 40 EA

0200 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 J3A MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE110228 1 WASHER 0.014 KG X 40 EA

P0026577600
5
PE101131 1 WASHER 0.042 KG X 40 EA

P0026577600
PE106935 1 WASHER 31 0.026 KG X 40 EA

P0026577600

0240 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 8673 A2B MM
8.000 EA THREAD M30*1,5
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0250 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0260 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002381-000 X5CRNI18-10 EN10259 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE113235 1 TWIN NUT 4-113235 0.115 KG X 40 EA

0270 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101575-000 X5CRNI18-10 4-113235 MM
P0026577600
DWG 4-113235 000 B RL Zwillingsmutter
INTERNAL COMMENT:
6
P0055758800 1 SPRING WASHER BN_208012 0.010 KG X 40 EA

0280 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000157-000 FEDERSTAHL GEOMET MM
4.000 EA TYPE 16 VSK
P0026577600

0290 L X X X X 0.0 8.8 609501 A2B MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE114482 1 WASHER 0.010 KG X 40 EA

0300 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 A2 DIN 432 MM
P0026577600

0310 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002092-000 ISO 7090 MM
P0026577600
PE108026 1 TAPER PIN 0.000 KG X 40 EA

0320 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000962-000 9SMNPB28K DIN 258 MM
2.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 16*100
P0026577600

0330 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
2.000 EA THREAD M10
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
- zu Pos. 480!
7

0340 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE262044 1 compensation shim 4-503964 0.400 KG 40 EA

0350 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) T=0,5
P0026577600
DWG 4-503964 000 B RL compensation shim
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0360 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) T=0,5
P0026577600
DWG 4-503965 000 B 4-BCC0000-503965 RL compensation shim
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0370 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
2.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) T=1
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0380 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
8

0390 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0400 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 DC01 EN 10029 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE434452 A 1 compensation shim 4-503964 4.000 KG 40 EA

0410 L X X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 S235JRG2 EN 10027 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0420 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00004180-000 S235JRG2 EN 10027 MM
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE106307 1 RUBBERPLATE 0.000 KG X 40 M

2.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 12*20*101-024
P0026577600

1.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 50G-TUBE
P0026577600
9
SPE DPQD-00007578 000 A PE104817 KLEBER PATTEX PX RL

SPE DPQD-00008589 000 A BA PE104817 PATTEX KRAFTKLEBER RL
SPE DPQD-00008590 000 A SDB PE104817 KLEBER PATTEX RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE136555 1 INDICATION PLATE 4-136555 0.030 KG 40 EA

0450 L X X X X 0.0 ALUMINIUM ELOXIERT MM
1.000 EA
P0026577600
DWG 4-136555 000 A RL INFORMATION SIGN

1.000 EA
P0026577600

1.000 EA
P0026577600

1.000 EA
P0026577600
PE119430 1 RIVET 0.003 KG 40 EA

0490 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00045538-000 ENAW-5754 DIN 7337 MM
16.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) A4*8
P0026577600
PE104804 1 RUBBER PROFILE 0.050 KG X 40 DM

70.000 DM SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 504-001
P0026577600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Pos.170 aus Abdeckhaube Bürstenapparat
POS.170 FROM BRUSH GEAR COVER
10

3.000 EA ADDITIONAL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 50G-TUBE
P0026577600
SPE DPQD-00007578 000 A PE104817 KLEBER PATTEX PX RL
SPE DPQD-00008589 000 A BA PE104817 PATTEX KRAFTKLEBER RL
SPE DPQD-00008590 000 A SDB PE104817 KLEBER PATTEX RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
Pos.180 aus Abdeckhaube Bürstenapparat
POS.180 FROM BRUSH GEAR COVER
1
MATERIAL: PE403125 REVISION: E EFFECTIVE: 2013-05-13 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: ADAPTER CABLE CURRENT EXCITER TITLE ID: MKBCC0001-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE: Z
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG 3-273657 000 D 3-BCC0001-273657 RL ADAPTER
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE403126 A 1 ADAPTER 3-BCC0001-403126 3.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003664-000 MM
2.000 EA
PE403125
DWG 3-403126 000 C 3-BCC0001-403126 RL ADAPTER
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
PE403125
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
6.000 EA THREAD M20
PE403125
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE111489 1 Washer & SN62501 0.046 KG X 40 EA

0040 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 S355J0 ZN5//CN//T0 MM
24.000 EA INNER DIAMETER / OUTER DIAMETER / THICKNESS (LENGTH) 21 48
PE403125 4
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2
PE106576 1 CLAMPING DISK 0.020 KG X 40 EA

0050 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00060150-000 FST DIN 6796 A2B MM
PE403125
PE104477 1 WASHER 0.015 KG X 40 EA

0060 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ISO 7090 A2B MM
PE403125

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 8.8 609501 A2B MM
PE403125
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008614900 1 DISC DIN9021 0.050 KG X 40 EA

0080 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ZN5//CN//T0 MM
8.000 EA NOMINAL DIAMETER 17
PE403125
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE105663 1 clamping disk 0.016 KG X 40 EA

0090 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00060150-000 FST DIN 6796 A2B MM
PE403125

0100 L X X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ST ISO 7090 A2B MM
PE403125
1
MATERIAL: PE263436 REVISION: C EFFECTIVE: 2018-11-05 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT: MM
DESCRIPTION: assembly cover plates TITLE ID: MKBCC0600-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE: Z
DOCUMENT-STD/GRAPHIC: 2-BCC0600-263436 VARIANT: NET WEIGHT: 6,000 KG CAL. WEIGHT: 0,000 KG SER. REQ.: SER. INH.:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG 2-5815-263436 000 E 2-BCC0600-263436 RL ASSEMBLY COVER PLATES
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE263437 1 COVER PLATE 4-BCC0600-263437 2.000 KG 40 EA

2.000 EA
PE263436
DWG 4-263437 000 B 4-BCC0600-263437 RL COVER PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0020 L X X X & R M1 1.0 ZZ10002092-000 ISO 7090 MM
PE263436

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 A2B MM
PE263436
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE101676 1 Jointing compound Cenusil 0.500 KG X E 40 EA

0040 L X X X & R M2 1.0 ZZ00059513-000 CENUSIL/OTTOSEAL S115 MM
1.000 EA COLOUR TRANSPARENT
PE263436
SPE DPQD-00007555 000 A PE101676 CENUSIL RL
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: OTTOSEAL S115

1
MATERIAL: P0002066900 REVISION: D EFFECTIVE: 2018-08-15 BAS.QTY: 1.000 REQ.QTY: 1.000 PLANT: APPL.: ZEN1 X-STATUS: 40 BASE UOM: ST ENG. UNIT:
DESCRIPTION: GROUNDING BRUSH TITLE ID: MKSFA4500-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK: SIZE/DIM. DESC.: DIAMETER SIZE/DIM 1: D=425MM
SIZE/DIM 2: BEARING=35 SIZE/DIM 3: CCW SIZE/DIM 4:
SIZE/DIM 5: SIZE/DIM 6: HEAD TYPE:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70167687 000 A 22-70167687 RL ASSEMBLY EARTH BRUSH
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1.000 EA Index D:
P0002066900 Stückliste nach neuer Zeichnung
angepasst
Sechskantschraube + Scheibe entfernt
BOM adapted to new drawing
Hexagon screw + washer removed
PE130001 1 BRUSH HOLDER BOLT 0.050 KG Z 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 MM
2.000 EA A=DIM1/ B=DIM2/ C=DIM3/ ETC GEWINDE/THREAD:M10 DURCHMESSER/DIAMETER:16MM
P0002066900 LÄNGE_KUNSTSTOFF/LENGHT:30MM BEZEICHNUNG:BK_16/35
DWG 4-502289 000 - RL BUERSTENHALTER BOLZEN
PE113413 1 Brush holder 06.00.0468.00 0.950 KG F 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 MESSING/BRASS MM
2.000 EA
P0002066900
DWG DPPPG-70040343 000 A 22-SFA4500-70040343 RL SFA4500 GROUNDING BRUSH HOLDER 2P
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0002946000 1 2-LAYER CONTACT BRUSH 22-70185255 B 0.020 KG F 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00076310-000 MM
2.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 20*8*32 AUSFÜHRUNG_B/VARIATION_B
P0002066900
DWG DPPPG-70185255 000 B 22-70185255 RL GROUNDING BRUSH
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: MERSEN RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 1027296 RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: KOHLEBUERSTE
REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: EMT 513-005
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2
P0002947100 1 2-LAYER CONTACT BRUSH 22-70185255 A 0.020 KG F 40 EA

0035 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00076310-000 MM
2.000 EA A=DIM1 / B=DIM2 / C=DIM3 20*8*32 AUSFÜHRUNG_A/VARIATION_A
P0002066900
DWG DPPPG-70185255 000 B 22-70185255 RL GROUNDING BRUSH
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: MERSEN RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 1027297 RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER CAT.DESC: KOHLEBUERSTE
REQUIRED MANUF.PART ID NUMBER: EMT 513-005
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE118914 1 CABLE TERMINAL LUG 0.010 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100911-000 CU-ETP DIN 46237 SE MM
2.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 6-2,5
P0002066900
PE116076 1 Single conductor UL-CSA-HAR 4 GNYE & SIEHINT.VERMERK 0.010 KG 40 M

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101030-000 CU-ETP MM
2.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 4MM2;AWG12;GNYE
P0002066900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE417685 1 SHEET 3-417685 2.500 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10003427-000 S235JRG2 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 445*151*15FÜRD=425
P0002066900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE112665 1 SOCKET HEAD SCREW DIN7984 0.030 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00075858-000 8.8 609501 MM
P0002066900
3
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: ANCHORING TITLE ID: MKSFA4600-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70086152 000 B 22-SFA4600-70086152 RL SFA4600 ANCHORING 2P/ 108/ 115/ Tisch
CLASSIFICATION:
PE234137 1 PRIMARY BEARING PLATE 4-234137 24.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 S235JRG2 EN 10029 MM
P0069583000
DWG 4-234137 000 - RL ERSTAUFLAGEPLATTE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE212322 1 LEVELING PLATE 3.500 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 S235JRG2 EN10029 MM
P0069583000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0033185100 1 SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLT DIN797(MASSABWEICHUNG) 32.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000384-000 C35E MM
16.000 EA OUTER THREAD DIAMETER / LENGTH / INNER THREAD DIAMETER M42 2895
P0069583000 M8
BASIC DATA TEXT:

Schaft frei von Rost und Zunder,
mit Rostschutzfarbe gestrichen !
Gewinde mit Korrosionsschutzöl
konserviert und mit Schutznetz bezogen !
"x" nach DIN76 - Ausführung "lang";
"z1" nach DIN78 - Ausführung "Ks"
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE253442 A 1 spherical washer C43 / conical seat D49 0.700 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001056-000 DIN 6319 MM
16.000 EA
P0069583000
2
PE122203 1 HEXAGON NUT ISO4032 0.652 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 MM
P0069583000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0009454700 1 SET SCREW DPPPG-70019473 0.000 LB 40 EA

0060 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023655-000 8.8 609501 ÄHNLICH ISO 4026 A2B MM
24.000 EA THREAD/LENGTH M42X1,5 100
P0069583000
DWG DPPPG-70019473 000 A 4-70019473 RL Gewindestift M42x1.5
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0020656200 1 SHEET 0.500 KG 40 EA

0090 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ10001687-000 PTFE MM
4.000 EA LENGTH/THICKNESS/WIDTH 400 400
P0069583000 6
PE230418 1 ANCHOR SHEET 4-230418 20.800 KG 40 EA

0100 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00001861-000 RST37-2N EN 10029 MM
16.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 280X280X30;D=50
P0069583000
DWG 4-230418 000 - RL SHEET
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104417 1 sealing strip 1.000 KG X 40 EA

0110 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00012453-000 MM
30.000 EA LENGTH 100-BREITE;1ROLLE=10M
P0069583000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE112167 1 grease Molykote 1000 1.000 KG X 40 KG

0120 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00018989-000 MOLYKOTE_1000 MM
1.000 KG
P0069583000
SPE DPQD-00007418 000 B PE112167 FETT MOLYKOTEPASTE 10 RL
SPE DPQD-00008127 000 A PE112167 FETT MOLYKOTEPASTE RL
3
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE110549 1 underfill mortar Pagel V14/10 25.000 KG X 40 EA

0150 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101612-000 V14/10_PAGEL-UNTERSTOPFMOERTEL MM
2.000 EA
P0069583000
SPE DPQD-00007414 000 A PE110549 UNTERSTOPFMÖRTEL PAGE RL
SPE DPQD-00007549 000 A PE110549 UNTERSTOPFMÖRTEL RL
SPE DPQD-00008124 000 A PE110549 UNTERSTOPF-MÖRTEL RL
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0170 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN5//AN//T0 MM
P0069583000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
ITEM TEXT :
- zum Ausrichten der Pos. 10; nach
Aushärtung der Mörtels, vor Aufsetzen
des Generators sind die Schrauben zu
entfernen!
- to organizing the pos. 10; after set
that of concrete, before touchdowns of
the generator, the screws are to be
removed!
1
DESCRIPTION: GROUNDING CONNECTIONS TITLE ID: MKSFA7210-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70055933 000 A 22-SFA7210-70055933 RL SFA7210 ERDUNGSANSCHLUESSE
CLASSIFICATION:
PE127679 1 MULTINORM-EINZELADER SIEHEINT.VERMERK 0.000 KG 40 M

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101030-000 CU-ETP MM
3.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 120
P0069296600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE127680 1 ROHRKABELSCHUH SIEHEINTERNERVERMERK 2.000 G 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 MM
12.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) KRF/120/12
P0069296600
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE111523 1 HEAT SHRINKABLE TUB. 0.200 KG 40 M

0030 L X X X X 0.0 POLYOLEFIN MM
4.000 M SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) RNF300039/13-0
P0069296600
ITEM TEXT :
Pos.: 30 zur Isolierung von Pos.: 20 und
50
P0002737200 1 Multinorm-Einzelader 2.550 KG 40 M

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10004285-000 KUPFER MM
5.000 M SUPPLIER ORDER NUMBER 240
P0069296600
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: LAPP KABEL RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 4521009
INTERNAL COMMENT:
2

P0003091200 1 ROHRKABELSCHUH - 0.040 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101329-000 MM
20.000 EA SUPPLIER ORDER NUMBER 712F12MS
P0069296600
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: KLAUKE RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: 712F12MS
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0069299400 A 1 STROMBAND STROMBAND 6.070 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101483-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1/ B=DIM2/ C=DIM3/ ETC QUERSCHNITT_600MM² KONTAKTHÜLSENVERSILBERT!
P0069296600 LÄNGE_1300MM INKL.MONTAGEMATERIAL
ITEM TEXT :
Stromband von Grundrahmen zu Konsole.
CURRENT BAND FROM BASE FRAME TO BRACKET.
P0061224300 A 1 STROMBAND STROMBAND 2.000 KG 40 EA

0070 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00101483-000 MM
1.000 EA A=DIM1/ B=DIM2/ C=DIM3/ ETC QUERSCHNITT_600MM² KONTAKTHÜLSENVERSILBERT!
P0069296600 LÄNGE_370MM INKL.MONTAGEMATERIAL
ITEM TEXT :
Stromband von Abdeckhaube zu Konsole.
CURRENT BAND FROM COVER TO BRACKET.
1.000 EA Pos: 10, 20, 30 beziehen sich auf
P0069296600 Zeichnung: DPPPG-70114969,
DPPPG-70135849<(>,<)>
4-6496-508563 und 3-6496-508565
ITEM. 10, 20, 30 ACCORDING TO
DRAWING: DPPPG-70114969, DPPPG-70135849
<(>,<)>
4-6496-508563 AND 3-6496-508565
Pos: 30, 40, 50 beziehen sich auf
Zeichnung: DPPPG-70055933
ITEM. 30, 40, 50 ACCORDING TO
DRAWING: DPPPG-70055933
Pos.60 und Pos.70 beziehen sich auf:
Zeichnung: DPPPG-70173106
3
ITEM. 60 AND 70 ACCORDING TO

DRAWING: DPPPG-70173106
1 DWG DPPPG-70135849 000 A 22-70135849 RL GROUNDING EXTRA COVER

0110 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0069296600
1 DWG DPPPG-70114969 000 A 22-70114969 RL GROUNDING COVER EXCITER

0120 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0069296600
1 DWG DPPPG-70173106 000 B 22-70173106 RL SFA7210 GROUNDING CONNECTION ASSEMBLY BR

0130 D X .0 ITEM TEXT :
1.000 EA Stücklistenposition 60 ist das Stromband
P0069296600 von Grundrahmen zu Konsole.
BOM ITEM 60 IS THE CURRENT BAND FROM
BASE FRAME TO BRACKET.
Stücklistenposition 70 ist das Stromband
von Abdeckhaube zu Konsole.
PARTS LIST ITEM 70 IS THE CURRENT BAND
FROM COVER TO BRACKET.
1 DWG 3-6496-508565 000 A RL ERDUNGSANSCHLUESSE MTB

0140 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0069296600
1 DWG 4-6496-508563 000 A OB ERDUNGSANSCHLUESSE ERREGER

0150 D X .0
1.000 EA
P0069296600
1
DESCRIPTION: SHIPPING BRACE STATOR TITLE ID: ZZ10005463-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK: SIZE/DIM. DESC.: TYPE SIZE/DIM 1: 18°
SIZE/DIM 2:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70186970 000 A 22-70186970 RL STA1100 SHIPPING BRACE STATOR
CLASSIFICATION:
P0009659500 1 RETAINING PLATE 3-70020157 20.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ02069191-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
4.000 EA
P0068384400
DWG DPPPG-70020157 000 A 3-70020157 RL STA1100 SP LOCK PLATE
P0009332700 1 RETAINING PLATE 3-70019004 18.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ02069191-000 S235JR EN 10029 MM
4.000 EA
P0068384400
DWG DPPPG-70019004 000 C 3-70019004 RL STA1110 SP LOCK PLATE
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE120191 1 HEXAGON SCREW 0.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002283-000 8.8 609501 ISO 4017 A3C MM
P0068384400
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE106378 1 HEXAGON SOCKET SET SCREW ISO4027 0.011 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10006270-000 ST A2B MM
16.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M10*25-OSPAE
P0068384400
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00030663-000 MM
P0068384400
2
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: SLIDE PLATE TITLE ID: ZZ00054053-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70188440 000 A 22-70188440 RL Rutschblech
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE450946 1 PLATE 0.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 X5CRNI18-10 EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) BL 3X500XL; L N. ANGEBOT
P0068687900
PE450946 1 PLATE 0.000 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 X5CRNI18-10 EN 10029 MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) BL 3X500XL; L N. ANGEBOT
P0068687900
PE450947 1 TAPE 2.200 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00005215-000 PEGULAN MM
1.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) BAHN 2X500XL; L S. HZCHNG.
P0068687900

P0068687900
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: SLIDE SHOE TITLE ID: ZZ00024063-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70188421 000 A 22-70188421 RL Gleitschuh
CLASSIFICATION:
P0068682200 1 DISC 15.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ02057396-000 PA6 MM
1.000 EA LENGTH 63X500X554
P0068687100
PE116596 1 SHEET 1.000 KG 40 KG

0020 R X X X X 0.0 ZZ00047971-000 PTFE VIRGINAL MM
3.158 KG SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) 6*1200*1200MM
P0068687100
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104946 1 THREAD INSERT 0.006 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000529-000 ST*H SN 60685 MM
25.000 EA THREAD M6
P0068687100
PE104461 1 COUNTERSUNK HEADSCREW ISO10642 0.005 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10002295-000 8.8 609501 MM
P0068687100
STD D-EST-00029517 EN F ISO 898-1 RL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF FASTENERS MADE
STD D-EST-00044436 DE E DIN EN ISO 898-1 RL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF FASTENERS MADE
STD D-EST-00118404 EN D ISO 10642 RL FASTENERS - HEXAGON SOCKET COUNTERSUNK H
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE104751 1 GRISUTEN HOSE 0.002 KG 40 M

0050 L X X X X X 0.0 MM
17.000 M
P0068687100
2
1
DESCRIPTION: SLIDING PEDESTAL TITLE ID: ZZ00024039-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70188420 000 A 22-70188420 RL SLIDING PEDESTAL
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0068681900 A 1 BLOCK,COMPLETE 22-70188419 65.700 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00007638-000 MM
1.000 EA
P0068682000
DWG DPPPG-70188419 000 A 22-70188419 RL Klotz komplett
PE459090 A 1 bow complett 3-459090 2.800 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100256-000 S235JRG2 DIN EN 10025 MM
4.000 EA
P0068682000
DWG 3-459090 000 A RL BRACKET
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE459094 A 1 bow complett 3-459094 13.000 KG 40 EA

0030 L X X X X X 0.0 ZZ00100256-000 S235JRG2 DIN EN 10025 MM
2.000 EA
P0068682000
DWG 3-459094 000 A RL BRACKET
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE404608 1 SHIM 8.700 KG 40 EA

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00005853-000 E-CU57F20 DIN 1751 MM
1.000 EA LENGTH BL5X300X655
P0068682000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
PE459096 1 THREADED ROD 4-459096 0.700 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023648-000 S235JR MM
4.000 EA SIZE/DIMENSION (FROM LEGACY SYSTEM) M16X470
P0068682000
DWG 4-459096 000 A RL THREADED ROD
2

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057849-000 8.8 609501 ZN8//CN//T0 MM
P0068682000
INTERNAL COMMENT:

P0068682000

0080 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
P0068682000
INTERNAL COMMENT:
1
DESCRIPTION: SETTLING SKIP FOR BODY TITLE ID: ZZ00100061-000 PROJECT ID: ANCHOR ID: SERVICE CODE:
B.TRACK:
DOCUMENT LINKS:
DWG DPPPG-70051058 000 B 22-70051058 RL SUPPORT BLOCK
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0007962100 1 BLOCK 3-SFA4900-70013903 90.000 KG 40 EA

0010 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ10000996-000 BUCHE MM
1.000 EA LENGTH 300X460X1300
P0020163300
DWG DPPPG-70013903 000 A 3-SFA7001-70013903 RL PAD
PE132341 1 THREADED STUD BOLT DIN976-1 0.560 KG 40 EA

0020 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00023550-000 MM
6.000 EA THREAD / LENGTH / TYPE M16 3608.8
P0020163300 B
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0008614900 1 DISC DIN9021 0.050 KG X 40 EA

12.000 EA NOMINAL DIAMETER 17
P0020163300
INTERNAL COMMENT:

0040 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00057841-000 8 ISO 4032 A2B MM
P0020163300
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0015572200 1 CARRYING HANDLE - 0.200 KG 40 EA

0050 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00067547-000 EDELSTAHL 1.4301 DIN3136 VERZINKT,BLANK MM
2.000 EA LENGTH KISTENGRIFF_105MM,BLAUVERZI
P0020163300
2
INTERNAL COMMENT:
P0016430800 1 WOOD SCREW 0.010 KG 40 EA

0060 L X X X X 0.0 ZZ00026611-000 MM
8.000 EA LENGTH D=5,L=70
P0020163300
RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER NAME: ADOLF WÜRTH GMBH & CO.KG RECOMMENDED SUPPLIER PART ID NO.: ART.NR.017005070

0-76150-BB1750C-21 Geno Installation Manual (1) Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0-76150-BB1750C-21 Geno Installation Manual (1) Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turbogenerator Noor Energy 1 (PT1) | EG000425

Project name Noor Energy 1 (PT1)

Generator type SGen5-100A-2P

Order no. 3000021389

US and EU Export Controls

Technology Classification: ECCN: EAR99 AL: N US-Content: No

Turbogenerator | Installation Manual Prepared: Zwi 02-2020

Title-Page .......................................................................................................... 4.7-2001-EG000425 0220

Table of Contents .............................................................................................. 4.7-2002-EG000425 /1...3 0220

1.0. General ................................................................................................ 4.7-2010-0001 0900

2.0 General Safety Instructions .............................................................. 4.0-0100-0101 /1...10 1115

3.0. Generator Preinstallation .................................................................. 4.7-2100-EG000425 /1...4 0220

4.0. Generator Installation

5.0. Measuring Charts

6.0. General Handling Guidelines

7.0. Manufacturing Specifications

9.0. Neutral Point Cubicle

10.0. Cooling System

Cooler Venting and Draining Pipes ...................................................... DPPPG – 70169056 0918

11.0. Excitation System (Brush Gear)

12.0. Rotor Grounding System

13.0. Vibration Monitoring

14.0. Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................. 52 sh. 0220

15.0. Generator Checklist (2-Pole Generator) for Readiness Reviews

Enclosure ....................................................................................................... DPPPG – 70184942 /003

TE* | EE* - (Turbine End | Exciter End)

General Safety Instructions

9 Environment Protection and Waste Disposal ................................................... 6

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

Such kind of information can be complemented by the pictograph Information.

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

General warning sign

General prohibition sign

General mandatory sign

Ear protection required

3 Proper Usage of the Generator

The function of a generator is to convert rotating mechanical energy to electrical

To ensure normal and trouble-free operation of the generator, it is necessary to

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

 Note safety data sheet when using hazardous material.

 In case that equipment, protection systems or instrumentation and control com-

 If work is done on several systems at the same time, it must be coordinated in a

 The operating instructions must always be kept on hand.

With regard to personnel working on the generator, compliance must be ensured

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

 Staff must be trained on the basis of the manufacturer technical documentation.

 Personnel requiring or undergoing training must only be allowed to perform

6 Lifting and Working Posture

8 Spare Parts and Special Tools

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

9 Environment Protection and Waste Disposal

10 Safety Instructions Regarding Special Operating Phases

10.1 Shipment, Transport and Storage

 For transportation of heavy machine parts in buildings a sufficient load-capacity

 Prevent generator rotor from rope-induced damage by using suitable cushions at

 Carefully check components for evidence of damage, moisture and corrosion on

 Take appropriate measures to protect and preserve the generator at standstill.

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

The following safety instructions apply during generator start-up:

 All mechanical and hydraulic components as well as the generator protection

 Before start-up/ re-commissioning all components must be checked for safety

 Obligatory documentation requirement: Prepare start-up record. Record all oper-

Turbogenerator | Operating and Maintenance Manual 4.0-0100-0110 | 1115 en

 Obligatory documentation requirement: Record requisite checks during genera-

Note safety data sheet when using hazardous material.

In case that equipment, protection systems or instrumentation and control com-

If work is done on several systems at the same time, it must be coordinated in a

The operating instructions must always be kept on hand.

Staff must be trained on the basis of the manufacturer technical documentation.

Personnel requiring or undergoing training must only be allowed to perform

For transportation of heavy machine parts in buildings a sufficient load-capacity

Prevent generator rotor from rope-induced damage by using suitable cushions at

Carefully check components for evidence of damage, moisture and corrosion on

Take appropriate measures to protect and preserve the generator at standstill.

All mechanical and hydraulic components as well as the generator protection

Before start-up/ re-commissioning all components must be checked for safety

Obligatory documentation requirement: Prepare start-up record. Record all oper-

Obligatory documentation requirement: Record requisite checks during genera-

Operating personnel must be notified before starting any maintenance work.

Parts which are undergoing inspection or repair activities must be de-energized.

It must be ensured that the generator cannot be switched on if somebody is

The removal of safeguards must be avoided. It is only allowed when it is required

Disconnect cable connections to electrical devices and ground terminals before

Obligatory documentation requirement: Record requisite checks during and fol-

Local requirements regarding work on electrical installations must be strictly

The surface of anti-condensation heaters switched on automatically during